Part 1926 29 1 U.S

Home , Tetrafluorohydrazine

eDt 8JN9 24 u 2 99Jt131 O000Fm001Ft89 ft89 :SM\810.X 810 PsN:183110F 183110F Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX Sfmt8091 Fmt8091 Frm00001 PO00000 Jkt183110 02:42Jul22, 1999 VerDate 1899 code of federal regulations Labor the FederalRegister as aSpecialEditionof Administration National ArchivesandRecords the OfficeofFederalRegister Published by Ancillaries With AS OFJULY1,1999 AND FUTUREEFFECT OF GENERALAPPLICABILITY A CODIFICATIONOFDOCUMENTS CONTAINING Revised asofJuly1,1999 PART 1926 29 1 U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE WASHINGTON : 1999

For sale by U.S. Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents, Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402–9328

VerDate 1899 02:42 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00002 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX 183110F PsN: 183110F

?ii Table of Contents

Page Explanation ...... v

Title 29:

Subtitle B—Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued):

Chapter XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor (Continued) ...... 5

Finding Aids:

Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference ...... 597

Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ...... 603

Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ...... 621

Redesignation Table ...... 631

List of CFR Sections Affected ...... 633

iii

VerDate 1899 18:02 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00003 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110F Cite this Code: CFR

To cite the regulations in this volume use title, part and section number. Thus, 29 CFR 1926.1 refers to title 29, part 1926, section 1.

VerDate 1899 02:42 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00004 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX 183110F PsN: 183110F Explanation

The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into parts covering specific regulatory areas. Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows: Title 1 through Title 16...... as of January 1 Title 17 through Title 27 ...... as of April 1 Title 28 through Title 41 ...... as of July 1 Title 42 through Title 50...... as of October 1 The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume. LEGAL STATUS The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510). HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to determine the latest version of any given rule. To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date (in this case, July 1, 1999), consult the ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),’’ which is issued monthly, and the ‘‘Cumulative List of Parts Affected,’’ which appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule. EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Reg- ister since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cutoff date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following the text. OMB CONTROL NUMBERS The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96–511) requires Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information collection request.

VerDate 1899 15:47 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00005 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110F Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting requirements. OBSOLETE PROVISIONS Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before January 1, 1986, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949–1963, 1964–1972, or 1973–1985, published in seven separate volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 1986, a ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected’’ is published at the end of each CFR volume. INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force of law. What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which approval is based are: (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material published in the Federal Register. (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process. (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51. Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are listed in the Finding Aids at the end of this volume. What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed in the Finding Aids of this volume as an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington DC 20408, or call (202) 523–4534. CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR INDEX AND FINDING AIDS. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Statutory Authorities and Agency Rules (Table I). A list of CFR titles, chapters, and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in this volume. An index to the text of ‘‘Title 3—The President’’ is carried within that volume. The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index is based on a consolidation of the ‘‘Contents’’ entries in the daily Federal Reg- ister. A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.

VerDate 1899 02:42 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00006 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX 183110F PsN: 183110F REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the Code of Federal Regulations. INQUIRIES For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency’s name appears at the top of odd–numbered pages. For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202–523–5227 or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408. SALES The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call 202–512–1800, M–F, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202–512–2233, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, write to the Superintendent of Documents, Attn: New Orders, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250–7954. For GPO Customer Service call 202–512–1803. ELECTRONIC SERVICES The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, The United States Govern- ment Manual, the Federal Register, Public Laws, Weekly Compilation of Presi- dential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic format at www.access.gpo.gov/nara (‘‘GPO Access’’). For more information, contact Electronic Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Government Printing Office. Phone 202–512–1530, or 888–293–6498 (toll–free). E–mail, [email protected]. The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National Archives and Records Administration’s (NARA) World Wide Web site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect to NARA’s web site at www.nara.gov/fedreg. The NARA site also contains links to GPO Access.

RAYMOND A. MOSLEY, Director, Office of the Federal Register. July 1, 1999.

vii

VerDate 1899 15:47 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00007 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110F VerDate 1899 15:47 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00008 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110F THIS TITLE

Title 29—LABOR is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these volumes are arranged in the following order: parts 0–99, parts 100–499, parts 500–899, parts 900– 1899, parts 1900–1910.999, part 1910.1000–end, parts 1911–1925, part 1926, and part 1927 to end. The contents of these volumes represent all current regulations codified under this title as of July 1, 1999.

The OMB control numbers for title 29 CFR part 1910 appear in § 1910.8. For the convenience of the user, § 1910.8 appears in the Finding Aids section of the volume containing § 1910.1000 to the end.

Redesignation tables appear in the Finding Aids section of the eighth volume.

Subject indexes appear following the occupational safety and health standards (part 1910), and following the safety and health regulations for: Longshoring (part 1918), Gear Certification (part 1919), and Construction (part 1926).

For this volume, Linda L. Jones was Chief Editor. The Code of Federal Regula- tions publication program is under the direction of Frances D. McDonald, assisted by Alomha S. Morris.

VerDate 1899 02:42 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00009 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX 183110F PsN: 183110F x

VerDate 1899 02:42 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00010 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110F.XXX 183110F PsN: 183110F Title 29—Labor

(This book contains part 1926)

Part

SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED):

CHAPTER XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administra- tion, Department of Labor (Continued) ...... 1926

CROSS REFERENCES: Other regulations issued by the Department of Labor appear in 20 CFR chapters I, IV, V, VI and VII; 41 CFR chapters 50, 60, and 61; and 48 CFR chapter 29. For ‘‘Standards for a Merit System of Personnel Administration’’: See 5 CFR part 900, subpart F.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00002 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Subtitle B—Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued)

VerDate 1899 17:50 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00003 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00004 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T CHAPTER XVII—OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR—(Continued)

Part Page 1926 Safety and health regulations for construction ...... 7 Subject index to Part 1926—Safety and health regulations for construction ...... 582

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00005 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00006 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels. REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1926.62 Lead. 1926.64 Process safety management of high- Subpart A—General ly hazardous chemicals. 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and Sec. 1926.1 Purpose and scope. emergency response. 1926.2 Variances from safety and health 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction standards. of spray booths. 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. 1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment and health standards. 1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa- 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective perwork Reduction Act. equipment. 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. Subpart B—General Interpretations 1926.97—1926.98 [Reserved] 1926.100 Head protection. 1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1926.101 Hearing protection. 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act 1926.102 Eye and face protection. distinguished. 1926.103 Respiratory protection. 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards. 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets. 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types 1926.106 Working over or near water. of performance. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract part. Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. 1926.16 Rules of construction. Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection. Provisions 1926.151 Fire prevention. 1926.152 Flammable and combustible liq- 1926.20 General safety and health provi- uids. sions. 1926.21 Safety training and education. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas). 1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. [Reserved] 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.23 First aid and medical attention. part. 1926.24 Fire protection and prevention. 1926.25 Housekeeping. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades 1926.26 Illumination. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags. 1926.27 Sanitation. 1926.28 Personal protective equipment. 1926.201 Signaling. 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. 1926.202 Barricades. 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.31 Incorporation by reference. part. 1926.32 Definitions. 1926.33 Access to employee exposure and Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage, medical records. Use, and Disposal 1926.34 Means of egress. 1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. 1926.250 General requirements for storage. 1926.251 Rigging equipment for material Subpart D—Occupational Health and handling. Environmental Controls 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. 1926.50 Medical services and first aid. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power 1926.51 Sanitation. 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. 1926.300 General requirements. 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. 1926.301 Hand tools. 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. mists. 1926.304 Woodworking tools. 1926.56 Illumination. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw, 1926.57 Ventilation. and hydraulic. 1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.306 Air receivers. 1926.59 Hazard communication. 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap- 1926.60 Methylenedianiline. paratus.

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00007 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L—LIST OF TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS- 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. MANTLERS [RESERVED] 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L—DRAWINGS AND 1926.352 Fire prevention. ILLUSTRATIONS 1926.353 Ventilation and protection in welding, cutting, and heating. Subpart M—Fall Protection 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in way of preservative coatings. 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. Subpart K—Electrical 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria GENERAL and practices. 1926.400 Introduction. 1926.503 Training requirements. 1926.401 [Reserved] APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M—GUARDRAIL SYS- 1926.402 Applicability. TEMS 1926.403 General requirements. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M—PERSONAL FALL 1926.404 Wiring design and protection. ARREST SYSTEMS 1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M—POSITIONING DE- equipment for general use. VICE SYSTEMS 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M—SAMPLE FALL stallations. PROTECTION PLANS 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations. 1926.408 Special systems. Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, 1926.409—1926.415 [Reserved] Elevators, and Conveyors SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES 1926.550 Cranes and derricks. 1926.416 General requirements. 1926.551 Helicopters. 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists, 1926.418—1926.430 [Reserved] and elevators. 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists. SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND 1926.554 Overhead hoists. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.555 Conveyors. 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.432 Environmental deterioration of Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized equipment. Equipment, and Marine Operations 1926.433—1926.440 [Reserved] 1926.600 Equipment. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL 1926.601 Motor vehicles. EQUIPMENT 1926.602 Material handling equipment. 1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. 1926.442—1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.604 Site clearing. 1926.605 Marine operations and equipment. DEFINITIONS 1926.606 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart. part. Subpart P—Excavations Subpart L—Scaffolds 1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart. applicable to this subpart. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements. 1926.451 General requirements. 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys- 1926.452 Additional requirements applicable tems. to specific types of scaffolds. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P—SOIL CLASSIFICA- 1926.453 Aerial lifts. TION 1926.454 Training requirements. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P—SLOPING AND APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L—SCAFFOLD SPECI- BENCHING FICATIONS APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P—TIMBER SHORING APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—CRITERIA FOR DE- FOR TRENCHES TERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF PROVIDING APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P—ALUMINUM HY- SAFE ACCESS AND FALL PROTECTION FOR DRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P—ALTERNATIVES TO [RESERVED] TIMBER SHORING APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA- APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P—SELECTION OF TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS

VerDate 1899 16:49 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00008 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926

Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges— Construction electric blasting. 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. 1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.908 Use of detonating cord. applicable to this subpart. 1926.909 Firing the blast. 1926.701 General requirements. 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. 1926.702 Requirements for equipment and 1926.911 Misfires. tools. 1926.912 Underwater blasting. 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under crete. compressed air. 1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- part. tion operations. 1926.706 Requirements for masonry con- Subpart V—Power Transmission and struction. Distribution APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q—REFERENCES TO 1926.950 General requirements. SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 1926.951 Tools and protective equipment. 1926.952 Mechanical equipment. Subpart R—Steel Erection 1926.953 Material handling. 1926.750 Flooring requirements. 1926.954 Grounding for protection of em- 1926.751 Structural steel assembly. ployees. 1926.752 Bolting, riveting, fitting-up, and 1926.955 Overhead lines. plumbing-up. 1926.956 Underground lines. 1926.957 Construction in energized sub- Subpart S—Underground Construction, stations. 1926.958 External load helicopters. Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air 1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety straps, 1926.800 Underground construction. and lanyards. 1926.801 Caissons. 1926.960 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.802 Cofferdams. part. 1926.803 Compressed air. 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub- Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures; part. Overhead Protection APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S—DECOMPRESSION 1926.1000 Rollover protective structures TABLES (ROPS) for material handling equipment. 1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for Subpart T—Demolition rollover protective structures for des- 1926.850 Preparatory operations. ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders. and crawler tractors. 1926.852 Chutes. 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro- 1926.853 Removal of materials through floor tective structures, known as ROPS) for openings. wheel-type agricultural and industrial 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec- tractors used in construction. tions, and chimneys. 1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.855 Manual removal of floors. of agricultural and industrial tractors. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and material with equipment. Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders 1926.857 Storage. 1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.858 Removal of steel construction. applicable to this subpart. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition. 1926.1051 General requirements. 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives. 1926.1052 Stairways. 1926.1053 Ladders. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of 1926.1054—1926.1059 [Reserved] Explosives 1926.1060 Training requirements. 1926.900 General provisions. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X—LADDERS 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo- Subpart Y—Diving sives. GENERAL 1926.903 Underground transportation of explosives. 1926.1071 Scope and application. 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting 1926.1072 Definitions. agents. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting agents. 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00009 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted. 1926.1080 Safe practices manual. 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. EDITORIAL NOTE: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, 1926.1082 Procedures during dive. and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. OSHA reprinted without change the entire text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with cer- SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES tain General Industry Occupational Safety 1926.1084 SCUBA diving. and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. part 1910, which have been identified as also 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. applicable to construction work. This repub- 1926.1087 Liveboating. lication developed a single set of OSHA regulations for both labor and management EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS forces within the construction industry. 1926.1090 Equipment. Subpart A—General RECORDKEEPING

1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements. AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work 1926.1092 Effective date. Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y—EXAMPLES OF tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDI- (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s TIONS Order 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 1– APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y—GUIDELINES FOR 90 (55 FR 9033),), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as appli- SCIENTIFIC DIVING cable; 29 CFR part 1911.

Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous § 1926.1 Purpose and scope. Substances (a) This part sets forth the safety and health standards promulgated by the 1926.1100 [Reserved] 1926.1101 Asbestos. Secretary of Labor under section 107 of 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre- the Contract Work Hours and Safety tation of term. Standards Act. The standards are pub- 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl, lished in subpart C of this part and fol- etc.). lowing subparts. 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine. (b) Subpart B of this part contains 1926.1105 [Reserved] statements of general policy and inter- 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether. pretations of section 107 of the Con- 1926.1107 3,3′–Dichlorobenzidiene (and its salts). tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether. ards Act having general applicability. 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine. 1926.1110 Benzidine. § 1926.2 Variances from safety and 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. health standards. 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. (a) Variances from standards which 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. are, or may be, published in this part 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. may be granted under the same cir- 1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. cumstances whereunder variances may 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic. of the Williams-Steiger Occupational 1926.1127 Cadmium. Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 1926.1128 Benzene. 65). The procedures for the granting of 1926.1129 Coke oven emissions. variances and for related relief under 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. this part are those published in part 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile. 1905 of this title. 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. (b) Any requests for variances under 1926.1148 Formaldehyde. this section shall also be considered re- 1926.1152 Methylene chloride. quests for variances under the Wil- APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR- PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION Health Act of 1970, and any requests for STANDARDS variances under Williams-Steiger Occu- SUBJECT INDEX FOR PART 1926—SAFETY AND pational Safety and Health Act with HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION respect to construction safety or

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00010 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.5

health standards shall be considered to Labor for Occupational Safety and be also variances under the Construc- Health, as the case may be. Whenever, tion Safety Act. Any variance from a as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con- construction safety or health standard tractor requests termination of debar- which is contained in this part and ment before the end of the 3-year pe- which is incorporated by reference in riod prescribed in that section, the re- part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a quest shall be filed in writing with the variance from the standard under both Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu- the Construction Safety Act and the pational Safety and Health who shall Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG- and Health Act of 1970. ISTER that the request has been received and afford interested persons an § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. opportunity to be heard upon the re- (a) It shall be a condition of each quest, and thereafter the provisions of contract which is subject to section 107 part 6 of this title shall apply with re- of the Contract Work Hours and Safety spect to prehearing conferences, hear- Standards Act that the Secretary of ings and related matters, and decisions Labor or any authorized representative and orders. shall have a right of entry to any site of contract performance for the fol- § 1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act. lowing purposes: (1) To inspect or investigate the mat- The following sections or paragraphs ter of compliance with the safety and each contain a collection of informa- health standards contained in subpart tion requirement which has been ap- C of this part and following subparts; proved by the Office of Management and and Budget under the control number (2) To carry out the duties of the Sec- listed. retary under section 107(b) of the Act. OMB con- (b) For the purpose of carrying out 29 CFR citation trol No. his investigative duties under the Act, 1926.33 ...... 1218±0065 the Secretary of Labor may, by agree- 1926.50 ...... 1218±0093 ment, use with or without reimburse- 1926.52 ...... 1218±0048 ment the services, personnel, and fa- 1926.53 ...... 1218±0103 1926.59 ...... 1218±0072 cilities of any State or Federal agency. 1926.60 ...... 1218±0183 Any agreements with States under this 1926.62 ...... 1218±0189 section shall be similar to those pro- 1926.64 ...... 1218±0200 1926.65 ...... 1218±0202 vided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub- 1926.103 ...... 1218±0099 lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50– 1926.200 ...... 1218±0132 205. 1926.250 ...... 1218±0093 1926.251 ...... 1218±0233 1926.403 ...... 1218±0130 § 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis- 1926.404 ...... 1218±0130 trative adjudications for enforce- 1926.405 ...... 1218±0130 ment of safety and health stand- 1926.407 ...... 1218±0130 ards. 1926.408 ...... 1218±0130 1926.453(a)(2) ...... 1218±0216 (a) The rules of practice for adminis- 1926.502 ...... 1218±0197 trative adjudications for the enforce- 1926.503 ...... 1218±0197 ment of the safety and health stand- 1926.550(a)(1) ...... 1218±0115 1926.550(a)(2) ...... 1218±0115 ards contained in subpart C of this part 1926.550(a)(4) ...... 1218±0115 and the following subparts shall be the 1926.550(a)(6) ...... 1218±0113 same as those published in part 6 of 1926.550(a)(11) ...... 1218±0054 1926.550(a)(16) ...... 1218±0115 this title with respect to safety and 1926.550(b)(2) ...... 1218±0232 health violations of the Service Con- 1926.550(g) ...... 1218±0151 tract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except 1926.552 ...... 1218±0231 as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec- 1926.652 ...... 1218±0137 1926.703 ...... 1218±0095 tion. 1926.800 ...... 1218±0067 (b) In the case of debarment, the find- 1926.803 ...... 1218±0067 ings required by section 107(d) of the 1926.900 ...... 1218±0217 1926.903 ...... 1218±0227 Act shall be made by the hearing exam- 1926.1080 ...... 1218±0069 iner or the Assistant Secretary of 1926.1081 ...... 1218±0069

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00011 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.10 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

29 CFR citation OMB con- § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 trol No. of the act distinguished. 1926.1083 ...... 1218±0069 (a) Coverage under section 103. It is im- 1926.1090 ...... 1218±0069 portant to note that the coverage of 1926.1091 ...... 1218±0069 1926.1101 ...... 1218±0134 section 107 differs from that for the 1926.1103 ...... 1218±0085 overtime requirements of the Contract 1926.1104 ...... 1218±0084 Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. 1926.1106 ...... 1218±0086 1926.1107 ...... 1218±0083 The application of the overtime re- 1926.1108 ...... 1218±0087 quirements is governed by section 103, 1926.1109 ...... 1218±0089 which subject to specific exemptions, 1926.1110 ...... 1218±0082 1926.1111 ...... 1218±0090 includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- 1926.1112 ...... 1218±0080 ing or involving the employment of la- 1926.1113 ...... 1218±0079 borers or mechanics (thus including, 1926.1114 ...... 1218±0088 1926.1115 ...... 1218±0044 but not limited to, contracts for con- 1926.1116 ...... 1218±0081 struction), and (2) contracts assisted in 1926.1117 ...... 1218±0010 whole or in part by Federal loans, 1926.1118 ...... 1218±0104 grants, or guarantees under any stat- 1926.1127 ...... 1218±0186 1926.1128 ...... 1218±0129 ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such 1926.1129 ...... 1218±0128 work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage 1926.1144 ...... 1218±0101 standards for such work’’ include stat- 1926.1145 ...... 1218±0126 1926.1147 ...... 1218±0108 utes for construction which require the 1926.1148 ...... 1218±0145 payment of minimum wages in accordance with prevailing wage findings by [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63 the Secretary of Labor in accordance FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision 1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810, to section 103 excludes from the over- Apr. 16, 1999] time requirements work where the Federal assistance is only in the form Subpart B—General of a loan guarantee or insurance. Interpretations (b) Coverage under section 107. To be covered by section 107 of the Contract AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, and Safety Standards Act (Construction a contract must be one which (1) is en- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333). tered into under a statute that is subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of § 1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con- (a) This subpart contains the general struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- rules of the Secretary of Labor inter- cluding painting and decorating.’’ preting and applying the construction safety and health provisions of section § 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 107 of the Contract Work Hours and of 1950. Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec- (a) General provisions. Reorganization tion 107 requires as a condition of each Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- contract which is entered into under scribing by the Secretary of Labor of legislation subject to Reorganization ‘‘appropriate standards, regulations, Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), and procedures’’ with respect to the en- and which is for construction, alter- forcement of labor standards under ation, and/or repair, including painting Federal and federally assisted con- and decorating, that no contractor or tracts which are subject to various subcontractor contracting for any part statutes subject to the Plan. The rules of the contract work shall require any of the Secretary of Labor imple- laborer or mechanic employed in the menting the Plan are published in part performance of the contract to work in 5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- surroundings or under working condi- ject to the Plan include the Davis- tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, Bacon Act, including its extension to or dangerous to his health or safety, as Federal-aid highway legislation subject determined under construction safety to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- and health standards promulgated by ject to the Plan by its original terms, the Secretary by regulation. statutes by which the Plan is expressly

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00012 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

applied, such as the Contract Work (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec- 1715v provides mortgage insurance on tion 104(d) thereof. rental housing for elderly or handi- (b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject capped persons. to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w are cited and briefly described in the authorizes mortgage insurance on remaining paragraphs of this section. nursing home facilities and major These descriptions are general in na- equipment. ture and not intended to convey the (viii) Experimental Housing—Section full scope of the work to be performed 1715x provides mortgage insurance on under each statute. The individual single family or multifamily housing statutes should be resorted to for a with experimental design of materials. more detailed scope of the work. (ix) War Housing Insurance—Section (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro- 1743 not active. visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply (x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- to the initial construction, reconstruc- sures investment returns on multi- tion, or improvement work performed family housing. by contractors or subcontractors on (xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- highway projects on the Federal-aid tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute systems, the primary and secondary, as shortage and urgent need for family well as their extensions in urban areas, housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- and the Interstate System, authorized tary installations. under the highway laws providing for the expenditure of Federal funds upon (xii) Defense Housing for Impacted the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41 Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mort- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General gage insurance on single family or ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway multifamily housing for sale or rent Acts are subject to Reorganization primarily to military or civilian per- Plan No. 14 of 1950. sonnel of the Armed Services, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and or Atomic Energy Commission. (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748, (xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- 1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1), tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- 1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x–A and ance in critical defense housing areas. 1x–B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc- (xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L tion which is financed with assistance (h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for by the Federal Government through nonprofit organizations to finance the programs of loan and mortgage insur- purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- ance for the following purposes: rating or substandard housing for sub- (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 pro- sequent resale to low-income home vides mortgage and insurance on rental purchasers. There must be located on housing of eight or more units and on the property five or more single family mobile-home courts. dwellings of detached, semidetached, or (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed. row construction. (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section (xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on 1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- cooperative housing of five or more ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- units as well as supplementary loans lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- for improvement of repair or resale of nance sale of individual dwellings to memberships. lower income individuals or families. (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section Also includes the rehabilitation of such 1715k provides mortgage insurance on housing if it is deteriorating or sub- single family or multifamily housing standard for subsequent resale to lower in approved urban renewal areas. income home purchasers. (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous- (xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage mortgages on low-cost single family or insurance and interest reduction pay- multifamily housing. ments on behalf of owners of rental

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00013 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

housing projects designed for occu- projects, and assistance for blighted pancy by lower income families. Pay- areas. See the Housing Act of 1964, ments are also authorized for certain paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con- State or locally aided projects. cerning financial assistance for low- (xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec- rent housing for domestic farm labor. tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur- (7) School Survey and Construction Act ance on property purchased for the de- of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides velopment of building sites. This infor a Federal grant-in-aid program to cludes waterlines and water supply in- assist in the construction of schools in stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis- federally affected areas. posal installations, steam, gas, and (8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- electrical lines and installations, cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side- 1592i). Inactive Program. walks, storm drainage facilities, and (9) United States Housing Act of 1937 other installations or work. (42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili- construction of low-rent public housing ties—Subchapter LX–B authorizes and slum clearance projects awarded mortgage insurance for the financing by local authorities. These projects are of construction and equipment, of fa- financed with the assistance of loans cilities for group practice of medicine, and grants from the Federal Govern- optometry, or dentistry. ment. The slum clearance is the demo- (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au- lition and removal of buildings from thorizes mortgage insurance to cover any slum area to be used for a low-rent new and rehabilitated hospitals, in- housing project. cluding initial equipment. (10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 (4) Hospital Survey and Construction U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for Act, as amended by the Hospital and Federal assistance to the several Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42 States and their political subdivisions U.S.C. 291e). The provisions of this Act in the field of civil defense which in- cover construction contracts made by cludes procurement, construction, leas- State or local authorities or private ining, or renovating of materials and fa- stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid cilities. programs for the construction of hos- (11) Delaware River Basin Compact pitals and other medical facilities. (sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C. tion creates, by intergovernmental 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid compact between the United States, funds for airport construction limited Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and to general site preparation runways, Pennsylvania, a regional agency for taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant planning, conservation, utilization, de- thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte- velopment, management and control of nance buildings. The act excludes con- the water and related sources of the struction intended for use as a public Delaware River. parking facility for passenger auto- (12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. mobiles and the cost of construction of 332a(c)). This act provides Federal any part of an airport building except grants to a university, college, or other such of those buildings or parts of appropriate public or nonprofit private buildings to house facilities or activi- agency or institution for part or all of ties directly related to the safety of the cost of constructing a facility for persons at the airport. research or for research and related (6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459). purposes. Research and related pur- Construction contracts awarded by poses means research, research train- local authorities financed with the as- ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the sistance of loans and grants from the field of education, or the dissemination Federal Government. The construction of information derived therefrom, or programs are for slum clearance and all of such activities, including (but urban renewal which includes rehabili- without limitation) experimental tation grants, neighborhood develop- schools, except that such term does not ment programs, neighborhood renewal include research, research training, plans, community renewal, demolition surveys, or demonstrations in the field

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00014 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- urban areas and in coordinating such nation of information derived there- service with highway and other trans- from. Construction includes new build- portation in such areas. ings, and the acquisition, expansion, (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 remodeling, replacement, and alter- (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con- ation of existing buildings and the struction which is financed with assist- equipping of new buildings and existing ance of the Federal Government for the buildings. following purposes: (13) Health Professions Educational As- (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), construction of projects, buildings and 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act works which will provide young men provide for grants to assist public and and women in rural and urban residen- nonprofit medical, dental, and similar tial centers with education, vocational schools for the construction, expan- training, and useful work experience sion, or renovation of teaching facili- (Title I). ties. (ii) Authorizes financial assistance (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con- for construction work planned and car- struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D), ried out at the community level for 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes antipoverty programs (Title II): Federal financial assistance in the con- (a) Authorizes loans to low income struction of centers for research on rural families by assisting them to ac- mental retardation and related aspects quire or improve real estate or reduce of human development, of university- encumbrances or erect improvements affiliated facilities for the mentally re- thereon, and to participate in coopera- tarded and of facilities for the men- tive associations and/or to finance non- tally retarded. agricultural enterprises which will en- (15) Community Mental Health Centers able such families to supplement their Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au- income (Title III); thorizes Federal grants for the con- (b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- struction of public and other nonprofit tive associations furnishing essential community mental health centers. processing, purchasing, or marketing (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of services, supplies, or facilities predomi- 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes nantly to low-income rural families the grant or loan of Federal funds to (Title III); assist public and other nonprofit insti- (c) Authorizes financial assistance to tutions of higher education in financ- States, political subdivisions of States, ing the construction, rehabilitation, or public and nonprofit agencies, institu- improvement of academic and related tions, organizations, farm associations, facilities in undergraduate and grad- or individuals in establishing housing, uate schools. sanitation, education, and child day- (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963 care programs for migrants and other (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for seasonally employed agricultural em- Federal grants to the various States ployees and their families (Title III). for construction of area vocational (iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees education school facilities. loans to small businesses for construc- (18) Library Services and Construction tion work (Title IV). Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro- (iv) Authorizes the payment of the vides for Federal assistance to the var- cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- ious States for the construction of pub- onstration projects to foster State pro- lic libraries. grams providing construction work ex- (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of perience or training for unemployed fa- 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides thers and needy people (Title V). for grants and loans to assist States (21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. and local public bodies and agencies 1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- thereof in financing the acquisition, nancial assistance for low-rent housing construction, reconstruction, and im- for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- provement of facilities and equipment ther provides for loans, through public for use, by operation or lease or other- or private agencies, where feasible, to wise, in mass transportation service in owners or tenants of property in urban

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00015 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

renewal areas to finance rehabilitation ment and operation, of a National In- required to conform the property to ap- stitution for the Deaf. plicable code requirements or carry out (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C. the objectives of the urban renewal 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans plan for the area. to nonprofit corporations to be used for (22) The Commercial Fisheries Research the construction of housing and related and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. facilities for elderly families. Also, the 779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial provisions of the act provide for reha- assistance to State agencies for con- bilitation, alteration, conversion or struction projects designed for the re- improvement of existing structures search and development of the com- which are otherwise inadequate for mercial fisheries resources of the Na- proposed dwellings used by such fami- tion. lies. (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42 (29) College Housing Act of 1950, as U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act grants to assist in the construction of provides for Federal loans to assist new facilities for collegiate, associate educational institutions in providing degree, and diploma schools of nursing, housing and other educational facili- or replacement or rehabilitation of ex- ties for students and faculties. isting facilities of such schools. (30) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu- act provides for Federal assistance for cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848). the following purposes: The purpose of the act is to provide fi- (i) Grants to States and local public nancial assistance to local educational bodies to assist in any construction agencies serving areas with concentra- work to be carried out under the open- tions of children from low-income fam- space land and urban beautification ilies for construction in connection provisions contained therein. It pro- with the expansion or improvement of vides for parks and recreation areas, their educational programs. conservation of land and other natural (25) Federal Water Pollution Control resources, and historical and scenic Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act purposes. of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi- (ii) Grants to local public bodies and nancial assistance to States or munici- agencies to finance specific projects for palities for construction of facilities in basic public water facilities (including connection with the prevention and works for the storage, treatment, puri- control of water pollution. This in- fication, and distribution of water), cludes projects that will control the and for basic public sewer facilities discharge into any waters of untreated (other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- or inadequately treated sewage. fined in the Federal Water Pollution (26) Appalachian Regional Development Control Act). Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author- (iii) Grants to any local public body izes Federal assistance in the construc- or agency to assist in financing neigh- tion of an Appalachian development borhood facilities. These facilities highway system; construction of multi- must be necessary for carrying out a county demonstration health facilities, program of health, recreational, social, hospitals, regional health, diagnostic or similar community service and lo- and treatment centers, and other fa- cated so as to be available for the use cilities for health; seal and fill voids in of the area’s low or moderate income abandoned mines and to rehabilitate residents. strip mine areas; construction of (31) National Foundation on the Arts school facilities for vocational edu- and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. cation; and to assist in construction of 954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- sewage treatment works. tional Foundation on the Arts and the (27) National Technical Institute for the Humanities’’ which may provide Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides matching grants to groups (nonprofit for financial assistance for institutions organizations and State and other pub- of higher education for the establish- lic organizations) and to individuals ment, construction, including equip- engaged in creative and performing

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00016 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide tivity, including construction of nec- for grants to institutions of higher edu- essary facilities. cation for construction of facilities for (32) Public Works and Economic Devel- research or for research and related opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This purposes relating to education for men- act provides for Federal assistance for tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf, the following purposes: speech impaired, visually handicapped, (i) Grants for the acquisition or de- seriously emotionally disturbed, crip- velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children public works or development facility who by reason thereof require special usage in redevelopment areas. It au- education. thorizes loans to assist in financing the (36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act purchase or development of land for Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). public works which will assist in the This act authorizes grants to assist in creation of long-term employment op- meeting the costs of construction of portunities in the area. public or other nonprofit workshops (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel- and rehabilitation facilities. opment of land and facilities (including (37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal machinery and equipment) for indus- Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides trial or commercial usage within rede- for financial assistance to public (Fed- velopment areas; guarantee of loans for eral, State, interstate, or local) au- working capital made to private bor- thorities, agencies, and institutions, rowers by private lending institutions private agencies and institutions, and in connection with direct loan projects; individuals in the construction of fa- and to contract to pay to, or on behalf cilities for solid-waste disposal. The of, business entities locating in rede- term construction includes the instal- velopment areas, a portion of the inter- lation of initial equipment. est costs which they incur in financing (38) Medical Library Assistance Act of their expansions from private sources. 1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act (iii) Loans and grants to create eco- provides for grants to public or private nomic development centers within des- non-profit agencies or institutions for ignated county economic development the cost of construction of medical li- districts. brary facilities. (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation (39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro- (38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction vides for financial assistance for con- industry health and safety standards struction activities in connection with do not apply to this act since it is not research and development of different subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 forms of high-speed ground transpor- of 1950. tation and demonstration projects re- (40) National Capital Transportation lating to intercity rail passenger serv- Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act ice. provides for Federal assistance to the (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke National Capital Transportation Agen- Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)). cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- This act provides for grants to public sit system and related facilities for the or nonprofit private universities, med- Nation’s Capital. ical schools, research, institutions, (41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. hospitals, and other public and non- 82). The program under this legislation profit agencies and institutions, or as- has expired. sociations thereof to assist in construc- (42) Model Secondary School for the tion and equipment of facilities in con- Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- nection with research, training, dem- vides for funds to establish and oper- onstration of patient care, diagnostic ate, including construction and initial and treatment related to heart disease, equipment of new buildings, expansion, cancer, stroke, and other major dis- remodeling, and alteration of existing eases. buildings and equipment thereof, a (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and model secondary school for the deaf to Community Mental Health Centers Con- serve the residents of the District of struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20 Columbia and nearby States.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(43) Allied Health Professions Personnel includes new buildings and expansion, Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. remodeling, alteration and renovation 295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for of existing buildings, and initial equip- grants to assist in the construction of ment of such new, newly acquired, ex- new facilities for training centers for panded, remodeled, altered, or ren- allied health professions, or replace- ovated buildings. ment or rehabilitation of existing fa- (48) National Visitor Center Facilities cilities for such centers. Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au- (44) Demonstration Cities and Metro- thorizes agreements and leases with politan Development Act of 1966 (42 the owner of property in the District of U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. Columbia known as Union Station for 1416). This act provides for Federal as- the use of all or a part of such property sistance for the following purposes: for a national visitor center to be (i) Grants to assist in the construc- known as the National Visitor Center. tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re- The agreements and leases shall pro- pair of residential property only if such vide for such alterations of the Union residential property is designed for res- Station Building as necessary to pro- idential use for eight or more families vide adequate facilities for visitors. to enable city demonstration agencies They also provide for the construction to carry out comprehensive city dem- of a parking facility, including nec- onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310). essary approaches and ramps. (ii) Amends the National Housing Act (49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for This act provides for Federal grants to coverage. State, county, municipal, or other pub- (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C. lic agency or combination thereof for ). This act provides for Federal 1857j–3 the construction of facilities to be used assistance to public or nonprofit agen- in connection with rehabilitation serv- cies, institutions, and organizations ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and and to individuals, and contracts with rehabilitation of delinquent youths and public or private agencies, institutions, youths in danger of becoming delin- or persons for construction of research quent. and development facilities and demonstration plants relating to the appli- (50) Housing and Urban Development cation of preventing or controlling dis- Act of 1968 (including New Communities charges into the air of various types of Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act pollutants. provides for Federal assistance for the (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu- following purposes: cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi- (i) Guarantees, and commitments to lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6). guarantee, the bonds, debentures, This act provides for Federal assist- notes, and other obligations issued by ance to local educational agencies or new community developers to help fi- to an institution of higher education nance new community development applying jointly with a local edu- projects. cational agency for minor remodeling (ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- projects in connection with bilingual tional Housing Act, adding section 236 education programs to meet the special for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income needs of children with limited English- Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage speaking ability in the United States. Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend- thereto. ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This (51) Public Health Service Act Amend- act authorizes Federal assistance to ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- any public or nonprofit private agency habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 or organization for the construction of U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides a center for vocational rehabilitation for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- of handicapped individuals who are vate agency or organization for con- both deaf and blind which shall be struction projects consisting of any fa- known as the National Center for Deaf- cilities (including post-hospitalization Blind Youths and Adults. Construction treatment facilities for the prevention

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00018 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.13

and treatment of alcoholism or treat- This Act authorizes grants to States ment of narcotic addicts.) for construction of facilities for the (52) Vocational Education Amendments provision of services to persons with of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro- developmental disabilities who are un- vides for grants to States for the con- able to pay for such services. struction of area vocational education (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970 school facilities. The act further pro- (Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat- vides grants to public educational ute provides that the National Rail- agencies, organizations, or institutions road Passenger Corporation may con- for construction of residential schools struct physical facilities necessary to to provide vocational education for the intercity rail passenger operations purpose of demonstrating the feasi- within the basic national rail pas- bility and desirability of such schools. senger system designated by the Sec- The act still further provides grants to retary of Transportation. State boards, to colleges and univer- (c) VA and FHA housing. In the course sities, to public educational agencies, of the legislative development of sec- organizations or institutions to reduce tion 107, it was recognized that section the cost of borrowing funds for the con- 107 would not apply to housing construction of residential schools and struction for which insurance was dormitories. issued by the Federal Housing Author- (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39 ity and Veterans’ Administration for U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for individual home ownership. Concerning construction, modification, alteration, construction under the National Hous- repair, and other improvements of ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of postal facilities located in leased build- 1950 applies to construction which is ings. subject to the minimum wage require- (54) Airport and Airway Development ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section U.S.C. 1715c). 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal financial assistance to States and lo- § 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory calities for the construction, improve- terms. ment, or repair of public airports. (a) The terms construction, alteration, (55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act and repair used in section 107 of the Act provides for federal financial assist- are also used in section 1 of the Davis- ance to institutions of higher learning Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing for the construction of a National Cen- minimum wage protection on Federal ter on Educational Media and Mate- construction contracts, and section 1 of rials for the Handicapped. The program the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- under this statute expires on July 1, viding performance and payment bond 1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1). protection on Federal construction (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act contracts. Similarly, the terms con- (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro- tractor and subcontractor are used in vides for financial assistance to States those statutes, as well as in Copeland for construction, expansion, remod- (Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) eling, or alteration of facilities for the and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- education of handicapped children at ty Standards Act itself, which apply the preschool, elementary school, and concurrently with the Miller Act and secondary school levels. the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- (56) Housing and Urban Development struction contracts and also apply to Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section most federally assisted construction 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to contracts. The use of the same or iden- States and local public agencies to help tical terms in these statutes which finance the development of open-space apply concurrently with section 107 of or other land in urban areas for open- the Act have considerable precedential space uses. This Act becomes effective value in ascertaining the coverage of on July 1, 1971. section 107. (57) Developmental Disabilities Services (b) It should be noted that section 1 and Facilities Construction Amendments of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)). imum wage protection to laborers and

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.14 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no contract for the supplying of construc- comparable limitation in section 107 of tion equipment to a contractor would the Act. Section 107 expressly requires not, in and of itself, be considered a as a self-executing condition of each ‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this covered contract that no contractor or part. subcontractor shall require ‘‘any laborer or mechanic employed in the per- § 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ formance of the contract to work in types of performance. surroundings or under working condi- (a) It is the intent of the Congress to tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, provide safety and health protection of or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as Federal, federally financed, or feder- these health and safety standards are ally assisted construction. See, for ex- applied in the rules of the Secretary of ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., Labor. first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear (c) The term subcontractor under sec- that when a Federal contract calls for tion 107 is considered to mean a person mixed types of performance, such as who agrees to perform any part of the both manufacturing and construction, labor or material requirements of a section 107 would apply to the con- contract for construction, alteration or struction. By its express terms, section repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United 107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per- construction, alteration, and/or re- son who undertakes to perform a por- pair.’’ Such a contract is not required tion of a contract involving the fur- to be exclusively for such services. The nishing of supplies or materials will be application of the section is not lim- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under ited to contracts which permit an over- this part and section 107 if the work in all characterization as ‘‘construction question involves the performance of contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is construction work and is to be per- not so limited. formed: (1) Directly on or near the con- (b) When the mixed types of perform- struction site, or (2) by the employer ances include both construction and for the specific project on a customized manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- basis. Thus, a supplier of materials cerning the relationship between the which will become an integral part of Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’ section 107. if the supplier fabricates or assembles the goods or materials in question spe- § 1926.15 Relationship to the Service cifically for the construction project Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public and the work involved may be said to Contracts Act. be construction activity. If the goods (a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is or materials in question are ordinarily one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., sold to other customers from regular 41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub- ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing condition of every Federal contract of prestressed concrete beams and (and bid specification therefor) exceed- prestressed structural steel would be ing $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of considered manufacturing; therefore a which is to furnish services to the supplier of such materials would not be United States through the use of ‘‘serv- considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex- ice employees,’’ that certain safety and ample of material supplied ‘‘for the health standards be met. See 29 CFR specific project on a customized basis’’ part 1925, which contains the Depart- as that phrase is used in this section ment rules concerning these standards. would be ventilating ducts, fabricated Section 7 of the Service Contract Act in a shop away from the construction provides that the Act shall not apply job site and specifically cut for the to ‘‘any contract of the United States project according to design specifica- or District of Columbia for construc- tions. On the other hand, if a con- tion, alteration, and/or repair, includ- tractor buys standard size nails from a ing painting and decorating of public foundry, the foundry would not be a buildings or public works.’’ It is clear

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00020 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.20

from the legislative history of section any legal, responsibility (or, as the 107 that no gaps in coverage between case may be, relieving the other sub- the two statutes are intended. contractors from this responsibility). (b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con- In no case shall the prime contractor tracts Act requires that contracts en- be relieved of overall responsibility for tered into by any Federal agency for compliance with the requirements of the manufacture or furnishing of mate- this part for all work to be performed rials, supplies, articles, and equipment under the contract. in any amount exceeding $10,000 must (b) By contracting for full perform- contain, among other provisions, a re- ance of a contract subject to section quirement that ‘‘no part of such con- 107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- tract will be performed nor will any of sumes all obligations prescribed as em- the materials, supplies, articles or ployer obligations under the standards equipment to be manufactured or fur- contained in this part, whether or not nished under said contract be manufac- he subcontracts any part of the work. tured or fabricated in any plants, fac- (c) To the extent that a subcon- tories, buildings, or surroundings or tractor of any tier agrees to perform under working conditions which are any part of the contract, he also as- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous sumes responsibility for complying to the health and safety of employees with the standards in this part with re- engaged in the performance of said spect to that part. Thus, the prime contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary contractor assumes the entire responsi- concerning these standards are pub- bility under the contract and the sub- lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex- contractor assumes responsibility with press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre- respect to his portion of the work. tation and application of section 1(e) of With respect to subcontracted work, the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act the prime contractor and any subcon- to certain particular working condi- tractor or subcontractors shall be tions. None of the described working deemed to have joint responsibility. conditions are intended to deal with (d) Where joint responsibility exists, construction activities, although such both the prime contractor and his sub- activities may conceivably be a part of contractor or subcontractors, regard- a contract which is subject to the less of tier, shall be considered subject Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. to the enforcement provisions of the Nevertheless, such activities remain Act. subject to the general statutory duty prescribed by section 1(e). Section Subpart C—General Safety and 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act provides, among Health Provisions other things, that the Act shall not apply to any work required to be done AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours in accordance with the provisions of and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Act. Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or § 1926.16 Rules of construction. 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR (a) The prime contractor and any part 1911. subcontractors may make their own arrangements with respect to obliga- § 1926.20 General safety and health tions which might be more appro- provisions. priately treated on a jobsite basis rath- (a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- er than individually. Thus, for exam- tion 107 of the Act requires that it ple, the prime contractor and his sub- shall be a condition of each contract contractors may wish to make an ex- which is entered into under legislation press agreement that the prime con- subject to Reorganization Plan Number tractor or one of the subcontractors 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in will provide all required first-aid or § 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub- ation, and/or repair, including painting contractors from the actual, but not and decorating, that no contractor or

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00021 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.21 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

subcontractor for any part of the con- (e) In the event a standard protects tract work shall require any laborer or on its face a class of persons larger mechanic employed in the performance than employees, the standard shall be of the contract to work in sur- applicable under this part only to em- roundings or under working conditions ployees and their employment and which are unsanitary, hazardous, or places of employment. dangerous to his health or safety. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (b) Accident prevention responsibilities. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993] (1) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to initiate and maintain such § 1926.21 Safety training and edu- programs as may be necessary to com- cation. ply with this part. (a) General requirements. The Sec- (2) Such programs shall provide for retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) frequent and regular inspections of the of the Act, establish and supervise pro- job sites, materials, and equipment to grams for the education and training of be made by competent persons des- employers and employees in the rec- ignated by the employers. ognition, avoidance and prevention of (3) The use of any machinery, tool, unsafe conditions in employments cov- material, or equipment which is not in ered by the act. compliance with any applicable re- (b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em- quirement of this part is prohibited. ployer should avail himself of the safe- Such machine, tool, material, or equip- ty and health training programs the ment shall either be identified as un- Secretary provides. safe by tagging or locking the controls (2) The employer shall instruct each to render them inoperable or shall be employee in the recognition and avoid- physically removed from its place of ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- operation. lations applicable to his work environment to control or eliminate any haz- (4) The employer shall permit only ards or other exposure to illness or in- those employees qualified by training jury. or experience to operate equipment and (3) Employees required to handle or machinery. use poisons, caustics, and other harm- (c) The standards contained in this ful substances shall be instructed re- part shall apply with respect to em- garding the safe handling and use, and ployments performed in a workplace in be made aware of the potential haz- a State, the District of Columbia, the ards, personal hygiene, and personal Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the protective measures required. Virgin Islands, American Samoa, (4) In job site areas where harmful Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific plants or animals are present, employ- Islands, Wake Island, Outer Conti- ees who may be exposed shall be in- nental Shelf lands defined in the Outer structed regarding the potential haz- Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston ards, and how to avoid injury, and the Island, and the Canal Zone. first aid procedures to be used in the (d) (1) If a particular standard is spe- event of injury. cifically applicable to a condition, (5) Employees required to handle or practice, means, method, operation, or use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic process, it shall prevail over any dif- materials shall be instructed in the ferent general standard which might safe handling and use of these mate- otherwise be applicable to the same rials and made aware of the specific re- condition, practice, means, method, op- quirements contained in subparts D, F, eration, or process. and other applicable subparts of this (2) On the other hand, any standard part. shall apply according to its terms to (6)(i) All employees required to enter any employment and place of employ- into confined or enclosed spaces shall ment in any industry, even though par- be instructed as to the nature of the ticular standards are also prescribed hazards involved, the necessary pre- for the industry to the extent that cautions to be taken, and in the use of none of such particular standards ap- protective and emergency equipment plies. required. The employer shall comply

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00022 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.29

with any specific regulations that (c) Containers shall be provided for apply to work in dangerous or poten- the collection and separation of waste, tially dangerous areas. trash, oily and used rags, and other (ii) For purposes of paragraph (b)(6)(i) refuse. Containers used for garbage and of this section, confined or enclosed other oily, flammable, or hazardous space means any space having a limited wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful means of egress, which is subject to the dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov- accumulation of toxic or flammable ers. Garbage and other waste shall be contaminants or has an oxygen defi- disposed of at frequent and regular in- cient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed tervals. spaces include, but are not limited to, storage tanks, process vessels, bins, § 1926.26 Illumination. boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts, Construction areas, aisles, stairs, sewers, underground utility vaults, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces shops, and storage areas where work is more than 4 feet in depth such as pits, in progress shall be lighted with either tubs, vaults, and vessels. natural or artificial illumination. The minimum illumination requirements § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of for work areas are contained in subpart injuries. [Reserved] D of this part.

§ 1926.23 First aid and medical atten- § 1926.27 Sanitation. tion. Health and sanitation requirements First aid services and provisions for for drinking water are contained in medical care shall be made available subpart D of this part. by the employer for every employee covered by these regulations. Regula- § 1926.28 Personal protective equip- tions prescribing specific requirements ment. for first aid, medical attention, and (a) The employer is responsible for emergency facilities are contained in requiring the wearing of appropriate subpart D of this part. personal protective equipment in all operations where there is an exposure § 1926.24 Fire protection and preven- to hazardous conditions or where this tion. part indicates the need for using such The employer shall be responsible for equipment to reduce the hazards to the the development and maintenance of employees. an effective fire protection and preven- (b) Regulations governing the use, se- tion program at the job site through- lection, and maintenance of personal out all phases of the construction, re- protective and lifesaving equipment pair, alteration, or demolition work. are described under subpart E of this The employer shall ensure the avail- part. ability of the fire protection and suppression equipment required by subpart § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. F of this part. (a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid certification by an insurance company § 1926.25 Housekeeping. or regulatory authority shall be (a) During the course of construction, deemed as acceptable evidence of safe alteration, or repairs, form and scrap installation, inspection, and testing of lumber with protruding nails, and all pressure vessels provided by the em- other debris, shall be kept cleared from ployer. work areas, passageways, and stairs, in (b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the and around buildings or other struc- employer shall be deemed to be in com- tures. pliance with the requirements of this (b) Combustible scrap and debris part when evidence of current and valid shall be removed at regular intervals certification by an insurance company during the course of construction. Safe or regulatory authority attesting to means shall be provided to facilitate the safe installation, inspection, and such removal. testing is presented.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00023 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.30 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(c) Other requirements. Regulations § 1926.32 Definitions. prescribing specific requirements for The following definitions shall apply other types of pressure vessels and in the application of the regulations in similar equipment are contained in this part: subparts F and O of this part. (a) Act means section 107 of the Con- tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair- ards Act, commonly known as the Con- ing. struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40 (a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair- U.S.C. 333). ing, alterations, and maintenance per- (b) ANSI means American National formed on ships under Government Standards Institute. contract, except naval ship construc- (c) Approved means sanctioned, en- tion, is work subject to the Act. dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept- (b) Applicable safety and health stand- ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted ards. For the purpose of work carried and nationally recognized authority or out under this section, the safety and agency. (d) Authorized person means a person health regulations in part 1915 of this approved or assigned by the employer title, Shipyard Employment, shall to perform a specific type of duty or apply. duties or to be at a specific location or [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, locations at the jobsite. 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996] (e) Administration means the Occupa- tional Safety and Health Administra- § 1926.31 Incorporation by reference. tion. (a) The standards of agencies of the (f) Competent person means one who is U.S. Government, and organizations capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov- working conditions which are unsani- ernment which are incorporated by ref- tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- erence in this part, have the same force ployees, and who has authorization to and effect as other standards in this take prompt corrective measures to part. Only the mandatory provisions eliminate them. (i.e., provisions containing the word (g) Construction work. For purposes of ‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language) this section, Construction work means of standards incorporated by reference work for construction, alteration, and/ are adopted as standards under the Oc- or repair, including painting and deco- cupational Safety and Health Act. The rating. locations where these standards may (h) Defect means any characteristic be examined are as follows: or condition which tends to weaken or (1) Offices of the Occupational Safety reduce the strength of the tool, object, and Health Administration, U.S. De- or structure of which it is a part. partment of Labor, Frances Perkins (i) Designated person means ‘‘author- Building, Washington, DC 20210. ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d) (2) The Regional and Field Offices of of this section. the Occupational Safety and Health (j) Employee means every laborer or Administration, which are listed in the mechanic under the Act regardless of U.S. Government Manual. the contractual relationship which (b) Any changes in the specifications, may be alleged to exist between the la- standards and codes incorporated by borer and mechanic and the contractor or subcontractor who engaged him. reference in this part and an official ‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de- historic file of such changes are avail- fined in the Act, but the identical able at the offices referred to in para- terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act graph (a) of this section. All questions (40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for as to the applicability of such changes minimum wage protection on Federal should also be referred to these offices. and federally assisted construction [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, contracts. The use of the same term in 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996; a statute which often applies concur- 63 FR 33468, June 18, 1998] rently with section 107 of the Act has

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00024 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.35

considerable precedential value in prevent free escape from the inside of ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer any building shall be installed except and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La- in mental, penal, or corrective institu- borer generally means one who per- tions where supervisory personnel is forms manual labor or who labors at an continually on duty and effective pro- occupation requiring physical strength; visions are made to remove occupants mechanic generally means a worker in case of fire or other emergency. skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen. (b) Exit marking. Exits shall be 341. marked by a readily visible sign. Ac- (k) Employer means contractor or cess to exits shall be marked by readily subcontractor within the meaning of visible signs in all cases where the exit the Act and of this part. or way to reach it is not immediately (l) Hazardous substance means a sub- visible to the occupants. stance which, by reason of being explo- (c) Maintenance and workmanship. sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, Means of egress shall be continually oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise maintained free of all obstructions or harmful, is likely to cause death or in- impediments to full instant use in the jury. case of fire or other emergency. (m) Qualified means one who, by pos- [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] session of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who § 1926.35 Employee emergency action by extensive knowledge, training, and plans. experience, has successfully dem- (a) Scope and application. This section onstrated his ability to solve or resolve applies to all emergency action plans problems relating to the subject mat- required by a particular OSHA stand- ter, the work, or the project. ard. The emergency action plan shall (n) Safety factor means the ratio of be in writing (except as provided in the the ultimate breaking strength of a last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this member or piece of material or equip- section) and shall cover those des- ment to the actual working stress or ignated actions employers and employ- safe load when in use. ees must take to ensure employee safe- (o) Secretary means the Secretary of ty from fire and other emergencies. Labor. (b) Elements. The following elements, (p) SAE means Society of Automotive at a minimum, shall be included in the Engineers. plan: (q) Shall means mandatory. (1) Emergency escape procedures and (r) Should means recommended. emergency escape route assignments; (s) Suitable means that which fits, (2) Procedures to be followed by em- and has the qualities or qualifications ployees who remain to operate critical to meet a given purpose, occasion, con- plant operations before they evacuate; dition, function, or circumstance. (3) Procedures to account for all em- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, ployees after emergency evacuation 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993] has been completed; (4) Rescue and medical duties for § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure those employees who are to perform and medical records. them; NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (5) The preferred means of reporting struction work under this section are iden- fires and other emergencies; and tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this (6) Names or regular job titles of per- chapter. sons or departments who can be con- [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] tacted for further information or explanation of duties under the plan. § 1926.34 Means of egress. (c) Alarm system. (1) The employer (a) General. In every building or shall establish an employee alarm sys- structure exits shall be so arranged and tem which complies with §1926.159. maintained as to provide free and un- (2) If the employee alarm system is obstructed egress from all parts of the used for alerting fire brigade members, building or structure at all times when or for other purposes, a distinctive sig- it is occupied. No lock or fastening to nal for each purpose shall be used.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00025 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.50 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(d) Evacuation. The employer shall available for the treatment of injured establish in the emergency action plan employees, a person who has a valid the types of evacuation to be used in certificate in first-aid training from emergency circumstances. the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer- (e) Training. (1) Before implementing ican Red Cross, or equivalent training the emergency action plan, the em- that can be verified by documentary ployer shall designate and train a suffi- evidence, shall be available at the cient number of persons to assist in the worksite to render first aid. safe and orderly emergency evacuation (d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas- of employees. ily accessible when required. (2) The employer shall review the (2) The contents of the first aid kit plan with each employee covered by shall be placed in a weatherproof con- the plan at the following times: tainer with individual sealed packages (i) Initially when the plan is devel- for each type of item, and shall be oped, checked by the employer before being (ii) Whenever the employee’s respon- sent out on each job and at least week- sibilities or designated actions under ly on each job to ensure that the ex- the plan change, and pended items are replaced. (iii) Whenever the plan is changed. (3) The employer shall review with (e) Proper equipment for prompt each employee upon initial assignment transportation of the injured person to those parts of the plan which the em- a physician or hospital, or a commu- ployee must know to protect the em- nication system for contacting nec- ployee in the event of an emergency. essary ambulance service, shall be pro- The written plan shall be kept at the vided. workplace and made available for em- (f) In areas where 911 is not available, ployee review. For those employers the telephone numbers of the physi- with 10 or fewer employees the plan cians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be may be communicated orally to em- conspicuously posted. ployees and the employer need not (g) Where the eyes or body of any maintain a written plan. person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the Subpart D—Occupational Health work area for immediate emergency and Environmental Controls use.

AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); (NON-MANDATORY) secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); First aid supplies are required to be easily Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or example of the minimal contents of a generic 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR first aid kit is described in American Na- part 1911. tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Min- imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type § 1926.50 Medical services and first First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit list- aid. ed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small work sites. When larger operations (a) The employer shall insure the or multiple operations are being conducted availability of medical personnel for at the same location, employers should de- advice and consultation on matters of termine the need for additional first aid kits occupational health. at the worksite, additional types of first aid (b) Provisions shall be made prior to equipment and supplies and additional quan- commencement of the project for tities and types of supplies and equipment in prompt medical attention in case of se- the first aid kits. rious injury. In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their (c) In the absence of an infirmary, workplace, may need to enhance their first- clinic, hospital, or physician, that is aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 200 reasonably accessible in terms of time log, OSHA 101’s or other reports to identify and distance to the worksite, which is these unique problems. Consultation from

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00026 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.51

the local Fire/Rescue Department, appro- tem furnishing potable water and a priate medical professional, or local emer- system furnishing nonpotable water. gency room may be helpful to employers in (c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can Toilets shall be provided for employees ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies according to the following table: are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically TABLE D±1 and augment the first aid kit appropriately. If it is reasonably anticipated employees Number of employees Minimum number of facilities will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first-aid 20 or less ...... 1. supplies, employers should provide personal 20 or more ...... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers. protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate 200 or more ...... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers. PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields, masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occupational (2) Under temporary field conditions, Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens’’, 29 CFR provisions shall be made to assure not 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175). less than one toilet facility is avail- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, able. 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; (3) Job sites, not provided with a san- 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, itary sewer, shall be provided with one 1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] of the following toilet facilities unless § 1926.51 Sanitation. prohibited by local codes: (i) Privies (where their use will not (a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup- contaminate ground or surface water); ply of potable water shall be provided (ii) Chemical toilets; in all places of employment. (2) Portable containers used to dis- (iii) Recirculating toilets; pense drinking water shall be capable (iv) Combustion toilets. of being tightly closed, and equipped (4) The requirements of this para- with a tap. Water shall not be dipped graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall from containers. not apply to mobile crews having (3) Any container used to distribute transportation readily available to drinking water shall be clearly marked nearby toilet facilities. as to the nature of its contents and not (d) Food handling. (1) All employees’ used for any other purpose. food service facilities and operations (4) The common drinking cup is pro- shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- hibited. nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- (5) Where single service cups (to be tions in which they are located. used but once) are supplied, both a san- (2) All employee food service facili- itary container for the unused cups and ties and operations shall be carried out a receptacle for disposing of the used in accordance with sound hygienic cups shall be provided. principles. In all places of employment (6) Potable water means water which where all or part of the food service is meets the quality standards prescribed provided, the food dispensed shall be in the U.S. Public Health Service wholesome, free from spoilage, and Drinking Water Standards, published shall be processed, prepared, handled, in 42 CFR part 72, or water which is ap- and stored in such a manner as to be proved for drinking purposes by the protected against contamination. State or local authority having juris- (e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When diction. temporary sleeping quarters are pro- (b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, nonpotable water, such as water for in- and lighted. dustrial or firefighting purposes only, (f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer shall be identified by signs meeting the shall provide adequate washing facili- requirements of subpart G of this part, ties for employees engaged in the ap- to indicate clearly that the water is plication of paints, coating, herbicides, unsafe and is not to be used for drink- or insecticides, or in other operations ing, washing, or cooking purposes. where contaminants may be harmful to (2) There shall be no cross-connec- the employees. Such facilities shall be tion, open or potential, between a sys- in near proximity to the worksite and

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00027 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.52 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

shall be so equipped as to enable em- (i) Change rooms. Whenever employ- ployees to remove such substances. ees are required by a particular stand- (2) General. Washing facilities shall ard to wear protective clothing because be maintained in a sanitary condition. of the possibility of contamination (3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be with toxic materials, change rooms made available in all places of employ- equipped with storage facilities for ment. The requirements of this sub- street clothes and separate storage fa- division do not apply to mobile crews cilities for the protective clothing or to normally unattended work loca- shall be provided. tions if employees working at these lo- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, cations have transportation readily 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993] available to nearby washing facilities which meet the other requirements of § 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. this paragraph. (a) Protection against the effects of (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided noise exposure shall be provided when with hot and cold running water, or the sound levels exceed those shown in tepid running water. Table D–2 of this section when meas- (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing ured on the A-scale of a standard sound agents shall be provided. level meter at slow response. (iv) Individual hand towels or sec- (b) When employees are subjected to tions thereof, of cloth or paper, warm sound levels exceeding those listed in air blowers or clean individual sections Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad- of continuous cloth toweling, conven- ministrative or engineering controls ient to the lavatories, shall be pro- shall be utilized. If such controls fail to vided. reduce sound levels within the levels of (4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are the table, personal protective equip- required by a particular standard, the ment as required in subpart E, shall be showers shall be provided in accord- provided and used to reduce sound lev- ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through els within the levels of the table. (c) If the variations in noise level in- (v) of this section. volve maxima at intervals of 1 second (ii) One shower shall be provided for or less, it is to be considered contin- each 10 employees of each sex, or nu- uous. merical fraction thereof, who are re- (d)(1) In all cases where the sound quired to shower during the same shift. levels exceed the values shown herein, (iii) Body soap or other appropriate a continuing, effective hearing con- cleansing agents convenient to the servation program shall be adminis- showers shall be provided as specified tered. in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section. (iv) Showers shall be provided with TABLE D±2ÐPERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES hot and cold water feeding a common Sound level discharge line. Duration per day, hours dBA slow (v) Employees who use showers shall response be provided with individual clean tow- 8 ...... 90 els. 6 ...... 92 (g) Eating and drinking areas. No em- 4 ...... 95 3 ...... 97 ployee shall be allowed to consume 2 ...... 100 food or beverages in a toilet room nor 11¤2 ...... 102 in any area exposed to a toxic mate- 1 ...... 105 1¤2 ...... 110 rial. 1¤4 or less ...... 115 (h) Vermin control. Every enclosed workplace shall be so constructed, (2)(i) When the daily noise exposure equipped, and maintained, so far as is composed of two or more periods of reasonably practicable, as to prevent noise exposure of different levels, their the entrance or harborage of rodents, combined effect should be considered, insects, and other vermin. A con- rather than the individual effect of tinuing and effective extermination each. Exposure to different levels for program shall be instituted where their various periods of time shall be com- presence is detected. puted according to the formula set

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00028 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.54

forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of tion. § 1910.1096 of this chapter. (ii) Fe = (T1/L1)+(T2/L2)+ · · · + (Tn/Ln) [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; Where: 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor. T = The period of noise exposure at any es- § 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. sentially constant level. (a) Only qualified and trained em- L = The duration of the permissible noise exposure at the constant level (from Table D– ployees shall be assigned to install, ad- 2). just, and operate laser equipment. (b) Proof of qualification of the laser If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the equipment operator shall be available exposure exceeds permissible levels. and in possession of the operator at all (iii) A sample computation showing times. an application of the formula in para- (c) Employees, when working in areas graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol- in which a potential exposure to direct lows. An employee is exposed at these or reflected laser light greater than levels for these periods: 0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall be provided with antilaser eye protec- 1 110 db A ⁄4 hour. tion devices as specified in subpart E of 1 100 db A ⁄2 hour. this part. 90 db A 11⁄2 hours. (d) Areas in which lasers are used 1 1 1 1 Fe = ( ⁄4/ ⁄2)+( ⁄2/2)+(1 ⁄2/8) shall be posted with standard laser Fe = 0.500+0.25+0.188 warning placards. Fe = 0.938 (e) Beam shutters or caps shall be utilized, or the laser turned off, when Since the value of F does not exceed e laser transmission is not actually re- unity, the exposure is within permis- quired. When the laser is left unat- sible limits. tended for a substantial period of time, (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact such as during lunch hour, overnight, noise should not exceed 140 dB peak or at change of shifts, the laser shall be sound pressure level. turned off. (f) Only mechanical or electronic § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. means shall be used as a detector for (a) In construction and related ac- guiding the internal alignment of the tivities involving the use of sources of laser. ionizing radiation, the pertinent provi- (g) The laser beam shall not be di- sions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com- rected at employees. mission’s Standards for Protection (h) When it is raining or snowing, or Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re- when there is dust or fog in the air, the lating to protection against occupa- operation of laser systems shall be pro- tional radiation exposure, shall apply. hibited where practicable; in any (b) Any activity which involves the event, employees shall be kept out of use of radioactive materials or X-rays, range of the area of source and target whether or not under license from the during such weather conditions. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall (i) Laser equipment shall bear a label be performed by competent persons to indicate maximum output. specially trained in the proper and safe (j) Employees shall not be exposed to operation of such equipment. In the light intensities above: case of materials used under Commis- (1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per sion license, only persons actually li- square centimeter; censed, or competent persons under di- (2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt rection and supervision of the licensee, per square centimeter; shall perform such work. (3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts (c)—(r) [Reserved] per square centimeter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (k) Laser unit in operation should be struction work under paragraphs (c) through set up above the heads of the employ- (r) of this section are identical to those set ees, when possible.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00029 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(l) Employees shall not be exposed to proved for each particular use by a microwave power densities in excess of competent industrial hygienist or 10 milliwatts per square centimeter. other technically qualified person. Whenever respirators are used, their § 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, use shall comply with § 1926.103. and mists. (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec- (a) Exposure of employees to inhalation do not apply to the exposure of tion, ingestion, skin absorption, or employees to airborne asbestos, contact with any material or substance tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite at a concentration above those speci- dust. Whenever any employee is ex- fied in the ‘‘Threshold Limit Values of posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite, Airborne Contaminants for 1970’’ of the American Conference of Governmental anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the Industrial Hygienists, shall be avoided. requirements of § 1910.1101 or § 1926.58 of See Appendix A to this section. this title shall apply. (b) To achieve compliance with para- (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec- graph (a) of this section, administration do not apply to the exposure of tive or engineering controls must first employees to formaldehyde. Whenever be implemented whenever feasible. any employee is exposed to formalde- When such controls are not feasible to hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of achieve full compliance, protective this title shall apply. equipment or other protective measures shall be used to keep the exposure APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN of employees to air contaminants with- CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL IN- in the limits prescribed in this section. DUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS’ THRESHOLD Any equipment and technical measures LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CON- used for this purpose must first be ap- TAMINANTS

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Abate; see Temephos. Acetaldehyde ...... 75±07±0 200 360 Ð Acetic acid ...... 64±19±7 10 25 Ð Acetic anhydride ...... 108±24±7 5 20 Ð Acetone ...... 67±64±1 1000 2400 Ð Acetonitrile ...... 75±05±8 40 70 Ð 2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 ...... 53±96±3 Acetylene ...... 74±86±2 E Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-Dichloroethylene. Acetylene tetrabromide .... 79±27±6 1 14 Ð Acrolein ...... 107±02±8 0.1 0.25 Ð Acrylamide ...... 79±06±1 Ð 0.3 X Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ...... 107±13±1 Aldrin ...... 309±00±2 Ð 0.25 X Allyl alcohol ...... 107±18±6 2 5 X Allyl chloride ...... 107±05±1 1 3 Ð Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) 106±92±3 (C)10 (C)45 Ð Allyl propyl disulfide ...... 2179±59±1 2 12 Ð alpha-Alumina ...... 1344±28±1 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Alundum; see alpha-Alu- mina ...... 4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ...... 92±67±1 2-Aminoethanol; see Eth- anolamine. 2-Aminopyridine ...... 504±29±0 0.5 2 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00030 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Ammonia ...... 7664±41±7 50 35 Ð Ammonium sulfamate ...... 7773±06±0 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð 5 Ð n-Amyl acetate ...... 628±63±7 100 525 Ð sec-Amyl acetate ...... 626±38±0 125 650 Ð Aniline and homologs ...... 62±53±3 5 19 X Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) 29191±52±4 Ð 0.5 X Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ...... 7440±36±0 Ð 0.5 Ð ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ...... 86±88±4 Ð 0.3 Ð Argon ...... 7440±37±1 E Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see § 1926.1118 ...... 7440±38±2 ÐÐÐ Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) ...... 7440±38±2 Ð 0.5 Ð Arsine ...... 7784±42±1 0.05 0.2 Ð Asbestos; see 1926.58. Azinphos-methyl ...... 86±50±0 Ð 0.2 X Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ...... 7440±39±3 Ð 0.5 Ð Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ...... 71±43±2 Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 ...... 92±87±5 p-Benzoquinone; see Qui- none. Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Benzoyl peroxide ...... 94±36±0 Ð 5 Ð Benzyl chloride ...... 100±44±7 1 5 Ð Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be) ...... 7440±41±7 Ð 0.002 Ð Biphenyl; see Diphenyl. Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether. Boron oxide ...... 1303±86±2 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Boron tribromide ...... 10294±33±4 1 10 Ð Boron trifluoride ...... 7637±07±2 (C)1 (C)3 Ð Bromine ...... 7726±95±6 0.1 0.7 Ð Bromine pentafluoride ..... 7789±30±2 0.1 0.7 Ð Bromoform ...... 75±25±2 0.5 5 X Butadiene (1,3-Buta- diene); see 29 CFR 1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) ...... 106±99±0 STEL 1 ppm/5 ppm ...... Ð

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan. 2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ...... 78±93±3 200 590 Ð 2-Butoxyethanol ...... 111±76±2 50 240 X n-Butyl-acetate ...... 123±86±4 150 710 Ð sec-Butyl acetate ...... 105±46±4 200 950 Ð tert-Butyl acetate ...... 540±88±5 200 950 Ð n-Butyl alcohol ...... 71±36±3 100 300 Ð sec-Butyl alcohol ...... 78±92±2 150 450 Ð tert-Butyl alcohol ...... 75±65±0 100 300 Ð Butylamine ...... 109±73±9 (C)5 (C)15 X 31

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00031 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3) ...... 1189±85±1 Ð (C)0.1 X n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) ...... 2426±08±6 50 270 Ð Butyl mercaptan ...... 109±79±5 0.5 1.5 Ð p-tert-Butyltoluene ...... 98±51±1 10 60 Ð Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ...... 7440±43±9 Calcium carbonate ...... 1317±65±3 Total dust ...... ÐÐ Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Calcium oxide ...... 1305±78±8 Ð 5 Ð Calcium sulfate ...... 7778±18±9 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð 5 Ð Camphor, synthetic ...... 76±22±2 Ð 2 Ð Carbaryl (Sevin) ...... 63±25±2 Ð 5 Ð Carbon black ...... 1333±86±4 Ð 3.5 Ð Carbon dioxide ...... 124±38±9 5000 9000 Ð Carbon disulfide ...... 75±15±0 20 60 X Carbon monoxide ...... 630±08±0 50 55 Ð Carbon tetrachloride ...... 56±23±5 10 65 X Cellulose ...... 9004±34±6 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Chlordane ...... 57±74±9 Ð 0.5 X Chlorinated camphene .... 8001±35±2 Ð 0.5 X Chlorinated diphenyl oxide ...... 55720±99±5 Ð 0.5 Ð Chlorine ...... 7782±50±5 1 3 Ð Chlorine dioxide ...... 10049±04±4 0.1 0.3 Chlorine trifluoride ...... 7790±91±2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 Ð Chloroacetaldehyde ...... 107±20±0 (C)1 (C)3 Ð a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride) ...... 532±27±4 0.05 0.3 Ð Chlorobenzene ...... 108±90±7 75 350 Ð o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ...... 2698±41±1 0.05 0.4 Ð Chlorobromomethane ...... 74±97±5 200 1050 Ð 2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chloroprene. Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) ...... 53469±21±9 Ð 1 X Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) ...... 11097±69±1 Ð 0.5 X 1-Chloro,2,3- epoxypropane; see Epichlorohydrin. 2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin. Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride. Chloroform (Trichloro- methane) ...... 67±66±3 (C)50 (C)240 Ð bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see § 1926.1108 ...... 542±88±1 Chloromethyl methyl ether; see § 1926.1106 107±30±2 1-Chloro-1-nitropropane .. 600±25±9 20 100 Ð Chloropicrin ...... 76±06±2 0.1 0.7 Ð beta-Chloroprene ...... 126±99±8 25 90 X

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00032 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Chromic acid and chromates. (as CrO3) ...... Varies with Ð 0.1 Ð compound Chromium (II) compounds. (as Cr) ...... 7440±47±3 Ð 0.5 Ð Chromium (III) compounds. (as Cr) ...... 7440±47±3 Ð 0.5 Ð Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr) ...... 7440±47±3 Ð 1 Ð Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phenanthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene ...... 65996±93±2 Ð 0.2 Ð Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) ...... 7440±48±4 Ð 0.1 Ð Coke oven emissions; see § 1926.1129 ...... Copper ...... 7440±50±8 Fume (as Cu) ...... Ð 0.1 Ð Dusts and mists (as Cu) ...... Ð 1 Ð Corundum; see Emery. Cotton dust (raw) ...... Ð 1 Crag herbicide (Sesone) 136±78±7 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... ÐÐ Cresol, all isomers ...... 1319±77±3 5 22 X Crotonaldehyde ...... 123±73±9; 2 6 4170±30±3 Cumene ...... 98±82±8 50 245 X Cyanides (as CN) ...... Varies with Ð 5 X Compound Cyanogen ...... 460±19±5 10 ÐÐ Cyclohexane ...... 110±82±7 300 1050 Ð Cyclohexanol ...... 108±93±0 50 200 Ð Cyclohexanone ...... 108±94±1 50 200 Ð Cyclohexene ...... 110±83±8 300 1015 Ð Cyclonite ...... 121±82±4 Ð 1.5 X Cyclopentadiene ...... 542±92±7 75 200 Ð DDT, see Dichlorodiphenyltrichlor- oethane ...... DDVP, see Dichlorvos ..... 2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94±75±7 Ð 10 Ð Decaborane ...... 17702±41±9 0.05 0.3 X Demeton (Systox) ...... 8065±48±3 Ð 0.1 X Diacetone alcohol (4-Hy- droxy-4-methyl-2- pentanone) ...... 123±42±2 50 240 Ð 1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylenediamine. Diazomethane ...... 334±88±3 0.2 0.4 Ð Diborane ...... 19287±45±7 0.1 0.1 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00033 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

1,2-Dibromo-3- chloropropane (DBCP); see § 1926.1144 ...... 96±12±8 Ð 1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide. Dibutyl phosphate ...... 107±66±4 1 5 Ð Dibutyl phthalate ...... 84±74±2 Ð 5 Ð Dichloroacetylene ...... 7572±29±4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 Ð o-Dichlorobenzene ...... 95±50±1 (C)50 (C)300 Ð p-Dichlorobenzene ...... 106±46±7 75 450 Ð 3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine; see § 1926.1107 ...... 91±94±1 Dichlorodifluoromethane .. 75±71±8 1000 4950 Ð 1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ...... 118±52±5 Ð 0.2 Ð Dichlorodiphenyltrichloro- ethane (DDT) ...... 50±29±3 Ð 1 X 1,1-Dichloroethane ...... 75±34±3 100 400 Ð 1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride. 1,2-Dichloroethylene ...... 540±59±0 200 790 Ð Dichloroethyl ether ...... 111±44±4 (C)15 (C)90 X Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride. Dichloromonofluorometha- ne ...... 75±43±4 1000 4200 Ð 1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane 594±72±9 (C)10 (C)60 Ð 1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichloride. Dichlorotetrafluoroethane 76±14±2 1000 7000 Ð Dichlorvos (DDVP) ...... 62±73±7 Ð 1 X Dieldrin ...... 60±57±1 Ð 0.25 X Diethylamine ...... 109±89±7 25 75 Ð 2-Diethylaminoethanol ..... 100±37±8 10 50 X Diethylene triamine ...... 111±40±0 (C)10 (C)42 X Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether. Difluorodibromomethane 75±61±6 100 860 Ð Diglycidyl ether (DGE) ..... 2238±07±5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 Ð Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone. Diisobutyl ketone ...... 108±83±8 50 290 Ð Diisopropylamine ...... 108±18±9 5 20 X 4- Dimethylaminoazobenz- ene; see § 1926.1115 .. 60±11±7 Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal. Dimethyl acetamide ...... 127±19±5 10 35 X Dimethylamine ...... 124±40±3 10 18 Ð Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine. Dimethylaniline (N,N- Dimethylaniline) ...... 121±69±7 5 25 X Dimethylbenzene; see Xy- lene. Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl phosphate ...... 300±76±5 Ð 3 Ð Dimethylformamide ...... 68±12±2 10 30 X

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00034 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

2,6-Dimethyl-4- heptanone; see Diisobutyl ketone. 1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ..... 57±14±7 0.5 1 X Dimethylphthalate ...... 131±11±3 Ð 5 Ð Dimethyl sulfate ...... 77±78±3 1 5 X Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ...... 1 X (ortho) ...... 528±29±0 (meta) ...... 99±65±0 (para) ...... 100±25±4 Dinitro-o-cresol ...... 534±52±1 Ð 0.2 X Dinitrotoluene ...... 25321±14±6 Ð 1.5 X Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ...... 123±91±1 100 360 X Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ...... 92±52±4 0.2 1 Ð Diphenylamine ...... 122±39±4 Ð 10 Ð Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Meth- ylene bisphenyl isocyanate. Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ...... 34590±94±8 100 600 X Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di- (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate) 117±81±7 Ð 5 Ð Emery ...... 12415±34±8 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Endosulfan ...... 115±29±7 Ð 0.1 X Endrin ...... 72±20±8 Ð 0.1 X Epichlorohydrin ...... 106±89±8 5 19 X EPN ...... 2104±64±5 Ð 0.5 X 1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide. 2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol. Ethane ...... 74±84±0 E Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan. Ethanolamine ...... 141±43±5 3 6 Ð 2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ...... 110±80±5 200 740 X 2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate) ..... 111±15±9 100 540 X Ethyl acetate ...... 141±78±6 400 1400 Ð Ethyl acrylate ...... 140±88±5 25 100 X Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) .... 64±17±5 1000 1900 Ð Ethylamine ...... 75±04±7 10 18 Ð Ethyl amyl ketone (5- Methyl-3-heptanone) .... 541±85±5 25 130 Ð Ethyl benzene ...... 100±41±4 100 435 Ð Ethyl bromide ...... 74±96±4 200 890 Ð Ethyl butyl ketone (3- Heptanone) ...... 106±35±4 50 230 Ð Ethyl chloride ...... 75±00±3 1000 2600 Ð Ethyl ether ...... 60±29±7 400 1200 Ð Ethyl formate ...... 109±94±4 100 300 Ð Ethyl mercaptan ...... 75±08±1 0.5 1 Ð Ethyl silicate ...... 78±10±4 100 850 Ð Ethylene ...... 74±85±1 E Ethylene chlorohydrin ...... 107±07±3 5 16 X Ethylenediamine ...... 107±15±3 10 25 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00035 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Ethylene dibromide ...... 106±93±4 (C)25 (C)190 X Ethylene dichloride (1,2- Dichloroethane) ...... 107±06±2 50 200 Ð Ethylene glycol dinitrate .. 628±96±6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl cellosolve acetate. Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ...... 151±56±4 Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 ...... 75±21±8 Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-Dichloroethane. N-Ethylmorpholine ...... 100±74±3 20 94 X Ferbam ...... 14484±64±1 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Ferrovanadium dust ...... 12604±58±9 Ð 1 Ð Fibrous Glass. Total dust ...... Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Fluorides (as F) ...... Varies with Ð 2.5 Ð compound Fluorine ...... 7782±41±4 0.1 0.2 Ð Fluorotrichloromethane (Trichlorofluoromethan- e) ...... 75±69±4 1000 5600 Ð Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ...... 50±00±0 Formic acid ...... 64±18±6 5 9 Ð Furfural ...... 98±01±1 5 20 X Furfuryl alcohol ...... 98±00±0 50 200 Ð Gasoline ...... 8006±61±9 A 3 Ð Glycerin (mist) ...... 56±81±5 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... ÐÐ Glycidol ...... 556±52±5 50 150 Ð Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-Ethoxyethanol. Graphite, natural, respirable dust ...... 7782±42±5 (2)(2)(2) Graphite, synthetic ...... Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Guthion; see Azinphos methyl. Gypsum ...... 13397±24±5 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Hafnium ...... 7440±58±6 Ð 0.5 Ð Helium ...... 7440±59±7 E Heptachlor ...... 76±44±8 Ð 0.5 X Heptane (n-Heptane) ...... 142±82±5 500 2000 Ð Hexachloroethane ...... 67±72±1 1 10 X Hexachloronaphthalene ... 1335±87±1 Ð 0.2 X n-Hexane ...... 110±54±3 500 1800 Ð 2-Hexanone (Methyl n- butyl ketone) ...... 591±78±6 100 410 Ð Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) ...... 108±10±1 100 410 Ð sec-Hexyl acetate ...... 108±84±9 50 300 Ð Hydrazine ...... 302±01±2 1 1.3 X Hydrogen ...... 1333±74±0 E

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00036 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Hydrogen bromide ...... 10035±10±6 3 10 Ð Hydrogen chloride ...... 7647±01±0 (C)5 (C)7 Ð Hydrogen cyanide ...... 74±90±8 10 11 X Hydrogen fluoride (as F) 7664±39±3 3 2 Ð Hydrogen peroxide ...... 7722±84±1 1 1.4 Ð Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ...... 7783±07±5 0.05 .02 Ð Hydrogen sulfide ...... 7783±06±4 10 15 Ð Hydroquinone ...... 123±31±9 Ð 2 Ð Indene ...... 95±13±6 10 45 Ð Indium and compounds (as In) ...... 7440±74±6 Ð 0.1 Ð Iodine ...... 7553±56±2 (C)0.1 (C)1 Ð Iron oxide fume ...... 1309±37±1 Ð 10 Ð Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) ...... Varies with Ð 1 Ð compound Isoamyl acetate ...... 123±92±2 100 525 Ð Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary) ...... 123±51±3 100 360 Ð Isobutyl acetate ...... 110±19±0 150 700 Ð Isobutyl alcohol ...... 78±83±1 100 300 Ð Isophorone ...... 78±59±1 25 140 Ð Isopropyl acetate ...... 108±21±4 250 950 Ð Isopropyl alcohol ...... 67±63±0 400 980 Ð Isopropylamine ...... 75±31±0 5 12 Ð Isopropyl ether ...... 108±20±3 500 2100 Ð Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ...... 4016±14±2 50 240 Ð Kaolin ...... 1332±58±7 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Ketene ...... 463±51±4 0.5 0.9 Ð Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 ...... 7439±92±1 Limestone ...... 1317±65±3 Total dust ...... ÐÐ Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Lindane ...... 58±89±9 Ð 0.5 X Lithium hydride ...... 7580±67±8 Ð 0.025 Ð L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) ...... 68476±85±7 1000 1800 Magnesite ...... 546±93±0 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Magnesium oxide fume ... 1309±48±4 Total particulate ...... 15 ÐÐ Malathion ...... 121±75±5 Total dust ...... Ð 15 X Maleic anhydride ...... 108±31±6 0.25 Manganese compounds (as Mn) ...... 7439±96±5 Ð (C)5 Ð Manganese fume (as Mn) 7439±96±5 Ð (C)5 Ð Marble ...... 1317±65±3 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ...... 7439±97±6 0.1 X Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg) ..... 7439±97±6 Ð 0.01 X Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) .. 7439±97±6 Ð 0.1 X Mesityl oxide ...... 141±79±7 25 100 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Methane ...... 74±82±8 E Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan. Methoxychlor ...... 72±43±5 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð 2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ...... 109±86±4 25 80 X 2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve acetate) ...... 110±49±6 25 120 X Methyl acetate ...... 79±20±9 200 610 Ð Methyl acetylene (Propyne) ...... 74±99±7 1000 1650 Ð Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture (MAPP) .. 1000 1800 Ð Methyl acrylate ...... 96±33±3 10 35 X Methylal (Dimethoxy- methane) ...... 109±87±5 1000 3100 Ð Methyl alcohol ...... 67±56±1 200 260 Ð Methylamine ...... 74±89±5 10 12 Ð Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl carbinol. Methyl n-amyl ketone ...... 110±43±0 100 465 Ð Methyl bromide ...... 74±83±9 (C)20 (C)80 X Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone. Methyl cellosolve; see 2- Methoxyethanol. Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-Methoxyethyl acetate. Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052. Methyl chloroform (1,1,1- Trichloroethane) ...... 71±55±6 350 1900 Ð Methylcyclohexane ...... 108±87±2 500 2000 Ð Methylcyclohexanol ...... 25639±42±3 100 470 Ð o-Methylcyclohexanone ... 583±60±8 100 460 X Methylene chloride ...... 75±09±2 500 1740 Ð Methylenedianiline (MDA) 101±77±9 Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Butanone. Methyl formate ...... 107±31±3 100 250 Ð Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine) 60±34±4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X Methyl iodide ...... 74±88±4 5 28 X Methyl isoamyl ketone ..... 110±12±3 100 475 Ð Methyl isobutyl carbinol ... 108±11±2 25 100 X Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone. Methyl isocyanate ...... 624±83±9 0.02 0.05 X Methyl mercaptan ...... 74±93±1 0.5 1 Ð Methyl methacrylate ...... 80±62±6 100 410 Ð Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone. Methyl silicate ...... 681±84±5 (C)5 (C)30 Ð alpha-Methyl styrene ...... 98±83±9 (C)100 (C)480 Ð Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) ...... 101±68±8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 Ð Mica; see Silicates. Molybdenum (as Mo) ...... 7439±98±7 Soluble compounds .. Ð 5 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00038 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Insoluble compounds. Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Monomethyl aniline ...... 100±61±8 2 9 X Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydrazine. Morpholine ...... 110±91±8 20 70 X Naphtha (Coal tar) ...... 8030±30±6 100 400 Ð Naphthalene ...... 91±20±3 10 50 Ð alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 ...... 134±32±7 beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 ...... 91±59±8 Ð Neon ...... 7440±01±9 E Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) .... 13463±39±3 0.001 0.007 Ð Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as Ni) 7440±02±0 Ð 1 Ð Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ...... 7440±02±0 Ð 1 Ð Nicotine ...... 54±11±5 Ð 0.5 X Nitric acid ...... 7697±37±2 2 5 Ð Nitric oxide ...... 10102±43±9 25 30 Ð p-Nitroaniline ...... 100±01±6 1 6 X Nitrobenzene ...... 98±95±3 1 5 X p-Nitrochlorobenzene ...... 100±00±5 Ð 1 X 4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ...... 92±93±3 Nitroethane ...... 79±24±3 100 310 Ð Nitrogen ...... 7727±37±9 E Nitrogen dioxide ...... 10102±44±0 (C)5 (C)9 Ð Nitrogen trifluoride ...... 7783±54±2 10 29 Ð Nitroglycerin ...... 55±63±0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X Nitromethane ...... 75±52±5 100 250 Ð 1-Nitropropane ...... 108±03±2 25 90 Ð 2-Nitropropane ...... 79±46±9 25 90 Ð N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see § 1926.1116 ...... 62±79±9 Ð Nitrotoluene (all isomers) 5 30 X o-isomer ...... 88±72±2; m-isomer ...... 99±08±1; p-isomer ...... 99±99±0 Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin. Nitrous oxide ...... 10024±97±2 E Octachloronaphthalene .... 2234±13±1 Ð 0.1 X Octane ...... 111±65±9 400 1900 Ð Oil mist, mineral ...... 8012±95±1 Ð 5 Ð Osmium tetroxide (as Os) 20816±12±0 Ð 0.002 Ð Oxalic acid ...... 144±62±7 Ð 1 Ð Oxygen difluoride ...... 7783±41±7 0.05 0.1 Ð Ozone ...... 10028±15±6 0.1 0.2 Ð Paraquat, respirable dust 4685±14±7; Ð 0.5 X 1910±42±5; 2074±50±2 Parathion ...... 56±38±2 Ð 0.1 X Particulates not otherwise regulated. Total dust organic and inorganic ...... Ð 15 Ð PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54% chlorine). Pentaborane ...... 19624±22±7 0.005 0.01 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00039 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Pentachloronaphthalene .. 1321±64±8 Ð 0.5 X Pentachlorophenol ...... 87±86±5 Ð 0.5 X Pentaerythritol ...... 115±77±5 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Pentane ...... 109±66±0 500 1500 Ð 2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ...... 107±87±9 200 700 Ð Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene) ... 127±18±4 100 670 Ð Perchloromethyl mercaptan ...... 594±42±3 0.1 0.8 Ð Perchloryl fluoride ...... 7616±94±6 3 13.5 Ð Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber Sol- vent) ...... A 3 Ð Phenol ...... 108±95±2 5 19 X p-Phenylene diamine ...... 106±50±3 Ð 0.1 X Phenyl ether, vapor ...... 101±84±8 1 7 Ð Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ...... 1 7 Ð Phenylethylene; see Sty- rene. Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) ...... 122±60±1 10 60 Ð Phenylhydrazine ...... 100±63±0 5 22 X Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ...... 7786±34±7 Ð 0.1 X Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) ...... 75±44±5 0.1 0.4 Ð Phosphine ...... 7803±51±2 0.3 0.4 Ð Phosphoric acid ...... 7664±38±2 Ð 1 Ð Phosphorus (yellow) ...... 7723±14±0 Ð 0.1 Ð Phosphorus pentachloride 10026±13±8 Ð 1 Ð Phosphorus pentasulfide 1314±80±3 Ð 1 Ð Phosphorus trichloride ..... 7719±12±2 0.5 3 Ð Phthalic anhydride ...... 85±44±9 2 12 Ð Picric acid ...... 88±89±1 Ð 0.1 X Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3- indandione) ...... 83±26±1 Ð 0.1 Ð Plaster of Paris ...... 26499±65±0 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Platinum (as Pt) ...... 7440±06±4 Metal ...... Ð Ð Ð Soluble salts ...... Ð 0.002 Ð Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products A 2 Portland cement ...... 65997±15±1 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Respirable fraction ... 5 Ð Propane ...... 74±98±6 E Propargyl alcohol ...... 107±19±7 1 Ð X beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 ...... 57±57±8 n-Propyl acetate ...... 109±60±4 200 840 Ð n-Propyl alcohol ...... 71±23±8 200 500 Ð n-Propyl nitrate ...... 627±13±4 25 110 Ð Propylene dichloride ...... 78±87±5 75 350 Ð Propylene imine ...... 75±55±8 2 5 X Propylene oxide ...... 75±56±9 100 240 Ð Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00040 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Pyrethrum ...... 8003±34±7 Ð 5 Ð Pyridine ...... 110±86±1 5 15 Ð Quinone ...... 106±51±4 0.1 0.4 Ð RDX; see Cyclonite. Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble compounds ...... 7440±16±6 Ð 0.1 Ð Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds ...... 7440±16±6 Ð 0.001 Ð Ronnel ...... 299±84±3 Ð 10 Ð Rotenone ...... 83±79±4 Ð 5 Ð Rouge ...... Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Selenium compounds (as Se) ...... 7782±49±2 Ð 0.2 Ð Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) ...... 7783±79±1 0.05 0.4 Ð Silica, amorphous, precip- itated and gel ...... 112926±00±8 (2)(2)(2) Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth, containing less than 1% crystalline silica ...... 61790±53±2 (2)(2)(2) Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable dust ...... 14464±46±1 (2) (2)(2) Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust ...... 14808±60±7 (2)(2)(2) Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), respirable dust ...... 1317±95±9 (2)(2)(2) Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable dust ...... 15468±32±3 (2)(2)(2) Silica, fused, respirable dust ...... 60676±86±0 (2)(2)(2) Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica). Mica (respirable dust) 12001±26±2 (2)(2)(2) Soapstone, total dust (2)(2)(2) Soapstone, respirable dust ...... (2)(2)(2) Talc (containing asbestos); use asbestos limit; see 1926.58 ...... Talc (containing no asbestos), respirable dust ...... 14807±96± (2)(2)(2) 6 Tremolite, asbestiform; see 1926.58 ...... Silicon carbide ...... 409±21±2 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as Ag) ...... 7440±22±4 Ð 0.01 Ð Soapstone; see Silicates. Sodium fluoroacetate ...... 62±74±8 Ð 0.05 X Sodium hydroxide ...... 1310±73±2 Ð 2 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00041 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Starch ...... 9005±25±8 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Stibine ...... 7803±52±3 0.1 0.5 Ð Stoddard solvent ...... 8052±41±3 200 1150 Ð Strychnine ...... 57±24±9 Ð 0.15 Ð Styrene ...... 100±42±5 (C)100 (C)420 Ð Sucrose ...... 57±50±1 Total dust ...... ÐÐ Respirable fraction ... ÐÐ Sulfur dioxide ...... 7446±09±5 5 13 Ð Sulfur hexafluoride ...... 2551±62±4 1000 6000 Ð Sulfuric acid ...... 7664±93±9 Ð 1 Ð Sulfur monochloride ...... 10025±67±9 1 6 Ð Sulfur pentafluoride ...... 5714±22±7 0.025 0.25 Ð Sulfuryl fluoride ...... 2699±79±8 5 20 Ð Systox, see Demeton. 2,4,5-T (2,4,5- trichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 93±76±5 Ð 10 Ð Talc; see SilicatesÐ. Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ...... 7440±25±7 Ð 5 Ð TEDP (Sulfotep) ...... 3689±24±5 Ð 0.2 X Teflon decomposition products ...... A2 Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ...... 13494±80±9 Ð 0.1 Ð Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) ...... 7783±80±4 0.02 0.2 Ð Temephos ...... 3383±96±8 Total dust ...... ÐÐ Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ...... 107±49±3 Ð 0.05 X Terphenyls ...... 26140±60±3 (C)1 (C)9 Ð 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2- difluoroethane ...... 76±11±9 500 4170 Ð 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2- difluoroethane ...... 76±12±0 500 4170 Ð 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79±34±5 5 35 X Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene. Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetrachloride. Tetrachloronaphthalene ... 1335±88±2 Ð 2 X Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) .... 78±00±2 Ð 0.1 X Tetrahydrofuran ...... 109±99±9 200 590 Ð Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) 75±74±1 Ð 0.15 X Tetramethyl succinonitrile 3333±52±6 0.5 3 X Tetranitromethane ...... 509±14±8 1 8 Ð Tetryl (2,4,6- Trinitrophenylmethylnitr- amine) ...... 479±45±8 Ð 1.5 X Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) ...... 7440±28±0 Ð 0.1 X Thiram ...... 137±26±8 Ð 5 Ð Tin, inorganic compounds (except oxides) (as Sn) 7440±31±5 Ð 2 Ð Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ...... 7440±31±5 Ð 0.1 Ð Tin oxide (as Sn) ...... 21651±19±4 ÐÐÐ

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00042 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Total dust ...... ÐÐ Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Titanium dioxide ...... 13463±67±7 Total dust ...... Ð Ð Toluene ...... 108±88±3 200 750 Ð Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ...... 584±84±9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 Ð o-Toluidine ...... 95±53±4 5 22 X Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene. Tremolite; see Silicates. Tributyl phosphate ...... 126±73±8 Ð 5 Ð 1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloroform. 1,1,2-Trichloroethane ...... 79±00±5 10 45 X Trichloroethylene ...... 79±01±6 100 535 Ð Trichloromethane; see Chloroform. Trichloronaphthalene ...... 1321±65±9 Ð 5 X 1,2,3-Trichloropropane .... 96±18±4 50 300 Ð 1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2- trifluoroethane ...... 76±13±1 1000 7600 Ð Triethylamine ...... 121±44±8 25 100 Ð Trifluorobromomethane ... 75±63±8 1000 6100 Ð Trimethyl benzene ...... 25551±13±7 25 120 Ð 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid. 2,4,6- Trinitrophenylmethylnitr- amine; see Tetryl. 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) ...... 118±96±7 Ð 1.5 X Triorthocresyl phosphate 78±30±8 Ð 0.1 Ð Triphenyl phosphate ...... 115±86±6 Ð 3 Ð Tungsten (as W) ...... 7440±33±7 Insoluble compounds Ð 5 Ð Soluble compounds .. Ð 1 Ð Turpentine ...... 8006±64±2 100 560 Ð Uranium (as U) ...... 7440±61±1 Soluble compounds .. Ð 0.2 Ð Insoluble compounds Ð 0.2 Ð Vanadium ...... 1314±62±1 Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ...... Ð (C)0.5 Ð Fume (as V2 O5) ...... Ð (C)0.1 Ð Vegetable oil mist ...... Total dust ...... Ð Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð Ð Vinyl benzene; see Sty- rene. Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ...... 75±01±4 Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylo- nitrile. Vinyl toluene ...... 25013±15±4 100 480 Ð Warfarin ...... 81±81±2 Ð 0.1 Ð Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) ...... 1330±20±7 100 435 Ð Xylidine ...... 1300±73±8 5 25 X Yttrium ...... 7440±65±5 Ð 1 Ð Zinc chloride fume ...... 7646±85±7 Ð 1 Ð Zinc oxide fume ...... 1314±13±2 Ð 5 Ð

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00043 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.56 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐContinued

d a 3 b Skin Designa- Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m tion

Zinc oxide ...... 1314±13±2 Total dust ...... Ð 15 Ð Respirable fraction ... Ð 5 Ð Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ...... 7440±67±7 Ð 5

MINERAL DUSTS h [Reserved] i [Reserved] Substance mppcf (j) j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques. SILICA: k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula Crystalline is the amount determined from airborne samples, ex- Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the for- cept in those instances in which other methods have mula ...... 250 (k) been shown to be applicable. l [Reserved] %SiO2+5 m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not Cristobalite. otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Other- Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous wise Regulated. earth ...... 20 The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica) numerical value as follows: Mica ...... 20 A 1 [Reserved] Portland cement ...... 50 A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Soapstone ...... 20 Because these products decompose in part by hy- Talc (non-asbestiform) ...... 20 drolysis in alkaline solution, they can be quan- Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit ...... -- titatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending Graphite (natural) ...... 15 determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal. Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The com- mg/m3 position of these materials varies greatly and thus a whichever is single TLV for all types of these materials is no the smaller) longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aro- of total dust matics and additives should be determined to arrive < 1% SiO2 at the appropriate TLV. [Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the inorganic, and organic dusts as indicated by available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and examples in TLV's Appendix D] be within the requirements addressing explosion in Conversion factors. part 1926. mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per c.c. [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987; 58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997]

Footnotes § 1926.56 Illumination. 1 [Reserved] 2 See Mineral Dusts Table. (a) General. Construction areas, 3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.58. ramps, runways, corridors, offices, 4 See 1926.58. shops, and storage areas shall be light- * The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit. ed to not less than the minimum illu- ** As determined from breathing-zone air samples. mination intensities listed in Table D– a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contami- 3 while any work is in progress: nated air by volume at 25° C and 760 torr. b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; TABLE D±3ÐMINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES when listed with a ppm entry, it is approximate. IN FOOT-CANDLES c [Reserved] d The CAS number is for information only. Enforce- Foot-candles Area or operation ment is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than one metal compound, measured 5 ...... General construction area lighting. as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given- 3 ...... General construction areas, concrete -not CAS numbers for the individual compounds. placement, excavation and waste areas, e-f [Reserved] accessways, active storage areas, load- g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is ing platforms, refueling, and field main- 10 ppm TWA. tenance areas.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00044 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

TABLE D±3ÐMINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES sion in harmful quantities into the at- IN FOOT-CANDLESÐContinued mosphere where employees work. (d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex- Foot-candles Area or operation haust system shall be in operation con- 5 ...... Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways, tinually during all operations which it and exitways. is designed to serve. If the employee re- 5 ...... Tunnels, shafts, and general underground mains in the contaminated zone, the work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 foot-candles is required at tunnel and system shall continue to operate after shaft heading during drilling, mucking, the cessation of said operations, the and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved length of time to depend upon the indi- cap lights shall be acceptable for use in the tunnel heading.) vidual circumstances and effectiveness 10 ...... General construction plant and shops of the general ventilation system. (e.g., batch plants, screening plants, (2) Since dust capable of causing dis- mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts ability is, according to the best med- and active storerooms, barracks or liv- ical opinion, of microscopic size, tending quarters, locker or dressing rooms, ing to remain for hours in suspension mess halls, and indoor toilets and work- in still air, it is essential that the ex- rooms). 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. haust system be continued in operation for a time after the work process or (b) Other areas. For areas or oper- equipment served by the same shall ations not covered above, refer to the have ceased, in order to ensure the re- American National Standard A11.1– moval of the harmful elements to the 1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial required extent. For the same reason, Lighting, for recommended values of il- employees wearing respiratory equip- lumination. ment should not remove same immediately until the atmosphere seems § 1926.57 Ventilation. clear. (a) General. Whenever hazardous sub- (e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va- air outlet from every dust separator, pors, or gases exist or are produced in and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or the course of construction work, their gases collected by an exhaust or ven- concentrations shall not exceed the tilating system shall discharge to the limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When outside atmosphere. Collecting sys- ventilation is used as an engineering tems which return air to work area control method, the system shall be in- may be used if concentrations which stalled and operated according to the accumulate in the work area air do not requirements of this section. result in harmful exposure to employ- (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex- ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an haust ventilation when used as de- exhaust system shall be disposed of in scribed in (a) shall be designed to pre- such a manner that it will not result in vent dispersion into the air of dusts, harmful exposure to employees. fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con- (f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions centrations causing harmful exposure. applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- Such exhaust systems shall be so de- sive. A solid substance used in an abra- signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, sive blasting operation. or gases are not drawn through the (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- work area of employees. pirator constructed so that it covers (c) Design and operation. Exhaust the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and to protect the wearer from rebounding all necessary appurtenances, including abrasive. refuse receptacles, shall be so designed, (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete constructed, maintained and operated enclosure which rotates on an axis, or as to ensure the required protection by which has an internal moving tread to maintaining a volume and velocity of tumble the parts, in order to expose exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts, various surfaces of the parts to the ac- fumes, vapors, or gases from said tion of an automatic blast spray. equipment or process, and to convey (iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete them to suitable points of safe dis- enclosure in which blasting operations posal, thereby preventing their disper- are performed and where the operator

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00045 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

works inside of the room to operate the matic systems. Where flammable or ex- blasting nozzle and direct the flow of plosive dust mixtures may be present, the abrasive material. the construction of the equipment, in- (v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure cluding the exhaust system and all where the operator stands outside and electric wiring, shall conform to the operates the blasting nozzle through an requirements of American National opening or openings in the enclosure. Standard Installation of Blower and (vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and it will not cause harm or discomfort to Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1– an individual if it is inhaled for ex- 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of tended periods of time. this part. The blast nozzle shall be (vii) Dust collector. A device or com- bonded and grounded to prevent the bination of devices for separating dust build up of static charges. Where flam- from the air handled by an exhaust mable or explosive dust mixtures may ventilation system. be present, the abrasive blasting enclo- (viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A sure, the ducts, and the dust collector system for removing contaminated air shall be constructed with loose panels from a space, comprising two or more or explosion venting areas, located on of the following elements (A) enclosure sides away from any occupied area, to or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col- provide for pressure relief in case of ex- lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and plosion, following the principles set (E) discharge stack. forth in the National Fire Protection (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air Association Explosion Venting Guide. purifying respirator, commonly re- NFPA 68–1954. ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast- which removes most of the dust or cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust fume from the air passing through the ventilated in such a way that a contin- device. uous inward flow of air will be main- (x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in tained at all openings in the enclosure sizes capable of passing through the during the blasting operation. upper respiratory system to reach the (A) All air inlets and access openings lower lung passages. shall be baffled or so arranged that by (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en- the combination of inward air flow and closure where the pieces to be cleaned baffling the escape of abrasive or dust are positioned on a rotating table and particles into an adjacent work area are passed automatically through a se- will be minimized and visible spurts of ries of blast sprays. dust will not be observed. (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible (B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- application of an abrasive to a surface cient to provide prompt clearance of by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres- the dust-laden air within the enclosure sure, or centrifugal force. after the cessation of blasting. (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. (C) Before the enclosure is opened, (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings the blast shall be turned off and the ex- on the materials blasted are shattered haust system shall be run for a suffi- and pulverized during blasting oper- cient period of time to remove the ations and the dust formed will contain dusty air within the enclosure. particles of respirable size. The com- (D) Safety glass protected by screen- position and toxicity of the dust from ing shall be used in observation win- these sources shall be considered in dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- making an evaluation of the potential sives are used. health hazards. (E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles (ii) The concentration of respirable shall be installed in multiple sets at all dust or fume in the breathing zone of small access openings where dust the abrasive-blasting operator or any might escape, and shall be inspected other worker shall be kept below the regularly and replaced when needed. levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per- (1) Doors shall be flanged and tight tinent sections of this part. when closed. (iii) Organic abrasives which are (2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms combustible shall be used only in auto- shall be operable from both inside and

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00046 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

outside, except that where there is a other pertinent sections of this part small operator access door, the large and the nozzle and blast are not phys- work access door may be closed or ically separated from the operator in opened from the outside only. an exhaust-ventilated enclosure. (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter construction, installation, inspection, respirators, commonly referred to as and maintenance of exhaust systems dust-filter respirators, may be used for shall conform to the principles and re- short, intermittent, or occasional dust quirements set forth in American Na- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- dust collectors, or unloading shipments erning the Design and Operation of of sand at a receiving point when it is Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and not feasible to control the dust by en- ANSI Z33.1–1961. closure, exhaust ventilation, or other (a) When dust leaks are noted, re- means. The respirators used must be pairs shall be made as soon as possible. approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part (b) The static pressure drop at the ex- 84 for protection against the specific haust ducts leading from the equip- type of dust encountered. ment shall be checked when the instal- (iv) A respiratory protection program lation is completed and periodically as defined and described in § 1926.103, thereafter to assure continued satisfac- shall be established wherever it is nec- tory operation. Whenever an appre- essary to use respiratory protective ciable change in the pressure drop indi- equipment. cates a partial blockage, the system (v) Operators shall be equipped with shall be cleaned and returned to nor- heavy canvas or leather gloves and mal operating condition. aprons or equivalent protection to pro- (ii) In installations where the abra- tect them from the impact of abrasive is recirculated, the exhaust ven- sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to tilation system for the blasting enclo- protect against foot injury where sure shall not be relied upon for the re- heavy pieces of work are handled. moval of fines from the spent abrasive (A) Safety shoes shall conform to the instead of an abrasive separator. An requirements of American National abrasive separator shall be provided for Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot- the purpose. wear, Z41.1–1967. (iii) The air exhausted from blast- (B) Equipment for protection of the cleaning equipment shall be discharged eyes and face shall be supplied to the through dust collecting equipment. operator when the respirator design Dust collectors shall be set up so that does not provide such protection and to the accumulated dust can be emptied any other personnel working in the vi- and removed without contaminating cinity of abrasive blasting operations. other working areas. This equipment shall conform to the (5) Personal protective equipment. (i) requirements of § 1926.102. Employers must use only respirators (6) Air supply and air compressors. Air approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part for abrasive-blasting respirators must 84 for protecting employees from dusts be free of harmful quantities of dusts, produced during abrasive-blasting op- mists, or noxious gases, and must meet erations. the requirements for supplied-air qual- (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators ity and use specified in 29 CFR shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting 1910.134(i). operators: (7) Operational procedures and general (A) When working inside of blast- safety. Dust shall not be permitted to cleaning rooms, or accumulate on the floor or on ledges (B) When using silica sand in manual outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- blasting operations where the nozzle sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up and blast are not physically separated promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be from the operator in an exhaust venti- kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- lated enclosure, or sive which may create a slipping haz- (C) Where concentrations of toxic ard. dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting (8) Scope. This paragraph applies to may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or all operations where an abrasive is

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00047 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- this standard, consisting of abrasive matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- particles held together by artificial or trifugal force. It does not apply to natural bonds and used for peripheral steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or grinding. hydraulic cleaning methods where (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe work is done without the aid of abra- into which one or more branch pipes sives. enter and which connects such branch (g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- pipes to the remainder of the exhaust erations—(1) Definitions applicable to system. this paragraph— (i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or- (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of or complete enclosure around the which is not more than one forty- wheel or disc through which air enters eighth of their diameter for those up an exhaust system during operation. to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc diameter, and not more than one-six- grinder. A grinding machine carrying tieth of their diameter for those larger two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter, horizontal spindles upon the inside used for a multitude of operations var- ends of which are mounted abrasive iously known as cutting, cutting off, disc wheels used for grinding two sur- grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- faces simultaneously. ing, and the like. The wheels may be (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc ‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded grinder. A grinding machine carrying abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel an abrasive disc wheel upon one or centered’’ consisting of a steel disc both ends of a power-driven, rotatable with a rim of organic-bonded material moulded around the periphery, or of single horizontal spindle. the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All a steel disc with organic-bonded abra- power-driven rotatable wheels com- sive teeth or inserts mechanically se- posed all or in part of textile fabrics, cured around the periphery. wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, coated with abrasives on the periphery coated bands used for grinding, of the wheel for purposes of polishing, polishing, or buffing purposes. buffing, and light grinding. (iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- (xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- haust system piping that is connected en rotatable grinding, polishing, or directly to the hood or enclosure. buffing wheel mounted in such manner (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon that it may be manually manipulated. which the part to be ground or polished (xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- is placed. driven rotatable wheels made from (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro- wire or bristles, and used for scratch tatable discs faced with abrasive materials, artificial or natural, and used for cleaning and brushing purposes. grinding or polishing on the side of the (xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- assembled disc. driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres- buffing wheel mounted in such a man- sure caused by air flowing into a duct ner that the wheel with its supporting or hood. It is usually expressed in framework can be manipulated over inches of water gauge. stationary objects. (vii) Exhaust system. A system con- (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki- sisting of branch pipes connected to netic pressure in the direction of flow hoods or enclosures, one or more head- necessary to cause a fluid at rest to er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep- flow at a given velocity. It is usually arating solid contaminants from the expressed in inches of water gauge. air flowing in the system, and a dis- (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A charge stack to outside. grinding machine having a vertical, ro- (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv- tatable power-driven spindle carrying a en rotatable grinding or abrasive horizontal abrasive disc wheel. wheels, except disc wheels as defined in

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00048 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

(2) Application. Wherever dry grind- (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- buffing and polishing wheels mounted formed, and employee exposure, with- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or out regard to the use of respirators, ex- special-purpose machines shall have ceeds the permissible exposure limits not less than the minimum exhaust prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti- volume shown in Table D–57.2. nent sections of this part, a local exhaust ventilation system shall be pro- TABLE D±57.2ÐBUFFING AND POLISHING vided and used to maintain employee WHEELS exposures within the prescribed limits. Minimum (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. Wheel exhaust Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume (i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems inches cm) (feet 3/min.) shall be used, and such hoods shall be designed, located, and placed so that To 9 (22.86) ...... 2 (5.08) 300 Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ...... 3 (7.62) 500 the dust or dirt particles shall fall or Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 be projected into the hoods in the di- Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740 rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,040 discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,200 in such manner and in such direction (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- as to cause the dust and dirt particles zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall to be thrown into the operator’s be hooded to collect the dust or dirt breathing zone. generated by the grinding operation (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, and the hoods shall be connected to pedestals, benches, and special-purpose branch pipes having exhaust volumes grinding machines and abrasive cut- as shown in Table D–57.3. ting-off wheels shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volumes shown TABLE D±57.3ÐHORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE in Table D–57.1 with a recommended DISC GRINDER minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per Exhaust Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume minute in the main. The entry losses (ft. 3/min.) from all hoods except the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 Up to 12 (30.48) ...... 220 Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ...... 390 velocity pressure for a straight takeoff Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ...... 610 and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 880 takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical- spindle disc grinder hood is shown in (v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g) zontal double-spindle disc grinders of this section). shall have a hood enclosing the grinding chamber and the hood shall be con- TABLE D±57.1ÐGRINDING AND ABRASIVE nected to one or more branch pipes CUTTING-OFF WHEELS having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D–57.4. Wheel Minimum width, exhaust Wheel diameter, inches (cm) inches volume TABLE D±57.4ÐHORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE 3 (cm) (feet /min.) DISC GRINDER

To 9 (22.86) ...... 11¤2 (3.81) 220 Exhaust Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ...... 2 (5.08) 390 Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500 (ft. 3/min.) Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ...... 5 (12.7) 880 Up to 19 (48.26) ...... 610 Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,200 Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ...... 880 Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ...... 1,200 For any wheel wider than wheel diame- Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ...... 1,770 Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ...... 6,280 ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new (vi) Grinding wheels or discs for width to the width shown. vertical single-spindle disc grinders

Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43 shall be encircled with hoods to remove cm), the dust generated in the operation. then 4.5÷4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). The hoods shall be connected to one or

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00049 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

more branch pipes having exhaust vol- and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- umes as shown in Table D–57.5. tems, Z9.2–1960. (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, TABLE D±57.5ÐVERTICAL SPINDLE DISC polishing, and buffing operations shall GRINDER be tested in the manner described in American Standard Fundamentals One-half or more Disc not cov- of disc covered ered Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960. Disc diameter, inches Ex- Ex- (cm) Num- haust Num- haust (iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro- ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot 3/ vided with suitable dust collectors. min. min. (5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It Up to 20 (50.8) ...... 1 500 2 780 is the dual function of grinding and ab- Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro- 76.2) ...... 2 780 2 1,480 Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to tect the operator from the hazards of 134.62) ...... 2 1,770 4 3,530 bursting wheels as well as to provide a Over 53 to 72 (134.62 means for the removal of dust and dirt to 182.88) ...... 2 3,140 5 6,010 generated. All hoods shall be not less 1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or in structural strength than specified in equal distribution provided by other means. the American National Standard Safe- (vii) Grinding and polishing belts ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec- shall be provided with hoods to remove tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970. dust and dirt generated in the oper- (B) Due to the variety of work and ations and the hoods shall be connected types of grinding machines employed, to branch pipes having exhaust vol- it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- umes as shown in Table D–57.6. able to the particular machine in question, and such hoods shall be located as TABLE D±57.6ÐGRINDING AND POLISHING close as possible to the operation. BELTS (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, Exhaust pedestals, and bench grinders shall be Belts width, inches (cm) volume designed in accordance with figure D– (ft. 3/min.) 57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in Up to 3 (7.62) ...... 220 the figure shall be kept in working Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ...... 300 order and shall be adjusted within one- Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ...... 390 fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe- Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ...... 500 Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...... 610 riphery at all times. Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ...... 740 (iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be provided with exhaust booths as indi- (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind- cated in figure D–57.3. ers. Where cradles are used for han- (iv) Portable grinding operations, dling the parts to be ground, polished, whenever the nature of the work per- or buffed, requiring large partial enclo- mits, shall be conducted within a par- sures to house the complete operation, tial enclosure. The opening in the en- a minimum average air velocity of 150 closure shall be no larger than is actu- feet per minute shall be maintained ally required in the operation and an over the entire opening of the enclo- average face air velocity of not less sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also than 200 feet per minute shall be main- be exhausted in the same manner as tained. provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3) (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing (ix) Where the work is outside the and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- hood, air volumes must be increased as structed to conform as closely to figure shown in American Standard Fun- D–57.4 as the nature of the work will damentals Governing the Design and permit. Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op- Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). erations shall be performed within a (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys- partial enclosure similar to figure D– tems for grinding, polishing, and buff- 57.5. The operator shall be positioned ing operations should be designed in outside the working face of the opening accordance with American Standard of the enclosure. The face opening of Fundamentals Governing the Design the enclosure should not be any greater

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00050 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

in area than that actually required for lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7. the performance of the operation and The openings for passing the work into the average air velocity into the work- the grinding chamber should be kept as ing face of the enclosure shall not be small as possible, but must never be less than 150 feet per minute. less than twice the area of the branch (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin- outlets. dle disc grinders shall be constructed (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders to conform as closely as possible to the shall be encircled with a hood so con- hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen- structed that the heavy dust is drawn tial that there be a space between the off a surface of the disc and the lighter back of the wheel and the hood, and a dust exhausted through a continuous space around the periphery of the wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in slot at the top of the hood as shown in order to permit the suction to act figure D–57.1. around the wheel periphery. The open- (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods ing on the side of the disc shall be no shall be constructed as close to the op- larger than is required for the grinding eration as possible. The hood should operation, but must never be less than extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch twice the area of the branch outlet. (2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro- (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc vided on either side. Figure D–57.8 grinders shall have a hood encircling shows a typical hood for a belt oper- the wheels and grinding chamber simi- ation.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00051 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00052 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57 Note ducts as shown at the left. at left. When one-half or more of the disc can be hooded, use exhaust When no hood can be used over disc, use exhaust ducts as shown 500 780 780 780 3,140 3,530 1,770 6,010 1,480 /min 3 ft hausted at Volume Ex- 4,500 ft/min (13.97) (10.795) 2 6 (15.24) 7 (17.78) 8 (20.32) 6 (15.24) 4 (10.16) 4 (10.16) 4 (10.16) ¤ Dia. 4 1 ¤ 1

E 2 4 2 5 2 2 2 5 1 4 2 Exhaust No Pipes 30 (76.2) 20 (50.8) 30 (76.2) 20 (50.8) 20 (50.8) Max. 72 (182.88) 53 (134.62) 72 (182.88) 72 (182.88) -inch (1.27 cm) slot width. 2 ¤ 1 inches (cm)

D Dia. Min...... Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch pressure. Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/minÐ ...... Over 20 (50.8) Over 30 (76.2) Over 53 (134.62) Over 20 (50.8) Over 30 (76.2) Over 53 (134.62)

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00053 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Exhaust outlet, Volume of Diameter inches (centi- air at Width, Max meters) E 4,500 ft/ Min= d Max= D min

9 (22.86) 11¤2 (3.81) 3 220 Over 9 (22.86) ...... 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390 Over 16 (40.64) ...... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 41¤2 500 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610 Over 24 (60.96) ...... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00054 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

Figure D±57.3ÐA Method of Applying an Exhaust Enclosure to Swing-Frame Grinders

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00055 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as much as possible

STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of Diameter Exhaust outlet, air at Width, Max inches E 4,500 ft/ Min= d Max= D min

9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31¤2 (3.81) 300 Over 9 (22.86) ...... 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500 Over 16 (40.64) ...... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 51¤2 740 Over 24 (60.96) ...... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 61¤2 1.040 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200 Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00056 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

Figure D±57.5ÐCradle Polishing or Grinding Enclosure

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00057 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff

Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex- Exhaust E, hausted at dia. inches 4,500 ft/min Min. Max. (cm) ft 3/min

12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220 Over 12 (30.48) ...... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880

NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as described in 9.1. Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00058 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume exhaust at 4,500 ft/ Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft 3/ min

19 (48.26) 1 5 610 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ``W'' permits, exhaust ducts should be as near heaviest grinding as possible. Over 25 (63.5) ...... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770 Over 53 (134.62) ...... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00059 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Figure D±57.8.ÐA Typical Hood for a Belt Operation

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff

Exhaust (iii) Spray room. A spray room is a Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume. ft.1/min room in which spray-finishing operations not conducted in a spray booth Up to 3 (7.62) ...... 220 are performed separately from other 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ...... 300 areas. 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ...... 390 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ...... 500 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min- 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...... 610 imum maintained velocity is the veloc- 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ...... 740 ity of air movement which must be Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min maintained in order to meet minimum main. specified requirements for health and Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. safety. (2) Location and application. Spray (6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- booths or spray rooms are to be used to scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- enclose or confine all operations. sures and systems in removing dust, Spray-finishing operations shall be lo- dirt, fumes, and gases generated cated as provided in sections 201 through the grinding, polishing, or through 206 of the Standard for Spray buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- Finishing Using Flammable and Com- als. bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969. (h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- (3) Design and construction of spray nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) (i) Spray booths shall be de- Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- booths. ishing operations are employment of signed and constructed in accordance methods wherein organic or inorganic with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6) materials are utilized in dispersed form through (10) (see sections 301–304 and for deposit on surfaces to be coated, 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin- treated, or cleaned. Such methods of ishing Using Flammable and Combus- deposit may involve either automatic, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for manual, or electrostatic deposition but general construction specifications. do not include metal spraying or met- For a more detailed discussion of fun- allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller damentals relating to this subject, see coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ANSI Z9.2–1960 spray washing and degreasing as con- (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip- ducted in self-contained washing and ment, and other sources of ignition degreasing machines or systems. shall conform to the requirements of (ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310 fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- Finishing Using Flammable and Com- ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.) mable and Combustible Materials, (B) In no case shall combustible ma- NFPA No. 33–1969). terial be used in the construction of a

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00060 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material connected to it. having similar properties. (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro- the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe- exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank. m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz- exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits. booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in- booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef- (iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber. dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including § 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry, and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma- ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial. tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non- (A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters. stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in (see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii) 1969), and shall only be in a location of this section. easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con- (B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths. stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using (iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials, booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance within which intimate contact of con- with the following: taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential (B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im- spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean- vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para- removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section. exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved] (v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con- used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00061 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di- noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg- (B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na- accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv- ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a (C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided. quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis- operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the (iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through (A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame- (B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter. in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven- of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim- volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion. tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements. details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the (C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper- construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which (D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7 flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the lent fastening security. object being sprayed.

TABLE D±57.7ÐMINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS

Airflow velocities, f.p.m. Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth Crossdraft, f.p.m. Design Range

Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...... 50±75 without operator...... 100 small booth ...... 75±125 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ...... Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth ...... 75±125

...... 150 small booth ...... 125±175 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ...... Up to 100 .... 150 large booth ...... 125±175

...... 200 small booth ...... 150±250

NOTES:

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00062 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width. (2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted. (3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas. (4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ``Design.'' However, booths operating with velocities shown in the column headed ``Range'' are in compliance with this standard.

(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D±57.8ÐLOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTSÐContinued total air volume exhausted through a spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet Lower ex- per gallon plosive solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of of vapor of limit in per- the lower explosive limit of the solvent Solvent liquid at cent by ° volume of being sprayed. An example of the meth- 70 F air at 70° F (21.11° C). ° od of calculating this volume is given (21.11 C) below. Benzene ...... 36.8 1 1.4 Butyl Acetate (n) ...... 24.8 1.7 Example: To determine the lower explosive Butyl Alcohol (n) ...... 35.2 1.4 limits of the most common solvents used in Butyl Cellosolve ...... 24.8 1.1 spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 Cellosolve ...... 33.6 1.8 gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Cellosolve Acetate ...... 23.2 1.7 gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the Cyclohexanone ...... 31.2 1 1.1 1,1 Dichloroethylene ...... 42.4 5.9 lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...... 42.4 9.7 volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Ethyl Acetate ...... 32.8 2.5 vent will be diminished by the quantity of Ethyl Alcohol ...... 55.2 4.3 solids and nonflammables contained in the Ethyl Lactate ...... 28.0 1 1.5 finish. Methyl Acetate ...... 40.0 3.1 To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl Alcohol ...... 80.8 7.3 feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Methyl Cellosolve ...... 40.8 2.5 Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...... 36.0 1.8 lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ...... 30.4 1.5 plosive limit, apply the following formula: Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) .. 22.4 0.9 Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Dilution volume required per gallon of Solvent—Stoddard Solvent 23.2 1.0 solvent=4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of Propyl Acetate (n) ...... 27.2 2.8 vapor per gallon)÷ LEL Propyl Acetate (iso) ...... 28.0 1.1 Propyl Alcohol (n) ...... 44.8 2.1 Using toluene as the solvent. Propyl Alcohol (iso) ...... 44.0 2.0 (1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col- Toluene ...... 30.4 1.4 umn 2, is 1.4 percent. Turpentine ...... 20.8 0.8 (2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from Xylene (o) ...... 26.4 1.0 Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per 1 At 212° F (100 °C). gallon. (iii)(A) When an operator is in a (3) Dilution volume required = booth downstream of the object being 4 (100–1.4) 30.4÷ 1.4=8,564 cubic feet. sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or (4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of other type of respirator approved by required ventilation, multiply the dilution NIOSH under 42 CFR Part 84 for the volume required per gallon of solvent by the material being sprayed should be used number of gallons of solvent evaporated per by the operator. minute. (B) Where downdraft booths are provided with doors, such doors shall be TABLE D±57.8ÐLOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting. SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air, Lower ex- free of contamination from adjacent Cubic feet plosive industrial exhaust systems, chimneys, per gallon limit in per- Solvent of vapor of cent by stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a liquid at volume of spray booth or room in quantities 70° F ° (21.11° C). air at 70 F (21.11° C) equal to the volume of air exhausted through the spray booth. Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re- Acetone ...... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing Amyl Acetate (iso) ...... 21.6 1 1.0 Amyl Alcohol (n) ...... 29.6 1.2 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall Amyl Alcohol (iso) ...... 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00063 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

booth or room is in use for spraying. sources of heat may be employed to The velocity of air through such doors, meet this requirement. dampers, or louvers shall not exceed (C) No means of heating make-up air 200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- shall be located in a spray booth. teristics are such that the required air (D) Where make-up air is heated by flow through the booth will be pro- coal or oil, the products of combustion vided, higher velocities through the shall not be allowed to mix with the doors, dampers, or louvers may be make-up air, and the products of com- used. bustion shall be conducted outside the (iii) (A) Where the air supply to a building through a flue terminating at spray booth or room is filtered, the fan a point remote from all points where static pressure shall be calculated on make-up air enters the building. the assumption that the filters are (E) Where make-up air is heated by dirty to the extent that they require gas, and the products of combustion cleaning or replacement. are not mixed with the make-up air but (B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are conducted through an independent erned by test data supplied by the man- flue to a point outside the building re- ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage mote from all points where make-up shall be installed to show the pressure air enters the building, it is not nec- drop across the filters. This gage shall essary to comply with paragraph be marked to show the pressure drop at (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section. which the filters require cleaning or re- (F) Where make-up air to any manu- placement. Filters shall be replaced or ally operated spray booth or room is cleaned whenever the pressure drop heated by gas and the products of com- across them becomes excessive or bustion are allowed to mix with the whenever the air flow through the face supply air, the following precautions of the booth falls below that specified must be taken: in Table D–57.7. (1) The gas must have a distinctive (iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work- air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the performed, shall be provided in all make-up air. places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply may be expected to remain below 55°F. to the make-up air heater burners (12.77°C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000 of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied. than 65°F. (18.33°C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham- up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the more than 10°F. below room tempera- spray booth or room. ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con- Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov- (B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para- placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks, the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location. building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i) than 65°F. (18.33°C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper- system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma- heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00064 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

such liquids, for the purpose of clean- Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34– ing or altering the surface or adding to 1966, National Fire Protection Associa- or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mixing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol- their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav- troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m. 3) shall quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef- (ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ- tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po- this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra- conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex- struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex- Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.) tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter- (2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a (ii) Determination of class. Class is de- threshhold limit value (TLV) in p.p.m. termined by two factors, hazard poten- or a mist with a TLV in mg./m.3, the tial designated by a letter from A to D, TLV indicating the greater hazard shall inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or be used (for example, A takes prece- mist evolution designated by a number dence over B or C; B over C; C over D). from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3). NOTE A:

(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on (c1÷TLV1)+(c2÷TLV2)+(c3÷TLV3)+; . . . a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the (cN÷TLVN)1 severity of the hazard associated with Where: the substance contained in the tank be- c = Concentration measured at the operation cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo- in p.p.m. sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist produced therefrom. The toxic hazard TABLE D±57.9ÐDETERMINATION OF HAZARD is determined from the concentration, POTENTIAL measured in parts by volume of a gas Toxicity group or vapor, per million parts by volume of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Hazard potential Gas or Mist (mg./ Flash point in vapor 3 ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air (p.p.m.) m ) degrees F. (C.) (mg./m. 3), below which ill effects are A ...... 0±10 0±0.1 ...... unlikely to occur to the exposed work- B ...... 11±100 0.11±1.0 Under 100 er. The concentrations shall be those in (37.77) § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of C ...... 101±500 1.1±10 100 200 (37.77±93.33) this part. D ...... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200 (iv) The relative fire or explosion (93.33) hazard is measured in degrees Fahr- enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo- point of the substance in the tank. De- lution is a numerical index, on a scale tailed information on the prevention of of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the fire hazards in dip tanks may be found relative capacity of the tank to in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00065 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale— tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table (A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc- (B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal- the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3). grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter- (C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo- liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates, in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be slow, or nil; and used.

TABLE D±57.10ÐDETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1

Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil- 2 Gassing 3 Rate °F. (C.) ing point Relative evaporation

1 ...... Over 200 (93.33) 0±20 Fast ...... High. 2 ...... 150±200 (65.55± 21±50 Medium ...... Medium. 93.33) 3 ...... 94±149 (34.44±65) 51±100 Slow ...... Low. 4 ...... Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ...... Nil. 1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to prevent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the workroom is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry- out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is indicated, depending upon observed conditions. 2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0±3 hours; Medium: 3±12 hours; Slow: 12±50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours. 3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.

(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of used to control potential exposures to hoods which workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank; (i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo- quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman, the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front Methods of ventilation are discussed in of all hood openings; and American National Standard Fun- damentals Governing the Design and (C) Are completely enclosed on at Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing (4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood. velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet 57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve- disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open- ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood. ery.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00066 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

TABLE D±57.11ÐCONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS

Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2 Class Lateral ex- One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open side sides open sides sides

B±1 and A±2 ...... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use A±3 2, B±1, B±2, and C±1 ...... 75 100 100 125 175 A±3, C±2, and D±1 3 ...... 65 90 75 100 150 B±4 2, C±3, and D±2 3 ...... 50 75 50 75 125 A±4, C±4, D±3 3, and D±4 4 ...... 1 See Table D±57.12 for computation of ventilation rate. 2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes. 3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class. 4 General room ventilation required.

(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42 hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de- tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re- air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo- quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol- square foot of tank area in order to lowing criteria: maintain the required control velocity The supply air volume plus the en- shall be determined from Table D–57.12 (1) for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent (W) to tank length (L). The total quan- of the exhaust volume. tity of air in cubic feet per minute re- (2) The velocity of the supply air- quired to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con- be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area. determined from Table D–57.12.

TABLE D±57.12ÐMINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST

C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol- Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D± lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)).1, 2 57.11) 0.0±0.09 0.1±0.24 0.25±0.49 0.5±0.99 1.0±2.0

Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle.2 Also for a manifold along tank centerline.3

50 ...... 50 60 75 90 100 75 ...... 75 90 110 130 150 100 ...... 100 125 150 175 200 150 ...... 150 190 225 260 300

Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.

50 ...... 75 90 100 110 125 75 ...... 110 130 150 170 190 100 ...... 150 175 200 225 250 150 ...... 225 260 300 340 375 1 It is not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0. It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1/2 the circumference, use W/L=1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L=0.5. 2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled. 3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a tank. Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can frequently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00067 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof, shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank (4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec- allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac- with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this hood. section. (5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re- measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open- shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system. control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para- able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing (iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol- hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure: definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood. considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans- per minute necessary to be exhausted formations. through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe. than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans- between the bottom edges of the hood formations. and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip- (v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, con- cluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en- tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses. mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis- equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack. the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys- creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina- (5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem- means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys- above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any closed as completely as possible. The tank. inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and discharge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac- Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In- (6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man- vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula- face tension depressive agents added to tions.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00068 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be- which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes, tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi- is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry. is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im- corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami- months operation, or after a prolonged nants. shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi- ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing 1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids Conference of Governmental Industrial other than water shall be considered a satisfactory substitute where small Hygienists.) parts are cleaned, plated, or acid (ii) The exhaust system shall dis- dipped in open tanks and rapid work is charge to the outer air in such a man- required. ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en- hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef- (iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102. range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami- room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade- shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must (9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac- ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz- and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami- aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00069 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini- 1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping. (vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be 25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors. with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained 48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health, natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter (viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine treatment shall not be allowed to work if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) at their regular operations until so au- of this section are exceeded, or if the thorized by a physician. Any small oxygen concentration is less than 19.5 skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open percent. sores which are found or reported shall be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec- the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em- periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank, trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and (ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank. uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos- alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as 10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus; (x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac- clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of (xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con- hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma- shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin, (10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The (11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com- stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00070 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur- welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur- metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re- ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors, health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod- ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip- section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching, flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip- equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi- after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol- thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or pors. surface coating operations. (12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper- vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper- the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting, the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys, of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also 36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal- (ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper- heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations. combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica- as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe- necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im- tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread- used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating, be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means; taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper- any other heater when chlorinated or ations. fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993; (iii) Heating elements shall be so de- 61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8, 1998] signed and maintained that their surface temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved] solvent or mixture to decompose, break down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication. quantity of vapor. (iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 2 struction work under this section are iden- 4 square feet (0.368 m ) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter. degreasing, shall be equipped with suitable cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] near the bottom of each tank or still. These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline. gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as (13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00071 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on (ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record- surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of MDA; this section. (iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall (iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply: age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)- cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average. are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist- (2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee. use, and handling of products con- Authorized person means any person taining MDA where initial monitoring specifically authorized by the employer indicates that the product is not capa- whose duties require the person to ble of releasing MDA in excess of the enter a regulated area, or any person action level under the expected condi- entering such an area as a designated tions of processing, use, and handling representative of employees for the which will cause the greatest possible purpose of exercising the right to ob- release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure serve monitoring and measuring proce- to MDA’’ can occur. dures under paragraph (p) of this sec- (3) Except as provided in paragraph tion, or any other person authorized by (a)(7) of this section, this section does the Act or regulations issued under the not apply to the processing, use, and Act. handling of products containing MDA where objective data are reasonably re- Container means any barrel, bottle, lied upon which demonstrate the prod- can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, uct is not capable of releasing MDA storage tank, commercial packaging or under the expected conditions of proc- the like, but does not include piping essing, use, and handling which will systems. cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an (4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and (a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate- tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA. ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling, sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate- (e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the (5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA: (a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume. weight or volume; and (6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar- (a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra- not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or taining MDA.’’ volume. (7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00072 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101– Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA. ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex- Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits, MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ ployee were not using respirators or can occur. protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period. fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em- (i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration (ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil- pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight- or design during end use; and ed average and a STEL of one hundred (iii) Where applicable, is an item parts per billion (100 ppb). which is fully cured by virtue of having (d) Communication among employers. been subjected to the conditions (tem- On multi-employer worksites, an em- perature, time) necessary to complete ployer performing work involving the the desired chemical reaction. application of MDA or materials con- Historical monitoring data means mon- taining MDA for which establishment itoring data for construction jobs that of one or more regulated areas is re- meet the following conditions: quired shall inform other employers on (i) The data upon which judgments the site of the nature of the employer’s are based are scientifically sound and work with MDA and of the existence of, were collected using methods that are and requirements pertaining to, regu- sufficiently accurate and precise; lated areas. (ii) The processes and work practices (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written that were in use when the historical plan. (i) A written plan for emergency monitoring data were obtained are es- situations shall be developed for each sentially the same as those to be used construction operation where there is a during the job for which initial moni- possibility of an emergency. The plan toring will not be performed; shall include procedures where the em- (iii) The characteristics of the MDA- ployer identifies emergency escape containing material being handled routes for his employees at each con- when the historical monitoring data struction site before the construction were obtained are the same as those on operation begins. Appropriate portions the job for which initial monitoring of the plan shall be implemented in the will not be performed; event of an emergency. (iv) Environmental conditions pre- (ii) The plan shall specifically pro- vailing when the historical monitoring vide that employees engaged in cor- data were obtained are the same as recting emergency conditions shall be those on the job for which initial moni- equipped with the appropriate personal toring will not be performed; and protective equipment and clothing as (v) Other data relevant to the oper- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this ations, materials, processing, or em- section until the emergency is abated. ployee exposures covered by the excep- (iii) The plan shall specifically in- tion are substantially similar. The clude provisions for alerting and evacu- data must be scientifically sound, the ating affected employees as well as the characteristics of the MDA containing applicable elements prescribed in 29 material must be similar and the envi- CFR 1910.38, ‘‘Employee emergency ronmental conditions comparable. plans and fire prevention plans.’’ 4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means (2) Alerting employees. Where there is the chemical; 4,4′- the possibility of employee exposure to

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00073 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months. in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied- (f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the (i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area. sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon- air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo- zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs minute sampling period. but above the action level. (ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para- one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em- shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action job classification in each work area level, the employer may discontinue where exposure to MDA may occur. the monitoring for that employee, except as otherwise required by para- (iii) Where the employer can docu- graph (f)(5) of this section. ment that exposure levels are equiva- (ii) If the periodic monitoring re- lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec- work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures, required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu- employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7 during one shift. days apart, are below the action level (2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section. rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em- MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs (i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac- above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi- under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the (ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad- that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures. be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring (3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations veals employee exposure at or above of MDA. the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer shall, within monitoring for each such employee at 15 working days after the receipt of the least every six (6) months. results of any monitoring performed

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00074 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

under this standard, notify each em- (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi- ployee of these results, in writing, ei- neering controls and work practices and ther individually or by posting of re- respirators. (i) The employer shall use sults in an appropriate location that is one or any combination of the fol- accessible to affected employees. lowing control methods to achieve (ii) The written notification required compliance with the permissible expo- by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c) shall contain the corrective action of this section: being taken by the employer or any (A) Local exhaust ventilation other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems; ployee exposure to or below the PELs, wherever the PELs are exceeded. (B) General ventilation systems; (8) Visual monitoring. The employer (C) Use of workpractices; or shall make routine inspections of em- (D) Other engineering controls such ployee hands, face and forearms poten- as isolation and enclosure that the As- tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sistant Secretary can show to be fea- dermal exposures reported by the em- sible. ployee must be referred to the appro- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering priate medical personnel for observa- controls and work practices ‘‘which tion. If the employer determines that can be instituted are not sufficient to the employee has been exposed to MDA reduce employee exposure to or below the employer shall: the PELs, the employer shall use them (i) Determine the source of exposure; to reduce employee exposure to the (ii) Implement protective measures lowest levels achievable by these con- to correct the hazard; and trols and shall supplement them by the (iii) Maintain records of the correc- use of respiratory protective devices tive actions in accordance with para- which comply with the requirements of graph (n) of this section. paragraph (i) of this section. (g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en- ployer shall establish regulated areas gaged in spray application methods, where airborne concentrations of MDA respiratory protection must be used in exceed or can reasonably be expected addition to feasible engineering con- to exceed, the permissible exposure trols and work practices to reduce em- limits. ployee exposure to or below the PELs. (ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to not be used to remove MDA, unless the MDA’’ the employer shall establish compressed air is used in conjunction those work areas as regulated areas. with an enclosed ventilation system (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall designed to capture the dust cloud cre- be demarcated from the rest of the ated by the compressed air. workplace in a manner that minimizes (4) Employee rotation. The employer the number of persons potentially ex- shall not use employee rotation as a posed. means of compliance with the exposure (3) Access. Access to regulated areas limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of shall be limited to authorized persons. this section. (4) Personal protective equipment and (5) Compliance program. (i) The em- clothing. Each person entering a regulated area shall be supplied with, and ployer shall establish and implement a required to use, the appropriate per- written program to reduce employee sonal protective clothing and equip- exposure to or below the PELs by ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) means of engineering and work prac- and (j) of this section. tice controls, as required by paragraph (5) Prohibited activities. The employer (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res- shall ensure that employees do not eat, piratory protection where permitted drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or under this section. apply cosmetics in regulated areas.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00075 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) Upon request this written pro- (ii) Work operations, such as mainte- gram shall be furnished for examina- nance and repair activities and spray- tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- application processes, for which engi- retary, the Director, affected employ- neering and work-practice controls are ees and designated employee represent- not feasible. atives. The employer shall review and, (iii) Work operations for which fea- as necessary, update such plans at sible engineering and work-practice least once every 12 months to make controls are not yet sufficient to re- certain they reflect the current status duce employee exposure to or below the of the program. PELs. (i) Respiratory protection. (1) General. For employees who use respirators re- (iv) Emergencies. quired by this section, the employer (2) Respirator program. The employer must provide respirators that comply must implement a respiratory protec- with the requirements of this para- tion program in accordance with 29 graph. Respirators must be used dur- CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except ing: (d)(1)(iii), and (f) through (m). (i) Periods necessary to install or im- (3) Respirator selection. (i) The em- plement feasible engineering and work- ployer must select the appropriate res- practice controls. pirator from Table 1 of this section.

TABLE 1ÐRESPIRATORY PROTECTION FOR MDA

Airborne concentration of MDA or condition of use Respirator type

a. Less than or equal to 10 × PEL ...... (1) Half-Mask Respirator with HEPA1 Cartridge.2 b. Less than or equal to 50 × PEL ...... (1) Full facepiece Respirator with HEPA1 Cartridge or Canister.2 c. Less than or equal to 1000 × PEL ...... (1) Full facepiece powered air-purifying respirator with HEPA1 cartridge.2 d. Greater than 1000 × PEL or unknown (1) Self-contained breathing apparatus with full facepiece in positive pressure concentration. mode. (2) Full facepiece positive pressure demand supplied-air respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply. e. Escape ...... (1) Any full facepiece air-purifying respirator with HEPA1 cartridges.2 (2) Any positive pressure or continuous flow self-contained breathing apparatus with full facepiece or hood. f. Firefighting ...... (1) Full facepiece self-contained breathing apparatus in positive pressure demand mode.

NOTE: Respirators assigned for higher environmental concentrations may be used at lower concentrations. 1 High Efficiency Particulate in Air filter (HEPA) means a filter that is at least 99.97 percent efficient against mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers or larger. 2 Combination HEPA/Organic Vapor Cartridges shall be used whenever MDA in liquid form or a process requiring heat is used.

(ii) An employee who cannot use a (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot negative-pressure respirator must be coverings; and given the option of using a positive- (iii) Face shields, chemical goggles; pressure respirator, or a supplied-air or respirator operated in the continuous- (iv) Other appropriate protective flow or pressure-demand mode. equipment which comply with 29 CFR (j) Protective work clothing and equip- 1910.133. ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em- (2) Removal and storage. (i) The employees are subject to dermal exposure ployer shall ensure that, at the end of to MDA, where liquids containing MDA their work shift, employees remove can be splashed into the eyes, or where MDA-contaminated protective work airborne concentrations of MDA are in clothing and equipment that is not excess of the PEL, the employer shall routinely removed throughout the day provide, at no cost to the employee, and ensure that the employee uses, ap- in change areas provided in accordance propriate protective work clothing and with the provisions in paragraph (k) of equipment which prevent contact with this section. MDA such as, but not limited to: (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full- body work clothing;

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00076 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

(ii) The employer shall ensure that, shall be repaired and replaced imme- during their work shift, employees re- diately. move all other MDA-contaminated pro- (k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) tective work clothing or equipment be- General. (i) The employer shall provide fore leaving a regulated area. decontamination areas for employees (iii) The employer shall ensure that required to work in regulated areas or no employee takes MDA-contaminated required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- work clothing or equipment out of the tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- decontamination areas, except those tion: In lieu of the decontamination employees authorized to do so for the area requirement specified in para- purpose of laundering, maintenance, or graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- disposal. ployer may permit employees engaged (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth- in small scale, short duration oper- ing or equipment shall be placed and ations, to clean their protective cloth- stored and transported in sealed, im- ing or dispose of the protective cloth- permeable bags, or other closed imper- ing before such employees leave the meable containers. (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated area where the work was performed. protective work clothing or equipment (ii) Change areas. The employer shall which are to be taken out of decon- ensure that change areas are equipped tamination areas or the workplace for with separate storage facilities for pro- cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, tective clothing and street clothing, in shall bear labels warning of the hazards accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). of MDA. (iii) Equipment area. The equipment (3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The area shall be supplied with imper- employer shall provide the employee meable, labeled bags and containers for with clean protective clothing and the containment and disposal of con- equipment. The employer shall ensure taminated protective clothing and that protective work clothing or equip- equipment. ment required by this paragraph is (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible, cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- shower facilities shall be provided placed at intervals appropriate to which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3) maintain its effectiveness. wherever the possibility of employee (ii) The employer shall prohibit the exposure to airborne levels of MDA in removal of MDA from protective work excess of the permissible exposure clothing or equipment by blowing, limit exists. shaking, or any methods which allow (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA MDA to re-enter the workplace. occurs, the employer shall ensure that (iii) The employer shall ensure that materials spilled or deposited on the laundering of MDA-contaminated skin are removed as soon as possible by clothing shall be done so as to prevent methods which do not facilitate the the release of MDA in the workplace. dermal absorption of MDA. (iv) Any employer who gives MDA- (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or contaminated clothing to another per- beverages are consumed at the work- son for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement to prevent site and employees are exposed to MDA the release of MDA. the employer shall provide clean lunch (v) The employer shall inform any areas were MDA levels are below the person who launders or cleans protec- action level and where no dermal expo- tive clothing or equipment contami- sure to MDA can occur. nated with MDA of the potentially (ii) The employer shall ensure that harmful effects of exposure. employees wash their hands and faces (4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- with soap and water prior to eating, ployer shall ensure that employees’ drinking, smoking, or applying cos- work clothing is examined periodically metics. for rips or tears that may occur during (iii) The employer shall ensure that performance of work. employees do not enter lunch facilities (ii) When rips or tears are detected, with contaminated protective work the protective equipment or clothing clothing or equipment.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00077 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(l) Communication of hazards to em- (C) Describe the medical removal ployees—(1) Signs and labels. (i) The em- provision required under paragraph (n) ployer shall post and maintain legible of this section. signs demarcating regulated areas and (4) Access to training materials. (i) The entrances or accessways to regulated employer shall make readily available areas that bear the following legend: to all affected employees, without cost, DANGER all written materials relating to the MDA employee training program, including MAY CAUSE CANCER a copy of this regulation. LIVER TOXIN (ii) The employer shall provide to the AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY Assistant Secretary and the Director, RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE upon request, all information and CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED TO training materials relating to the em- BE WORN IN THIS AREA ployee information and training program. (ii) The employer shall ensure that (m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces labels or other appropriate forms of shall be maintained as free as prac- warning are provided for containers of ticable of visible accumulations of MDA within the workplace. The labels MDA. shall comply with the requirements of (2) The employer shall institute a 29 CFR 1910.1200(f) and shall include program for detecting MDA leaks, one of the following legends: spills, and discharges, including reg- (A) For pure MDA ular visual inspections of operations DANGER involving liquid or solid MDA. CONTAINS MDA (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq- MAY CAUSE CANCER uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. LIVER TOXIN (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA may not be cleaned by the use of com- (B) For mixtures containing MDA pressed air. DANGER (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and CONTAINS MDA other methods of dry clean-up of MDA CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY may be used where HEPA filtered CAUSE CANCER vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not LIVER TOXIN feasible or practical. (2) Material safety data sheets (MSDS). (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con- Employers shall obtain or develop, and tainers, equipment, and clothing con- shall provide access to their employ- taminated with MDA shall be collected ees, to a material safety data sheet and disposed of in a manner to prevent (MSDS) for MDA. the re-entry of MDA into the work- (3) Information and training. (i) The place. employer shall provide employees with (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General. information and training on MDA, in (i) The employer shall make available accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at a medical surveillance program for em- the time of initial assignment and at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol- least annually thereafter. lowing circumstances: (ii) In addition to the information re- (A) Employees exposed at or above quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- the action level for 30 or more days per ployer shall: year; (A) Provide an explanation of the (B) Employees who are subject to contents of this section, including ap- dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more pendices A and B of this section, and days per year; indicate to employees where a copy of (C) Employees who have been exposed the standard is available; in an emergency situation; (B) Describe the medical surveillance (D) Employees whom the employer, program required under paragraph (n) based on results from compliance with of this section, and explain the infor- paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea- mation contained in appendix C of this son to believe are being dermally ex- section; and posed; and

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00078 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

(E) Employees who show signs or (C) Appropriate additional tests or symptoms of MDA exposure. examinations as deemed necessary by (ii) The employer shall ensure that the physician. all medical examinations and proce- (ii) If in the physician’s opinion the dures are performed by or under the su- results of liver function tests indicate pervision of a licensed physician at a an abnormality, the employee shall be reasonable time and place, and pro- removed from further MDA exposure in vided without cost to the employee. accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of (2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150 this section. Repeat liver function days of the effective date of this stand- tests shall be conducted on advice of ard, or before the time of initial assign- the physician. ment, the employer shall provide each (4) Emergency examinations. If the em- employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i) ployer determines that the employee of this section with a medical examina- has been exposed to a potentially haz- tion including the following elements: ardous amount of MDA in an emer- (A) A detailed history which in- gency situation under paragraph (e) of cludes: this section, the employer shall provide (1) Past work exposure to MDA or medical examinations in accordance any other toxic substances; with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of (2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to- this section. If the results of liver func- bacco, and medication routinely taken tion testing indicate an abnormality, (duration and quantity); and the employee shall be removed in ac- (3) A history of dermatitis, chemical cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this skin sensitization, or previous hepatic section. Repeat liver function tests disease. shall be conducted on the advice of the (B) A physical examination which in- physician. If the results of the tests are cludes all routine physical examina- normal, tests must be repeated two to tion parameters, skin examination, and three weeks from the initial testing. If examination for signs of liver disease. the results of the second set of tests (C) Laboratory tests including: are normal and on the advice of the (1) Liver function tests and (2) Uri- physician, no additional testing is re- nalysis. quired. (D) Additional tests as necessary in (5) Additional examinations. Where the the opinion of the physician. employee develops signs and symptoms (ii) No initial medical examination is associated with exposure to MDA, the required if adequate records show that employer shall provide the employee the employee has been examined in ac- with an additional medical examina- cordance with the requirements of this tion including liver function tests. Re- section within the previous six months peat liver function tests shall be con- prior to the effective date of this stand- ducted on the advice of the physician. ard or prior to the date of initial as- If the results of the tests are normal, signment. tests must be repeated two to three (3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- weeks from the initial testing. If the ployer shall provide each employee results of the second set of tests are covered by this section with a medical normal and on the advice of the physi- examination at least annually fol- cian, no additional testing is required. lowing the initial examination. These (6) Multiple physician review mecha- periodic examinations shall include at nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini- least the following elements: tial physician who conducts any med- (A) A brief history regarding any new ical examination or consultation pro- exposure to potential liver toxins, vided to an employee under this sec- changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol tion, and the employee has signs or intake, and the appearance of physical symptoms of occupational exposure to signs relating to the liver, and the MDA (which could include an abnormal skin; liver function test), and the employee (B) The appropriate tests and exami- disagrees with the opinion of the exam- nations including liver function tests ining physician, and this opinion could and skin examinations; and affect the employee’s job status, the

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00079 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

employee may designate an appro- (7) Information provided to the exam- priate and mutually acceptable second ining physician. (i) The employer shall physician: provide the following information to (A) To review any findings, deter- the examining physician: minations or recommendations of the (A) A copy of this regulation and its initial physician; and appendices; (B) To conduct such examinations, (B) A description of the affected em- consultations, and laboratory tests as ployee’s duties as they relate to the the second physician deems necessary employee’s potential exposure to MDA; to facilitate this review. (C) The employee’s current actual or (ii) The employer shall promptly no- representative MDA exposure level; tify an employee of the right to seek a (D) A description of any personal pro- second medical opinion after each oc- tective equipment used or to be used; casion that an initial physician con- and ducts a medical examination or con- (E) Information from previous em- sultation pursuant to this section. The ployment related medical examina- employer may condition its participa- tions of the affected employee. tion in, and payment for, the multiple (ii) The employer shall provide the physician review mechanism upon the foregoing information to a second phy- employee doing the following within sician under this section upon request fifteen (15) days after receipt of the either by the second physician, or by foregoing notification, or receipt of the the employee. initial physician’s written opinion, (8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For whichever is later: each examination under this section, the employer shall obtain, and provide (A) The employee informing the em- the employee with a copy of, the exam- ployer that he or she intends to seek a ining physician’s written opinion with- second medical opinion, and in 15 days of its receipt. The written (B) The employee initiating steps to opinion shall include the following: make an appointment with a second (A) The occupationally pertinent re- physician. sults of the medical examination and (iii) If the findings, determinations, tests; or recommendations of the second phy- (B) The physician’s opinion con- sician differ from those of the initial cerning whether the employee has any physician, then the employer and the detected medical conditions which employee shall assure that efforts are would place the employee at increased made for the two physicians to resolve risk of material impairment of health any disagreement. from exposure to MDA; (iv) If the two physicians have been (C) The physician’s recommended unable to quickly resolve their dis- limitations upon the employee’s expo- agreement, then the employer and the sure to MDA or upon the employee’s employee through their respective phy- use of protective clothing or equipment sicians shall designate a third physi- and respirators; and cian: (D) A statement that the employee (A) To review any findings, deter- has been informed by the physician of minations, or recommendations of the the results of the medical examination prior physicians; and and any medical conditions resulting (B) To conduct such examinations, from MDA exposure which require fur- consultations, laboratory tests, and ther explanation or treatment. discussions with the prior physicians (ii) The written opinion obtained by as the third physician deems necessary the employer shall not reveal specific to resolve the disagreement of the findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- prior physicians. cupational exposures. (v) The employer shall act consistent (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary with the findings, determinations, and medical removal of an employee—(A) recommendations of the second physi- Temporary removal resulting from occupa- cian, unless the employer and the em- tional exposure. The employee shall be ployee reach a mutually acceptable removed from work environments in agreement. which exposure to MDA is at or above

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00080 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

the action level or where dermal expo- impairment to health from exposure to sure to MDA may occur, following an MDA. initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of (B) For the purposes of this section, this section), periodic examinations the requirement that an employer re- (paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an turn an employee to his or her former emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4) job status is not intended to expand of this section), or an additional exam- upon or restrict any rights an em- ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec- ployee has or would have had, absent tion) in the following circumstances: temporary medical removal, to a spe- (1) When the employee exhibits signs cific job classification or position and/or symptoms indicative of acute under the terms of a collective bar- exposure to MDA; or gaining agreement. (2) When the examining physician de- (iii) Removal of other employee special termines that an employee’s abnormal protective measure or limitations. The liver function tests are not associated employer shall remove any limitations with MDA exposure but that the abnor- placed on an employee or end any spe- malities may be exacerbated as a re- cial protective measures provided to an sult of occupational exposure to MDA. employee pursuant to a final medical (B) Temporary removal due to a final determination when a subsequent final medical determination indicates that medical determination. (1) The employer the limitations or special protective shall remove an employee from work measures are no longer necessary. having an exposure to MDA at or above (iv) Employer options pending a final the action level or where the potential medical determination. Where the physi- for dermal exposure exists on each oc- cian review mechanism used pursuant casion that a final medical determina- to the medical surveillance provisions tion results in a medical finding, deter- of this section, has not yet resulted in mination, or opinion that the employee a final medical determination with re- has a detected medical condition which spect to an employee, the employer places the employee at increased risk shall act as follows: of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re- exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to (2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas- the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limitation’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina- suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy- visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s (3) Where a final medical determina- health status. tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee, implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings, recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of (ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re- status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status, an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions: status: (1) If the initial removal, special pro- (1) When the employee no longer tection, or limitation of the employee shows signs or symptoms of exposure resulted from a final medical deter- to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy- mination which differed from the find- sician. ings, determinations, or recommenda- (2) When a subsequent final medical tions of the initial physician; or determination results in a medical (2) The employee has been on re- finding, determination, or opinion that moval status for the preceding six the employee no longer has a detected months as a result of exposure to MDA, medical condition which places the em- then the employer shall await a final ployee at increased risk of material medical determination.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00081 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(v) Medical removal protection bene- (F) Employees who do not recover with- fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal in the 6 months of removal. The em- protection benefits. The employer shall ployer shall take the following meas- provide to an employee up to six (6) ures with respect to any employee re- months of medical removal protection moved from exposure to MDA: benefits on each occasion that an em- (1) The employer shall make avail- ployee is removed from exposure to able to the employee a medical exam- MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to ination pursuant to this section to ob- this section. tain a final medical determination (B) Definition of medical removal pro- with respect to the employee; tection benefits. For the purposes of this (2) The employer shall assure that section, the requirement that an em- the final medical determination ob- ployer provide medical removal protec- tained indicates whether or not the tion benefits means that the employer employee may be returned to his or her shall maintain the earnings, seniority, former job status, and, if not, what and other employment rights and bene- steps should be taken to protect the fits of an employee as though the em- employee’s health; ployee had not been removed from nor- (3) Where the final medical deter- mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim- mination has not yet been obtained, or ited. once obtained indicates that the em- (C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur- ployee may not yet be returned to his ing the period of employee removal or lim- or her former job status, the employer itations. During the period of time that shall continue to provide medical re- an employee is removed from normal moval protection benefits to the em- exposure to MDA or otherwise limited, ployee until either the employee is re- the employer may condition the provi- turned to former job status, or a final sion of medical removal protection medical determination is made that benefits upon the employee’s participa- the employee is incapable of ever safe- tion in follow-up medical surveillance ly returning to his or her former job made available pursuant to this sec- status; and tion. (4) Where the employer acts pursuant (D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a to a final medical determination which removed employee files a claim for permits the return of the employee to workers’ compensation payments for a his or her former job status despite MDA-related disability, then the em- what would otherwise be an unaccept- ployer shall continue to provide med- able liver function test, later questions ical removal protection benefits pend- concerning removing the employee ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- again shall be decided by a final med- tent that an award is made to the em- ical determination. The employer need ployee for earnings lost during the pe- not automatically remove such an em- riod of removal, the employer’s med- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal ical removal protection obligation criteria provided by this section. shall be reduced by such amount. The (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of employer shall receive no credit for an employee. Where an employer, al- workers’ compensation payments re- though not required by this section to ceived by the employee for treatment- do so, removes an employee from expo- related expenses. sure to MDA or otherwise places limi- (E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- tations on an employee due to the ef- gation to provide medical removal pro- fects of MDA exposure on the employ- tection benefits to a removed employee ee’s medical condition, the employer shall be reduced to the extent that the shall provide medical removal protec- employee receives compensation for tion benefits to the employee equal to earnings lost during the period of re- that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of moval either from a publicly or em- this section. ployer-funded compensation program, (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data or receives income from employment for exempted operations. (i) Where the with any employer made possible by employer has relied on objective data virtue of the employee’s removal. that demonstrate that products made

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00082 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

from or containing MDA are not capa- the job for which initial monitoring ble of releasing MDA or do not present will not be performed; a dermal exposure problem under the (D) Environmental conditions pre- expected conditions of processing, use, vailing when the historical monitoring or handling to exempt such operations data were obtained are the same as from the initial monitoring require- those on the job for which initial moni- ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this toring will not be performed; and section, the employer shall establish (E) Other data relevant to the oper- and maintain an accurate record of ob- ations, materials, processing, or em- jective data reasonably relied upon in ployee exposures covered by the excep- support of the exemption. tion. (ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall maintain the following information: this record for the duration of the em- (A) The product qualifying for ex- ployer’s reliance upon such historical emption; monitoring data. (B) The source of the objective data; (3) The employer may utilize the (C) The testing protocol, results of services of competent organizations testing, and/or analysis of the material such as industry trade associations and for the release of MDA; employee associations to maintain the (D) A description of the operation ex- records required by this section. empted and how the data support the (4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- exemption; and ployer shall keep an accurate record of (E) Other data relevant to the oper- all measurements taken to monitor ations, materials, processing, or em- employee exposure to MDA. ployee exposures covered by the ex- (ii) This record shall include at least emption. the following information: (iii) The employer shall maintain (A) The date of measurement; this record for the duration of the em- (B) The operation involving exposure ployer’s reliance upon such objective to MDA; data. (C) Sampling and analytical methods (2) Historical monitoring data. (i) used and evidence of their accuracy; Where the employer has relied on historical monitoring data that dem- (D) Number, duration, and results of onstrate that exposures on a particular samples taken; job will be below the action level to ex- (E) Type of protective devices worn, empt such operations from the initial if any; and monitoring requirements under para- (F) Name, social security number, graph (f)(2) of this section, the em- and exposure of the employees whose ployer shall establish and maintain an exposures are represented. accurate record of historical moni- (iii) The employer shall maintain toring data reasonably relied upon in this record for at least thirty (30) support of the exception. years, in accordance with 29 CFR (ii) The record shall include informa- 1910.20. tion that reflect the following condi- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- tions: ployer shall establish and maintain an (A) The data upon which judgments accurate record for each employee sub- are based are scientifically sound and ject to medical surveillance by para- were collected using methods that are graph (n) of this section, in accordance sufficiently accurate and precise; with 29 CFR 1910.20. (B) The processes and work practices (ii) The record shall include at least that were in use when the historical the following information: monitoring data were obtained are es- (A) The name and social security sentially the same as those to be used number of the employee; during the job for which initial moni- (B) A copy of the employee’s medical toring will not be performed; examination results, including the (C) The characteristics of the MDA- medical history, questionnaire re- containing material being handled sponses, results of any tests, and physi- when the historical monitoring data cian’s recommendations. were obtained are the same as those on (C) Physician’s written opinions;

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00083 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(D) Any employee medical com- MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph plaints related to exposure to MDA; (f) of this section. and (2) Observation procedures. When ob- (E) A copy of the information pro- servation of the measuring or moni- vided to the physician as required by toring of employee exposure to MDA paragraph (n) of this section. requires entry into areas where the use (iii) The employer shall ensure that of protective clothing and equipment this record is maintained for the dura- or respirators is required, the employer tion of employment plus thirty (30) shall provide the observer with per- years, in accordance with 29 CFR sonal protective clothing and equip- 1910.20. ment or respirators required to be worn (iv) A copy of the employee’s medical by employees working in the area, as- removal and return to work status. sure the use of such clothing and equip- (6) Training records. The employer ment or respirators, and require the shall maintain all employee training observer to comply with all other ap- records for one (1) year beyond the last plicable safety and health procedures. date of employment. (q) Effective date. This standard shall (7) Availability. (i) The employer, become effective on September 9, 1992. upon written request, shall make all (r) Appendices. The information con- records required to be maintained by tained in appendices A, B, C and D of this section available to the Assistant this section is not intended by itself, to Secretary and the Director for exam- create any additional obligations not ination and copying. otherwise imposed by this standard nor (ii) The employer, upon request, shall detract from any existing obligation. make any exposure records required by The protocols for respiratory fit test- paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section ing in appendix E of this section are available for examination and copying mandatory. to affected employees, former employ- (s) Startup dates. Compliance with all ees, designated representatives, and obligations of this standard commence the Assistant Secretary, in accordance September 9, 1992, except as follows: with 29 CFR 1910.20(a)–(e) and (g)–(i). (1) Initial monitoring under para- (iii) The employer, upon request, graph (f)(2) of this section shall be shall make employee medical records completed as soon as possible but no required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of later than December 8, 1992. this section available for examination (2) Medical examinations under para- and copying to the subject employee, graph (n) of this section shall be com- anyone having the specific written con- pleted as soon as possible but no later sent of the subject employee, and the than February 8, 1993. Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (3) Emergency plans required by paragraph (e) of this section shall be (8) Transfer of records. (i) The employer shall comply with the require- provided and available for inspection ments concerning transfer of records and copying as soon as possible but no set forth in 29 CFR 1910.20(h). later than January 7, 1993. (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to (4) Initial training and education do business and there is no successor shall be completed as soon as possible employer to receive and retain the but no later than January 7, 1993. records for the prescribed period, the (5) Decontamination and lunch areas employer shall notify the Director at under paragraph (k) of this section least 90 days prior to disposal and, shall be in operation as soon as pos- upon request, transmit them to the Di- sible but no later than September 9, rector. 1993. (p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- (6) Respiratory Protection required ployee observation. The employer shall by paragraph (i) of this section shall be provide affected employees, or their provided as soon as possible but no designated representatives, an oppor- later than January 7, 1993. tunity to observe the measuring or (7) Written compliance plans required monitoring of employee exposure to by paragraph (h)(5) of this section shall

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00084 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

be completed and available for inspec- § 1926.62 Lead. tion and copying as soon as possible (a) Scope. This section applies to all but no later than January 7, 1993. construction work where an employee (8) OSHA shall enforce the permis- may be occupationally exposed to lead. sible exposure limits in paragraph (c) All construction work excluded from of this section no earlier than January coverage in the general industry stand- 7, 1993. ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is (9) Engineering controls needed to covered by this standard. Construction achieve the PELs must be in place Sep- work is defined as work for construc- tember 9, 1993. tion, alteration and/or repair, including (10) Personal protective clothing re- painting and decorating. It includes quired by paragraph (j) of this section but is not limited to the following: shall be available January 7, 1993. (1) Demolition or salvage of structures where lead or materials con- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE taining lead are present; DATA SHEET, FOR 4–4′ (2) Removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead; METHYLENEDIANILINE (3) New construction, alteration, re- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- pair, or renovation of structures, sub- struction work under this Appendix A are strates, or portions thereof, that con- identical to those set forth in Appendix A to tain lead, or materials containing lead; § 1910.1050 of this chapter. (4) Installation of products containing lead; APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE (5) Lead contamination/emergency TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA cleanup; (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this Appendix B are or containment of lead or materials identical to those set forth in Appendix B to containing lead on the site or location § 1910.1050 of this chapter. at which construction activities are performed, and APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL (7) Maintenance operations associ- SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA ated with the construction activities described in this paragraph. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (b) Definitions. struction work under this Appendix C are Action level means employee expo- identical to those set forth in Appendix C to sure, without regard to the use of res- § 1910.1050 of this chapter. pirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND meter of air (30 µg/m3) calculated as an ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). MONITORING AND MEASUREMENT Assistant Secretary means the Assist- PROCEDURES ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this Appendix D are ment of Labor, or designee. identical to those set forth in Appendix D to Competent person means one who is § 1910.1050 of this chapter. capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards in the sur- [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57 roundings or working conditions and FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, who has authorization to take prompt 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998] corrective measures to eliminate them. Director means the Director, National § 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, Institute for Occupational Safety and placards and labels. Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or des- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ignee. struction work under this section are iden- Lead means metallic lead, all inor- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this ganic lead compounds, and organic lead chapter. soaps. Excluded from this definition [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] are all other organic lead compounds.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00085 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

This section means this standard. this section and documents that the (c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The employee performing any of the listed employer shall assure that no em- tasks is not exposed above the PEL, ployee is exposed to lead at concentra- the employer shall treat the employee tions greater than fifty micrograms per as if the employee were exposed above cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3) averaged the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) over an 8-hour period. times the PEL, and shall implement (2) If an employee is exposed to lead employee protective measures pre- for more than 8 hours in any work day scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this the employees’ allowable exposure, as a section. The tasks covered by this re- time weighted average (TWA) for that quirement are: day, shall be reduced according to the (A) Where lead containing coatings following formula: or paint are present: Manual demolition of structures (e.g, dry wall), man- µ 3 Allowable employee exposure (in g/m ) = 400 ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun divided by hours worked in the day. applications, and power tool cleaning (3) When respirators are used to limit with dust collection systems; employee exposure as required under (B) Spray painting with lead paint. paragraph (c) of this section and all the (ii) In addition, with regard to tasks requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where (f) of this section have been met, em- the employee has any reason to believe ployee exposure may be considered to that an employee performing the task be at the level provided by the protec- may be exposed to lead in excess of the tion factor of the respirator for those PEL, until the employer performs an periods the respirator is worn. Those employee exposure assessment as re- periods may be averaged with exposure quired by paragraph (d) of this section levels during periods when respirators and documents that the employee’s are not worn to determine the employ- lead exposure is not above the PEL the ee’s daily TWA exposure. employer shall treat the employee as if (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General. the employee were exposed above the (i) Each employer who has a workplace PEL and shall implememt employee or operation covered by this standard protective measures as prescribed in shall initially determine if any em- paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. ployee may be exposed to lead at or (iii) With respect to the tasks listed above the action level. in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d) where lead is present, until the em- of this section, employee exposure is ployer performs an employee exposure that exposure which would occur if the assessment as required in paragraph (d) employee were not using a respirator. of this section, and documents that the (iii) With the exception of moni- employee performing any of the listed toring under paragraph (d)(3), where tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 µg/ monitoring is required under this sec- m3, the employer shall treat the em- tion, the employer shall collect per- ployee as if the employee were exposed sonal samples representative of a full to lead in excess of 500 µg/m3 and shall shift including at least one sample for implement employee protective meas- each job classification in each work ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) area either for each shift or for the of this section. Where the employer shift with the highest exposure level. does establish that the employee is ex- (iv) Full shift personal samples shall posed to levels of lead below 500 µg/m3, be representative of the monitored em- the employer may provide the exposed ployee’s regular, daily exposure to employee with the appropriate res- lead. pirator prescribed for such use at such (2) Protection of employees during as- lower exposures, in accordance with sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to Table 1 of this section. The tasks cov- the lead related tasks listed in para- ered by this requirement are: graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where (A) Using lead containing mortar; lead is present, until the employer per- lead burning forms an employee exposure assess- (B) Where lead containing coatings or ment as required in paragraph (d) of paint are present: rivet busting; power

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00086 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

tool cleaning without dust collection analysis for lead and zinc systems; cleanup activities where dry protoporphyrin levels, and expendable abrasives are used; and ab- (F) Training as required under para- rasive blasting enclosure movement graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding and removal. 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; (iv) With respect to the tasks listed training as required under paragraph in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section, (l)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, regarding where lead is present, until the em- use of respirators; and training in ac- ployer performs an employee exposure cordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety assessment as required in paragraph (d) training and education. of this section and documents that the (3) Basis of initial determination. (i) employee performing any of the listed Except as provided under paragraphs tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of (d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section 2,500 µg/m3 (50×PEL), the employer the employer shall monitor employee shall treat the employee as if the em- exposures and shall base initial deter- ployee were exposed to lead in excess of minations on the employee exposure 2,500 µg/m3 and shall implement em- monitoring results and any of the fol- ployee protective measures as pre- lowing, relevant considerations: scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this (A) Any information, observations, or section. Where the employer does es- calculations which would indicate em- tablish that the employee is exposed to ployee exposure to lead; µ levels of lead below 2,500 g/m3, the em- (B) Any previous measurements of ployer may provide the exposed em- airborne lead; and ployee with the appropriate respirator (C) Any employee complaints of prescribed for use at such lower expo- symptoms which may be attributable sures, in accordance with Table I of this section. Interim protection as de- to exposure to lead. scribed in this paragaraph is required (ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- where lead containing coatings or mination where performed may be lim- paint are present on structures when ited to a representative sample of the performing: exposed employees who the employer (A) Abrasive blasting, reasonably believes are exposed to the greatest airborne concentrations of (B) Welding, lead in the workplace. (C) Cutting, and (iii) Where the employer has pre- (D) Torch burning. viously monitored for lead exposures, (v) Until the employer performs an and the data were obtained within the employee exposure assessment as re- past 12 months during work operations quired under paragraph (d) of this sec- conducted under workplace conditions tion and determines actual employee closely resembling the processes, type exposure, the employer shall provide to of material, control methods, work employees performing the tasks de- practices, and environmental condi- scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii), tions used and prevailing in the em- (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section ployer’s current operations, the em- with interim protection as follows: ployer may rely on such earlier moni- (A) Appropriate respiratory protec- toring results to satisfy the require- tion in accordance with paragraph (f) ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of this section. of this section if the sampling and ana- (B) Appropriate personal protective lytical methods meet the accuracy and clothing and equipment in accordance confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of with paragraph (g) of this section. this section. (C) Change areas in accordance with (iv) Where the employer has objec- paragraph (i)(2) of this section. tive data, demonstrating that a par- (D) Hand washing facilities in accord- ticular product or material containing ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec- lead or a specific process, operation or tion. activity involving lead cannot result in (E) Biological monitoring in accord- employee exposure to lead at or above ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec- the action level during processing, use, tion, to consist of blood sampling and or handling, the employer may rely

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00087 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

upon such data instead of imple- sure determination need not be re- menting initial monitoring. peated except as otherwise provided in (A) The employer shall establish and paragraph (d)(7) of this section. maintain an accurate record docu- (ii) If the initial determination or menting the nature and relevancy of subsequent determination reveals em- objective data as specified in paragraph ployee exposure to be at or above the (n)(4) of this section, where used in as- action level but at or below the PEL sessing employee exposure in lieu of the employer shall perform monitoring exposure monitoring. in accordance with this paragraph at (B) Objective data, as described in least every 6 months. The employer paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is shall continue monitoring at the re- not permitted to be used for exposure quired frequency until at least two assessment in connection with para- consecutive measurements, taken at graph (d)(2) of this section. least 7 days apart, are below the action (4) Positive initial determination and level at which time the employer may initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter- discontinue monitoring for that em- mination conducted under paragraphs ployee except as otherwise provided in (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows paragraph (d)(7) of this section. the possibility of any employee expo- (iii) If the initial determination re- sure at or above the action level the veals that employee exposure is above employer shall conduct monitoring the PEL the employer shall perform which is representative of the exposure monitoring quarterly. The employer for each employee in the workplace shall continue monitoring at the re- who is exposed to lead. quired frequency until at least two (ii) Where the employer has pre- consecutive measurements, taken at viously monitored for lead exposure, least 7 days apart, are at or below the and the data were obtained within the PEL but at or above the action level at past 12 months during work operations which time the employer shall repeat conducted under workplace conditions monitoring for that employee at the closely resembling the processes, type frequency specified in paragraph of material, control methods, work (d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- practices, and environmental condi- erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of tions used and prevailing in the em- this section. The employer shall con- ployer’s current operations, the em- tinue monitoring at the required fre- ployer may rely on such earlier moni- quency until at least two consecutive toring results to satisfy the require- measurements, taken at least 7 days ments of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this sec- apart, are below the action level at tion if the sampling and analytical which time the employer may dis- methods meet the accuracy and con- continue monitoring for that employee fidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of except as otherwise provided in para- this section. graph (d)(7) of this section. (5) Negative initial determination. (7) Additional exposure assessments. Where a determination, conducted Whenever there has been a change of under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of equipment, process, control, personnel this section is made that no employee or a new task has been initiated that is exposed to airborne concentrations may result in additional employees of lead at or above the action level the being exposed to lead at or above the employer shall make a written record action level or may result in employees of such determination. The record shall already exposed at or above the action include at least the information speci- level being exposed above the PEL, the fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec- employer shall conduct additional tion and shall also include the date of monitoring in accordance with this determination, location within the paragraph. worksite, and the name and social se- (8) Employee notification. (i) Within 5 curity number of each employee mon- working days after completion of the itored. exposure assessment the employer (6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter- shall notify each employee in writing mination reveals employee exposure to of the results which represent that em- be below the action level further expo- ployee’s exposure.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00088 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(ii) Whenever the results indicate selected for controlling exposure to that the representative employee expo- lead; sure, without regard to respirators, is (C) A report of the technology consid- at or above the PEL the employer shall ered in meeting the PEL; include in the written notice a state- (D) Air monitoring data which document that the employees exposure was ments the source of lead emissions; at or above that level and a description (E) A detailed schedule for implemen- of the corrective action taken or to be tation of the program, including docu- taken to reduce exposure to below that mentation such as copies of purchase level. orders for equipment, construction (9) Accuracy of measurement. The em- contracts, etc.; ployer shall use a method of moni- (F) A work practice program which toring and analysis which has an accu- includes items required under para- racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section not less than plus or minus 25 percent and incorporates other relevant work for airborne concentrations of lead practices such as those specified in equal to or greater than 30µg/m3. paragraph (e)(5) of this section; (e) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi- (G) An administrative control sched- neering and work practice controls. The ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this employer shall implement engineering section, if applicable; and work practice controls, including (H) A description of arrangements administrative controls, to reduce and made among contractors on multi-con- maintain employee exposure to lead to tractor sites with respect to informing or below the permissible exposure limit affected employees of potential expo- to the extent that such controls are sure to lead and with respect to respon- feasible. Wherever all feasible engi- sibility for compliance with this sec- neering and work practices controls tion as set-forth in § 1926.16. (I) Other relevant information. that can be instituted are not suffi- (iii) The compliance program shall cient to reduce employee exposure to provide for frequent and regular inspec- or below the permissible exposure limit tions of job sites, materials, and equip- prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- ment to be made by a competent per- tion, the employer shall nonetheless son. use them to reduce employee exposure (iv) Written programs shall be sub- to the lowest feasible level and shall mitted upon request to any affected supplement them by the use of res- employee or authorized employee rep- piratory protection that complies with resentatives, to the Assistant Sec- the requirements of paragraph (f) of retary and the Director, and shall be this section. available at the worksite for examina- (2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to tion and copying by the Assistant Sec- commencement of the job each em- retary and the Director. ployer shall establish and implement a (v) Written programs shall be revised written compliance program to achieve and updated at least every 6 months to compliance with paragraph (c) of this reflect the current status of the pro- section. gram. (ii) Written plans for these compli- (3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven- ance programs shall include at least tilation is used to control lead expo- the following: sure, the employer shall evaluate the (A) A description of each activity in mechanical performance of the system which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment in controlling exposure as necessary to used, material involved, controls in maintain its effectiveness. place, crew size, employee job respon- (4) Administrative controls. If adminis- sibilities, operating procedures and trative controls are used as a means of maintenance practices; reducing employees TWA exposure to (B) A description of the specific lead, the employer shall establish and means that will be employed to achieve implement a job rotation schedule compliance and, where engineering which includes: controls are required engineering plans (i) Name or identification number of and studies used to determine methods each affected employee;

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00089 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) Duration and exposure levels at (iv) Periods when respirators are re- each job or work station where each af- quired to provide interim protection of fected employee is located; and employees while they perform the op- (iii) Any other information which erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of may be useful in assessing the reli- this section. ability of administrative controls to (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- reduce exposure to lead. ployer must implement a respiratory (5) The employer shall ensure that, to protection program in accordance with the extent relevant, employees follow 29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except good work practices such as described (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m). in Appendix B of this section. (ii) If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator (f) Respiratory protection. (1) General. use, the employer must provide the em- For employees who use respirators re- ployee with a medical examination in quired by this section, the employer accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B) must provide respirators that comply of this section to determine whether or with the requirements of this para- not the employee can use a respirator graph. Respirators must be used dur- while performing the required duty. ing: (3) Respirator selection. (i) The em- (i) Periods when an employee’s expo- ployer must select the appropriate res- sure to lead exceeds the PEL. pirator or combination of respirators (ii) Work operations for which engi- from Table I of this section. neering and work-practice controls are (ii) The employer must provide a not sufficient to reduce employee expo- powered air-purifying respirator when sures to or below the PEL. an employee chooses to use such a res- (iii) Periods when an employee re- pirator and it will provide adequate quests a respirator. protection to the employee.

TABLE 1ÐRESPIRATORY PROTECTION FOR LEAD AEROSOLS

Airborne concentration of lead or condition 1 of use Required respirator

Not in excess of 500 ug/m3 ...... 1¤2 mask air purifying respirator with high efficiency filters.2 3 1¤2 mask supplied air respirator operated in demand (negative pressure) mode. Not in excess of 1,250 ug/m3 ...... Loose fitting hood or helmet powered air purifying respirator with high efficiency filters.3 Hood or helmet supplied air respirator operated in a continuous-flow modeÐe.g., type CE abrasive blasting respirators operated in a continuous-flow mode. Not in excess of 2,500 ug/m3 ...... Full facepiece air purifying respirator with high efficiency filters.3 Tight fitting powered air purifying respirator with high efficiency filters.3 Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in demand mode. 1¤2 mask or full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in a continuous-flow mode. Full facepiece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) operated in demand mode. Not in excess of 50,000 ug/m3 ...... 1¤2 mask supplied air respirator operated in pressure demand or other positive- pressure mode. Not in excess of 100,000 ug/m3 ...... Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in pressure demand or other positive-pressure modeÐe.g., type CE abrasive blasting respirators operated in a positive-pressure mode. Greater than 100,000 ug/m3 unknown con- Full facepiece SCBA operated in pressure demand or other positive-pressure centration, or fire fighting. mode. 1 Respirators specified for higher concentrations can be used at lower concentrations of lead. 2 Full facepiece is required if the lead aerosols cause eye or skin irritation at the use concentrations. 3 A high efficiency particulate filter (HEPA) means a filter that is a 99.97 percent efficient against particles of 0.3 micron size or larger.

(g) Protective work clothing and equip- skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an nate, lead azide), and as interim pro- employee is exposed to lead above the tection for employees performing tasks PEL without regard to the use of res- as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this pirators, where employees are exposed section, the employer shall provide at to lead compounds which may cause no cost to the employee and assure

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00090 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

that the employee uses appropriate (viii) The employer shall prohibit the protective work clothing and equip- removal of lead from protective cloth- ment that prevents contamination of ing or equipment by blowing, shaking, the employee and the employee’s gar- or any other means which disperses ments such as, but not limited to: lead into the air. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body (h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces work clothing; shall be maintained as free as prac- (ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- ticable of accumulations of lead. able shoe coverlets; and (2) Clean-up of floors and other sur- (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or faces where lead accumulates shall other appropriate protective equip- wherever possible, be cleaned by ment which complies with § 1910.133 of vacuuming or other methods that min- this chapter. imize the likelihood of lead becoming (2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The airborne. employer shall provide the protective (3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of and brushing may be used only where this section in a clean and dry condi- vacuuming or other equally effective tion at least weekly, and daily to em- methods have been tried and found not ployees whose exposure levels without to be effective. regard to a respirator are over 200 µg/ (4) Where vacuuming methods are se- m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. lected, the vacuums shall be equipped (ii) The employer shall provide for with HEPA filters and used and the cleaning, laundering, and disposal emptied in a manner which minimizes of protective clothing and equipment the reentry of lead into the workplace. required by paragraph (g)(1) of this section. (5) Compressed air shall not be used to remove lead from any surface unless (iii) The employer shall repair or re- the compressed air is used in conjunc- place required protective clothing and tion with a ventilation system de- equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. signed to capture the airborne dust created by the compressed air. (iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1) the completion of a work shift only in The employer shall assure that in areas change areas provided for that purpose where employees are exposed to lead as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this above the PEL without regard to the section. use of respirators, food or beverage is (v) The employer shall assure that not present or consumed, tobacco prod- contaminated protective clothing ucts are not present or used, and cos- which is to be cleaned, laundered, or metics are not applied. disposed of, is placed in a closed con- (2) Change areas. (i) The employer tainer in the change area which pre- shall provide clean change areas for vents dispersion of lead outside the employees whose airborne exposure to container. lead is above the PEL, and as interim (vi) The employer shall inform in protection for employees performing writing any person who cleans or laun- tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of ders protective clothing or equipment this section, without regard to the use of the potentially harmful effects of ex- of respirators. posure to lead. (ii) The employer shall assure that (vii) The employer shall assure that change areas are equipped with sepa- the containers of contaminated protec- rate storage facilities for protective tive clothing and equipment required work clothing and equipment and for by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section street clothes which prevent cross-con- are labeled as follows: tamination. (iii) The employer shall assure that Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead. Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking. employees do not leave the workplace Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in wearing any protective clothing or accordance with applicable local, state, or equipment that is required to be worn federal regulations. during the work shift.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00091 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months; borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that PEL. all medical examinations and proce- (ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su- shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician. employees shower at the end of the (iv) The employer shall make avail- work shift and shall provide an ade- able the required medical surveillance quate supply of cleansing agents and including multiple physician review towels for use by affected employees. under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost (4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer to employees and at a reasonable time shall provide lunchroom facilities or and place. eating areas for employees whose air- (2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead borne exposure to lead is above the and ZPP level sampling and analysis. PEL, without regard to the use of res- The employer shall make available bio- pirators. logical monitoring in the form of blood (ii) The employer shall assure that sampling and analysis for lead and zinc lunchroom facilities or eating areas protoporphyrin levels to each employee are as free as practicable from lead covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and contamination and are readily acces- (ii) of this section on the following sible to employees. schedule: (iii) The employer shall assure that employees whose airborne exposure to (A) For each employee covered under lead is above the PEL, without regard paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at to the use of a respirator, wash their least every 2 months for the first 6 hands and face prior to eating, drink- months and every 6 months thereafter; ing, smoking or applying cosmetics. (B) For each employee covered under (iv) The employer shall assure that paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec- employees do not enter lunchroom fa- tion whose last blood sampling and cilities or eating areas with protective analysis indicated a blood lead level at work clothing or equipment unless sur- or above 40 µg/dl, at least every two face lead dust has been removed by months. This frequency shall continue vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other until two consecutive blood samples cleaning method that limits dispersion and analyses indicate a blood lead level of lead dust. below 40 µg/dl; and (5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em- (C) For each employee who is re- ployer shall provide adequate moved from exposure to lead due to an handwashing facilities for use by em- elevated blood lead level at least ployees exposed to lead in accordance monthly during the removal period. with 29 CFR 1926.51(f). (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. (ii) Where showers are not provided Whenever the results of a blood lead the employer shall assure that employ- level test indicate that an employee’s ees wash their hands and face at the blood lead level exceeds the numerical end of the work-shift. criterion for medical removal under (j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i) paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the The employer shall make available ini- employer shall provide a second (fol- tial medical surveillance to employees low-up) blood sampling test within two occupationally exposed on any day to weeks after the employer receives the lead at or above the action level. Ini- results of the first blood sampling test. tial medical surveillance consists of bi- (iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam- ological monitoring in the form of pling and analysis. Blood lead level blood sampling and analysis for lead sampling and analysis provided pursu- and zinc protoporphyrin levels. ant to this section shall have an accu- (ii) The employer shall institute a racy (to a confidence level of 95 per- medical surveillance program in ac- cent) within plus or minus 15 percent cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and or 6 µg/dl, whichever is greater, and (j)(3) of this section for all employees shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- who are or may be exposed by the em- proved by OSHA.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00092 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within tional and non-occupational), personal five working days after the receipt of habits (smoking, hygiene), and past biological monitoring results, the em- gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal, ployer shall notify each employee in cardiovascular, reproductive and neu- writing of his or her blood lead level; rological problems; and (B) A thorough physical examination, (B) The employer shall notify each with particular attention to teeth, employee whose blood lead level ex- gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, ceeds 40 µg/dl that the standard re- renal, cardiovascular, and neurological quires temporary medical removal systems. Pulmonary status should be with Medical Removal Protection ben- evaluated if respiratory protection will efits when an employee’s blood lead be used; level exceeds the numerical criterion (C) A blood pressure measurement; for medical removal under paragraph (D) A blood sample and analysis (k)(1)(i) of this section. which determines: (3) Medical examinations and consultations—(i) Frequency. The employer shall (1) Blood lead level; make available medical examinations (2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter- and consultations to each employee minations, red cell indices, and exam- covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of ination of peripheral smear mor- this section on the following schedule: phology; (A) At least annually for each em- (3) Zinc protoporphyrin; ployee for whom a blood sampling test (4) Blood urea nitrogen; and, conducted at any time during the pre- (5) Serum creatinine; ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead (E) A routine urinalysis with micro- level at or above 40 µg/dl; scopic examination; and (B) As soon as possible, upon notifi- (F) Any laboratory or other test rel- cation by an employee either that the evant to lead exposure which the exam- employee has developed signs or symp- ining physician deems necessary by toms commonly associated with lead sound medical practice. intoxication, that the employee desires (iii) Multiple physician review mecha- medical advice concerning the effects nism. (A) If the employer selects the of current or past exposure to lead on initial physician who conducts any the employee’s ability to procreate a medical examination or consultation healthy child, that the employee is provided to an employee under this sec- pregnant, or that the employee has tion, the employee may designate a demonstrated difficulty in breathing second physician: during a respirator fitting test or during use; and (1) To review any findings, deter- (C) As medically appropriate for each minations or recommendations of the employee either removed from expo- initial physician; and sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining (2) To conduct such examinations, material impairment to health, or oth- consultations, and laboratory tests as erwise limited pursuant to a final med- the second physician deems necessary ical determination. to facilitate this review. (ii) Content. The content of medical (B) The employer shall promptly no- examinations made available pursuant tify an employee of the right to seek a to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec- second medical opinion after each oc- tion shall be determined by an exam- casion that an initial physician con- ining physician and, if requested by an ducts a medical examination or con- employee, shall include pregnancy sultation pursuant to this section. The testing or laboratory evaluation of employer may condition its participa- male fertility. Medical examinations tion in, and payment for, the multiple made available pursuant to paragraph physician review mechanism upon the (j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include employee doing the following within the following elements: fifteen (15) days after receipt of the (A) A detailed work history and a foregoing notification, or receipt of the medical history, with particular atten- initial physician’s written opinion, tion to past lead exposure (occupa- whichever is later:

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00093 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(1) The employee informing the em- (B) The employer shall provide the ployer that he or she intends to seek a foregoing information to a second or second medical opinion, and third physician conducting a medical (2) The employee initiating steps to examination or consultation under this make an appointment with a second section upon request either by the sec- physician. ond or third physician, or by the em- (C) If the findings, determinations or ployee. recommendations of the second physi- (v) Written medical opinions. (A) The cian differ from those of the initial employer shall obtain and furnish the physician, then the employer and the employee with a copy of a written med- employee shall assure that efforts are ical opinion from each examining or made for the two physicians to resolve consulting physician which contains any disagreement. only the following information: (D) If the two physicians have been (1) The physician’s opinion as to unable to quickly resolve their dis- whether the employee has any detected agreement, then the employer and the medical condition which would place employee through their respective phy- the employee at increased risk of ma- sicians shall designate a third physi- terial impairment of the employee’s cian: health from exposure to lead; (1) To review any findings, deter- (2) Any recommended special protec- minations or recommendations of the tive measures to be provided to the em- prior physicians; and ployee, or limitations to be placed (2) To conduct such examinations, upon the employee’s exposure to lead; consultations, laboratory tests and dis- (3) Any recommended limitation cussions with the prior physicians as upon the employee’s use of respirators, the third physician deems necessary to including a determination of whether resolve the disagreement of the prior the employee can wear a powered air physicians. purifying respirator if a physician de- (E) The employer shall act consistent termines that the employee cannot with the findings, determinations and wear a negative pressure respirator; recommendations of the third physi- and cian, unless the employer and the em- (4) The results of the blood lead de- ployee reach an agreement which is terminations. otherwise consistent with the rec- (B) The employer shall instruct each ommendations of at least one of the examining and consulting physician to: three physicians. (1) Not reveal either in the written (iv) Information provided to examining opinion or orally, or in any other and consulting physicians. (A) The em- means of communication with the employer shall provide an initial physi- ployer, findings, including laboratory cian conducting a medical examination results, or diagnoses unrelated to an or consultation under this section with employee’s occupational exposure to the following information: lead; and (1) A copy of this regulation for lead (2) Advise the employee of any med- including all Appendices; ical condition, occupational or non- (2) A description of the affected em- occupational, which dictates further ployee’s duties as they relate to the medical examination or treatment. employee’s exposure; (vi) Alternate physician determination (3) The employee’s exposure level or mechanisms. The employer and an em- anticipated exposure level to lead and ployee or authorized employee rep- to any other toxic substance (if appli- resentative may agree upon the use of cable); any alternate physician determination (4) A description of any personal pro- mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy- tective equipment used or to be used; sician review mechanism provided by (5) Prior blood lead determinations; paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so and long as the alternate mechanism is as (6) All prior written medical opinions expeditious and protective as the re- concerning the employee in the em- quirements contained in this para- ployer’s possession or control. graph.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00094 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall turn an employee to his or her former assure that any person whom he re- job status: tains, employs, supervises or controls (1) For an employee removed due to a does not engage in prophylactic chela- blood lead level at or above 50 µg/dl tion of any employee at any time. when two consecutive blood sampling (ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- tests indicate that the employee’s lation is to be performed by any person blood lead level is at or below 40 µg/dl; in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, (2) For an employee removed due to a the employer shall assure that it be final medical determination, when a done under the supervision of a li- subsequent final medical determina- censed physician in a clinical setting tion results in a medical finding, deter- with thorough and appropriate medical mination, or opinion that the employee monitoring and that the employee is no longer has a detected medical condi- notified in writing prior to its occur- tion which places the employee at in- rence. creased risk of material impairment to (k) Medical removal protection—(1) health from exposure to lead. Temporary medical removal and return of (B) For the purposes of this section, an employee—(i) Temporary removal due the requirement that an employer re- to elevated blood lead level. The em- turn an employee to his or her former ployer shall remove an employee from job status is not intended to expand work having an exposure to lead at or upon or restrict any rights an em- above the action level on each occasion ployee has or would have had, absent that a periodic and a follow-up blood temporary medical removal, to a spe- sampling test conducted pursuant to cific job classification or position this section indicate that the employ- under the terms of a collective bar- ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50 gaining agreement. µg/dl; and, (iv) Removal of other employee special protective measure or limitations. The (ii) Temporary removal due to a final employer shall remove any limitations medical determination. (A) The employer placed on an employee or end any spe- shall remove an employee from work cial protective measures provided to an having an exposure to lead at or above employee pursuant to a final medical the action level on each occasion that determination when a subsequent final a final medical determination results medical determination indicates that in a medical finding, determination, or the limitations or special protective opinion that the employee has a de- measures are no longer necessary. tected medical condition which places (v) Employer options pending a final the employee at increased risk of ma- medical determination. Where the mul- terial impairment to health from expo- tiple physician review mechanism, or sure to lead. alternate medical determination mech- (B) For the purposes of this section, anism used pursuant to the medical the phrase final medical determination surveillance provisions of this section, means the written medical opinion on has not yet resulted in a final medical the employees’ health status by the ex- determination with respect to an em- amining physician or, where relevant, ployee, the employer shall act as fol- the outcome of the multiple physician lows: review mechanism or alternate medical (A) Removal. The employer may re- determination mechanism used pursu- move the employee from exposure to ant to the medical surveillance provi- lead, provide special protective meas- sions of this section. ures to the employee, or place limita- (C) Where a final medical determinations upon the employee, consistent tion results in any recommended spe- with the medical findings, determina- cial protective measures for an em- tions, or recommendations of any of ployee, or limitations on an employee’s the physicians who have reviewed the exposure to lead, the employer shall employee’s health status. implement and act consistent with the (B) Return. The employer may return recommendation. the employee to his or her former job (iii) Return of the employee to former status, end any special protective job status. (A) The employer shall re- measures provided to the employee,

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00095 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em- upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe- medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med- recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for (1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re- tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment- resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses. mination which differed from the find- (v) Other credits. The employer’s obli- ings, determinations, or recommenda- gation to provide medical removal pro- tions of the initial physician or; tection benefits to a removed employee (2) If the employee has been on re- shall be reduced to the extent that the moval status for the preceding eight- employee receives compensation for een months due to an elevated blood earnings lost during the period of re- lead level, then the employer shall moval either from a publicly or em- await a final medical determination. ployer-funded compensation program, (2) Medical removal protection bene- or receives income from employment fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro- with another employer made possible tection benefits. The employer shall pro- by virtue of the employee’s removal. vide an employee up to eighteen (18) (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of months of medical removal protection an employee. Where an employer, al- benefits on each occasion that an em- though not required by this section to ployee is removed from exposure to do so, removes an employee from expo- lead or otherwise limited pursuant to sure to lead or otherwise places limita- this section. tions on an employee due to the effects (ii) Definition of medical removal proof lead exposure on the employee’s tection benefits. For the purposes of this medical condition, the employer shall section, the requirement that an em- provide medical removal protection ployer provide medical removal protec- benefits to the employee equal to that tion benefits means that, as long as the required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii) job the employee was removed from of this section. continues, the employer shall maintain the total normal earnings, seniority (l) Employee information and training— and other employment rights and bene- (1) General. (i) The employer shall com- fits of an employee, including the em- municate information concerning lead ployee’s right to his or her former job hazards according to the requirements status as though the employee had not of OSHA’s Hazard Communication been medically removed from the em- Standard for the construction indus- ployee’s job or otherwise medically try, 29 CFR 1926.59, including but not limited. limited to the requirements concerning (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance warning signs and labels, material safe- during the period of employee removal or ty data sheets (MSDS), and employee limitation. During the period of time information and training. In addition, that an employee is medically removed employers shall comply with the fol- from his or her job or otherwise medi- lowing requirements: cally limited, the employer may condi- (ii) For all employees who are subject tion the provision of medical removal to exposure to lead at or above the ac- protection benefits upon the employ- tion level on any day or who are sub- ee’s participation in follow-up medical ject to exposure to lead compounds surveillance made available pursuant which may cause skin or eye irritation to this section. (e.g. lead arsenate, lead azide), the em- (iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a ployer shall provide a training program removed employee files a claim for in accordance with paragraph (l)(2) of workers’ compensation payments for a this section and assure employee par- lead-related disability, then the em- ticipation. ployer shall continue to provide med- (iii) The employer shall provide the ical removal protection benefits pend- training program as initial training ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- prior to the time of job assignment or

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00096 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

prior to the start up date for this re- statutes, regulations or ordinances in quirement, whichever comes last. addition to, or in combination with, (iv) The employer shall also provide signs required by this paragraph. the training program at least annually (ii) The employer shall assure that no for each employee who is subject to statement appears on or near any sign lead exposure at or above the action required by this paragraph which con- level on any day. tradicts or detracts from the meaning (2) Training program. The employer of the required sign. shall assure that each employee is (2) Signs. (i) The employer shall post trained in the following: the following warning signs in each (i) The content of this standard and work area where an employees expo- its appendices; sure to lead is above the PEL. (ii) The specific nature of the oper- WARNING ations which could result in exposure LEAD WORK AREA to lead above the action level; POISON (iii) The purpose, proper selection, NO SMOKING OR EATING fitting, use, and limitations of respirators; (ii) The employer shall assure that (iv) The purpose and a description of signs required by this paragraph are il- the medical surveillance program, and luminated and cleaned as necessary so the medical removal protection pro- that the legend is readily visible. gram including information concerning (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess- the adverse health effects associated ment. (i) The employer shall establish with excessive exposure to lead (with and maintain an accurate record of all particular attention to the adverse re- monitoring and other data used in con- productive effects on both males and ducting employee exposure assess- females and hazards to the fetus and ments as required in paragraph (d) of additional precautions for employees this section. who are pregnant); (ii) Exposure monitoring records (v) The engineering controls and shall include: work practices associated with the em- (A) The date(s), number, duration, lo- ployee’s job assignment including cation and results of each of the sam- training of employees to follow rel- ples taken if any, including a descrip- evant good work practices described in tion of the sampling procedure used to Appendix B of this section; determine representative employee ex- (vi) The contents of any compliance posure where applicable; plan in effect; (B) A description of the sampling and (vii) Instructions to employees that analytical methods used and evidence chelating agents should not routinely of their accuracy; be used to remove lead from their bod- (C) The type of respiratory protective ies and should not be used at all except devices worn, if any; under the direction of a licensed physi- (D) Name, social security number, cian; and and job classification of the employee (viii) The employee’s right of access monitored and of all other employees to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. whose exposure the measurement is in- (3) Access to information and training tended to represent; and materials. (i) The employer shall make (E) The environmental variables that readily available to all affected em- could affect the measurement of employees a copy of this standard and its ployee exposure. appendices. (iii) The employer shall maintain (ii) The employer shall provide, upon monitoring and other exposure assess- request, all materials relating to the ment records in accordance with the employee information and training provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20. program to affected employees and (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- their designated representatives, and ployer shall establish and maintain an to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- accurate record for each employee sub- rector. ject to medical surveillance as required (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em- by paragraph (j) of this section. ployer may use signs required by other (ii) This record shall include:

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00097 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(A) The name, social security num- taining lead or a specific process, oper- ber, and description of the duties of the ation, or activity involving lead cannot employee; release dust or fumes in concentrations (B) A copy of the physician’s written at or above the action level under any opinions; expected conditions of use. Objective (C) Results of any airborne exposure data can be obtained from an industry- monitoring done on or for that em- wide study or from laboratory product ployee and provided to the physician; test results from manufacturers of lead and containing products or materials. The (D) Any employee medical com- data the employer uses from an indus- plaints related to exposure to lead. try-wide survey must be obtained (iii) The employer shall keep, or as- under workplace conditions closely re- sure that the examining physician sembling the processes, types of mate- keeps, the following medical records: rial, control methods, work practices (A) A copy of the medical examina- and environmental conditions in the tion results including medical and employer’s current operations. work history required under paragraph (ii) The employer shall maintain the (j) of this section; record of the objective data relied upon (B) A description of the laboratory for at least 30 years. procedures and a copy of any standards (5) Availability. The employer shall or guidelines used to interpret the test make available upon request all results or references to that informa- records required to be maintained by tion; paragraph (n) of this section to affected (C) A copy of the results of biological employees, former employees, and monitoring. their designated representatives, and (iv) The employer shall maintain or to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- assure that the physician maintains rector for examination and copying. medical records in accordance with the (6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20. the employer ceases to do business, the (3) Medical removals. (i) The employer successor employer shall receive and shall establish and maintain an accu- retain all records required to be main- rate record for each employee removed tained by paragraph (n) of this section. from current exposure to lead pursuant (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to to paragraph (k) of this section. do business and there is no successor (ii) Each record shall include: employer to receive and retain the (A) The name and social security records required to be maintained by number of the employee; this section for the prescribed period, (B) The date of each occasion that these records shall be transmitted to the employee was removed from cur- the Director. rent exposure to lead as well as the (iii) At the expiration of the reten- corresponding date on which the em- tion period for the records required to ployee was returned to his or her be maintained by this section, the em- former job status; ployer shall notify the Director at (C) A brief explanation of how each least 3 months prior to the disposal of removal was or is being accomplished; such records and shall transmit those and records to the Director if requested (D) A statement with respect to each within the period. removal indicating whether or not the (iv) The employer shall also comply reason for the removal was an elevated with any additional requirements in- blood lead level. volving transfer of records set forth in (iii) The employer shall maintain 29 CFR 1910.20(h). each medical removal record for at (o) Observation of monitoring. (1) Em- least the duration of an employee’s employee observation. The employer shall ployment. provide affected employees or their (4) Objective data for exemption from redesignated representatives an oppor- quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For tunity to observe any monitoring of purposes of this section, objective data employee exposure to lead conducted are information demonstrating that a pursuant to paragraph (d) of this sec- particular product or material con- tion.

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00098 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(2) Observation procedures. (i) When- compounds called lead soaps. This standard ever observation of the monitoring of does not apply to other organic lead com- employee exposure to lead requires pounds. entry into an area where the use of res- C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several different occupations in the construction in- pirators, protective clothing or equip- dustry, including demolition or salvage of ment is required, the employer shall structures where lead or lead-containing ma- provide the observer with and assure terials are present; removal or encapsulation the use of such respirators, clothing of lead-containing materials, new construc- and equipment, and shall require the tion, alteration, repair, or renovation of observer to comply with all other ap- structures that contain lead or materials plicable safety and health procedures. containing lead; installation of products con- (ii) Without interfering with the taining lead. In addition, there are construc- monitoring, observers shall be entitled tion related activities where exposure to lead may occur, including transportation, to: disposal, storage, or containment of lead or (A) Receive an explanation of the materials containing lead on construction measurement procedures; sites, and maintenance operations associated (B) Observe all steps related to the with construction activities. monitoring of lead performed at the D. Permissible exposure: The permissible ex- place of exposure; and posure limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50 (C) Record the results obtained or re- micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 ceive copies of the results when re- µg/m3), averaged over an 8-hour workday. turned by the laboratory. E. Action level: The interim final standard (p) Effective date. This standard establishes an action level of 30 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (30 µg/m3), aver- (§ 1926.62) shall become effective June 3, aged over an 8-hour workday. The action 1993. level triggers several ancillary provisions of (q) Appendices. The information con- the standard such as exposure monitoring, tained in the appendices to this section medical surveillance, and training. is not intended by itself, to create any additional obligations not otherwise II. Health Hazard Data imposed by this standard nor detract A. Ways in which lead enters your body. from any existing obligation. When absorbed into your body in certain (r) Startup dates. (1) The requirements doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of of paragraphs (c) through (o) of this the lead standard is to prevent absorption of section, including administrative con- harmful quantities of lead. The standard is trols and feasible work practice con- intended to protect you not only from the immediate toxic effects of lead, but also trols, but not including engineering from the serious toxic effects that may not controls specified in paragraph (e)(1) of become apparent until years of exposure this section, shall be complied with as have passed. Lead can be absorbed into your soon as possible, but no later than 60 body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion days from the effective date of this sec- (eating). Lead (except for certain organic tion. lead compounds not covered by the standard, (2) Feasible engineering controls such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed specified by paragraph (e)(1) of this sec- through your skin. When lead is scattered in tion shall be implemented as soon as the air as a dust, fume respiratory tract. In- halation of airborne lead is generally the possible, but no later than 120 days most important source of occupational lead from the effective date of this section. absorption. You can also absorb lead through your digestive system if lead gets into your APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food, DATA SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EX- cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up POSURE TO LEAD which have lead on them or handle them with hands contaminated with lead, this will I. Substance Identification contribute to ingestion. A significant por- A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy tion of the lead that you inhale or ingest metal at room temperature and pressure and gets into your blood stream. Once in your is a basic chemical element. It can combine blood stream, lead is circulated throughout with various other substances to form nu- your body and stored in various organs and merous lead compounds. body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly fil- B. Compounds covered by the standard: The tered out of your body and excreted, but word lead when used in this interim final some remains in the blood and other tissues. standard means elemental lead, all inorganic As exposure to lead continues, the amount lead compounds and a class of organic lead stored in your body will increase if you are

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00099 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

absorbing more lead than your body is ex- prevent worsening conditions, and progres- creting. Even though you may not be aware sion to kidney dialysis or death is possible. of any immediate symptoms of disease, this Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the re- lead stored in your tissues can be slowly productive systems of both men and women. causing irreversible damage, first to indi- Overexposure to lead may result in decreased vidual cells, then to your organs and whole sex drive, impotence and sterility in men. body systems. Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1) Short raising the risk of birth defects. There is evi- term (acute) overexposure. Lead is a potent, dence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women systemic poison that serves no known useful whose husbands were exposed to lead or who function once absorbed by your body. Taken were exposed to lead themselves. Lead expo- in large enough doses, lead can kill you in a sure also may result in decreased fertility, matter of days. A condition affecting the and abnormal menstrual cycles in women. brain called acute encephalopathy may arise The course of pregnancy may be adversely which develops quickly to seizures, coma, affected by exposure to lead since lead and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A short term dose of lead can lead to acute crosses the placental barrier and poses risks encephalopathy. Short term occupational ex- to developing fetuses. Children born of par- posures of this magnitude are highly un- ents either one of whom were exposed to ex- usual, but not impossible. Similar forms of cess lead levels are more likely to have birth encephalopathy may, however, arise from ex- defects, mental retardation, behavioral dis- tended, chronic exposure to lower doses of orders or die during the first year of child- lead. There is no sharp dividing line between hood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and blood-forming system resulting in decreased chronic effects which take longer to acquire. hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that Lead adversely affects numerous body sys- carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately tems, and causes forms of health impairment anemia. Anemia is characterized by weak- and disease which arise after periods of expo- ness, pallor and fatigability as a result of de- sure as short as days or as long as several creased oxygen carrying capacity in the years. blood. (2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chron- (3) Health protection goals of the standard. ic overexposure to lead may result in severe Prevention of adverse health effects for most damage to your blood-forming, nervous, uri- workers from exposure to lead throughout a nary and reproductive systems. Some com- working lifetime requires that a worker’s mon symptoms of chronic overexposure in- blood lead level (BLL, also expressed as PbB) clude loss of appetite, metallic taste in the be maintained at or below forty micrograms mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, pallor, per deciliter of whole blood (40 µg/dl). The excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia, blood lead levels of workers (both male and headache, nervous irritability, muscle and female workers) who intend to have children joint pain or soreness, fine tremors, numb- should be maintained below 30 µg/dl to mini- ness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In mize adverse reproductive health effects to lead colic there may be severe abdominal the parents and to the developing fetus. The pain. Damage to the central nervous system measurement of your blood lead level (BLL) in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in particular is one of the most severe forms of is the most useful indicator of the amount of lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal, lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead form of encephalopathy may be preceded by levels are most often reported in units of µ vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to milligrams (mg) or micrograms ( g) of lead µ drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, rest- (1 mg=1000 g) per 100 grams (100g), 100 milli- lessness, irritability, tremor, and convul- liters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These sions. It may arise suddenly with the onset three units are essentially the same. Some- of seizures, followed by coma, and death. time BLLs are expressed in the form of mg% There is a tendency for muscular weakness or µg%. This is a shorthand notation for 100g, to develop at the same time. This weakness 100 ml, or dl. (References to BLL measure- may progress to paralysis often observed as ments in this standard are expressed in the a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’ or ‘‘foot drop’’ form of µg/dl.) and is a manifestation of a disease to the BLL measurements show the amount of nervous system called peripheral neurop- lead circulating in your blood stream, but do athy. Chronic overexposure to lead also re- not give any information about the amount sults in kidney disease with few, if any, of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL symptoms appearing until extensive and measurements merely show current absorp- most likely permanent kidney damage has tion of lead, not the effect that lead is hav- occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the ing on your body or the effects that past lead presence of this kidney disease only after exposure may have already caused. Past re- about two-thirds of kidney function is lost. search into lead-related diseases, however, When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunc- has focused heavily on associations between tion arise, it is often too late to correct or BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your

100

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00100 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

BLL is an important indicator of the likeli- I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)— hood that you will gradually acquire a lead- Paragraph (C) related health impairment or disease. The standard sets a permissible exposure Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per µg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3), averaged over a wide variability of individual response to an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a lead, thus it is difficult to say that a par- time-weighted average (TWA). This is the ticular BLL in a given person will cause a highest level of lead in air to which you may particular effect. Studies have associated be permissibly exposed over an 8-hour work- fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 day. However, since this is an 8-hour aver- µg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms age, short exposures above the PEL are per- of diseases in some workers with BLLs well mitted so long as for each 8-hour work day below 80 µg/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indi- your average exposure does not exceed this cator of the risks to your health, but one level. This interim final standard, however, other factor is also extremely important. takes into account the fact that your daily This factor is the length of time you have exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an 8-hour workday as the result of overtime or elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large other alterations in your work schedule. To quantities of lead are being gradually stored deal with this situation, the standard con- in your organs and tissues (body burden). tains a formula which reduces your permis- The greater your overall body burden, the sible exposure when you are exposed more greater the chances of substantial perma- than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed nent damage. The best way to prevent all to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum performs of lead-related impairments and dis- mitted average exposure would be 40 µg/m3. eases—both short term and long term—is to maintain your BLL below 40 µg/dl. The provi- II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) sions of the standard are designed with this end in mind. If lead is present in your workplace in any Your employer has prime responsibility to quantity, your employer is required to make assure that the provisions of the standard an initial determination of whether any em- are complied with both by the company and ployee’s exposure to lead exceeds the action by individual workers. You, as a worker, level (30 µg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day). however, also have a responsibility to assist Employee exposure is that exposure which your employer in complying with the stand- would occur if the employee were not using ard. You can play a key role in protecting a respirator. This initial determination re- your own health by learning about the lead quires your employer to monitor workers’ hazards and their control, learning what the exposures unless he or she has objective data standard requires, following the standard which can demonstrate conclusively that no where it governs your own actions, and see- employee will be exposed to lead in excess of ing that your employer complies with provi- the action level. Where objective data is used sions governing his or her actions. in lieu of actual monitoring the employer (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health must establish and maintain an accurate problems. You should immediately notify record, documenting its relevancy in assess- your employer if you develop signs or symp- ing exposure levels for current job condi- toms associated with lead poisoning or if you tions. If such objective data is available, the desire medical advice concerning the effects employer need proceed no further on em- of current or past exposure to lead or your ployee exposure assessment until such time ability to have a healthy child. You should that conditions have changed and the deter- also notify your employer if you have dif- mination is no longer valid. ficulty breathing during a respirator fit test Objective data may be compiled from var- or while wearing a respirator. In each of ious sources, e.g., insurance companies and these cases, your employer must make avail- trade associations and information from sup- able to you appropriate medical examina- pliers or exposure data collected from simi- tions or consultations. These must be pro- lar operations. Objective data may also com- vided at no cost to you and at a reasonable prise previously-collected sampling data in- time and place. The standard contains a pro- cluding area monitoring. If it cannot be de- cedure whereby you can obtain a second termined through using objective data that opinion by a physician of your choice if your worker exposure is less than the action level, employer selected the initial physician. your employer must conduct monitoring or must rely on relevant previous personal sam- APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE pling, if available. Where monitoring is re- STANDARD SUMMARY quired for the initial determination, it may be limited to a representative number of em- This appendix summarizes key provisions ployees who are reasonably expected to have of the interim final standard for lead in con- the highest exposure levels. If your employer struction that you as a worker should be- has conducted appropriate air sampling for come familiar with. lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use

101

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00101 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

these results, provided they are applicable to measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, the same employee tasks and exposure condi- are at or below the action level. Air moni- tions and meet the requirements for accu- toring must be repeated every 3 months if racy as specified in the standard. As with ob- you are exposed over the PEL. Your em- jective data, if such results are relied upon ployer must continue monitoring for you at for the initial determination, your employer this frequency until 2 consecutive measure- must establish and maintain a record as to ments, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the relevancy of such data to current job the PEL but above the action level, at which conditions. time your employer must repeat monitoring If there have been any employee com- of your exposure every six months and may plaints of symptoms which may be attrib- discontinue monitoring only after your expo- utable to exposure to lead or if there is any other information or observations which sure drops to or below the action level. How- would indicate employee exposure to lead, ever, whenever there is a change of equip- this must also be considered as part of the ment, process, control, or personnel or a new initial determination. type of job is added at your workplace which If this initial determination shows that a may result in new or additional exposure to reasonable possibility exists that any em- lead, your employer must perform additional ployee may be exposed, without regard to monitoring. respirators, over the action level, your employer must set up an air monitoring pro- III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E) gram to determine the exposure level rep- Your employer is required to assure that resentative of each employee exposed to lead no employee is exposed to lead in excess of at your workplace. In carrying out this air the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final monitoring program, your employer is not standard for lead in construction requires required to monitor the exposure of every employee, but he or she must monitor a rep- employers to institute engineering and work resentative number of employees and job practice controls including administrative types. Enough sampling must be done to en- controls to the extent feasible to reduce em- able each employee’s exposure level to be ployee exposure to lead. Where such controls reasonably represent full shift exposure. In are feasible but not adequate to reduce expo- addition, these air samples must be taken sures below the PEL they must be used none- under conditions which represent each em- theless to reduce exposures to the lowest ployee’s regular, daily exposure to lead. level that can be accomplished by these Sampling performed in the past 12 months means and then supplemented with appro- may be used to determine exposures above priate respiratory protection. the action level if such sampling was con- Your employer is required to develop and ducted during work activities essentially implement a written compliance program similar to present work conditions. prior to the commencement of any job where The standard lists certain tasks which may employee exposures may reach the PEL as likely result in exposures to lead in excess of an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in ex- identifies the various elements that must be cess of 50 times the PEL. If you are per- included in the plan. For example, employers forming any of these tasks, your employer are required to include a description of oper- must provide you with appropriate res- ations in which lead is emitted, detailing piratory protection, protective clothing and other relevant information about the oper- equipment, change areas, hand washing fa- ation such as the type of equipment used, cilities, biological monitoring, and training the type of material involved, employee job until such time that an exposure assessment responsibilities, operating procedures and is conducted which demonstrates that your maintenance practices. In addition, your em- exposure level is below the PEL. ployer’s compliance plan must specify the If you are exposed to lead and air sampling means that will be used to achieve compli- is performed, your employer is required to notify you in writing within 5 working days ance and, where engineering controls are re- of the air monitoring results which represent quired, include any engineering plans or your exposure. If the results indicate that studies that have been used to select the your exposure exceeds the PEL (without re- control methods. If administrative controls gard to your use of a respirator), then your involving job rotation are used to reduce em- employer must also notify you of this in ployee exposure to lead, the job rotation writing, and provide you with a description schedule must be included in the compliance of the corrective action that has been taken plan. The plan must also detail the type of or will be taken to reduce your exposure. protective clothing and equipment, including Your exposure must be rechecked by moni- respirators, housekeeping and hygiene prac- toring, at least every six months if your ex- tices that will be used to protect you from posure is at or over the action level but the adverse effects of exposure to lead. below the PEL. Your employer may dis- The written compliance program must be continue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive made available, upon request, to affected

102

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00102 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

employees and their designated representa- types of respirator masks. To ensure that tives, the Assistant Secretary and the Direc- your respirator fits properly and that face- tor. piece leakage is minimal, your employer Finally, the plan must be reviewed and up- must give you either a qualitative or quan- dated at least every 6 months to assure it re- titative fit test as specified in Appendix A of flects the current status in exposure control. the Respiratory Protection standard located at 29 CFR 1910.134. IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F) You must also receive from your employer Your employer is required to provide and proper training in the use of respirators. assure your use of respirators when your ex- Your employer is required to teach you how posure to lead is not controlled below the to wear a respirator, to know why it is need- PEL by other means. The employer must pay ed, and to understand its limitations. the cost of the respirator. Whenever you re- The standard provides that if your res- quest one, your employer is also required to pirator uses filter elements, you must be provide you a respirator even if your air ex- given an opportunity to change the filter ele- posure level is not above the PEL. You ments whenever an increase in breathing re- might desire a respirator when, for example, sistance is detected. You also must be per- you have received medical advice that your mitted to periodically leave your work area lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you to wash your face and respirator facepiece may intend to have children in the near fu- whenever necessary to prevent skin irrita- ture, and want to reduce the level of lead in tion. If you ever have difficulty in breathing your body to minimize adverse reproductive during a fit test or while using a respirator, effects. While respirators are the least satis- your employer must make a medical exam- factory means of controlling your exposure, ination available to you to determine wheth- they are capable of providing significant pro- er you can safely wear a respirator. The re- tection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, sult of this examination may be to give you cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they a positive pressure respirator (which reduces stop providing adequate protection. breathing resistance) or to provide alter- Your employer is required to select res- native means of protection. pirators from the types listed in Table I of the Respiratory Protection section of the V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment— standard (§ 1926.62 (f)). Any respirator chosen Paragraph (G) must be approved by the National Institute If you are exposed to lead above the PEL for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your respirator selection table will enable your use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to employer to choose a type of respirator that lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead will give you a proper amount of protection azide which can cause skin and eye irrita- based on your airborne lead exposure. Your tion, your employer must provide you with employer may select a type of respirator protective work clothing and equipment ap- that provides greater protection than that propriate for the hazard. If work clothing is required by the standard; that is, one rec- provided, it must be provided in a clean and ommended for a higher concentration of lead dry condition at least weekly, and daily if than is present in your workplace. For exam- your airborne exposure to lead is greater µ 3. ple, a powered air-purifying respirator than 200 g/m Appropriate protective work (PAPR) is much more protective than a typ- clothing and equipment can include cover- ical negative pressure respirator, and may alls or similar full-body work clothing, also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR gloves, hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover- has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean lets, and face shields or vented goggles. Your the air, and a power source that continu- employer is required to provide all such ously blows filtered air into your breathing equipment at no cost to you. In addition, zone. Your employer might make a PAPR your employer is responsible for providing available to you to ease the burden of having repairs and replacement as necessary, and to wear a respirator for long periods of time. also is responsible for the cleaning, laun- The standard provides that you can obtain a dering or disposal of protective clothing and PAPR upon request. equipment. Your employer must also start a Res- The interim final standard requires that piratory Protection Program. This program your employer assure that you follow good must include written procedures for the work practices when you are working in proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and areas where your exposure to lead may ex- maintenance of respirators. ceed the PEL. With respect to protective Your employer must ensure that your res- clothing and equipment, where appropriate, pirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of the following procedures should be observed a respirator facepiece is critical to your pro- prior to beginning work: tection from airborne lead. Obtaining a prop- 1. Change into work clothing and shoe cover fit on each employee may require your ers in the clean section of the designated employer to make available several different changing areas;

103

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00103 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

2. Use work garments of appropriate pro- posure to lead occurs. In addition, change tective gear, including respirators before en- areas, showers (where feasible), and tering the work area; and lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made 3. Store any clothing not worn under pro- available to workers exposed to lead above tective clothing in the designated changing the PEL. Your employer must assure that area. except in these facilities, food and beverage Workers should follow these procedures is not present or consumed, tobacco products upon leaving the work area: are not present or used, and cosmetics are 1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated not applied, where airborne exposures are protective work clothing while it is still above the PEL. Change rooms provided by being worn. At no time may lead be removed your employer must be equipped with sepa- from protective clothing by any means which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead rate storage facilities for your protective into the air; clothing and equipment and street clothes to 2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in avoid cross-contamination. After showering, the work area; no required protective clothing or equipment 3. Remove protective clothing and gear in worn during the shift may be worn home. It the dirty area of the designated changing is important that contaminated clothing or area. Remove protective coveralls by care- equipment be removed in change areas and fully rolling down the garment to reduce ex- not be worn home or you will extend your posure to dust. exposure and expose your family since lead 4. Remove respirators last; and from your clothing can accumulate in your 5. Wash hands and face. house, car, etc. Workers should follow these procedures Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be upon finishing work for the day (in addition entered with protective clothing or equip- to procedures described above): ment unless surface dust has been removed 1. Where applicable, place disposal cover- by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other alls and shoe covers with the abatement cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed waste; above the PEL must wash both their hands 2. Contaminated clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking placed in closed containers in the change or applying cosmetics. room. All of the facilities and hygiene practices 3. Clean protective gear, including res- just discussed are essential to minimize ad- pirators, according to standard procedures; ditional sources of lead absorption from in- 4. Wash hands and face again. If showers halation or ingestion of lead that may accu- are available, take a shower and wash hair. mulate on you, your clothes, or your posses- If shower facilities are not available at the sions. Strict compliance with these provi- work site, shower immediately at home and sions can virtually eliminate several sources wash hair. of lead exposure which significantly contribute to excessive lead absorption. VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H) Your employer must establish a house- VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J) keeping program sufficient to maintain all The medical surveillance program is part surfaces as free as practicable of accumula- of the standard’s comprehensive approach to tions of lead dust. Vacuuming is the pre- the prevention of lead-related disease. Its ferred method of meeting this requirement, purpose is to supplement the main thrust of and the use of compressed air to clean floors the standard which is aimed at minimizing and other surfaces is generally prohibited unless removal with compressed air is done airborne concentrations of lead and sources in conjunction with ventilation systems de- of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can signed to contain dispersal of the lead dust. determine if the other provisions of the Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing standard have affectively protected you as may not be used except where vacuuming or an individual. Compliance with the stand- other equally effective methods have been ard’s provision will protect most workers tried and do not work. Vacuums must be from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but used equipped with a special filter called a may not be satisfactory to protect individual high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter workers (1) who have high body burdens of and emptied in a manner which minimizes lead acquired over past years, (2) who have the reentry of lead into the workplace. additional uncontrolled sources of non-occupational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit un- VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices— usual variations in lead absorption rates, or Paragraph (I) (4) who have specific non-work related med- The standard requires that hand washing ical conditions which could be aggravated by facilities be provided where occupational ex- lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In

104

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00104 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

addition, control systems may fail, or hy- information to establish a baseline to which giene and respirator programs may be inad- subsequent data can be compared. equate. Periodic medical surveillance of indi- An initial medical examination to consist vidual workers will help detect those fail- of blood sampling and analysis for lead and ures. Medical surveillance will also be impor- zinc protoporphyrin must also be made avail- tant to protect your reproductive ability-re- able (prior to assignment) for each employee gardless of whether you are a man or woman. being assigned for the first time to an area All medical surveillance required by the where the airborne concentration of lead interim final standard must be performed by equals or exceeds the action level at any or under the supervision of a licensed physi- time. In addition, a medical examination or cian. The employer must provide required consultation must be made available as soon medical surveillance without cost to employ- as possible if you notify your employer that ees and at a reasonable time and place. The you are experiencing signs or symptoms standard’s medical surveillance program has commonly associated with lead poisoning or two parts—periodic biological monitoring that you have difficulty breathing while and medical examinations. Your employer’s wearing a respirator or during a respirator obligation to offer you medical surveillance fit test. You must also be provided a medical is triggered by the results of the air moni- examination or consultation if you notify toring program. Full medical surveillance your employer that you desire medical ad- must be made available to all employees who vice concerning the effects of current or past are or may be exposed to lead in excess of exposure to lead on your ability to procreate the action level for more than 30 days a year a healthy child. and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl. Finally, appropriate follow-up medical ex- Initial medical surveillance consisting of aminations or consultations may also be pro- blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc vided for employees who have been temporarily removed from exposure under the protoporphyrin must be provided to all em- medical removal protection provisions of the ployees exposed at any time (1 day) above standard. (See Part IX, below.) the action level. The standard specifies the minimum con- Biological monitoring under the standard tent of pre-assignment and annual medical must be provided at least every 2 months for examinations. The content of other types of the first 6 months and every 6 months there- medical examinations and consultations is after until your blood lead level is below 40 left up to the sound discretion of the exam- µ g/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a ining physician. Pre-assignment and annual very useful blood test which measures an ad- medical examinations must include (1) a de- verse metabolic effect of lead on your body tailed work history and medical history; (2) and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity. a thorough physical examination, including If your BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl the moni- an evaluation of your pulmonary status if toring frequency must be increased from you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a every 6 months to at least every 2 months blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs of laboratory tests designed to check your indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/dl. blood chemistry and your kidney function. Each time your BLL is determined to be over In addition, at any time upon your request, 40 µg/dl, your employer must notify you of a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will this in writing within five working days of be made (microscopic examination of a his or her receipt of the test results. The em- sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be ployer must also inform you that the stand- given. ard requires temporary medical removal The standard does not require that you with economic protection when your BLL ex- participate in any of the medical procedures, ceeds 50 µg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Re- tests, etc. which your employer is required moval Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime to make available to you. Medical surveil- your BLL exceeds 50 µg/dl your employer lance can, however, play a very important must make available to you within two role in protecting your health. You are weeks of receipt of these test results a sec- strongly encouraged, therefore, to partici- ond follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL. pate in a meaningful fashion. The standard If the two tests both exceed 50 µg/dl, and you contains a multiple physician review mecha- are temporarily removed, then your em- nism which will give you a chance to have a ployer must make successive BLL tests physician of your choice directly participate available to you on a monthly basis during in the medical surveillance program. If you the period of your removal. are dissatisfied with an examination by a Medical examinations beyond the initial physician chosen by your employer, you can one must be made available on an annual select a second physician to conduct an inde- basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl pendent analysis. The two doctors would at- at any time during the preceding year and tempt to resolve any differences of opinion, you are being exposed above the airborne ac- and select a third physician to resolve any tion level of 30 µg/m3 for 30 or more days per firm dispute. Generally your employer will year. The initial examination will provide choose the physician who conducts medical

105

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00105 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

surveillance under the lead standard-unless accumulated by the medical and scientific you and your employer can agree on the communities has largely confirmed the effec- choice of a physician or physicians. Some tiveness of this type of therapy for the treat- companies and unions have agreed in ad- ment of very severe lead poisoning. On the vance, for example, to use certain inde- other hand, it has also been established that pendent medical laboratories or panels of there can be a long list of extremely harmful physicians. Any of these arrangements are side effects associated with the use of acceptable so long as required medical sur- chelating agents. The medical community veillance is made available to workers. has balanced the advantages and disadvan- The standard requires your employer to tages resulting from the use of chelating provide certain information to a physician to agents in various circumstances and has es- aid in his or her examination of you. This in- tablished when the use of these agents is ac- formation includes (1) the standard and its ceptable. The standard includes these ac- appendices, (2) a description of your duties as cepted limitations due to a history of abuse they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) of chelation therapy by some lead compa- your exposure level or anticipated exposure nies. The most widely used chelating agents level, (4) a description of any personal pro- are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA), tective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate), lead level results, and (6) prior written med- and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or ical opinions concerning you that the em- Cupramine). ployer has. After a medical examination or consultation the physician must prepare a The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic che- written report which must contain (1) the lation’’ of any employee by any person the physician’s opinion as to whether you have employer retains, supervises or controls. Pro- any medical condition which places you at phylactic chelation is the routine use of increased risk of material impairment to chelating or similarly acting drugs to pre- health from exposure to lead, (2) any rec- vent elevated blood levels in workers who ommended special protective measures to be are occupationally exposed to lead, or the provided to you, (3) any blood lead level de- use of these drugs to routinely lower blood terminations, and (4) any recommended limi- lead levels to predesignated concentrations tation on your use of respirators. This last believed to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha- element must include a determination of sized that where an employer takes a worker whether you can wear a powered air puri- who has no symptoms of lead poisoning and fying respirator (PAPR) if you are found un- has chelation carried out by a physician (ei- able to wear a negative pressure respirator. ther inside or outside of a hospital) solely to The medical surveillance program of the reduce the worker’s blood lead level, that interim lead standard may at some point in will generally be considered prophylactic time serve to notify certain workers that chelation. The use of a hospital and a physi- they have acquired a disease or other adverse cian does not mean that prophylactic chela- medical condition as a result of occupational tion is not being performed. Routine chela- lead exposure. If this is true, these workers tion to prevent increased or reduce current might have legal rights to compensation blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever from public agencies, their employers, firms the setting. that supply hazardous products to their em- The standard allows the use of ‘‘thera- ployers, or other persons. Some states have peutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chelation if adminis- laws, including worker compensation laws, tered under the supervision of a licensed that disallow a worker who learns of a job- physician in a clinical setting with thorough related health impairment to sue, unless the and appropriate medical monitoring. Thera- worker sues within a short period of time peutic chelation responds to severe lead poi- after learning of the impairment. (This pe- soning where there are marked symptoms. riod of time may be a matter of months or Diagnostic chelation involved giving a pa- years.) An attorney can be consulted about tient a dose of the drug then collecting all these possibilities. It should be stressed that urine excreted for some period of time as an OSHA is in no way trying to either encour- aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. age or discourage claims or lawsuits. How- In cases where the examining physician de- ever, since results of the standard’s medical termines that chelation is appropriate, you surveillance program can significantly affect must be notified in writing of this fact before the legal remedies of a worker who has ac- such treatment. This will inform you of a po- quired a job-related disease or impairment, tentially harmful treatment, and allow you it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of to obtain a second opinion. this. The medical surveillance section of the IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph standard also contains provisions dealing (K) with chelation. Chelation is the use of certain drugs (administered in pill form or in- Excessive lead absorption subjects you to jected into the body) to reduce the amount increased risk of disease. Medical removal of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience protection (MRP) is a means of protecting

106

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00106 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

you when, for whatever reasons, other meth- appropriate follow-up medical surveillance. ods, such as engineering controls, work prac- If you were removed because your blood lead tices, and respirators, have failed to provide level was too high, you must be provided the protection you need. MRP involves the with a monthly blood test. If a medical opin- temporary removal of a worker from his or ion caused your removal, you must be pro- her regular job to a place of significantly vided medical tests or examinations that the lower exposure without any loss of earnings, doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do seniority, or other employment rights or not participate in this follow up medical sur- benefits. The purpose of this program is to veillance, you may lose your eligibility for cease further lead absorption and allow your MRP benefits. body to naturally excrete lead which has previously been absorbed. Temporary medical When you are medically eligible to return removal can result from an elevated blood to your former job, your employer must re- lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18 turn you to your ‘‘former job status.’’ This months, or for as long as the job the em- means that you are entitled to the position, ployee was removed from lasts, protection is wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if provided as a result of either form of re- you had not been removed. If you would still moval. The vast majority of removed work- be in your old job if no removal had occurred ers, however, will return to their former jobs that is where you go back. If not, you are re- long before this eighteen month period ex- turned consistent with whatever job assign- pires. ment discretion your employer would have You may also be removed from exposure had if no removal had occurred. MRP only even if your blood lead level is below 50 µg/ seeks to maintain your rights, not expand dl if a final medical determination indicates them or diminish them. that you temporarily need reduced lead ex- If you are removed under MRP and you are posure for medical reasons. If the physician also eligible for worker compensation or who is implementing your employers med- other compensation for lost wages, your em- ical program makes a final written opinion ployer’s MRP benefits obligation is reduced recommending your removal or other special by the amount that you actually receive protective measures, your employer must from these other sources. This is also true if implement the physician’s recommendation. you obtain other employment during the If you are removed in this manner, you may time you are laid off with MRP benefits. only be returned when the doctor indicates that it is safe for you to do so. The standard also covers situations where The standard does not give specific in- an employer voluntarily removes a worker structions dealing with what an employer from exposure to lead due to the effects of must do with a removed worker. Your job as- lead on the employee’s medical condition, signment upon removal is a matter for you, even though the standard does not require your employer and your union (if any) to removal. In these situations MRP benefits work out consistent with existing procedures must still be provided as though the stand- for job assignments. Each removal must be ard required removal. Finally, it is impor- accomplished in a manner consistent with tant to note that in all cases where removal existing collective bargaining relationships. is required, respirators cannot be used as a Your employer is given broad discretion to substitute. Respirators may be used before implement temporary removals so long as no removal becomes necessary, but not as an al- attempt is made to override existing agree- ternative to a transfer to a low exposure job, ments. Similarly, a removed worker is pro- or to a lay-off with MRP benefits. vided no right to veto an employer’s choice which satisfies the standard. X. Employee Information and Training— In most cases, employers will likely trans- Paragraph (L) fer removed employees to other jobs with sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, Your employer is required to provide an in- a worker’s hours may be reduced so that the formation and training program for all em- time weighted average exposure is reduced, ployees exposed to lead above the action or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation other alternative is feasible. from lead compounds such as lead arsenate In all of these situation, MRP benefits or lead azide. The program must train these must be provided during the period of re- employees regarding the specific hazards as- moval—i.e., you continue to receive the sociated with their work environment, pro- same earnings, seniority, and other rights tective measures which can be taken, includ- and benefits you would have had if you had ing the contents of any compliance plan in not been removed. Earnings includes more effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (in- than just your base wage; it includes over- cluding their reproductive systems), and time, shift differentials, incentives, and their rights under the standard. All employ- other compensation you would have earned if ees must be trained prior to initial assign- you had not been removed. During the period ment to areas where there is a possibility of of removal you must also be provided with exposure over the action level.

107

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00107 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

This training program must also be pro- medical records unless you authorize their vided at least annually thereafter unless fur- access. ther exposure above the action level will not occur. XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph (O) XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) When air monitoring for lead is performed The standard requires that the following at your workplace as required by this stand- warning sign be posted in work areas where ard, your employer must allow you or some- the exposure to lead exceeds the PEL: one you designate to act as an observer of the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an WARNING explanation of the measurement procedure, LEAD WORK AREA and to record the results obtained. Since re- POISON sults will not normally be available at the NO SMOKING OR EATING time of the monitoring, observers are entitled to record or receive the results of the These signs are to be posted and main- monitoring when returned by the laboratory. tained in a manner which assures that the Your employer is required to provide the ob- legend is readily visible. server with any personal protective devices XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N) required to be worn by employees working in the area that is being monitored. The em- Your employer is required to keep all ployer must require the observer to wear all records of exposure monitoring for airborne such equipment and to comply with all other lead. These records must include the name applicable safety and health procedures. and job classification of employees measured, details of the sampling and analytical XIV. Effective Date—Paragraph (P) techniques, the results of this sampling, and The standard’s effective date is June 3, the type of respiratory protection being 1993. Employer obligations under the stand- worn by the person sampled. Such records ard begin as of that date with full implemen- are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your tation of engineering controls as soon as pos- employer is also required to keep all records sible but no later than within 4 months, and of biological monitoring and medical exam- all other provisions completed as soon as ination results. These records must include possible, but no later than within 2 months the names of the employees, the physician’s from the effective date. written opinion, and a copy of the results of the examination. Medical records must be XV. For Additional Information preserved and maintained for the duration of employment plus 30 years. However, if the A. A copy of the interim standard for lead employee’s duration of employment is less in construction can be obtained free of than one year, the employer need not retain charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office that employee’s medical records beyond the of Publications, room N–3101, United States period of employment if they are provided to Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210: the employee upon termination of employ- Telephone (202) 219–4667. ment. B. Additional information about the stand- Recordkeeping is also required if you are ard, its enforcement, and your employer’s temporarily removed from your job under compliance can be obtained from the nearest the medical removal protection program. OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone This record must include your name and so- directory under United States Government/ cial security number, the date of your re- Department of Labor. moval and return, how the removal was or is being accomplished, and whether or not the APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL reason for the removal was an elevated blood SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES lead level. Your employer is required to keep Introduction each medical removal record only for as long as the duration of an employee’s employ- The primary purpose of the Occupational ment. Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so The standard requires that if you request far as possible, safe and healthful working to see or copy environmental monitoring, conditions for every working man and blood lead level monitoring, or medical re- woman. The interim final occupational moval records, they must be made available health standard for lead in construction is to you or to a representative that you au- designed to protect workers exposed to inor- thorize. Your union also has access to these ganic lead including metallic lead, all inor- records. Medical records other than BLL’s ganic lead compounds and organic lead must also be provided upon request to you, soaps. to your physician or to any other person Under this interim final standard occupa- whom you may specifically designate. Your tional exposure to inorganic lead is to be union does not have access to your personal limited to 50 µg/m3 (micrograms per cubic

108

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00108 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

meter) based on an 8 hour time-weighted av- action level on any one day. In addition, a erage (TWA). This permissible exposure limit program of biological monitoring is to be (PEL) must be achieved through a combina- made available to all employees exposed tion of engineering, work practice and ad- above the action level at any time and addi- ministrative controls to the extent feasible. tional medical surveillance is to be made Where these controls are in place but are available to all employees exposed to lead found not to reduce employee exposures to or above 30 µg/m3 TWA for more than 30 days below the PEL, they must be used nonethe- each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl. less, and supplemented with respirators to This program consists of periodic blood sam- meet the 50 µg/m3 exposure limit. pling and medical evaluation to be per- The standard also provides for a program formed on a schedule which is defined by pre- of biological monitoring for employees ex- vious laboratory results, worker complaints posed to lead above the action level at any or concerns, and the clinical assessment of time, and additional medical surveillance for the examining physician. all employees exposed to levels of inorganic Under this program, the blood lead level lead above 30 µg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30 (BLL) of all employees who are exposed to days per year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/ lead above 30 µg/m3 for more than 30 days per dl. year or whose blood lead is above 40 µg/dl but The purpose of this document is to outline exposed for no more than 30 days per year is the medical surveillance provisions of the in- to be determined at least every two months terim standard for inorganic lead in con- for the first six months of exposure and struction, and to provide further information every six months thereafter. The frequency to the physician regarding the examination is increased to every two months for employ- and evaluation of workers exposed to inor- ees whose last blood lead level was 40 µg/dl or ganic lead. above. For employees who are removed from Section 1 provides a detailed description of exposure to lead due to an elevated blood the monitoring procedure including the re- lead, a new blood lead level must be meas- quired frequency of blood testing for exposed ured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) workers, provisions for medical removal pro- measurement is strongly recommended on tection (MRP), the recommended right of the each occasion that a blood lead level meas- employee to a second medical opinion, and urement is made. notification and recordkeeping requirements An annual medical examination and con- of the employer. A discussion of the require- sultation performed under the guidelines dis- ments for respirator use and respirator mon- cussed in Section 3 is to be made available to itoring and OSHA’s position on prophylactic each employee exposed above 30 µg/m3 for chelation therapy are also included in this more than 30 days per year for whom a blood section. test conducted at any time during the pre- Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and at or above 40 µg/dl. Also, an examination is effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic to be given to all employees prior to their as- pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse ef- signment to an area in which airborne lead fects on both male and female reproductive concentrations reach or exceed the 30 µg/m3 capacity and on the fetus are also discussed. for more than 30 days per year. In addition, Section 3 outlines the recommended med- a medical examination must be provided as ical evaluation of the worker exposed to in- soon as possible after notification by an em- organic lead, including details of the medical ployee that the employee has developed history, physical examination, and rec- signs or symptoms commonly associated ommended laboratory tests, which are based with lead intoxication, that the employee on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in desires medical advice regarding lead expo- Section 2. sure and the ability to procreate a healthy Section 4 provides detailed information child, or that the employee has dem- concerning the laboratory tests available for onstrated difficulty in breathing during a the monitoring of exposed workers. Included respirator fitting test or during respirator also is a discussion of the relative value of use. An examination is also to be made avail- each test and the limitations and pre- able to each employee removed from expo- cautions which are necessary in the interpre- sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining mate- tation of the laboratory results. rial impairment to health, or otherwise limited or specially protected pursuant to med- I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Re- ical recommendations. quirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic Results of biological monitoring or the rec- Lead ommendations of an examining physician Under the interim final standard for inor- may necessitate removal of an employee ganic lead in the construction industry, ini- from further lead exposure pursuant to the tial medical surveillance consisting of bio- standard’s medical removal protection logical monitoring to include blood lead and (MRP) program. The object of the MRP pro- ZPP level determination shall be provided to gram is to provide temporary medical re- employees exposed to lead at or above the moval to workers either with substantially

109

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00109 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at During the period of any form of special risk of sustaining material health impair- protection or removal, the employer must ment from continued substantial exposure to maintain the worker’s earnings, seniority, lead. and other employment rights and benefits Under the standard’s ultimate worker re- (as though the worker had not been removed) moval criteria, a worker is to be removed for a period of up to 18 months or for as long from any work having an eight hour TWA as the job the employee was removed from exposure to lead of 30 µg/m3 when his or her lasts if less than 18 months. This economic blood lead level reaches 50 µg/dl and is con- protection will maximize meaningful worker firmed by a second follow-up blood lead level participation in the medical surveillance performed within two weeks after the em- program, and is appropriate as part of the ployer receives the results of the first blood employer’s overall obligation to provide a sampling test. Return of the employee to his safe and healthful workplace. The provisions or her job status depends on a worker’s blood of MRP benefits during the employee’s re- lead level declining to 40 µg/dl. moval period may, however, be conditioned As part of the interim standard, the em- upon participation in medical surveillance. ployer is required to notify in writing each The lead standard provides for a multiple employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 physician review in cases where the em- µg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be ployee wishes a second opinion concerning potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an informed that the standard requires medical employee wishes a second opinion, he or she removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, can make an appointment with a physician when an employee’s blood lead level exceeds of his or her choice. This second physician the above defined limit. will review the findings, recommendations or In addition to the above blood lead level determinations of the first physician and criterion, temporary worker removal may conduct any examinations, consultations or also take place as a result of medical deter- tests deemed necessary in an attempt to minations and recommendations. Written make a final medical determination. If the medical opinions must be prepared after first and second physicians do not agree in each examination pursuant to the standard. their assessment they must try to resolve If the examining physician includes a med- their differences. If they cannot reach an ical finding, determination or opinion that agreement then they must designate a third the employee has a medical condition which physician to resolve the dispute. places the employee at increased risk of ma- The employer must provide examining and terial health impairment from exposure to consulting physicians with the following spe- lead, then the employee must be removed cific information: A copy of the lead regula- from exposure to lead at or above 30 µg/m3. tions and all appendices, a description of the Alternatively, if the examining physician employee’s duties as related to exposure, the recommends special protective measures for exposure level or anticipated level to lead an employee (e.g., use of a powered air puri- and any other toxic substances (if applica- fying respirator) or recommends limitations ble), a description of personal protective on an employee’s exposure to lead, then the equipment used, blood lead levels, and all employer must implement these rec- prior written medical opinions regarding the ommendations. employee in the employer’s possession or Recommendations may be more stringent control. The employer must also obtain from than the specific provisions of the standard. the physician and provide the employee with The examining physician, therefore, is given a written medical opinion containing blood broad flexibility to tailor special protective lead levels, the physicians’s opinion as to procedures to the needs of individual em- whether the employee is at risk of material ployees. This flexibility extends to the eval- impairment to health, any recommended uation and management of pregnant workers protective measures for the employee if fur- and male and female workers who are plan- ther exposure is permitted, as well as any ning to raise children. Based on the history, recommended limitations upon an employ- physical examination, and laboratory stud- ee’s use of respirators. ies, the physician might recommend special Employers must instruct each physician protective measures or medical removal for not to reveal to the employer in writing or an employee who is pregnant or who is plan- in any other way his or her findings, labora- ning to conceive a child when, in the physi- tory results, or diagnoses which are felt to cian’s judgment, continued exposure to lead be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. at the current job would pose a significant They must also instruct each physician to risk. The return of the employee to his or advise the employee of any occupationally or her former job status, or the removal of spe- non-occupationally related medical condi- cial protections or limitations, depends upon tion requiring further treatment or evalua- the examining physician determining that tion. the employee is no longer at increased risk The standard provides for the use of res- of material impairment or that special meas- pirators where engineering and other pri- ures are no longer needed. mary controls are not effective. However,

110

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00110 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

the use of respirator protection shall not be need not retain this record beyond the term used in lieu of temporary medical removal of employment if the record is provided to due to elevated blood lead levels or findings the employee upon termination of employ- that an employee is at risk of material ment. Medical removal records also must be health impairment. This is based on the nu- maintained for the duration of employment. merous inadequacies of respirators including All records required under the standard must skin rash where the facepiece makes contact be made available upon request to the As- with the skin, unacceptable stress to breath- sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational ing in some workers with underlying Safety and Health and the Director of the cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in providing adequate fit, the tendency for res- National Institute for Occupational Safety pirators to create additional hazards by and Health. Employers must also make envi- interfering with vision, hearing, and mobil- ronmental and biological monitoring and ity, and the difficulties of assuring the max- medical removal records available to af- imum effectiveness of a complicated work fected employees and to former employees or practice program involving respirators. Res- their authorized employee representatives. pirators do, however, serve a useful function Employees or their specifically designated where engineering and work practice con- representatives have access to their entire trols are inadequate by providing supple- medical surveillance records. mentary, interim, or short-term protection, In addition, the standard requires that the provided they are properly selected for the employer inform all workers exposed to lead environment in which the employee will be at or above 30 µg/m3 of the provisions of the working, properly fitted to the employee, standard and all its appendices, the purpose maintained and cleaned periodically, and and description of medical surveillance and worn by the employee when required. provisions for medical removal protection if In its interim final standard on occupational exposure to inorganic lead in the con- temporary removal is required. An under- struction industry, OSHA has prohibited pro- standing of the potential health effects of phylactic chelation. Diagnostic and thera- lead exposure by all exposed employees along peutic chelation are permitted only under with full understanding of their rights under the supervision of a licensed physician with the lead standard is essential for an effective appropriate medical monitoring in an ac- monitoring program. ceptable clinical setting. The decision to initiate chelation therapy must be made on an II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead individual basis and take into account the Although the toxicity of lead has been severity of symptoms felt to be a result of known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the lead toxicity along with blood lead levels, complex relationship between lead exposure ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as appropriate. EDTA and penicillamine which and human response is still being refined. are the primary chelating agents used in the Significant research into the toxic prop- therapy of occupational lead poisoning have erties of lead continues throughout the significant potential side effects and their world, and it should be anticipated that our use must be justified on the basis of expected understanding of thresholds of effects and benefits to the worker. Unless frank and se- margins of safety will be improved in future vere symptoms are present, therapeutic che- years. The provisions of the lead standard lation is not recommended, given the oppor- are founded on two prime medical judg- tunity to remove a worker from exposure ments: First, the prevention of adverse and allow the body to naturally excrete ac- health effects from exposure to lead through- cumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the che- out a working lifetime requires that worker lation mobilization test using CA–EDTA has blood lead levels be maintained at or below limited applicability. According to some in- 40 µg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of vestigators, the test can differentiate be- workers, male or female, who intend to par- tween lead-induced and other nephropathies. ent in the near future should be maintained The test may also provide an estimation of below 30 µg/dl to minimize adverse reproduc- the mobile fraction of the total body lead tive health effects to the parents and devel- burden. oping fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re- Employers are required to assure that accurate records are maintained on exposure production are being actively researched and assessment, including environmental moni- OSHA encourages the physician to remain toring, medical surveillance, and medical re- abreast of recent developments in the area to moval for each employee. Exposure assess- best advise pregnant workers or workers ment records must be kept for at least 30 planning to conceive children. years. Medical surveillance records must be The spectrum of health effects caused by kept for the duration of employment plus 30 lead exposure can be subdivided into five de- years except in cases where the employment velopmental stages: Normal, physiological was less than one year. If duration of em- changes of uncertain significance, ployment is less than one year, the employer pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms

111

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00111 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(morbidity), and mortality. Within this proc- 2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has ess there are no sharp distinctions, but rath- been found to have toxic effects on both the er a continuum of effects. Boundaries be- central and peripheral nervous systems. The tween categories overlap due to the wide var- earliest stages of lead-induced central nerv- iation of individual responses and exposures ous system effects first manifest themselves in the working population. OSHA’s develop- in the form of behavioral disturbances and ment of the lead standard focused on central nervous system symptoms including pathophysiological changes as well as later irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other stages of disease. sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, head- 1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest ache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and demonstrated effect of lead involves its abil- apathy. With more severe exposure, symp- ity to inhibit at least two enzymes of the toms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hal- heme synthesis pathway at very low blood lucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma. levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic The most severe and acute form of lead acid dehydrase (ALA–D) which catalyzes the poisoning which usually follows ingestion or conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute (ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a encephalopathy which may arise precipi- µ blood lead level below 20 g/dl. At a blood tously with the onset of intractable seizures, µ lead level of 40 g/dl, more than 20% of the coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death population would have 70% inhibition of within 48 hours. ALA–D. There is an exponential increase in While there is disagreement about what ex- ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater posure levels are needed to produce the ear- than 40 µg/dl. liest symptoms, most experts agree that Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also in- symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead hibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of levels of 60 µg/dl whole blood and therefore ferrochelatase leads to increased free eryth- recommend a 40 µg/dl maximum. The central rocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood nervous system effects frequently are not re- which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc versible following discontinued exposure or protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 chelation therapy and when improvement µg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the popu- does occur, it is almost always only partial. lation will have an increase in FEP. There is also an exponential relationship between The peripheral neuropathy resulting from blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/dl and lead exposure characteristically involves the associated ZPP level, which has led to only motor function with minimal sensory the development of the ZPP screening test damage and has a marked predilection for for lead exposure. the extensor muscles of the most active ex- While the significance of these effects is tremity. The peripheral neuropathy can subject to debate, it is OSHA’s position that occur with varying degrees of severity. The these enzyme disturbances are early stages earliest and mildest form which can be de- of a disease process which may eventually tected in workers with blood lead levels as µ result in the clinical symptoms of lead poi- low as 50 g/dl is manifested by slowing of soning. Whether or not the effects do motor nerve conduction velocity often with- progress to the later stages of clinical dis- out clinical symptoms. With progression of ease, disruption of these enzyme processes the neuropathy there is development of pain- over a working lifetime is considered to be a less extensor muscle weakness usually in- material impairment of health. volving the extensor muscles of the fingers One of the eventual results of lead-induced and hand in the most active upper extrem- inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis ity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, pathway is anemia which can be asymp- much less commonly, foot drop. tomatic if mild but associated with a wide In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, array of symptoms including dizziness, fa- electromyographical studies in patients with tigue, and tachycardia when more severe. blood lead levels greater than 50 µg/dl have Studies have indicated that lead levels as demonstrated a decrease in the number of low as 50 µg/dl can be associated with a defi- acting motor unit potentials, an increase in nite decreased hemoglobin, although most the duration of motor unit potentials, and cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as spontaneous pathological activity including shortened red-cell survival times, occur at fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether lead levels exceeding 80 µg/dl. Inhibited he- these effects occur at levels of 40 µg/dl is un- moglobin synthesis is more common in determined. chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte While the peripheral neuropathies can oc- life span is more common in acute cases. casionally be reversed with therapy, again In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a such recovery is not assured particularly in reticulocytosis along with the presence of the more severe neuropathies and often im- basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts, provement is only partial. The lack of re- although none of the above are versibility is felt to be due in part to seg- pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia. mental demyelination.

112

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00112 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect Infants of mothers with lead poisoning the gastrointestinal system producing ab- have a higher mortality during the first year dominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, con- and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower stipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, growth, and nervous system disorders. nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely de- Lead can pass through the placental bar- velops at blood lead levels below 80 µg/dl. rier and lead levels in the mother’s blood are 4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of comparable to concentrations of lead in the the most serious health effects of lead poi- umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental pas- soning. In the early stages of disease nuclear sage becomes detectable at 12–14 weeks of inclusion bodies can frequently be identified gestation and increases until birth. in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal func- There is little direct data on damage to the tion remains normal and the changes in this fetus from exposure to lead but it is gen- stage are probably reversible. With more ad- erally assumed that the fetus and newborn vanced disease there is progressive intersti- would be at least as susceptible to neuro- tial fibrosis and impaired renal function. logical damage as young children. Blood lead Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis en- levels of 50–60 µg/dl in children can cause sig- sues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and nificant neurobehavioral impairments and atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be pro- levels as low as 25 µg/dl. Given the overall gressive, eventually resulting in frank ure- body of literature concerning the adverse mia necessitating dialysis. There is occa- health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels sionally associated hypertension and that the blood lead level in children should hyperuricemia with or without gout. be maintained below 30 µg/dl with a popu- Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. lation mean of 15 µg/dl. Blood lead levels in The urinalysis is normal in early lead the fetus and newborn likewise should not nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and exceed 30 µg/dl. serum creatinine increase only when two- Because of lead’s ability to pass through thirds of kidney function is lost. Measure- the placental barrier and also because of the ment of creatinine clearance can often de- demonstrated adverse effects of lead on re- tect earlier disease as can other methods of productive function in both the male and fe- measurement of glomerular filtration rate. male as well as the risk of genetic damage of An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec- been used to differentiate between lead-in- ommends a 30 µg/dl maximum permissible duced and other nephropathies, but this pro- blood lead level in both males and females cedure is not widely accepted. A form of who wish to bear children. Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indi- 6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research cating severe injury to the proximal renal continue on the effects of lead on the human tubules is occasionally seen in children. body. Hypertension has frequently been 5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead noted in occupationally exposed individuals can have serious effects on reproductive although it is difficult to assess whether this function in both males and females. In male is due to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney workers exposed to lead there can be a de- or if some other mechanism is involved. Vas- crease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased cular and electrocardiographic changes have ability to produce healthy sperm, and ste- been detected but have not been well charac- rility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de- terized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid creased number of sperm (hypospermia), and function and interfere with the pituitary-ad- sperm with decreased motility renal axis, but again these effects have not (asthenospermia) can all occur. been well defined. Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood III. Medical Evaluation lead levels of 53 µg/dl and hypospermia and asthenospermia at 41 µg/dl. Furthermore, The most important principle in evalu- there appears to be a dose-response relation- ating a worker for any occupational disease ship for teratospermia in lead exposed work- including lead poisoning is a high index of ers. suspicion on the part of the examining physi- Women exposed to lead may experience cian. As discussed in Section 2, lead can af- menstrual disturbances including fect numerous organ systems and produce a dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenor- wide array of signs and symptoms, most of rhea. Following exposure to lead, women which are non-specific and subtle in nature have a higher frequency of sterility, pre- at least in the early stages of disease. Unless mature births, spontaneous miscarriages, serious concern for lead toxicity is present, and stillbirths. many of the early clues to diagnosis may Germ cells can be affected by lead and easily be overlooked. cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm The crucial initial step in the medical cells before conception and result in failure evaluation is recognizing that a worker’s to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth employment can result in exposure to lead. defects. The worker will frequently be able to define

113

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00113 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

exposures to lead and lead containing mate- decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or rials but often will not volunteer this infor- tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa, mation unless specifically asked. In other or metallic taste in mouth. situations the worker may not know of any 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath, exposures to lead but the suspicion might be cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthop- raised on the part of the physician because of nea. the industry or occupation of the worker. 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting, Potential occupational exposure to lead and heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or its compounds occur in many occupations in diarrhea. the construction industry, including demoli- 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia, tion and salvaging operations, removal or weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of mem- encapsulation of materials containing lead, ory, confusion, hallucinations, construction, alteration, repair or renovation of structures containing lead, transpor- incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in tation, disposal, storage or containment of hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty lead or lead-containing materials on con- in climbing stairs, or seizures. struction sites, and maintenance operations 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability, associated with construction activities. abnormal blood loss, melena. Once the possibility for lead exposure is 7. Reproductive (male and female and raised, the focus can then be directed toward spouse where relevant)—history of infer- eliciting information from the medical his- tility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal tory, physical exam, and finally from labora- menstrual periods, history of miscarriages, tory data to evaluate the worker for poten- stillbirths, or children with birth defects. tial lead toxicity. 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint A complete and detailed work history is pains. important in the initial evaluation. A listing The physical examination should empha- of all previous employment with information size the neurological, gastrointestinal, and on job description, exposure to fumes or cardiovascular systems. The worker’s weight dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic and blood pressure should be recorded and substances, a description of any personal the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation protective equipment used, and previous characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead medical surveillance should all be included line on the gingiva. It should be noted, how- in the worker’s record. Where exposure to ever, that the lead line may not be present lead is suspected, information concerning even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hy- on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eat- giene is practiced. ing habits in work areas, laundry procedures, The presence of pallor on skin examination and use of any protective clothing or res- may indicate an anemia which, if severe, piratory protection equipment should be might also be associated with a tachycardia. noted. A complete work history is essential If an anemia is suspected, an active search in the medical evaluation of a worker with for blood loss should be undertaken includ- suspected lead toxicity, especially when long ing potential blood loss through the gastro- term effects such as neurotoxicity and intestinal tract. nephrotoxicity are considered. The medical history is also of fundamental A complete neurological examination importance and should include a listing of should include an adequate mental status all past and current medical conditions, cur- evaluation including a search for behavioral rent medications including proprietary drug and psychological disturbances, memory intake, previous surgeries and hospitaliza- testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, tions, allergies, smoking history, alcohol hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait consumption, and also non-occupational lead and coordination should be examined along exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery). with close observation for tremor. A detailed Also known childhood exposures should be evaluation of peripheral nerve function in- elicited. Any previous history of cluding careful sensory and motor function hematological, neurological, gastro- testing is warranted. Strength testing par- intestinal, renal, psychological, gyneco- ticularly of extensor muscle groups of all ex- logical, genetic, or reproductive problems tremities is of fundamental importance. should be specifically noted. Cranial nerve evaluation should also be in- A careful and complete review of systems cluded in the routine examination. must be performed to assess both recognized The abdominal examination should include complaints and subtle or slowly acquired auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal symptoms which the worker might not ap- bruits and palpation for organomegaly, preciate as being significant. The review of masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. symptoms should include the following: Cardiovascular examination should evalu- 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased ate possible early signs of congestive heart appetite. failure. Pulmonary status should be ad- 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat dressed particularly if respirator protection (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or is contemplated.

114

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00114 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

As part of the medical evaluation, the in- relative advantages and disadvantages. terim lead standard requires the following Other blood tests currently available to laboratory studies: evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed. 1. Blood lead level The blood lead level is a good index of cur- 2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determina- rent or recent lead absorption when there is tions, red cell indices, and examination of no anemia present and when the worker has the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red not taken any chelating agents. However, blood cell morphology blood lead levels along with urinary lead lev- 3. Blood urea nitrogen els do not necessarily indicate the total body 4. Serum creatinine burden of lead and are not adequate meas- 5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic ex- ures of past exposure. One reason for this is amination. that lead has a high affinity for bone and up 6. A zinc protoporphyrin level. to 90% of the body’s total lead is deposited there. A very important component of the In addition to the above, the physician is total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue authorized to order any further laboratory (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of or other tests which he or she deems nec- the lead body burden, the biologically active essary in accordance with sound medical lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead practice. The evaluation must also include levels since it is a function of the dynamics pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of lead absorption, distribution, deposition of male fertility if requested by the em- in bone and excretion. Following discontinu- ployee. Additional tests which are probably ation of exposure to lead, the excess body not warranted on a routine basis but may be burden is only slowly mobilized from bone appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels and other relatively stable body stores and are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in level may only represent recent heavy expo- the urine, and dark-field illumination for de- sure to lead without a significant total body tection of basophilic stippling in red blood excess and likewise a low blood lead level cells. does not exclude an elevated total body bur- If an anemia is detected further studies in- den of lead. cluding a careful examination of the periph- Also due to its correlation with recent ex- eral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for oc- posures, the blood lead level may vary con- cult blood, serum iron, total iron binding ca- siderably over short time intervals. pacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vita- To minimize laboratory error and erro- min B12 and folate may be of value in at- neous results due to contamination, blood tempting to identify the cause of the ane- specimens must be carefully collected after mia. thorough cleaning of the skin with appro- If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, priate methods using lead-free blood con- nerve conduction studies are warranted both tainers and analyzed by a reliable labora- for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any tory. Under the standard, samples must be therapy. analyzed in laboratories which are approved If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atom- urine collection for creatinine clearance, ic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic protein, and electrolytes may be indicated. stripping voltammetry or any method which Elevated uric acid levels may result from meets the accuracy requirements set forth lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric by the standard. acid level might be performed. The determination of lead in urine is gen- An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may erally considered a less reliable monitoring be obtained as deemed appropriate. technique than analysis of whole blood pri- Sophisticated and highly specialized test- marily due to individual variability in uri- ing should not be done routinely and where nary excretion capacity as well as the tech- indicated should be under the direction of a nical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour specialist. urine collections. In addition, workers with renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or IV. Laboratory Evaluation some other cause, may have decreased lead The blood lead level at present remains the clearance and consequently urine lead levels single most important test to monitor lead may underestimate the true lead burden. exposure and is the test used in the medical Therefore, urine lead levels should not be surveillance program under the lead stand- used as a routine test. ard to guide employee medical removal. The The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the ZPP has several advantages over the blood blood lead determination, measures an ad- lead level. Because of its relatively recent verse metabolic effect of lead and as such is development and the lack of extensive data a better indicator of lead toxicity than the concerning its interpretation, the ZPP cur- level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP re- rently remains an ancillary test. flects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to This section will discuss the blood lead 4 months, and therefore is a better indicator level and ZPP in detail and will outline their of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more

115

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00115 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

time than the blood lead to read signifi- of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate cantly elevated levels; the return to normal ZPP levels with environmental exposure and after discontinuing lead exposure is also there is some variation of response with age slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is sim- and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to pler, faster, and less expensive to perform be an important diagnostic test for the early and no contamination is possible. Many in- detection of lead toxicity and its value will vestigators believe it is the most reliable increase as more data is collected regarding means of monitoring chronic lead absorp- its relationship to other manifestations of tion. lead poisoning. Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhi- Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) bition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which in the urine are also used as a measure of catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of into the protoporphyrin molecule, which ALA are believed to result from the inhibi- then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted tion of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid into the molecule then zinc, having a greater dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is rel- affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place atively easy to perform, inexpensive, and of the iron, forming ZPP. rapid, the disadvantages include variability An elevation in the level of circulating in results, the necessity to collect a com- ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as plete 24 hour urine sample which has a spe- 20–30 µg/dl in some workers. Once the blood cific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the lead level has reached 40 µg/dl there is more fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of marked rise in the ZPP value from its nor- light. mal range of less than 100 µg/dl100 ml. In- The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the creases in blood lead levels beyond 40 µg/100 urine can also be helpful in identifying lead g are associated with exponential increases intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine in ZPP. concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II, Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The short time spans, ZPP levels remain rel- most important increase, however, is that of atively stable. ZPP is measured directly in coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 red blood cells and is present for the cell’s µg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals, entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP but its correlation with blood lead levels and level in blood reflects the average ZPP pro- ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. In- duction over the previous 3–4 months and creases in urinary porphyrins are not diag- consequently the average lead exposure dur- nostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in ing that time interval. porphyria, some liver diseases, and in pa- It is recommended that a hematocrit be de- tients with high reticulocyte counts. termined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 µg/ Summary. The Occupational Safety and 100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a Health Administration’s interim standard significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is for inorganic lead in the construction indus- in excess of 100 µg/100 ml and not associated try places significant emphasis on the med- with abnormal elevations in blood lead lev- ical surveillance of all workers exposed to els, the laboratory should be checked to be levels of inorganic lead above 30 µg/m3 TWA. sure that blood leads were determined using The physician has a fundamental role in this atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic surveillance program, and in the operation of stripping voltammetry, or any method which the medical removal protection program. meets the accuracy requirements set forth Even with adequate worker education on by the standard by an OSHA approved lab- the adverse health effects of lead and appro- oratory which is experienced in lead level de- priate training in work practices, personal terminations. Repeat periodic blood lead hygiene and other control measures, the studies should be obtained in all individuals physician has a primary responsibility for with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that evaluating potential lead toxicity in the an associated elevated blood lead level has worker. It is only through a careful and de- not been missed due to transient fluctua- tailed medical and work history, a complete tions in blood leads. physical examination and appropriate lab- ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spec- oratory testing that an accurate assessment trum with a peak at 594 nm which is detect- can be made. Many of the adverse health ef- able with a hematofluorimeter. The fects of lead toxicity are either irreversible hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable or only partially reversible and therefore and can provide on-site, instantaneous re- early detection of disease is very important. sults for workers who can be frequently test- This document outlines the medical moni- ed via a finger prick. toring program as defined by the occupa- However, careful attention must be given tional safety and health standard for inor- to calibration and quality control proce- ganic lead. It reviews the adverse health ef- dures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP cor- fects of lead poisoning and describes the im- relations and the ZPP levels which are asso- portant elements of the history and physical ciated with the adverse health effects dis- examinations as they relate to these adverse cussed in Section 2 are the major limitations effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory

116

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00116 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

testing for evaluating lead exposure and tox- available for the material in question, icity is presented. or for mixtures which do not have a It is hoped that this review and discussion constant boiling point, the 10 percent will give the physician a better under- point of a distillation performed in ac- standing of the OSHA standard with the ultimate goal of protecting the health and well- cordance with the Standard Method of being of the worker exposed to lead under his Test for Distillation of Petroleum or her care. Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used [58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 as the boiling point of the liquid. FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, Catastrophic release means a major 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998] uncontrolled emission, fire, or explosion, involving one or more highly haz- § 1926.64 Process safety management ardous chemicals, that presents serious of highly hazardous chemicals. danger to employees in the workplace. Purpose. This section contains re- Facility means the buildings, con- quirements for preventing or mini- tainers or equipment which contain a mizing the consequences of cata- process. strophic releases of toxic, reactive, Highly hazardous chemical means a flammable, or explosive chemicals. substance possessing toxic, reactive, These releases may result in toxic, fire flammable, or explosive properties and or explosion hazards. specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this (a) Application. (1) This section ap- section. plies to the following: Hot work means work involving elec- (i) A process which involves a chem- tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or ical at or above the specified threshold similar flame or spark-producing oper- quantities listed in Appendix A to this ations. section; Normally unoccupied remote facility (ii) A process which involves a flam- means a facility which is operated, mable liquid or gas (as defined in maintained or serviced by employees § 1926.59(c) of this part) on site in one who visit the facility only periodically location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds to check its operation and to perform (4535.9 kg) or more except for: necessary operating or maintenance (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for tasks. No employees are permanently workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g., stationed at the facility. Facilities propane used for comfort heating, gaso- meeting this definition are not contig- line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels uous with, and must be geographically are not a part of a process containing remote from all other buildings, proc- another highly hazardous chemical esses or persons. covered by this standard; Process means any activity involving (B) Flammable liquids stored in at- a highly hazardous chemical including mospheric tanks or transferred which any use, storage, manufacturing, han- are kept below their normal boiling dling, or the on-site movement of such point without benefit of chilling or re- chemicals, or combination of these ac- frigeration. tivities. For purposes of this definition, (2) This section does not apply to: any group of vessels which are inter- (i) Retail facilities; connected and separate vessels which (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv- are located such that a highly haz- icing operations; or, ardous chemical could be involved in a (iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa- potential release shall be considered a cilities. single process. (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank Replacement in kind means a replace- means a storage tank which has been ment which satisfies the design speci- designed to operate at pressures from fication. atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds Trade secret means any confidential per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). formula, pattern, process, device, infor- Boiling point means the boiling point mation or compilation of information of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds that is used in an employer’s business, per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 and that gives the employer an oppor- mm.). For the purposes of this section, tunity to obtain an advantage over where an accurate boiling point is un- competitors who do not know or use it.

117

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00117 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Appendix D contained in § 1926.59 sets (2) Information pertaining to the tech- out the criteria to be used in evalu- nology of the process. (i) Information ating trade secrets. concerning the technology of the proc- (c) Employee participation. (1) Employ- ess shall include at least the following: ers shall develop a written plan of ac- (A) A block flow diagram or sim- tion regarding the implementation of plified process flow diagram (see Ap- the employee participation required by pendix B to this section); this paragraph. (B) Process chemistry; (2) Employers shall consult with em- (C) Maximum intended inventory; ployees and their representatives on (D) Safe upper and lower limits for the conduct and development of proc- such items as temperatures, pressures, ess hazards analyses and on the devel- flows or compositions; and, opment of the other elements of proc- (E) An evaluation of the con- ess safety management in this stand- sequences of deviations, including ard. those affecting the safety and health of (3) Employers shall provide to em- employees. ployees and their representatives ac- (ii) Where the original technical in- cess to process hazard analyses and to formation no longer exists, such infor- all other information required to be de- mation may be developed in conjunc- veloped under this standard. tion with the process hazard analysis (d) Process safety information. In ac- in sufficient detail to support the anal- cordance with the schedule set forth in ysis. paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em- (3) Information pertaining to the equip- ployer shall complete a compilation of ment in the process. (i) Information per- written process safety information be- taining to the equipment in the process fore conducting any process hazard shall include: analysis required by the standard. The (A) Materials of construction; compilation of written process safety (B) Piping and instrument diagrams information is to enable the employer (P&ID’s); and the employees involved in oper- (C) Electrical classification; ating the process to identify and under- (D) Relief system design and design stand the hazards posed by those proc- basis; esses involving highly hazardous (E) Ventilation system design; chemicals. This process safety informa- (F) Design codes and standards em- tion shall include information per- ployed; taining to the hazards of the highly (G) Material and energy balances for hazardous chemicals used or produced processes built after May 26, 1992; and, by the process, information pertaining (H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, to the technology of the process, and detection or suppression systems). information pertaining to the equip- (ii) The employer shall document ment in the process. that equipment complies with recog- (1) Information pertaining to the haz- nized and generally accepted good engi- ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in neering practices. the process. This information shall con- (iii) For existing equipment designed sist of at least the following: and constructed in accordance with (i) Toxicity information; codes, standards, or practices that are (ii) Permissible exposure limits; no longer in general use, the employer (iii) Physical data; shall determine and document that the (iv) Reactivity data: equipment is designed, maintained, in- (v) Corrosivity data; spected, tested, and operating in a safe (vi) Thermal and chemical stability manner. data; and (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The (vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent employer shall perform an initial proc- mixing of different materials that ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation) could foreseeably occur. on processes covered by this standard. NOTE: Material Safety Data Sheets meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59(g) The process hazard analysis shall be may be used to comply with this require- appropriate to the complexity of the ment to the extent they contain the infor- process and shall identify, evaluate, mation required by this subparagraph. and control the hazards involved in the

118

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00118 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

process. Employers shall determine and ods might include process monitoring document the priority order for con- and control instrumentation with ducting process hazard analyses based alarms, and detection hardware such as on a rationale which includes such con- hydrocarbon sensors.); siderations as extent of the process (iv) Consequences of failure of engi- hazards, number of potentially affected neering and administrative controls; employees, age of the process, and op- (v) Facility siting; erating history of the process. The (vi) Human factors; and process hazard analysis shall be conducted as soon as possible, but not (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a later than the following schedule: range of the possible safety and health (i) No less than 25 percent of the ini- effects of failure of controls on employ- tial process hazards analyses shall be ees in the workplace. completed by May 26, 1994; (4) The process hazard analysis shall (ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini- be performed by a team with expertise tial process hazards analyses shall be in engineering and process operations, completed by May 26, 1995; and the team shall include at least one (iii) No less than 75 percent of the employee who has experience and initial process hazards analyses shall knowledge specific to the process being be completed by May 26, 1996; evaluated. Also, one member of the (iv) All initial process hazards anal- team must be knowledgeable in the yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997. specific process hazard analysis meth- (v) Process hazards analyses com- odology being used. pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet the requirements of this paragraph are (5) The employer shall establish a acceptable as initial process hazards system to promptly address the team’s analyses. These process hazard anal- findings and recommendations; assure yses shall be updated and revalidated, that the recommendations are resolved based on their completion date, in ac- in a timely manner and that the reso- cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this lution is documented; document what standard. actions are to be taken; complete ac- (2) The employer shall use one or tions as soon as possible; develop a more of the following methodologies written schedule of when these actions that are appropriate to determine and are to be completed; communicate the evaluate the hazards of the process actions to operating, maintenance and being analyzed. other employees whose work assign- (i) What-If; ments are in the process and who may (ii) Checklist; be affected by the recommendations or (iii) What-If/Checklist; actions. (iv) Hazard and Operability Study (6) At least every five (5) years after (HAZOP); the completion of the initial process (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis hazard analysis, the process hazard (FMEA); (vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or analysis shall be updated and revali- (vii) An appropriate equivalent meth- dated by a team meeting the require- odology. ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec- (3) The process hazard analysis shall tion, to assure that the process hazard address: analysis is consistent with the current (i) The hazards of the process; process. (ii) The identification of any previous (7) Employers shall retain process incident which had a likely potential hazards analyses and updates or re- for catastrophic consequences in the validations for each process covered by workplace; this section, as well as the documented (iii) Engineering and administrative resolution of recommendations de- controls applicable to the hazards and scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec- their interrelationships such as appro- tion for the life of the process. priate application of detection meth- (f) Operating procedures. (1) The em- odologies to provide early warning of ployer shall develop and implement releases. (Acceptable detection meth-

119

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00119 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

written operating procedures that pro- operations such as lockout/tagout; con- vide clear instructions for safely confined space entry; opening process ducting activities involved in each cov- equipment or piping; and control over ered process consistent with the proc- entrance into a facility by mainte- ess safety information and shall ad- nance, contractor, laboratory, or other dress at least the following elements. support personnel. These safe work (i) Steps for each operating phase: practices shall apply to employees and (A) Initial startup; contractor employees. (B) Normal operations; (g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i) (C) Temporary operations; Each employee presently involved in (D) Emergency shutdown including operating a process, and each employee the conditions under which emergency before being involved in operating a shutdown is required, and the assign- newly assigned process, shall be ment of shutdown responsibility to trained in an overview of the process qualified operators to ensure that and in the operating procedures as emergency shutdown is executed in a specified in paragraph (f) of this sec- safe and timely manner. tion. The training shall include empha- (E) Emergency operations; sis on the specific safety and health (F) Normal shutdown; and, hazards, emergency operations includ- (G) Startup following a turnaround, ing shutdown, and safe work practices or after an emergency shutdown. applicable to the employee’s job tasks. (ii) Operating limits: (ii) In lieu of initial training for (A) Consequences of deviation; and those employees already involved in (B) Steps required to correct or avoid operating a process on May 26, 1992, an deviation. employer may certify in writing that (iii) Safety and health consider- the employee has the required knowl- ations: edge, skills, and abilities to safely (A) Properties of, and hazards pre- carry out the duties and responsibil- sented by, the chemicals used in the ities as specified in the operating pro- process; cedures. (B) Precautions necessary to prevent (2) Refresher training. Refresher train- exposure, including engineering con- ing shall be provided at least every trols, administrative controls, and per- three years, and more often if nec- sonal protective equipment; essary, to each employee involved in (C) Control measures to be taken if operating a process to assure that the physical contact or airborne exposure employee understands and adheres to occurs; the current operating procedures of the (D) Quality control for raw materials process. The employer, in consultation and control of hazardous chemical in- with the employees involved in oper- ventory levels; and, ating the process, shall determine the (E) Any special or unique hazards. appropriate frequency of refresher (iv) Safety systems and their func- training. tions. (3) Training documentation. The em- (2) Operating procedures shall be ployer shall ascertain that each em- readily accessible to employees who ployee involved in operating a process work in or maintain a process. has received and understood the train- (3) The operating procedures shall be ing required by this paragraph. The reviewed as often as necessary to as- employer shall prepare a record which sure that they reflect current oper- contains the identity of the employee, ating practice, including changes that the date of training, and the means result from changes in process chemi- used to verify that the employee under- cals, technology, and equipment, and stood the training. changes to facilities. The employer (h) Contractors—(1) Application. This shall certify annually that these oper- paragraph applies to contractors per- ating procedures are current and accu- forming maintenance or repair, turn- rate. around, major renovation, or specialty (4) The employer shall develop and work on or adjacent to a covered proc- implement safe work practices to pro- ess. It does not apply to contractors vide for the control of hazards during providing incidental services which do

120

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00120 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

not influence process safety, such as lows the safety rules of the facility in- janitorial work, food and drink serv- cluding the safe work practices re- ices, laundry, delivery or other supply quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- services. tion. (2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The (v) The contract employer shall ad- employer, when selecting a contractor, vise the employer of any unique haz- shall obtain and evaluate information ards presented by the contract employ- regarding the contract employer’s safe- er’s work, or of any hazards found by ty performance and programs. the contract employer’s work. (ii) The employer shall inform con- (i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The tract employers of the known potential employer shall perform a pre-startup fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards safety review for new facilities and for related to the contractor’s work and modified facilities when the modifica- the process. tion is significant enough to require a (iii) The employer shall explain to change in the process safety informa- contract employers the applicable pro- tion. visions of the emergency action plan (2) The pre-startup safety review required by paragraph (n) of this sec- shall confirm that prior to the intro- tion. duction of highly hazardous chemicals (iv) The employer shall develop and to a process: implement safe work practices con- (i) Construction and equipment is in sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- accordance with design specifications; tion, to control the entrance, presence (ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, and exit of contract employers and and emergency procedures are in place contract employees in covered process and are adequate; areas. (iii) For new facilities, a process haz- (v) The employer shall periodically ard analysis has been performed and evaluate the performance of contract recommendations have been resolved employers in fulfilling their obliga- or implemented before startup; and tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of modified facilities meet the require- this section. ments contained in management of (vi) The employer shall maintain a change, paragraph (l). contract employee injury and illness (iv) Training of each employee in- log related to the contractor’s work in volved in operating a process has been process areas. completed. (3) Contract employer responsibilities. (j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- (i) The contract employer shall assure tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of that each contract employee is trained this section apply to the following in the work practices necessary to safe- process equipment: ly perform his/her job. (i) Pressure vessels and storage (ii) The contract employer shall as- tanks; sure that each contract employee is in- (ii) Piping systems (including piping structed in the known potential fire, components such as valves); explosion, or toxic release hazards re- (iii) Relief and vent systems and de- lated to his/her job and the process, vices; and the applicable provisions of the (iv) Emergency shutdown systems; emergency action plan. (v) Controls (including monitoring (iii) The contract employer shall doc- devices and sensors, alarms, and inter- ument that each contract employee locks) and, has received and understood the train- (vi) Pumps. ing required by this paragraph. The (2) Written procedures. The employer contract employer shall prepare a shall establish and implement written record which contains the identity of procedures to maintain the on-going the contract employee, the date of integrity of process equipment. training, and the means used to verify (3) Training for process maintenance that the employee understood the activities. The employer shall train each training. employee involved in maintaining the (iv) The contract employer shall as- on-going integrity of process equip- sure that each contract employee fol- ment in an overview of that process

121

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00121 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and its hazards and in the procedures been implemented prior to beginning applicable to the employee’s job tasks the hot work operations; it shall indi- to assure that the employee can per- cate the date(s) authorized for hot form the job tasks in a safe manner. work; and identify the object on which (4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec- hot work is to be performed. The per- tions and tests shall be performed on mit shall be kept on file until comple- process equipment. tion of the hot work operations. (ii) Inspection and testing procedures (l) Management of change. (1) The em- shall follow recognized and generally ployer shall establish and implement accepted good engineering practices. written procedures to manage changes (iii) The frequency of inspections and (except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to tests of process equipment shall be con- process chemicals, technology, equip- sistent with applicable manufacturers’ ment, and procedures; and, changes to recommendations and good engineering facilities that affect a covered process. practices, and more frequently if deter- (2) The procedures shall assure that mined to be necessary by prior oper- the following considerations are ad- ating experience. dressed prior to any change: (iv) The employer shall document (i) The technical basis for the pro- each inspection and test that has been posed change; performed on process equipment. The (ii) Impact of change on safety and documentation shall identify the date health; of the inspection or test, the name of (iii) Modifications to operating pro- the person who performed the inspec- cedures; tion or test, the serial number or other (iv) Necessary time period for the identifier of the equipment on which change; and, the inspection or test was performed, a (v) Authorization requirements for description of the inspection or test the proposed change. performed, and the results of the in- (3) Employees involved in operating a spection or test. process and maintenance and contract (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em- employees whose job tasks will be af- ployer shall correct deficiencies in fected by a change in the process shall equipment that are outside acceptable be informed of, and trained in, the limits (defined by the process safety in- change prior to start-up of the process formation in paragraph (d) of this sec- or affected part of the process. tion) before further use or in a safe and (4) If a change covered by this para- timely manner when necessary means graph results in a change in the process are taken to assure safe operation. safety information required by para- (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con- graph (d) of this section, such informa- struction of new plants and equipment, tion shall be updated accordingly. the employer shall assure that equip- (5) If a change covered by this para- ment as it is fabricated is suitable for graph results in a change in the oper- the process application for which they ating procedures or practices required will be used. by paragraph (f) of this section, such (ii) Appropriate checks and inspec- procedures or practices shall be up- tions shall be performed to assure that dated accordingly. equipment is installed properly and (m) Incident investigation. (1) The em- consistent with design specifications ployer shall investigate each incident and the manufacturer’s instructions. which resulted in, or could reasonably (iii) The employer shall assure that have resulted in a catastrophic release maintenance materials, spare parts and of highly hazardous chemical in the equipment are suitable for the process workplace. application for which they will be used. (2) An incident investigation shall be (k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer initiated as promptly as possible, but shall issue a hot work permit for hot not later than 48 hours following the work operations conducted on or near a incident. covered process. (3) An incident investigation team (2) The permit shall document that shall be established and consist of at the fire prevention and protection re- least one person knowledgeable in the quirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have process involved, including a contract

122

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00122 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

employee if the incident involved work (p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall of the contractor, and other persons make all information necessary to with appropriate knowledge and experi- comply with the section available to ence to thoroughly investigate and those persons responsible for compiling analyze the incident. the process safety information (re- (4) A report shall be prepared at the quired by paragraph (d) of this section), conclusion of the investigation which those assisting in the development of includes at a minimum: the process hazard analysis (required (i) Date of incident; by paragraph (e) of this section), those (ii) Date investigation began; responsible for developing the oper- (iii) A description of the incident; ating procedures (required by para- (iv) The factors that contributed to graph (f) of this section), and those in- the incident; and, volved in incident investigations (re- (v) Any recommendations resulting quired by paragraph (m) of this sec- from the investigation. tion), emergency planning and response (paragraph (n) of this section) and com- (5) The employer shall establish a pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this system to promptly address and resolve section) without regard to possible the incident report findings and rec- trade secret status of such informa- ommendations. Resolutions and correction. tive actions shall be documented. (2) Nothing in this paragraph shall (6) The report shall be reviewed with preclude the employer from requiring all affected personnel whose job tasks the persons to whom the information is are relevant to the incident findings in- made available under paragraph (p)(1) cluding contract employees where ap- of this section to enter into confiden- plicable. tiality agreements not to disclose the (7) Incident investigation reports information as set forth in 29 CFR shall be retained for five years. 1926.59. (n) Emergency planning and re- (3) Subject to the rules and proce- sponse. The employer shall establish dures set forth in 29 CFR 1926.59(i) (1) and implement an emergency action through (12), employees and their des- plan for the entire plant in accordance ignated representatives shall have ac- with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a). cess to trade secret information con- In addition, the emergency action plan tained within the process hazard anal- shall include procedures for handling ysis and other documents required to small releases. Employers covered be developed by this standard. under this standard may also be subject to the hazardous waste and emer- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.64—LIST OF HIGH- gency response provisions contained in LY HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS 29 CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q). AND REACTIVES (MANDATORY) (o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers This Appendix contains a listing of toxic shall certify that they have evaluated and reactive highly hazardous chemicals compliance with the provisions of this which present a potential for a catastrophic section at least every three years to event at or above the threshold quantity. verify that the procedures and practices developed under the standard are Chemical Name CAS* TQ** adequate and are being followed. (2) The compliance audit shall be Acetaldehyde ...... 75-07-0 2500 conducted by at least one person Acrolein (2-Propenal) ...... 107-02-8 150 knowledgeable in the process. Acrylyl Chloride ...... 814-68-6 250 Allyl Chloride ...... 107-05-1 1000 (3) A report of the findings of the Allylamine ...... 107-11-9 1000 audit shall be developed. Alkylaluminums ...... Varies 5000 (4) The employer shall promptly de- Ammonia, Anhydrous ...... 7664-41-7 10000 termine and document an appropriate Ammonia solutions (greater response to each of the findings of the than 44% ammonia by compliance audit, and document that weight) ...... 7664-41-7 15000 Ammonium Perchlorate ...... 7790-98-9 500 deficiencies have been corrected. Ammonium Permanganate ... 7787-36-2 7500 (5) Employers shall retain the two (2) Arsine (also called Arsenic most recent compliance audit reports. Hydride) ...... 7784-42-1 100

123

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00123 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**

Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ...... 542-88-1 100 Hexafluoroacetone ...... 684-16-2 5000 Boron Trichloride ...... 10294-34-5 2500 Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000 Boron Trifluoride ...... 7637-07-2 250 Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000 Bromine ...... 7726-95-6 1500 Hydrogen Bromide ...... 10035-10-6 5000 Bromine Chloride ...... 13863-41-7 1500 Hydrogen Chloride ...... 7647-01-0 5000 Bromine Pentafluoride ...... 7789-30-2 2500 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy- Bromine Trifluoride ...... 7787-71-5 15000 drous ...... 74-90-8 1000 3-Bromopropyne (also called Hydrogen Fluoride ...... 7664-39-3 1000 Propargyl Bromide) ...... 106-96-7 100 Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by Butyl Hydroperoxide (Ter- weight or greater) ...... 7722-84-1 7500 tiary) ...... 75-91-2 5000 Hydrogen Selenide ...... 7783-07-5 150 Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500 Hydrogen Sulfide ...... 7783-06-4 1500 Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos- Hydroxylamine ...... 7803-49-8 2500 gene) ...... 75-44-5 100 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ...... 13463-40-6 250 * Carbonyl Fluoride ...... 353-50-4 2500 Isopropylamine ...... 75-31-0 5000 Cellulose Nitrate (concentra- Ketene ...... 463-51-4 100 tion greater than 12.6% ni- Methacrylaldehyde ...... 78-85-3 1000 trogen ...... 9004-70-0 2500 Methacryloyl Chloride ...... 920-46-7 150 Chlorine ...... 7782-50-5 1500 Methacryloyloxyethyl Chlorine Dioxide ...... 10049-04-4 1000 Isocyanate ...... 30674-80-7 100 Chlorine Pentrafluoride ...... 13637-63-3 1000 Methyl Acrylonitrile ...... 126-98-7 250 Chlorine Trifluoride ...... 7790-91-2 1000 Methylamine, Anhydrous ...... 74-89-5 1000 Chlorodiethylaluminum (also Methyl Bromide ...... 74-83-9 2500 called Diethylaluminum Methyl Chloride ...... 74-87-3 15000 Chloride) ...... 96-10-6 5000 Methyl Chloroformate ...... 79-22-1 500 1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000 Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107-30-2 500 (concentration greater than Chloropicrin ...... 76-06-2 500 60%) ...... 1338-23-4 5000 Methyl Fluoroacetate ...... 453-18-9 100 Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro- Methyl Fluorosulfate ...... 421-20-5 100 mide mixture ...... None 1500 Methyl Hydrazine ...... 60-34-4 100 Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo- Methyl Iodide ...... 74-88-4 7500 ride mixture ...... None 1500 Methyl Isocyanate ...... 624-83-9 250 Cumene Hydroperoxide ...... 80-15-9 5000 Methyl Mercaptan ...... 74-93-1 5000 Cyanogen ...... 460-19-5 2500 Methyl Vinyl Ketone ...... 79-84-4 100 Cyanogen Chloride ...... 506-77-4 500 Methyltrichlorosilane ...... 75-79-6 500 Cyanuric Fluoride ...... 675-14-9 100 Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Diacetyl Peroxide (concentra- Tetracarbonyl) ...... 13463-39-3 150 tion greater than 70%) ...... 110-22-5 5000 Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight Diazomethane ...... 334-88-3 500 or greater) ...... 7697-37-2 500 Dibenzoyl Peroxide ...... 94-36-0 7500 Nitric Oxide ...... 10102-43-9 250 Diborane ...... 19287-45-7 100 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000 Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .... 110-05-4 5000 Nitromethane ...... 75-52-5 2500 Dichloro Acetylene ...... 7572-29-4 250 Nitrogen Dioxide ...... 10102-44-0 250 Dichlorosilane ...... 4109-96-0 2500 Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2); Diethylzinc ...... 557-20-0 10000 N2O4; N2O3) ...... 10102-44-0 250 Diisopropyl Nitrogen Tetroxide (also Peroxydicarbonate ...... 105-64-6 7500 called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544-72-6 250 Dilauroyl Peroxide ...... 105-74-8 7500 Nitrogen Trifluoride ...... 7783-54-2 5000 Dimethyldichlorosilane ...... 75-78-5 1000 Nitrogen Trioxide ...... 10544-73-7 250 Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ...... 57-14-7 1000 Oleum (65% to 80% by Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124-40-3 2500 weight; also called Fuming 2,4-Dinitroaniline ...... 97-02-9 5000 Sulfuric Acid) ...... 8014-94-7 1000 Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide Osmium Tetroxide ...... 20816-12-0 100 (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Peroxide; concentration Monoxide) ...... 7783-41-7 100 greater than 60%) ...... 1338-23-4 5000 Ozone ...... 10028-15-6 100 Ethyl Nitrite ...... 109-95-5 5000 Pentaborane ...... 19624-22-7 100 Ethylamine ...... 75-04-7 7500 Peracetic Acid (concentration Ethylene Fluorohydrin ...... 371-62-0 100 greater 60% Acetic Acid; Ethylene Oxide ...... 75-21-8 5000 also called Peroxyacetic Ethyleneimine ...... 151-56-4 1000 Acid) ...... 79-21-0 1000 Fluorine ...... 7782-41-4 1000 Perchloric Acid (concentration Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50-00-0 1000 greater than 60% by Furan ...... 110-00-9 500 weight) ...... 7601-90-3 5000

124

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00124 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**

Perchloromethyl Mercaptan .. 594-42-3 150 Sulfur Pentafluoride ...... 5714-22-7 250 Perchloryl Fluoride ...... 7616-94-6 5000 Sulfur Tetrafluoride ...... 7783-60-0 250 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra- Sulfur Trioxide (also called tion greater than 60% Ace- Sulfuric Anhydride) ...... 7446-11-9 1000 tic Acid; also called Per- Sulfuric Anhydride (also acetic Acid) ...... 79-21-0 1000 called Sulfur Trioxide) ...... 7446-11-9 1000 Phosgene (also called Car- Tellurium Hexafluoride ...... 7783-80-4 250 bonyl Chloride) ...... 75-44-5 100 Tetrafluoroethylene ...... 116-14-3 5000 Phosphine (Hydrogen Tetrafluorohydrazine ...... 10036-47-2 5000 Phosphide) ...... 7803-51-2 100 Phosphorus Oxychloride Tetramethyl Lead ...... 75-74-1 1000 (also called Phosphoryl Thionyl Chloride ...... 7719-09-7 250 Chloride) ...... 10025-87-3 1000 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil- Phosphorus Trichloride ...... 7719-12-2 1000 ane ...... 1558-25-4 100 Phosphoryl Chloride (also Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil- called Phosphorus ane ...... 27137-85-5 2500 Oxychloride) ...... 10025-87-3 1000 Trichlorosilane ...... 10025-78-2 5000 Propargyl Bromide ...... 106-96-7 100 Trifluorochloroethylene ...... 79-38-9 10000 Propyl Nitrate ...... 627-3-4 2500 Trimethyoxysilane ...... 2487-90-3 1500 Sarin ...... 107-44-8 100 Selenium Hexafluoride ...... 7783-79-1 1000 * Chemical Abstract Service Number Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803-52-3 500 ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ...... 7446-09-5 1000 necessary to be covered by this standard.)

125

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00125 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)

126

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00126 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE could expose employees and others to serious GUIDELINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS hazards. An effective process safety manage- FOR PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT ment program requires a systematic ap- (NONMANDATORY) proach to evaluating the whole process. Using this approach the process design, proc- This appendix serves as a nonmandatory ess technology, operational and maintenance guideline to assist employers and employees activities and procedures, nonroutine activi- in complying with the requirements of this ties and procedures, emergency preparedness section, as well as provides other helpful rec- plans and procedures, training programs, and ommendations and information. Examples other elements which impact the process are presented in this appendix are not the only all considered in the evaluation. The various means of achieving the performance goals in lines of defense that have been incorporated the standard. This appendix neither adds nor into the design and operation of the process detracts from the requirements of the stand- to prevent or mitigate the release of hazard. ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and 1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- strengthened to assure their effectiveness at ment. The major objective of process safety each level. Process safety management is the management of highly hazardous chemicals proactive identification, evaluation and is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous chemicals especially into locations which

127

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00127 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

mitigation or prevention of chemical re- tigations required by the process safety man- leases that could occur as a result of failures agement program. Many employers, under in process, procedures or equipment. their safety and health programs, have al- The process safety management standard ready established means and methods to targets highly hazardous chemicals that keep employees and their representatives in- have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become plement and maintain an effective process a significant ally in helping the employer to safety management program as envisioned in implement and maintain an effective process the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is safety management program for all employ- required by the Clean Air Act Amendments ees. as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and Risk Management Plan. Employers, who accurate written information concerning merge the two sets of requirements into process chemicals, process technology, and their process safety management program, process equipment is essential to an effective will better assure full compliance with each process safety management program and to a as well as enhancing their relationship with process hazards analysis. The compiled infor- the local community. mation will be a necessary resource to a va- While OSHA believes process safety man- riety of users including the team that will agement will have a positive effect on the perform the process hazards analysis as re- safety of employees in workplaces and also quired under paragraph (e); those developing offers other potential benefits to employers the training programs and the operating pro- (increased productivity), smaller businesses cedures; contractors whose employees will be which may have limited resources available working with the process; those conducting to them at this time, might consider alter- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency native avenues of decreasing the risks asso- preparedness planners; and insurance and en- ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at forcement officials. their workplaces. One method which might The information to be compiled about the be considered is the reduction in the inven- chemicals, including process intermediates, tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac- reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- curate assessment of the fire and explosion tion of the risk or potential for a cata- characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe- strophic incident. Also, employers including ty and health hazards to workers, and the small employers may be able to establish corrosion and erosion effects on the process more efficient inventory control by reducing equipment and monitoring tools. Current the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals material safety data sheet (MSDS) informa- on site below the established threshold quan- tion can be used to help meet this require- tities. This reduction can be accomplished ment which must be supplemented with by ordering smaller shipments and maintain- process chemistry information including ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef- runaway reaction and over pressure hazards ficient and safe operation. When reduced in- if applicable. ventory is not feasible, then the employer Process technology information will be a might consider dispersing inventory to sev- part of the process safety information pack- eral locations on site. Dispersing storage age and it is expected that it will include into locations where a release in one loca- diagrams of the type shown in Appendix B of tion will not cause a release in another loca- this section as well as employer established tion is a practical method to also reduce the criteria for maximum inventory levels for risk or potential for catastrophic incidents. process chemicals; limits beyond which 2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety would be considered upset conditions; and a Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act qualitative estimate of the consequences or Amendments states that employers are to results of deviation that could occur if oper- consult with their employees and their rep- ating beyond the established process limits. resentatives regarding the employers efforts Employers are encouraged to use diagrams in the development and implementation of which will help users understand the process. the process safety management program ele- A block flow diagram is used to show the ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 major process equipment and inter- also requires employers to train and educate connecting process flow lines and show flow their employees and to inform affected em- rates, stream composition, temperatures, ployees of the findings from incident inves- and pressures when necessary for clarity.

128

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00128 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

The block flow diagram is a simplified dia- 4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard gram. analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process Process flow diagrams are more complex hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor- and will show all main flow streams includ- tant elements of the process safety manage- ing valves to enhance the understanding of ment program. A PHA is an organized and the process, as well as pressures and tem- systematic effort to identify and analyze the peratures on all feed and product lines with- significance of potential hazards associated in all major vessels, in and out of headers with the processing or handling of highly and heat exchangers, and points of pressure hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor- and temperature control. Also, materials of mation which will assist employers and em- construction information, pump capacities ployees in making decisions for improving and pressure heads, compressor horsepower safety and reducing the consequences of un- and vessel design pressures and temperatures wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana- dition, major components of control loops lyzing potential causes and consequences of are usually shown along with key utilities fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam- on process flow diagrams. mable chemicals and major spills of haz- Piping and instrument diagrams (P&Ids) ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip- may be the more appropriate type of dia- ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac- grams to show some of the above details and tions (routine and nonroutine), and external to display the information for the piping de- factors that might impact the process. These signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are considerations assist in determining the haz- to be used to describe the relationships be- ards and potential failure points or failure tween equipment and instrumentation as modes in a process. well as other relevant information that will The selection of a PHA methodology or enhance clarity. Computer software pro- technique will be influenced by many factors grams which do P&Ids or other diagrams useful to the information package, may be including the amount of existing knowledge used to help meet this requirement. about the process. Is it a process that has been operated for a long period of time with The information pertaining to process equipment design must be documented. In little or no innovation and extensive experi- other words, what were the codes and stand- ence has been generated with its use? Or, is ards relied on to establish good engineering it a new process or one which has been practice. These codes and standards are pub- changed frequently by the inclusion of inno- lished by such organizations as the American vative features? Also, the size and com- Society of Mechanical Engineers, American plexity of the process will influence the deci- Petroleum Institute, American National sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to tion Association, American Society for Test- certain limitations. For example, the check- ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler list methodology works well when the proc- and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- ess is very stable and no changes are made, sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American but it is not as effective when the process Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa- has undergone extensive change. The check- tion, and model building code groups. list may miss the most recent changes and In addition, various engineering societies consequently the changes would not be eval- issue technical reports which impact process uated. Another limitation to be considered design. For example, the American Institute concerns the assumptions made by the team of Chemical Engineers has published tech- or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good nical reports on topics such as two phase judgement and the assumptions made during flow for venting devices. This type of tech- the study need to be documented and under- nically recognized report would constitute stood by the team and reviewer and kept for good engineering practice. a future PHA. For existing equipment designed and con- The team conducting the PHA need to un- structed many years ago in accordance with derstand the methodology that is going to be the codes and standards available at that used. A PHA team can vary in size from two time and no longer in general use today, the people to a number of people with varied employer must document which codes and operational and technical backgrounds. standards were used and that the design and Some team members may only be a part of construction along with the testing, inspec- the team for a limited time. The team leader tion and operation are still suitable for the needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper intended use. Where the process technology implementation of the PHA methodology requires a design which departs from the ap- that is to be used and should be impartial in plicable codes and standards, the employer the evaluation. The other full or part time must document that the design and con- team members need to provide the team with struction is suitable for the intended pur- expertise in areas such as process tech- pose. nology, process design, operating procedures

129

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00129 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and practices, including how the work is ac- less data, P&IDs, and process information is tually performed, alarms, emergency proce- needed to perform a process hazard analysis. dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce- Many small businesses have processes that dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in- are not unique, such as cold storage lockers cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro- or water treatment facilities. Where em- curement of parts and supplies, safety and ployer associations have a number of mem- health, and any other relevant subject as the bers with such facilities, a generic PHA, need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques- must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par- knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli- tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them. ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc- bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer leader needs to be able to manage the team must set up a priority system of which PHAs and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz- able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should the recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po- The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a a process involving a series of unit oper- chemical release, the number of potentially ations of varying sizes, complexities, and affected employees, the operating history of ages may use different methodologies and the process such as the frequency of chem- team members for each operation. Then the ical releases, the age of the process and any conclusions can be integrated into one final other relevant factors. These factors would study and evaluation. A more specific exam- suggest a ranking order and would suggest ple is the use of a checklist PHA for a stand- either using a weighing factor system or a ard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im- there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility. other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap- documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth- batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In- might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see Appendix D). moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper- neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per- plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi- similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col- being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech- the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ- PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper- ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in the final results. the process and that the operating param- Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe- anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly. gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc- less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the

130

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00130 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

applicable safety precautions and should within the process area, such as nonroutine contain appropriate information on safety tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards implications. For example, the operating of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating procedures addressing operating parameters personnel in accordance with established will contain operating instructions about procedures and to those performing the ac- pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow tual tasks. When the work is completed, op- rates, what to do when an upset condition erating personnel should be informed to pro- occurs, what alarms and instruments are vide closure on the job. pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ- other subjects. Another example of using oping maintenance and contractor employees, erating instructions to properly implement involved with highly hazardous chemicals operating procedures is in starting up or need to fully understand the safety and shutting down the process. In these cases, health hazards of the chemicals and proc- different parameters will be required from esses they work with for the protection of those of normal operation. These operating themselves, their fellow employees and the instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- citizens of nearby communities. Training tinctions between startup and normal oper- conducted in compliance with 1926.59, the ations such as the appropriate allowances for Hazard Communication standard, will help heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- employees to be more knowledgeable about ating parameters. Also the operating in- the chemicals they work with as well as fa- structions need to describe the proper meth- miliarize them with reading and under- od for increasing the temperature of the unit standing MSDS. However, additional train- until the normal operating temperature pa- ing in subjects such as operating procedures rameters are achieved. and safety work practices, emergency evacu- Computerized process control systems add ation and response, safety procedures, rou- complexity to operating instructions. These tine and nonroutine work authorization ac- operating instructions need to describe the tivities, and other areas pertinent to process logic of the software as well as the relation- safety and health will need to be covered by ship between the equipment and the control an employer’s training program. system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to In establishing their training programs, the operator. employers must clearly define the employees Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set- The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn- derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod- addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com- procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac- procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance. and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening, the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper- ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper- dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment process is shutdown in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course, be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happens if they do not follow ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-

131

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00131 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

job training can also be very effective for knowledge of work activities involving con- teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im- tract employees working on or adjacent to portant information. An effective training covered processes. Injury and illness logs of program will allow the employee to fully both the employer’s employees and contract participate in the training process and to employees allow an employer to have full practice their skill or knowledge. knowledge of process injury and illness expe- Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa- their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations. by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten- gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi- the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi- derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac- the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con- vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em- process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of information. the owner. Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes, sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im- and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc- must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa- tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com- pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro- ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup. influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal 7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu- tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as- that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper- will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param- that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters. complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut- promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc., ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut- the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou- riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec- does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.

132

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00132 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need ety for Testing and Material, American Pe- to review their maintenance programs and troleum Institute, National Fire Protection schedules to see if there are areas where Association, American National Standards ‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather Institute, American Society of Mechanical than an on-going mechanical integrity pro- Engineers, and other groups, provide infor- gram. Equipment used to process, store, or mation to help establish an effective testing handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro- be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies. tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires, ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground- program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in- egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip- tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand- spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo- nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes. process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal- up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec- venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf- such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro- are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies. prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state or local government inspectors tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However, or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con- tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en- program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac- fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use and application of The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over- egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand- strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard. This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con- systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in- emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in- and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal- egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro- equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu- tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need

133

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00133 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

to be properly inspected in the field for use changes in production rates, raw materials, of proper materials and procedures and to as- experimentation, equipment unavailability, sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do new equipment, new product development, the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, change in catalyst and changes in operating packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld- conditions to improve yield or quality. ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also, Equipment changes include among others procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip- need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange- bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities changes and mechanical changes. to better assure proper purchases of required equipment which is suitable for its intended Temporary changes have caused a number service. Any changes in equipment that may of catastrophes over the years, and employ- become necessary will need to go through ers need to establish ways to detect tem- the management of change procedures. porary changes as well as those that are per- 10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- manent. It is important that a time limit for tine work which is conducted in process temporary changes be established and mon- areas needs to be controlled by the employer itored since, without control, these changes in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- may tend to become permanent. Temporary fied involving the work that is to be accom- changes are subject to the management of plished must be communicated to those change provisions. In addition, the manage- doing the work, but also to those operating ment of change procedures are used to insure personnel whose work could affect the safety that the equipment and procedures are re- of the process. A work authorization notice turned to their original or designed condi- or permit must have a procedure that de- tions at the end of the temporary change. scribes the steps the maintenance super- Proper documentation and review of these visor, contractor representative or other per- changes is invaluable in assuring that the son needs to follow to obtain the necessary safety and health considerations are being clearance to get the job started. The work incorporated into the operating procedures authorization procedures need to reference and the process. and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing fined space entry procedures and hot work of changes through the management of authorizations. This procedure also needs to change procedures. A typical change form provide clear steps to follow once the job is may include a description and the purpose of completed in order to provide closure for the change, the technical basis for the those that need to know the job is now com- change, safety and health considerations, pleted and equipment can be returned to normal. documentation of changes for the operating 11. Managing Change. To properly manage procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec- changes to process chemicals, technology, tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica- equipment and facilities, one must define tion, training and communications, pre- what is meant by change. In this process startup inspection, duration if a temporary safety management standard, change in- change, approvals and authorization. Where cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- the impact of the change is minor and well dures, raw materials and processing condi- understood, a check list reviewed by an au- tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind.’’ thorized person with proper communication These changes need to be properly managed to others who are affected may be sufficient. by identifying and reviewing them prior to However, for a more complex or significant implementation of the change. For example, design change, a hazard evaluation procedure the operating procedures contain the oper- with approvals by operations, maintenance, ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- and safety departments may be appropriate. ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw tance of operating within these limits. While materials, operating procedures, mechanical the operator must have the flexibility to integrity programs, electrical classifica- maintain safe operation within the estab- tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re- lished parameters, any operation outside of visions can be made permanent when the these parameters requires review and ap- drawings and procedure manuals are up- proval by a written management of change dated. Copies of process changes need to be procedure. kept in an accessible location to ensure that Management of change covers such as design changes are available to operating changes in process technology and changes personnel as well as to PHA team members to equipment and instrumentation. Changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up- in process technology can result from dated.

134

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00134 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves- ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary tigation is the process of identifying the un- lines of defense they plan to have and then derlying causes of incidents and imple- develop the necessary plans and procedures, menting steps to prevent similar events from and appropriately train employees in their occurring. The intent of an incident inves- emergency duties and responsibilities and tigation is for employers to learn from past then implement these lines of defense. experiences and thus avoid repeating past Employers at a minimum must have an mistakes. The incidents for which OSHA ex- emergency action plan which will facilitate pects employers to become aware and to in- the prompt evacuation of employees when an vestigate are the types of events which re- unwanted release of highly hazardous chem- sult in or could reasonably have resulted in ical. This means that the employer will have a catastrophic release. Some of the events a plan that will be activated by an alarm are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ system to alert employees when to evacuate meaning that a serious consequence did not and, that employees who are physically im- occur, but could have. paired, will have the necessary support and Employers need to develop in-house capa- assistance to get them to the safe zone as bility to investigate incidents that occur in well. The intent of these requirements is to their facilities. A team needs to be assem- alert and move employees to a safe zone bled by the employer and trained in the tech- quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing niques of investigation including how to con- alarms are to be avoided. The use of process duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- control centers or similar process buildings mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- in the process area as safe areas is discour- ciplinary team is better able to gather the aged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a facts of the event and to analyze them and large life loss has occurred in these struc- develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- tures because of where they have been sited pened, and why. Team members should be se- and because they are not necessarily de- lected on the basis of their training, knowl- signed to withstand over-pressures from edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- shockwaves resulting from explosions in the fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- process area. ployees in the process area where the inci- Unwanted incidental releases of highly dent occurred should be consulted, inter- hazardous chemicals in the process area viewed or made a member of the team. Their must be addressed by the employer as to knowledge of the events form a significant what actions employees are to take. If the set of facts about the incident which oc- employer wants employees to evacuate the curred. The report, its findings and rec- area, then the emergency action plan will be ommendations are to be shared with those activated. For outdoor processes where wind who can benefit from the information. The direction is important for selecting the safe cooperation of employees is essential to an route to a refuge area, the employer should effective incident investigation. The focus of place a wind direction indicator such as a the investigation should be to obtain facts, wind sock or pennant at the highest point and not to place blame. The team and the in- that can be seen throughout the process vestigation process should clearly deal with area. Employees can move in the direction of all involved individuals in a fair, open and cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to consistent manner. the refuge area by knowing the wind direc- 13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer tion. must address what actions employees are to If the employer wants specific employees take when there is an unwanted release of in the release area to control or stop the highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- minor emergency or incidental release, these paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) actions must be planned for in advance and lines of defense are those that will be relied procedures developed and implemented. on along with the secondary lines of defense Preplanning for handling incidental releases when the primary lines of defense which are for minor emergencies in the process area used to prevent an unwanted release fail to needs to be done, appropriate equipment for stop the release. Employers will need to de- the hazards must be provided, and training cide if they want employees to handle and conducted for those employees who will per- stop small or minor incidental releases. form the emergency work before they re- Whether they wish to mobilize the available spond to handle an actual release. The em- resources at the plant and have them ployer’s training program, including the brought to bear on a more significant re- Hazard Communication standard training is lease. Or whether employers want their em- to address the training needs for employees ployees to evacuate the danger area and who are expected to handle incidental or promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone minor releases. area, and allow the local community emer- Preplanning for releases that are more se- gency response organizations to handle the rious than incidental releases is another im- release. Or whether the employer wants to portant line of defense to be used by the em- use some combination of these actions. Em- ployer. When a serious release of a highly ployers will need to select how many dif- hazardous chemical occurs, the employer

135

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00135 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

through preplanning will have determined in tion of emergency response equipment, mu- advance what actions employees are to take. tual aid information, and access to meteoro- The evacuation of the immediate release logical or weather condition data and any area and other areas as necessary would be dispersion modeling data. accomplished under the emergency action 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- select a trained individual or assemble a sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control trained team of people to audit the process team, a hazardous materials team, or use safety management system and program. A employees to render aid to those in the im- small process or plant may need only one mediate release area and control or mitigate knowledgeable person to conduct an audit. the incident, these actions are covered by The audit is to include an evaluation of the 1926.65, the Hazardous Waste Operations and design and effectiveness of the process safety Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) stand- management system and a field inspection of ard. If outside assistance is necessary, such the safety and health conditions and prac- as through mutual aid agreements between tices to verify that the employer’s systems employers or local government emergency are effectively implemented. The audit response organizations, these emergency re- should be conducted or lead by a person sponders are also covered by HAZWOPER. knowledgeable in audit techniques and who The safety and health protections required is impartial towards the facility or area for emergency responders are the responsi- being audited. The essential elements of an bility of their employers and of the on-scene audit program include planning, staffing, incident commander. conducting the audit, evaluation and correc- Responders may be working under very tive action, follow-up and documentation. hazardous conditions and therefore the ob- Planning in advance is essential to the suc- jective is to have them competently led by cess of the auditing process. Each employer an on-scene incident commander and the needs to establish the format, staffing, commander’s staff, properly equipped to do scheduling and verification methods prior to their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re- ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard. munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well. better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro- community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor- agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements. an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem- control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program. area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex- the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should would serve as the major communication be familiar with the processes and with au- link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures. mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc- by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem- portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con- network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications, munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance, also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com- phone list, SARA Title III reports and mate- pared to what is written. rial safety data sheets, emergency plans and An effective audit includes a review of the procedures manual, a listing with the loca- relevant documentation and process safety

136

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00136 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.64

information, inspection of the physical fa- cluding an explanation where no action is cilities, and interviews with all levels of taken on a finding, needs to be documented plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce- as to what was done and why. dure and checklist developed in the It is important to assure that each defi- preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- ciency identified is addressed, the corrective tematically analyze compliance with the action to be taken noted, and the audit per- provisions of the standard and any other cor- son or team responsible be properly docu- porate policies that are relevant. For exam- mented by the employer. To control the cor- ple, the audit team will review all aspects of rective action process, the employer should the training program as part of the overall consider the use of a tracking system. This audit. The team will review the written tracking system might include periodic sta- training program for adequacy of content, tus reports shared with affected levels of frequency of training, effectiveness of train- management, specific reports such as coming in terms of its goals and objectives as pletion of an engineering study, and a final well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- implementation report to provide closure for ard’s requirements, documentation, etc. audit findings that have been through man- Through interviews, the team can determine agement of change, if appropriate, and then the employee’s knowledge and awareness of shared with affected employees and manage- the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- ment. This type of tracking system provides gency response assignments, etc. During the inspection, the team can observe actual the employer with the status of the correc- practices such as safety and health policies, tive action. It also provides the documenta- procedures, and work authorization prac- tion required to verify that appropriate cor- tices. This approach enables the team to rective actions were taken on deficiencies identify deficiencies and determine where identified in the audit. corrective actions or improvements are necessary. APPENDIX D TO § 1926.64—SOURCES OF An audit is a technique used to gather suf- FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDA- ficient facts and information, including sta- TORY) tistical information, to verify compliance with standards. Auditors should select as 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety, part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- American Institute of Chemical Engineers, cient to give a degree of confidence that the 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, audit reflects the level of compliance with (212) 705-7319. the standard. The audit team, through this 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro- systematic analysis, should document areas cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical which require corrective action as well as Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, those areas where the process safety man- NY 10017. agement system is effective and working in 3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management an effective manner. This provides a record of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for of the audit procedures and findings, and Chemical Process Safety of the American In- serves as a baseline of operation data for fu- stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th ture audits. It will assist future auditors in Street, New York, NY 10017. determining changes or trends from previous 4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem- audits. ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As- Corrective action is one of the most impor- sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC tant parts of the audit. It includes not only 20037. addressing the identified deficiencies, but also planning, followup, and documentation. 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’ The corrective action process normally be- Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M gins with a management review of the audit Street NW, Washington, DC 20037. findings. The purpose of this review is to de- 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’ termine what actions are appropriate, and to American Petroleum Institute (API Rec- establish priorities, timetables, resource al- ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W., locations and requirements and responsibil- Washington, DC 20005. ities. In some cases, corrective action may 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe- involve a simple change in procedure or ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti- minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API, cern. Management of change procedures need 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005. to be used, as appropriate, even for what 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association may seem to be a minor change. Many of the (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep- deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W., some may require engineering studies or in- Washington, DC 20037. depth review of actual procedures and prac- 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per- tices. There may be instances where no ac- formance,’’ Report A- 3, The Business Round- tion is necessary and this is a valid response table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av- to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes

137

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00137 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

criteria to evaluate contractor safety per- ardous substances has been formance and criteria to enhance contractor ascertained); safety performance). (ii) Corrective actions involving 10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con- clean-up operations at sites covered by tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 the Resource Conservation and Recov- Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534. ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42 11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.); tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at Butterworth; London 1983. sites recognized by Federal, state, local 12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage- or other governmental bodies as uncon- ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of trolled hazardous waste sites; Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- (iv) Operations involving hazardous ministration. wastes that are conducted at treat- 13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa- ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av- and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen- enue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210. cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A. 14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June to implement RCRA regulations; and 1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (v) Emergency response operations (EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency for releases of, or substantial threats of Response, Washington, DC 20460. releases of, hazardous substances with- 15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- out regard to the location of the haz- ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely ard. Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), (2) Application. (i) All requirements of Federal Emergency Management Adminis- part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of Code of Federal Regulations apply pur- Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. suant to their terms to hazardous 16. ‘‘Accident Investigation...A New Ap- waste and emergency response oper- proach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 ations whether covered by this section North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611- or not. If there is a conflict or overlap, 3991. the provision more protective of em- 17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi- ployee safety and health shall apply fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1). 18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988, (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op- Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan erations within the scope of paragraphs 48674. (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this section must comply with all paragraphs [58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993] of this section except paragraphs (p) § 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and (q). and emergency response. (iii) Operations within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section (a) Scope, application, and definitions— must comply only with the require- (1) Scope. This section covers the fol- ments of paragraph (p) of this section. lowing operations, unless the employer can demonstrate that the operation NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions does not involve employee exposure or of paragraph (p) of this section cover any the reasonable possibility for employee treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper- exposure to safety or health hazards: ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by state law authorized under RCRA, and (i) Clean-up operations required by a required to have a permit or interim status governmental body, whether Federal, from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from state, local or other involving haz- a state agency pursuant to RCRA. ardous substances that are conducted (B) Employers who are not required to at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites have a permit or interim status because they (including, but not limited to, the are conditionally exempt small quantity EPA’s National Priority Site List generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera- (NPL), state priority site lists, sites tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for exemptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts recommended for the EPA NPL, and 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are initial investigations of government not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through identified sites which are conducted be- (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers fore the presence or absence of haz- who are required by the EPA or state agency

138

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00138 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re- gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where ees to engage in emergency response are cov- the substance can be absorbed, neutral- ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- ized, or otherwise controlled at the tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im- quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte- gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the and who meet the requirements of paragraph scope of this standard. Responses to re- (p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. leases of hazardous substances where (C) If an area is used primarily for treat- there is no potential safety or health ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses. areas not used primarily for treatment, storage, or disposal, any emergency response op- Facility means (A) any building, erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of structure, installation, equipment, pipe this section. Compliance with the require- or pipeline (including any pipe into a ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall sewer or publicly owned treatment be deemed to be in compliance with the re- works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im- quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec- poundment, ditch, storage container, tion. motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air- (iv) Emergency response operations craft, or (B) any site or area where a for releases of, or substantial threats of hazardous substance has been depos- releases of, hazardous substances which ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) otherwise come to be located; but does through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must not include any consumer product in only comply with the requirements of consumer use or any water-borne ves- paragraph (q) of this section. sel. (3) Definitions—Buddy system means a Hazardous materials response system of organizing employees into (HAZMAT) team means an organized work groups in such a manner that group of employees, designated by the each employee of the work group is designated to be observed by at least employer, who are expected to perform one other employee in the work group. work to handle and control actual or The purpose of the buddy system is to potential leaks or spills of hazardous provide rapid assistance to employees substances requiring possible close ap- in the event of an emergency. proach to the substance. The team Clean-up operation means an oper- members perform responses to releases ation where hazardous substances are or potential releases of hazardous sub- removed, contained, incinerated, neu- stances for the purpose of control or tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in stabilization of the incident. A any other manner processed or handled HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor with the ultimate goal of making the is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT site safer for people or the environ- team. A HAZMAT team, however, may ment. be a separate component of a fire bri- Decontamination means the removal gade or fire department. of hazardous substances from employ- Hazardous substance means any sub- ees and their equipment to the extent stance designated or listed under para- necessary to preclude the occurrence of graphs (A) through (D) of this defini- foreseeable adverse health affects. tion, exposure to which results or may Emergency response or responding to result in adverse affects on the health emergencies means a response effort by or safety of employees: employees from outside the immediate (A) Any substance defined under sec- release area or by other designated re- tion 101(14) of CERCLA; sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re- an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon

139

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00139 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- Oxygen deficiency means that con- similation into any person, either di- centration of oxygen by volume below rectly from the environment or indi- which atmosphere supplying res- rectly by ingestion through food piratory protection must be provided. chains, will or may reasonably be an- It exists in atmospheres where the per- ticipated to cause death, disease, be- centage of oxygen by volume is less havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic than 19.5 percent oxygen. mutation, physiological malfunctions Permissible exposure limit means the (including malfunctions in reproduc- exposure, inhalation or dermal permis- tion) or physical deformations in such sible exposure limit specified either in persons or their offspring; §1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in (C) Any substance listed by the U.S. other pertinent sections of this part. Department of Transportation as haz- Published exposure level means the ex- ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH and appendices; and Recommendations for Occupational (D) Hazardous waste as herein de- Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor- fined. porated by reference, or if none is spec- Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste ified, the exposure limits published in or combination of wastes as defined in the standards specified by the Amer- 40 CFR 261.3, or ican Conference of Governmental In- dustrial Hygienists in their publication (B) Those substances defined as haz- ‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi- ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated Hazardous waste operation means any 1987 incorporated by reference. operation conducted within the scope Post emergency response means that of this standard. portion of an emergency response per- Hazardous waste site or Site means formed after the immediate threat of a any facility or location within the release has been stabilized or elimi- scope of this standard at which haz- nated and clean-up of the site has ardous waste operations take place. begun. If post emergency response is Health hazard means a chemical, mix- performed by an employer’s own em- ture of chemicals or a pathogen for ployees who were part of the initial which there is statistically significant emergency response, it is considered to evidence based on at least one study be part of the initial response and not conducted in accordance with estab- post emergency response. However, if a lished scientific principles that acute group of an employer’s own employees, or chronic health effects may occur in separate from the group providing ini- exposed employees. The term health tial response, performs the clean-up op- hazard includes chemicals which are eration, then the separate group of em- carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic ployees would be considered to be per- agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, forming post-emergency response and corrosives, sensitizers, heptaotoxins, subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec- nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents tion. which act on the hematopoietic sys- Qualified person means a person with tem, and agents which damage the specific training, knowledge and expe- lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous mem- rience in the area for which the person branes. It also includes stress due to has the responsibility and the author- temperature extremes. Further defini- ity to control. tion of the terms used above can be Site safety and health supervisor (or of- found in appendix A to 29 CFR 1926.59. ficial) means the individual located on IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life a hazardous waste site who is respon- or health means an atmospheric con- sible to the employer and has the au- centration of any toxic, corrosive or thority and knowledge necessary to asphyxiant substance that poses an im- implement the site safety and health mediate threat to life or would cause plan and verify compliance with appli- irreversible or delayed adverse health cable safety and health requirements. effects or would interfere with an indi- Small quantity qenerator means a gen- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan- erator of hazardous wastes who in any gerous atmosphere. calendar month generates no more

140

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00140 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac- Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities. means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac- a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part dividuals or the environment or both. 1926. Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. such as those created by former munic- An employer who retains contractor or ipal, county or state landfills where il- legal or poorly managed waste disposal sub-contractor services for work in has taken place. Other sites are found hazardous waste operations shall in- on private property, often belonging to form those contractors, sub-contrac- generators or former generators of haz- tors, or their representatives of the ardous substance wastes. Examples of site emergency response procedures such sites include, but are not limited and any potential fire, explosion, to, surface impoundments, landfills, health, safety or other hazards of the dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- hazardous waste operation that have mal operations at TSD sites are not been identified by the employer, in- covered by this definition. cluding those identified in the employer’s information program. (b) Safety and health program. (v) Program availability. The written NOTE TO (B): Safety and health programs safety and health program shall be developed and implemented to meet other made available to any contractor or Federal, state, or local regulations are considered acceptable in meeting this require- subcontractor or their representative ment if they cover or are modified to cover who will be involved with the haz- the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- ardous waste operation; to employees; ditional or separate safety and health pro- to employee designated representa- gram is not required by this paragraph. tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per- (1) General. (i) Employers shall de- sonnel of other Federal, state, or local velop and implement a written safety agencies with regulatory authority and health program for their employ- over the site. ees involved in hazardous waste oper- (2) Organizational structure part of the ations. The program shall be designed site program—(i) The organizationa1 to identify, evaluate, and control safe- structure part of the program shall es- ty and health hazards, and provide for tablish the specific chain of command emergency response for hazardous and specify the overall responsibilities waste operations. of supervisors and employees. It shall (ii) The written safety and health include, at a minimum, the following program shall incorporate the fol- elements: lowing: (A) A general supervisor who has the (A) An organizational structure; responsibility and authority to direct (B) A comprehensive workplan; all hazardous waste operations. (C) A site-specific safety and health (B) A site safety and health super- plan which need not repeat the employ- visor who has the responsibility and er’s standard operating procedures re- authority to develop and implement quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this the site safety and health plan and section; verify compliance. (D) The safety and health training program; (C) All other personnel needed for (E) The medical surveillance pro- hazardous waste site operations and gram; emergency response and their general (F) The employer’s standard oper- functions and responsibilities. ating procedures for safety and health; (D) The lines of authority, responsi- and bility, and communication.

141

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00141 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require- shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section. waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni- (3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi- site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in- workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra- site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip- sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used. and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord- (i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re- address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section. as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this procedures available elsewhere. section. (ii) The comprehensive workplan (H) An emergency response plan shall define work tasks and objectives meeting the requirements of paragraph and identify the methods for accom- (l) of this section for safe and effective plishing those tasks and objectives. responses to emergencies, including (iii) The comprehensive workplan the necessary PPE and other equip- shall establish personnel requirements ment. for implementing the plan. (iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures. shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph of this section. (j) of this section. (v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe- shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro- the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity, tion. and at such other times as necessary to (vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The inscribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site (4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re- part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan. and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con- and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su- tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi- (ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em- (A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef- (B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the (e) of this section. employer. (C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis— be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz- tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures

142

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00142 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per- identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall (2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following tics shall be performed prior to site requirements: entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre- aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur- entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub- be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus- order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and controls and personal protective equip- suspected hazards identified during the ment for the tasks to be performed. preliminary site evaluation. If there is (3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub- conditions that may pose inhalation or lished exposure level, the employer skin absorption hazards that are imme- may use other published studies and in- diately dangerous to life or health formation as a guide to appropriate (IDLH), or other conditions that may personal protective equipment. cause death or serious harm, shall be identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res- clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be tion are located. carried by employees during initial site (4) Required information. The fol- entry. lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua- able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor- prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus- site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble (i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min- (ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro- (iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions. ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of (iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda- by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip- (v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.) pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have (vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord- (vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section. of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni- would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation time of an emergency. produces information that shows the (viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in- the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:

143

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00143 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site (ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor- (combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available. oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program. (iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys- (iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where of operations. these requirements are covered else- (7) Risk identification. Once the pres- where they need not be repeated. ence and concentrations of specific hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em- ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators, be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards, of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the 1926.59, training required by that stand- requirements of this paragraph before ard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in hazardous waste operations that could ex- NOTE TO (C)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances, but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they (a) Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci- (b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph. (c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted sources. to participate in or supervise field ac- (d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to (e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function ranges. (f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility. (2) Elements to be covered. The train- (8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol- mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing: ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health; present on site that is available to the (ii) Safety, health and other hazards employer and relevant to the duties an present on the site; employee is expected to perform shall be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip- ployees prior to the commencement of ment; their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em- may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz- the hazard communication standard for ards; this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls (d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site; priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require- implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp- sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and

144

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00144 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe- (b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as- (3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em- sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro- removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con- pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques. ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a (ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub- for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden- toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec- surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In- exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter. struction off the site, and the min- (6) Training certification. Employees imum of one day actual field experi- and supervisors that have received and ence under the direct supervision of a successfully completed the training trained, experienced supervisor. and field experience specified in para- (iii) Workers regularly on site who graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec- work in areas which have been mon- tion shall be certified by their instruc- itored and fully characterized indi- tor or the head instructor and trained cating that exposures are under permissible exposure limits and published supervisor as having successfully com- exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ- not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph 24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper- experience under the direct supervision ations. of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees (iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz- who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz- and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies. training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec- specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, (4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train- supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this 40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.

145

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00145 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules: tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv): quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment; (e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un- requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien- copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate; tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the employees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em- to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination specific training before site entry and within the last six months; have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica- rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi- ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz- ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or experience. exposed above the permissible exposure (f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation; fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex- (a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary. graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ- with this paragraph. ees including those of employers covered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may (2) Employees covered. The medical have been injured, received a health surveillance program shall be insti- impairment, developed signs or symp- tuted by the employer for the following toms which may have resulted from ex- employees: posure to hazardous substances result- (i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex- exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra- sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec- stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used: respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the (ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms; required by § 1926.103; (B) At additional times, if the exam- (iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow- become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary. volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec- (iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work (3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em- tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han- available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and

146

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00146 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam- including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee. perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of (ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re- to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat- shall be determined by the attending ment. physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures. should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate (5) Examination bv a physician and record of the medical surveillance re- costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33. occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information: able time and place. (A) The name and social security number of the employee; (6) Information provided to the physi- (B) Physician’s written opinions, rec- cian. The employer shall provide one ommended limitations, and results of copy of this standard and its appen- examinations and tests; dices to the attending physician, and in (C) Any employee medical com- addition the following for each em- plaints related to exposure to haz- ployee: ardous substances; (i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro- duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by exposures. the employer, with the exception of the (ii) The employee’s exposure levels or standard and its appendices. anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac- (iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering used. controls, work practices, personal pro- (iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord- which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous (v) Information required by § 1926.103. substances and safety and health haz- (7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The ards. employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated either opinion from the attending physician in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in containing the following: other pertinent sections of this part. (i) (A) The physician’s opinion as to Engineering controls and work prac- whether the employee has any detected tices shall be instituted to reduce and medical conditions which would place maintain employee exposure to or the employee at increased risk of ma- below the permissible exposure limits terial impairment of the employee’s for substances regulated either in health from work in hazardous waste § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of operations or emergency response, or this part, except to the extent that from respirator use. such controls and practices are not fea- (B) The physician’s recommended sible. limitations upon the employee’s as- NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls signed work. which may be feasible include the use of

147

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00147 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained ment, and/or the use of remotely operated breathing apparatus, or positive pres- material handling equipment. Work prac- sure air-line respirators equipped with tices which may be feasible are removing all an escape air supply, shall be used non-essential employees from potential exposure during opening of drums, wetting when chemical exposure levels present down dusty operations and locating employ- will create a substantial possibility of ees upwind of possible hazards. immediate death, immediate serious (ii) Whenever engineering controls and illness or injury, or impair the ability work practices are not feasible or not re- to escape. quired, any reasonable combination of engi- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical neering controls, work practices and PPE protective suits (protection equivalent shall be used to reduce and maintain em- to Level A protection as recommended ployee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi- regulated either in §1926.55 or other pertinent tions where skin absorption of a haz- sections of this part. ardous substance may result in a sub- (iii) The employer shall not implement a stantial possibility of immediate schedule of employee rotation as a means of death, immediate serious illness or in- compliance with permissible exposure limits jury, or impair the ability to escape. or dose limits except when there is no other (v) The level of protection provided feasible way of complying with the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation. by PPE selection shall be increased (iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be when additional information on site followed. conditions indicates that increased protection is necessary to reduce em- (2) Engineering controls, work practices, ployee exposures below permissible ex- and PPE for substances not regulated ei- posure limits and published exposure ther in §1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, levels for hazardous substances and or in other pertinent sections of this part. health hazards. (See appendix B for An appropriate combination of engi- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.) neering controls, work practices and personal protective equipment shall be NOTE TO (G)(3): The level of employee pro- used to reduce and maintain employee tection provided may be decreased when ad- exposure to or below published expo- ditional information or site conditions show that decreased protection will not result in sure levels for hazardous substances hazardous exposures to employees. and health hazards not regulated either in §1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or (vi) Personal protective equipment in other pertinent sections of this part. shall be selected and used to meet the The employer may use the published requirements of subpart E of this part literature and MSDS as a guide in and additional requirements specified making the employer’s determination in this section. as to what level of protection the em- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro- ployer believes is appropriate for haz- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating ardous substances and health hazards suits shall protect employees from the for which there is no permissible expo- particular hazards which are identified sure limit or published exposure limit. during site characterization and anal- (3) Personal protective equipment selec- ysis. tion. (i) Personal protective equipment (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall (PPE) shall be selected and used which be capable of maintaining positive air will protect employees from the haz- pressure. (See appendix A for a test ards and potential hazards they are method which may be used to evaluate likely to encounter as identified during this requirement.) the site characterization and analysis. (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall (ii) Personal protective equipment be capable of preventing inward test selection shall be based on an evalua- gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. tion of the performance characteristics (See appendix A for a test method of the PPE relative to the require- which may be used to evaluate this re- ments and limitations of the site, the quirement.) task-specific conditions and duration, (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) and the hazards and potential hazards program. A written personal protective identified at the site. equipment program, which is part of

148

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00148 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam- gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments. of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni- of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos- plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam- gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo- the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have the procedure or element. risen are as follows: (i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different ards, portion of the site. (ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than equipment, those previously identified are being (iii) Work mission duration, handled. (iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper- (v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling). (vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling (vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work- dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con- (viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon). prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. (ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences; (x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed; priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em- (h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex- toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and health hazards likely to be present ance with this paragraph where there above permissible exposure limits or may be a question of employee expo- published exposure levels by using per- sure to hazardous concentrations of sonal sampling frequently enough to hazardous substances in order to assure characterize employee exposures. If the proper selection of engineering con- employees likely to have the highest trols, work practices and personal pro- exposure are over permissible exposure tective equipment so that employees limits or published exposure limits, are not exposed to levels which exceed then monitoring shall continue to de- permissible exposure limits, or pub- termine all employees likely to be lished exposure levels if there are no above those limits. The employer may permissible exposure limits, for haz- utilize a representative sampling ap- ardous substances. proach by documenting that the em- (ii) Air monitoring shall be used to ployees and chemicals chosen for moni- identify and quantify airborne levels of toring are based on the criteria stated hazardous substances and safety and above. health hazards in order to determine the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO H): It is not required to monitor tection needed on site. employees engaged in site characterization (2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, operations covered by paragraph (c) of this representative air monitoring shall be section. conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro- sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in rial’s dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform

149

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00149 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can- contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage, actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi- gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred. participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de- subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca- operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con- ered by this standard. tainers. (j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture. residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of subpart F with this paragraph. of this part shall be on hand and ready (ii) Drums and containers used dur- for use to control incipient fires. ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- (2) Openinq drums and containers. The priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- following procedures shall be followed tions for the wastes that they contain. in areas where drums or containers are (iii) When practical, drums and con- being opened: tainers shall be inspected and their in- (i) Where an airline respirator system tegrity shall be assured prior to being is used, connections to the source of air moved. Drums or containers that can- supply shall be protected from con- not be inspected before being moved tamination and the entire system shall because of storage conditions (i.e., bur- be protected from physical damage. ied beneath the earth, stacked behind other drums, stacked several tiers high (ii) Employees not actually involved in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- in opening drums or containers shall be cessible location and inspected prior to kept a safe distance from the drums or further handling. containers being opened. (iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and (v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci- container movement. dental explosion. (vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip- the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion- with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier. tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi- (vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition. and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess (viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re- spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the (b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury. tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon being transferred. or work from drums or containers.

150

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00150 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- Transportation regulations. Employers and rial handiing equipment used to trans- their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21 fer drums and containers shall be se- and 173.50. lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5) equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre- leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum, tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs (4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con- (lab packs): tainers containing radioactive wastes shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in- assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec- (5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord- cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes. and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste (i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified. be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container (ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with tainment devices or protective shields a sampling procedure which is part of to protect equipment operators from the site safety and health plan devel- exploding containers. oped for and available to employees (iii) An employee alarm system capa- and others at the specific worksite. ble of being perceived above sur- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums rounding light and noise conditions and containers shall be identified and shall be used to signal the commence- classified prior to packaging for shipment and completion of explosive ment. waste handling activities. (ii) Drum or container staging areas (iv) Continuous communications (i.e., shall be kept to the minimum number portable radios, hand signals, tele- necessary to identify and classify ma- phones, as appropriate) shall be main- terials safely and prepare them for tained between the employee-in-charge transport. of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes. time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes pleted. Communication equipment or shall be permitted only after a thor- methods that could cause shock sen- ough characterization of the materials sitive materials to explode shall not be has been completed. used. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i) (v) Drums and containers under pres- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- substances shall be handled in a man- ing, shall not be moved until such time ner similar to that for drums and con- as the cause for excess pressure is de- tainers, taking into consideration the termined and appropriate containment size of the tank or vault. procedures have been implemented to (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry protect employees from explosive relief procedures as described in the employ- of the drum. er’s safety and health plan shall be fol- (vi) Drums and containers containing lowed whenever employees must enter packaged laboratory wastes shall be a tank or vault. considered to contain shock-sensitive (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro- or explosive materials until they have cedures for all phases of decontamina- been characterized. tion shall be developed and imple- CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes mented in accordance with this para- may be prohibited under U.S. Department of graph.

151

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00151 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi- veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami- or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre- (ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used. stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1) (iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer- nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1) nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici- posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com- (iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper- shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives, dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern- propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon- rect any deficiencies. sibilities. (3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are equipment. exempt from the requirements of this (4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer- ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part. disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response (5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer- equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min- cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following: placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning. fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author- (ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication. meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre- hazardous substances shall imme- vention. diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref- ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge. disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control. is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce- (6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures. ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe- change rooms. ty and health plan. (7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid. cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures. ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow- tially harmful effects of exposures to up. hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.

152

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00152 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE D±65.1ÐMINIMUM ILLUMINATION incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLESÐContinued ments for the emergency response plan Foot- required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations tion, the following elements shall be dles included for emergency response plans: 5 ...... Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work (A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling (B) Procedures for reporting inci- mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept- dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.) ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical (ii) The emergency response plan equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. (iii) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work- with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade- gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be and federal agencies. provided on the site. (iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped (v) The site emergency response plan from containers. shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not tions or information. used for any other purpose. (vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san- 1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided. in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for firefighting purposes, shall be identi- (vii) Based upon the information fied to indicate clearly that the water available at time of the emergency, the is unsafe and is not to be used for employer shall evaluate the incident drinking, washing, or cooking pur- and the site response capabilities and poses. proceed with the appropriate steps to (ii) There shall be no cross-connec- implement the site emergency response tion, open or potential, between a sys- plan. tem furnishing potable water and a (m) Illumination. Areas accessible to system furnishing nonpotable water. employees shall be lighted to not less (3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be than the minimum illumination inten- provided for employees according to sities listed in the following Table D– the following Table D–65.2. 65.1 while any work is in progress: TABLE D±65.2ÐTOILET FACILITIES TABLE D±65.1ÐMINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities

Foot- 20 or fewer ...... One. can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri- dles nal per 40 employees. More than 200 ...... One toilet seat and one uri- 5 ...... General site areas. nal per 50 employees. 3 ...... Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and (ii) Under temporary field conditions, field maintenance areas. 5 ...... Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.

153

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00153 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- the worksite, shall provide employees vided with a sanitary sewer shall be with a clean area where they can re- provided with the following toilet fa- move, store, and put on street clothing. cilities unless prohibited by local The second area, with an exit to the codes: worksite, shall provide employees with (A) Chemical toilets; an area where they can put on, remove (B) Recirculating toilets; and store work clothing and personal (C) Combustion toilets; or protective equipment. (D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall (iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven- let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that (v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per- shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels. (4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em- cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site. tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The (5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef- vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip- and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro- (6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz- shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained. the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in- and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams, which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated (7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives. hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de- operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be- months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec- change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu- posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef- waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made (i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request. shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain operations conducted under 1926.51(f)(4). the Resource Conservation and Recovery (ii) Change rooms shall be provided Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con- and shall meet the requirements of 29 ducting operations at treatment, stor- CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci- sist of two separate change areas sepa- fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec- rated by the shower area required in tion shall provide and implement the paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One programs specified in this paragraph. change area, with an exit leading off See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to

154

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00154 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for stances at TSD operations to enable employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as- (1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan- written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ- evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary pose of employee protection, to provide training. for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva- maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as new technologies. meeting the initial training require- (2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em- The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as might have already received from ac- part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em- gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re- NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually. ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini- ble to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily (3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach- employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com- (4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional decontamination procedure meeting skills. the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i) this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency (5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ- troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the (6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em- through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployers safety and health program re- as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec- prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate (7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo- ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ- part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an

155

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00155 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

emergency action plan complying with ness training to recognize that an emer- § 1926.35 of this part. gency response situation exists and they (ii) Elements of an emergency response have been instructed to call the designated plan. The employer shall develop an outside fully-trained emergency response team for assistance. emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address, as a min- (B) Employee members of TSD facil- imum, the following areas to the ex- ity emergency response organizations tent that they are not addressed in any shall be trained to a level of com- specific program required in this para- petence in the recognition of health graph: and safety hazards to protect them- (A) Pre-emergency planning and co- selves and other employees. This would ordination with outside parties. include training in the methods used to (B) Personnel roles, lines of author- minimize the risk from safety and ity, and communication. health hazards; in the safe use of con- (C) Emergency recognition and pre- trol equipment; in the selection and vention. use of appropriate personal protective (D) Safe distances and places of ref- equipment; in the safe operating proce- uge. dures to be used at the incident scene; (E) Site security and control. in the techniques of coordination with (F) Evacuation routes and proce- other employees to minimize risks; in dures. the appropriate response to over expo- (G) Decontamination procedures. sure from health hazards or injury to (H) Emergency medical treatment themselves and other employees; and and first aid. in the recognition of subsequent symp- (I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo- procedures. sures. (J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that up. each covered employee has attended (K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train- (iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em- completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly. to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com- training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by operating procedures the employer has the employer. established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele- procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this Exception #1: An employer need not train all section, the following elements shall be employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans employer divides the work force in a man- to the extent that they do not repeat ner such that a sufficient number of em- any information already contained in ployees who have responsibility to control the emergency response plan: emergencies have the training specified, (1) Site topography, layout, and pre- and all other employees, who may first re- vailing weather conditions. spond to an emergency incident, have sufficient awareness training to recognize that (2) Procedures for reporting incidents an emergency response situation exists and to local, state, and federal govern- that they are instructed in that case to mental agencies. summon the fully trained employees and (B) The emergency response plan not attempt control activities for which shall be compatible and integrated they are not trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer- Exception #2: An employer need not train all gency response plans of local, state, employees to the degree specified if ar- and federal agencies. rangements have been made in advance for an outside fully-trained emergency re- (C) The emergency response plan sponse team to respond in a reasonable pe- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of riod and all employees, who may come to the overall training program for site the incident first, have sufficient aware- operations.

156

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00156 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere: necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co- rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties. tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author- (E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication. be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre- 1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- vention. gency situation; to stop work activities (iv) Safe distances and places of ref- if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and uge. to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control. (F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce- able at time of the emergency, the em- dures. ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination. the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid. plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response plan. procedures. (q) Emerqency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow- substance releases. This paragraph cov- up. ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. gaged in emergency response no matter (xii) Emergency response organiza- where it occurs except that it does not tions may use the local emergency recover employees engaged in operations sponse plan or the state emergency re- specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du- developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer- equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to- Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use. 42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handlinq emergency met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re- graph. sponse official responding to an emer- (1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com- and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re- emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the available for inspection and copying by ICS assisted by the senior official employees, their representatives and present for each employer. OSHA personnel. Employers who will evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an danger area when an emergency occurs, emergency response is the most senior offi- and who do not permit any of their em- cial on the site who has the responsibility ployees to assist in handling the emer- for controlling the operations at the site. gency, are exempt from the require- Initially it is the senior officer on the first- ments of this paragraph if they provide due piece of responding emergency apparatus an emergency action plan in accord- to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen- ance with § 1926.35 of this part. ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement official, site co- (2) Elements of an emergency response ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the plan. The employer shall develop an line of authority which has been previously emergency response plan for emer- established. gencies which shall address, as a min-

157

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00157 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi- sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus- ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities. its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken (iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer- stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene. individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures. priate for the hazards to be encoun- (x) When deemed necessary for meet- tered. However, personal protective ing the tasks at hand, approved self- equipment shall meet, at a minimum, contained compressed air breathing ap- the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1926.97 paratus may be used with approved cyl- when worn while performing fire fight- inders from other approved self-con- ing operations beyond the incipient tained compressed air breathing appa- stage for any incident. ratus provided that such cylinders are (iv) Employees engaged in emergency of the same capacity and pressure rat- response and exposed to hazardous sub- ing. All compressed air cylinders used stances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential inhalation hazard shall with self-contained breathing appa- wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri- that the individual in charge of the ICS teria. determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per- itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as (v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip- gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup- or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz- shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene, tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training (vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em- with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However, sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini- support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re- and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in- (vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap- ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip- who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in- being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per- response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of emergency at hand. these personnel.

158

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00158 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook. duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap- stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu- provide technical advice or assistance nication center. at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level. dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub- tion annually. stances as part of the initial response (6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi- formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re- gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try- new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re- cident. Employees who participate, or ceived at least eight hours of training are expected to participate, in emer- or have had sufficient experience to ob- gency response, shall be given training jectively demonstrate competency in in accordance with the following para- the following areas in addition to those graphs: listed for the awareness level and the (i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify: First responders at the awareness level (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard are individuals who are likely to wit- and risk assessment techniques. ness or discover a hazardous substance release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop- initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro- quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational ties of the release. They would take no level. further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz- thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms. ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con- sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective areas: equipment available with their unit. (A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de- ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures. sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant (B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter- outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures. gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician. stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are (C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of emergency. stopping the release. They assume a (D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re- ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that (E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub- sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni- control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24

159

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00159 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protection have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz- areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist. (A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques. (B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine- unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili- vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro- (C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available. signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple- System. ment decontamination procedures. (D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan. tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be- (E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior. sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci- (F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level, the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train- equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper- (G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com- contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the (H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify: dures. (A) Know and be able to implement (I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys- toxicological terminology and behav- tem. ior. (B) Know how to implement the em- (iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan. Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth- cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing. hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan. rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re- ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re- upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team. rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor- site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures. and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train- ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the certify: training and/or academic credentials (A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc- (B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they unknown materials by using advanced are to teach. survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em- (C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section

160

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00160 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

shall receive annual refresher training sonal protective equipment and decon- of sufficient content and duration to tamination procedures. All equipment maintain their competencies, or shall to be used in the performance of the demonstrate competency in those areas clean-up work shall be in serviceable at least yearly. condition and shall have been inspected (ii) A statement shall be made of the prior to use. training or competency, and if a statement of competency is made, the em- APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS ployer shall keep a record of the meth- WASTE OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY odology used to demonstrate com- RESPONSE petency. NOTE: The following appendices serve as (9) Medical surveillance and consulta- non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ- tion. (i) Members of an organized and ees and employers in complying with the ap- designated HAZMAT team and haz- propriate requirements of this section. How- ardous materials specialists shall re- ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain ceive a baseline physical examination circumstances the use of Level A and Level B PPE protection. and be provided with medical surveillance as required in paragraph (f) of APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL this section. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS (ii) Any emergency response employees who exhibits signs or symptoms This appendix sets forth the non-manda- which may have resulted from exposure tory examples of tests which may be used to to hazardous substances during the evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii) and (iii). Other tests and other challenge course of an emergency incident, either agents may be used to evaluate compliance. immediately or subsequently, shall be provided with medical consultation as A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this suit pressure test section. 1.0—Scope (10) Chemical protective clothing. 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a Chemical protective clothing and gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical equipment to be used by organized and protective suit material, seams, and closures designated HAZMAT team members, or to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow the gas tight in- to be used by hazardous materials spe- tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical cialists, shall meet the requirements of protective suit to be evaluated. paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to section. permeation, penetration, and degradation by (11) Post-emergency response oper- specific hazardous substances is not deter- ations. Upon completion of the emer- mined by this test method. gency response, if it is determined that 2.0—Definition of terms it is necessary to remove hazardous 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment substances, health hazards, and mate- which is constructed of protective clothing rials contaminated with them (such as materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, contaminated soil or other elements of arms, legs and respirator; may cover the the natural environment) from the site wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- of the incident, the employer con- tached gloves and boots; completely encloses ducting the clean-up shall comply with the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- one of the following: bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots. 2.2 Protective clothing material means any (i) Meet all of the requirements of material or combination of materials used in paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- tion; or lating parts of the body from direct contact (ii) Where the clean-up is done on with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- plant property using plant or work- eous chemicals. place employees, such employees shall 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this have completed the training require- test method, the limited flow of a gas under ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and 1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro- time interval. priate safety and health training made 3.0—Summary of test method necessary by the tasks that they are 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and expected to be performed such as per- modified for the test. The test apparatus is

161

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00161 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

attached to the suit to permit inflation to Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B–C) shall be defined as the after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop. 4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during 4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service. sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure 4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and 4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including 4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de- seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve vice. joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu- 5.0—Safety Precautions tion. Observe the suit for the formation of 5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor- soap bubbles, which is an indication of a rect pressure safety devices required for the leak. Repair all identified leaks. source of compressed air used. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in 6.0—Test Procedure Test procedure 6.0. 6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- 8.0—Report form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- shall have the following information re- ining the seams and gently pulling on the corded: seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi- tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure fying brand name, date of purchase, material and show no signs of deterioration. of construction, and unique fit features, e.g., 6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with special breathing apparatus. any other normal inlet or exhaust points 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (such as umbilical air line fittings or face (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with piece opening) with tape or other appropriate the specific observation times. If the ending means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as damage any of the suit components. failing the test. When possible, the specific 6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. leak location shall be identified in the test 6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- records. Retest pressure data shall be re- viding an improvised connection point on the corded as an additional test. suit for connecting an airline. Attach the 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit shall be identified and the sensitivity of the suit inflation from a compressed air source pressure gauge shall be recorded. equipped with a pressure indicating regu- 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres- lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test sure test even if repairs are being made at apparatus should be tested before and after the test location. each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the suit and assuring a pressure CAUTION of three inches water gauge for three minutes can be maintained. If a component is re- Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be moved for the test, that component shall be sure they are positioned correctly and se- replaced and a second test conducted with cured tightly before putting the suit back another component removed to permit a into service. Special care should be taken to complete test of the ensemble. examine each exhaust valve to make sure it 6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) is not blocked. and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup- Care should also be exercised to assure plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no that the inside and outside of the suit is case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches completely dry before it is put into storage. water gauge; and (B)=two inches water B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be suit qualitative leak test no less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 1.0—Scope percent of the test pressure (B). 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests 6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- protective suit integrity by detecting inward pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi- minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. fications are made to the suit to carry out

162

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00162 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas- vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re- determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver- 2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv- which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately. bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies 2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am- material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight). an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi- lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10 with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)] test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de- 2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice. protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″and a half pint plastic container lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid. tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu- The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli- dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters. the greater the protection provided by the TECP suit. 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy- 3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq- ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro- OH) required to generate the test atmos- tection. The person conducting the test shall phere is determined using the directions out- review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia. lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person 5.2 Since the established permissible ex- wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15 ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi- tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa- pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res- side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap- taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres- two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a before the test room concentration is meas- positive pressure supplied air respirator ured, using a high range ammonia length of available to enter the test area should the stain detector tube. When the ammonia suited individual need assistance. vapor reaches a concentration of between 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi- 1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual vidual must be used during this test. Visual starts a standardized exercise protocol to contact is the simplest but other methods stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is using communication devices are acceptable. completed, the test room concentration is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to measured again. The suited individual exits allow the exercise protocol to be carried out

163

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00163 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and then to be ventilated to allow for easy centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are after the test(s) are completed. started. 5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed: participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising motions completed in 6.0—TEST PROCEDURE one minute. 6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- one-minute period. liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 lution per cubic foot of test area volume to complete motions of the arms from above determine the approximate volume of con- the head to touching of the toes in a one- centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- minute period. erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete 6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply standing and squatting motions in a one- of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place minute period. it into a closed plastic container. 6.8 If at any time during the test the col- 6.1.3 Place the container, several high orimetric indicating paper should change range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump colors, the test should be stopped and section in the clean test pan and locate it near the 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶4.2). test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.9 After completion of the test exercise, vidual has easy access to these supplies. the test area concentration should be meas- 6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube. and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area. of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip- seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo- small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en- to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia 6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading. this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed the test. and the respirator removed. 6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas. all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the (zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more 6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi- as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria. challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in- 6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in- the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use. monia. A small mixing fan can be used near 7.0—Retest procedures the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for 6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A the ammonia concentration within the above. chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.

164

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00164 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

8.0—Report routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye 8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit tested by this prac- or skin contact); and the performance of the tice shall have the following information re- PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar- corded. rier to these hazards. The amount of protec- 8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe- tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- cific. That is, protective equipment material of construction, and unique suit fea- rials will protect well against some haz- tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. ardous substances and poorly, or not at all, 8.1.2 General description of test room against others. In many instances, protec- used for test. tive equipment materials cannot be found 8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of which will provide continuous protection ammonia detector strips and color change from the particular hazardous substance. In data. these cases the breakthrough time of the 8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- protective material should exceed the work piration date of the length of stain ammonia durations. detector tubes. The brand name and model of Other factors in this selection process to the sampling pump should also be recorded. be considered are matching the PPE to the If another type of ammonia detector is used, employee’s work requirements and task-spe- it should be identified along with its min- cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate- imum detection limit for ammonia. rials, such as tear strength and seam 8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two strength, should be considered in relation to test area concentrations, their average, the the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in interior suit concentration, and the cal- relation to heat stress and task duration are culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some shall be recorded as an additional test. cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro- 8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex- specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip- and the date of the test. Any detectable am- ment. monia (five ppm or greater for the length of The more that is known about the hazards stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec- cates the suit has failed this test. When tion becomes. As more information about other ammonia detectors are used, a lower the hazards and conditions at the site be- level of detection is possible and it should be comes available, the site supervisor can specified as the pass fail criteria. make decisions to up-grade or down-grade CAUTION the level of PPE protection to match the tasks at hand. Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be The following are guidelines which an em- sure they are positioned correctly and se- ployer can use to begin the selection of the cured tightly before putting the suit back appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in- into service. Special care should be taken to formation may suggest the use of combina- examine each exhaust valve to make sure it tions of PPE selected from the different pro- is not blocked. tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being Care should also be exercised to assure more suitable to the hazards of the work. It that the inside and outside of the suit is should be cautioned that the listing below completely dry before it is put into storage. does not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in relation to the spe- APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DE- cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE SCRIPTION AND DISCUSSION OF THE selection, evaluation and re-selection is an LEVELS OF PROTECTION AND PROTEC- ongoing process until sufficient information TIVE GEAR about the hazards and PPE performance is obtained. This appendix sets forth information about personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- Part A. Personal protective equipment is tion levels which may be used to assist em- divided into four categories based on the de- ployers in complying with the PPE require- gree of protection afforded. (See Part B of ments of this section. this appendix for further explanation of Lev- As required by the standard, PPE must be els A, B, C, and D hazards.) selected which will protect employees from I. Level A— To be selected when the great- the specific hazards which they are likely to est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec- encounter during their work on-site. tion is required. Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- The following constitute Level A equip- plex process which should take into consider- ment; it may be used as appropriate; ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self- volved in this process are identification of contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or the hazards, or suspected hazards; their positive pressure supplied air respirator with

165

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00165 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

escape SCBA, approved by the National In- 1. Coveralls. stitute for Occupational Safety and Health 2. Gloves. 1 (NIOSH). 3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- and shank. tive suit. 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos- 3. Coveralls.1 able). 1 4. Long underwear.1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash 5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. goggles*. 6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1 7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 7. Escape mask. 1 shank. 8. Face shield. 1 8. Hard hat (under suit).1 Part B. The types of hazards for which lev- 9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate boots (depending on suit construction, may are described below: be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). I. Level A—Level A protection should be II. Level B—The highest level of res- used when: piratory protection is necessary but a lesser 1. The hazardous substance has been iden- level of skin protection is needed. tified and requires the highest level of pro- The following constitute Level B equip- tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory ment; it may be used as appropriate. system based on either the measured (or po- 1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- tential for) high concentration of atmos- tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- site operations and work functions involve a cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). high potential for splash, immersion, or ex- 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par- (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; ticulates of materials that are harmful to one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- skin or capable of being absorbed through posable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin; 3. Coveralls. 1 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. to the skin are known or suspected to be 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or 6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel 3. Operations are being conducted in con- toe and shank. fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab- 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant sence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been determined. (disposable).1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be 8. Hard hat. 1 used when: 9. [Reserved] 1. The type and atmospheric concentration 10. Face shield. 1 of substances have been identified and re- III. Level C—The concentration(s) and quire a high level of respiratory protection, type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and but less skin protection; the criteria for using air purifying res- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 pirators are met. percent oxygen; or The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read- 1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con- 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin. 3. Coveralls. 1 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances 6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard; 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of (disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators. 1 8. Hard hat. III. Level C—Level C protection should be 1 9. Escape mask. used when: 1 10. Face shield. 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad- minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex- tamination only. posed skin; The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available that can 1 Optional, as applicable. remove the contaminants; and

166

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00166 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying trolling worksite hazards and the means for respirators are met. monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- IV. Level D—Level D protection should be gram will need to cover the responsibilities used when: and authority of the site coordinator or the 1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- employer’s manager on the site for the safe- ard; and ty and health of employees at the site, and 2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- the relationships with contractors or support mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- services as to what each employer’s safety halation of or contact with hazardous levels and health responsibilities are for their em- of any chemicals. ployees on the site. Each contractor on the site needs to have its own safety and health NOTE: As stated before, combinations of personal protective equipment other than program so structured that it will smoothly those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro- interface with the program of the site coor- tection may be more appropriate and may be dinator or principal contractor. used to provide the proper level of protec- Also those employers involved with treat- tion. ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as As an aid in selecting suitable chemical covered in paragraph (p) must have imple- protective clothing, it should be noted that mented a safety and health program for their the National Fire Protection Association employees. This program is to include the (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical hazard communication program required in protective clothing. The standards that have paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in been adopted by include: paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective employers comprehensive overall safety and Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies health program. This program is to be in (EPA Level A Protective Clothing). writing. NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash- Each site or workplace safety and health Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical program will need to include the following: Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth- (1) Policy statements of the line of authority ing). and accountability for implementing the NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash- program, the objectives of the program and Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non- the role of the site safety and health super- flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations visor or manager and staff; (2) means or (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). methods for the development of procedures These standards apply documentation and for identifying and controlling workplace performance requirements to the manufac- hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical the development and communication to em- protective suits meeting these requirements ployees of the various plans, work rules, are labelled as compliant with the appro- standard operating procedures and practices priate standard. It is recommended that that pertain to individual employees and su- chemical protective suits that meet these pervisors; (4) means for the training of super- standards be used. visors and employees to develop the needed skills and knowledge to perform their work APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to GUIDELINES anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means for obtaining informa- 1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro- Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort gram and for improving the effectiveness of will require an occupational safety and the program. The management and employ- health program headed by the site coordi- ees should be trying continually to improve nator or the employer’s representative. The the effectiveness of the program thereby en- purpose of the program will be the protec- hancing the protection being afforded those tion of employees at the site and will be an working on the site. extension of the employer’s overall safety Accidents on the site or workplace should and health program. The program will need be investigated to provide information on to be developed before work begins on the how such occurrences can be avoided in the site and implemented as work proceeds as future. When injuries or illnesses occur on stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- the site or workplace, they will need to be cilitate coordination and communication of investigated to determine what needs to be safety and health issues among personnel re- done to prevent this incident from occurring sponsible for the various activities which again. Such information will need to be used will take place at the site. It will provide the as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro- overall means for planning and imple- gram and the information turned into posi- menting the needed safety and health train- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re- ing and job orientation of employees who ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints will be working at the site. The program will relating to safety and health issues involved provide the means for identifying and con- with site or workplace activities is also a

167

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00167 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

feedback mechanism that can be used effec- better handled the next time may be counted tively to improve the program and may serve as training time. in part as an evaluative tool(s). For hazardous materials specialists (usu- For the development and implementation ally members of hazardous materials teams), of the program to be the most effective, pro- the training should address the care, use and/ fessional safety and health personnel should or testing of chemical protective clothing in- be used. Certified Safety Professionals, cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ical surveillance program, the standard oper- istered Professional Safety Engineers are ating procedures for the hazardous materials good examples of professional stature for team including the use of plugging and safety and health managers who will admin- patching equipment and other subject areas. ister the employer’s program. Officers and leaders who may be expected 2. Training. The training programs for em- to be in charge at an incident should be fully ployees subject to the requirements of para- knowledgeable of their company’s incident graph (e) of this standard should address: the command system. They should know where safety and health hazards employees should and how to obtain additional assistance and expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up be familiar with the local district’s emer- sites; what control measures or techniques gency response plan and the state emergency are effective for those hazards; what moni- response plan. toring procedures are effective in character- Specialist employees such as technical ex- izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts, medical experts or environmental ex- tive employer’s safety and health program; perts that work with hazardous materials in what a site safety and health plan should in- their regular jobs, who may be sent to the clude; hands on training with personal pro- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer tective equipment and clothing they may be or governmental agency to advise and assist expected to use; the contents of the OSHA the person in charge of the incident should standard relevant to the employee’s duties have training on an annual basis. Their and function; and, employee’s responsibil- training should include the care and use of ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su- personal protective equipment including res- pervisors will need training in their respon- pirators; knowledge of the incident com- sibilities under the safety and health pro- mand system and how they are to relate to gram and its subject areas such as the spill it; and those areas needed to keep them cur- containment program, the personal protec- rent in their respective field as it relates to tive equipment program, the medical sur- safety and health involving specific haz- veillance program, the emergency response ardous substances. plan and other areas. Those skilled support personnel, such as The training programs for employees sub- employees who work for public works depart- ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of ments or equipment operators who operate this standard should address: the employers bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who safety and health program elements impact- may be called to the incident scene to pro- ing employees; the hazard communication vide emergency support assistance, should program; the medical surveillance program; have at least a safety and health briefing be- the hazards and the controls for such hazards fore entering the area of potential or actual that employees need to know for their job exposure. These skilled support personnel, duties and functions. All require annual re- who have not been a part of the emergency fresher training. response plan and do not meet the training The training programs for employees cov- requirements, should be made aware of the ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of hazards they face and should be provided all this standard should address those com- necessary protective clothing and equipment petencies required for the various levels of required for their tasks. response such as: the hazards associated with There are two National Fire Protection As- hazardous substances; hazard identification sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard and awareness; notification of appropriate for Professional Competence of Responders persons; the need for and use of personal pro- to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA tective equipment including respirators; the 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding decontamination procedures to be used; to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are preplanning activities for hazardous sub- excellent resource documents to aid fire de- stance incidents including the emergency partments and other emergency response or- reponse plan; company standard operating ganizations in developing their training pro- procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz- what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents.

168

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00168 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro- should be selected that provide an adequate cedures should be tailored to the specific level of protection. However, over-protec- hazards of the site, and may vary in com- tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- plexity and number of steps, depending on ardous and should be avoided where possible. the level of hazard and the employee’s expo- Two basic objectives of any PPE program sure to the hazard. Decontamination proce- should be to protect the wearer from safety dures and PPE decontamination methods and health hazards, and to prevent injury to will vary depending upon the specific sub- the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal- stance, since one procedure or method may function of the PPE. To accomplish these not work for all substances. Evaluation of goals, a comprehensive PPE program should decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni- should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec- that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training. may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide- tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals, M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in- an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main- 4. Emergency response plans. States, along tained. with designated districts within the states, 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph will be developing or have developed local 1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation emergency response plans. These state and district plans should be utilized in the emer- of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach gency response plans called for in the stand- to effectively control and manage operations ard. Each employer should assure that its at an emergency incident. The individual in emergency response plan is compatible with charge of the ICS is the senior official re- the local plan. The major reference being sponding to the incident. The ICS is not used to aid in developing the state and local much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap- district plans is the Hazardous Materials proach used for many years by the fire serv- Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur- ice. During large complex fires involving sev- rent Emergency Response Guidebook from eral companies and many pieces of appa- the U.S. Department of Transportation, ratus, a command post would be established. CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service This enabled one individual to be in charge of Emergency Management Handbook may also managing the incident, rather than having be used as resources. several officers from different companies Employers involved with treatment, stor- making separate, and sometimes conflicting, age, and disposal facilities for hazardous decisions. The individual in charge of the waste, which have the required contingency command post would delegate responsibility plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy, into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one 1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- individual. ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it 5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in- and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances. individuals from the chemical, physical, and For a small incident, the individual in biologic hazards that may be encountered at charge of the ICS may perform many tasks a hazardous substance site. of the ICS. There may not be any, or little, As discussed in appendix B, no single com- delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex- bination of protective equipment and cloth- ample, in response to a small incident, the ing is capable of protecting against all haz- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- to normal command activities, may become tion with other protective methods and its the safety officer and may designate only effectiveness evaluated periodically. one employee (with proper equipment) as a The use of PPE can itself create significant back-up to provide assistance if needed. worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical OSHA does recommend, however, that at and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back- sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.

169

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00169 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the A comprehensive site safety and control following scenario might develop during a plan should include the following: summary small incident, such as an overturned tank analysis of hazards on the site and a risk truck with a small leak of flammable liquid. analysis of those hazards; site map or The first responding senior officer would sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- implement and take command of the ICS. tion or decontamination zone, work or hot That person would size-up the incident and zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- determine if additional personnel and appa- nications; command post or command cen- ratus were necessary; would determine what ter; standard operating procedures and safe actions to take to control the leak; and, de- work practices; medical assistance and termine the proper level of personal protec- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con- tive equipment. If additional assistance is taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination not needed, the individual in charge of the procedures and area; and other relevant ICS would implement actions to stop and areas. This plan should be a part of the em- control the leak using the fewest number of ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex- personnel that can effectively accomplish tension of it to the specific site. the tasks. The individual in charge of the 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers ICS then would designate himself as the safe- handling hazardous substances may be ex- ty officer and two other employees as a posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio- back-up in case rescue may become nec- logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a essary. In this scenario, decontamination medical surveillance program is essential to procedures would not be necessary. assess and monitor workers’ health and fit- A large complex incident may require ness for employment in hazardous waste op- many employees and difficult, time-con- erations and during the course of work; to suming efforts to control. In these situa- provide emergency and other treatment as tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will needed; and to keep accurate records for fu- want to delegate different tasks to subordi- ture reference. nates in order to maintain a span of control The Occupational Safety and Health Guid- that will keep the number of subordinates, ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- that are reporting, to a manageable level. ties developed by the National Institute for Delegation of task at large incidents may Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), be by location, where the incident scene is the Occupational Safety and Health Admin- divided into sectors, and subordinate officers istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard coordinate activities within the sector that (USCG), and the Environmental Protection they have been assigned. Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex- Delegation of tasks can also be by func- cellent example of the types of medical test- tion. Some of the functions that the indi- ing that should be done as part of a medical vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- surveillance program. egate at a large incident are: medical serv- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment ices; evacuation; water supply; resources Programs. Where hazardous substances may (equipment, apparatus); media relations; be released by spilling from a container that safety; and, site control (integrate activities will expose employees to the hazards of the with police for crowd and traffic control). materials, the employer will need to imple- Also for a large incident, the individual in ment a program to contain and control the charge of the ICS will designate several em- spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well ployees as back-up personnel; and a number as use of absorbents like diatomaceous of safety officers to monitor conditions and earth, are traditional techniques which have recommend safety precautions. proven to be effective over the years. How- Therefore, no matter what size or com- ever, in recent years new products have come plexity an incident may be, by implementing into the marketplace, the use of which com- an ICS there will be one individual in charge plement and increase the effectiveness of who makes the decisions and gives direc- these traditional methods. These new prod- tions; and, all actions, and communications ucts also provide emergency responders and are coordinated through one central point of others with additional tools or agents to use command. Such a system should reduce con- to reduce the hazards of spilled materials. fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- These agents can be rapidly applied over a nate actions, and should facilitate effective large area and can be uniformly applied or management of the incident. otherwise can be used to build a small dam, 7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety thus improving the workers’ ability to con- and security of response personnel and oth- trol spilled material. These application tech- ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- niques enhance the intimate contact be- dent site should be of primary concern to the tween the agent and the spilled material al- incident commander. The use of a site safety lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or and control plan could greatly assist those in quickest control of the spilled material. charge of assuring the safety and health of Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled employees on the site. materials, to suppress vapor generation from

170

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00170 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe- the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s cial agents, which when applied as rec- 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- ommended by the manufacturer, will react larly § 261.21). in a controlled manner with the spilled ma- All workers performing hazardous sub- terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or stance spill control work are expected to greatly reduce the level of hazard of the wear the proper protective clothing and spilled material. equipment for the materials present and to There are several modern methods and de- follow the employer’s established standard vices for use by emergency response per- operating procedures for spill control. All in- sonnel or others involved with spill control volved workers need to be trained in the es- efforts to safely apply spill control agents to tablished operating procedures; in the use control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work. devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat- out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11). ardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES spill, the reactant solid will automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of The following references may be consulted the material. Clean-up of hazardous sub- for further information on the subject of this stances is greatly improved when solidifying standard: agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu- vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz- applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- ardous Waste Sites. uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A— sorb them, which results in materials which January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and are less hazardous and easier to handle, Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous transport, and dispose of. The concept of Waste Site Activities. spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu- stances, will improve the safety and level of ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form, protection of employees working at spill OSHA 175. clean-up operations or emergency response 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference operations to spills of hazardous substances. Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa- The use of vapor suppression agents for tional Safety and Health Administration, volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 1986. mable liquids and those substances which 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among present an inhalation hazard, is important the National Institute for Occupational Safe- for protecting workers. The rapid and unity and Health, the Occupational Safety and form distribution of the agent over the sur- Health Administration, the United States face of the spilled material can provide quick Coast Guard, and the United States Environ- vapor knockdown. There are temporary and mental Protection Agency, Guidance for long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous bon adsorption agents which are effective for Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980. vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo- The proper use of hose lines or hand-held ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection portable pressurized applicators provides Agency, Revised periodically. good mobility and permits the worker to de- 7. The Decontamination of Response Per- liver the agent from a safe distance without sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures having to step into the untreated spilled ma- (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection terial. Some of these systems can be re- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial charged in the field to provide coverage of Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi- larger spill areas than the design limits of a sion, December 1984. single charged applicator unit. Some of the 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field more effective agents can solidify the liquid Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9; flammable hazardous substances and at the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of- same time elevate the flashpoint above 140° fice of Emergency and Remedial Response, F so the resulting substance may be handled Hazardous Response Support Division, April as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 1985.

171

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00171 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S. APPENDIX TO § 1926.65—TRAINING Environmental Protection Agency, Office of CURRICULUM GUIDELINES Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz- ardous Response Support Division, Environ- The following non-mandatory general cri- mental Response Team; November 1984. teria may be used for assistance in devel- 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance oping site-specific training curriculum used Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR National Institute for Occupational Safety 1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety 29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. are generic guidelines and they are not pre- Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental sented as a complete training curriculum for Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. any specific employer. Site-specific training programs must be developed on the basis of 11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- a needs assessment of the hazardous waste ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op- ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65. 006; September 1985. 12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous It is noted that the legal requirements are Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul- set forth in the regulatory text of §1926.65. The guidance set forth here presents a highly letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human effective program that in the areas covered Services, Public Health Service, Centers for would meet or exceed the regulatory require- Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- ments. In addition, other approaches could pational Safety and Health; December 1982. meet the regulatory requirements. 13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; Suggested General Criteria U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- Definitions: ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- Competent means possessing the skills, ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- knowledge, experience, and judgment to per- tional Safety and Health; October 1984. form assigned tasks or activities satisfac- 14. Fire Service Emergency Management torily as determined by the employer. Handbook, International Association of Fire Demonstration means the showing by actual Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, use of equipment or procedures. Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985. Hands-on training means training in a sim- 15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- ulated work environment that permits each student to have experience performing tasks, partment of Transportation, Washington, making decisions, or using equipment appro- DC, 1987. priate to the job assignment for which the 16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- training is being conducted. terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, Initial training means training required Federal Emergency Management Agency, prior to beginning work. Washington, DC, July 1986. Lecture means an interactive discourse 17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. with a class lead by an instructor. Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National Proficient means meeting a stated level of Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch achievement. Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. Site-specific means individual training di- 18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- rected to the operations of a specific job site. tional Fire Protection Association, Training hours means the number of hours Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. devoted to lecture, learning activities, small 19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec- group work sessions, demonstration, evaluation Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- tions, or hands-on experience. sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. Suggested Core Criteria: 20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- 1. Training facility. The training facility ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, should have available sufficient resources, DC 20037, 1986. equipment, and site locations to perform di- 21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning dactic and hands-on training when appro- Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection priate. Training facilities should have suffi- Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. cient organization, support staff, and serv- 22. Community Teamwork: Working Together ices to conduct training in each of the to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation courses offered. Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, 2. Training Director. Each training program Washington, DC, May 1983. should be under the direction of a training 23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and director who is responsible for the program. Industry, Federal Emergency Management The Training Director should have a min- Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August imum of two years of employee education ex- 1987. perience.

172

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00172 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem If a written test is used, there should be a competent on the basis of previous docu- minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is mented experience in their area of instruc- used in combination with a skills demonstration, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the- tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be trainer’’ program specific to the topics they used. If a skills demonstration is used, the will teach, and an evaluation of instruc- tasks chosen and the means to rate success- tional competence by the Training Director. ful completion should be fully documented Instructors should be required to maintain by the Training Director. professional competency by participating in The content of the written test or of the continuing education or professional devel- skill demonstration shall be relevant to the opment programs or by completing success- objectives of the course. The written test fully an annual refresher course and having and skill demonstration should be updated as an annual review by the Training Director. necessary to reflect changes in the cur- The annual review by the Training Direc- riculum and any update should be approved tor should include observation of an instruc- by the Training Director. tor’s delivery, a review of those observations The proficiency assessment methods, re- with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- gardless of the approach or combination of structor or class evaluations completed by approaches used, should be justified, docu- the students during the previous year. ment and approved by the Training Director. 4. Course materials. The Training Director The proficiency of those taking the addi- should approve all course materials to be tional courses for supervisors should be eval- used by the training provider. Course mate- uated and document by using proficiency as- rials should be reviewed and updated at least sessment methods acceptable to the Training annually. Materials and equipment should be Director. These proficiency assessment in good working order and maintained prop- methods must reflect the additional respon- erly. sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in All written and audio-visual materials in hazardous waste operations or emergency retraining curricula should be peer reviewed by sponse. technically competent outside reviewers or 8. Course certificate. Written documentation by a standing advisory committee. Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- should be provided to each student who sat- lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- isfactorily completes the training course. tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, The documentation should include: chemical/environmental engineering, em- a. Student’s name. ployee education, or emergency response. b. Course title. One or more of the peer reviewers should be c. Course date. a employee experienced in the work activi- d. Statement that the student has success- ties to which the training is directed. fully completed the course. 5. Students. The program for accepting stu- e. Name and address of the training pro- dents should include: vider. a. Assurance that the student is or will be f. An individual identification number for involved in work where chemical exposures the certificate. are likely and that the student possesses the g. List of the levels of personal protective skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course. ance. This documentation may include a certifi- 6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami- not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi- student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card. ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu- 7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course, be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par- and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law. be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual

173

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00173 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

written audit of the training program. Pro- b. Safety, gram modifications to address deficiencies, if c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), any, should be documented, approved, and d. Operational procedures, implemented by the training provider. The e. Employee protection practices/proce- audit and the program modification docu- dures. ments should be maintained at the training 10. Appropriateness of management con- facility. trols. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria 11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- Factors listed here are suggested criteria propriate resources assigned to assure appro- for determining the quality and appropriate- priate training. ness of employee health and safety training 12. In the case of multiple-site training for hazardous waste operations and emer- programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- gency response. agement. A. Training Plan. C. Training facilities and resources. Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili- ing program’s curriculum development, in- ties and resources for supporting the train- structor training, distribution of course ma- ing program should be considered, including, terials, and direct student training should be 1. Space and equipment to conduct the considered, including training. 1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/agendas; 2. Facilities for representative hands-on 2. The different training requirements of training. the various target populations, as specified 3. In the case of multiple-site programs, in the appropriate generic training cur- equipment and facilities at the satellite cen- riculum; ters. 3. The process for the development of cur- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the riculum, which includes appropriate tech- quality control and evaluations program to nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- account for instructor performance. gram pretesting. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the 4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion quality control and evaluation program to of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed- methods; back, updating, and corrective action. 5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis- progress, and performance during the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the ing. quality control and evaluation program. B. Program management, Training Director, 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the staff, and consultants. role of student evaluations to provide feed- Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- back for training program improvement. formance and delivering an effective training D. Quality control and evaluation. program should be considered, including Adequacy and appropriateness of quality 1. Demonstration of the training director’s control and evaluation plans for training leadership in assuring quality of health and programs should be considered, including: safety training. 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or 2. Demonstration of the competency of the competent outside reviewers to give overall staff to meet the demands of delivering high policy guidance; quality hazardous waste employee health 2. Clear and adequate definition of the and safety training. composition and active programmatic role of 3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers. lines of authority. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of 4. Clearly defined staff duties including the the advisory committee or outside reviewers’ relationship of the training staff to the over- meetings or written communication. all program. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the 5. Evidence that the training organiza- quality control and evaluations program to tional structure suits the needs of the train- account for instructor performance. ing program. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the 6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the quality control and evaluation program to training methods used by the instructors. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed- 7. Sufficiency of the time committed by back, updating, and corrective action. the training director and staff to the training program. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis- 8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to ciplines and expertise being used within the students. quality control and evaluation program. 9. Availability and commitment of the 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program of adequate human and role of student evaluations to provide feed- equipment resources in the areas of back for training program improvement. a. Health effects, E. Students

174

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00174 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro- 1. Off-site training. gram for accepting students should be con- Minimum training course content for haz- sidered, including ardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR 1. Assurance that the student already pos- 1926.65(e), should include the following topics sess the necessary skills for their job, includ- or procedures: ing necessary documentation. a. Regulatory knowledge. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program (1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core uses to ensure that recruits are capable of elements of an occupational safety and satisfactorily completing training. health program. 3. Review and compliance with any medical (2) The content of a medical surveillance clearance policy. program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). F. Institutional Environment and Administra- (3) The content of an effective site safety tive Support and health plan consistent with the require- The adequacy and appropriateness of the ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii). institutional environment and administra- (4) Emergency response plan and proce- tive support system for the training program dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 should be considered, including CFR 1926.65(l). 1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (5) Adequate illumination. ment to the employee training program. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip- 2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- ment. ministrative structure and administrative (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz- support. ard-communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 G. Summary of Evaluation Questions CFR 1910.147). Key questions for evaluating the quality (8) Review of other applicable standards in- and appropriateness of an overall training cluding but not limited to those in the con- program should include the following: struction standards (29 CFR Part 1926). 1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers ed? and employees under applicable OSHA and 2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- EPA laws. tives? b. Technical knowledge. 3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- (1) Type of potential exposures to chem- able? ical, biological, and radiological hazards; 4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, types of human responses to these hazards demonstration, and hands-on training? and recognition of those responses; prin- 5. Is the program providing quality em- ciples of toxicology and information about ployee health and safety training that fully acute and chronic hazards; health and safety meets the intent of regulatory requirements? considerations of new technology. 6. What are the program’s main strengths? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in- 7. What are the program’s main weak- cluding but not limited to vapor pressure, nesses? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys- 8. What is recommended to improve the ical and chemical properties. program? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi- 9. Are instructors instructing according to cals. their training outlines? (4) General safety hazards such as but not 10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip- propriate for the program content? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk- 11. Is the course material current and rel- ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz- evant to the target group? ards, and hazards associated with working in Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines hot and cold temperature extremes. The following training curriculum guide- (5) Review and knowledge of confined space lines are for those operations specifically entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146. identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring (6) Work practices to minimize employee training. Issues such as qualifications of in- risk from site hazards. structors, training certification, and similar (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip- criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- ment, and any new relevant safety tech- ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered nology or safety procedures. in the preceding section and are not re-ad- (8) Review and demonstration of com- dressed in each of the generic guidelines. petency with air sampling and monitoring Basic core requirements for training pro- equipment that may be used in a site moni- grams that are addressed include toring program. 1. General Hazardous Waste Operations (9) Container sampling procedures and 2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, safeguarding; general drum and container and disposal facilities. handling procedures including special re- 3. Emergency Response. quirement for laboratory waste packs, A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive Site-specific Training wastes.

175

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00175 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(10) The elements of a spill control pro- (d) Introduction of additional subject areas gram. as appropriate. (11) Proper use and limitations of material (e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE handling equipment. or decontamination equipment or proce- (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep- dures. Review of new developments in per- aration of containers for shipping and trans- sonal protective equipment. port. (f) Review of newly developed air and con- (13) Methods of communication including taminant monitoring equipment. those used while wearing respiratory protec- 3. On-site training. tion. a. The employer should provide employees c. Technical skills. engaged in hazardous waste site activities (1) Selection, use maintenance, and limita- with information and training prior to ini- tions of personal protective equipment in- tial assignment into their work area, as fol- cluding the components and procedures for lows: carrying out a respirator program to comply (1) The requirements of the hazard commu- with 29 CFR 1910.134. nication program including the location and (2) Instruction in decontamination pro- availability of the written program, required grams including personnel, equipment, and lists of hazardous chemicals, and material hardware; hands-on training including level safety data sheets. A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- (2) Activities and locations in their work contamination lines; field activities includ- area where hazardous substance may be ing the donning and doffing of protective present. equipment to a level commensurate with the (3) Methods and observations that may be employee’s anticipated job function and reused to detect the present or release of a haz- sponsibility and to the degree required by ardous chemical in the work area (such as potential hazards. monitoring conducted by the employer, con- (3) Sources for additional hazard informa- tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear- tion; exercises using relevant manuals and ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or hazard coding systems. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released, d. Additional suggested items. and applicable alarms from monitoring de- (1) A laminated, dated card or certificate vices that record chemical releases. with photo, denoting limitations and level of (4) The physical and health hazards of sub- protection for which the employee is trained stances known or potentially present in the should be issued to those students success- work area. fully completing a course. (5) The measures employees can take to (2) Attendance should be required at all help protect themselves from work-site haz- training modules, with successful comple- ards, including specific procedures the em- tion of exercises and a final written or oral ployer has implemented. examination with at least 50 questions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system (3) A minimum of one-third of the program and material safety data sheets and how em- should be devoted to hands-on exercises. ployees can obtain and use appropriate haz- (4) A curriculum should be established for ard information. the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 (7) The elements of the confined space pro- CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such gram including special PPE, permits, moni- courses directed toward those areas of pre- toring requirements, communication proce- vious training that need improvement or re- dures, emergency response, and applicable emphasis. lock-out procedures. (5) A curriculum should be established for b. The employer should provide hazardous the required 8-hour training for supervisors. waste employees information and training Demonstrated competency in the skills and and should provide a review and access to knowledge provided in a 40-hour course the site safety and plan as follows: should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- (1) Names of personnel and alternate re- ing. sponsible for site safety and health. 2. Refresher training. (2) Safety and health hazards present on The 8-hour annual refresher training re- the site. quired in 29 CFR 1926.65(e)(8) should be con- (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi- ducted by qualified training providers. Re- tations of personal protective equipment fresher training should include at a min- specific to the site. imum the following topics and procedures: (4) Work practices by which the employee (a) Review of and retraining on relevant can minimize risks from hazards. topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- (5) Safe use of engineering controls and propriate, using reports by the students on equipment available on site. their work experiences. (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab- (b) Update on developments with respect to lished to minimize employee contact with material covered in the 40-hour course. hazardous substances, including: (c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (A) Employee decontamination, sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (B) Clothing decontamination, and

176

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00176 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(C) Equipment decontamination. (a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of (7) Elements of the site emergency re- 29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- sponse plan, including: ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. (A) Pre-emergency planning. (b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- and communication. diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. ards. (E) Site security and control. (c) General safety hazards including those associated with electrical hazards, powered (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- (G) Decontamination procedures not cov- dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking- ered by the site safety and health plan. working surface hazards. (H) Emergency medical treatment and first (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. aid. (e) Work practices to minimize employee (I) Emergency equipment and procedures risk from workplace hazards. for handling emergency incidents. (f) Emergency response plan and proce- c. The employer should provide hazardous dures including first aid meeting the require- waste employees information and training ments of paragraph (p)(8). on personal protective equipment used at the (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex- site, such as the following: posure to hazardous waste and various type (1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- of waste streams, including the materials ticipated site hazards. handling program and spill containment pro- (2) PPE limitations of materials and con- gram. struction; limitations during temperature (h) A review of hazard communication pro- extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR medical considerations; use and limitations 1910.1200. of respirator equipment as well as docu- (i) A review of medical surveillance pro- mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of (3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz- during, and after use. ardous substance including known syner- (4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. gistic interactions. (5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- (j) A review of decontamination programs cedures. and procedures meeting the requirements of (6) PPE maintenance and storage. 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4). (7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- (k) A review of an employer’s requirements tions. to implement a training program and its ele- d. The employer should instruct the em- ments. ployee about the site medical surveillance (l) A review of the criteria and programs program relative to the particular site, infor proper selection and use of personal pro- cluding tective equipment, including respirators. (1) Specific medical surveillance programs (m) A review of the applicable appendices that have been adapted for the site. to 29 CFR 1926.65. (2) Specific signs and symptoms related to (n) Principles of toxicology and biological exposure to hazardous materials on the site. monitoring as they pertain to occupational (3) The frequency and extent of periodic health. medical examinations that will be used on (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ- the site. ees and employers under applicable OSHA and EPA laws. (4) Maintenance and availability of (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations records. of competency with equipment to illustrate (5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- the basic equipment principles that may be dures to be followed when signs and symp- used during the performance of work duties, toms of exposures are recognized. including the donning and doffing of PPE. e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con- and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests. with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training. mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi- B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici- Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities. 1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial

177

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00177 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

assignment into a work area. The training Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- and information should cover the following lowing criteria in developing their own topics: training programs. A unified approach to (a) The Emergency response plan and pro- training at the community level between cedures including first aid. emergency response organizations covered (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- waste handling procedures including the ma- rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an terials handling program and elements of the effective community response to the release spill containment program, location of spill or potential release of hazardous substances response kits or equipment, and the names of in the community. those trained to respond to releases. a. General considerations. (c) The hazardous communication program Emergency response organizations are re- meeting the requirements of 29 CFR quired to consider the topics listed in 1910.1200. §1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organiza- (d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- tions may use some or all of the following veillance program including the recognition topics to supplement those mandatory topics of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- when developing their response training pro- evant hazardous substance including known grams. Many of the topics would require an synergistic interactions. interaction between the response provider (e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected. (f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including: program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances program. present, (g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec- protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology, proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics. specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological (h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment. dressing potential safety and health hazards. (3) Safe work practices and general site This may include, as appropriate, biological safety. and radiological exposures, fire and explo- (4) Engineering controls and hazardous sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical waste operations. hazards such as electrical hazards, powered (5) Site safety plans and standard oper- equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- ating procedures. ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- (6) Decontamination procedures and prac- working surface hazards. tices. (i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and ment on site. self-rescue. (j) Names of personnel and alternates re- (8) Safe use of field equipment. sponsible for safety and health. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor- C. Emergency response training. tation of hazardous substances. Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal 1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector protective equipment. emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- (11) Safe sampling techniques. lines provided in this portion of the appendix (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ- are directed toward that employee popu- ees under OSHA and other related laws con- lation. However, they also impact indirectly cerning right-to-know, safety and health, through State OSHA or USEPA regulations compensations and liability. some public sector emergency responders. (13) Medical monitoring requirements. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (14) Community relations. portion of the appendix may be applied to b. Suggested criteria for specific courses. both employee populations. (1) First responder awareness level. States with OSHA state plans must cover (A) Review of and demonstration of com- their employees with regulations at least as petency in performing the applicable skills effective as the Federal OSHA standards. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). Public employees in states without approved (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- state OSHA programs covering hazardous partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- waste operations and emergency response sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60. 311, a regulation virtually identical to (C) Review of the principles and practices §1926.65. for analyzing an incident to determine both Since this is a non-mandatory appendix the hazardous substances present and the and therefore not an enforceable standard, basic hazard and response information for OSHA recommends that those employers, each hazardous substance present. employees or volunteers in public sector (D) Review of procedures for implementing emergency response organizations outside actions consistent with the local emergency

178

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00178 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

response plan, the organization’s standard the U.S. Department of Transportation’s operating procedures, and the current edi- Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no- facturer material safety data sheets, tification procedures and follow-up commu- CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufac- nications. turer contacts, computer data bases and re- (E) Review of the expected hazards includ- sponse models, and other relevant sources of ing fire and explosions hazards, confined information addressing hazardous substance space hazards, electrical hazards, powered releases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, (C) Review of the principles and practices and walking-working surface hazards. for analyzing an incident to determine the (F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- hazardous substances present, their physical petencies for the First Responder at the and chemical properties, the likely behavior Awareness Level covered in the National of the hazardous substance and its container, Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. the types of hazardous substance transpor- 472, Professional Competence of Responders to tation containers and vehicles involved in Hazardous Materials Incidents. the release, the appropriate strategy for ap- (2) First responder operations level. proaching release sites and containing the (A) Review of and demonstration of com- release. petency in performing the applicable skills (D) Review of procedures for implementing of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). continuing response actions consistent with (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- the local emergency response plan, the orga- partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- nization’s standard operating procedures, sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer mate- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- rial safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ cluding extended emergency notification CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts procedures and follow-up communications. and other relevant sources of information (E) Review of the principles and practice addressing hazardous substance releases. Fa- for proper selection and use of personal pro- miliarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR tective equipment. 1926.60. (F) Review of the principles and practices (C) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decon- for analyzing an incident to determine the tamination and medical surveillance sta- hazardous substances present, the likely be- tions and procedures. havior of the hazardous substance and its (G) Review of the expected hazards includ- container, the types of hazardous substance ing fire and explosions hazards, confined transportation containers and vehicles, the space hazards, electrical hazards, powered types and selection of the appropriate defen- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, sive strategy for containing the release. and walking-working surface hazards. (D) Review of procedures for implementing (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- continuing response actions consistent with petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech- the local emergency response plan, the orga- nician covered in the National Fire Protec- nization’s standard operating procedures, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents. procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist. (E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com- for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information (G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making including fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material and walking-working surface hazards. safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer petencies for the First Responder at the Op- data bases and response models, and other erations Level covered in the National Fire relevant sources of information addressing Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, hazardous substance releases. Familiariza- Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- tion with 29 CFR 1926.60. ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices (3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the (A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be- of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its (B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle. electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous

179

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00179 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

substance transportation containers, vessels (B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- and vehicles involved in the release; select- propriate response plan within the capabili- ing and using the various types of equipment ties of available personnel and equipment. available for plugging or patching transpor- (C) Ability to implement a response to fa- tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga- vorably change the outcome of the incident nizing and directing the use of multiple in a manner consistent with the local emer- teams of hazardous material technicians and gency response plan and the organization’s selecting the appropriate strategy for ap- standard operating procedures. proaching release sites and containing or (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the stopping the release. emergency response to ensure that the re- (E) Review of procedures for implementing sponse objectives are being met safely, effec- continuing response actions consistent with tively, and efficiently. the local emergency response plan, the orga- (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to nization’s standard operating procedures, in- the conditions of the response and to notify higher levels of response when required by cluding knowledge of the available public the changes to the response plan. and private response resources, establishment of an incident command post, direction [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59 of hazardous material technician teams, and FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, extended emergency notification procedures 1996] and follow-up communications. (F) Review of the principles and practice § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con- for proper selection and use of personal pro- struction of spray booths. tective equipment. (a) Definitions applicable to this sec- (G) Review of the principles and practices tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated of establishing exposure zones and proper de- powders shall mean any powdered ma- contamination, monitoring and medical sur- terial used as a coating material which veillance stations and procedures. (H) Review of the expected hazards includ- shall be fluidized within a container by ing fire and explosions hazards, confined passing air uniformly from below. It is space hazards, electrical hazards, powered common practice to fluidize such mate- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, rials to form a fluidized powder bed and and walking-working surface hazards. then dip the part to be coated into the (I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- bed in a manner similar to that used in petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- liquid dipping. Such beds are also used ployee covered in the National Fire Protec- as sources for powder spray operations. tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- (2) Spraying area. Any area in which sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous dangerous quantities of flammable va- Materials Incidents. pors or mists, or combustible residues, (5) Incident commander. dusts, or deposits are present due to The incident commander is the individual who, at any one time, is responsible for and the operation of spraying processes. in control of the response effort. This indi- (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated vidual is the person responsible for the direc- structure provided to enclose or accom- tion and coordination of the response effort. modate a spraying operation to confine An incident commander’s position should be and limit the escape of spray, vapor, occupied by the most senior, appropriately and residue, and to safely conduct or trained individual present at the response direct them to an exhaust system. site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray the level of response provided, the position booth equipped with a water washing may be occupied by many individuals during a particular response as the need for greater system designed to minimize dusts or authority, responsibility, or training in- residues entering exhaust ducts and to creases. It is possible for the first responder permit the recovery of overspray fin- at the awareness level to assume the duties ishing material. of incident commander until a more senior (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not and appropriately trained individual arrives equipped with a water washing system at the response site. as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this Therefore, any emergency responder ex- section. A dry spray booth may be pected to perform as an incident commander equipped with should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the position at the level of response they will (i) Distribution or baffle plates to be providing including the following: promote an even flow of air through (A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- the booth or cause the deposit of stance incident to determine the magnitude overspray before it enters the exhaust of the response problem. duct; or

180

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00180 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

(ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize to promote an even flow of air through dusts; or the booth or cause the deposit of (iii) Overspray dry filters to mini- overspray before it enters the exhaust mize dusts or residues entering exhaust duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- ducts; or rial and readily removable or acces- (iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de- sible on both sides for cleaning. Such signed to minimize dusts or residues plates shall not be located in exhaust entering exhaust ducts; or ducts. (v) Where dry powders are being (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- sprayed, with powder collection sys- haust air filters). In conventional dry tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap- type spray booths, overspray dry filters ture oversprayed material. or filter rolls, if installed, shall con- (6) Fluidized bed. A container holding form to the following: powder coating material which is aer- (i) The spraying operations except ated from below so as to form an air- electrostatic spraying operations shall supported expanded cloud of such ma- be so designed, installed and main- terial through which the preheated obtained that the average air velocity ject to be coated is immersed and over the open face of the booth (or transported. booth cross section during spraying op- (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- erations) shall be not less than 100 lin- tainer holding powder coating material ear feet per minute. Electrostatic which is aerated from below so as to spraying operations may be conducted form an air-supported expanded cloud with an air velocity over the open face of such material which is electrically of the booth of not less than 60 linear charged with a charge opposite to the feet per minute, or more, depending on charge of the object to be coated; such the volume of the finishing material object is transported, through the con- being applied and its flammability and tainer immediately above the charged explosion characteristics. Visible and aerated materials in order to be gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac- coated. tivated devices shall be installed to in- (8) Approved. Shall mean approved dicate or insure that the required air and listed by a nationally recognized velocity is maintained. Filter rolls testing laboratory. shall be inspected to insure proper re- (9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- placement of filter media. graph (a)(8) of this section. (b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter Spray booths shall be substantially rolls shall be immediately removed to constructed of steel, securely and rig- a safe, well-detached location or placed idly supported, or of concrete or main a water-filled metal container and sonry except that aluminum or other disposed of at the close of the day’s op- substantial noncombustible material eration unless maintained completely may be used for intermittent or low in water. volume spraying. Spray booths shall be (iii) The location of filters in a spray designed to sweep air currents toward booth shall be so as to not reduce the the exhaust outlet. effective booth enclosure of the arti- (2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of cles being sprayed. spray booths shall be smooth and con- (iv) Space within the spray booth on tinuous without edges and otherwise the downstream and upstream sides of designed to prevent pocketing of resi- filters shall be protected with approved dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- automatic sprinklers. ing without injury. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be (3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray used when applying a spray material booth and operator’s working area, if known to be highly susceptible to spon- combustible, shall be covered with non- taneous heating and ignition. combustible material of such character (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall as to facilitate the safe cleaning and be noncombustible or of a type having removal of residues. a combustibility not in excess of class (4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab- tribution or baffle plates, if installed oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls

181

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00181 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

shall not be alternately used for dif- (iv) Powder coating equipment shall ferent types of coating materials, conform to the requirements of para- where the combination of materials graph (c)(1) of this section. may be conducive to spontaneous igni- (2) Minimum separation. There shall be tion. no open flame or spark producing (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth equipment in any spraying area nor having a frontal area larger than 9 within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless square feet shall have a metal deflector separated by a partition. or curtain not less than 2 1⁄2 inches (5.35 (3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- cm) deep installed at the upper outer ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall edge of the booth over the opening. not be located in a spraying area where (7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are deposits of combustible residues may arranged to carry work into or out of readily accumulate. spray booths, the openings therefor (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir- shall be as small as practical. ing and equipment shall conform to the (8) Separation of operations. Each provisions of this paragraph and shall spray booth shall be separated from otherwise be in accordance with sub- other operations by not less than 3 feet part S of this part. (0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless by such partition or wall as to reduce specifically approved for locations containing both deposits of readily ignit- the danger from juxtaposition of haz- able residue and explosive vapors, there ardous operations. See also paragraph shall be no electrical equipment in any (c)(1) of this section. spraying area, whereon deposits of (9) Spray booths shall be so Cleaning. combustible residues may readily accu- installed that all portions are readily mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit accessible for cleaning. A clear space of or in boxes or fittings containing no not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all taps, splices, or terminal connections. sides shall be kept free from storage or (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical combustible construction. wiring and equipment not subject to (10) Illumination. When spraying areas deposits of combustible residues but lo- are illuminated through glass panels or cated in a spraying area as herein de- other transparent materials, only fixed fined shall be of explosion-proof type lighting units shall be used as a source approved for Class I, group D locations of illumination. Panels shall effec- and shall otherwise conform to the pro- tively isolate the spraying area from visions of subpart S of this part, for the area in which the lighting unit is Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- located, and shall be of a noncombus- tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and tible material of such a nature or so other equipment outside of but within protected that breakage will be un- 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area, likely. Panels shall be so arranged that and not separated therefrom by parti- normal accumulations of residue on tions, shall not produce sparks under the exposed surface of the panel will normal operating conditions and shall not be raised to a dangerous tempera- otherwise conform to the provisions of ture by radiation or conduction from subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi- the source of illumination. sion 2 Hazardous Locations. (c) Electrical and other sources of igni- (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of, tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray- equipment, open flames and other ing area, and not separated therefrom sources of ignition shall conform to the by a partition, shall be totally enclosed requirements of this paragraph, except to prevent the falling of hot particles as follows: and shall be protected from mechanical (i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- injury by suitable guards or by loca- form to the requirements of paragraphs tion. (e) and (f) of this section; (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric (ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- lamps shall not be used in any spraying ratus shall conform to the require- area during spraying operations. Port- ments of paragraph (g) of this section; able electric lamps, if used during (iii) [Reserved] cleaning or repairing operations, shall

182

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00182 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

be of the type approved for hazardous the self-lubricating type, or lubricated Class I locations. from the outside duct. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of (5) Electric motors. Electric motors spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping driving exhaust fans shall not be placed systems conveying flammable or com- inside booths or ducts. See also para- bustible liquids or aerated solids shall graph (c) of this section. be properly electrically grounded in an (6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the effective and permanent manner. duct or booth unless the belt and pul- (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven- ley within the duct or booth are thor- tilating and exhaust systems shall be oughly enclosed. in accordance with the Standard for (7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor be constructed of steel and shall be Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- substantially supported. Exhaust ducts plicable and shall also conform to the without dampers are preferred; how- provisions of this section. ever, if dampers are installed, they (2) General. All spraying areas shall shall be maintained so that they will be provided with mechanical ventila- be in a full open position at all times tion adequate to remove flammable va- the ventilating system is in operation. pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected tion and to confine and control com- against mechanical damage and have a bustible residues so that life is not en- clearance from unprotected combus- dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall tible construction or other combustible be kept in operation at all times while material of not less than 18 inches spraying operations are being con- (45.72 cm). ducted and for a sufficient time there- (ii) If combustible construction is after to allow vapors from drying coat- provided with the following protection ed articles and drying finishing mate- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches rial residue to be exhausted. (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced (3) Independent exhaust. Each spray to the distances indicated: booth shall have an independent exhaust duct system discharging to the exterior of the building, except that (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48 bestos mill board. cm). multiple cabinet spray booths in which (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86 identical spray finishing material is bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm). used with a combined frontal area of (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers. (c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62 not more than 18 square feet may have rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm). a common exhaust. If more than one mesh or the equivalent. fan serves one booth, all fans shall be (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap- so interconnected that one fan cannot proved automatic sprinkler system, properly maintained, the clearance re- operate without all fans being oper- quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this sec- ated. tion may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24 (4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- cm). tating element shall be nonferrous or (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the nonsparking or the casing shall consist spray booth exhaust duct terminal is of or be lined with such material. from a water-wash spray booth, the There shall be ample clearance be- terminal discharge point shall be not tween the fan-rotating element and the less than 6 feet from any combustible fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, exterior wall or roof nor discharge in necessary allowance being made for or- the direction of any combustible con- dinary expansion and loading to pre- struction or unprotected opening in vent contact between moving parts and any noncombustible exterior wall with- the duct or fan housing. Fan blades in 25 feet (7.6 m). shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from ciently heavy to maintain perfect spray operations shall not be directed alignment even when the blades of the so that it will contaminate makeup air fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- being introduced into the spraying area erably to have bearings outside the or other ventilating intakes, nor di- duct and booth. All bearings shall be of rected so as to create a nuisance. Air

183

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00183 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

exhausted from spray operations shall and shall be effectively guarded not be recirculated. against accidental contact or ground- (10) Access doors. When necessary to ing. An automatic means shall be pro- facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall vided for grounding the electrode sys- be provided with an ample number of tem when it is electrically deenergized access doors. for any reason. All insulators shall be (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings kept clean and dry. to rooms containing spray finishing op- (6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall erations shall be adequate for the effi- be maintained between goods being cient operation of exhaust fans and painted and electrodes or electrostatic shall be so located as to minimize the atomizing heads or conductors of at creation of dead air pockets. least twice the sparking distance. A (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed suitable sign indicating this safe dis- articles shall be dried only in spaces tance shall be conspicuously posted provided with adequate ventilation to near the assembly. prevent the formation of explosive va- (7) Conveyors required. Goods being pors. In the event adequate and reliable painted using this process are to be ventilation is not provided such drying supported on conveyors. The conveyors spaces shall be considered a spraying shall be so arranged as to maintain area. safe distances between the goods and (e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) the electrodes or electrostatic atom- Conformance. Where installation and izing heads at all times. Any irregu- use of electrostatic spraying equip- larly shaped or other goods subject to ment is used, such installation and use possible swinging or movement shall be shall conform to all other paragraphs rigidly supported to prevent such of this section, and shall also conform swinging or movement which would re- to the requirements of this paragraph. duce the clearance to less than that (2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec- ratus and devices used in connection tion. with coating operations shall be of ap- (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac- proved types. ceptable where goods being coated are (3) Location. Transformers, power manipulated by hand. When finishing packs, control apparatus, and all other materials are applied by electrostatic electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (f) of this section grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements. atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap- shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto- area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with- requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power section. supply to the high voltage transformer (4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions: quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or tions and shall be effectively insulated failure of ventilating equipment from from the ground. Electrodes and elec- any cause. trostatic atomizing heads which are (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car- permanently attached to their bases, rying goods through the high voltage supports, or reciprocators, shall be field. deemed to comply with this section. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an Insulators shall be nonporous and non- imminent ground at any point on the combustible. high voltage system. (5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage (iv) Reduction of clearance below leads to electrodes shall be properly in- that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sulated and protected from mechanical section. injury or exposure to destructive (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc- chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing ing, railings, or guards shall be so heads shall be effectively and perma- placed about the equipment that they, nently supported on suitable insulators either by their location or character or

184

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00184 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

both, assure that a safe isolation of the nection and to be so constructed that process is maintained from plant stor- the operator in normal operating posi- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc- tion is in intimate electrical contact ing, and guards shall be of conducting with the grounded handle. material, adequately grounded. (6) Grounding-general. All electrically (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic conductive objects in the spraying area atomization is used the spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This re- shall be so ventilated as to insure safe quirement shall apply to paint con- conditions from a fire and health tainers, wash cans, and any other ob- standpoint. jects or devices in the area. The equip- (12) Fire protection. All areas used for ment shall carry a prominent perma- spraying, including the interior of the nently installed warning regarding the booth, shall be protected by automatic necessity for this grounding feature. sprinklers where this protection is (7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects available. Where this protection is not being painted or coated shall be main- available, other approved automatic tained in metallic contact with the extinguishing equipment shall be pro- conveyor or other grounded support. vided. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in- (f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- sure this contact and areas of contact ment—(1) Application. This paragraph shall be sharp points or knife edges shall apply to any equipment using where possible. Points of support of the electrostatically charged elements for object shall be concealed from random the atomization and/or, precipitation spray where feasible and where the ob- of materials for coatings on articles, or jects being sprayed are supported from for other similar purposes in which the a conveyor, the point of attachment to atomizing device is hand held and ma- the conveyor shall be so located as to nipulated during the spraying oper- not collect spray material during nor- ation. mal operation. (2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip- spraying equipment shall conform with ment shall be so interlocked with the the other provisions of this section. ventilation of the spraying area that (3) Equipment approval and specifica- the equipment cannot be operated un- tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- less the ventilation fans are in oper- ratus and devices used in connection ation. with coating operations shall be of ap- (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper- proved types. The high voltage circuits ation shall take place within a spray shall be designed so as to not produce area which is adequately ventilated to a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite remove solvent vapors released from any vapor-air mixtures nor result in the operation. appreciable shock hazard upon coming (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa- in contact with a grounded object ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing, under all normal operating conditions. or fusion apparatus in connection with The electrostatically charged exposed spray application of flammable and elements of the handgun shall be capa- combustible finishes shall conform to ble of being energized only by a switch the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, which also controls the coating mate- NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and rial supply. shall also conform with the following (4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- requirements of this paragraph. formers, powerpacks, control appa- (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray ratus, and all other electrical portions booths, rooms, or other enclosures used of the equipment, with the exception of for spraying operations shall not alter- the handgun itself and its connections nately be used for the purpose of dry- to the power supply shall be located ing by any arrangement which will outside of the spraying area or shall cause a material increase in the sur- otherwise conform to the requirements face temperature of the spray booth, of paragraph (c) of this section. room, or enclosure. (5) Spray gun ground. The handle of (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except the spraying gun shall be electrically as specifically provided in paragraph connected to ground by a metallic con- (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or

185

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00185 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.95 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

fusion units utilizing a heating system apparatus shall be properly electrically having open flames or which may bonded and grounded. produce sparks shall not be installed in (v) The drying apparatus shall con- a spraying area, but may be installed tain a prominently located, perma- adjacent thereto when equipped with nently attached warning sign indian interlocked ventilating system ar- cating that ventilation should be main- ranged to: tained during the drying period and (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying that spraying should not be conducted space before the heating system can be in the vicinity that spray will deposit started; on apparatus. (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at any source of ignition; [58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] (iii) Automatically shut down the heating system in the event of failure Subpart E—Personal Protective of the ventilating system. and Life Saving Equipment (4) Alternate use permitted. Auto- mobile refinishing spray booths or enclosures, otherwise installed and main- AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours tained in full conformity with this sec- and Safety Standards Act (Construction tion, may alternately be used for dry- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of ing with portable electrical infrared 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La- drying apparatus when conforming bor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR with the following: 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or (i) Interior (especially floors) of 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR spray enclosures shall be kept free of part 11. overspray deposits. (ii) During spray operations, the dry- § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec- ing apparatus and electrical connec- tive equipment. tions and wiring thereto shall not be (a) Application. Protective equipment, located within spray enclosure nor in including personal protective equip- any other location where spray resi- ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem- dues may be deposited thereon. ities, protective clothing, respiratory (iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- devices, and protective shields and bar- ing apparatus, and the ventilating system of the spray enclosure shall be riers, shall be provided, used, and equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- maintained in a sanitary and reliable ranged that: condition wherever it is necessary by (a) The spraying apparatus cannot be reason of hazards of processes or envi- operated while the drying apparatus is ronment, chemical hazards, radio- inside the spray enclosure. logical hazards, or mechanical irri- (b) The spray enclosure will be tants encountered in a manner capable purged of spray vapors for a period of of causing injury or impairment in the not less than 3 minutes before the dry- function of any part of the body ing apparatus can be energized. through absorption, inhalation or (c) The ventilating system will main- physical contact. tain a safe atmosphere within the en- (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where closure during the drying process and employees provide their own protective the drying apparatus will automati- equipment, the employer shall be re- cally shut off in the event of failure of sponsible to assure its adequacy, in- the ventilating system. cluding proper maintenance, and sani- (iv) All electrical wiring and equip- tation of such equipment. ment of the drying apparatus shall con- (c) Design. All personal protective form with the applicable sections of equipment shall be of safe design and subpart S of this part. Only equipment construction for the work to be per- of a type approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations shall be located formed. within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] level. All metallic parts of the drying

186

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00186 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.102

§ 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable Safety-toe footwear for employees protective device. shall meet the requirements and speci- § 1926.102 Eye and face protection. fications in American National Stand- ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear, (a) General. (1) Employees shall be Z41.1–1967. provided with eye and face protection equipment when machines or oper- [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] ations present potential eye or face in- §§ 1926.97—1926.98 [Reserved] jury from physical, chemical, or radiation agents. § 1926.100 Head protection. (2) Eye and face protection equip- (a) Employees working in areas ment required by this Part shall meet where there is a possible danger of head the requirements specified in American injury from impact, or from falling or National Standards Institute, Z87.1– flying objects, or from electrical shock 1968, Practice for Occupational and and burns, shall be protected by protec- Educational Eye and Face Protection. tive helmets. (3) Employees whose vision requires (b) Helmets for the protection of em- the use of corrective lenses in spec- ployees against impact and penetration tacles, when required by this regula- of falling and flying objects shall meet tion to wear eye protection, shall be the specifications contained in Amer- protected by goggles or spectacles of ican National Standards Institute, one of the following types: Z89.1–1969, Safety Requirements for In- (i) Spectacles whose protective lenses dustrial Head Protection. provide optical correction; (c) Helmets for the head protection of employees exposed to high voltage (ii) Goggles that can be worn over electrical shock and burns shall meet corrective spectacles without dis- the specifications contained in Amer- turbing the adjustment of the spec- ican National Standards Institute, tacles; Z89.2–1971. (iii) Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind the protec- § 1926.101 Hearing protection. tive lenses. (a) Wherever it is not feasible to re- (4) Face and eye protection equip- duce the noise levels or duration of ex- ment shall be kept clean and in good posures to those specified in Table D–2, repair. The use of this type equipment Permissible Noise Exposures, in with structural or optical defects shall § 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be be prohibited. provided and used. (5) Table E–1 shall be used as a guide (b) Ear protective devices inserted in in the selection of face and eye protec- the ear shall be fitted or determined in- tion for the hazards and operations dividually by competent persons. noted.

187

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00187 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.102 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

*Non-side shield spectacles are avail- **See Table E–2, in paragraph (b) of able for limited hazard use requiring this section, Filter Lens Shade Num- only frontal protection. bers for Protection Against Radiant Energy.

APPLICATIONS

Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre- Operation Hazards ferred protection

AcetyleneÐBurning, Sparks, harmful rays, molten 7, 8, 9. AcetyleneÐCutting, metal, flying particles. AcetyleneÐWelding.

Chemical Handling ...... Splash, acid burns, fumes ...... 2, 10 (For severe exposure add 10 over 2).

Chipping ...... Flying particles ...... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.

Electric (arc) welding ...... Sparks, intense rays, molten 9, 11, (11 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses, advis- metal. able).

Furnace operations ...... Glare, heat, molten metal ...... 7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10).

GrindingÐLight ...... Flying particles ...... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

GrindingÐHeavy ...... Flying particles ...... 1 , 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add 10).

Laboratory ...... Chemical splash, glass break- 2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6). age.

Machining ...... Flying particles ...... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

Molten metals ...... Heat, glare, sparks, splash ..... 7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses).

Spot welding ...... Flying particles, sparks ...... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

(6) Protectors shall meet the fol- (vi) They shall be easily cleanable. lowing minimum requirements: (7) Every protector shall be distinctly (i) They shall provide adequate pro- marked to facilitate identification tection against the particular hazards only of the manufacturer. for which they are designed. (8) When limitations or precautions (ii) They shall be reasonably com- are indicated by the manufacturer, fortable when worn under the des- they shall be transmitted to the user ignated conditions. and care taken to see that such limita- (iii) They shall fit snugly and shall tions and precautions are strictly ob- not unduly interfere with the move- served. ments of the wearer. (b) Protection against radiant energy— (iv) They shall be durable. (1) Selection of shade numbers for welding (v) They shall be capable of being dis- filter. Table E–2 shall be used as a guide infected. for the selection of the proper shade

188

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00188 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.105

numbers of filter lenses or plates used (c) The visible light transmission. in welding. Shades more dense than [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, those listed may be used to suit the in- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993] dividual’s needs. § 1926.103 Respiratory protection. TABLE E±2ÐFILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of Shade Welding operation number this chapter. [63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] Shielded metal-arc welding 1¤16-, 3¤32-, 1¤8-, 5¤32- inch diameter electrodes ...... 10 § 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1¤16-, 3¤32- , 1¤8-, 5¤32-inch diameter electrodes ...... 11 lanyards. Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1¤16-, 3¤32-, (a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- 1¤8-, 5¤32-inch diameter electrodes ...... 12 yards shall be used only for employee Shielded metal-arc welding 3¤16-, 7¤32-, 1¤4-inch diameter electrodes ...... 12 safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, 5¤16-, 3¤8-inch diameter electrodes ...... 14 or lanyard actually subjected to in- Atomic hydrogen welding ...... 10±14 service loading, as distinguished from Carbon-arc welding ...... 14 static load testing, shall be imme- Soldering ...... 2 diately removed from service and shall Torch brazing ...... 3 or 4 not be used again for employee safe- Light cutting, up to 1 inch ...... 3 or 4 Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ...... 4 or 5 guarding. Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ...... 5 or 6 (b) Lifelines shall be secured above Gas welding (light), up to 1¤8-inch ...... 4 or 5 the point of operation to an anchorage Gas welding (medium), 1¤8-inch to 1¤2-inch ...... 5 or 6 or structural member capable of sup- Gas welding (heavy), over 1¤2-inch ...... 6 or 8 porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 pounds. (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees (c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- whose occupation or assignment re- erations, or in areas where the lifeline quires exposure to laser beams shall be may be subjected to cutting or abra- furnished suitable laser safety goggles sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch which will protect for the specific wire core manila rope. For all other wavelength of the laser and be of opti- lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en- inch manila or equivalent, with a min- ergy involved. Table E–3 lists the maximum breaking strength of 5,400 imum power or energy density for pounds, shall be used. which adequate protection is afforded (d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a by glasses of optical densities from 5 minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva- through 8. lent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. TABLE E±3ÐSELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS The rope shall have a nominal breaking strength of 5,400 pounds. Attenuation Intensity, CW max- (e) All safety belt and lanyard hard- imum power den- 2 Optical density ware shall be drop forged or pressed sity (watts/cm ) (O.D.) Attenuation factor steel, cadmium plated in accordance 10¥2 5 10 5 with type 1, Class B plating specified in 10¥1 6 10 6 Federal Specification QQ–P–416. Sur- 1.0 7 10 7 face shall be smooth and free of sharp 8 10.0 8 10 edges. (f) All safety belt and lanyard hard- Output levels falling between lines in ware, except rivets, shall be capable of this table shall require the higher opti- withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 cal density. pounds without cracking, breaking, or (ii) All protective goggles shall bear taking a permanent deformation. a label identifying the following data: (a) The laser wavelengths for which § 1926.105 Safety nets. use is intended; (a) Safety nets shall be provided (b) The optical density of those wave- when workplaces are more than 25 feet lengths; above the ground or water surface, or

189

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00189 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.106 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

other surfaces where the use of ladders, § 1926.107 Definitions applicable to scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary this subpart. floors, safety lines, or safety belts is (a) Contaminant means any material impractical. which by reason of its action upon, (b) Where safety net protection is re- within, or to a person is likely to cause quired by this part, operations shall physical harm. not be undertaken until the net is in (b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable place and has been tested. for supporting one person. One end is (c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond fastened to a safety belt or harness and the edge of the work surface where em- the other end is secured to a substan- ployees are exposed and shall be in- tial object or a safety line. stalled as close under the work surface as practical but in no case more than (c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for 25 feet below such work surface. Nets supporting one person, to which a lan- shall be hung with sufficient clearance yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- to prevent user’s contact with the sur- tached. faces or structures below. Such clear- (d) O.D. means optical density and ances shall be determined by impact refers to the light refractive character- load testing. istics of a lens. (2) It is intended that only one level (e) Radiant energy means energy that of nets be required for bridge construc- travels outward in all directions from tion. its sources. (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex- (f) Safety belt means a device, usually ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets worn around the waist which, by rea- shall meet accepted performance son of its attachment to a lanyard and standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min- lifeline or a structure, will prevent a imum impact resistance as determined worker from falling. and certified by the manufacturers, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979] and shall bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes shall provide a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. Subpart F—Fire Protection and (e) Forged steel safety hooks or Prevention shackles shall be used to fasten the net to its supports. AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); (f) Connections between net panels secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and shall develop the full strength of the Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); net. Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or § 1926.106 Working over or near water. 6–96 (62 FR 111) as applicable; and 29 CFR (a) Employees working over or near part 1911. water, where the danger of drowning § 1926.150 Fire protection. exists, shall be provided with U.S. Coast Guard-approved life jacket or (a) General requirements. (1) The em- buoyant work vests. ployer shall be responsible for the de- (b) Prior to and after each use, the velopment of a fire protection program buoyant work vests or life preservers to be followed throughout all phases of shall be inspected for defects which the construction and demolition work, would alter their strength or buoy- and he shall provide for the firefighting ancy. Defective units shall not be used. equipment as specified in this subpart. (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of As fire hazards occur, there shall be no line shall be provided and readily avail- delay in providing the necessary equip- able for emergency rescue operations. ment. Distance between ring buoys shall not (2) Access to all available firefighting exceed 200 feet. equipment shall be maintained at all (d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall times. be immediately available at locations (3) All firefighting equipment, pro- where employees are working over or vided by the employer, shall be con- adjacent to water. spicuously located.

190

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00190 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.150

(4) All firefighting equipment shall minute with a minimum hose stream be periodically inspected and main- range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar- tained in operating condition. Defec- den-type hose lines shall be mounted tive equipment shall be immediately on conventional racks or reels. The replaced. number and location of hose racks or (5) As warranted by the project, the reels shall be such that at least one employer shall provide a trained and hose stream can be applied to all points equipped firefighting organization in the area. (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro- (iv) One or more fire extinguishers, tection to life. rated not less than 2A, shall be pro- (b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or vided on each floor. In multistory permanent water supply, of sufficient buildings, at least one fire extinguisher volume, duration, and pressure, re- shall be located adjacent to stairway. quired to properly operate the fire- (v) Extinguishers and water drums, fighting equipment shall be made subject to freezing, shall be protected available as soon as combustible mate- from freezing. rials accumulate. (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less (2) Where underground water mains than 10B, shall be provided within 50 are to be provided, they shall be in- feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of stalled, completed, and made available flammable or combustible liquids or 5 for use as soon as practicable. pounds of flammable gas are being used (c) Portable firefighting equipment— (1) on the jobsite. This requirement does Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i) not apply to the integral fuel tanks of A fire extinguisher, rated not less than motor vehicles. 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000 (vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other square feet of the protected building toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin- area, or major fraction thereof. Travel guishers are prohibited. distance from any point of the pro- (viii) Portable fire extinguishers tected area to the nearest fire extin- shall be inspected periodically and guisher shall not exceed 100 feet. maintained in accordance with Mainte- (ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin- with two fire pails may be substituted guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970. for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat- (ix) Fire extinguishers which have ing. been listed or approved by a nationally (iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type recognized testing laboratory, shall be hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in used to meet the requirements of this length and equipped with a nozzle, may subpart. be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin- (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide guisher, providing it is capable of dis- for selecting the appropriate portable charging a minimum of 5 gallons per fire extinguishers.

191

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00191 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.150 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One persons. Modification of sprinkler sys- hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, tems to permit alterations or addi- with a nozzle capable of discharging tional demolition should be expedited water at 25 gallons or more per minute, so that the automatic protection may may be substituted for a fire extin- be returned to service as quickly as guisher rated not more than 2A in the possible. Sprinkler control valves shall designated area provided that the hose be checked daily at close of work to as- line can reach all points in the area. certain that the protection is in serv- (ii) If fire hose connections are not ice. compatible with local firefighting (2) Standpipes. In all structures in equipment, the contractor shall pro- which standpipes are required, or vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit where standpipes exist in structures connections. (iii) During demolition involving being altered, they shall be brought up combustible materials, charged hose as soon as applicable laws permit, and lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank shall be maintained as construction trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall progresses in such a manner that they be made available. are always ready for fire protection (d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1) use. The standpipes shall be provided Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility with Siamese fire department connec- being constructed includes the instal- tions on the outside of the structure, at lation of automatic sprinkler protec- the street level, which shall be con- tion, the installation shall closely fol- spicuously marked. There shall be at low the construction and be placed in least one standard hose outlet at each service as soon as applicable laws per- floor. mit following completion of each story. (e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm (ii) During demolition or alterations, system, e.g., telephone system, siren, existing automatic sprinkler installa- etc., shall be established by the em- tions shall be retained in service as ployer whereby employees on the site long as reasonable. The operation of and the local fire department can be sprinkler control valves shall be per- alerted for an emergency. mitted only by properly authorized

192

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00192 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.151

(2) The alarm code and reporting in- construction or of combustible con- structions shall be conspicuously post- struction having a fire resistance of ed at phones and at employee en- not less than 1 hour. trances. (3) Temporary buildings, located (f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit other than inside another building and stairways, required for the completed not used for the storage, handling, or buildings, shall be given construction use of flammable or combustible liq- priority. Fire doors, with automatic uids, flammable gases, explosives, or closing devices, shall be hung on open- blasting agents, or similar hazardous ings as soon as practicable. occupancies, shall be located at a dis- (2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in tance of not less than 10 feet from an- buildings undergoing alterations or other building or structure. Groups of demolition until operations necessitate temporary buildings, not exceeding their removal. 2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, the purposes of this part, be considered 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; a single temporary building. 61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible materials shall be piled with due re- § 1926.151 Fire prevention. gard to the stability of piles and in no (a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir- case higher than 20 feet. ing and equipment for light, heat, or (2) Driveways between and around power purposes shall be installed in combustible storage piles shall be at compliance with the requirements of least 15 feet wide and maintained free subpart K of this part. from accumulation of rubbish, equip- (2) Internal combustion engine pow- ment, or other articles or materials. ered equipment shall be so located that Driveways shall be so spaced that a the exhausts are well away from com- maximum grid system unit of 50 feet bustible materials. When the exhausts by 150 feet is produced. are piped to outside the building under (3) The entire storage site shall be construction, a clearance of at least 6 kept free from accumulation of unnec- inches shall be maintained between essary combustible materials. Weeds such piping and combustible material. and grass shall be kept down and a reg- (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or ular procedure provided for the peri- in the vicinity of operations which con- odic cleanup of the entire area. stitute a fire hazard, and shall be conspicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or (4) When there is a danger of an un- Open Flame.’’ derground fire, that land shall not be (4) Portable battery powered lighting used for combustible or flammable equipment, used in connection with the storage. storage, handling, or use of flammable (5) Method of piling shall be solid gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap- wherever possible and in orderly and proved for the hazardous locations. regular piles. No combustible material (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet steam lines or hoses, when used in the of a building or structure. cleaning or ventilation of tanks and (6) Portable fire extinguishing equip- vessels that contain hazardous con- ment, suitable for the fire hazard in- centrations of flammable gases or va- volved, shall be provided at convenient, pors, shall be bonded to the tank or conspicuously accessible locations in vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not the yard area. Portable fire extin- be attached or detached in hazardous guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall concentrations of flammable gases or be placed so that maximum travel dis- vapors. tance to the nearest unit shall not ex- (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem- ceed 100 feet. porary building shall be erected where (d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall it will adversely affect any means of not obstruct, or adversely affect, exit. means of exit. (2) Temporary buildings, when lo- (2) All materials shall be stored, han- cated within another building or struc- dled, and piled with due regard to their ture, shall be of either noncombustible fire characteristics.

193

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00193 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(3) Noncompatible materials, which (2) Quantities of flammable and com- may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- bustible liquid in excess of 25 gallons regated by a barrier having a fire re- shall be stored in an acceptable or ap- sistance of at least 1 hour. proved cabinet meeting the following (4) Material shall be piled to mini- requirements: mize the spread of fire internally and (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi- to permit convenient access for fire- nets shall be constructed in the fol- fighting. Stable piling shall be main- lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot- tained at all times. Aisle space shall be tom, sides, and top shall be constructed maintained to safely accommodate the of an exterior grade of plywood at least widest vehicle that may be used within 1 inch in thickness, which shall not the building for firefighting purposes. break down or delaminate under stand- (5) Clearance of at least 36 inches ard fire test conditions. All joints shall shall be maintained between the top be rabbeted and shall be fastened in level of the stored material and the two directions with flathead wood sprinkler deflectors. screws. When more than one door is (6) Clearance shall be maintained used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap around lights and heating units to pre- of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges vent ignition of combustible materials. shall be mounted in such a manner as (7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be to not lose their holding capacity due maintained around the path of travel to loosening or burning out of the of fire doors unless a barricade is pro- screws when subjected to fire. Such vided, in which case no clearance is cabinets shall be painted inside and out needed. Material shall not be stored with fire retardant paint. within 36 inches of a fire door opening. (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets will be acceptable. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con- 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable—Keep Fire Away.’’ § 1926.152 Flammable and combustible (3) Not more than 60 gallons of flam- liquids. mable or 120 gallons of combustible liq- (a) General requirements. (1) Only ap- uids shall be stored in any one storage proved containers and portable tanks cabinet. Not more than three such shall be used for storage and handling cabinets may be located in a single of flammable and combustible liquids. storage area. Quantities in excess of Approved safety cans or Department of this shall be stored in an inside storage Transportation approved containers room. shall be used for the handling and use (4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be of flammable liquids in quantities of 5 constructed to meet the required fire- gallons or less, except that this shall resistive rating for their use. Such con- not apply to those flammable liquid struction shall comply with the test materials which are highly viscid (ex- specifications set forth in Standard tremely hard to pour), which may be Methods of Fire Test of Building Con- used and handled in original shipping struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969. containers. For quantities of one gal- (ii) Where an automatic extin- lon or less, the original container may guishing system is provided, the sys- be used, for storage, use and handling tem shall be designed and installed in of flammable liquids. an approved manner. Openings to other (2) Flammable or combustible liquids rooms or buildings shall be provided shall not be stored in areas used for with noncombustible liquid-tight exits, stairways, or normally used for raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in the safe passage of people. height, or the floor in the storage area (b) Indoor storage of flammable and shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- combustible liquids. (1) No more than 25 rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- gallons of flammable or combustible vided with approved self-closing fire liquids shall be stored in a room outdoors. The room shall be liquid-tight side of an approved storage cabinet. where the walls join the floor. A per- For storage of liquefied petroleum gas, missible alternate to the sill or ramp is see § 1926.153. an open-grated trench, inside of the

194

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00194 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

room, which drains to a safe location. over 30 gallons capacity shall not be Where other portions of the building or stacked one upon the other. other buildings are exposed, windows (viii) Flammable and combustible shall be protected as set forth in the liquids in excess of that permitted in Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, inside storage rooms shall be stored NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F outside of buildings in accordance with openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi- paragraph (c) of this section. nal thickness may be used for shelving, (5) Quantity. The quantity of flam- racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over- mable or combustible liquids kept in lay, and similar installations. the vicinity of spraying operations (iii) Materials which will react with shall be the minimum required for op- water and create a fire hazard shall not erations and should ordinarily not ex- be stored in the same room with flam- ceed a supply for 1 day or one shift. mable or combustible liquids. Bulk storage of portable containers of (iv) Storage in inside storage rooms flammable or combustible liquids shall shall comply with Table F–2 following: be in a separate, constructed building TABLE F±2 detached from other important buildings or cut off in a standard manner. Total al- (c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor- lowable Fire protection Fire resist- quantities age of containers (not more than 60 provided ance Maximum size gals./sq. ft./floor gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal- area lons in any one pile or area. Piles or groups of containers shall be separated Yes ...... 2 hrs ...... 500 sq. ft ...... 10 No ...... 2 hrs ...... 500 sq. ft ...... 4 by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of Yes ...... 1 hr ...... 150 sq. ft ...... 5 containers shall not be nearer than 20 No ...... 1 hr ...... 150 sq. ft ...... 2 feet to a building. NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, (2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con- carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for this purpose. tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide access way to permit approach of fire (v) Electrical wiring and equipment control apparatus. located in inside storage rooms shall be approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz- (3) The storage area shall be graded ardous Locations. For definition of in a manner to divert possible spills Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- away from buildings or other expo- tions, see § 1926.449. sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb (vi) Every inside storage room shall or earth dike at least 12 inches high. be provided with either a gravity or a When curbs or dikes are used, provi- mechanical exhausting system. Such sions shall be made for draining off ac- system shall commence not more than cumulations of ground or rain water, 12 inches above the floor and be de- or spills of flammable or combustible signed to provide for a complete liquids. Drains shall terminate at a change of air within the room at least safe location and shall be accessible to 6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex- operation under fire conditions. hausting system is used, it shall be (4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) controlled by a switch located outside Portable tanks shall not be nearer than of the door. The ventilating equipment 20 feet from any building. Two or more and any lighting fixtures shall be oper- portable tanks, grouped together, hav- ated by the same switch. An electric ing a combined capacity in excess of pilot light shall be installed adjacent 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- to the switch if flammable liquids are foot-clear area. Individual portable dispensed within the room. Where grav- tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be ity ventilation is provided, the fresh separated by a 5-foot-clear area. air intake, as well as the exhausting (ii) Within 200 feet of each portable outlet from the room, shall be on the tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- exterior of the building in which the cess way to permit approach of fire room is located. control apparatus. (vii) In every inside storage room (5) Storage areas shall be kept free of there shall be maintained one clear weeds, debris, and other combustible aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers material not necessary to the storage.

195

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00195 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 building or outside only through a gallons, shall be provided with emer- closed piping system, from safety cans, gency venting and other devices, as re- by means of a device drawing through quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA the top, or from a container, or port- 30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- able tanks, by gravity or pump, tible Liquids Code. through an approved self-closing valve. (7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 Transferring by means of air pressure gallons, shall have emergency venting on the container or portable tanks is and other devices, as required by chap- prohibited. ters II and III of The Flammable and (4) The dispensing units shall be pro- Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30– tected against collision damage. 1969. (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for (d) Fire control for flammable or com- flammable liquids shall be of an ap- bustible liquid storage. (1) At least one proved type. portable fire extinguisher, having a (f) Handling liquids at point of final rating of not less than 20–B units, shall use. (1) Flammable liquids shall be kept be located outside of, but not more in closed containers when not actually than 10 feet from, the door opening in use. into any room used for storage of more (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable than 60 gallons of flammable or com- or combustible liquids shall be disposed bustible liquids. of promptly and safely. (2) At least one portable fire extin- (3) Flammable liquids may be used guisher having a rating of not less than only where there are no open flames or 20–B units shall be located not less other sources of ignition within 50 feet than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, of the operation, unless conditions war- from any flammable liquid storage rant greater clearance. area located outside. (g) Service and refueling areas. (1) (3) When sprinklers are provided, Flammable or combustible liquids they shall be installed in accordance shall be stored in approved closed con- with the Standard for the Installation tainers, in tanks located underground, of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969. or in aboveground portable tanks. (4) At least one portable fire extin- (2) The tank trucks shall comply guisher having a rating of not less than with the requirements covered in the 20–B:C units shall be provided on all Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam- tank trucks or other vehicles used for mable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA transporting and/or dispensing flam- No. 385–1966. mable or combustible liquids. (3) The dispensing hose shall be an (e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in approved type. which flammable or combustible liq- (4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an uids are transferred at one time, in approved automatic-closing type with- quantities greater than 5 gallons from out a latch-open device. one tank or container to another tank (5) Underground tanks shall not be or container, shall be separated from abandoned. other operations by 25-feet distance or (6) Clearly identified and easily ac- by construction having a fire resist- cessible switch(es) shall be provided at ance of at least 1 hour. Drainage or a location remote from dispensing de- other means shall be provided to con- vices to shut off the power to all dis- trol spills. Adequate natural or me- pensing devices in the event of an chanical ventilation shall be provided emergency. to maintain the concentration of flam- (7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- mable vapor at or below 10 percent of proved type may be installed in the lu- the lower flammable limit. brication or service area where there is (2) Transfer of flammable liquids no dispensing or transferring of flam- from one container to another shall be mable liquids, provided the bottom of done only when containers are elec- the heating unit is at least 18 inches trically interconnected (bonded). above the floor and is protected from (3) Flammable or combustible liquids physical damage. shall be drawn from or transferred into (ii) Heating equipment installed in vessels, containers, or tanks within a lubrication or service areas, where

196

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00196 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

flammable liquids are dispensed, shall of water or if the tanks are designed to be of an approved type for garages, and contain flammable or combustible liq- shall be installed at least 8 feet above uids at a liquid temperature below 0°F. the floor. (ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved] (8) There shall be no smoking or open (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv- flames in the areas used for fueling, eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or servicing fuel systems for internal constructed by use of a combination of combustion engines, receiving or dis- these methods. Filler metal used in pensing of flammable or combustible brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an liquids. alloy having a melting point above (9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro- 1000°F. and below that of the metal hibiting smoking shall be posted. joined. (10) The motors of all equipment (iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos- being fueled shall be shut off during pheric tanks shall be built in accord- the fueling operation. ance with acceptable good standards of (11) Each service or fueling area shall design. Atmospheric tanks may be be provided with at least one fire extin- built in accordance with: guisher having a rating of not less than (1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., 20–B:C located so that an extinguisher Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis- Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and penser, underground fill pipe opening, Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, and lubrication or service area. Standard for Steel Underground Tanks (h) Scope. This section applies to the for Flammable and Combustible Liq- handling, storage, and use of flam- uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or mable and combustible liquids with a No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks flashpoint below 200°F (93.33°C). This for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963. section does not apply to: (1) Bulk transportation of flammable (2) American Petroleum Institute and combustible liquids; and Standards No. 12A, Specification for (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, oil tanks and containers connected Seventh Edition, September 1951, or with oil burning equipment. No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Third Edition, 1966. (i) Tank storage—(1) Design and construction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A) (3) American Petroleum Institute Tanks shall be built of steel except as Standards No. 12B, Specification for provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh through (E) of this section. Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, (B) Tanks may be built of materials March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for other than steel for installation under- Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev- ground or if required by the properties enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, of the liquid stored. Tanks located Specification for Small Welded Produc- above ground or inside buildings shall tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. be of noncombustible construction. Tanks built in accordance with these (C) Tanks built of materials other standards shall be used only as produc- than steel shall be designed to speci- tion tanks for storage of crude petro- fications embodying principles recog- leum in oil-producing areas. nized as good engineering design for (B) Tanks designed for underground the material used. service not exceeding 2,500 gallons (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above- used for storing flammable or combus- ground. tible liquids having a gravity of 40°API (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure or heavier. Concrete tanks with special vessels may be used as atmospheric lining may be used for other services tanks. provided the design is in accordance (D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be with sound engineering practice. used for the storage of a flammable or (E) [Reserved] combustible liquid at a temperature at (F) Special engineering consideration or above its boiling point. shall be required if the specific gravity (iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor- of the liquid to be stored exceeds that mal operating pressure of the tank

197

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00197 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

shall not exceed the design pressure of one tank is less than one-half the di- the tank. ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis- (B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built tance between the two tanks shall not in accordance with acceptable stand- be less than one-half the diameter of ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may the smaller tank. be built in accordance with: (C) Where crude petroleum in con- (1) American Petroleum Institute junction with production facilities are Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules located in noncongested areas and have for the Design and Construction of capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage (3,000 barrels), the distance between Tanks, Third Edition, 1966. such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (2) The principles of the Code for (0.912 m). Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII (D) Where unstable flammable or of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves- combustible liquids are stored, the dis- sels Code, 1968. tance between such tanks shall not be (C) Atmospheric tanks built accord- less than one-half the sum of their di- ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., ameters. requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) (E) When tanks are compacted in of this section and shall be limited to three or more rows or in an irregular 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting pattern, greater spacing or other conditions. means shall be provided so that inside This paragraph may be used for oper- tanks are accessible for firefighting ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. purposes. (D) Pressure vessels may be used as (F) The minimum separation between low-pressure tanks. a liquefied petroleum gas container (v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal and a flammable or combustible liquid operating pressure of the vessel shall storage tank shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), not exceed the design pressure of the except in the case of flammable or vessel. (B) Pressure vessels shall be built in combustible liquid tanks operating at accordance with the Code for Unfired pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the equipped with emergency venting ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code which will permit pressures to exceed 1968. 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of When tanks are not designed in accord- this section shall apply. Suitable ance with the American Petroleum In- means shall be taken to prevent the ac- stitute, American Society of Mechan- cumulation of flammable or combus- ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’ tible liquids under adjacent liquefied Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if petroleum gas containers such as by di- corrosion is anticipated beyond that version curbs or grading. When flam- provided for in the design formulas mable or combustible liquid storage used, additional metal thickness or tanks are within a diked area, the liq- suitable protective coatings or linings uefied petroleum gas containers shall shall be provided to compensate for the be outside the diked area and at least corrosion loss expected during the de- 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the center- sign life of the tank. line of the wall of the diked area. The (2) Installation of outside aboveground foregoing provisions shall not apply tanks. (i) [Reserved] when liquefied petroleum gas con- (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between tainers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be- capacity are installed adjacent to fuel tween any two flammable or combus- oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (2,081.75 tible liquid storage tanks shall not be L) or less capacity. less than 3 feet (0.912 m). (iii) [Reserved] (B) Except as provided in paragraph (iv) Normal venting for aboveground (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks between any two adjacent tanks shall shall be adequately vented to prevent not be less than one-sixth the sum of the development of vacuum or pressure their diameters. When the diameter of sufficient to distort the roof of a cone

198

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00198 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

roof tank or exceeding the design pres- outside aboveground atmospheric sure in the case of other atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons (3,785 L) ca- tanks, as a result of filling or pacity containing other than Class IA emptying, and atmospheric tempera- flammable liquids may have open ture changes. vents. (See paragraph (i)(2)(vi)(B) of (B) Normal vents shall be sized either this section.) in accordance with: (1) The American (G) Flame arresters or venting de- Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F) (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low- of this section may be omitted for Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other Class IB and IC liquids where condi- accepted standard; or (3) shall be at tions are such that their use may, in least as large as the filling or with- case of obstruction, result in tank drawal connection, whichever is larger damage. but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex- cm) nominal inside diameter. posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure aboveground storage tank shall have vessels shall be adequately vented to some form of construction or device prevent development of pressure or that will relieve excessive internal vacuum, as a result of filling or pressure caused by exposure fires. emptying and atmospheric tempera- (B) In a vertical tank the construc- ture changes, from exceeding the de- tion referred to in paragraph sign pressure of the tank or vessel. (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the Protection shall also be provided to form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a prevent overpressure from any pump weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap- discharging into the tank or vessel proved pressure relieving construction. when the pump discharge pressure can The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be exceed the design pressure of the tank constructed to fail preferential to any or vessel. other seam. (D) If any tank or pressure vessel has (C) Where entire dependence for more than one fill or withdrawal con- emergency relief is placed upon pres- nection and simultaneous filling or sure relieving devices, the total vent- withdrawal can be made, the vent size ing capacity of both normal and emer- shall be based on the maximum antici- gency vents shall be enough to prevent pated simultaneous flow. rupture of the shell or bottom of the (E) Unless the vent is designed to tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or if horizontal. If unstable liquids are less, the outlet of vents and vent drains stored, the effects of heat or gas result- shall be arranged to discharge in such ing from polymerization, decomposi- a manner as to prevent localized over- tion, condensation, or self-reactivity heating of any part of the tank in the shall be taken into account. The total event vapors from such vents are ig- capacity of both normal and emergency nited. venting devices shall be not less than (F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor- that derived from Table F–10 except as ing Class IA liquids shall be equipped provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or with venting devices which shall be (F) of this section. Such device may be normally closed except when venting a self-closing manhole cover, or one to pressure or vacuum conditions. using long bolts that permit the cover Tanks and pressure vessels storing to lift under internal pressure, or an Class IB and IC liquids shall be additional or larger relief valve or equipped with venting devices which valves. The wetted area of the tank shall be normally closed except when shall be calculated on the basis of 55 venting under pressure or vacuum con- percent of the total exposed area of a ditions, or with approved flame arrest- sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the ers. total exposed area of a horizontal tank Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls. (84 m3) and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above capacity or less containing crude pe- grade of the exposed shell area of a troleum in crude-producing areas; and, vertical tank.

199

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00199 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE F±10ÐWETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR [14.7 psia and 60° F. (15.55° C)]

Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)

20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596) 40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436) 50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192) 60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892) 70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536) 80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712) 90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776) 100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and 120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over 140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704) 180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)

(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- 0.3 for approved insulation. signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the 0.15 for approved water spray with approved total rate of venting shall be deter- insulation. mined in accordance with Table F–10, (G) The outlet of all vents and vent except that when the exposed wetted drains on tanks equipped with emer- area of the surface is greater than 2,800 gency venting to permit pressures ex- square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to venting shall be calculated by the fol- discharge in such a way as to prevent lowing formula: localized overheating of any part of the CFH = 1,107A 0.82 tank, in the event vapors from such vents are ignited. Where: (H) Each commercial tank venting CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic device shall have stamped on it the feet (meters) of free air per hour. opening pressure, the pressure at which A = Exposed wetted surface, in square the valve reaches the full open posi- feet (m2). tion, and the flow capacity at the lat- NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet Q=21,000A 0.82. (meters) per hour of air at 60°F. ° (E) The total emergency relief vent- (15.55 C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a. ing capacity for any specific stable liq- (I) The flow capacity of tank venting uid may be determined by the fol- devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller lowing formula: in nominal pipe size shall be deter- ÷ √ mined by actual test of each type and V = 1337 L M size of vent. These flow tests may be V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per conducted by the manufacturer if cer- hour from Table F–10. tified by a qualified impartial observer, L = Latent heat of vaporization of or may be conducted by an outside specific liquid in B.t.u. per pound. agency. The flow capacity of tank M = Molecular weight of specific liq- venting devices larger than 12 inches uids. (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including (F) The required airflow rate of para- manhole covers with long bolts or graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section equivalent, may be calculated provided may be multiplied by the appropriate that the opening pressure is actually factor listed in the following schedule measured, the rating pressure and cor- when protection is provided as indi- responding free orifice area are stated, cated. Only one factor may be used for the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the any one tank. nameplate, and the computation is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- 0.5 for drainage in accordance with paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks plied to the rated orifice area. over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area. (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. 0.3 for approved water spray. (A) Vent piping shall be constructed in

200

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00200 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

accordance with paragraph (c) of this (1) Except as provided in paragraph section. (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu- (B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks metric capacity of the diked area shall storing Class I liquids are adjacent to not be less than the greatest amount of buildings or public ways, they shall be liquid that can be released from the located so that the vapors are released largest tank within the diked area, as- at a safe point outside of buildings and suming a full tank. The capacity of the not less than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the diked area enclosing more than one adjacent ground level. In order to aid tank shall be calculated by deducting their dispersion, vapors shall be dis- the volume of the tanks other than the charged upward or horizontally away largest tank below the height of the from closely adjacent walls. Vent out- dike. lets shall be located so that flammable (2) For a tank or group of tanks with vapors will not be trapped by eaves or fixed roofs containing crude petroleum other obstructions and shall be at least with boilover characteristics, the volu- 5 feet (1.52 m) from building openings. metric capacity of the diked area shall (C) When tank vent piping is be not less than the capacity of the manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as largest tank served by the enclosure, to discharge, within the pressure limi- assuming a full tank. The capacity of tations of the system, the vapors they the diked enclosure shall be calculated may be required to handle when by deducting the volume below the manifolded tanks are subject to the height of the dike of all tanks within same fire exposure. the enclosure. (3) Walls of the diked area shall be of (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and designed to be liquidtight and to with- diked areas. The area surrounding a stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen tank or a group of tanks shall be pro- walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height vided with drainage as in paragraph shall have a flat section at the top not (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this slope of an earthen wall shall be con- section, to prevent accidental dis- sistent with the angle of repose of the charge of liquid from endangering ad- material of which the wall is con- joining property or reaching water- structed. ways. (4) The walls of the diked area shall (B) Drainage. Where protection of ad- be restricted to an average height of 6 joining property or waterways is by feet (1.824 m) above interior grade. means of a natural or manmade drain- (5) [Reserved] age system, such systems shall comply (6) No loose combustible material, with the following: empty or full drum or barrel, shall be (1) [Reserved] permitted within the diked area. (2) The drainage system shall termi- (viii) Tank openings other than vents nate in vacant land or other area or in for aboveground tanks. an impounding basin having a capacity (A)–(C) [Reserved] not smaller than that of the largest (D) Openings for gaging shall be pro- tank served. This termination area and vided with a vaportight cap or cover. the route of the drainage system shall (E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids be so located that, if the flammable or other than crude oils, gasolines, and combustible liquids in the drainage asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- system are ignited, the fire will not se- signed and installed as to minimize the riously expose tanks or adjoining prop- possibility of generating static elec- erty. tricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a (C) Diked areas. Where protection of tank shall terminate within 6 inches adjoining property or waterways is ac- (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank complished by retaining the liquid and shall be installed to avoid exces- around the tank by means of a dike, sive vibration. the volume of the diked area shall (F) Filling and emptying connections comply with the following require- which are made and broken shall be lo- ments: cated outside of buildings at a location

201

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00201 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

free from any source of ignition and plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as- any building opening. Such connection phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re- shall be closed and liquidtight when inforced concrete paving is used as part not in use. The connection shall be of the protection, it shall extend at properly identified. least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be- (3) Installation of underground tanks— yond the outline of the tank in all di- (i) Location. Excavation for under- rections. ground storage tanks shall be made (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion with due care to avoid undermining of protection for the tank and its piping foundations of existing structures. Un- shall be provided by one or more of the derground tanks or tanks under build- following methods: ings shall be so located with respect to (A) Use of protective coatings or existing building foundations and sup- wrappings; ports that the loads carried by the lat- (B) Cathodic protection; or, ter cannot be transmitted to the tank. (C) Corrosion resistant materials of The distance from any part of a tank construction. storing Class I liquids to the nearest (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange- wall of any basement or pit shall be ment of vents for Class I liquids. Vent not less than 1 foot (0.304 m), and to pipes from tanks storing Class I liquids any property line that may be built shall be so located that the discharge upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 m). The point is outside of buildings, higher distance from any part of a tank stor- than the fill pipe opening, and not less ing Class II or Class III liquids to the than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the adja- nearest wall of any basement, pit or cent ground level. Vent pipes shall dis- property line shall be not less than 1 charge only upward in order to disperse foot (0.304 m). vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or (ii) Depth and cover. Underground less in nominal inside diameter shall tanks shall be set on firm foundations not be obstructed by devices that will and surrounded with at least 6 inches cause excessive back pressure. Vent (15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate- pipe outlets shall be so located that rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav- flammable vapors will not enter build- el well tamped in place. The tank shall ing openings, or be trapped under eaves be placed in the hole with care since or other obstructions. If the vent pipe dropping or rolling the tank into the is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or hole can break a weld, puncture or greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi- damage the tank, or scrape off the pro- nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks provided with a vacuum and pressure shall be covered with a minimum of 2 relief device or there shall be an ap- feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov- proved flame arrester located in the ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m) vent line at the outlet or within the of earth, on top of which shall be approved distance from the outlet. placed a slab of reinforced concrete not (B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick. vented through piping adequate in size When underground tanks are, or are to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid likely to be, subject to traffic, they at the fill opening while the tank is shall be protected against damage from being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less vehicles passing over them by at least than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18 diameter. inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,

TABLE F±11ÐVENT LINE DIAMETERS

Pipe length 1 Maximum flow GPM (L) 50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)

Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

100 (378.5) ...... 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤4 (3.175) 200 (757) ...... 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤4 (3.175) 300 (1,135.5) ...... 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤2 (3.81)

202

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00202 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

TABLE F±11ÐVENT LINE DIAMETERSÐContinued

Pipe length 1 Maximum flow GPM (L) 50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)

400 (1,514) ...... 11¤4 (3.175) 11¤2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 500 (1,892.5) ...... 11¤2 (3.81) 11¤2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 600 (2,271) ...... 11¤2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 700 (2,649.5) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 800 (3,028) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 900 (3,406.5) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1,000 (3,785) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.

(C) Location and arrangement of tricity by terminating within 6 inches vents for Class II or Class III liquids. (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. Vent pipes from tanks storing Class II (E) Filling and emptying connections or Class III flammable liquids shall ter- which are made and broken shall be lo- minate outside of the building and cated outside of buildings at a location higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent free from any source of ignition and outlets shall be above normal snow not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from level. They may be fitted with return any building opening. Such connection bends, coarse screens or other devices shall be closed and liquidtight when to minimize ingress of foreign mate- not in use. The connection shall be rial. properly identified. (D) Vent piping shall be constructed (4) Installation of tanks inside of build- in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be of this section. Vent pipes shall be so permitted inside of buildings except as laid as to drain toward the tank with- provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or out sags or traps in which liquid can (i) of this section. collect. They shall be located so that (ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of they will not be subjected to physical buildings shall be as provided in para- damage. The tank end of the vent pipe graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) shall enter the tank through the top. of this section, except that emergency (E) When tank vent piping is venting by the use of weak roof seams manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents to discharge, within the pressure limi- shall discharge vapors outside the tations of the system, the vapors they buildings. may be required to handle when (iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be manifolded tanks are filled simulta- constructed in accordance with para- neously. graph (c) of this section. (v) Tank openings other than vents. (A) (iv) Tank openings other than vents. Connections for all tank openings shall (A) Connections for all tank openings be vapor or liquid tight. shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are (B) Openings for manual gaging, if covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this independent of the fill pipe, shall be section. provided with a liquid-tight cap or (B) Each connection to a tank inside cover. If inside a building, each such of buildings through which liquid can opening shall be protected against liq- normally flow shall be provided with uid overflow and possible vapor release an internal or an external valve lo- by means of a spring loaded check cated as close as practical to the shell valve or other approved device. of the tank. Such valves, when exter- (C) Fill and discharge lines shall nal, and their connections to the tank enter tanks only through the top. Fill shall be of steel except when the chem- lines shall be sloped toward the tank. ical characteristics of the liquid stored (D) For Class IB and Class IC liquids are incompatible with steel. When ma- other than crude oils, gasolines, and terials other than steel are necessary, asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- they shall be suitable for the pressures, signed and installed as to minimize the structural stresses, and temperatures possibility of generating static elec- involved, including fire exposures.

203

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00203 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(C) Flammable or combustible liquid (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or tanks located inside of buildings, ex- exposed piling shall be protected by cept in one-story buildings designed materials having a fire resistance rat- and protected for flammable or coming of not less than 2 hours, except that bustible liquid storage, shall be pro- steel saddles need not be protected if vided with an automatic-closing heat- less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at actuated valve on each withdrawal con- their lowest point. Water spray protec- nection below the liquid level, except tion or its equivalent may be used in for connections used for emergency dis- lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro- posal, to prevent continued flow in the tect supports. event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup- This function may be incorporated in porting structure for tanks such as the valve required in paragraph spheres shall receive special engineer- (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep- ing consideration. arate valve, shall be located adjacent (iv) Load distribution. Every tank to the valve required in paragraph shall be so supported as to prevent the (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. excessive concentration of loads on the (D) Openings for manual gaging, if supporting portion of the shell. independent of the fill pipe (see para- (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall the ground or on foundations made of be provided with a vaportight cap or concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. cover. Each such opening shall be pro- Tank foundations shall be designed to tected against liquid overflow and pos- minimize the possibility of uneven set- sible vapor release by means of a spring tling of the tank and to minimize cor- loaded check valve or other approved rosion in any part of the tank resting device. on the foundation. (E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids (vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is located in an area that may be subjected other than crude oils, gasolines, and to flooding, the applicable precautions asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- signed and installed as to minimize the served. possibility of generating static elec- (A) No aboveground vertical storage tricity by terminating within 6 inches tank containing a flammable or com- (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. bustible liquid shall be located so that (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank the allowable liquid level within the shall be installed to avoid excessive vi- tank is below the established max- bration of the pipe. imum flood stage, unless the tank is (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be provided with a guiding structure such located outside of buildings at a loca- as described in paragraphs (i)(5)(vi) tion free from any source of ignition (M), (N), and (O) of this section. and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away (B) Independent water supply facili- from any building opening. The inlet of ties shall be provided at locations the fill pipe shall be closed and where there is no ample and dependable liquidtight when not in use. The fill public water supply available for load- connection shall be properly identified. ing partially empty tanks with water. (H) Tanks inside buildings shall be (C) In addition to the preceding re- equipped with a device, or other means quirements, each tank so located that shall be provided, to prevent overflow more than 70 percent, but less than 100 into the building. percent, of its allowable liquid storage (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor- capacity will be submerged at the es- age for all tank locations—(i) General. tablished maximum flood stage, shall Tank supports shall be installed on be safeguarded by one of the following firm foundations. Tank supports shall methods: Tank shall be raised, or its be of concrete, masonry, or protected height shall be increased, until its top steel. Single wood timber supports (not extends above the maximum flood cribbing) laid horizontally may be used stage a distance equivalent to 30 per- for outside aboveground tanks if not cent or more of its allowable liquid more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at storage capacity: Provided, however, their lowest point. That the submerged part of the tank

204

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00204 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

shall not exceed two and one-half times tirely independent of public power and the diameter. Or, as an alternative to water supply. Independent source of the foregoing, adequate noncombus- water shall be available when flood wa- tible structural guides, designed to per- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet mit the tank to float vertically with- (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest out loss of product, shall be provided. tank on a property. (D) Each horizontal tank so located (J) The self-contained power and that more than 70 percent of its stor- pumping unit shall be so located or so age capacity will be submerged at the designed that pumping into tanks may established flood stage, shall be an- be carried on continuously throughout chored, attached to a foundation of the rise in flood waters from a level 10 concrete or of steel and concrete, of feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to sufficient weight to provide adequate the level of the potential flood stage. load for the tank when filled with flam- (K) Capacity of the pumping unit mable or combustible liquid and sub- shall be such that the rate of rise of merged by flood waters to the estab- water in all tanks shall be equivalent lished flood stage, or adequately se- to the established potential average cured by other means. rate of rise of flood waters at any (E) [Reserved] stage. (F) At locations where there is no (L) Each independent pumping unit ample and dependable water supply, or shall be tested periodically to insure where filling of underground tanks that it is in satisfactory operating con- with liquids is impracticable because of dition. the character of their contents, their (M) Structural guides for holding use, or for other reasons, each tank floating tanks above their foundations shall be safeguarded against movement shall be so designed that there will be when empty and submerged by high no resistance to the free rise of a tank, ground water or flood waters by an- and shall be constructed of noncombus- choring, weighting with concrete or tible material. other approved solid loading material, (N) The strength of the structure or securing by other means. Each such shall be adequate to resist lateral tank shall be so constructed and in- movement of a tank subject to a hori- stalled that it will safely resist exter- zontal force in any direction equivalent nal pressures due to high ground water to not less than 25 pounds per square or flood waters. foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the pro- (G) At locations where there is an jected vertical cross-sectional area of ample and dependable water supply the tank. available, underground tanks con- (O) Where tanks are situated on ex- taining flammable or combustible liq- posed points or bends in a shoreline uids, so installed that more than 70 where swift currents in flood waters percent of their storage capacity will will be present, the structures shall be be submerged at the maximum flood designed to withstand a unit force of stage, shall be so anchored, weighted, not less than 50 pounds per square foot or secured by other means, as to pre- (2.1 kg m2). vent movement of such tanks when (P) The filling of a tank to be pro- filled with flammable or combustible tected by water loading shall be start- liquids, and submerged by flood waters ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- to the established flood stage. gerous flood stage. The rate of filling (H) Pipe connections below the allow- shall be at least equal to the rate of able liquid level in a tank shall be pro- rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- vided with valves or cocks located as lished average potential rate of rise). closely as practicable to the tank shell. (Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the Such valves and their connections to water pumps shall be available at all tanks shall be of steel or other mate- times to insure adequate power to fill rial suitable for use with the liquid all tankage with water. being stored. Cast iron shall not be per- (R) All valves on connecting pipe- mitted. lines shall be closed and locked in (I) At locations where an independent closed position when water loading has water supply is required, it shall be en- been completed.

205

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00205 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(S) Where structural guides are pro- the applicable paragraphs of the code vided for the protection of floating under which they were built. The tanks, all rigid connections between American Society of Mechanical Engi- tanks and pipelines shall be discon- neers (ASME) code stamp, American nected and blanked off or blinded be- Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, fore the floodwaters reach the bottom or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab- of the tank, unless control valves and oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi- their connections to the tank are of a dence of compliance with this strength type designed to prevent breakage be- test. Tanks not marked in accordance tween the valve and the tank shell. with the above codes shall be strength (T) All valves attached to tanks tested before they are placed in service other than those used in connection in accordance with good engineering with water loading operations shall be principles and reference shall be made closed and locked. to the sections on testing in the codes (U) If a tank is equipped with a swing listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A), line, the swing pipe shall be raised to (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section. and secured at its highest position. (ii) Strength. When the vertical (V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- length of the fill and vent pipes is such retary or his designated representative that when filled with liquid the static shall make periodic inspections of all head imposed upon the bottom of the plants where the storage of flammable tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch or combustible liquids is such as to re- (68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping quire compliance with the foregoing re- shall be tested hydrostatically to a quirements, in order to assure the fol- pressure equal to the static head thus lowing: imposed. (1) That all flammable or combus- (iii) Tightness. In addition to the tible liquid storage tanks are in com- strength test called for in paragraphs pliance with these requirements and so (i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all maintained. tanks and connections shall be tested (2) That detailed printed instructions for tightness. Except for underground of what to do in flood emergencies are tanks, this tightness test shall be made properly posted. at operating pressure with air, inert (3) That station operators and other gas, or water prior to placing the tank employees depended upon to carry out in service. In the case of field-erected such instructions are thoroughly in- tanks the strength test may be consid- formed as to the location and operation ered to be the test for tank tightness. of such valves and other equipment Underground tanks and piping, before necessary to effect these requirements. being covered, enclosed, or placed in (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub- use, shall be tested for tightness ject to earthquakes, the tank supports hydrostatically, or with air pressure at and connections shall be designed to not less than 3 pounds per square inch resist damage as a result of such (20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds shocks. per square inch (34.47 kPa). (6) Sources of ignition. In locations (iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- where flammable vapors may be tions shall be corrected in an accept- present, precautions shall be taken to able manner before the tank is placed prevent ignition by eliminating or con- in service. Mechanical caulking is not trolling sources of ignition. Sources of permitted for correcting leaks in weld- ignition may include open flames, ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the lightning, smoking, cutting and weld- roof. ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat, (v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- sparks (static, electrical, and mechan- erated at pressures below their design ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical pressure may be tested by the applica- and physical-chemical reactions, and ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or radiant heat. (ii) of this section, based upon the pres- (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks, sure developed under full emergency whether shop built or field erected, venting of the tank. shall be strength tested before they are (j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- placed in service in accordance with eral—(i) Design. The design (including

206

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00206 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from systems containing flammable or com- the failure of these materials could not bustible liquids shall be suitable for unduly expose persons, important the expected working pressures and buildings or structures or can be read- structural stresses. Conformity with ily controlled by remote valves. the applicable provisions of Pressure (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provi- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints sions of this paragraph, shall be consid- or approved connectors shall be used. ered prima facie evidence of compli- Threaded joints and connections shall ance with the foregoing provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri- (ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character- (A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me- wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be (B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or portable or stationary engines. used outside of buildings above or (C) Piping within the scope of any ap- below ground. If used above ground, the plicable boiler and pressures vessel piping shall either be secured to pre- code. vent disengagement at the fitting or (iii) Definitions. As used in this para- the piping system shall be so designed graph, piping systems consist of pipe, that any spill resulting from such dis- tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, engagement could not unduly expose valves, fittings, the pressure con- persons, important buildings or struc- taining parts of other components such tures, and could be readily controlled as expansion joints and strainers, and by remote valves. devices which serve such purposes as (4) Supports. Piping systems shall be mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib- substantially supported and protected uting, metering, or controlling flow. against physical damage and excessive (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit- stresses arising from settlement, vibra- tings—(i) Required materials. Materials tion, expansion, or contraction. for piping, valves, or fittings shall be (5) Protection against corrosion. All steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron, piping for flammable or combustible except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2) liquids, both aboveground and under- (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section. ground, where subject to external cor- (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than rosion, shall be painted or otherwise steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron protected. may be used underground, or if re- (6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- quired by the properties of the flam- tain a sufficient number of valves to mable or combustible liquid handled. operate the system properly and to Material other than steel, nodular iron, protect the plant. Piping systems in or malleable iron shall be designed to specifications embodying principles connection with pumps shall contain a recognized as good engineering prac- sufficient number of valves to control tices for the material used. properly the flow of liquid in normal (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit- operation and in the event of physical tings may have combustible or non- damage. Each connection to pipelines, combustible linings. by which equipments such as tankcars (iv) Low-melting materials. When low- or tank vehicles discharge liquids by melting point materials such as alu- means of pumps into storage tanks, minum and brass or materials that shall be provided with a check valve for soften on fire exposure such as plastics, automatic protection against backflow or non-ductile materials such as cast if the piping arrangement is such that iron, are necessary, special consider- backflow from the system is possible. ation shall be given to their behavior (7) Testing. All piping before being on fire exposure. If such materials are covered, enclosed, or placed in use used in above ground piping systems or shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 inside buildings, they shall be suitably percent of the maximum anticipated

207

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00207 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

pressure of the system, or pneumati- dispensers, tanks may be installed on a cally tested to 110 percent of the max- pier provided that applicable portions imum anticipated pressure of the sys- of paragraph (b) of this section relative tem, but not less than 5 pounds per to spacing, diking, and piping are com- square inch gage at the highest point plied with and the quantity so stored of the system. This test shall be main- does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L) tained for a sufficient time to complete aggregate capacity. visual inspection of all joints and con- (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine nections, but for at least 10 minutes. service stations may be located above (k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- ground, where rock ledges or high pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be water table make underground tanks located away from other structures so impractical. as to provide room for safe ingress and (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing which would produce gravity head on units shall in all cases be at least 20 the dispensing unit, the tank outlet feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv- shall be equipped with a pressure con- ing fixed sources of ignition. (ii) Dispensing shall be by approved trol valve positioned adjacent to and dispensing units with or without inte- outside the tank block valve specified gral pumps and may be located on open in §1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad- piers, wharves, or floating docks or on justed that liquid cannot flow by grav- shore or on piers of the solid fill type. ity from the tank in case of piping or (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto- hose failure. matic-closing without a hold-open (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore latch. tanks and dispensing units shall be as (2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this pumps not integral with the dispensing section, except that, where dispensing unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of is from a floating structure, suitable the solid fill type, except as provided in lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this may be employed between the shore section. piping and the piping on the floating (ii) Where shore location would re- structure as made necessary by change quire excessively long supply lines to in water level or shoreline.

TABLE F±19ÐELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREASÐSERVICE STATIONS

Class I Location Group D Extent of classified area division

Underground tank: Fill opening ...... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is within the Division 1 or 2 classified area. 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet (3.04 m) from a loose fill connection and within a horizontal radius of 5 feet (1.52 m) from a tight fill connection. VentÐDischarging upward ...... 1 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of open end of vent, extending in all directions. 2 Area between 3 feet (0.912 m) and 5 feet (1.52 m) of open end of vent, extending in all directions. Dispenser: Pits ...... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is within the Division 1 or 2 classified area. Dispenser enclosure ...... 1 The area 4 feet (1.216 m) vertically above base within the enclosure and 18 inches (45.72 cm) horizontally in all directions. Outdoor ...... 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within 20 feet (6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure. Indoor: With mechanical ventilation ...... 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within 20 feet (6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure. With gravity ventilation ...... 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within 25 feet (7.6 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure. Remote pumpÐOutdoor ...... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level if any part is within a horizontal distance of 10 feet (3.04 m) from any edge of pump.

208

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00208 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.153

TABLE F±19ÐELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREASÐSERVICE STATIONSÐContinued

Class I Location Group D Extent of classified area division

2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within 10 feet (3.04 m) horizontally from any edge of pump. Remote pumpÐIndoor ...... 1 Entire area within any pit. 2 Within 5 feet (1.52 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all directions. Also up to 3 feet (3.04 m) above floor or grade level within 25 feet (6.08 m) horizontally from any edge of pump. Lubrication or service room ...... 1 Entire area within any pit. 2 Area up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above floor or grade level within entire lubrication room. Dispenser for Class I liquids ...... 2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any fill or dispensing point, extending in all directions. Special enclosure inside building per 1 Entire enclosure. § 1910.106(f)(1)(ii). Sales, storage and rest rooms ...... (1 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of a Division 1 area, the entire room shall be classified as Divi- sion 1. 1 Ordinary.

(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut lished in 49 CFR Part 178, Shipping off the supply from shore shall be pro- Container Specifications. vided in each pipeline at or near the (3) Definition. As used in this section, approach to the pier and at the shore Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, end of each pipeline adjacent to the cylinders, or drums, used for transpor- point where flexible hose is attached. tation or storing liquefied petroleum (iii) Piping shall be located so as to gases. be protected from physical damage. (b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. (iv) Piping handling Class I liquids Welding is prohibited on containers. shall be grounded to control stray cur- (c) Container valves and container ac- rents. cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces- (4) Definition; as used in this section: sories connected directly to the con- Marine service station shall mean that tainer, including primary shut off portion of a property where flammable valves, shall have a rated working pres- or combustible liquids used as fuels are sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be stored and dispensed from fixed equip- of material and design suitable for LP- Gas service. ment on shore, piers, wharves, or floating docks into the fuel tanks of self- (2) Connections to containers, except propelled craft, and shall include all fa- safety relief connections, liquid level gauging devices, and plugged openings, cilities used in connection therewith. shall have shutoff valves located as [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, close to the container as practicable. 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; (d) Safety devices. (1) Every container 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June and every vaporizer shall be provided 18, 1998] with one or more approved safety relief valves or devices. These valves shall be § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas arranged to afford free vent to the (LP-Gas). outer air with discharge not less than 5 (a) Approval of equipment and systems. feet horizontally away from any open- (1) Each system shall have containers, ing into a building which is below such valves, connectors, manifold valve as- discharge. semblies, and regulators of an approved (2) Shutoff valves shall not be in- type. stalled between the safety relief device (2) All cylinders shall meet the De- and the container, or the equipment or partment of Transportation specifica- piping to which the safety relief device tion identification requirements pub- is connected, except that a shutoff

209

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00209 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

valve may be used where the arrange- flow valves. Such excess flow valves ment of this valve is such that full re- shall be either integral with the con- quired capacity flow through the safety tainer valves or in the connections to relief device is always afforded. the container valve outlets. (3) Container safety relief devices and (4) Regulators shall be either directly regulator relief vents shall be located connected to the container valves or to not less than 5 feet in any direction manifolds connected to the container from air openings into sealed combus- valves. The regulator shall be suitable tion system appliances or mechanical for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit- ventilation air intakes. tings connecting containers to pressure (e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con- regulator inlets shall be designed for at tainers for trucks or motor vehicles least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure. from bulk storage containers shall be (5) Valves on containers having water performed not less than 10 feet from capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi- the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or est building or other construction and, storage. in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall any building opening. not be used. (2) Filling of portable containers or (7) Hose shall be designed for a work- containers mounted on skids from storing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De- age containers shall be performed not sign, construction, and performance of less than 50 feet from the nearest build- hose, and hose connections shall have ing. their suitability determined by listing (f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP- by a nationally recognized testing Gas consuming appliances shall be ap- agency. The hose length shall be as proved types. short as practicable. Hoses shall be (2) Any appliance that was originally long enough to permit compliance with manufactured for operation with a gas- spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in through (13) of this section, without good condition, may be used with LP- kinking or straining, or causing hose Gas only after it is properly converted, to be so close to a burner as to be dam- adapted, and tested for performance aged by heat. with LP-Gas before the appliance is (8) Portable heaters, including sala- placed in use. manders, shall be equipped with an ap- (g) Containers and regulating equip- proved automatic device to shut off the ment installed outside of buildings or flow of gas to the main burner, and structures. Containers shall be upright pilot if used, in the event of flame fail- upon firm foundations or otherwise ure. Such heaters, having inputs above firmly secured. The possible effect on 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped the outlet piping of settling shall be with either a pilot, which must be guarded against by a flexible connec- lighted and proved before the main tion or special fitting. burner can be turned on, or an elec- (h) Containers and equipment used in- trical ignition system. side of buildings or structures. (1) When operational requirements make port- NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph able use of containers necessary, and do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500 their location outside of buildings or B.t.u. per hour input when used with con- structures is impracticable, containers tainers having a maximum water capacity of 21⁄2 pounds. and equipment shall be permitted to be used inside of buildings or structures in (9) Container valves, connectors, reg- accordance with paragraphs (h)(2) ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing through (11) of this section. shall not be used as structural supports (2) Containers in use means connected for heaters. for use. (10) Containers, regulating equip- (3) Systems utilizing containers hav- ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 shall be located to minimize exposure pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca- to high temperatures or physical dam- pacity) shall be equipped with excess age.

210

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00210 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.153

(11) Containers having a water capac- minimize the flow of gas in the event ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 the fuel line becomes ruptured. pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief use shall stand on a firm and substan- devices shall be rigidly attached to the tially level surface and, when nec- cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting essary, shall be secured in an upright standards, the building walls, or other- position. wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in- (12) The maximum water capacity of stalled or protected from the elements. individual containers shall be 245 (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- of LPG within buildings is prohibited. pacity). (k) Storage outside of buildings. (1) (13) For temporary heating, heaters Storage outside of buildings, for con- (other than integral heater-container tainers awaiting use, shall be located units) shall be located at least 6 feet from the nearest building or group of from any LP-Gas container. This shall buildings, in accordance with the fol- not prohibit the use of heaters specifi- lowing: cally designed for attachment to the TABLE F±3 container or to a supporting standard, provided they are designed and in- Quantity of LP-Gas stored Distance stalled so as to prevent direct or radi- (feet) ant heat application from the heater 500 lbs. or less ...... 0 onto the containers. Blower and radi- 501 to 6,000 lbs ...... 10 6,001 to 10,000 lbs ...... 20 ant type heaters shall not be directed Over 10,000 lbs ...... 25 toward any LP-Gas container within 20 feet. (2) Containers shall be in a suitable (14) If two or more heater-container ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro- units, of either the integral or non- tected against tampering. integral type, are located in an (l) Fire protection. Storage locations unpartitioned area on the same floor, shall be provided with at least one ap- the container or containers of each proved portable fire extinguisher hav- unit shall be separated from the con- ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C. tainer or containers of any other unit (m) Systems utilizing containers other by at least 20 feet. than DOT containers—(1) Application. (15) When heaters are connected to This paragraph applies specifically to containers for use in an unpartitioned systems utilizing storage containers area on the same floor, the total water other than those constructed in accord- capacity of containers, manifolded to- ance with DOT specifications. Para- gether for connection to a heater or graph (b) of this section applies to this heaters, shall not be greater than 735 paragraph unless otherwise noted in pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca- paragraph (b) of this section. pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa- (2) Design pressure and classification of rated by at least 20 feet. storage containers. Storage containers (16) Storage of containers awaiting shall be designed and classified in ac- use shall be in accordance with para- cordance with Table F–31. graphs (j) and (k) of this section. TABLE F±31 (i) Multiple container systems. (1) Valves in the assembly of multiple con- Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage tainer systems shall be arranged so For gases that replacement of containers can be with vapor 1949 edition of press. Not 1949 and ASME Code (Par. U± made without shutting off the flow of Con- to exceed earlier edi- 200, U±201); 1950, gas in the system. This provision is not tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1952, 1956, 1959, type in. gage at ASME 1962, 1965, and to be construed as requiring an auto- 100°F. Code (Par. 1968 (Division 1) edi- matic changeover device. (37.8°C.) U±68, U± tions of ASME Code; 69) All editions of API± (2) Heaters shall be equipped with an ASME Code 3 approved regulator in the supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heat- 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100 100 100 100 125 er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be 125 125 125 156 provided with an excess flow valve to 150 150 150 187

211

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00211 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.154 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE F±31ÐContinued under which the container is designed and built (with a minimum factor of Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage safety of four) to withstand loading in For gases any direction equal to four times the with vapor 1949 edition of press. Not 1949 and ASME Code (Par. U± weight of the container and attach- Con- to exceed earlier edi- 200, U±201); 1950, ments when filled to the maximum per- tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1952, 1956, 1959, type in. gage at ASME 1962, 1965, and missible loaded weight. 100°F. Code (Par. 1968 (Division 1) edi- (4) Field welding where necessary (37.8°C.) U±68, U± tions of ASME Code; 69) All editions of API± shall be made only on saddle plates or ASME Code 3 brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank. 175 175 175 219 2 200 215 200 250 (n) When LP-Gas and one or more 1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au- other gases are stored or used in the thorized since Dec. 31, 1947. same area, the containers shall be 2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of marked to identify their content. the container type designation when constructed under 1949 Marking shall be in compliance with or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U±68 and U±69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of American National Standard Z48.1– the container type designation when constructed under: (1) 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U±200 and U±201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions Compressed Gas Containers To Identify of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API±ASME the Material Contained.’’ Code. 3 Construction of containers under the API±ASME Code is (o) Damage from vehicles. When dam- not authorized after July 1, 1961. age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular (3) Containers with foundations at- traffic is a possibility, precautions tached (portable or semiportable b con- against such damage shall be taken. tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993] industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be designed, installed, and used in accord- § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. ance with these rules subject to the fol- (a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be lowing provisions: supplied in sufficient quantities to (i) If they are to be used at a given maintain the health and safety of general location for a temporary period workmen. Where natural means of not to exceed 6 months they need not fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan- have fire-resisting foundations or sad- ical ventilation shall be provided. dles but shall have adequate ferrous (2) When heaters are used in confined metal supports. spaces, special care shall be taken to (ii) They shall not be located with provide sufficient ventilation in order the outside bottom of the container to ensure proper combustion, maintain shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above the health and safety of workmen, and the surface of the ground unless fire-re- limit temperature rise in the area. sisting supports are provided. (b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem- (iii) The bottom of the skids shall not porary heating devices shall be in- be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more stalled to provide clearance to combus- than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out- tible material not less than the side bottom of the container shell. amount shown in Table F–4. (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, and the like, having communication (2) Temporary heating devices, which with the interior of the container, shall are listed for installation with lesser be protected against physical damage. clearances than specified in Table F–4, (v) When not permanently located on may be installed in accordance with fire-resisting foundations, piping con- their approval. nections shall be sufficiently flexible TABLE F±4 to minimize the possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if the con- Minimum clearance, (inches) tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise Heating appliances Chimney displaced. Sides Rear con- (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of nector skids, shall be secured to the container Room heater, circulating in accordance with the code or rules type ...... 12 12 18

212

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00212 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.155

TABLE F±4ÐContinued (b) Closed container means a container so sealed by means of a lid or other de- Minimum clearance, (inches) vice that neither liquid nor vapor will Heating appliances Chimney escape from it at ordinary tempera- Sides Rear connector tures. (c) Combustible liquids mean any liq- Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 uid having a flash point at or above 140 ° ° ° ° (3) Heaters not suitable for use on F. (60 C.), and below 200 F. (93.4 C.). wood floors shall not be set directly (d) Combustion means any chemical upon them or other combustible mate- process that involves oxidation suffi- rials. When such heaters are used, they cient to produce light or heat. shall rest on suitable heat insulating (e) Fire brigade means an organized material or at least 1-inch concrete, or group of employees that are knowl- equivalent. The insulating material edgeable, trained, and skilled in the shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or safe evacuation of employees during more in all directions. emergency situations and in assisting (4) Heaters used in the vicinity of in fire fighting operations. combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or (f) Fire resistance means so resistant similar coverings shall be located at to fire that, for specified time and least 10 feet from the coverings. The under conditions of a standard heat in- coverings shall be securely fastened to tensity, it will not fail structurally and prevent ignition or upsetting of the will not permit the side away from the heater due to wind action on the cov- fire to become hotter than a specified ering or other material. temperature. For purposes of this part, (c) Stability. Heaters, when in use, fire resistance shall be determined by shall be set horizontally level, unless the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of otherwise permitted by the manufac- Building Construction and Materials, turer’s markings. NFPA 251–1969. (d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel (g) Flammable means capable of being salamanders are prohibited in buildings easily ignited, burning intensely, or and on scaffolds. having a rapid rate of flame spread. (e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable (h) Flammable liquids means any liq- liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped uid having a flash point below 140 °F. with a primary safety control to stop and having a vapor pressure not ex- the flow of fuel in the event of flame ceeding 40 pounds per square inch (ab- failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed solute) at 100 °F. shall not be considered a primary safety control. (i) Flash point of the liquid means the (2) Heaters designed for barometric temperature at which it gives off vapor or gravity oil feed shall be used only sufficient to form an ignitable mixture with the integral tanks. with the air near the surface of the liq- (3) [Reserved] uid or within the vessel used as deter- (4) Heaters specifically designed and mined by appropriate test procedure approved for use with separate supply and apparatus as specified below. tanks may be directly connected for (1) The flash point of liquids having a gravity feed, or an automatic pump, viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni- from a supply tank. versal Second(s) at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) and a flash point below 175 °F. (79.4 °C.) § 1926.155 Definitions applicable to shall be determined in accordance with this subpart. the Standard Method of Test for Flash (a) Approved, for the purpose of this Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM subpart, means equipment that has D–56–69. been listed or approved by a nationally (2) The flash point of liquids having a recognized testing laboratory such as viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec- Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or ond(s) or more at 175 °F. (79.4 °C.) or Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or higher shall be determined in accord- Federal agencies such as Bureau of ance with the Standard Method of Test Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens issue approvals for such equipment. Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69.

213

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00213 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.200 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the LP Gas mean and include any material lower yellow panel for additional sign which is composed predominantly of wording. Black lettering shall be used any of the following hydrocarbons, or for additional wording. mixtures of them, such as propane, propylene, butane (normal butane or iso- butane), and butylenes. (k) Portable tank means a closed container having a liquid capacity more than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended for fixed installation. (l) Safety can means an approved closed container, of not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a flash-arresting screen, spring-closing lid and spout cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure. (m) Vapor pressure means the pressure, measured in pounds per square inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of (3) Standard color of the background Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’ shall be yellow; and the panel, black (ASTM D–323–58). with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow background shall be black. The colors shall be those of Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and opaque glossy samples as specified in Barricades Table 1 of American National Standard Z53.1–1967. AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction (d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- quired, shall be lettered in legible red pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 letters, not less than 6 inches high, on U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s a white field and the principal stroke Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR of the letters shall be at least three- 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. fourths inch in width. § 1926.200 Accident prevention signs (e) Safety instruction signs. Safety in- and tags. struction signs, when used, shall be (a) General. Signs and symbols re- white with green upper panel with quired by this subpart shall be visible white letters to convey the principal at all times when work is being per- message. Any additional wording on formed, and shall be removed or cov- the sign shall be black letters on the ered promptly when the hazards no white background. longer exist. (f) Directional signs. Directional signs, (b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs (see other than automotive traffic signs Figure G–1) shall be used only where an specified in paragraph (g) of this sec- immediate hazard exists. tion, shall be white with a black panel (2) Danger signs shall have red as the and a white directional symbol. Any predominating color for the upper additional wording on the sign shall be panel; black outline on the borders; black letters on the white background. and a white lower panel for additional (g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction sign wording. areas shall be posted with legible traf- (c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs fic signs at points of hazard. (see Figure G–2) shall be used only to (2) All traffic control signs or devices warn against potential hazards or to used for protection of construction caution against unsafe practices. workmen shall conform to American (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as National Standards Institute D6.1–1971, the predominating color; black upper Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De- panel and borders: yellow lettering of vices for Streets and Highways.

214

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00214 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.200

(h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci- not be used in place of, or as a sub- dent prevention tags shall be used as a stitute for, accident prevention signs. temporary means of warning employ- (2) Specifications for accident pre- ees of an existing hazard, such as defec- vention tags similar to those in Table tive tools, equipment, etc. They shall G–1 shall apply.

(i) Additional rules. American Na- The employer shall comply with ANSI tional Standards Institute (ANSI) Z35.1–1968 and Z35.2–1968 with respect to Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Accident rules not specifically prescribed in this Prevention Signs, and Z35.2–1968, Speci- subpart. fications for Accident Prevention Tags, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, contain rules which are additional to 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993] the rules prescribed in this section.

215

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00215 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.201 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

§ 1926.201 Signaling. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (a) Flagmen. (1) When operations are Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR such that signs, signals, and barricades 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (50 FR 9033), do not provide the necessary protection as applicable. Section 1926.250 also issued on or adjacent to a highway or street, under 29 CFR Part 1911. flagmen or other appropriate traffic controls shall be provided. § 1926.250 General requirements for (2) Signaling directions by flagmen storage. shall conform to American National (a) General. (1) All materials stored in Standards Institute D6.1–1971, Manual tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for interlocked, or otherwise secured to Streets and Highways. prevent sliding, falling or collapse. (3) Hand signaling by flagmen shall (2) Maximum safe load limits of be by use of red flags at least 18 inches floors within buildings and structures, square or sign paddles, and in periods in pounds per square foot, shall be con- of darkness, red lights. spicuously posted in all storage areas, (4) Flagmen shall be provided with except for floor or slab on grade. Max- and shall wear a red or orange warning imum safe loads shall not be exceeded. garment while flagging. Warning gar- (3) Aisles and passageways shall be ments worn at night shall be of kept clear to provide for the free and reflectorized material. safe movement of material handling (b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula- equipment or employees. Such areas tions for crane and hoist signaling will shall be kept in good repair. be found in applicable American Na- (4) When a difference in road or work- tional Standards Institute standards. ing levels exist, means such as ramps, blocking, or grading shall be used to § 1926.202 Barricades. ensure the safe movement of vehicles Barricades for protection of employ- between the two levels. ees shall conform to the portions of the (b) Material storage. (1) Material American National Standards Institute stored inside buildings under construc- D6.1–1971, Manual on Uniform Traffic tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of Control Devices for Streets and High- any hoistway or inside floor openings, ways, relating to barricades. nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall which does not extend above the top of § 1926.203 Definitions applicable to the material stored. this subpart. (2) Each employee required to work (a) Barricade means an obstruction to on stored material in silos, hoppers, deter the passage of persons or vehi- tanks, and similar storage areas shall cles. be equipped with personal fall arrest (b) Signs are the warnings of hazard, equipment meeting the requirements temporarily or permanently affixed or of subpart M of this part. placed, at locations where hazards (3) Noncompatible materials shall be exist. segregated in storage. (c) Signals are moving signs, provided (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked by workers, such as flagmen, or by de- by stepping back the layers and cross- vices, such as flashing lights, to warn keying the bags at least every 10 bags of possible or existing hazards. high. (d) Tags are temporary signs, usually (5) Materials shall not be stored on attached to a piece of equipment or scaffolds or runways in excess of sup- part of a structure, to warn of existing plies needed for immediate operations. or immediate hazards. (6) Brick stacks shall not be more than 7 feet in height. When a loose Subpart H—Materials Handling, brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, Storage, Use, and Disposal it shall be tapered back 2 inches in every foot of height above the 4-foot AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours level. and Safety Standards Act (Construction (7) When masonry blocks are stacked Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be

216

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00216 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

tapered back one-half block per tier (3) Rigging equipment, when not in above the 6-foot level. use, shall be removed from the imme- (8) Lumber: diate work area so as not to present a (i) Used lumber shall have all nails hazard to employees. withdrawn before stacking. (4) Special custom design grabs, (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- and solidly supported sills. sories, for such units as modular pan- (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to els, prefabricated structures and simi- be stable and self-supporting. lar materials, shall be marked to indi- (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20 cate the safe working loads and shall feet in height provided that lumber to be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per- be handled manually shall not be cent of their rated load. stacked more than 16 feet high. (9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar (5) Scope. This section applies to stock, and other cylindrical materials, slings used in conjunction with other unless racked, shall be stacked and material handling equipment for the blocked so as to prevent spreading or movement of material by hoisting, in tilting. employments covered by this part. The (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall types of slings covered are those made be kept free from accumulation of ma- from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal terials that constitute hazards from mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor- (conventional three strand construc- age. Vegetation control will be exer- tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- cised when necessary. ester, and polypropylene). (d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- (6) Inspections. Each day before being able and powered dockboards shall be used, the sling and all fastenings and strong enough to carry the load im- attachments shall be inspected for posed on them. damage or defects by a competent per- (2) Portable dockboards shall be se- son designated by the employer. Addi- cured in position, either by being an- tional inspections shall be performed chored or equipped with devices which during sling use, where service condi- will prevent their slipping. tions warrant. Damaged or defective (3) Handholds, or other effective slings shall be immediately removed means, shall be provided on portable from service. dockboards to permit safe handling. (4) Positive protection shall be pro- (b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy vided to prevent railroad cars from steel chain slings shall have perma- being moved while dockboards or nently affixed durable identification bridge plates are in position. stating size, grade, rated capacity, and sling manufacturer. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear- 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, shaped links, welded or mechanical 1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. coupling links, or other attachments, 13, 1996] when used with alloy steel chains, shall have a rated capacity at least equal to § 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma- that of the chain. terial handling. (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or (a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for makeshift fasteners, formed from material handling shall be inspected bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach- prior to use on each shift and as nec- ments, shall not be used. essary during its use to ensure that it (4) Rated capacity (working load is safe. Defective rigging equipment limit) for alloy steel chain slings shall shall be removed from service. conform to the values shown in Table (2) Rigging equipment shall not be loaded in excess of its recommended H–1. safe working load, as prescribed in Ta- (5) Whenever wear at any point of bles H–1 through H–20 in this subpart, any chain link exceeds that shown in following § 1926.252(e) for the specific Table H–2, the assembly shall be re- equipment. moved from service.

217

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00217 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the of wires, or if the rope shows other inspection required by other para- signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or graphs of this section, a thorough peri- defect. odic inspection of alloy steel chain (5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are slings in use shall be made on a regular used to form eyes, Table H–20 shall be basis, to be determined on the basis of used to determine the number and (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity spacing of clips. of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts (i) When used for eye splices, the U- being made; and (D) experience gained bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’ on the service life of slings used in section is in contact with the dead end similar circumstances. Such inspec- of the rope. tions shall in no event be at intervals (6) Slings shall not be shortened with greater than once every 12 months. knots or bolts or other makeshift de- (ii) The employer shall make and vices. maintain a record of the most recent (7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. month in which each alloy steel chain (8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall sling was thoroughly inspected, and have the loads balanced to prevent slip- shall make such record available for page. examination. (9) Slings shall be padded or pro- (c) Wire rope. (1) Tables H–3 through tected from the sharp edges of their H–14 shall be used to determine the loads. safe working loads of various sizes and (10) Hands or fingers shall not be classifications of improved plow steel placed between the sling and its load wire rope and wire rope slings with var- while the sling is being tightened ious types of terminals. For sizes, clas- around the load. sifications, and grades not included in these tables, the safe working load rec- (11) Shock loading is prohibited. ommended by the manufacturer for (12) A sling shall not be pulled from specific, identifiable products shall be under a load when the load is resting followed, provided that a safety factor on the sling. of not less than 5 is maintained. (13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable (2) Protruding ends of strands in laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall splices on slings and bridles shall be have a minimum clear length of wire covered or blunted. rope 10 times the component rope di- (3) Wire rope shall not be secured by ameter between splices, sleeves or end knots, except on haul back lines on fittings. scrapers. (ii) Braided slings shall have a min- (4) The following limitations shall imum clear length of wire rope 40 times apply to the use of wire rope: the component rope diameter between (i) An eye splice made in any wire the loops or end fittings. rope shall have not less than three full (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid tucks. However, this requirement shall grommets and endless slings shall have not operate to preclude the use of an- a minimum circumferential length of other form of splice or connection 96 times their body diameter. which can be shown to be as efficient (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber and which is not otherwise prohibited. core wire rope slings of all grades shall (ii) Except for eye splices in the ends be permanently removed from service of wires and for endless rope slings, if they are exposed to temperatures in each wire rope used in hoisting or low- excess of 200°F (93.33°C). When nonfiber ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist core wire rope slings of any grade are of one continuous piece without knot used at temperatures above 400°F or splice. (204.44°C) or below minus 60°F (15.55°C), (iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, recommendations of the sling manufac- or bull wires shall not be formed by turer regarding use at that tempera- wire rope clips or knots. ture shall be followed. (iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of any length of eight diameters, the end attachments, except covers to total number of visible broken wires thimbles, shall be performed prior to exceeds 10 percent of the total number the assembly of the sling.

218

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00218 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

(ii) All welded end attachments shall slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec- not be used unless proof tested by the ommendations shall be followed. manufacturer or equivalent entity at (4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings twice their rated capacity prior to ini- shall not be used unless they have been tial use. The employer shall retain a spliced in accordance with the fol- certificate of the proof test, and make lowing minimum requirements and in it available for examination. accordance with any additional rec- (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber— ommendations of the manufacturer: (1) General. When using natural or syn- (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall thetic fiber rope slings, Tables H–15, 16, consist of at least three full tucks, and 17, and 18 shall apply. short splices shall consist of at least (2) All splices in rope slings provided six full tucks, three on each side of the by the employer shall be made in ac- splice center line. cordance with fiber rope manufacturers (ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye recommendations. splices shall consist of at least four full (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall tucks, and short splices shall consist of contain at least three full tucks, and at least eight full tucks, four on each short splices shall contain at least six side of the center line. full tucks (three on each side of the (iii) Strand end tails shall not be centerline of the splice). trimmed flush with the surface of the (ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye rope immediately adjacent to the full splices shall contain at least four full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber tucks, and short splices shall contain rope and both eye and short splices. at least eight full tucks (four on each For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in side of the centerline of the splice). diameter, the tail shall project at least (iii) Strand end tails shall not be six rope diameters beyond the last full trimmed short (flush with the surface tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in of the rope) immediately adjacent to diameter and larger, the tail shall the full tucks. This precaution applies project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be- to both eye and short splices and all yond the last full tuck. Where a pro- types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes jecting tail interferes with the use of under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall the sling, the tail shall be tapered and project at least six rope diameters be- spliced into the body of the rope using yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes at least two additional tucks (which 1-inch diameter and larger, the tails will require a tail length of approxi- shall project at least 6 inches beyond mately six rope diameters beyond the the last full tuck. In applications last full tuck). where the projecting tails may be ob- (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a jectionable, the tails shall be tapered minimum clear length of rope between and spliced into the body of the rope eye splices equal to 10 times the rope using at least two additional tucks diameter. (which will require a tail length of ap- (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of proximately six rope diameters beyond splices. the last full tuck). (vi) Clamps not designed specifically (iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall for fiber ropes shall not be used for be sufficiently large to provide an in- splicing. cluded angle of not greater than 60° at (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall the splice when the eye is placed over be of such size to provide an included the load or support. angle of not greater than 60 degrees at (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of the splice when the eye is placed over splices. the load or support. (3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- shall not be used if end attachments in cept for wet frozen slings, may be used contact with the rope have sharp edges in a temperature range from minus or projections. 20°F (-28.88°C) to plus 180°F (82.2°C) (6) Removal from service. Natural and without decreasing the working load synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im- limit. For operations outside this tem- mediately removed from service if any perature range and for wet frozen of the following conditions are present:

219

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00219 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(i) Abnormal wear. vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of (ii) Powdered fiber between strands. caustics are present. (iii) Broken or cut fibers. (iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- (iv) Variations in the size or round- tings shall not be used where fumes, ness of strands. vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of (v) Discoloration or rotting. caustics are present. (vi) Distortion of hardware in the (7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- sling. thetic web slings of polyester and (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester, nylon shall not be used at tempera- and polypropylene). (1) The employer tures in excess of 180°F (82.2°C). Poly- shall have each synthetic web sling propylene web slings shall not be used marked or coded to show: ° (i) Name or trademark of manufac- at temperatures in excess of 200 F ° turer. (93.33 C). (ii) Rated capacities for the type of (8) Removal from service. Synthetic hitch. web slings shall be immediately re- (iii) Type of material. moved from service if any of the fol- (2) Rated capacity shall not be ex- lowing conditions are present: ceeded. (i) Acid or caustic burns; (3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall (ii) Melting or charring of any part of be of uniform thickness and width and the sling surface; selvage edges shall not be split from (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; the webbing’s width. (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or (4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: (v) Distortion of fittings. (i) Of a minimum breaking strength (f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Table H–19 equal to that of the sling; and shall be used to determine the safe (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could working loads of various sizes of shack- in any way damage the webbing. les, except that higher safe working (5) Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes. Stitching loads are permissible when rec- shall be the only method used to at- ommended by the manufacturer for tach end fittings to webbing and to specific, identifiable products, provided form eyes. The thread shall be in an that a safety factor of not less than 5 is even pattern and contain a sufficient maintained. number of stitches to develop the full (2) The manufacturer’s recommenda- breaking strength of the sling. tions shall be followed in determining (6) Environmental conditions. When the safe working loads of the various synthetic web slings are used, the fol- sizes and types of specific and identifi- lowing precautions shall be taken: able hooks. All hooks for which no ap- (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used plicable manufacturer’s recommenda- where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or tions are available shall be tested to liquids of acids or phenolics are twice the intended safe working load present. before they are initially put into use. (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web The employer shall maintain a record slings shall not be used where fumes, of the dates and results of such tests.

TABLE H±1ÐRATED CAPACITY (WORKING LOAD LIMIT), FOR ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS 1 Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds [Horizontal angles shown in parentheses] (2)

Single Double sling vertical angle (1) Triple and quadruple sling branch vertical angle (1) Chain size (inches) slingÐ 30° 45° 60° 90° ° ° ° 30° 45° 60° loading (60 ) (45 ) (30 ) (60°) (45°) (30°)

1¤4 ...... 3,250 5,560 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900 3¤8 ...... 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900 1¤2 ...... 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000 5¤8 ...... 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500 3¤4 ...... 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500 7¤8 ...... 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000 1 ...... 38,750 67,100 54,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000 11¤8 ...... 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500

220

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00220 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

TABLE H±1ÐRATED CAPACITY (WORKING LOAD LIMIT), FOR ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS 1Ð Continued Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds [Horizontal angles shown in parentheses] (2)

11¤4 ...... 57,500 99,500 81,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000 13¤8 ...... 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500 11¤2 ...... 80,000 138,000 112,500 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500 13¤4 ...... 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000 1 Other grades of proof tested steel chain include Proof Coil, BBB Coil and Hi-Test Chain. These grades are not recommended for overhead lifting and therefore are not covered by this code. (1) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading measured as the included angle between the inclined leg and the vertical. (2) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of the load.

TABLE H±2ÐMAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT TABLE H±2ÐMAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT ANY POINT OF LINK ANY POINT OF LINKÐContinued

Maximum Maximum Chain size (inches) allowable Chain size (inches) allowable wear (inch) wear (inch)

3 1¤4 ...... 3¤64 1 ...... ¤16 1 8 7 32 3¤8 ...... 5¤64 1 ¤ ...... ¤ 11¤4 ...... 1¤4 1¤2 ...... 7¤64 13¤8 ...... 9¤32 5¤8 ...... 9¤64 11¤2 ...... 5¤16 3¤4 ...... 5¤32 13¤4 ...... 11¤32 7¤8 ...... 11¤64

TABLE H±3ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS 6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with Fiber Core (FC)

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

1 Dia. Vertical Choker Vertical basket (inches) Constr. HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S

1¤4 6×19 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1 5¤16 6×19 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7 3¤8 6×19 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4 7¤16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3 1¤2 6×19 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 1.6 3.7 3.9 4.3 9¤16 6×19 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4 5¤8 6×19 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.2 6.7 3¤4 6×19 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.8 9.5 7¤8 6×19 5.1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0 1 6×19 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0 11¤8 6×19 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0 11¤4 6×37 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0 13¤8 6×37 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0 11¤2 6×37 14.0 16.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0 15¤8 6×37 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 37.0 41.0 13¤4 6×37 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 2 6×37 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0

1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope. HT=Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use values in HT columns. MS=Mechanical Splice. S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.

221

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00221 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE H±4ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS 6×19 AND 6×37 CLASSIFICATION IMPROVED PLOW STEEL GRADE ROPE WITH INDEPENDENT WIRE ROPE CORE (IWRC)

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1 Dia. Constr. (inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S

1¤4 6×19 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2 5¤16 6×19 0.81 0.87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8 3¤8 6×19 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6 7¤16 6×19 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.1 3.4 3.5 1¤2 6×19 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6 9¤16 6×19 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2.1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8 5¤8 6×19 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2 3¤4 6×19 4.2 4.9 5.1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0 7¤8 6×19 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0 1 6×19 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0 11¤8 6×19 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0 11¤4 6×37 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0 13¤8 6×37 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 12.0 25.0 29.0 32.0 11¤2 6×37 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0 15¤8 6×37 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 41.0 44.0 13¤4 6×37 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 41.0 47.0 51.0 2 6×37 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope. HT=Hand Tucked Splice: For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use Table H±3 values in HT column. MS=Mechanical Splice. S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.

TABLE H±5ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE TABLE H±5ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS LEG SLINGSÐContinued Cable Laid RopeÐMechanical Splice Only Cable Laid RopeÐMechanical Splice Only 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Dia. Vertical Constr. Vertical Choker Dia. Constr. Vertical Choker Vertical (inches) basket 1 (inches) basket 1

1 × × ¤4 7 7 7 0.50 0.38 1.0 7¤8 2 7×6×19 5.0 3.8 10.0 3¤8 7×7×7 1.1 0.81 2.2 1 2 7×6×19 6.4 4.8 13.0 1¤2 7×7×7 1.8 1.4 3.7 11¤8 2 7×6×19 7.7 5.8 15.0 5¤8 7×7×7 2.8 2.1 5.5 11¤4 2 7×6×19 9.2 6.9 18.0 3¤4 7×7×7 3.8 2.9 7.6 15¤16 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.5 20.0 5¤8 7×7×19 2.9 2.2 5.8 13¤8 2 7×6×19 11.0 8.2 22.0 3¤4 7×7×19 4.1 3.0 8.1 11¤2 2 7×6×19 13.0 9.6 26.0 7¤8 7×7×19 5.4 4.0 11.0 × × 1 7 7 19 6.9 5.1 14.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio in 10 or great- 11¤8 7×7×19 8.2 6.2 16.0 er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of 11¤4 7×7×19 9.9 7.4 20.0 the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope. 3¤4 2 7×6×19 3.8 2.8 7.6 2 IWRC.

TABLE H±6ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS 8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope 6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Basket vertical Vertical Choker ° 1 Diameter (inches) Constr. to 30 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part

3¤32 ...... 6×7 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55 1¤8 ...... 6×7 0.76 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98 3¤16 ...... 6×7 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2 3¤32 ...... 7×7 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67 1¤8 ...... 7×7 0.95 0.71 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2 3¤16 ...... 7×7 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7 3¤16 ...... 6×19 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2

222

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00222 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

TABLE H±6ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGSÐContinued 8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope 6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Basket vertical Vertical Choker ° 1 Diameter (inches) Constr. to 30 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part

1¤4 ...... 6×19 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0 5¤16 ...... 6×19 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2 3¤8 ...... 6×19 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9 7¤16 ...... 6×19 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0 1¤2 ...... 6×19 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0 9¤16 ...... 6×19 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0 5¤8 ...... 6×19 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0 3¤4 ...... 6×19 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0 7¤8 ...... 6×19 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0 1 ...... 6×19 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of component rope.

TABLE H±7ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS 6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

Dia. °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 (inches) Constr. 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS

1¤4 6×19 0.85 0.88 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.7 5¤16 6×19 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2 3¤8 6×19 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7 7¤16 6×19 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3 1¤2 6×19 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0 9¤16 6×19 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7 5¤8 6×19 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6 3¤4 6×19 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6 7¤8 6×19 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9 1 6×19 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0 11¤8 6×19 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.5 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0 11¤4 6×37 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0 13¤8 6×37 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0 11¤2 6×37 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 41.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0 15¤8 6×37 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 13¤4 6×37 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0 2 6×37 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 41.0 HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice. 1 Vertical angles. 2 Horizontal angles.

TABLE H±8ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS 6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings Dia. °1 (60°)2 45° angle 60°1 (30°)2 30°1 (60°)2 45° angle 60°1 (30°)2 (inches) Constr. 30 HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS

1¤4 6×19 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84 5¤16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 1.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 3¤8 6×19 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9 7¤16 6×19 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5 1¤2 6×19 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3 9¤16 6×19 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.1 5¤8 6×19 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1

223

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00223 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE H±8ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGSÐContinued 6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

Dia. °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 (inches) Constr. 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS

3¤4 6×19 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3 7¤8 6×19 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9 1 6×19 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0 11¤8 6×19 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0 11¤4 6×37 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 13¤8 6×37 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0 11¤2 6×37 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0 15¤8 6×37 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0 13¤4 6×37 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0 2 6×37 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0 HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice. 1 Vertical angles. 2 Horizontal angles.

TABLE H±9ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS Cable Laid RopeÐMechanical Splice Only 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle sling 3-leg bridle sling Dia. (inches) Constr. 30°1 45° 60°1 30°1 45° 60°1 (60°)2 angle (30°)2 (60°)2 angle (30°)2

1¤4 ...... 7×7×7 ...... 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75 3¤8 ...... 7×7×7 ...... 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6 1¤2 ...... 7×7×7 ...... 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8 5¤8 ...... 7×7×7 ...... 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2 3¤4 ...... 7×7×7 ...... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 5.7 5¤8 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3 3¤4 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1 7¤8 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8.1 1 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0 11¤8 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0 11¤4 ...... 7×7×19 ...... 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0 3¤4 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7 7¤8 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5 1 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6 11¤8 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0 11¤4 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0 15¤16 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0 13¤8 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0 11¤2 ...... 7×6×19 IWRC ...... 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0 1 Vertical angles. 2 Horizontal angles.

TABLE H±10ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS 8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope 6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

Dia. °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 °1 ° 2 ° °1 ° 2 (inches) Constr. 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) 30 (60 ) 45 angle 60 (30 ) 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part

3¤32 6×7 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48 1¤8 6×7 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85 3¤16 6×7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9

224

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00224 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

TABLE H±10ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGSÐContinued 8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope 6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

3¤32 7×7 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58 1¤8 7×7 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1 3¤16 7×7 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3 3¤16 6×19 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9 1¤4 6×19 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4 5¤16 6×19 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4 3¤8 6×19 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7 7¤16 6×19 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.9 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0 1¤2 6×19 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0 9¤16 6×19 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0 5¤8 6×19 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 19.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0 3¤4 6×19 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0 7¤8 6×19 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0 1 6×19 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 22.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70.0 53.0 1 Vertical angles. 2 Horizontal angles.

TABLE H±11ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H±12ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE LAID GROMMETÐHAND TUCKED LAID GROMMETÐHAND TUCKEDÐContinued Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×6×7 and 7×6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 7×7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

Dia. Constr. Vertical Choker Vertical Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) (inches) basket 1 Dia. Vertical 1 Constr. Vertical Choker ¤4 7×19 0.85 0.64 1.7 (inches) basket 1 5¤16 7×19 1.3 1.0 2.6 3 × ¤8 7 19 1.9 1.4 3.8 3¤4 7×6×19 5.1 3.8 10.0 7 × ¤16 7 19 2.6 1.9 5.2 15¤16 7×6×19 7.9 5.9 16.0 1¤2 7×19 3.3 2.5 6.7 11¤8 7×6×19 11.0 8.4 22.0 9¤16 7×19 4.2 3.1 8.4 15¤16 7×6×19 15.0 11.0 30.0 5¤8 7×19 5.2 3.9 10.00 11¤2 7×6×19 19.0 14.0 39.0 3¤4 7×19 7.4 5.6 15.0 111¤16 7×6×19 24.0 18.0 49.0 7¤8 7×19 10.0 7.5 20.0 7 × × 1 7×19 13.0 9.7 26.0 1 ¤8 7 6 19 30.0 22.0 60.0 1 × × 11¤8 7×19 16.0 12.0 32.0 2 ¤4 7 6 19 42.0 31.0 84.0 5 11¤4 7×37 18.0 14.0 37.0 2 ¤8 7×6×19 56.0 42.0 112.0 13¤8 7×37 22.0 16.0 44.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater 11¤2 7×37 26.0 19.0 52.0 where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater bent. d=Diameter of cable body. where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. d=Diameter of rope body. TABLE H±13ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT TABLE H±12ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope LAID GROMMETÐHAND TUCKED 7×6×7 and 7×6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope × × 7 7 7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope Dia. Constr. Vertical Choker Vertical (inches) basket 1 Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 1¤4 2 6×19 0.92 0.69 1.8 3 2 × Dia. Constr. Vertical Choker Vertical ¤8 6 19 2.0 1.5 4.1 (inches) basket 1 1¤2 2 6×19 3.6 2.7 7.2 5¤8 2 6×19 5.6 4.2 11.0 3¤8 7×6×7 1.3 0.95 2.5 3¤4 2 6×19 8.0 6.0 16.0 9¤16 7×6×7 2.8 2.1 5.6 7¤8 2 6×19 11.0 8.1 21.0 5¤8 7×6×7 3.8 2.8 7.6 2 × 3¤8 7×7×7 1.6 1.2 3.2 1 6 19 14.0 10.0 28.0 1 2 × 9¤16 7×7×7 3.5 2.6 6.9 1 ¤8 6 19 18.0 13.0 35.0 1 2 5¤8 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.0 1 ¤4 6×37 21.0 15.0 41.0 5¤8 7×6×19 3.9 3.0 7.9 13¤8 2 6×37 25.0 19.0 50.0

225

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00225 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE H±13ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H±14ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINTÐ LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINTÐ Continued Continued Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Grade Rope Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Dia. Constr. Vertical Choker Vertical (inches) basket 1 Dia. Vertical Constr. Vertical Choker 1 11¤2 2 6×37 29.0 22.0 59.0 (inches) basket

1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater 5¤8 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.1 where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. 3¤4 7×7×7 6.3 4.7 12.0 d=Diameter of rope body. 5¤8 7×7×19 4.7 3.5 9.5 2 IWRC. 3¤4 7×7×19 6.7 5.0 13.0 7¤8 7×7×19 8.9 6.6 18.0 TABLE H±14ÐRATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE 1 7×7×19 11.0 8.5 22.0 1 × × LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT 1 ¤8 7 7 19 14.0 10.0 28.0 11¤4 7×7×19 17.0 12.0 33.0 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade 3¤4 2 7×6×19 6.2 4.7 12.0 Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel 7 2 × × Grade Rope ¤8 7 6 19 8.3 6.2 16.0 1 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.9 21.0 1 2 × × Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 1 ¤8 7 6 19 13.0 9.7 26.0 11¤4 2 7×6×19 16.0 12.0 31.0 Dia. Vertical 13¤8 2 7×6×19 18.0 14.0 37.0 Constr. Vertical Choker 1 (inches) basket 11¤2 2 7×6×19 22.0 16.0 43.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d value is 5 or great- 1¤4 7×7×7 0.83 0.62 1.6 er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body 3 × × ¤8 7 7 7 1.8 1.3 3.5 is bent. d=Diameter of cable body. 1¤2 7×7×7 3.0 2.3 6.1 2 IWRC.

226

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00226 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251 ) ) ° ° 950 1,500 8,000 1,200 2,300 2,800 2,000 9,500 5,400 3,200 3,800 5,500 4,800 2,000 3,200 6,700 4,300 4,900 1,600 3,800 2,700 1,200 (60 (60 13,000 15,000 16,500 11,000 18,500 ° ° 30 30 ) ) ° ° 6,700 2,800 4,600 6,100 6,900 3,800 2,200 1,800 3,300 3,900 2,800 1,400 9,400 2,200 5,400 7,700 4,600 5,400 7,700 1,700 (45 (45 26,500 18,500 21,000 23,500 11,500 16,000 13,500 ° ° 45 45 ) ) ° ° 2,600 4,100 2,700 6,600 9,400 9,500 2,100 8,200 2,200 3,400 4,800 3,400 1,700 5,600 7,500 8,400 4,700 5,600 6,600 (30 (30 22,500 25,500 29,000 11,500 14,000 19,500 32,500 16,500 ° ° 60 60 ) ) ° ° (0 (0 2,500 3,900 5,600 4,000 1,900 8,600 9,700 5,400 6,400 7,600 3,000 9,500 4,700 6,500 3,200 7,600 2,400 Endless sling Endless sling Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° ° 26,000 29,500 33,500 13,500 16,000 22,500 37,500 19,000 11,000 11,000 90 90 750 800 600 600 950 500 2,400 9,500 1,600 4,800 1,900 2,700 2,700 1,200 1,400 1,000 6,500 7,400 8,400 2,200 2,400 3,300 4,100 5,600 1,400 1,600 1,900 hitch hitch Choker Choker 950 1,200 2,000 2,300 2,800 2,000 3,200 3,800 1,500 4,800 3,200 4,300 4,900 6,700 8,100 9,500 1,600 3,800 5,400 2,700 5,500 1,200 13,000 15,000 16,500 11,000 18,500 hitch hitch Vertical Vertical ) ) LINGS LINGS ° ° 850 900 550 700 700 S S 2,600 1,800 2,400 2,700 3,700 4,500 5,300 1,500 1,100 1,300 1,500 1,100 7,200 8,200 9,300 6,200 2,100 3,000 1,800 2,100 3,000 (60 (60 10,500 ° ° 30 30 OPE OPE R R ) ) ° ° 750 950 1,000 1,800 3,000 4,300 4,300 1,200 3,700 1,500 2,200 1,600 2,600 3,400 3,800 5,200 6,400 7,500 8,800 1,200 2,100 2,600 3,000 (45 (45 10,000 11,500 13,000 14,500 YLON ANILA ° ° Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=5) Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=9) 45 45 ) ) ° ° 900 1,900 2,700 1,900 4,200 4,700 6,400 7,800 1,500 2,600 3,100 3,700 1,200 1,500 4,600 1,200 2,300 3,100 9,200 3,600 5,200 5,300 (30 (30 H±16ÐN 10,500 18,000 12,500 14,000 16,000 H±15ÐM ° ° 60 60 ABLE ABLE ) ) T ° ° T [Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses] [Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses] (0 (0 1,700 5,300 1,400 3,600 4,200 6,000 6,100 2,200 2,600 3,100 2,200 4,800 5,400 7,400 9,000 1,800 3,000 3,600 4,200 1,100 1,400 Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° ° 14,500 16,500 18,500 10,500 12,500 21,000 Eye and eye sling Eye and eye sling 90 90 550 650 750 550 450 750 900 250 350 400 350 900 1,100 1,300 3,600 4,100 4,700 1,200 1,400 1,850 2,300 2,700 3,100 1,100 1,500 1,500 5,200 hitch hitch Choker Choker 850 700 900 550 700 2,600 7,200 8,200 9,300 1,800 2,400 2,700 3,700 4,500 5,300 1,100 1,300 1,500 1,100 6,200 2,100 3,000 1,500 1,800 2,100 3,000 10,500 hitch hitch Vertical Vertical 4,400 5,400 6,500 7,700 9,880 2,650 6,080 7,600 9,000 3,450 31,000 10,500 15,000 13,490 16,150 19,000 27,360 23,750 36,000 41,000 46.500 52,000 12,000 13,500 18,500 22,500 26,500 strength strength breaking breaking Minimum Minimum in pounds in pounds 7.5 6.5 8.3 36.0 41.7 59.9 74.6 89.3 27.0 26.0 10.4 13.3 16.7 19.5 22.5 31.3 47.9 10.5 14.5 17.0 20.0 29.0 125.0 146.0 166.7 190.8 107.5 pounds pounds Nominal Nominal 100 ft. in 100 ft. in weight per weight per 2 8 4 8 2 8 4 8 8 4 2 8 4 3 4 2 8 1 2 1 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 1 5 3 7 1 5 3 7 1 1 1 5 3 1 1 1 5 9 9 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 13 13 1 1 1 inches inches ameter ameter Rope di- Rope di- nominal in nominal in

227

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00227 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition) ) ) ° ° 7,100 8,900 1,500 2,900 4,200 1,900 6,300 5,600 6,300 2,400 3,400 4,800 8,200 7,100 1,200 (60 (60 17,500 17,500 15,000 13,000 15,000 20,000 24,000 26,500 31,000 12,500 11,000 10,000 ° ° 30 30 ) ) ° ° 5,900 2,700 7,900 3,400 4,800 2,200 8,900 8,900 4,200 6,900 1,700 (45 (45 17,500 15,500 21,000 18,000 28,500 33,500 37,500 43,500 14,000 12,000 10,000 24,500 24,500 10,000 12,500 21,500 ° ° 45 45 ) ) ° ° 8,400 2,100 7,200 2,600 3,300 9,700 4,100 5,100 5,900 (30 (30 30,500 30,500 26,500 11,000 12,500 11,000 15,500 17,500 14,000 12,500 21,500 19,000 27,500 22,500 35,000 41,000 46,000 53,500 ° ° 60 60 ) ) ° ° (0 (0 3,000 3,800 4,800 5,900 6,800 8,400 9,700 2,400 Endless sling Endless sling Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° ° 24,500 21,500 35,000 35,000 29,500 26,000 12,500 14,500 11,000 12,500 18,000 40,500 47,500 53,000 61,500 30,500 20,000 16,500 14,500 90 90 600 750 950 2,100 7,600 5,000 4,100 2,400 3,600 6,200 5,400 8,700 8,700 7,400 6,400 3,100 3,600 2,800 3,200 4,400 1,200 1,500 1,700 10,000 12,000 13,500 15,500 hitch hitch Choker Choker 1,500 1,900 2,900 4,200 6,300 7,100 5,600 6,300 8,900 8,200 2,400 3,400 4,800 7,100 1,200 12,500 11,000 17,500 17,500 15,000 13,000 20,000 24,000 26,500 31,000 15,000 10,000 hitch hitch Vertical Vertical LINGS S ) ) ° ° ÐContinued 700 850 2,300 8,400 3,500 4,000 5,600 3,100 3,500 4,900 1,300 1,900 6,900 6,000 9,700 1,100 9,700 8,200 7,200 4,500 1,600 2,700 4,000 (60 (60 11,000 13,000 15,000 17,000 ° ° OPE R 30 30 LINGS S ) ) ° ° 950 9,700 8,500 1,200 6,400 3,800 5,600 3,300 1,500 5,000 5,600 7,900 4,400 5,000 7,000 1,900 2,300 2,700 (45 (45 OPE 13,500 13,500 11,500 10,000 12,000 16,000 18,500 21,000 24,000 ° ° Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=9) Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=9) R 45 45 OLYESTER ) ) ° ° YLON 1,800 6,000 6,900 5,400 6,100 8,600 2,300 2,800 3,300 1,200 4,000 1,500 9,700 7,900 4,700 6,900 (30 (30 14,500 19,500 23,000 25,500 29,500 17,000 17,000 12,000 14,500 10,400 12,500 ° ° H±17ÐP 60 60 H±16ÐN ) ) ° ° [Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses] [Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses] ABLE (0 (0 4,600 1,700 9,100 5,400 7,900 2,100 7,000 7,900 6,200 7,000 9,900 2,600 3,300 3,800 1,400 T Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° ° 19,500 19,500 11,000 13,500 16,500 12,000 14,500 17,000 22,500 26,500 29,500 34,000 Eye and eye sling Eye and eye sling 90 90 ABLE T 550 650 800 950 350 400 5,600 6,600 7,400 8,600 4,900 1,200 4,900 1,700 2,000 2,800 3,400 4,100 1,600 1,800 2,500 3,000 3,600 4,200 2,300 1,300 2,000 hitch hitch Choker Choker 850 700 9,700 2,300 9,700 3,500 4,000 5,600 6,900 8,200 3,100 3,500 4,900 6,000 7,200 1,100 8,400 4,500 1,300 1,600 1,900 2,700 4,000 11,000 13,000 15,000 17,100 hitch hitch Vertical Vertical 9,500 6,080 7,600 76,000 40,850 11,875 14,725 17,100 24,225 35,625 87,400 20,900 87,400 31,350 35,625 50,350 61,750 74,100 28,025 31,540 44,460 54,150 64,410 100,700 118,750 133,000 153,900 strength strength breaking breaking Minimum Minimum in pounds in pounds 8.0 34.0 40.0 55.0 68.0 83.0 40.0 46.3 66.8 82.0 98.0 95.0 30.5 45.0 10.2 13.0 17.5 21.0 25.0 34.5 52.5 109.0 129.0 149.0 168.0 135.0 118.0 pounds pounds Nominal Nominal 100 ft. in 100 ft. in weight per weight per 2 8 4 8 8 4 2 8 4 8 4 2 8 8 4 2 8 4 8 2 1 2 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 16 16 16 16 16 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 1 5 3 7 1 1 1 5 3 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 3 1 9 5 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 13 1 1 1 inches inches ameter ameter Rope di- Rope di- nominal in nominal in

228

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00228 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251 ) ° 1,500 8,500 2,400 2,800 1,800 6,700 4,000 5,200 6,000 3,300 4,600 1,200 (60 15,000 17,500 20,500 23,000 26,000 19,500 12,500 23,000 25,500 10,500 ° 30 ) ° 5,600 7,400 4,600 2,100 3,400 4,000 2,500 8,500 6,500 9,500 1,700 (45 17,500 24,500 32,500 36,500 29,000 33,000 37,000 14,500 21,000 12,000 28,000 ° 45 ) ° 2,500 4,900 7,900 2,100 6,900 4,200 3,100 9,000 5,700 (30 25,500 10,500 14,500 18,000 34,000 11,500 21,000 30,100 39,500 44,500 35,000 40,000 45,000 ° 60 ) ° (0 4,900 3,500 6,600 2,900 8,000 5,600 9,100 2,400 Endless sling Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° 24,500 29,500 35,000 10,500 12,000 17,000 45,500 51,500 40,500 46,500 52,000 39,500 20,500 13,500 90 750 600 900 2,000 9,900 5,100 2,300 3,400 6,100 7,400 1,200 1,400 8,700 2,600 3,000 4,200 1,600 11,500 13,000 10,000 11,500 13,000 hitch Choker 2,400 2,800 1,800 1,500 4,000 5,200 6,000 8,500 3,300 4,600 6,700 1,200 12,500 15,000 17,500 20,500 23,000 26,000 23,000 25,500 19,500 10,500 hitch LINGS Vertical S ) ° 800 650 OPE 2,200 2,900 3,300 4,700 5,700 1,800 6,800 8,200 1,300 1,600 1,000 9,700 2,500 3,700 (60 R 12,500 14,500 11,500 13,000 14,500 11,000 ° 30 ) ° 950 9,600 2,200 1,400 3,600 5,300 1,100 3,100 1,900 4,100 4,700 6,700 8,100 2,600 (45 11,500 13,500 15,500 18,000 20,000 16,000 18,000 20,500 ° Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=6) 45 OLYPROPYLENE ) ° 2,300 5,000 5,800 8,100 3,200 1,200 1,400 3,800 2,700 1,700 9,900 4,400 6,400 (30 22,000 24,500 19,500 22,500 25,000 14,500 12,000 16,500 19,000 ° 60 H±18ÐP ) ° [Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses] (0 1,600 4,400 5,100 7,400 2,700 3,100 2,000 5,800 6,700 9,400 3,600 1,300 Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal ° 16,500 11,500 13,500 19,500 25,500 28,500 22,000 22,500 26,000 29,000 ABLE Eye and eye sling T 90 700 800 500 900 350 400 5,700 6,400 7,200 1,100 4,100 1,500 1,700 2,400 2,900 3,400 4,800 1,300 1,900 6,300 7,100 5,500 hitch Choker 800 650 2,200 8,200 2,900 3,300 4,700 5,700 6,800 9,700 1,300 1,600 1,000 1,800 2,500 3,700 12,500 14,500 11,000 11,500 13,000 14,500 hitch Vertical 8,075 9,405 3,990 5,890 4,845 10,925 15,200 22,325 13,300 49,400 76,000 85,500 17,385 19,950 28,215 34,200 40,850 57,950 65,550 101,650 115,900 130,150 strength breaking Minimum in pounds 4.7 6.1 7.5 23.7 27.0 38.5 47.5 57.0 80.0 92.0 18.0 69.0 10.7 12.7 15.0 20.4 30.5 157.0 181.0 205.0 107.0 120.0 pounds Nominal 100 ft. in weight per 2 8 4 8 4 2 8 8 4 2 8 4 8 4 2 8 1 2 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 16 16 16 16 ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ 1 5 3 7 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 3 1 1 1 5 9 1 5 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 13 1 1 inches ameter Rope di- nominal in

229

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00229 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.252 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE H±19ÐSAFE WORKING LOADS FOR (d) Disposal of waste material or de- SHACKLES bris by burning shall comply with local [In tons of 2,000 pounds] fire regulations. (e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and Pin diame- Safe work- Material size (inches ter (inches) ing load flammable liquids shall be kept in fire resistant covered containers until re- 1¤2 ...... 5¤8 1.4 moved from worksite. 5¤8 ...... 3¤4 2.2 3¤4 ...... 7¤8 3.2 7¤8 ...... 1 4.3 Subpart I—Tools—Hand and 1 ...... 11¤8 5.6 11¤8 ...... 11¤4 6.7 Power 11¤4 ...... 13¤8 8.2 3 1 1 ¤8 ...... 1 ¤2 10.0 AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours 1 5 1 ¤2 ...... 1 ¤8 11.9 and Safety Standards Act (Construction 13¤4 ...... 2 16.2 Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8 2 ...... 21¤4 21.2 Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- TABLE H±20ÐNUMBER AND SPACING OF U- bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Number of clips Improved plow steel, rope Minimum diameter (inches) Drop Other spacing § 1926.300 General requirements. forged material (inches) (a) Condition of tools. All hand and 1¤2 ...... 3 4 3 power tools and similar equipment, 5¤8 ...... 3 4 33¤4 whether furnished by the employer or 3¤4 ...... 4 5 41¤2 7¤8 ...... 4 5 51¤4 the employee, shall be maintained in a 1 ...... 5 6 6 safe condition. 11¤8 ...... 6 6 63¤4 (b) Guarding. (1) When power operated 11¤4 ...... 6 7 71¤2 13¤8 ...... 7 7 81¤4 tools are designed to accommodate 11¤2 ...... 7 8 9 guards, they shall be equipped with such guards when in use. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993] sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating § 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. or moving parts of equipment shall be (a) Whenever materials are dropped guarded if such parts are exposed to more than 20 feet to any point lying contact by employees or otherwise cre- outside the exterior walls of the build- ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or requirements as set forth in American equivalent material, shall be used. For National Standards Institute, B15.1– the purpose of this paragraph, an en- 1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan- closed chute is a slide, closed in on all ical Power-Transmission Apparatus. sides, through which material is moved (3) Types of guarding. One or more from a high place to a lower one. methods of machine guarding shall be (b) When debris is dropped through provided to protect the operator and holes in the floor without the use of other employees in the machine area chutes, the area onto which the mate- from hazards such as those created by rial is dropped shall be completely en- point of operation, ingoing nip points, closed with barricades not less than 42 rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. inches high and not less than 6 feet Examples of guarding methods are— back from the projected edge of the barrier guards, two-hand tripping de- opening above. Signs warning of the vices, electronic safety devices, etc. hazard of falling materials shall be (4) Point of operation guarding. (i) posted at each level. Removal shall not Point of operation is the area on a ma- be permitted in this lower area until chine where work is actually performed debris handling ceases above. upon the material being processed. (c) All scrap lumber, waste material, (ii) The point of operation of ma- and rubbish shall be removed from the chines whose operation exposes an em- immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity

230

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00230 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.300

with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger zone during the operating cycle. (iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of material with- Figure I–1 Figure I–2 out the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in Correct lieu of other guarding required by this Showing adjustable tongue giving required angle protection for all sizes of wheel section, but can only be used to supple- used. ment protection provided. (iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require point of operation guarding: (a) Guillotine cutters. (b) Shears. (c) Alligator shears. (d) Power presses. (e) Milling machines. (f) Power saws. Figure I–3 Figure I–4 (g) Jointers. (h) Portable power tools. Correct (i) Forming rolls and calenders. Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for the (5) Exposure of blades. When the pe- smallest size wheel used. riphery of the blades of a fan is less than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or working level, the blades shall be guarded. The guard shall have openings no larger than 1/2 inch (1.27 cm). (6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- chines designed for a fixed location shall be securely anchored to prevent walking or moving. (7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin- Figure I–5 Figure I–6 ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards of the types described in paragraphs (b) Incorrect (8) and (9) of this section, where the op- Showing movable guard with size of opening erator stands in front of the opening, correct for full size wheel but too large shall be constructed so that the periph- for smaller wheel. eral protecting member can be ad- (8) Bench and floor stands. The angu- justed to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum an- lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- gular exposure above the horizontal riphery and sides for safety guards used plane of the wheel spindle as specified on machines known as bench and floor in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec- stands should not exceed 90° or one- tion shall never be exceeded, and the fourth of the periphery. This exposure distance between the wheel periphery shall begin at a point not more than 65° and the adjustable tongue or the end of above the horizontal plane of the wheel the peripheral member at the top shall spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) Figures I–1 through I–6.)

231

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00231 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.301 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(d) Switches. (1) All hand-held powered platen sanders, grinders with wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with blade shanks one-fourth of an inch wide or less may be equipped with only a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. (2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, Figure I–7 Figure I–8 vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- Wherever the nature of the work requires ter, disc sanders, belt sanders, recipro- contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure cating saws, saber saws, and other shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and similar operating powered tools shall I–10.) be equipped with a momentary contact ‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock- on control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on. (3) All other hand-held powered tools, such as circular saws, chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means, shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch that will shut off the power Figure I–9 Figure I–10 when the pressure is released. (4) The requirements of this para- (9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum angu- graph shall become effective on July lar exposure of the grinding wheel periph- 15, 1972. ery and sides for safety guards used on cy- (5) Exception: This paragraph does lindrical grinding machines shall not exceed 180°. This exposure shall begin at a not apply to concrete vibrators, con- point not more than 65° above the hori- crete breakers, powered tampers, jack zontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See hammers, rock drills, and similar hand Figures I–11 and I–12 and paragraph (b)(7) operated power tools. of this section.) [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996]

§ 1926.301 Hand tools. (a) Employers shall not issue or permit the use of unsafe hand tools. (b) Wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall not be used when jaws are sprung to Figure I–11 Figure I–12 the point that slippage occurs. (c) Personal protective equipment. Em- (c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, ployees using hand and power tools and wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, of mushroomed heads. abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex- (d) The wooden handles of tools shall posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, be kept free of splinters or cracks and shall be kept tight in the tool. vapors, or gases shall be provided with the particular personal protective § 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. equipment necessary to protect them (a) Electric power-operated tools. (1) from the hazard. All personal protec- Electric power operated tools shall ei- tive equipment shall meet the require- ther be of the approved double-insu- ments and be maintained according to lated type or grounded in accordance subparts D and E of this part. with subpart K of this part.

232

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00232 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.302

(2) The use of electric cords for hoist- (10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. ing or lowering tools shall not be per- The blast cleaning nozzles shall be mitted. equipped with an operating valve which (b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu- must be held open manually. A support matic power tools shall be secured to shall be provided on which the nozzle the hose or whip by some positive may be mounted when it is not in use. means to prevent the tool from becom- (c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- ing accidentally disconnected. ered tools shall be stopped while being (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be refueled, serviced, or maintained, and securely installed and maintained on fuel shall be transported, handled, and pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to stored in accordance with subpart F of prevent attachments from being acci- this part. dentally expelled. (2) When fuel powered tools are used (3) All pneumatically driven nailers, in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- staplers, and other similar equipment quirements for concentrations of toxic provided with automatic fastener feed, gases and use of personal protective which operate at more than 100 p.s.i. equipment, as outlined in subparts D pressure at the tool shall have a safety and E of this part, shall apply. device on the muzzle to prevent the (d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the used in hydraulic powered tools shall muzzle is in contact with the work sur- be fire-resistant fluids approved under face. Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of (4) Compressed air shall not be used Mines, Department of the Interior, and for cleaning purposes except where re- shall retain its operating characteris- duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then tics at the most extreme temperatures only with effective chip guarding and to which it will be exposed. personal protective equipment which (2) The manufacturer’s safe operating meets the requirements of subpart E of pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil- this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does ters, and other fittings shall not be ex- not apply for concrete form, mill scale ceeded. and similar cleaning purposes. (e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em- (5) The manufacturer’s safe operating ployees who have been trained in the pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, operation of the particular tool in use and other fittings shall not be exceed- shall be allowed to operate a powdered, actuated tool. (6) The use of hoses for hoisting or (2) The tool shall be tested each day lowering tools shall not be permitted. before loading to see that safety de- (7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside vices are in proper working condition. diameter shall have a safety device at The method of testing shall be in ac- the source of supply or branch line to cordance with the manufacturer’s rec- reduce pressure in case of hose failure. ommended procedure. (8) Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids at high (3) Any tool found not in proper pressures (1,000 pounds or more per working order, or that develops a de- square inch) shall be equipped with fect during use, shall be immediately automatic or visible manual safety de- removed from service and not used vices which will prevent pulling of the until properly repaired. trigger to prevent release of the paint (4) Personal protective equipment or fluid until the safety device is shall be in accordance with subpart E manually released. of this part. (9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut (5) Tools shall not be loaded until which will prevent high pressure, high just prior to the intended firing time. velocity release, while the nozzle tip is Neither loaded nor empty tools are to removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which be pointed at any employees. Hands will prevent the tip from coming into shall be kept clear of the open barrel contact with the operator, or other end. equivalent protection, shall be pro- (6) Loaded tools shall not be left un- vided. attended.

233

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00233 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.303 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(7) Fasteners shall not be driven into wheel, the side covers of the guard may very hard or brittle materials includ- be omitted; and ing, but not limited to, cast iron, (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, flange may be exposed on machines de- glass block, live rock, face brick, or signed as portable saws. hollow tile. (c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor (8) Driving into materials easily pen- stand and bench mounted abrasive etrated shall be avoided unless such wheels, used for external grinding, materials are backed by a substance shall be provided with safety guards that will prevent the pin or fastener (protection hoods). The maximum an- from passing completely through and gular exposure of the grinding wheel creating a flying missile hazard on the periphery and sides shall be not more other side. than 90°, except that when work re- (9) No fastener shall be driven into a quires contact with the wheel below spalled area caused by an unsatisfac- the horizontal plane of the spindle, the tory fastening. angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex- In either case, the exposure shall begin plosive or flammable atmosphere. not more than 65° above the horizontal (11) All tools shall be used with the plane of the spindle. Safety guards correct shield, guard, or attachment shall be strong enough to withstand recommended by the manufacturer. the effect of a bursting wheel. (12) Powder-actuated tools used by (2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders employees shall meet all other applica- shall be provided with work rests ble requirements of American National which are rigidly supported and readily Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety adjustable. Such work rests shall be Requirements for Explosive-Actuated kept at a distance not to exceed one- Fastening Tools. eighth inch from the surface of the [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, wheel. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] (3) Cup type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by either a § 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. revolving cup guard or a band type (a) Power. All grinding machines guard in accordance with the provi- shall be supplied with sufficient power sions of the American National Stand- to maintain the spindle speed at safe ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code levels under all conditions of normal for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab- operation. rasive Wheels. All other portable abra- (b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines sive wheels used for external grinding, shall be equipped with safety guards in shall be provided with safety guards conformance with the requirements of (protection hoods) meeting the require- American National Standards Insti- ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use, tion, except as follows: Care and Protection of Abrasive (i) When the work location makes it Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec- impossible, a wheel equipped with safe- tion. ty flanges, as described in paragraph (2) Guard design. The safety guard (c)(6) of this section, shall be used; shall cover the spindle end, nut, and (ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in flange projections. The safety guard diameter which are securely mounted shall be mounted so as to maintain on the end of a steel mandrel are used. proper alignment with the wheel, and (4) Portable abrasive wheels used for the strength of the fastenings shall ex- internal grinding shall be provided ceed the strength of the guard, except: with safety flanges (protection flanges) (i) Safety guards on all operations meeting the requirements of paragraph where the work provides a suitable (c)(6) of this section, except as follows: measure of protection to the operator, (i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di- may be so constructed that the spindle ameter which are securely mounted on end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; the end of a steel mandrel are used; and where the nature of the work is (ii) If the wheel is entirely within the such as to entirely cover the side of the work being ground while in use.

234

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00234 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.304

(5) When safety guards are required, § 1926.304 Woodworking tools. they shall be so mounted as to main- (a) Disconnect switches. All fixed tain proper alignment with the wheel, power driven woodworking tools shall and the guard and its fastenings shall be provided with a disconnect switch be of sufficient strength to retain frag- that can either be locked or tagged in ments of the wheel in case of acci- the off position. dental breakage. The maximum angu- (b) Speeds. The operating speed shall lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- be etched or otherwise permanently riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°. marked on all circular saws over 20 (6) When safety flanges are required, inches in diameter or operating at over they shall be used only with wheels de- 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any signed to fit the flanges. Only safety saw so marked shall not be operated at flanges, of a type and design and prop- a speed other than that marked on the erly assembled so as to ensure that the blade. When a marked saw is reten- pieces of the wheel will be retained in sioned for a different speed, the mark- case of accidental breakage, shall be ing shall be corrected to show the new used. speed. (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close- (c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- ly inspected and ring-tested before vices shall be installed on machines mounting to ensure that they are free whenever the nature of the work will from cracks or defects. permit. Feeder attachments shall have (8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the feed rolls or other moving parts the spindle and shall not be forced on. covered or guarded so as to protect the operator from hazardous points. The spindle nut shall be tightened only enough to hold the wheel in place. (d) Guarding. All portable, power- driven circular saws shall be equipped (9) All employees using abrasive with guards above and below the base wheels shall be protected by eye pro- plate or shoe. The upper guard shall tection equipment in accordance with cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, the requirements of subpart E of this except for the minimum arc required part, except when adequate eye protec- to permit the base to be tilted for bevel tion is afforded by eye shields which cuts. The lower guard shall cover the are permanently attached to the bench saw to the depth of the teeth, except or floor stand. for the minimum arc required to allow (d) Other requirements. All abrasive proper retraction and contact with the wheels and tools used by employees work. When the tool is withdrawn from shall meet other applicable require- the work, the lower guard shall auto- ments of American National Standards matically and instantly return to the Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the covering position. Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive (e) Personal protective equipment. All Wheels. personal protective equipment pro- (e) Work rests. On offhand grinding vided for use shall conform to subpart machines, work rests shall be used to E of this part. support the work. They shall be of (f) Other requirements. All wood- rigid construction and designed to be working tools and machinery shall adjustable to compensate for wheel meet other applicable requirements of wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted American National Standards Insti- closely to the wheel with a maximum tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood- working Machinery. opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to prevent the work from being jammed be- (g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood tween the wheel and the rest, which shall completely enclose the upper por- may cause wheel breakage. The work tion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of the saw arbor. rest shall be securely clamped after The upper hood shall be constructed in each adjustment. The adjustment shall such a manner and of such material not be made with the wheel in motion. that it will protect the operator from [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] and will deflect sawdust away from the

235

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00235 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.305 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

operator. The sides of the lower ex- the jack shall be blocked or cribbed. posed portion of the blade shall be Where there is a possibility of slippage guarded to the full diameter of the of the metal cap of the jack, a wood blade by a device that will automati- block shall be placed between the cap cally adjust itself to the thickness of and the load. the stock and remain in contact with (d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) stock being cut to give maximum pro- After the load has been raised, it shall tection possible for the operation being be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se- performed. cured at once. (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1) (ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- Each circular crosscut table saw shall ing temperatures shall be supplied with be guarded by a hood which shall meet an adequate antifreeze liquid. all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1) (iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- of this section for hoods for circular cated at regular intervals. ripsaws. (iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly in- (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular spected at times which depend upon hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a the service conditions. Inspections hood which shall completely enclose shall be not less frequent than the fol- that portion of the saw above the table lowing: and that portion of the saw above the (a) For constant or intermittent use material being cut. The hood and at one locality, once every 6 months, mounting shall be arranged so that the (b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe- hood will automatically adjust itself to cial work, when sent out and when re- the thickness of and remain in contact turned, with the material being cut but it shall (c) For a jack subjected to abnormal not offer any considerable resistance to load or shock, immediately before and insertion of material to saw or to pas- immediately thereafter. sage of the material being sawed. The (v) Repair or replacement parts shall hood shall be made of adequate be examined for possible defects. strength to resist blows and strains in- (vi) Jacks which are out of order cidental to reasonable operation, ad- shall be tagged accordingly, and shall justing, and handling, and shall be so not be used until repairs are made. designed as to protect the operator [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, from flying splinters and broken saw 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; teeth. It shall be made of material that 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] is soft enough so that it will be unlikely to cause tooth breakage. The § 1926.306 Air receivers. hood shall be so mounted as to insure (a) General requirements—(1) Applica- that its operation will be positive, reli- tion. This section applies to compressed able, and in true alignment with the air receivers, and other equipment used saw; and the mounting shall be ade- in providing and utilizing compressed quate in strength to resist any reason- air for performing operations such as able side thrust or other force tending cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- to throw it out of line. ping. On the other hand, however, this [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, section does not deal with the special 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; problems created by using compressed 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] air to convey materials nor the problems created when men work in com- § 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, pressed air as in tunnels and caissons. screw, and hydraulic. This section is not intended to apply to (a) General requirements. (1) The man- compressed air machinery and equip- ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg- ment used on transportation vehicles ibly marked on all jacks and shall not such as steam railroad cars, electric be exceeded. railway cars, and automotive equip- (2) All jacks shall have a positive ment. stop to prevent overtravel. (2) New and existing equipment. (i) All (b) [Reserved] new air receivers installed after the ef- (c) Blocking. When it is necessary to fective date of these regulations shall provide a firm foundation, the base of be constructed in accordance with the

236

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00236 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII. less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or (ii) All safety valves used shall be less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches constructed, installed, and maintained (5.08 cm) or less in width which are free in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in Edition 1968. diameter; and (iv) single strand V- (b) Installation and equipment require- belts, the width of which is thirteen ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less. shall be so installed that all drains, (2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- handholes, and manholes therein are graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if easily accessible. Under no cir- not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide cumstances shall an air receiver be and running at a speed of less than one buried underground or located in an in- thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if accessible place. free from metal lacings or fastenings (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and may be guarded with a nip-point belt valve shall be installed at the lowest and pulley guard. point of every air receiver to provide (3) For the Textile Industry, because for the removal of accumulated oil and of the presence of excessive deposits of water. Adequate automatic traps may lint, which constitute a serious fire be installed in addition to drain valves. hazard, the sides and face sections only The drain valve on the air receiver of nip-point belt and pulley guards are shall be opened and the receiver com- required, provided the guard shall ex- pletely drained frequently and at such tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond intervals as to prevent the accumula- the rim of the pulley on the in-running tion of excessive amounts of liquid in and off-running sides of the belt and at the receiver. least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the (3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- rim and face of the pulley in all other ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- directions. cating pressure gage (so located as to (4) This section covers the principal be readily visible) and with one or features with which power trans- more spring-loaded safety valves. The mission safeguards shall comply. total relieving capacity of such safety (b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels. valves shall be such as to prevent pres- Flywheels located so that any part is 7 sure in the receiver from exceeding the feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or maximum allowable working pressure platform shall be guarded in accord- of the receiver by more than 10 per- ance with the requirements of this sub- cent. paragraph: (ii) No valve of any type shall be (i) With an enclosure of sheet, per- placed between the air receiver and its forated, or expanded metal, or woven safety valve or valves. wire; (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety (ii) With guard rails placed not less valves, indicating devices and control- than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When cated, and installed so that they can- flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 not be readily rendered inoperative by inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard any means, including the elements. toeboard shall also be provided; (iv) All safety valves shall be tested (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel frequently and at regular intervals to protrudes through a working floor, it determine whether they are in good op- shall be entirely enclosed or sur- erating condition. rounded by a guardrail and toeboard. [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] (iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where § 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans- the preceding methods cannot be ap- mission apparatus. plied, the following may be used: A (a) General requirements. (1) This sec- disk attached to the flywheel in such tion covers all types and shapes of manner as to cover the spokes of the power-transmission belts, except the wheel on the exposed side and present a following when operating at two hun- smooth surface and edge, at the same

237

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00237 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.307 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

time providing means for periodic in- within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of spection. An open space, not exceeding the underside of table, or if shafting is 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left located near floor within 6 inches (15.24 between the outside edge of the disk cm) of floor. In every case the sides of and the rim of the wheel if desired, to trough shall extend at least 2 inches facilitate turning the wheel over. (5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu- Where a disk is used, the keys or other berance. dangerous projections not covered by (3) Guarding vertical and inclined disk shall be cut off or covered. This shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting subdivision does not apply to flywheels 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or with solid web centers. working platform, excepting mainte- (v) Adjustable guard to be used for nance runways, shall be enclosed with starting engine or for running adjust- a stationary casing in accordance with ment may be provided at the flywheel requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for of this section. jack bar will be permitted. (4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting (vi) Wherever flywheels are above shaft ends shall present a smooth edge working areas, guards shall be in- and end and shall not project more stalled having sufficient strength to than one-half the diameter of the shaft hold the weight of the flywheel in the unless guarded by nonrotating caps or event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail- safety sleeves. ure. (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up (2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks or covered. and connecting rods, when exposed to (5) Power-transmission apparatus lo- contact, shall be guarded in accordance cated in basements. All mechanical with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec- power transmission apparatus located tion, or by a guardrail as described in in basements, towers, and rooms used paragraph (o)(5) of this section. exclusively for power transmission (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. equipment shall be guarded in accord- Tail rods or extension piston rods shall ance with this section, except that the be guarded in accordance with para- requirements for safeguarding belts, graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by pulleys, and shafting need not be com- a guardrail on sides and end, with a plied with when the following require- clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm) ments are met: nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when (i) The basement, tower, or room oc- rod is fully extended. cupied by transmission equipment is (c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each locked against unauthorized entrance. continuous line of shafting shall be se- (ii) The vertical clearance in passage- cured in position against excessive end- ways between the floor and power wise movement. transmission beams, ceiling, or any (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par- other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in. ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be (1.672 m). securely held in position against end- (iii) The intensity of illumination wise thrust. conforms to the requirements of ANSI (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All A11.1–1965 (R–1970). exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7 (iv) [Reserved] feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (v) The route followed by the oiler is working platform, excepting runways protected in such manner as to prevent used exclusively for oiling, or running accident. adjustments, shall be protected by a (d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any stationary casing enclosing shafting parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or completely or by a trough enclosing less from the floor or working plat- sides and top or sides and bottom of form, shall be guarded in accordance shafting as location requires. with the standards specified in para- (ii) Shafting under bench machines graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul- shall be enclosed by a stationary cas- leys serving as balance wheels (e.g., ing, or by a trough at sides and top or punch presses) on which the point of sides and bottom, as location requires. contact between belt and pulley is The sides of the trough shall come more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the

238

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00238 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

floor or platform may be guarded with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; a disk covering the spokes. or (2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the (b) Where passage is regarded as nec- distance to the nearest fixed pulley, essary, there shall be a platform over clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of the lower run guarded on either side by the belt used, a guide shall be provided a railing completely filled in with wire to prevent the belt from leaving the mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- pulley on the side where insufficient rier. The upper run shall be so guarded clearance exists. as to prevent contact therewith either (ii) [Reserved] by the worker or by objects carried by (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with him. In powerplants only the lower run cracks, or pieces broken out of rims, of the belt need be guarded. shall not be used. (iv) Overhead chain and link belt (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to drives are governed by the same rules operate at rim speed in excess of manu- as overhead horizontal belts and shall facturers normal recommendations be guarded in the same manner as shall be specially designed and care- belts. fully balanced for the speed at which (3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) they are to operate. Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1) closed by a guard conforming to stand- Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet section. (2.128 m) or less from the floor level, (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall the guard shall extend to at least 15 be arranged in such a manner that a inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) standard height (see Table O–12), ex- is maintained between belt and floor at cept that where both runs of a hori- any point outside of guard. zontal belt are 42 inches (106.68 cm) or (4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run- less from the floor, the belt shall be ning over a lower pulley more than 7 fully enclosed. feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform shall be guarded at the bottom in the (ii) In powerplants or power-develop- same manner as horizontal overhead ment rooms, a guardrail may be used belts, if conditions are as stated in in lieu of the guard required by para- paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this graph (e)(1)(i) of this section. section. (2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over- (5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt head horizontal belts, with lower parts and pulley shall be equipped with a belt 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or shifter so constructed as to adequately platform, shall be guarded on sides and guard the nip point of the belt and pul- bottom in accordance with paragraph ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does (o)(3) of this section. not adequately guard the nip point of (ii) Horizontal overhead belts more the belt and pulley, the nip point shall than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat- be further protected by means of a form shall be guarded for their entire vertical guard placed in front of the length under the following conditions: pulley and extending at least to the top (a) If located over passageways or of the largest step of the cone. work places and traveling 1,800 feet or (ii) If the belt is of the endless type more per minute. or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt (b) If center to center distance be- shifter is not desired, the belt will be tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or considered guarded if the nip point of more. the belt and pulley is protected by a (c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or nip point guard located in front of the more in width. cone extending at least to the top of (iii) Where the upper and lower runs the largest step of the cone, and formed of horizontal belts are so located that to show the contour of the cone in passage of persons between them would order to give the nip point of the belt be possible, the passage shall be either: and pulley the maximum protection. (a) Completely barred by a guardrail (iii) If the cone is located less than 3 or other barrier in accordance with feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working

239

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00239 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.307 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

platform, the cone pulley and belt shall (g) Guarding friction drives. The driv- be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912 ing point of all friction drives when ex- m) regardless of whether the belt is posed to contact shall be guarded, all endless or laced with rawhide. arm or spoke friction drives and all (6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended web friction drives with holes in the counterbalanced tighteners and all web shall be entirely enclosed, and all parts thereof shall be of substantial projecting belts on friction drives construction and securely fastened; the where exposed to contact shall be bearings shall be securely capped. guarded. Means must be provided to prevent (h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- tightener from falling, in case the belt tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, breaks. and other projections in revolving (ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by location, parts shall be removed or made flush or they shall be so encased as to prevent guarded by metal cover. This subpara- accident. graph does not apply to keys or (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1) setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord- ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, ance with one of the following meth- setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys ods: less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- (i) By a complete enclosure; or ter where they are within the plane of (ii) By a standard guard as described the rim of the pulley. in paragraph (o) of this section, at (2) It is recommended, however, that least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 no projecting setscrews or oilcups be inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point used in any revolving pulley or part of of the gears; or machinery. (iii) By a band guard covering the (i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars. face of gear and having flanges ex- All revolving collars, including split tended inward beyond the root of the collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws teeth on the exposed side or sides. or bolts used in collars shall not Where any portion of the train of gears project beyond the largest periphery of guarded by a band guard is less than 6 the collar. feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk (2) Shaft couplings shall be guard or a complete enclosure to the Couplings. height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be reso constructed as to present no hazard quired. from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv- (2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews (f)(1) of this section does not apply to will, however, be permitted where they hand-operated gears used only to ad- are covered with safety sleeves or just machine parts and which do not where they are used parallel with the continue to move after hand power is shafting and are countersunk or else do removed. However, the guarding of not extend beyond the flange of the these gears is highly recommended. coupling. (3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket (j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All wheels and chains shall be enclosed un- drip cups and pans shall be securely less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m) fastened. above the floor or platform. Where the (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou- drive extends over other machine or plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards. working areas, protection against fall- Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch ing shall be provided. This subpara- pulleys having projecting parts, where graph does not apply to manually oper- such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128 ated sprockets. m) or less above the floor or working (4) Openings for oiling. When frequent platform, shall be enclosed by a sta- oiling must be done, openings with tionary guard constructed in accord- hinged or sliding self-closing covers shall be provided. All points not read- ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes guard is permissible. if lubricant is to be added while ma- (2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a chinery is in motion. guardrail, preferably with toeboard,

240

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00240 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

may be used instead of the guard re- guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec- floor, or platform. tion, provided such a room is occupied (i) [Reserved] only by engine room attendants. (a) All guards shall be rigidly braced (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt of their height to some fixed part of shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on machinery or building structure. all new installations made on or after Where guard is exposed to contact with August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with moving equipment additional strength a permanent belt shifter provided with may be necessary. mechanical means to prevent belt from (2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may creeping from loose to tight pulley. It be used in the woodworking and chem- is recommended that old installations ical industries, in industries where the be changed to conform to this rule. presence of fumes or where manufac- (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles turing conditions would cause the shall be rounded and be located as far rapid deterioration of metal guards; as possible from danger of accidental also in construction work and in loca- contact, but within easy reach of the tions outdoors where extreme cold or operator. Where belt shifters are not extreme heat make metal guards and directly located over a machine or railings undesirable. In all other indus- bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft. tries, wood guards shall not be used. 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level. (3) Guards for horizontal overhead (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead use of belt poles as substitutes for me- belts shall run the entire length of the chanical shifters is not recommended. belt and follow the line of the pulley to (3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys the ceiling or be carried to the nearest or idlers are not practicable, belt wall, thus enclosing the belt effec- perches in form of brackets, rollers, tively. Where belts are so located as to etc., shall be used to keep idle belts make it impracticable to carry the away from the shafts. guard to wall or ceiling, construction (4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne- of guard shall be such as to enclose cessity must be shifted by hand and completely the top and bottom runs of belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor belt and the face of pulleys. or working platform which are not (ii) [Reserved] guarded in accordance with this sec- (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be tion shall not be fastened with metal in provided for the ceiling rafters or over- any case, nor with any other fastening head floor beams, where such is nec- which by construction or wear will essary, to sustain safely the weight and constitute an accident hazard. stress likely to be imposed by the (m) Standard guards—general require- guard. The interior surface of all ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard con- guards, by which is meant the surface ditions shall be secured by the use of of the guard with which a belt will the following materials. Expanded come in contact, shall be smooth and metal, perforated or solid sheet metal, free from all projections of any char- wire mesh on a frame of angle iron, or acter, except where construction de- iron pipe securely fastened to floor or mands it; protruding shallow round- to frame of machine. head rivets may be used. Overhead belt (ii) All metal should be free from guards shall be at least one-quarter burrs and sharp edges. wider than belt which they protect, ex- (2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex- cept that this clearance need not in panded metal, sheet or perforated any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on metal, and wire mesh shall be securely each side. Overhead rope drive and fastened to frame. block and roller-chain-drive guards (n) [Reserved] shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 (o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum cm) wider than the drive on each side. requirements. The materials and dimen- In overhead silent chain-drive guards sions specified in this paragraph shall where the chain is held from lateral apply to all guards, except horizontal displacement on the sprockets, the side overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain clearances required on drives of 20 inch

241

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00241 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.350 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not that supports of hanger boxes are ad- less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the justed properly. nearest moving chain part, and on (5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers proper alignment to prevent belts from a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from running off. the nearest moving chain part. (6) Care of belts. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope (i) [Reserved] and chain drives. Overhead-rope and (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, chain-drive guard construction shall lacings, and fasteners and such equip- conform to the rules for overhead-belt ment kept in good repair. guard. (7) Lubrication. The regular oilers (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard- shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma- rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in chinery shall be oiled when not in mo- height, with midrail between top rail tion, wherever possible. and floor. (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8 [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be permanent and substantial, smooth, and Subpart J—Welding and Cutting free from protruding nails, bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter, and Safety Standards Act (Construction or larger. If made of metal shapes or Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- bars, their section shall be equal in pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR (3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made of wood, the posts shall be two by four 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. (2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail § 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the (a) Transporting, moving, and storing top and one at the side of posts. The compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro- midrail may be one by four (1 × 4) tection caps shall be in place and se- inches or more. Where panels are fitted cured. with expanded metal or wire mesh as (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they noted in Table O–12 the middle rails shall be secured on a cradle, may be omitted. Where guard is ex- slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be posed to contact with moving equip- hoisted or transported by means of ment, additional strength may be nec- magnets or choker slings. essary. (3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt- (iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 ing and rolling them on their bottom cm) or more in height, of wood, metal, edges. They shall not be intentionally or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch dropped, struck, or permitted to strike (2.54 cm) mesh. each other violently. (p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All (4) When cylinders are transported by power-transmission equipment shall be powered vehicles, they shall be secured inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 in a vertical position. days and be kept in good working con- (5) Valve protection caps shall not be dition at all times. used for lifting cylinders from one (2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept vertical position to another. Bars shall in alignment, free from rust and excess not be used under valves or valve pro- oil or grease. tection caps to pry cylinders loose (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water flammable vapors or flammable liquids shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. exist, the hazard of static sparks from (6) Unless cylinders are firmly se- shafting shall be carefully considered. cured on a special carrier intended for (3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in this purpose, regulators shall be re- alignment and properly adjusted. moved and valve protection caps put in (4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in- place before cylinders are moved. spected to make certain that all sup- (7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, porting bolts and screws are tight and or other steadying device shall be used

242

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00242 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.350

to keep cylinders from being knocked (4) Cylinders containing oxygen or over while in use. acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be (8) When work is finished, when cyl- taken into confined spaces. inders are empty, or when cylinders are (c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl- moved at any time, the cylinder valve inders, whether full or empty, shall not shall be closed. be used as rollers or supports. (9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be (2) No person other than the gas sup- secured in an upright position at all plier shall attempt to mix gases in a times except, if necessary, for short pe- cylinder. No one except the owner of riods of time while cylinders are actu- the cylinder or person authorized by ally being hoisted or carried. him, shall refill a cylinder. No one (10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or poses other than those intended by the combustible materials (especially oil supplier. All cylinders used shall meet or grease), a minimum distance of 20 the Department of Transportation re- feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar- quirements published in 49 CFR part rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having 178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- a fire-resistance rating of at least one- inders. half hour. (3) No damaged or defective cylinder (11) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be used. shall be stored in a well-protected, (d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall well-ventilated, dry location, at least thoroughly instruct employees in the 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible safe use of fuel gas, as follows: materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl- (1) Before a regulator to a cylinder inders should be stored in definitely as- valve is connected, the valve shall be signed places away from elevators, opened slightly and closed imme- stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage diately. (This action is generally places shall be located where cylinders termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to will not be knocked over or damaged clear the valve of dust or dirt that by passing or falling objects, or subject might otherwise enter the regulator.) to tampering by unauthorized persons. The person cracking the valve shall Cylinders shall not be kept in stand to one side of the outlet, not in front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl- unventilated enclosures such as lockers inder shall not be cracked where the and cupboards. gas would reach welding work, sparks, (12) The in-plant handling, storage, flame, or other possible sources of igni- and utilization of all compressed gases tion. in cylinders, portable tanks, rail (2) The cylinder valve shall always be tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks opened slowly to prevent damage to shall be in accordance with Compressed the regulator. For quick closing, valves Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965. on fuel gas cylinders shall not be (b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a shall be kept far enough away from the special wrench is required, it shall be actual welding or cutting operation so left in position on the stem of the valve that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not while the cylinder is in use so that the reach them. When this is impractical, fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in fire resistant shields shall be provided. case of an emergency. In the case of (2) Cylinders shall be placed where manifolded or coupled cylinders, at they cannot become part of an elec- least one such wrench shall always be trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be available for immediate use. Nothing struck against a cylinder to strike an shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl- arc. inder, when in use, which may damage (3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed the safety device or interfere with the with valve end up whenever they are in quick closing of the valve. use. They shall not be placed in a loca- (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from tion where they would be subject to cylinders through torches or other de- open flame, hot metal, or other sources vices which are equipped with shutoff of artificial heat. valves without reducing the pressure

243

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00243 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.350 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

through a suitable regulator attached characteristics readily distinguishable to the cylinder valve or manifold. by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel (4) Before a regulator is removed gas hoses shall not be interchangeable. from a cylinder valve, the cylinder A single hose having more than one gas valve shall always be closed and the passage shall not be used. gas released from the regulator. (2) When parallel sections of oxygen (5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas and fuel gas hose are taped together, cylinder is opened, there is found to be not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be covered by tape. shall be closed and the gland nut tight- (3) All hose in use, carrying ened. If this action does not stop the acetylene, oxygen, natural or manufac- leak, the use of the cylinder shall be tured fuel gas, or any gas or substance discontinued, and it shall be properly which may ignite or enter into combus- tagged and removed from the work tion, or be in any way harmful to em- area. In the event that fuel gas should ployees, shall be inspected at the be- leak from the cylinder valve, rather ginning of each working shift. Defec- than from the valve stem, and the gas tive hose shall be removed from serv- cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall ice. be properly tagged and removed from (4) Hose which has been subject to the work area. If a regulator attached flashback, or which shows evidence of to a cylinder valve will effectively stop severe wear or damage, shall be tested a leak through the valve seat, the cyl- to twice the normal pressure to which inder need not be removed from the it is subject, but in no case less than work area. 300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in (6) If a leak should develop at a fuse doubtful condition, shall not be used. plug or other safety device, the cyl- (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type inder shall be removed from the work that cannot be unlocked or discon- area. nected by means of a straight pull (e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) without rotary motion. Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall (6) Boxes used for the storage of gas bear the name of the substance they hose shall be ventilated. contain in letters at least 1-inch high (7) Hoses, cables, and other equip- which shall be either painted on the ment shall be kept clear of passage- manifold or on a sign permanently at- ways, ladders and stairs. tached to it. (g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip (2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds openings shall be cleaned with suitable shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, cleaning wires, drills, or other devices and accessible locations. They shall designed for such purpose. not be located within enclosed spaces. (2) Torches in use shall be inspected (3) Manifold hose connections, in- at the beginning of each working shift cluding both ends of the supply hose for leaking shutoff valves, hose cou- that lead to the manifold, shall be such plings, and tip connections. Defective that the hose cannot be interchanged torches shall not be used. between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds (3) Torches shall be lighted by fric- and supply header connections. Adapt- tion lighters or other approved devices, ers shall not be used to permit the and not by matches or from hot work. interchange of hose. Hose connections (h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and shall be kept free of grease and oil. fuel gas pressure regulators, including (4) When not in use, manifold and their related gauges, shall be in proper header hose connections shall be working order while in use. capped. (i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl- (5) Nothing shall be placed on top of inders and fittings shall be kept away a manifold, when in use, which will from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder damage the manifold or interfere with caps and valves, couplings, regulators, the quick closing of the valves. hose, and apparatus shall be kept free (f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen from oil or greasy substances and shall hose shall be easily distinguishable not be handled with oily hands or from each other. The contrast may be gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at made by different colors or by surface oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within

244

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00244 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.351

a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves- tected by means of rubber and friction sel. tape or other equivalent insulation. (j) Additional rules. For additional de- (c) Ground returns and machine tails not covered in this subpart, appli- grounding. (1) A ground return cable cable technical portions of American shall have a safe current carrying ca- National Standards Institute, Z49.1– pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- 1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, fied maximum output capacity of the shall apply. arc welding or cutting unit which it [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, services. When a single ground return 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; cable services more than one unit, its 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] safe current-carrying capacity shall equal or exceed the total specified § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. maximum output capacities of all the (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only units which it services. manual electrode holders which are (2) Pipelines containing gases or specifically designed for arc welding flammable liquids, or conduits con- and cutting, and are of a capacity capa- taining electrical circuits, shall not be ble of safely handling the maximum used as a ground return. For welding rated current required by the elec- on natural gas pipelines, the technical trodes, shall be used. portions of regulations issued by the (2) Any current-carrying parts pass- Department of Transportation, Office ing through the portion of the holder of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR Part 192, which the arc welder or cutter grips in Minimum Federal Safety Standards for his hand, and the outer surfaces of the Gas Pipelines, shall apply. jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu- (3) When a structure or pipeline is lated against the maximum voltage en- employed as a ground return circuit, it countered to ground. shall be determined that the required (b) Welding cables and connectors. (1) electrical contact exists at all joints. All arc welding and cutting cables shall The generation of an arc, sparks, or be of the completely insulated, flexible heat at any point shall cause rejection type, capable of handling the max- of the structures as a ground circuit. imum current requirements of the work in progress, taking into account (4) When a structure or pipeline is the duty cycle under which the arc continuously employed as a ground re- welder or cutter is working. turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded, (2) Only cable free from repair or and periodic inspections shall be con- splices for a minimum distance of 10 ducted to ensure that no condition of feet from the cable end to which the electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir- electrode holder is connected shall be tue of such use. used, except that cables with standard (5) The frames of all arc welding and insulated connectors or with splices cutting machines shall be grounded ei- whose insulating quality is equal to ther through a third wire in the cable that of the cable are permitted. containing the circuit conductor or (3) When it becomes necessary to con- through a separate wire which is nect or splice lengths of cable one to grounded at the source of the current. another, substantial insulated connec- Grounding circuits, other than by tors of a capacity at least equivalent to means of the structure, shall be that of the cable shall be used. If con- checked to ensure that the circuit be- nections are effected by means of cable tween the ground and the grounded lugs, they shall be securely fastened to- power conductor has resistance low gether to give good electrical contact, enough to permit sufficient current to and the exposed metal parts of the lugs flow to cause the fuse or circuit break- shall be completely insulated. er to interrupt the current. (4) Cables in need of repair shall not (6) All ground connections shall be be used. When a cable, other than the inspected to ensure that they are me- cable lead referred to in paragraph chanically strong and electrically ade- (b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to quate for the required current. the extent of exposing bare conductors, (d) Operating instructions. Employers the portion thus exposed shall be pro- shall instruct employees in the safe

245

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00245 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.352 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

means of arc welding and cutting as (e) When the welding, cutting, or follows: heating operation is such that normal (1) When electrode holders are to be fire prevention precautions are not suf- left unattended, the electrodes shall be ficient, additional personnel shall be removed and the holders shall be so assigned to guard against fire while the placed or protected that they cannot actual welding, cutting, or heating op- make electrical contact with employ- eration is being performed, and for a ees or conducting objects. sufficient period of time after comple- (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be tion of the work to ensure that no pos- dipped in water; to do so may expose sibility of fire exists. Such personnel the arc welder or cutter to electric shall be instructed as to the specific shock. anticipated fire hazards and how the (3) When the arc welder or cutter has firefighting equipment provided is to occasion to leave his work or to stop be used. work for any appreciable length of (f) When welding, cutting, or heating time, or when the arc welding or cut- is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- ting machine is to be moved, the power ings, since direct penetration of sparks supply switch to the equipment shall or heat transfer may introduce a fire be opened. hazard to an adjacent area, the same (4) Any faulty or defective equipment precautions shall be taken on the oppo- shall be reported to the supervisor. site side as are taken on the side on (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re- which the welding is being performed. quirements. (g) For the elimination of possible (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable, fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas all arc welding and cutting operations escaping through leaking or improp- shall be shielded by noncombustible or erly closed torch valves, the gas supply flameproof screens which will protect to the torch shall be positively shut off employees and other persons working at some point outside the enclosed in the vicinity from the direct rays of space whenever the torch is not to be the arc. used or whenever the torch is left unattended for a substantial period of time, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, such as during the lunch period. Over- 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] night and at the change of shifts, the torch and hose shall be removed from § 1926.352 Fire prevention. the confined space. Open end fuel gas (a) When practical, objects to be and oxygen hoses shall be immediately welded, cut, or heated shall be moved removed from enclosed spaces when to a designated safe location or, if the they are disconnected from the torch objects to be welded, cut, or heated or other gas-consuming device. cannot be readily moved, all movable (h) Except when the contents are fire hazards in the vicinity shall be being removed or transferred, drums, taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro- pails, and other containers which con- tected. tain or have contained flammable liq- (b) If the object to be welded, cut, or uids shall be kept closed. Empty con- heated cannot be moved and if all the tainers shall be removed to a safe area fire hazards cannot be removed, posi- apart from hot work operations or open tive means shall be taken to confine flames. the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro- (i) Drums containers, or hollow tect the immovable fire hazards from structures which have contained toxic them. or flammable substances shall, before (c) No welding, cutting, or heating welding, cutting, or heating is under- shall be done where the application of taken on them, either be filled with flammable paints, or the presence of water or thoroughly cleaned of such other flammable compounds, or heavy substances and ventilated and tested. dust concentrations creates a hazard. For welding, cutting and heating on (d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip- steel pipelines containing natural gas, ment shall be immediately available in the pertinent portions of regulations the work area and shall be maintained issued by the Department of Transpor- in a state of readiness for instant use. tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49

246

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00246 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.353

CFR Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety fined space shall be protected by air Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall line respirators in accordance with the apply. requirements of subpart E of this part, (j) Before heat is applied to a drum, and an employee on the outside of such container, or hollow structure, a vent a confined space shall be assigned to or opening shall be provided for the re- maintain communication with those lease of any built-up pressure during working within it and to aid them in the application of heat. an emergency. (3) Lifelines. Where a welder must § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection enter a confined space through a man- in welding, cutting, and heating. hole or other small opening, means (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur- shall be provided for quickly removing poses of this section, mechanical ven- him in case of emergency. When safety tilation shall meet the following re- belts and lifelines are used for this pur- quirements: pose they shall be so attached to the (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con- welder’s body that his body cannot be sist of either general mechanical ven- jammed in a small exit opening. An at- tilation systems or local exhaust sys- tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- tems. cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- (2) General mechanical ventilation serve the welder at all times and be ca- shall be of sufficient capacity and so pable of putting rescue operations into arranged as to produce the number of effect. air changes necessary to maintain (c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- welding fumes and smoke within safe als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- limits, as defined in subpart D of this ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces part. involving the metals specified in this (3) Local exhaust ventilation shall subparagraph shall be performed with consist of freely movable hoods in- either general mechanical or local extended to be placed by the welder or haust ventilation meeting the require- burner as close as practicable to the ments of paragraph (a) of this section: work. This system shall be of sufficient (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals capacity and so arranged as to remove or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma- fumes and smoke at the source and terials; keep the concentration of them in the (ii) Lead base metals; breathing zone within safe limits as de- (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate- fined in subpart D of this part. rials; (4) Contaminated air exhausted from a working space shall be discharged (iv) Chromium-bearing metals or into the open air or otherwise clear of metals coated with chromium-bearing the source of intake air. materials. (5) All air replacing that withdrawn (2) Welding, cutting, or heating in shall be clean and respirable. any enclosed spaces involving the met- (6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven- als specified in this subparagraph shall tilation purposes, comfort cooling, be performed with local exhaust ven- blowing dust from clothing, or for tilation in accordance with the require- cleaning the work area. ments of paragraph (a) of this section, (b) Welding, cutting, and heating in or employees shall be protected by air confined spaces. (1) Except as provided line respirators in accordance with the in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and requirements of subpart E of this part: paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either (i) Metals containing lead, other than general mechanical or local exhaust as an impurity, or metals coated with ventilation meeting the requirements lead-bearing materials; of paragraph (a) of this section shall be (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium- provided whenever welding, cutting, or coated base metals; heating is performed in a confined (iii) Metals coated with mercury- space. bearing metals; (2) When sufficient ventilation can- (iv) Beryllium-containing base or not be obtained without blocking the filler metals. Because of its high tox- means of access, employees in the con- icity, work involving beryllium shall

247

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00247 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.354 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

be done with both local exhaust ven- protect against dangerous concentra- tilation and air line respirators. tions of nitrogen dioxide. (3) Employees performing such oper- (e) General welding, cutting, and heat- ations in the open air shall be pro- ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating, tected by filter-type respirators in ac- not involving conditions or materials cordance with the requirements of sub- described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of part E of this part, except that employ- this section, may normally be done ees performing such operations on be- without mechanical ventilation or res- ryllium-containing base or filler met- piratory protective equipment, but als shall be protected by air line res- where, because of unusual physical or pirators in accordance with the re- atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- quirements of subpart E of this part. cumulation of contaminants exists, (4) Other employees exposed to the suitable mechanical ventilation or res- same atmosphere as the welders or piratory protective equipment shall be burners shall be protected in the same provided. manner as the welder or burner. (2) Employees performing any type of (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1) welding, cutting, or heating shall be Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding protected by suitable eye protective process involves the production of equipment in accordance with the re- ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5 quirements of subpart E of this part. to 30 times that produced during [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, shielded metal-arc welding, the decom- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; position of chlorinated solvents by ul- 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] traviolet rays, and the liberation of toxic fumes and gases, employees shall § 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat- not be permitted to engage in, or be ex- ing in way of preservative coatings. posed to the process until the following (a) Before welding, cutting, or heat- special precautions have been taken: ing is commenced on any surface cov- (i) The use of chlorinated solvents ered by a preservative coating whose shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless flammability is not known, a test shall shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur- be made by a competent person to de- faces prepared with chlorinated sol- termine its flammability. Preservative vents shall be thoroughly dry before coatings shall be considered to be high- welding is permitted on such surfaces. ly flammable when scrapings burn with (ii) Employees in the area not pro- extreme rapidity. tected from the arc by screening shall (b) Precautions shall be taken to pre- be protected by filter lenses meeting vent ignition of highly flammable the requirements of subpart E of this hardened preservative coatings. When part. When two or more welders are ex- coatings are determined to be highly posed to each other’s arc, filter lens flammable, they shall be stripped from goggles of a suitable type, meeting the the area to be heated to prevent igni- requirements of subpart E of this part, tion. shall be worn under welding helmets. (c) Protection against toxic preserva- Hand shields to protect the welder tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all against flashes and radiant energy surfaces covered with toxic preserva- shall be used when either the helmet is tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat- lifted or the shield is removed. ings for a distance of at least 4 inches (iii) Welders and other employees from the area of heat application, or who are exposed to radiation shall be the employees shall be protected by air suitably protected so that the skin is line respirators, meeting the require- covered completely to prevent burns ments of subpart E of this part. and other damage by ultraviolet rays. (2) In the open air, employees shall be Welding helmets and hand shields shall protected by a respirator, in accord- be free of leaks and openings, and free ance with requirements of subpart E of of highly reflective surfaces. this part. (iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld- (d) The preservative coatings shall be ing is being performed on stainless removed a sufficient distance from the steel, the requirements of paragraph area to be heated to ensure that the (c)(2) of this section shall be met to temperature of the unstripped metal

248

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00248 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.403

will not be appreciably raised. Artifi- § 1926.401 [Reserved] cial cooling of the metal surrounding the heating area may be used to limit INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS the size of the area required to be § 1926.402 Applicability. cleaned. (a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through 1926.408 contain installation safety re- Subpart K—Electrical quirements for electrical equipment and installations used to provide elec- AUTHORITY: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupa- tric power and light at the jobsite. tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 These sections apply to installations, U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work both temporary and permanent, used Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. on the jobsite; but these sections do 333); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48 not apply to existing permanent instal- FR 35736) or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; lations that were in place before the 29 CFR part 1911. construction activity commenced. SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless NOTE: If the electrical installation is made otherwise noted. in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For- GENERAL mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com- § 1926.400 Introduction. pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- This subpart addresses electrical cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) safety requirements that are necessary (E), (F), (G), and (J). for the practical safeguarding of em- (b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402 ployees involved in construction work through 1926.408 do not cover installa- and is divided into four major divisions tions used for the generation, trans- and applicable definitions as follows: mission, and distribution of electric (a) Installation safety requirements. In- energy, including related communica- stallation safety requirements are con- tion, metering, control, and trans- tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In- formation installations. (However, cluded in this category are electric these regulations do cover portable and equipment and installations used to vehicle-mounted generators used to provide electric power and light on provide power for equipment used at the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part jobsites. for the construction of power distribu- (b) Safety-related work practices. Safe- tion and transmission lines. ty-related work practices are contained in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to § 1926.403 General requirements. covering the hazards arising from the (a) Approval. All electrical conduc- use of electricity at jobsites, these reg- tors and equipment shall be approved. ulations also cover the hazards arising (b) Examination, installation, and use from the accidental contact, direct or of equipment—(1) Examination. The em- indirect, by employees with all ener- ployer shall ensure that electrical gized lines, above or below ground, equipment is free from recognized haz- passing through or near the jobsite. ards that are likely to cause death or (c) Safety-related maintenance and en- serious physical harm to employees. vironmental considerations. Safety-re- Safety of equipment shall be deter- lated maintenance and environmental mined on the basis of the following considerations are contained in considerations: §§ 1926.431 and 1926.432. (i) Suitability for installation and (d) Safety requirements for special use in conformity with the provisions equipment. Safety requirements for spe- of this subpart. Suitability of equip- cial equipment are contained in ment for an identified purpose may be § 1926.441. evidenced by listing, labeling, or certification for that identified purpose. (e) Definitions applicable Definitions. (ii) Mechanical strength and dura- to this subpart are contained in bility, including, for parts designed to § 1926.449. enclose and protect other equipment,

249

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00249 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.403 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the adequacy of the protection thus (f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric provided. equipment which in ordinary operation (iii) Electrical insulation. produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten (iv) Heating effects under conditions metal shall be enclosed or separated of use. and isolated from all combustible ma- (v) Arcing effects. terial. (vi) Classification by type, size, volt- (g) Marking. Electrical equipment age, current capacity, specific use. shall not be used unless the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other de- (vii) Other factors which contribute scriptive marking by which the organi- to the practical safeguarding of em- zation responsible for the product may ployees using or likely to come in con- be identified is placed on the equip- tact with the equipment. ment and unless other markings are (2) Installation and use. Listed, la- provided giving voltage, current, watt- beled, or certified equipment shall be age, or other ratings as necessary. The installed and used in accordance with marking shall be of sufficient dura- instructions included in the listing, la- bility to withstand the environment in- beling, or certification. volved. (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in- (h) Identification of disconnecting tended to break current shall have an means and circuits. Each disconnecting interrupting rating at system voltage means required by this subpart for mo- sufficient for the current that must be tors and appliances shall be legibly interrupted. marked to indicate its purpose, unless (d) Mounting and cooling of equip- located and arranged so the purpose is ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment evident. Each service, feeder, and shall be firmly secured to the surface branch circuit, at its disconnecting on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs means or overcurrent device, shall be driven into holes in masonry, concrete, legibly marked to indicate its purpose, plaster, or similar materials shall not unless located and arranged so the pur- be used. pose is evident. These markings shall (2) Cooling. Electrical equipment be of sufficient durability to withstand which depends upon the natural cir- the environment involved. culation of air and convection prin- (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces paragraph applies to equipment oper- shall be installed so that room air flow ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less. over such surfaces is not prevented by (1) Working space about electric equip- walls or by adjacent installed equipment. Sufficient access and working ment. For equipment designed for floor space shall be provided and maintained mounting, clearance between top sur- about all electric equipment to permit faces and adjacent surfaces shall be ready and safe operation and mainte- provided to dissipate rising warm air. nance of such equipment. Electrical equipment provided with (i) Working clearances. Except as re- ventilating openings shall be installed quired or permitted elsewhere in this so that walls or other obstructions do subpart, the dimension of the working not prevent the free circulation of air space in the direction of access to live through the equipment. parts operating at 600 volts or less and (e) Splices. Conductors shall be likely to require examination, adjust- spliced or joined with splicing devices ment, servicing, or maintenance while designed for the use or by brazing, alive shall not be less than indicated in welding, or soldering with a fusible Table K–1. In addition to the dimen- metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall sions shown in Table K–1, workspace first be so spliced or joined as to be me- shall not be less than 30 inches (762 chanically and electrically secure mm) wide in front of the electric equip- without solder and then soldered. All ment. Distances shall be measured splices and joints and the free ends of from the live parts if they are exposed, conductors shall be covered with an in- or from the enclosure front or opening sulation equivalent to that of the con- if the live parts are enclosed. Walls ductors or with an insulating device constructed of concrete, brick, or tile designed for the purpose. are considered to be grounded. Working

250

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00250 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.403

space is not required in back of assem- (B) By partitions or screens so ar- blies such as dead-front switchboards ranged that only qualified persons will or motor control centers where there have access to the space within reach are no renewable or adjustable parts of the live parts. Any openings in such such as fuses or switches on the back partitions or screens shall be so sized and where all connections are acces- and located that persons are not likely sible from locations other than the to come into accidental contact with back. the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them. TABLE K±1ÐWORKING CLEARANCES (C) By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and arranged as Minimum clear distance for conditions1 to exclude unqualified persons. Nominal voltage to ground (D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or (a) (b) (c) more above the floor or other working Feet2 Feet2 Feet2 surface and so installed as to exclude 0±150 ...... 3 3 3 unqualified persons. 151±600 ...... 3 31¤2 4 (ii) In locations where electric equip- 1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live ment would be exposed to physical parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other damage, enclosures or guards shall be side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in- so arranged and of such strength as to sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con- prevent such damage. sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on (iii) Entrances to rooms and other both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con- guarded locations containing exposed dition (a)] with the operator between. 2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one live parts shall be marked with con- foot=0.3048m. spicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter. (ii) Clear spaces. Working space re- (j) Over 600 volts, nominal. (1) General. quired by this subpart shall not be used Conductors and equipment used on cir- for storage. When normally enclosed cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, live parts are exposed for inspection or shall comply with all applicable provi- servicing, the working space, if in a sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of passageway or general open space, this section and with the following pro- shall be guarded. visions which supplement or modify (iii) Access and entrance to working those requirements. The provisions of space. At least one entrance shall be paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this provided to give access to the working section do not apply to equipment on space about electric equipment. the supply side of the service conduc- (iv) Front working space. Where there tors. are live parts normally exposed on the (2) Enclosure for electrical installations. front of switchboards or motor control Electrical installations in a vault, centers, the working space in front of room, closet or in an area surrounded such equipment shall not be less than 3 by a wall, screen, or fence, access to feet (914 mm). which is controlled by lock and key or (v) Headroom. The minimum head- other equivalent means, are considered room of working spaces about service to be accessible to qualified persons equipment, switchboards, panelboards, only. A wall, screen, or fence less than or motor control centers shall be 6 feet 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid- 3 inches (1.91 m). ered adequate to prevent access unless (2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as it has other features that provide a de- required or permitted elsewhere in this gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot subpart, live parts of electric equip- (2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all ment operating at 50 volts or more buildings, rooms or enclosures con- shall be guarded against accidental taining exposed live parts or exposed contact by cabinets or other forms of conductors operating at over 600 volts, enclosures, or by any of the following nominal, shall be kept locked or shall means: be under the observation of a qualified (A) By location in a room, vault, or person at all times. similar enclosure that is accessible (i) Installations accessible to qualified only to qualified persons. persons only. Electrical installations

251

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00251 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.403 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

having exposed live parts shall be ac- equipment, a minimum working space cessible to qualified persons only and of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall shall comply with the applicable provi- be provided. sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section. (ii) Installations accessible to unquali- TABLE K±2ÐMINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- fied persons. Electrical installations ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- that are open to unqualified persons MENT shall be made with metal-enclosed Conditions1 equipment or shall be enclosed in a Nominal voltage to ground vault or in an area, access to which is (a) (b) (c) controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed Feet2 Feet2 Feet2 switchgear, unit substations, trans- 601 to 2,500 ...... 3 4 5 formers, pull boxes, connection boxes, 2,501 to 9,000 ...... 4 5 6 and other similar associated equipment 9,001 to 25,000 ...... 5 6 9 25,001 to 75 kV ...... 6 8 10 shall be marked with appropriate cau- Above 75kV ...... 8 10 12 tion signs. If equipment is exposed to 1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live physical damage from vehicular traffic, parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides guards shall be provided to prevent effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or such damage. Ventilating or similar insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and openings in metal-enclosed equipment grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con- shall be designed so that foreign ob- crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not jects inserted through these openings guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be- will be deflected from energized parts. tween. (3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi- 2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot=0.3048 m. cient space shall be provided and main- (ii) Lighting outlets and points of contained about electric equipment to per- trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar- mit ready and safe operation and main- ranged that persons changing lamps or tenance of such equipment. Where en- making repairs on the lighting system ergized parts are exposed, the min- will not be endangered by live parts or imum clear workspace shall not be less other equipment. The points of control than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas- shall be so located that persons are not ured vertically from the floor or plat- likely to come in contact with any live form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide part or moving part of the equipment (measured parallel to the equipment). while turning on the lights. The depth shall be as required in Table (iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. K–2. The workspace shall be adequate Unguarded live parts above working to permit at least a 90-degree opening space shall be maintained at elevations of doors or hinged panels. not less than specified in Table K–3. (i) Working space. The minimum clear working space in front of electric TABLE K±3ÐELEVATION OF UNGUARDED equipment such as switchboards, con- ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE trol panels, switches, circuit breakers, Nominal voltage between motor controllers, relays, and similar phases Minimum elevation equipment shall not be less than speci- 601±7,500 ...... 8 feet 6 inches.1 fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec- 7,501±35,000 ...... 9 feet. ified in this subpart. Distances shall be Over 35kV ...... 9 feet+0.37 inches per kV measured from the live parts if they above 35kV. are exposed, or from the enclosure 1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch=25.4 mm; one foot=0.3048 front or opening if the live parts are m. enclosed. However, working space is (4) Entrance and access to workspace. not required in back of equipment such At least one entrance not less than 24 as deadfront switchboards or control inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches assemblies where there are no renew- (1.98 m) high shall be provided to give able or adjustable parts (such as fuses access to the working space about elec- or switches) on the back and where all tric equipment. On switchboard and connections are accessible from loca- control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 tions other than the back. Where rear m) in width, there shall be one en- access is required to work on de-ener- trance at each end of such board where gized parts on the back of enclosed practicable. Where bare energized parts

252

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00252 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

at any voltage or insulated energized equipment grounding conductor pro- parts above 600 volts are located adja- gram on construction sites covering all cent to such entrance, they shall be cord sets, receptacles which are not a guarded. part of the building or structure, and [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 equipment connected by cord and plug FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] which are available for use or used by employees. This program shall comply § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec- with the following minimum require- tion. ments: (a) Use and identification of grounded (A) A written description of the pro- and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica- gram, including the specific procedures tion of conductors. A conductor used as adopted by the employer, shall be a grounded conductor shall be identifi- available at the jobsite for inspection able and distinguishable from all other and copying by the Assistant Secretary conductors. A conductor used as an and any affected employee. equipment grounding conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable (B) The employer shall designate one from all other conductors. or more competent persons (as defined (2) Polarity of connections. No ground- in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- ed conductor shall be attached to any gram. terminal or lead so as to reverse des- (C) Each cord set, attachment cap, ignated polarity. plug and receptacle of cord sets, and (3) Use of grounding terminals and de- any equipment connected by cord and vices. A grounding terminal or ground- plug, except cord sets and receptacles ing-type device on a receptacle, cord which are fixed and not exposed to connector, or attachment plug shall damage, shall be visually inspected be- not be used for purposes other than fore each day’s use for external defects, grounding. such as deformed or missing pins or in- (b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault sulation damage, and for indications of protection—(i) General. The employer possible internal damage. Equipment shall use either ground fault circuit in- found damaged or defective shall not terrupters as specified in paragraph be used until repaired. (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured (D) The following tests shall be per- equipment grounding conductor program as specified in paragraph formed on all cord sets, receptacles (b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em- which are not a part of the permanent ployees on construction sites. These re- wiring of the building or structure, and quirements are in addition to any cord- and plug-connected equipment re- other requirements for equipment quired to be grounded: grounding conductors. (1) All equipment grounding conduc- (ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. tors shall be tested for continuity and All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- shall be electrically continuous. ampere receptacle outlets on construc- (2) Each receptacle and attachment tion sites, which are not a part of the cap or plug shall be tested for correct permanent wiring of the building or attachment of the equipment ground- structure and which are in use by em- ing conductor. The equipment ground- ployees, shall have approved grounding conductor shall be connected to its fault circuit interrupters for personnel proper terminal. protection. Receptacles on a two-wire, (E) All required tests shall be per- single-phase portable or vehicle- formed: mounted generator rated not more (1) Before first use; than 5kW, where the circuit conductors of the generator are insulated from the (2) Before equipment is returned to generator frame and all other grounded service following any repairs; surfaces, need not be protected with (3) Before equipment is used after ground-fault circuit interrupters. any incident which can be reasonably (iii) Assured equipment grounding con- suspected to have caused damage (for ductor program. The employer shall es- example, when a cord set is run over); tablish and implement an assured and

253

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00253 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(4) At intervals not to exceed 3 (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec- months, except that cord sets and re- tion apply to branch circuit, feeder, ceptacles which are fixed and not ex- and service conductors rated 600 volts, posed to damage shall be tested at in- nominal, or less and run outdoors as tervals not exceeding 6 months. open conductors. (F) The employer shall not make (i) Conductors on poles. Conductors available or permit the use by employ- supported on poles shall provide a hori- ees of any equipment which has not zontal climbing space not less than the met the requirements of this paragraph following: (b)(1)(iii) of this section. (A) Power conductors below commu- (G) Tests performed as required in nication conductors—30 inches (762 this paragraph shall be recorded. This mm) . test record shall identify each recep- (B) Power conductors alone or above tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con- communication conductors: 300 volts or nected equipment that passed the test less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 and shall indicate the last date it was volts—30 inches (762 mm). tested or the interval for which it was tested. This record shall be kept by (C) Communication conductors below means of logs, color coding, or other ef- power conductors: with power conduc- fective means and shall be maintained tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 until replaced by a more current mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches record. The record shall be made avail- (762 mm). able on the jobsite for inspection by (ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- the Assistant Secretary and any af- ductors shall conform to the following fected employee. minimum clearances: (2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall (A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished have an ampere rating not less than grade, sidewalks, or from any platform the load to be served and shall comply or projection from which they might be with the following: reached. (i) Single receptacles. A single recep- (B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub- tacle installed on an individual branch ject to vehicular traffic other than circuit shall have an ampere rating of truck traffic. not less than that of the branch cir- (C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other cuit. than those specified in paragraph (ii) Two or more receptacles. Where (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub- connected to a branch circuit sup- ject to truck traffic. plying two or more receptacles or out- (D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public lets, receptacle ratings shall conform streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. to the values listed in Table K–4. (iii) Clearance from building openings. (iii) Receptacles used for the connection Conductors shall have a clearance of at of motors. The rating of an attachment least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, plug or receptacle used for cord- and doors, fire escapes, or similar loca- plug-connection of a motor to a branch tions. Conductors run above the top circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at level of a window are considered to be 125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if out of reach from that window and, individual overload protection is omit- therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914 ted. mm) away. (iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors TABLE K±4ÐRECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR above roof space accessible to employ- VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS ees on foot shall have a clearance from the highest point of the roof surface of Circuit rating amperes Receptacle rating amperes not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical 15 ...... Not over 15. clearance for insulated conductors, not 20 ...... 15 or 20. less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di- 30 ...... 30. agonal clearance for covered conduc- 40 ...... 40 or 50. 50 ...... 50. tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m) for bare conductors, except that: (c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1) (A) Where the roof space is also ac- 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs cessible to vehicular traffic, the

254

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00254 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

vertical clearance shall not be less (e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600 than 18 feet (5.49 m), or volts, nominal, or less. The following re- (B) Where the roof space is not nor- quirements apply to overcurrent pro- mally accessible to employees on foot, tection of circuits rated 600 volts, fully insulated conductors shall have a nominal, or less. vertical or diagonal clearance of not (i) Protection of conductors and equip- less than 3 feet (914 mm), or ment. Conductors and equipment shall (C) Where the voltage between con- be protected from overcurrent in ac- ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof cordance with their ability to safely has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102 conduct current. Conductors shall have mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear- sufficient ampacity to carry the load. ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet (ii) Grounded conductors. Except for (914 mm), or motor-running overload protection, (D) Where the voltage between con- overcurrent devices shall not interrupt ductors is 300 volts or less and the con- the continuity of the grounded conductors do not pass over more than 4 ductor unless all conductors of the cir- feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of cuit are opened simultaneously. the roof and they are terminated at a (iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal through-the-roof raceway or support, cutouts. Except for devices provided for the clearance from roofs shall be at current-limiting on the supply side of least 18 inches (457 mm). the service disconnecting means, all (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps cartridge fuses which are accessible to for outdoor lighting shall be located other than qualified persons and all below all live conductors, trans- fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits formers, or other electric equipment, over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- unless such equipment is controlled by vided with disconnecting means. This a disconnecting means that can be disconnecting means shall be installed locked in the open position or unless so that the fuse or thermal cutout can adequate clearances or other safe- be disconnected from its supply with- guards are provided for relamping oper- out disrupting service to equipment ations. and circuits unrelated to those pro- (d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means— tected by the overcurrent device. (i) General. Means shall be provided to (iv) Location in or on premises. Over- disconnect all conductors in a building current devices shall be readily acces- or other structure from the service-en- sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be trance conductors. The disconnecting located where they could create an em- means shall plainly indicate whether it ployee safety hazard by being exposed is in the open or closed position and to physical damage or located in the shall be installed at a readily acces- vicinity of easily ignitible material. sible location nearest the point of en- (v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. trance of the service-entrance conduc- Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so tors. located or shielded that employees will (ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. not be burned or otherwise injured by Each service disconnecting means shall their operation. simultaneously disconnect all (vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit ungrounded conductors. breakers shall clearly indicate whether (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The they are in the open (off) or closed (on) following additional requirements position. apply to services over 600 volts, nomi- (B) Where circuit breaker handles on nal. switchboards are operated vertically (i) Guarding. Service-entrance con- rather than horizontally or ductors installed as open wires shall be rotationally, the up position of the guarded to make them accessible only handle shall be the closed (on) position. to qualified persons. (C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu- (ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of orescent lighting circuits, circuit high voltage shall be posted where un- breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’ authorized employees might come in (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders contact with live parts. and branch circuits over 600 volts,

255

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00255 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

nominal, shall have short-circuit pro- (C) Continuity of control power is re- tection. quired, and (f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) (D) Ground detectors are installed on through (f)(11) of this section contain the control system. grounding requirements for systems, (2) Separately derived systems. Where circuits, and equipment. paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol- grounding of wiring systems whose lowing systems which supply premises power is derived from generator, trans- wiring shall be grounded: former, or converter windings and has (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire no direct electrical connection, includ- DC systems shall have their neutral ing a solidly connected grounded cir- conductor grounded. cuit conductor, to supply conductors (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC originating in another system, para- systems operating at over 50 volts graph (f)(5) of this section shall also through 300 volts between conductors apply. shall be grounded unless they are rectifier-derived from an AC system com- (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii), erators—(i) Portable generators. Under (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section. the following conditions, the frame of a (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC portable generator need not be ground- circuits of less than 50 volts shall be ed and may serve as the grounding grounded if they are installed as over- electrode for a system supplied by the head conductors outside of buildings or generator: if they are supplied by transformers (A) The generator supplies only and the transformer primary supply equipment mounted on the generator system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- volts to ground. ment through receptacles mounted on (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. the generator, and AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal shall be grounded under any of the fol- parts of equipment and the equipment lowing conditions, unless exempted by grounding conductor terminals of the paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section: receptacles are bonded to the generator (A) If the system can be so grounded frame. that the maximum voltage to ground (ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under on the ungrounded conductors does not the following conditions the frame of a exceed 150 volts; vehicle may serve as the grounding (B) If the system is nominally rated electrode for a system supplied by a 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which generator located on the vehicle: the neutral is used as a circuit con- (A) The frame of the generator is ductor; bonded to the vehicle frame, and (C) If the system is nominally rated (B) The generator supplies only 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which equipment located on the vehicle and/ the midpoint of one phase is used as a or cord- and plug-connected equipment circuit conductor; or through receptacles mounted on the (D) If a service conductor is vehicle or on the generator, and uninsulated. (v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal to 1000 volts are not required to be parts of equipment and the equipment grounded if the system is separately grounding conductor terminals of the derived and is supplied by a trans- receptacles are bonded to the generator former that has a primary voltage rat- frame, and ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of (D) The system complies with all the following conditions are met: other provisions of this section. (A) The system is used exclusively (iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu- for control circuits, tral conductor shall be bonded to the (B) The conditions of maintenance generator frame if the generator is a and supervision assure that only quali- component of a separately derived sys- fied persons will service the installa- tem. No other conductor need be bond- tion, ed to the generator frame.

256

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00256 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

(4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC (ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal premises wiring systems the identified enclosures for service equipment shall conductor shall be grounded. be grounded. (5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground- (iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur- ed system. For a grounded system, a rent-carrying metal parts of fixed grounding electrode conductor shall be equipment which may become ener- used to connect both the equipment gized shall be grounded under any of grounding conductor and the grounded the following conditions: circuit conductor to the grounding (A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically electrode. Both the equipment ground- or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground ing conductor and the grounding elec- or grounded metal objects and subject trode conductor shall be connected to to employee contact. (B) If located in a wet or damp loca- the grounded circuit conductor on the tion and subject to employee contact. supply side of the service disconnecting (C) If in electrical contact with means, or on the supply side of the sys- metal. tem disconnecting means or overcur- (D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- rent devices if the system is separately tion. derived. (E) If supplied by a metal-clad, (ii) Ungrounded systems. For an metal-sheathed, or grounded metal ungrounded service-supplied system, raceway wiring method. the equipment grounding conductor (F) If equipment operates with any shall be connected to the grounding terminal at over 150 volts to ground; electrode conductor at the service however, the following need not be equipment. For an ungrounded sepa- grounded: rately derived system, the equipment (1) Enclosures for switches or circuit grounding conductor shall be con- breakers used for other than service nected to the grounding electrode con- equipment and accessible to qualified ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis- persons only; connecting means or overcurrent de- (2) Metal frames of electrically heat- vices. ed appliances which are permanently (6) Grounding path. The path to and effectively insulated from ground; ground from circuits, equipment, and and enclosures shall be permanent and con- (3) The cases of distribution appa- tinuous. ratus such as transformers and capaci- (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment tors mounted on wooden poles at a to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo- height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above sures for conductors. Metal cable trays, ground or grade level. metal raceways, and metal enclosures (iv) Equipment connected by cord and for conductors shall be grounded, ex- plug. Under any of the conditions de- cept that: scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex- that are used to protect cable assem- posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts blies from physical damage need not be of cord- and plug-connected equipment grounded; and which may become energized shall be grounded: (B) Metal enclosures for conductors (A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- added to existing installations of open tion (see § 1926.407). wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non- (B) If operated at over 150 volts to metallic-sheathed cable need not be ground, except for guarded motors and grounded if all of the following condi- metal frames of electrically heated ap- tions are met: pliances if the appliance frames are (1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m); permanently and effectively insulated (2) Enclosures are free from probable from ground. contact with ground, grounded metal, (C) If the equipment is one of the metal laths, or other conductive mate- types listed in paragraphs rials; and (f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of (3) Enclosures are guarded against this section. However, even though the employee contact. equipment may be one of these types,

257

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00257 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

it need not be grounded if it is exempt- with, a metal rack or structure that is ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6). provided for its support and the metal (1) Hand held motor-operated tools; rack or structure is grounded by the (2) Cord- and plug-connected equip- method specified for the noncurrent- ment used in damp or wet locations or carrying metal parts of fixed equip- by employees standing on the ground ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec- or on metal floors or working inside of tion. Metal car frames supported by metal tanks or boilers; metal hoisting cables attached to or (3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as- running over metal sheaves or drums of sociated equipment; grounded elevator machines are also (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/ considered to be effectively grounded. or conductive locations; and (9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are (5) Portable hand lamps. used to assure electrical continuity, (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/ they shall have the capacity to conduct or conductive locations need not be any fault current which may be im- grounded if supplied through an iso- posed. lating transformer with an ungrounded (10) Made electrodes. If made elec- secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed trodes are used, they shall be free from or labeled portable tools and appli- nonconductive coatings, such as paint ances protected by a system of double or enamel; and, if practicable, they insulation, or its equivalent, need not shall be embedded below permanent be grounded. If such a system is em- moisture level. A single electrode con- ployed, the equipment shall be distinc- sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has tively marked to indicate that the tool a resistance to ground greater than 25 or appliance utilizes a system of double ohms shall be augmented by one addi- insulation. tional electrode installed no closer (v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec- parts of the following nonelectrical trode. equipment shall be grounded: Frames (11) Grounding of systems and circuits and tracks of electrically operated of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i) cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv- General. If high voltage systems are en elevator cars to which electric con- grounded, they shall comply with all ductors are attached; hand-operated applicable provisions of paragraphs metal shifting ropes or cables of elec- (f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as tric elevators, and metal partitions, supplemented and modified by this grill work, and similar metal enclo- paragraph (f)(11). sures around equipment of over IkV be- (ii) Grounding of systems supplying tween conductors. portable or mobile equipment. Systems (8) Methods of grounding equipment— supplying portable or mobile high volt- (i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent- age equipment, other than substations carrying metal parts of fixed equip- installed on a temporary basis, shall ment, if required to be grounded by comply with the following: this subpart, shall be grounded by an (A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment grounding conductor which equipment shall be supplied from a sys- is contained within the same raceway, tem having its neutral grounded cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses through an impedance. If a delta-con- the circuit conductors. For DC circuits nected high voltage system is used to only, the equipment grounding con- supply the equipment, a system neu- ductor may be run separately from the tral shall be derived. circuit conductors. (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying (ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor metal parts of portable and mobile used for grounding fixed or movable equipment shall be connected by an equipment shall have capacity to con- equipment grounding conductor to the duct safely any fault current which point at which the system neutral im- may be imposed on it. pedance is grounded. (iii) Equipment considered effectively (C) Ground-fault detection and relay- grounded. Electric equipment is consid- ing shall be provided to automatically ered to be effectively grounded if it is de-energize any high voltage system secured to, and in electrical contact component which has developed a

258

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00258 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.405

ground fault. The continuity of the (2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The equipment grounding conductor shall provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this be continuously monitored so as to de- section apply to temporary electrical energize automatically the high volt- power and lighting wiring methods age feeder to the portable equipment which may be of a class less than would upon loss of continuity of the equip- be required for a permanent installa- ment grounding conductor. tion. Except as specifically modified in (D) The grounding electrode to which paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all the portable or mobile equipment sys- other requirements of this subpart for tem neutral impedance is connected permanent wiring shall apply to tem- shall be isolated from and separated in porary wiring installations. Temporary the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m) wiring shall be removed immediately from any other system or equipment upon completion of construction or the grounding electrode, and there shall be purpose for which the wiring was inno direct connection between the stalled. grounding electrodes, such as buried (ii) General requirements for temporary pipe, fence or like objects. wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non- distribution center. The conductors current-carrying metal parts of port- shall be run as multiconductor cord or able equipment and fixed equipment in- cable assemblies or within raceways; cluding their associated fences, or, where not subject to physical dam- housings, enclosures, and supporting age, they may be run as open conduc- structures shall be grounded. However, tors on insulators not more than 10 feet equipment which is guarded by loca- (3.05 m) apart. tion and isolated from ground need not (B) Branch circuits shall originate in be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount- a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- ed distribution apparatus at a height tors shall be run as multiconductor exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground cord or cable assemblies or open con- or grade level need not be grounded. ductors, or shall be run in raceways. All conductors shall be protected by [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, overcurrent devices at their ampacity. 1996] Runs of open conductors shall be located where the conductors will not be § 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo- subject to physical damage, and the nents, and equipment for general conductors shall be fastened at inter- use. vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No (a) Wiring methods. The provisions of branch-circuit conductors shall be laid this paragraph do not apply to conduc- on the floor. Each branch circuit that tors which form an integral part of supplies receptacles or fixed equipment equipment such as motors, controllers, shall contain a separate equipment motor control centers and like equip- grounding conductor if the branch cir- ment. cuit is run as open conductors. (1) General requirements—(i) Electrical (C) Receptacles shall be of the continuity of metal raceways and enclo- grounding type. Unless installed in a sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and complete metallic raceway, each other metal enclosures for conductors branch circuit shall contain a separate shall be metallically joined together equipment grounding conductor, and into a continuous electric conductor all receptacles shall be electrically and shall be so connected to all boxes, connected to the grounding conductor. fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef- Receptacles for uses other than tem- fective electrical continuity. porary lighting shall not be installed (ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems on branch circuits which supply tem- of any type shall be installed in ducts porary lighting. Receptacles shall not used to transport dust, loose stock or be connected to the same ungrounded flammable vapors. No wiring system of conductor of multiwire circuits which any type shall be installed in any duct supply temporary lighting. used for vapor removal or in any shaft (D) Disconnecting switches or plug containing only such ducts. connectors shall be installed to permit

259

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00259 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the disconnection of all ungrounded provided with covers. If metal covers conductors of each temporary circuit. are used, they shall be grounded. In en- (E) All lamps for general illumina- ergized installations each outlet box tion shall be protected from accidental shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture contact or breakage. Metal-case sock- canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having ets shall be grounded. holes through which flexible cord pend- (F) Temporary lights shall not be ants pass shall be provided with bush- suspended by their electric cords unless ings designed for the purpose or shall cords and lights are designed for this have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on means of suspension. which the cords may bear. (G) Portable electric lighting used in (3) Pull and junction boxes for systems wet and/or other conductive locations, over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to as for example, drums, tanks, and ves- other requirements in this section for sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or pull and junction boxes, the following less. However, 120-volt lights may be shall apply to these boxes for systems used if protected by a ground-fault cir- over 600 volts, nominal: cuit interrupter. (i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall (H) A box shall be used wherever a provide a complete enclosure for the change is made to a raceway system or contained conductors or cables. a cable system which is metal clad or (ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by metal sheathed. covers securely fastened in place. Un- (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be derground box covers that weigh over protected from damage. Sharp corners 100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- and projections shall be avoided. Flexi- ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- ble cords and cables may pass through nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ doorways or other pinch points, if pro- The marking shall be on the outside of tection is provided to avoid damage. the box cover and shall be readily visi- (J) Extension cord sets used with ble and legible. portable electric tools and appliances (c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife shall be of three-wire type and shall be switches shall be so connected that the designed for hard or extra-hard usage. blades are dead when the switch is in Flexible cords used with temporary and the open position. Single-throw knife portable lights shall be designed for switches shall be so placed that gravity hard or extra-hard usage. will not tend to close them. Single- throw knife switches approved for use NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/ NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists in the inverted position shall be pro- various types of flexible cords, some of which vided with a locking device that will are noted as being designed for hard or extra- ensure that the blades remain in the hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi- open position when so set. Double- ble cords include hard service cord (types S, throw knife switches may be mounted ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord so that the throw will be either (types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). vertical or horizontal. However, if the (iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring throw is vertical, a locking device shall over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar- be provided to ensure that the blades riers, or other effective means shall be remain in the open position when so provided to prevent access of other set. than authorized and qualified per- (d) Switchboards and panelboards. sonnel. Switchboards that have any exposed (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings. (1) live parts shall be located in perma- Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or nently dry locations and accessible fittings. Conductors entering boxes, only to qualified persons. Panelboards cabinets, or fittings shall be protected shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout from abrasion, and openings through boxes, or enclosures designed for the which conductors enter shall be effec- purpose and shall be dead front. How- tively closed. Unused openings in cabi- ever, panelboards other than the dead nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be front externally-operable type are per- effectively closed. mitted where accessible only to quali- (2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, fied persons. Exposed blades of knife junction boxes, and fittings shall be switches shall be dead when open.

260

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00260 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.405

(e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations (B) Where run through holes in walls, (1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. Cabi- ceilings, or floors; nets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and (C) Where run through doorways, panelboard enclosures in damp or wet windows, or similar openings, except as locations shall be installed so as to pre- permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of vent moisture or water from entering this section; and accumulating within the enclo- (D) Where attached to building sur- sures. In wet locations the enclosures faces; or shall be weatherproof. (E) Where concealed behind building (2) Switches and circuit breakers. walls, ceilings, or floors. Switches, circuit breakers, and switch- (2) Identification, splices, and termi- boards installed in wet locations shall nations—(i) Identification. A conductor be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures. of a flexible cord or cable that is used (f) Conductors for general wiring. All as a grounded conductor or an equip- conductors used for general wiring ment grounding conductor shall be dis- shall be insulated unless otherwise per- tinguishable from other conductors. mitted in this subpart. The conductor (ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, insulation shall be of a type that is SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall suitable for the voltage, operating tem- not be used unless durably marked on perature, and location of use. Insulated the surface with the type designation, conductors shall be distinguishable by size, and number of conductors. appropriate color or other means as (iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be being grounded conductors, used only in continuous lengths with- ungrounded conductors, or equipment out splice or tap. Hard service flexible grounding conductors. cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired (g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of if spliced so that the splice retains the flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted insulation, outer sheath properties, uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be and usage characteristics of the cord suitable for conditions of use and loca- being spliced. tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be (iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall used only for: be connected to devices and fittings so (A) Pendants; that strain relief is provided which will (B) Wiring of fixtures; prevent pull from being directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws. (C) Connection of portable lamps or (v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi- appliances; ble cords and cables shall be protected (D) Elevator cables; by bushings or fittings where passing (E) Wiring of cranes and hoists; through holes in covers, outlet boxes, (F) Connection of stationary equip- or similar enclosures. ment to facilitate their frequent inter- (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi- change; nal. Multiconductor portable cable for (G) Prevention of the transmission of use in supplying power to portable or noise or vibration; or mobile equipment at over 600 volts, (H) Appliances where the fastening nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger means and mechanical connections are conductors employing flexible strand- designed to permit removal for mainte- ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts nance and repair. shall be shielded for the purpose of con- (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used fining the voltage stresses to the insu- as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C), lation. Grounding conductors shall be (g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec- provided. Connectors for these cables tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped shall be of a locking type with provi- with an attachment plug and shall be sions to prevent their opening or clos- energized from a receptacle outlet. ing while energized. Strain relief shall (iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary be provided at connections and termi- for a use permitted in paragraph nations. Portable cables shall not be (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords operated with splices unless the splices and cables shall not be used: are of the permanent molded, vulcan- (A) As a substitute for the fixed wir- ized, or other equivalent type. Termi- ing of a structure; nation enclosures shall be marked with

261

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00261 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

a high voltage hazard warning, and tering conductor run within the power minations shall be accessible only to supply cord. authorized and qualified personnel. (iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the (i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture screw-shell type shall be installed for wires shall be suitable for the voltage, use as lampholders only. Lampholders temperature, and location of use. A fix- installed in wet or damp locations shall ture wire which is used as a grounded be of the weatherproof type. conductor shall be identified. (v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet (2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may or damp locations shall be identified be used: for the purpose and shall be installed (i) For installation in lighting, fix- so that water cannot enter or accumu- tures and in similar equipment where late in wireways, lampholders, or other enclosed or protected and not subject electrical parts. to bending or twisting in use; or (2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. to the branch-circuit conductors sup- Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- plying the fixtures. tachment plugs shall be constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires shall not be used as branch-circuit con- will accept an attachment plug with a ductors except as permitted for Class 1 different voltage or current rating than power-limited circuits. that for which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle (j) Equipment for general use—(1) or cord connector may accept a 15-am- Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, pere attachment plug of the same volt- and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures, age rating. Receptacles connected to lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re- circuits having different voltages, fre- ceptacles shall have no live parts nor- quencies, or types of current (ac or dc) mally exposed to employee contact. on the same premises shall be of such However, rosettes and cleat-type design that the attachment plugs used lampholders and receptacles located at on these circuits are not interchange- least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may able. have exposed parts. (ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep- (ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, tacle installed in a wet or damp loca- rosettes, and receptacles shall be se- tion shall be designed for the location. curely supported. A fixture that weighs (3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli- more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds ances, other than those in which the 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension current-carrying parts at high tem- shall not be supported by the screw peratures are necessarily exposed, shall shell of a lampholder. have no live parts normally exposed to (iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps employee contact. shall be wired with flexible cord and an (ii) Disconnecting means. A means attachment plug of the polarized or shall be provided to disconnect each grounding type. If the portable lamp appliance. uses an Edison-based lampholder, the (iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be grounded conductor shall be identified marked with its rating in volts and and attached to the screw shell and the amperes or volts and watts. identified blade of the attachment (4) Motors. This paragraph applies to plug. In addition, portable handlamps motors, motor circuits, and control- shall comply with the following: lers. (A) Metal shell, paperlined (i) In sight from. If specified that one lampholders shall not be used; piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight (B) Handlamps shall be equipped with from’’ another piece of equipment, one a handle of molded composition or shall be visible and not more than 50 other insulating material; feet (15.2 m) from the other. (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with (ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis- a substantial guard attached to the connecting means shall be located in lampholder or handle; sight from the controller location. The (D) Metallic guards shall be grounded controller disconnecting means for by the means of an equipment ground- motor branch circuits over 600 volts,

262

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00262 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.405

nominal, may be out of sight of the safe shutdown of equipment or process controller, if the controller is marked and motor overload sensing devices are with a warning label giving the loca- connected to a supervised alarm. tion and identification of the dis- (iv) Protection of live parts—all connecting means which is to be locked voltages—(A) Stationary motors hav- in the open position. ing commutators, collectors, and brush (B) The disconnecting means shall rigging located inside of motor end disconnect the motor and the con- brackets and not conductively controller from all ungrounded supply connected to supply circuits operating at ductors and shall be so designed that more than 150 volts to ground need not no pole can be operated independently. have such parts guarded. Exposed live (C) If a motor and the driven machin- parts of motors and controllers oper- ery are not in sight from the controller ating at 50 volts or more between ter- location, the installation shall comply minals shall be guarded against acci- with one of the following conditions: dental contact by any of the following: (1) The controller disconnecting (1) By installation in a room or en- means shall be capable of being locked closure that is accessible only to quali- in the open position. fied persons; (2) A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from its (2) By installation on a balcony, gal- source of supply shall be placed in lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- sight from the motor location. ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (D) The disconnecting means shall sons; or plainly indicate whether it is in the (3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or open (off) or closed (on) position. more above the floor. (E) The disconnecting means shall be (B) Where live parts of motors or con- readily accessible. If more than one trollers operating at over 150 volts to disconnect is provided for the same ground are guarded against accidental equipment, only one need be readily contact only by location, and where ad- accessible. justment or other attendance may be (F) An individual disconnecting necessary during the operation of the means shall be provided for each apparatus, insulating mats or plat- motor, but a single disconnecting forms shall be provided so that the at- means may be used for a group of mo- tendant cannot readily touch live parts tors under any one of the following unless standing on the mats or plat- conditions: forms. (1) If a number of motors drive spe- (5) Transformers—(i) Application. The cial parts of a single machine or piece following paragraphs cover the instal- of apparatus, such as a metal or wood- lation of all transformers, except: working machine, crane, or hoist; (A) Current transformers; (2) If a group of motors is under the (B) Dry-type transformers installed protection of one set of branch-circuit as a component part of other appa- protective devices; or ratus; (3) If a group of motors is in a single (C) Transformers which are an inte- room in sight from the location of the disconnecting means. gral part of an X-ray, high frequency, (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and or electrostatic-coating apparatus; ground-fault protection. Motors, motor- (D) Transformers used with Class 2 control apparatus, and motor branch- and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline circuit conductors shall be protected lighting, electric discharge lighting, against overheating due to motor over- and power-limited fire-protective sig- loads or failure to start, and against naling circuits. short-circuits or ground faults. These (ii) Operating voltage. The operating provisions do not require overload pro- voltage of exposed live parts of trans- tection that will stop a motor where a former installations shall be indicated shutdown is likely to introduce addi- by warning signs or visible markings tional or increased hazards, as in the on the equipment or structure. case of fire pumps, or where continued (iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry- operation of a motor is necessary for a type, high fire point liquid-insulated,

263

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00263 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.406 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and askarel-insulated transformers in- § 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV and installations. shall be in a vault. (a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph (iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they applies to the installation of electric present a fire hazard to employees, oil- equipment and wiring used in connec- insulated transformers installed in- tion with cranes, monorail hoists, doors shall be in a vault. hoists, and all runways. (v) Fire protection. Combustible mate- (1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway rial, combustible buildings and parts of conductor disconnecting means. A readily buildings, fire escapes, and door and accessible disconnecting means shall window openings shall be safeguarded be provided between the runway con- from fires which may originate in oil- tact conductors and the power supply. insulated transformers attached to or (ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and adjacent to a building or combustible monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, material. capable of being locked in the open po- (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer sition, shall be provided in the leads vaults shall be constructed so as to from the runway contact conductors or contain fire and combustible liquids other power supply on any crane or within the vault and to prevent unau- monorail hoist. thorized access. Locks and latches (A) If this additional disconnecting shall be so arranged that a vault door means is not readily accessible from can be readily opened from the inside. the crane or monorail hoist operating (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct station, means shall be provided at the system foreign to the vault installa- operating station to open the power tion shall not enter or pass through a circuit to all motors of the crane or transformer vault. monorail hoist. (viii) Material storage. Materials shall (B) The additional disconnect may be not be stored in transformer vaults. omitted if a monorail hoist or hand- (6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored propelled crane bridge installation charge. All capacitors, except surge ca- meets all of the following: pacitors or capacitors included as a (1) The unit is floor controlled; component part of other apparatus, (2) The unit is within view of the shall be provided with an automatic power supply disconnecting means; and means of draining the stored charge (3) No fixed work platform has been and maintaining the discharged state provided for servicing the unit. after the capacitor is disconnected (2) Control. A limit switch or other from its source of supply. device shall be provided to prevent the (ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated load block from passing the safe upper over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply limit of travel of any hoisting mecha- with the following additional require- nism. ments: (3) Clearance. The dimension of the (A) Isolating or disconnecting switch- working space in the direction of ac- es (with no interrupting rating) shall cess to live parts which may require be interlocked with the load inter- examination, adjustment, servicing, or rupting device or shall be provided maintenance while alive shall be a with prominently displayed caution minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm). signs to prevent switching load cur- Where controls are enclosed in cabi- rent. nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90 degrees or be removable, or the instal- (B) For series capacitors the proper lation shall provide equivalent access. switching shall be assured by use of at (4) Grounding. All exposed metal least one of the following: parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and accessories including pendant con- and bypass switches, trols shall be metallically joined to- (2) Interlocks, or gether into a continuous electrical con- (3) Switching procedure prominently ductor so that the entire crane or hoist displayed at the switching location. will be grounded in accordance with [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 § 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] removable accessories or attachments,

264

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00264 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.407

having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces lent disconnecting means. This dis- shall be considered to be electrically connecting means shall be constructed, connected to each other through the enclosed, or located so as to avoid con- bearing surfaces for grounding pur- tact by employees with its live parts. poses. The trolley frame and bridge (2) Control—Radiographic and frame shall be considered as elec- fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and trically grounded through the bridge fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be and trolley wheels and its respective effectively enclosed or shall have inter- tracks unless conditions such as paint locks that deenergize the equipment or other insulating materials prevent automatically to prevent ready access reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this to live current-carrying parts. case a separate bonding conductor shall be provided. § 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving tions. walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele- (a) Scope. This section sets forth re- vators, escalators, and moving walks quirements for electric equipment and shall have a single means for dis- wiring in locations which are classified connecting all ungrounded main power depending on the properties of the supply conductors for each unit. flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (2) Control panels. If control panels combustible dusts or fibers which may are not located in the same space as be present therein and the likelihood the drive machine, they shall be lo- that a flammable or combustible con- cated in cabinets with doors or panels centration or quantity is present. Each capable of being locked closed. room, section or area shall be consid- (c) Electric welders—disconnecting ered individually in determining its means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans- classification. These hazardous (classi- former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A fied) locations are assigned six designa- disconnecting means shall be provided tions as follows: in the supply circuit for each motor- generator arc welder, and for each AC Class I, Division 1 transformer and DC rectifier arc welder Class I, Division 2 which is not equipped with a dis- Class II, Division 1 Class II, Division 2 connect mounted as an integral part of Class III, Division l the welder. Class III, Division 2 (2) Resistance welders. A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which For definitions of these locations see each resistance welder and its control § 1926.449. All applicable requirements equipment can be isolated from the in this subpart apply to all hazardous supply circuit. The ampere rating of (classified) locations, unless modified this disconnecting means shall not be by provisions of this section. less than the supply conductor (b) Electrical installations. Equipment, ampacity. wiring methods, and installations of (d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting equipment in hazardous (classified) lo- means—(i) General. A disconnecting cations shall be approved as intrinsi- means shall be provided in the supply cally safe or approved for the haz- circuit. The disconnecting means shall ardous (classified) location or safe for be operable from a location readily ac- the hazardous (classified) location. Re- cessible from the X-ray control. For quirements for each of these options equipment connected to a 120-volt are as follows: branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a (1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and grounding-type attachment plug cap associated wiring approved as intrinsi- and receptacle of proper rating may cally safe is permitted in any haz- serve as a disconnecting means. ardous (classified) location included in (ii) More than one piece of equipment. its listing or labeling. If more than one piece of equipment is (2) Approved for the hazardous (classi- operated from the same high-voltage fied) location—(i) General. Equipment circuit, each piece or each group of shall be approved not only for the class equipment as a unit shall be provided of location but also for the ignitible or with a high-voltage switch or equiva- combustible properties of the specific

265

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00265 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.408 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, present. transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep- NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in- Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va- struments, resistors, generators, motors, pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by lighting fixtures, storage battery charging their ignitible or combustible properties. equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists (ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be and similar equipment, utilization equip- used unless it is marked to show the ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and class, group, and operating tempera- communication systems, ventilation piping, ture or temperature range, based on live parts, lightning surge protection, and operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for grounding. Compliance with these guidelines which it is approved. The temperature will constitute one means, but not the only marking shall not exceed the ignition means, of compliance with this paragraph. temperature of the specific gas, vapor, (c) Conduits. All conduits shall be or dust to be encountered. However, threaded and shall be made wrench- the following provisions modify this tight. Where it is impractical to make marking requirement for specific a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- equipment: (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro- er shall be utilized. ducing type (such as junction boxes, [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 conduit, and fitting) and equipment of FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] the heat-producing type having a maximum temperature of not more than § 1926.408 Special systems. 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. have a marked operating temperature Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this or temperature range. section contain general requirements (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for all circuits and equipment operated for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca- at over 600 volts. tions need not be marked to indicate (1) Wiring methods for fixed installa- the group. tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment conductors shall be installed in rigid in Class I locations, other than lighting metal conduit, in intermediate metal fixtures, which is acceptable for use in conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be other suitable raceways, or as open marked with the class, group, division, runs of metal-clad cable designed for or operating temperature. the use and purpose. However, open (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or other than lighting fixtures, which is of bare conductors or busbars may be acceptable for use in Class II, Division installed in locations which are acces- 2 and Class III locations need not be sible only to qualified persons. Metallic marked with the class, group, division, shielding components, such as tapes, or operating temperature. wires, or braids for conductors, shall be (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) grounded. Open runs of insulated wires location. Equipment which is safe for and cables having a bare lead sheath or the location shall be of a type and de- a braided outer covering shall be sup- sign which the employer demonstrates ported in a manner designed to prevent will provide protection from the haz- physical damage to the braid or sheath. ards arising from the combustibility (ii) Installations emerging from the and flammability of vapors, liquids, ground. Conductors emerging from the gases, dusts, or fibers. ground shall be enclosed in raceways. NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA Raceways installed on poles shall be of 70, contains guidelines for determining the rigid metal conduit, intermediate type and design of equipment and installa- metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or tions which will meet this requirement. The equivalent extending from the ground guidelines of this document address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above hazardous (classified) locations and contain finished grade. Conductors entering a specific provisions for the following: wiring building shall be protected by an enclo- methods, wiring connections, conductor insure from the ground line to the point

266

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00266 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.408

of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall (4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica- be grounded. tion. The provisions of this paragraph (2) Interrupting and isolating devices— apply to installation and use of high- (i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo- voltage power distribution and utiliza- cated indoors shall consist of metal-en- tion equipment which is associated closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted with tunnels and which is portable and/ units. In locations accessible only to or mobile, such as substations, trailers, qualified personnel, open mounting of cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, circuit breakers is permitted. A means drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, of indicating the open and closed posi- conveyors, and underground exca- tion of circuit breakers shall be pro- vators. vided. (ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels (ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in- shall be installed in one or more of the stalled in buildings or transformer following: vaults shall be of a type identified for (A) Metal conduit or other metal the purpose. They shall be readily ac- raceway, cessible for fuse replacement. (B) Type MC cable, or (iii) Equipment isolating means. A (C) Other suitable multiconductor means shall be provided to completely cable. isolate equipment for inspection and Conductors shall also be so located or repairs. Isolating means which are not guarded as to protect them from phys- designed to interrupt the load current ical damage. Multiconductor portable of the circuit shall be either cable may supply mobile equipment. interlocked with a circuit interrupter An equipment grounding conductor or provided with a sign warning shall be run with circuit conductors in- against opening them under load. side the metal raceway or inside the (3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i) multiconductor cable jacket. The Power cable connections to mobile ma- equipment grounding conductor may chines. A metallic enclosure shall be be insulated or bare. provided on the mobile machine for en- (iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi- closing the terminals of the power nals of transformers, switches, motor cable. The enclosure shall include pro- controllers, and other equipment shall visions for a solid connection for the be enclosed to prevent accidental con- ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef- tact with energized parts. Enclosures fectively the machine frame. The for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, method of cable termination used shall weatherproof, or submersible as re- prevent any strain or pull on the cable quired by the environmental condi- from stressing the electrical connections. tions. The enclosure shall have provi- (iv) Disconnecting means. A dis- sion for locking so only authorized connecting means that simultaneously qualified persons may open it and shall opens all ungrounded conductors shall be marked with a sign warning of the be installed at each transformer or presence of energized parts. motor location. (ii) Guarding live parts. All energized (v) Grounding and bonding. All non- switching and control parts shall be en- energized metal parts of electric equip- closed in effectively grounded metal ment and metal raceways and cable cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break- sheaths shall be grounded and bonded ers and protective equipment shall to all metal pipes and rails at the por- have the operating means projecting tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 through the metal cabinet or enclosure feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel. so these units can be reset without (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote locked doors being opened. Enclosures control, signaling, and power-limited cir- and metal cabinets shall be locked so cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, that only authorized qualified persons or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or have access and shall be marked with a power-limited circuits are character- sign warning of the presence of ener- ized by their usage and electrical power gized parts. Collector ring assemblies limitation which differentiates them on revolving-type machines (shovels, from light and power circuits. These draglines, etc.) shall be guarded. circuits are classified in accordance

267

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00267 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.408 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

with their respective voltage and power 300 volts shall have each circuit so ex- limitations as summarized in para- posed provided with an approved pro- graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of tector. this section. (ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor (i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1 of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna power-limited circuit is supplied from shall be provided with an antenna dis- a source having a rated output of not charge unit or other means that will more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am- drain static charges from the antenna peres. system. (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit (3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt- buildings—(A) Receiving distribution age which does not exceed 600 volts; lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached however, the power output of the to buildings and lead-in conductors to source need not be limited. radio transmitters shall be so installed (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A) as to avoid the possibility of accidental Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is contact with electric light or power limited either inherently (in which no conductors. overcurrent protection is required) or (B) The clearance between lead-in by a combination of a power source and conductors and any lightning protec- overcurrent protection. tion conductors shall not be less than 6 (B) The maximum circuit voltage is feet (1.83 m). 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher- (ii) On poles. Where practicable, com- ently limited power source, and 100 munication conductors on poles shall volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently be located below the light or power limited power source. conductors. Communications conduc- (C) The maximum circuit voltage is tors shall not be attached to a cross- 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class arm that carries light or power conduc- 2 power source limited by overcurrent tors. protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for (iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten- a Class 3 power source limited by over- nas, lead-ins, and other communication current protection. conductors attached as open conduc- (iii) Application. The maximum cir- tors to the inside of buildings shall be cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus- conductors of any light or power or oidal AC or continuous DC power Class 1 circuits unless a special and sources, and where wet contact occur- equally protective method of conductor rence is not likely. separation is employed. (2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 (4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal power supply unit shall not be used un- structures supporting antennas, as well less it is durably marked where plainly as self-supporting antennas such as visible to indicate the class of supply vertical rods or dipole structures, shall and its electrical rating. be located as far away from overhead (c) Communications systems—(1) Scope. conductors of electric light and power These provisions for communication circuits of over 150 volts to ground as systems apply to such systems as cen- necessary to avoid the possibility of tral-station-connected and non-cen- the antenna or structure falling into or tral-station-connected telephone cir- making accidental contact with such cuits, radio receiving and transmitting circuits. equipment, and outside wiring for fire (5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors. and burglar alarm, and similar central If exposed to contact with electric station systems. These installations light or power conductors, the metal need not comply with the provisions of sheath of aerial cables entering build- §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except ings shall be grounded or shall be inter- § 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407. rupted close to the entrance to the (2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex- building by an insulating joint or posed to power conductors. Communica- equivalent device. Where protective de- tion circuits so located as to be ex- vices are used, they shall be grounded. posed to accidental contact with light (ii) Antenna structures. Masts and or power conductors operating at over metal structures supporting antennas

268

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00268 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.431

shall be permanently and effectively space for electrical equipment will not grounded without splice or connection be used as a passageway during periods in the grounding conductor. when energized parts of electrical (iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit- equipment are exposed. ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame (2) Working spaces, walkways, and or grill or separated from the operating similar locations shall be kept clear of space by a barrier, all metallic parts of cords so as not to create a hazard to which are effectively connected to employees. ground. All external metal handles and (c) Load ratings. In existing installa- controls accessible to the operating tions, no changes in circuit protection personnel shall be effectively grounded. shall be made to increase the load in Unpowered equipment and enclosures excess of the load rating of the circuit shall be considered grounded where wiring. connected to an attached coaxial cable (d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or with an effectively grounded metallic removed with one or both terminals en- shield. ergized, special tools insulated for the voltage shall be used. [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] (e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or frayed electric cords or cables shall not §§ 1926.409—1926.415 [Reserved] be used. (2) Extension cords shall not be fas- SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES tened with staples, hung from nails, or suspended by wire. § 1926.416 General requirements. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (a) Protection of employees—(1) No em- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; ployer shall permit an employee to 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, work in such proximity to any part of 1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996] an electric power circuit that the employee could contact the electric power § 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir- circuit in the course of work, unless cuits. the employee is protected against elec- (a) Controls. Controls that are to be tric shock by deenergizing the circuit deactivated during the course of work and grounding it or by guarding it ef- on energized or deenergized equipment fectively by insulation or other means. or circuits shall be tagged. (2) In work areas where the exact lo- (b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment cation of underground electric or circuits that are deenergized shall powerlines is unknown, employees be rendered inoperative and shall have using jack-hammers, bars, or other tags attached at all points where such hand tools which may contact a line equipment or circuits can be energized. shall be provided with insulated protec- (c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden- tive gloves. tify plainly the equipment or circuits (3) Before work is begun the em- being worked on. ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or direct observation, or by instruments, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, whether any part of an energized elec- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, tric power circuit, exposed or con- 1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]] cealed, is so located that the performance of the work may bring any person, §§ 1926.418—1926.430 [Reserved] tool, or machine into physical or electrical contact with the electric power SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND circuit. The employer shall post and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS maintain proper warning signs where such a circuit exists. The employer § 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. shall advise employees of the location The employer shall ensure that all of such lines, the hazards involved, and wiring components and utilization the protective measures to be taken. equipment in hazardous locations are (b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1) maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni- Barriers or other means of guarding tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi- shall be provided to ensure that work- tion, as appropriate. There shall be no

269

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00269 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.432 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

loose or missing screws, gaskets, within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han- threaded connections, seals, or other dling areas. impairments to a tight condition. (7) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- § 1926.432 Environmental deteriora- trolyte and for fire protection. tion of equipment. (b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in- (a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless stallations shall be located in areas identified for use in the operating envi- designated for that purpose. ronment, no conductors or equipment (2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- shall be located: tected from damage by trucks. (i) In damp or wet locations; (3) When batteries are being charged, (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes, the vent caps shall be kept in place to vapors, liquids, or other agents having avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall a deteriorating effect on the conduc- be maintained in functioning condi- tors or equipment; or tion. (iii) Where exposed to excessive temperatures. §§ 1926.442—1926.448 [Reserved] (2) Control equipment, utilization equipment, and busways approved for DEFINITIONS use in dry locations only shall be pro- § 1926.449 Definitions applicable to tected against damage from the weath- this subpart. er during building construction. (b) Protection against corrosion. Metal The definitions given in this section raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable apply to the terms used in subpart K. sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, The definitions given here for ‘‘ap- fittings, supports, and support hard- proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply, ware shall be of materials appropriate instead of the definitions given in for the environment in which they are § 1926.32, to the use of these terms in to be installed. subpart K. Acceptable. An installation or equip- §§ 1926.433—1926.440 [Reserved] ment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved with- SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL in the meaning of this subpart K: EQUIPMENT (a) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter- § 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg- mined to be safe by a qualified testing ing. laboratory capable of determining the (a) General requirements—(1) Batteries suitability of materials and equipment of the unsealed type shall be located in for installation and use in accordance enclosures with outside vents or in well with this standard; or ventilated rooms and shall be arranged (b) With respect to an installation or so as to prevent the escape of fumes, equipment of a kind which no qualified gases, or electrolyte spray into other testing laboratory accepts, certifies, areas. lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if (2) Ventilation shall be provided to it is inspected or tested by another ensure diffusion of the gases from the Federal agency, or by a State, munic- battery and to prevent the accumula- ipal, or other local authority respon- tion of an explosive mixture. sible for enforcing occupational safety (3) Racks and trays shall be substan- provisions of the National Electrical tial and shall be treated to make them Code, and found in compliance with resistant to the electrolyte. those provisions; or (4) Floors shall be of acid resistant (c) With respect to custom-made construction unless protected from equipment or related installations acid accumulations. which are designed, fabricated for, and (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber intended for use by a particular cus- gloves shall be provided for workers tomer, if it is determined to be safe for handling acids or batteries. its intended use by its manufacturer on (6) Facilities for quick drenching of the basis of test data which the em- the eyes and body shall be provided ployer keeps and makes available for

270

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00270 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

inspection to the Assistant Secretary Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ and his authorized representatives. Bonding. The permanent joining of Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept- metallic parts to form an electrically ed’’ if it has been inspected and found conductive path which will assure elec- to be safe by a qualified testing labora- trical continuity and the capacity to tory. conduct safely any current likely to be Accessible. (As applied to wiring imposed. methods.) Capable of being removed or Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor exposed without damaging the building to assure the required electrical con- structure or finish, or not permanently ductivity between metal parts required closed in by the structure or finish of to be electrically connected. the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘ex- Branch circuit. The circuit conductors posed.’’) between the final overcurrent device Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). Admitting close approach; not guarded Building. A structure which stands by locked doors, elevation, or other ef- alone or which is cut off from adjoining fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces- structures by fire walls with all open- sible.’’) ings therein protected by approved fire Ampacity. The current in amperes a doors. conductor can carry continuously Cabinet. An enclosure designed either under the conditions of use without ex- for surface or flush mounting, and proceeding its temperature rating. vided with a frame, mat, or trim in Appliances. Utilization equipment, which a swinging door or doors are or generally other than industrial, nor- may be hung. mally built in standardized sizes or Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if types, which is installed or connecetcd it: as a unit to perform one or more functions. (a) Has been tested and found by a Approved. Acceptable to the author- qualified testing laboratory to meet ity enforcing this subpart. The author- applicable test standards or to be safe ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist- for use in a specified manner, and ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (b) Is of a kind whose production is tional Safety and Health. The defini- periodically inspected by a qualified tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is testing laboratory. Certified equipment acceptable to the Assistant Secretary must bear a label, tag, or other record of Labor, and therefore approved with- of certification. in the meaning of this subpart. Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi- Askarel. A generic term for a group of nal, or less.) A device designed to open nonflammable synthetic chlorinated and close a circuit by nonautomatic hydrocarbons used as electrical insu- means and to open the circuit auto- lating media. Askarels of various matically on a predetermined overcur- compositional types are used. Under rent without injury to itself when arcing conditions the gases produced, properly applied within its rating. while consisting predominantly of non- (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A combustible hydrogen chloride, can in- switching device capable of making, clude varying amounts of combustible carrying, and breaking currents under gases depending upon the askarel type. normal circuit conditions, and also Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de- making, carrying for a specified time, vice which, by insertion in a recep- and breaking currents under specified tacle, establishes connection between abnormal circuit conditions, such as the conductors of the attached flexible those of short circuit. cord and the conductors connected per- Class I locations. Class I locations are manently to the receptacle. those in which flammable gases or va- Automatic. Self-acting, operating by pors are or may be present in the air in its own mechanism when actuated by quantities sufficient to produce explo- some impersonal influence, as for ex- sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca- ample, a change in current strength, tions include the following: pressure, temperature, or mechanical (a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi- configuration. sion 1 location is a location:

271

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00271 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(1) In which ignitible concentrations or flammable gases or vapors are used, but of flammable gases or vapors may exist which would become hazardous only in case under normal operating conditions; or of an accident or of some unusual operating (2) In which ignitible concentrations condition. The quantity of flammable mate- of such gases or vapors may exist fre- rial that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the quently because of repair or mainte- total area involved, and the record of the in- nance operations or because of leakage; dustry or business with respect to explosions or or fires are all factors that merit consider- (3) In which breakdown or faulty op- ation in determining the classification and eration of equipment or processes extent of each location. might release ignitible concentrations Piping without valves, checks, meters, and of flammable gases or vapors, and similar devices would not ordinarily intro- might also cause simultaneous failure duce a hazardous condition even though used of electric equipment. for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or NOTE: This classification usually includes of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed locations where volatile flammable liquids containers would not normally be considered or liquefied flammable gases are transferred hazardous unless also subject to other haz- from one container to another; interiors of ardous conditions. spray booths and areas in the vicinity of Electrical conduits and their associated spraying and painting operations where vola- enclosures separated from process fluids by a tile flammable solvents are used; locations single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi- containing open tanks or vats of volatile sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart- and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. ments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms Class II locations. Class II locations for flammable gas or for volatile flammable are those that are hazardous because of liquids; and all other locations where ignit- the presence of combustible dust. Class ible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of nor- II locations include the following: mal operations. (a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di- vision 1 location is a location: (b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi- sion 2 location is a location: (1) In which combustible dust is or (1) In which volatile flammable liq- may be in suspension in the air under uids or flammable gases are handled, normal operating conditions, in quan- processed, or used, but in which the tities sufficient to produce explosive or hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will ignitible mixtures; or normally be confined within closed (2) Where mechanical failure or ab- containers or closed systems from normal operation of machinery or which they can escape only in case of equipment might cause such explosive accidental rupture or breakdown of or ignitible mixtures to be produced, such containers or systems, or in case and might also provide a source of igni- of abnormal operation of equipment; or tion through simultaneous failure of (2) In which ignitible concentrations electric equipment, operation of proof gases or vapors are normally pre- tection devices, or from other causes, vented by positive mechanical ventila- or tion, and which might become haz- (3) In which combustible dusts of an ardous through failure or abnormal op- electrically conductive nature may be erations of the ventilating equipment; present. or (3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi- NOTE: Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts pro- sion 1 location, and to which ignitible duced in the handling and processing of grain concentrations of gases or vapors and grain products, pulverized sugar and might occasionally be communicated cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver- unless such communication is pre- ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and vented by adequate positive-pressure woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed, ventilation from a source of clean air, dried hay, and other organic materials which and effective safeguards against ven- may produce combustible dusts when proc- tilation failure are provided. essed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly haz- NOTE: This classification usually includes ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec- locations where volatile flammable liquids essary to avoid ignition and explosion.

272

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00272 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

(b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di- Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by vision 2 location is a location in which: the structure or finish of the building. (1) Combustible dust will not nor- Wires in concealed raceways are con- mally be in suspension in the air in sidered concealed, even though they quantities sufficient to produce explo- may become accessible by withdrawing sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac- them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to cumulations are normally insufficient wiring methods.)’’] to interfere with the normal operation Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- of electrical equipment or other appa- ing no covering or electrical insulation ratus; or whatsoever. (2) Dust may be in suspension in the (b) Covered. A conductor encased air as a result of infrequent malfunc- within material of composition or tioning of handling or processing thickness that is not recognized as equipment, and dust accumulations re- electrical insulation. sulting therefrom may be ignitible by (c) Insulated. A conductor encased abnormal operation or failure of elec- within material of composition and trical equipment or other apparatus. thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation. NOTE: This classification includes loca- Controller. A device or group of de- tions where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where vices that serves to govern, in some dust accumulations might form on or in the predetermined manner, the electric vicinity of electric equipment. These areas power delivered to the apparatus to may contain equipment from which appre- which it is connected. ciable quantities of dust would escape under Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ abnormal operating conditions or be adja- Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de- assembly of a fuse support with either scribed above, into which an explosive or ig- a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis- nitible concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating condi- connecting blade. The fuseholder or tions. fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link), or may act as the Class III locations. Class III locations disconnecting blade by the inclusion of are those that are hazardous because of a nonfusible member. the presence of easily ignitible fibers Cutout box. An enclosure designed for or flyings but in which such fibers or surface mounting and having swinging flyings are not likely to be in suspen- doors or covers secured directly to and sion in the air in quantities sufficient telescoping with the walls of the box to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111 proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’) locations include the following: Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’ (a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Dead front. Without live parts ex- Division 1 location is a location in posed to a person on the operating side which easily ignitible fibers or mate- of the equipment. rials producing combustible flyings are Device. A unit of an electrical system handled, manufactured, or used. which is intended to carry but not uti- NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in- lize electric energy. clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters Disconnecting means. A device, or and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, group of devices, or other means by jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled which the conductors of a circuit can waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw- be disconnected from their source of dust, woodchips, and other material of simi- supply. lar nature. Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical Division 2 location is a location in switching device used for isolating a which easily ignitible fibers are stored circuit or equipment from a source of or handled, except in process of manu- power. facture. Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’ Collector ring. A collector ring is an Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous- assembly of slip rings for transferring ing, fence or walls which will prevent electrical energy from a stationary to persons from accidentally contacting a rotating member. energized parts.

273

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00273 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Enclosure. The case or housing of ap- Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An paratus, or the fence or walls sur- overcurrent protective device with a rounding an installation to prevent circuit opening fusible part that is personnel from accidentally contacting heated and severed by the passage of energized parts, or to protect the overcurrent through it. A fuse com- equipment from physical damage. prises all the parts that form a unit ca- Equipment. A general term including pable of performing the prescribed material, fittings, devices, appliances, functions. It may or may not be the fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used complete device necessary to connect as a part of, or in connection with, an it into an electrical circuit. electrical installation. Ground. A conducting connection, Equipment grounding conductor. See whether intentional or accidental, be- ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’ tween an electrical circuit or equip- Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus ment and the earth, or to some con- enclosed in a case that is capable of ducting body that serves in place of the withstanding an explosion of a speci- earth. fied gas or vapor which may occur Grounded. Connected to earth or to within it and of preventing the ignition some conducting body that serves in of a specified gas or vapor surrounding place of the earth. the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex- Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, plosion of the gas or vapor within, and nominal.) Permanently connected to which operates at such an external earth through a ground connection of temperature that it will not ignite a sufficiently low impedance and having surrounding flammable atmosphere. sufficient ampacity that ground fault current which may occur cannot build Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) up to voltages dangerous to personnel. Capable of being inadvertently touched Grounded conductor. A system or cir- or approached nearer than a safe dis- cuit conductor that is intentionally tance by a person. It is applied to parts grounded. not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu- Grounding conductor. A conductor lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con- used to connect equipment or the cealed.’’) grounded circuit of a wiring system to Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth- a grounding electrode or electrodes. ods.) On or attached to the surface or Grounding conductor, equipment. The behind panels designed to allow access. conductor used to connect the noncur- [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring rent-carrying metal parts of equip- methods.)’’] ment, raceways, and other enclosures Exposed. (For the purposes of to the system grounded conductor and/ § 1926.408(d), Communications systems.) or the grounding electrode conductor Where the circuit is in such a position at the service equipment or at the that in case of failure of supports or in- source of a separately derived system. sulation, contact with another circuit Grounding electrode conductor. The may result. conductor used to connect the ground- Externally operable. Capable of being ing electrode to the equipment ground- operated without exposing the operator ing conductor and/or to the grounded to contact with live parts. conductor of the circuit at the service Feeder. All circuit conductors be- equipment or at the source of a sepa- tween the service equipment, or the rately derived system. generator switchboard of an isolated Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de- plant, and the final branch-circuit vice for the protection of personnel overcurrent device. that functions to deenergize a circuit Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor or portion thereof within an estab- lights suspended between two points lished period of time when a current to more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart. ground exceeds some predetermined Fitting. An accessory such as a lock- value that is less than that required to nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring operate the overcurrent protective de- system that is intended primarily to vice of the supply circuit. perform a mechanical rather than an Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, electrical function. enclosed, or otherwise protected by

274

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00274 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

means of suitable covers, casings, bar- testing laboratory whose listing states riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms either that the equipment or material to remove the likelihood of approach meets appropriate standards or has to a point of danger or contact by per- been tested and found suitable for use sons or objects. in a specified manner. Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, Location—(a) Damp location. Partially well hole, or other vertical opening or protected locations under canopies, space in which an elevator or dumb- marquees, roofed open porches, and waiter is designed to operate. like locations, and interior locations Identified (conductors or terminals). subject to moderate degrees of mois- Identified, as used in reference to a ture, such as some basements. conductor or its terminal, means that (b) Dry location. A location not nor- such conductor or terminal can be rec- mally subject to dampness or wetness. ognized as grounded. A location classified as dry may be Identified (for the use). Recognized as temporarily subject to dampness or suitable for the specific purpose, func- wetness, as in the case of a building tion, use, environment, application, under construction. etc. where described as a requirement (c) Wet location. Installations under- in this standard. Suitability of equip- ground or in concrete slabs or masonry ment for a specific purpose, environ- in direct contact with the earth, and ment, or application is determined by a locations subject to saturation with qualified testing laboratory where such water or other liquids, such as loca- identification includes labeling or list- tions exposed to weather and unpro- ing. tected. Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, mounted on a permanent base with nominal.) A switch capable of making, wheels and/or casters for moving while carrying, and interrupting specified completely assembled. currents. Motor control center. An assembly of Intrinsically safe equipment and associ- one or more enclosed sections having a ated wiring. Equipment and associated common power bus and principally con- wiring in which any spark or thermal taining motor control units. effect, produced either normally or in Outlet. A point on the wiring system specified fault conditions, is incapable, at which current is taken to supply under certain prescribed test condi- utilization equipment. tions, of causing ignition of a mixture Overcurrent. Any current in excess of of flammable or combustible material the rated current of equipment or the in air in its most easily ignitible con- ampacity of a conductor. It may result centration. from overload (see definition), short Isolated. Not readily accessible to circuit, or ground fault. A current in persons unless special means for access excess of rating may be accommodated are used. by certain equipment and conductors Isolated power system. A system com- for a given set of conditions. Hence the prising an isolating transformer or its rules for overcurrent protection are equivalent, a line isolation monitor, specific for particular situations. and its ungrounded circuit conductors. Overload. Operation of equipment in Labeled. Equipment or materials to excess of normal, full load rating, or of which has been attached a label, sym- a conductor in excess of rated bol or other identifying mark of a ampacity which, when it persists for a qualified testing laboratory which indi- sufficient length of time, would cause cates compliance with appropriate damage or dangerous overheating. A standards or performance in a specified fault, such as a short circuit or ground manner. fault, is not an overload. Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for (See‘‘Overcurrent.’’) the direct connection of a lampholder, Panelboard. A single panel or group of a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord panel units designed for assembly in terminating in a lampholder. the form of a single panel; including Listed. Equipment or materials in- buses, automatic overcurrent devices, cluded in a list published by a qualified and with or without switches for the

275

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00275 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

control of light, heat, or power cir- bias of the tests and test methods em- cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi- ployed. net or cutout box placed in or against Raceway. A channel designed ex- a wall or partition and accessible only pressly for holding wires, cables, or from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’) busbars, with additional functions as Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de- permitted in this subpart. Raceways signed to be hand-carried. may be of metal or insulating material, Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) and the term includes rigid metal con- See ‘‘Fuse.’’ duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- Power outlet. An enclosed assembly mediate metal conduit, liquidtight which may include receptacles, circuit flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- buses and watt-hour meter mounting trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- means; intended to serve as a means ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, for distributing power required to oper- cellular metal floor raceways, surface ate mobile or temporarily installed raceways, wireways, and busways. equipment. Readily accessible. Capable of being Premises wiring system. That interior reached quickly for operation, renewal, and exterior wiring, including power, or inspections, without requiring those lighting, control, and signal circuit to whom ready access is requisite to wiring together with all of its associ- climb over or remove obstacles or to ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de- resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. vices, both permanently and tempo- (See ‘‘Accessible.’’) rarily installed, which extends from Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact the load end of the service drop, or load device installed at the outlet for the end of the service lateral conductors to connection of a single attachment the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in- plug. A single receptacle is a single clude wiring internal to appliances, fix- contact device with no other contact tures, motors, controllers, motor con- device on the same yoke. A multiple trol centers, and similar equipment. receptacle is a single device containing two or more receptacles. Qualified person. One familiar with Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one the construction and operation of the or more receptacles are installed. equipment and the hazards involved. Remote-control circuit. Any electric A prop- Qualified testing laboratory. circuit that controls any other circuit erly equipped and staffed testing lab- through a relay or an equivalent de- oratory which has capabilities for and vice. which provides the following services: Sealable equipment. Equipment en- (a) Experimental testing for safety of closed in a case or cabinet that is pro- specified items of equipment and mate- vided with a means of sealing or lock- rials referred to in this standard to de- ing so that live parts cannot be made termine compliance with appropriate accessible without opening the enclo- test standards or performance in a sure. The equipment may or may not specified manner; be operable without opening the enclo- (b) Inspecting the run of such items sure. of equipment and materials at fac- Separately derived system. A premises tories for product evaluation to assure wiring system whose power is derived compliance with the test standards; from generator, transformer, or con- (c) Service-value determinations verter windings and has no direct elec- through field inspections to monitor trical connection, including a solidly the proper use of labels on products connected grounded circuit conductor, and with authority for recall of the to supply conductors originating in an- label in the event a hazardous product other system. is installed; Service. The conductors and equip- (d) Employing a controlled procedure ment for delivering energy from the for identifying the listed and/or labeled electricity supply system to the wiring equipment or materials tested; and system of the premises served. (e) Rendering creditable reports or Service conductors. The supply con- findings that are objective and without ductors that extend from the street

276

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00276 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

main or from transformers to the serv- (c) Isolating switch. A switch intended ice equipment of the premises supplied. for isolating an electric circuit from Service drop. The overhead service the source of power. It has no inter- conductors from the last pole or other rupting rating, and it is intended to be aerial support to and including the operated only after the circuit has been splices, if any, connecting to the serv- opened by some other means. ice-entrance conductors at the building (d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, or other structure. rated in horsepower, capable of inter- Service-entrance conductors, overhead rupting the maximum operating over- system. The service conductors between load current of a motor of the same the terminals of the service equipment horsepower rating as the switch at the and a point usually outside the build- rated voltage. ing, clear of building walls, where Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, joined by tap or splice to the service nominal.) Devices designed to close drop. and/or open one or more electric cir- Service-entrance conductors, under- cuits. Included in this category are cir- ground system. The service conductors cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting between the terminals of the service (or isolating) switches, disconnecting equipment and the point of connection means, and interrupter switches. to the service lateral. Where service Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that may read- equipment is located outside the build- ily be disassembled for transport in a ing walls, there may be no service-en- vehicle. trance conductors, or they may be en- Utilization equipment. Utilization tirely outside the building. equipment means equipment which uti- The necessary Service equipment. lizes electric energy for mechanical, equipment, usually consisting of a cir- chemical, heating, lighting, or similar cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and useful purpose. their accessories, located near the Utilization system. A utilization sys- point of entrance of supply conductors tem is a system which provides electric to a building or other structure, or an power and light for employee work- otherwise defined area, and intended to places, and includes the premises wir- constitute the main control and means ing system and utilization equipment. of cutoff of the supply. Ventilated. Provided with a means to Service raceway. The raceway that en- permit circulation of air sufficient to closes the service-entrance conductors. remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va- Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit pors. that energizes signaling equipment. Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable Switchboard. A large single panel, liquid having a flash point below 38 de- frame, or assembly of panels which grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem- have switches, buses, instruments, perature is above its flash point, or a overcurrent and other protective de- Class II combustible liquid having a vices mounted on the face or back or vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia both. Switchboards are generally ac- (276 kPa) at 38° C (100° F) whose tem- cessible from the rear as well as from perature is above its flash point. the front and are not intended to be in- Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’) root-mean-square (effective) difference Switches—(a) General-use switch. A of potential between any two conduc- switch intended for use in general dis- tors of the circuit concerned. tribution and branch circuits. It is Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as- rated in amperes, and it is capable of signed to a circuit or system for the interrupting its rated current at its purpose of conveniently designating its rated voltage. voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, (b) General-use snap switch. A form of etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir- general-use switch so constructed that cuit operates can vary from the nomi- it can be installed in flush device boxes nal within a range that permits satis- or on outlet box covers, or otherwise factory operation of equipment. used in conjunction with wiring sys- Voltage to ground. For grounded cir- tems recognized by this subpart. cuits, the voltage between the given

277

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00277 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.450 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

conductor and that point or conductor the waist and for attaching it to a lan- of the circuit that is grounded; for yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt- Body harness means a design of straps age between the given conductor and which may be secured about the em- any other conductor of the circuit. ployee in a manner to distribute the Watertight. So constructed that mois- fall arrest forces over at least the ture will not enter the enclosure. thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul- Weatherproof. So constructed or pro- ders, with means for attaching it to tected that exposure to the weather other components of a personal fall ar- will not interfere with successful oper- rest system. ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water- Brace means a rigid connection that tight equipment can fulfill the require- holds one scaffold member in a fixed ments for weatherproof where varying position with respect to another mem- weather conditions other than wetness, ber, or to a building or structure. such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a extremes, are not a factor. supported scaffold composed of framed Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’ squares which support a platform. Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a plat- Subpart L—Scaffolds form supported by brackets attached to building or structural walls. AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work Catenary scaffold means a suspension Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- scaffold consisting of a platform sup- tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, ported by two essentially horizontal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and parallel ropes attached to struc- (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR Part tural members of a building or other 1911. structure. Additional support may be provided by vertical pickups. SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless Chimney hoist means a multi-point otherwise noted. adjustable suspension scaffold used to § 1926.450 Scope, application and defi- provide access to work inside chim- nitions applicable to this subpart. neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold’’.) (a) Scope and application. This sub- Cleat means a structural block used part applies to all scaffolds used in at the end of a platform to prevent the workplaces covered by this part. It platform from slipping off its supports. does not apply to crane or derrick sus- Cleats are also used to provide footing pended personnel platforms, which are on sloped surfaces such as crawling covered by § 1926.550(g). The criteria for boards. aerial lifts are set out exclusively in Competent person means one who is § 1926.453. capable of identifying existing and pre- (b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension dictable hazards in the surroundings or scaffold means a suspension scaffold working conditions which are unsani- equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op- tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- erated by an employee(s) on the scaf- ployees, and who has authorization to fold. take prompt corrective measures to Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal eliminate them. transverse scaffold member (which Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) may be supported by ledgers or run- means a two- point or multi-point ad- ners) upon which the scaffold platform justable suspension scaffold con- rests and which joins scaffold uprights, structed using a series of inter- posts, poles, and similar members. connected braced scaffold members or Boatswains’ chair means a single- supporting structures erected to form a point adjustable suspension scaffold continuous scaffold. consisting of a seat or sling designed to Coupler means a device for locking support one employee in a sitting posi- together the tubes of a tube and cou- tion. pler scaffold. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap Crawling board (chicken ladder) means with means both for securing it about a supported scaffold consisting of a

278

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00278 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.450

plank with cleats spaced and secured to toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to provide footing, for use on sloped sur- prevent employees from falling off a faces such as roofs. scaffold platform or walkway to lower Deceleration device means any mecha- levels. nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch Hoist means a manual or power-oper- lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- ated mechanical device to raise or ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic lower a suspended scaffold. self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which Horse scaffold means a supported scaf- dissipates a substantial amount of en- fold consisting of a platform supported ergy during a fall arrest or limits the by construction horses (saw horses). energy imposed on an employee during Horse scaffolds constructed of metal fall arrest. are sometimes known as trestle scaf- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold folds. means a supported scaffold consisting Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double of a platform(s) resting on cross beams pole scaffold’’). (bearers) supported by ledgers and a double row of uprights independent of Interior hung scaffold means a suspen- support (except ties, guys, braces) from sion scaffold consisting of a platform any structure. suspended from the ceiling or roof Equivalent means alternative designs, structure by fixed length supports. materials or methods to protect Ladder jack scaffold means a sup- against a hazard which the employer ported scaffold consisting of a platform can demonstrate will provide an equal resting on brackets attached to lad- or greater degree of safety for employ- ders. ees than the methods, materials or de- Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed- signs specified in the standard. size, self-supporting ladder consisting Exposed power lines means electrical of a wide flat tread ladder in the form power lines which are accessible to em- of stairs. ployees and which are not shielded Landing means a platform at the end from contact. Such lines do not include of a flight of stairs. extension cords or power tool cords. Large area scaffold means a pole scaf- Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems without a thimble at the end of a wire scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold rope. erected over substantially the entire Fabricated decking and planking work area. For example: a scaffold means manufactured platforms made erected over the entire floor area of a of wood (including laminated wood, and room. solid sawn wood planks), metal or Lean-to scaffold means a supported other materials. scaffold which is kept erect by tilting Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular it toward and resting it against a welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold building or structure. consisting of a platform(s) supported on fabricated end frames with integral Lifeline means a component con- posts, horizontal bearers, and inter- sisting of a flexible line that connects mediate members. to an anchorage at one end to hang Failure means load refusal, breakage, vertically (vertical lifeline), or that or separation of component parts. Load connects to anchorages at both ends to refusal is the point where the ultimate stretch horizontally (horizontal life- strength is exceeded. line), and which serves as a means for Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen- connecting other components of a persion scaffold consisting of a braced sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- platform resting on two parallel bear- age. ers and hung from overhead supports Lower levels means areas below the by ropes of fixed length. level where the employee is located Form scaffold means a supported scaf- and to which an employee can fall. fold consisting of a platform supported Such areas include, but are not limited by brackets attached to formwork. to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, Guardrail system means a vertical bar- runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma- rier, consisting of, but not limited to, terials, water, and equipment.

279

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00279 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.450 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold ends of which are secured inside the (see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaf- building or structure. fold’’). Overhand bricklaying means the proc- Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- ess of laying bricks and masonry units sion scaffold means a continuous run such that the surface of the wall to be suspension scaffold designed and used jointed is on the opposite side of the for masonry operations. wall from the mason, requiring the Maximum intended load means the mason to lean over the wall to com- total load of all persons, equipment, plete the work. It includes mason tend- tools, materials, transmitted loads, ing and electrical installation incor- and other loads reasonably anticipated porated into the brick wall during the to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold overhand bricklaying process. component at any one time. Personal fall arrest system means a Mobile scaffold means a powered or system used to arrest an employee’s unpowered, portable, caster or wheel- fall. It consists of an anchorage, con- mounted supported scaffold. nectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard, decelera- Multi-level suspended scaffold means a tion device, lifeline, or combinations of two-point or multi-point adjustable these. suspension scaffold with a series of Platform means a work surface ele- platforms at various levels resting on vated above lower levels. Platforms common stirrups. can be constructed using individual Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- wood planks, fabricated planks, fab- means a suspension scaffold con- fold ricated decks, and fabricated plat- sisting of a platform(s) which is sus- forms. pended by more than two ropes from Pole scaffold (see definitions for ‘‘Sin- overhead supports and equipped with gle-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double (inde- means to raise and lower the platform pendent) pole scaffold’’). to desired work levels. Such scaffolds Power operated hoist means a hoist include chimney hoists. which is powered by other than human Needle beam scaffold means a platform energy. suspended from needle beams. Pump jack scaffold means a supported Open sides and ends means the edges scaffold consisting of a platform sup- of a platform that are more than 14 ported by vertical poles and movable inches (36 cm) away horizontally from support brackets. a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface Qualified means one who, by posses- (such as a building wall) or a sturdy, sion of a recognized degree, certificate, continuous horizontal surface (such as or professional standing, or who by ex- a floor), or a point of access. Exception: tensive knowledge, training, and expe- For plastering and lathing operations rience, has successfully demonstrated the horizontal threshold distance is 18 his/her ability to solve or resolve prob- inches (46 cm). lems related to the subject matter, the Outrigger means the structural mem- work, or the project. ber of a supported scaffold used to in- Rated load means the manufacturer’s crease the base width of a scaffold in specified maximum load to be lifted by order to provide support for and in- a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or creased stability of the scaffold. scaffold component. Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the Repair bracket scaffold means a sup- structural member of a suspension ported scaffold consisting of a platform scaffold or outrigger scaffold which supported by brackets which are se- provides support for the scaffold by ex- cured in place around the circum- tending the scaffold point of attach- ference or perimeter of a chimney, ment to a point out and away from the stack, tank or other supporting struc- structure or building. ture by one or more wire ropes placed Outrigger scaffold means a supported around the supporting structure. scaffold consisting of a platform rest- Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts) supported scaffold consisting of a plat- projecting beyond the wall or face of form resting on angular-shaped sup- the building or structure, the inboard ports.

280

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00280 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.450

Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus- lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac- pension scaffold means a continuous run ing member which may support the suspension scaffold designed and used bearers. for stonesetters’ operations. Scaffold means any temporary ele- Supported scaffold means one or more vated platform (supported or sus- platforms supported by outrigger pended) and its supporting structure beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, (including points of anchorage), used posts, frames, or similar rigid support. for supporting employees or materials Suspension scaffold means one or or both. more platforms suspended by ropes or Self-contained adjustable scaffold other non-rigid means from an over- means a combination supported and head structure(s). suspension scaffold consisting of an adjustable platform(s) mounted on an System scaffold means a scaffold con- independent supporting frame(s) not a sisting of posts with fixed connection part of the object being worked on, and points that accept runners, bearers, which is equipped with a means to per- and diagonals that can be intermit the raising and lowering of the connected at predetermined levels. platform(s). Such systems include roll- Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup- ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, ported scaffold consisting of a platform and some masons’ adjustable supported resting on brackets that are either di- scaffolds. rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or Shore scaffold means a supported scaf- attached to devices that are attached fold which is placed against a building to such a tank. or structure and held in place with Top plate bracket scaffold means a props. scaffold supported by brackets that Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- hook over or are attached to the top of fold means a suspension scaffold con- a wall. This type of scaffold is similar sisting of a platform suspended by one to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and rope from an overhead support and form scaffolds and is used in residen- equipped with means to permit the tial construction for setting trusses. movement of the platform to desired Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup- work levels. ported or suspended scaffold consisting Single-pole scaffold means a supported of a platform(s) supported by tubing, scaffold consisting of a platform(s) erected with coupling devices con- resting on bearers, the outside ends of necting uprights, braces, bearers, and which are supported on runners secured runners. to a single row of posts or uprights, and Tubular welded frame scaffold (see the inner ends of which are supported ‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’). on or in a structure or building wall. Two-point suspension scaffold (swing Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) means a suspension scaffold con- means a tower comprised of scaffold stage) components and which contains inter- sisting of a platform supported by nal stairway units and rest platforms. hangers (stirrups) suspended by two These towers are used to provide access ropes from overhead supports and to scaffold platforms and other ele- equipped with means to permit the vated points such as floors and roofs. raising and lowering of the platform to Stall load means the load at which desired work levels. the prime-mover of a power-operated Unstable objects means items whose hoist stalls or the power to the prime- strength, configuration, or lack of sta- mover is automatically disconnected. bility may allow them to become dis- Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf- located and shift and therefore may fold means a platform resting directly not properly support the loads imposed on the rungs of step ladders or trestle on them. Unstable objects do not con- ladders. stitute a safe base support for scaf- Stilts means a pair of poles or similar folds, platforms, or employees. Exam- supports with raised footrests, used to ples include, but are not limited to, permit walking above the ground or barrels, boxes, loose brick, and con- working surface. crete blocks.

281

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00281 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Vertical pickup means a rope used to to comply with paragraph (a) of this support the horizontal rope in catenary section. scaffolds. (b) Scaffold platform construction. (1) Walkway means a portion of a scaf- Each platform on all working levels of fold platform used only for access and scaffolds shall be fully planked or not as a work level. decked between the front uprights and Window jack scaffold means a plat- the guardrail supports as follows: form resting on a bracket or jack (i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold which projects through a window open- plank, fabricated plank, fabricated ing. deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the space between ad- § 1926.451 General requirements. jacent units and the space between the This section does not apply to aerial platform and the uprights is no more lifts, the criteria for which are set out than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where exclusively in § 1926.453. the employer can demonstrate that a (a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in wider space is necessary (for example, paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5) to fit around uprights when side brack- and (g) of this section, each scaffold ets are used to extend the width of the and scaffold component shall be capa- platform). ble of supporting, without failure, its (ii) Where the employer makes the own weight and at least 4 times the demonstration provided for in para- maximum intended load applied or graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat- transmitted to it. form shall be planked or decked as (2) Direct connections to roofs and fully as possible and the remaining floors, and counterweights used to bal- open space between the platform and ance adjustable suspension scaffolds, 1 shall be capable of resisting at least 4 the uprights shall not exceed 9 ⁄2 inches times the tipping moment imposed by (24.1 cm). the scaffold operating at the rated load Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re- of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to pro- the tipping moment imposed by the vide full planking or decking does not scaffold operating at the stall load of apply to platforms used solely as walk- the hoist, whichever is greater. ways or solely by employees per- (3) Each suspension rope, including forming scaffold erection or disman- connecting hardware, used on non-ad- tling. In these situations, only the justable suspension scaffolds shall be planking that the employer establishes capable of supporting, without failure, is necessary to provide safe working at least 6 times the maximum intended conditions is required. load applied or transmitted to that (2) Except as provided in paragraphs rope. (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, (4) Each suspension rope, including each scaffold platform and walkway connecting hardware, used on adjust- shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide. able suspension scaffolds shall be capa- (i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top ble of supporting, without failure, at plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket least 6 times the maximum intended scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall load applied or transmitted to that be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. rope with the scaffold operating at ei- There is no minimum width require- ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2 ment for boatswains’ chairs. (minimum) times the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to (5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist an administrative stay effective November shall not exceed 3 times its rated load. 29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG- ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement (6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaf- qualified person and shall be con- folds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed structed and loaded in accordance with until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking that design. Non-mandatory Appendix regarding the minimum width of roof brack- A to this subpart contains examples of et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is criteria that will enable an employer later.

282

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00282 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

(ii) Where scaffolds must be used in (7) On scaffolds where platforms are areas that the employer can dem- overlapped to create a long platform, onstrate are so narrow that platforms the overlap shall occur only over sup- and walkways cannot be at least 18 ports, and shall not be less than 12 inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are walkways shall be as wide as feasible, nailed together or otherwise restrained and employees on those platforms and to prevent movement. walkways shall be protected from fall (8) At all points of a scaffold where hazards by the use of guardrails and/or the platform changes direction, such as personal fall arrest systems. turning a corner, any platform that (3) Except as provided in paragraphs rests on a bearer at an angle other than (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the a right angle shall be laid first, and front edge of all platforms shall not be platforms which rest at right angles more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the over the same bearer shall be laid sec- face of the work, unless guardrail sys- ond, on top of the first platform. tems are erected along the front edge (9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- and/or personal fall arrest systems are ered with opaque finishes, except that used in accordance with paragraph (g) platform edges may be covered or of this section to protect employees marked for identification. Platforms from falling. may be coated periodically with wood (i) The maximum distance from the preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 and slip-resistant finishes; however, inches (8 cm); the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces. (ii) The maximum distance from the (10) Scaffold components manufac- face for plastering and lathing oper- tured by different manufacturers shall ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm). not be intermixed unless the compo- (4) Each end of a platform, unless nents fit together without force and cleated or otherwise restrained by the scaffold’s structural integrity is hooks or equivalent means, shall ex- maintained by the user. Scaffold com- tend over the centerline of its support ponents manufactured by different at least 6 inches (15 cm). manufacturers shall not be modified in (5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or order to intermix them unless a com- less in length shall not extend over its petent person determines the resulting support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un- scaffold is structurally sound. less the platform is designed and in- (11) Scaffold components made of dis- stalled so that the cantilevered portion similar metals shall not be used to- of the platform is able to support em- gether unless a competent person has ployees and/or materials without tip- determined that galvanic action will ping, or has guardrails which block em- not reduce the strength of any compo- ployee access to the cantilevered end. nent to a level below that required by (ii) Each platform greater than 10 paragraph (a)(1) of this section. feet in length shall not extend over its (c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1) support more than 18 inches (46 cm), Supported scaffolds with a height to unless it is designed and installed so base width (including outrigger sup- that the cantilevered portion of the ports, if used) ratio of more than four platform is able to support employees to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip- without tipping, or has guardrails ping by guying, tying, bracing, or which block employee access to the equivalent means, as follows: cantilevered end. (i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- (6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks stalled at locations where horizontal are abutted to create a long platform, members support both inner and outer each abutted end shall rest on a sepa- legs. rate support surface. This provision (ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- does not preclude the use of common stalled according to the scaffold manu- support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec- facturer’s recommendations or at the tions, to support abutting planks, or closest horizontal member to the 4:1 hook on platforms designed to rest on height and be repeated vertically at lo- common supports. cations of horizontal members every 20

283

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00283 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf- structural metal or equivalent folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and strength material, and shall be re- every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter strained to prevent movement. for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) (3) The inboard ends of suspension wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com- scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta- pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur- bilized by bolts or other direct connec- ther than the 4:1 height from the top. tions to the floor or roof deck, or they Such guys, ties and braces shall be in- shall have their inboard ends stabilized stalled at each end of the scaffold and by counterweights, except masons’ at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end fold outrigger beams shall not be sta- [not both] towards the other). bilized by counterweights. (iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers (i) Before the scaffold is used, direct shall be used to prevent the tipping of connections shall be evaluated by a supported scaffolds in all cir- competent person who shall confirm, cumstances where an eccentric load, based on the evaluation, that the sup- such as a cantilevered work platform, porting surfaces are capable of sup- is applied or is transmitted to the scaf- porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- fold. dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable (2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, suspension scaffold connections shall posts, frames, and uprights shall bear be designed by an engineer experienced on base plates and mud sills or other in such scaffold design. adequate firm foundation. (ii) Counterweights shall be made of (i) Footings shall be level, sound, non-flowable material. Sand, gravel rigid, and capable of supporting the and similar materials that can be eas- loaded scaffold without settling or dis- ily dislocated shall not be used as placement. counterweights. (ii) Unstable objects shall not be used (iii) Only those items specifically de- to support scaffolds or platform units. signed as counterweights shall be used (iii) Unstable objects shall not be to counterweight scaffold systems. used as working platforms. Construction materials such as, but (iv) Front-end loaders and similar not limited to, masonry units and rolls pieces of equipment shall not be used of roofing felt, shall not be used as to support scaffold platforms unless counterweights. they have been specifically designed by (iv) Counterweights shall be secured the manufacturer for such use. by mechanical means to the outrigger (v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to beams to prevent accidental displace- support scaffold platforms unless the ment. entire platform is attached to the fork (v) Counterweights shall not be re- and the fork-lift is not moved hori- moved from an outrigger beam until zontally while the platform is occu- the scaffold is disassembled. pied. (vi) Outrigger beams which are not (3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, stabilized by bolts or other direct con- posts, frames, and uprights shall be nections to the floor or roof deck shall plumb and braced to prevent swaying be secured by tiebacks. and displacement. (vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in (d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1) strength to the suspension ropes. All suspension scaffold support devices, (viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed such as outrigger beams, cornice perpendicular to its bearing support hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de- (usually the face of the building or vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of structure). However, where the em- supporting at least 4 times the load im- ployer can demonstrate that it is not posed on them by the scaffold oper- possible to place an outrigger beam ating at the rated load of the hoist (or perpendicular to the face of the build- at least 1.5 times the load imposed on ing or structure because of obstruc- them by the scaffold at the stall capac- tions that cannot be moved, the out- ity of the hoist, whichever is greater). rigger beam may be placed at some (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger other angle, provided opposing angle beams, when used, shall be made of tiebacks are used.

284

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00284 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

(ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a through the hoist, or the rope end shall structurally sound anchorage on the be configured or provided with means building or structure. Sound anchor- to prevent the end from passing ages include structural members, but through the hoist. do not include standpipes, vents, other (7) The use of repaired wire rope as piping systems, or electrical conduit. suspension rope is prohibited. (x) Tiebacks shall be installed per- (8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be pendicular to the face of the building joined together except through the use or structure, or opposing angle of eye splice thimbles connected with tiebacks shall be installed. Single shackles or coverplates and bolts. tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited. (9) The load end of wire suspension (4) Suspension scaffold outrigger ropes shall be equipped with proper size beams shall be: thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack- equivalent means. les at both ends; (10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- (ii) Securely fastened together with fects by a competent person prior to the flanges turned out when channel each workshift and after every occur- iron beams are used in place of I- rence which could affect a rope’s integ- beams; rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of (iii) Installed with all bearing sup- the following conditions exist: ports perpendicular to the beam center (i) Any physical damage which im- line; pairs the function and strength of the (iv) Set and maintained with the web rope. in a vertical position; and (ii) Kinks that might impair the (v) When an outrigger beam is used, tracking or wrapping of rope around the shackle or clevis with which the the drum(s) or sheave(s). rope is attached to the outrigger beam (iii) Six randomly distributed broken shall be placed directly over the center wires in one rope lay or three broken line of the stirrup. wires in one strand in one rope lay. (5) Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof (iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or flattening or peening causing loss of similar devices shall be: more than one-third of the original di- (i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or ameter of the outside wires. materials of equivalent strength; (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or (ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and any damage caused by contact with (iii) Secured against movement by electrical wires. tiebacks installed at right angles to (vi) Evidence that the secondary the face of the building or structure, or brake has been activated during an opposing angle tiebacks shall be in- overspeed condition and has engaged stalled and secured to a structurally the suspension rope. sound point of anchorage on the build- (11) Swaged attachments or spliced ing or structure. Sound points of an- eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not chorage include structural members, be used unless they are made by the but do not include standpipes, vents, wire rope manufacturer or a qualified other piping systems, or electrical con- person. duit. (12) When wire rope clips are used on (iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in suspension scaffolds: strength to the hoisting rope. (6) When winding drum hoists are (i) There shall be a minimum of 3 used on a suspension scaffold, they wire rope clips installed, with the clips shall contain not less than four wraps a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart; of the suspension rope at the lowest (ii) Clips shall be installed according point of scaffold travel. When other to the manufacturer’s recommenda- types of hoists are used, the suspension tions; ropes shall be long enough to allow the (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the scaffold to be lowered to the level manufacturer’s recommendations after below without the rope end passing the initial loading;

285

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00285 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(iv) Clips shall be inspected and re- stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre- tightened to the manufacturer’s rec- fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac- ommendations at the start of each cess from another scaffold, structure, workshift thereafter; personnel hoist, or similar surface (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be the point of suspension for any scaffold used as a means of access. hoist; (2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the ladders (Additional requirements for U-bolt shall be placed over the dead the proper construction and use of end of the rope, and the saddle shall be portable ladders are contained in sub- placed over the live end of the rope. part X of this part—Stairways and (13) Suspension scaffold power-oper- Ladders): ated hoists and manual hoists shall be (i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable tested by a qualified testing labora- ladders shall be positioned so as not to tory. tip the scaffold; (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and (ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders hoists shall not be used on suspension shall be positioned so that their bot- scaffolds. tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper- cm) above the scaffold supporting ated hoists used on suspension scaf- level; folds shall be enclosed. (iii) When hook-on and attachable (16) In addition to the normal oper- ladders are used on a supported scaffold ating brake, suspension scaffold power- more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they operated hoists and manually operated shall have rest platforms at 35-foot hoists shall have a braking device or (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals. locking pawl which engages automati- (iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders cally when a hoist makes either of the shall be specifically designed for use following uncontrolled movements: an with the type of scaffold used; instantaneous change in momentum or (v) Hook-on and attachable ladders an accelerated overspeed. shall have a minimum rung length of (17) Manually operated hoists shall 111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and require a positive crank force to de- (vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders scend. shall have uniformly spaced rungs with (18) Two-point and multi-point sus- a maximum spacing between rungs of pension scaffolds shall be tied or other- 163⁄4 inches. wise secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be necessary (3) Stairway-type ladders shall: based on an evaluation by a competent (i) Be positioned such that their bot- person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall tom step is not more than 24 inches (61 not be used for this purpose. cm) above the scaffold supporting (19) Devices whose sole function is to level; provide emergency escape and rescue (ii) Be provided with rest platforms shall not be used as working platforms. at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in- This provision does not preclude the tervals; use of systems which are designed to (iii) Have a minimum step width of 16 function both as suspension scaffolds inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf- and emergency systems. fold stairway-type ladders shall have a (e) Access. This paragraph applies to minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30 scaffold access for all employees. Ac- cm); and cess requirements for employees erect- (iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all ing or dismantling supported scaffolds steps and landings. are specifically addressed in paragraph (4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/ (e)(9) of this section. towers) shall be positioned such that (1) When scaffold platforms are more their bottom step is not more than 24 than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup- point of access, portable ladders, hook- porting level. on ladders, attachable ladders, stair (i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail towers (scaffold stairways/towers), and a midrail shall be provided on each stairway-type ladders (such as ladder side of each scaffold stairway.

286

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00286 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

(ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys- (iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk- tem shall also be capable of serving as way is steeper than one (1) vertical in a handrail, unless a separate handrail eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk- is provided. way shall have cleats not more than (iii) Handrails, and toprails that fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which serve as handrails, shall provide an are securely fastened to the planks to adequate handhold for employees provide footing. grasping them to avoid falling. (6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac- (iv) Stairrail systems and handrails cess frames shall: shall be surfaced to prevent injury to (i) Be specifically designed and con- employees from punctures or lacera- structed for use as ladder rungs; tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth- (ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 ing. inches (20 cm); (v) The ends of stairrail systems and (iii) Not be used as work platforms handrails shall be constructed so that when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in they do not constitute a projection length, unless each affected employee hazard. uses fall protection, or a positioning (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are device, which complies with § 1926.502; used as handrails, shall be at least 3 (iv) Be uniformly spaced within each inches (7.6 cm) from other objects. frame section; (vii) Stairrails shall be not less than (v) Be provided with rest platforms at 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in- inches (94 cm) from the upper surface tervals on all supported scaffolds more of the stairrail to the surface of the than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and tread, in line with the face of the riser (vi) Have a maximum spacing be- at the forward edge of the tread. tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non- (viii) A landing platform at least 18 uniform rung spacing caused by joining inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 end frames together is allowed, pro- inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided vided the resulting spacing does not ex- at each level. ceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). (ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at (7) Steps and rungs of ladder and least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between stairway type access shall line up stairrails. vertically with each other between rest (x) Treads and landings shall have platforms. slip-resistant surfaces. (8) Direct access to or from another (xi) Stairways shall be installed be- surface shall be used only when the tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 the horizontal. cm) horizontally and not more than 24 (xii) Guardrails meeting the require- inches (61 cm) vertically from the other ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec- surface. tion shall be provided on the open sides (9) Effective September 2, 1997, access and ends of each landing. for employees erecting or dismantling (xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, supported scaffolds shall be in accord- within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight ance with the following: of stairs. Greater variations in riser (i) The employer shall provide safe height are allowed for the top and bot- means of access for each employee tom steps of the entire system, not for erecting or dismantling a scaffold each flight of stairs. where the provision of safe access is (xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, feasible and does not create a greater within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs. hazard. The employer shall have a com- (5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps petent person determine whether it is and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more feasible or would pose a greater hazard above lower levels shall have guardrail to provide, and have employees use a systems which comply with subpart M safe means of access. This determina- of this part—Fall Protection; tion shall be based on site conditions (ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in- and the type of scaffold being erected clined more than a slope of one (1) or dismantled. vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de- (ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders grees above the horizontal). shall be installed as soon as scaffold

287

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00287 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

erection has progressed to a point that could affect a scaffold’s structural in- permits safe installation and use. tegrity. (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu- (4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or bular welded frame scaffolds, (end) weakened such that its strength is less frames, with horizontal members that than that required by paragraph (a) of are parallel, level and are not more this section shall be immediately re- than 22 inches apart vertically may be paired or replaced, braced to meet used as climbing devices for access, those provisions, or removed from serv- provided they are erected in a manner ice until repaired. that creates a usable ladder and pro- (5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori- vides good hand hold and foot space. zontally while employees are on them, (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded unless they have been designed by a frame scaffolds shall not be used as a registered professional engineer spe- means of access or egress. cifically for such movement or, for mo- (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com- bile scaffolds, where the provisions of ponents shall not be loaded in excess of § 1926.452(w) are followed. their maximum intended loads or rated (6) The clearance between scaffolds capacities, whichever is less. and power lines shall be as follows: (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf- Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, folds is prohibited. dismantled, altered, or moved such (3) Scaffolds and scaffold components that they or any conductive material shall be inspected for visible defects by handled on them might come closer to a competent person before each work exposed and energized power lines than shift, and after any occurrence which as follows:

288

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00288 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451 Alternatives Alternatives (3.1 m). (3.1 m). 2 times the length of line insulator, but never less than 10 feet 2 times the length of line insulator, but never less than 10 feet ...... Minimum distance Minimum distance . . . 3 feet (0.9 m) 10 feet (3.1m) 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for each 1 kv over 50 10 feet (3.1 m) 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for each 1 kv over 50 voltage voltage ...... Insulated lines Uninsulated lines Less than 300 volts 300 volts to 50 kv More than 50 kv Less than 50 kv More than 50 kv

289

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00289 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaf- (14) Makeshift devices, such as but folds and materials may be closer to not limited to boxes and barrels, shall power lines than specified above where not be used on top of scaffold platforms such clearance is necessary for per- to increase the working level height of formance of work, and only after the employees. utility company, or electrical system (15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf- operator, has been notified of the need folds to increase the working level to work closer and the utility com- height of employees, except on large pany, or electrical system operator, area scaffolds where employers have has deenergized the lines, relocated the satisfied the following criteria: lines, or installed protective coverings (i) When the ladder is placed against to prevent accidental contact with the a structure which is not a part of the lines. scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured (7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, against the sideways thrust exerted by dismantled, or altered only under the the ladder; supervision and direction of a com- (ii) The platform units shall be se- petent person qualified in scaffold erec- cured to the scaffold to prevent their tion, moving, dismantling or alter- movement; ation. Such activities shall be per- (iii) The ladder legs shall be on the formed only by experienced and trained same platform or other means shall be employees selected for such work by provided to stabilize the ladder against the competent person. unequal platform deflection, and (8) Employees shall be prohibited (iv) The ladder legs shall be secured from working on scaffolds covered with to prevent them from slipping or being snow, ice, or other slippery material pushed off the platform. except as necessary for removal of such (16) Platforms shall not deflect more 1⁄60 of the span when loaded. materials. than (17) To reduce the possibility of weld- (9) Where swinging loads are being ing current arcing through the suspen- hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that sion wire rope when performing weld- the loads might contact the scaffold, ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol- tag lines or equivalent measures to lowing precautions shall be taken, as control the loads shall be used. applicable: (10) Suspension ropes supporting ad- (i) An insulated thimble shall be used justable suspension scaffolds shall be of to attach each suspension wire rope to a diameter large enough to provide suf- its hanging support (such as cornice ficient surface area for the functioning hook or outrigger). Excess suspension of brake and hoist mechanisms. wire rope and any additional inde- (11) Suspension ropes shall be shield- pendent lines from grounding shall be ed from heat-producing processes. insulated; When acids or other corrosive sub- (ii) The suspension wire rope shall be stances are used on a scaffold, the covered with insulating material ex- ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro- tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the tect against the corrosive substances, hoist. If there is a tail line below the or shall be of a material that will not hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent be damaged by the substance being contact with the platform. The portion used. of the tail line that hangs free below (12) Work on or from scaffolds is pro- the scaffold shall be guided or retained, hibited during storms or high winds or both, so that it does not become unless a competent person has deter- grounded; mined that it is safe for employees to (iii) Each hoist shall be covered with be on the scaffold and those employees insulated protective covers; are protected by a personal fall arrest (iv) In addition to a work lead at- system or wind screens. Wind screens tachment required by the welding proc- shall not be used unless the scaffold is ess, a grounding conductor shall be secured against the anticipated wind connected from the scaffold to the forces imposed. structure. The size of this conductor (13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac- shall be at least the size of the welding cumulate on platforms. process work lead, and this conductor

290

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00290 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

shall not be in series with the welding and along at least one side of the walk- process or the work piece; way. (v) If the scaffold grounding lead is (vi) Each employee performing disconnected at any time, the welding overhand bricklaying operations from machine shall be shut off; and a supported scaffold shall be protected (vi) An active welding rod or from falling from all open sides and uninsulated welding lead shall not be ends of the scaffold (except at the side allowed to contact the scaffold or its next to the wall being laid) by the use suspension system. of a personal fall arrest system or (g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee guardrail system (with minimum 200 on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m) pound toprail capacity). above a lower level shall be protected (vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise from falling to that lower level. Para- specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee section establish the types of fall pro- shall be protected by the use of per- tection to be provided to the employees sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail on each type of scaffold. Paragraph systems meeting the requirements of (g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro- paragraph (g)(4) of this section. tection for scaffold erectors and dismantlers. (2) Effective September 2, 1997, the employer shall have a competent per- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (G)(1): The fall protec- son determine the feasibility and safe- tion requirements for employees installing ty of providing fall protection for em- suspension scaffold support systems on ployees erecting or dismantling sup- floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are set forth in subpart M of this part. ported scaffolds. Employers are required to provide fall protection for (i) Each employee on a boatswains’ employees erecting or dismantling sup- chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, ported scaffolds where the installation needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack and use of such protection is feasible scaffold shall be protected by a per- and does not create a greater hazard. sonal fall arrest system; (3) In addition to meeting the re- (ii) Each employee on a single-point quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall or two-point adjustable suspension arrest systems used on scaffolds shall scaffold shall be protected by both a be attached by lanyard to a vertical personal fall arrest system and guard- lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold rail system; structural member. Vertical lifelines (iii) Each employee on a crawling shall not be used when overhead com- board (chicken ladder) shall be pro- ponents, such as overhead protection tected by a personal fall arrest system, or additional platform levels, are part a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity), or by a three- of a single-point or two-point adjust- fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline able suspension scaffold. or equivalent handhold securely fas- (i) When vertical lifelines are used, tened beside each crawling board; they shall be fastened to a fixed safe (iv) Each employee on a self-con- point of anchorage, shall be inde- tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro- pendent of the scaffold, and shall be tected by a guardrail system (with protected from sharp edges and abra- minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) sion. Safe points of anchorage include when the platform is supported by the structural members of buildings, but frame structure, and by both a per- do not include standpipes, vents, other sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail piping systems, electrical conduit, out- system (with minimum 200 pound top- rigger beams, or counterweights. rail capacity) when the platform is sup- (ii) When horizontal lifelines are ported by ropes; used, they shall be secured to two or (v) Each employee on a walkway lo- more structural members of the scaf- cated within a scaffold shall be pro- fold, or they may be looped around tected by a guardrail system (with both suspension and independent sus- minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped) installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of above the hoist and brake attached to

291

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00291 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life- (iv) When midrails are used, they lines shall not be attached only to the shall be installed at a height approxi- suspension ropes. mately midway between the top edge of (iii) When lanyards are connected to the guardrail system and the platform horizontal lifelines or structural mem- surface. bers on a single-point or two-point ad- (v) When screens and mesh are used, justable suspension scaffold, the scaf- they shall extend from the top edge of fold shall be equipped with additional the guardrail system to the scaffold independent support lines and auto- platform, and along the entire opening matic locking devices capable of stop- between the supports. ping the fall of the scaffold in the event (vi) When intermediate members one or both of the suspension ropes (such as balusters or additional rails) fail. The independent support lines are used, they shall not be more than shall be equal in number and strength 19 inches (48 cm) apart. to the suspension ropes. (vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem- (iv) Vertical lifelines, independent ber of a guardrail system shall be capa- support lines, and suspension ropes ble of withstanding, without failure, a shall not be attached to each other, nor force applied in any downward or hori- shall they be attached to or use the zontal direction at any point along its same point of anchorage, nor shall they top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) be attached to the same point on the for guardrail systems installed on sin- scaffold or personal fall arrest system. gle-point adjustable suspension scaf- (4) Guardrail systems installed to folds or two-point adjustable suspen- meet the requirements of this section sion scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds shall comply with the following provi- (890 n) for guardrail systems installed sions (guardrail systems built in ac- on all other scaffolds. cordance with Appendix A to this sub- (viii) When the loads specified in part will be deemed to meet the re- paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), applied in a downward direction, the (viii), and (ix) of this section): top edge shall not drop below the (i) Guardrail systems shall be in- height above the platform surface that stalled along all open sides and ends of is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of platforms. Guardrail systems shall be this section. installed before the scaffold is released (ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- for use by employees other than erec- mediate vertical members, solid pan- tion/dismantling crews. els, and equivalent structural members (ii) The top edge height of toprails or of a guardrail system shall be capable equivalent member on supported scaf- of withstanding, without failure, a folds manufactured or placed in service force applied in any downward or hori- after January 1, 2000 shall be installed zontal direction at any point along the between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches midrail or other member of at least 75 (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems top edge height on supported scaffolds with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca- manufactured and placed in service be- pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus- for guardrail systems with a minimum pended scaffolds where both a guardrail 200 pound toprail capacity. and a personal fall arrest system are (x) Suspension scaffold hoists and required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 non-walk-through stirrups may be used m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi- as end guardrails, if the space between tions warrant, the height of the top the hoist or stirrup and the side guard- edge may exceed the 45-inch height, rail or structure does not allow passage provided the guardrail system meets of an employee to the end of the scaf- all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4). fold. (iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, (xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to intermediate vertical members, solid prevent injury to an employee from panels, or equivalent structural mem- punctures or lacerations, and to pre- bers are used, they shall be installed vent snagging of clothing. between the top edge of the guardrail (xii) The ends of all rails shall not system and the scaffold platform. overhang the terminal posts except

292

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00292 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

when such overhang does not con- the top edge of the toeboard, paneling stitute a projection hazard to employ- or screening extending from the ees. toeboard or platform to the top of the (xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall guardrail shall be erected for a dis- not be used as a toprail or midrail. tance sufficient to protect employees (xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn- below; or thetic) rope being used for toprails or (iv) A guardrail system shall be in- midrails shall be inspected by a com- stalled with openings small enough to petent person as frequently as nec- prevent passage of potential falling ob- essary to ensure that it continues to jects; or meet the strength requirements of (v) A canopy structure, debris net, or paragraph (g) of this section. catch platform strong enough to with- (xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in stand the impact forces of the poten- place of a midrail when the crossing tial falling objects shall be erected point of two braces is between 20 inches over the employees below. (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the (3) Canopies, when used for falling ob- work platform or as a toprail when the ject protection, shall comply with the crossing point of two braces is between following criteria: 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) (i) Canopies shall be installed be- above the work platform. The end tween the falling object hazard and the points at each upright shall be no more employees. than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart. (ii) When canopies are used on sus- (h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad- pension scaffolds for falling object pro- dition to wearing hardhats each em- tection, the scaffold shall be equipped ployee on a scaffold shall be provided with additional independent support with additional protection from falling lines equal in number to the number of hand tools, debris, and other small ob- points supported, and equivalent in jects through the installation of strength to the strength of the suspen- toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys- sion ropes. tems, or through the erection of debris (iii) Independent support lines and nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc- suspension ropes shall not be attached tures that contain or deflect the falling to the same points of anchorage. objects. When the falling objects are (4) Where used, toeboards shall be: too large, heavy or massive to be con- (i) Capable of withstanding, without tained or deflected by any of the above- failure, a force of at least 50 pounds listed measures, the employer shall (222 n) applied in any downward or hor- place such potential falling objects izontal direction at any point along the away from the edge of the surface from toeboard (toeboards built in accord- which they could fall and shall secure ance with Appendix A to this subpart those materials as necessary to prevent will be deemed to meet this require- their falling. ment); and (2) Where there is a danger of tools, (ii) At least three and one-half inches materials, or equipment falling from a (9 cm) high from the top edge of the scaffold and striking employees below, toeboard to the level of the walking/ the following provisions apply: working surface. Toeboards shall be se- (i) The area below the scaffold to curely fastened in place at the outer- which objects can fall shall be barri- most edge of the platform and have not caded, and employees shall not be per- more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance mitted to enter the hazard area; or above the walking/working surface. (ii) A toeboard shall be erected along Toeboards shall be solid or with open- the edge of platforms more than 10 feet ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance greatest dimension. sufficient to protect employees below, [61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and except on float (ship) scaffolds where amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996] an edging of 3⁄4 × 11⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm) EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. wood or equivalent may be used in lieu 25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and of toeboards; certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25, (iii) Where tools, materials, or equip- 1997, or until further rulemaking has been ment are piled to a height higher than completed, whichever is later.

293

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00293 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

§ 1926.452 Additional requirements ap- criteria that will enable an employer plicable to specific types of scaf- to comply with design and loading re- folds. quirements for pole scaffolds under 60 In addition to the applicable require- feet in height. ments of § 1926.451, the following re- (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) quirements apply to the specific types When platforms are being moved to the of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not next level, the existing platform shall specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such be left undisturbed until the new bear- as but not limited to systems scaffolds, ers have been set in place and braced must meet the requirements of prior to receiving the new platforms. § 1926.451. (2) Transverse bracing forming an (a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms ‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold are being moved to the next level, the shall be installed at the scaffold ends existing platform shall be left undis- and at least at every third set of posts turbed until the new bearers have been horizontally (measured from only one set in place and braced, prior to receiv- end) and every fourth runner ing the new platforms. vertically. Bracing shall extend diago- (2) Crossbracing shall be installed be- nally from the inner or outer posts or tween the inner and outer sets of poles runners upward to the next outer or on double pole scaffolds. inner posts or runners. Building ties (3) Diagonal bracing in both direc- shall be installed at the bearer levels tions shall be installed across the en- between the transverse bracing and tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds shall conform to the requirements of used to support loads equivalent to a § 1926.451(c)(1). uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu- (222 kg) or more per square foot (929 dinal bracing across the inner and square cm). outer rows of posts shall be installed (4) Diagonal bracing in both direc- diagonally in both directions, and shall tions shall be installed across the en- extend from the base of the end posts tire outside face of all double- and sin- upward to the top of the scaffold at ap- gle-pole scaffolds. proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf- (5) Runners and bearers shall be in- folds whose length is greater than their stalled on edge. height, such bracing shall be repeated (6) Bearers shall extend a minimum beginning at least at every fifth post. of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside On scaffolds whose length is less than edges of runners. their height, such bracing shall be in- (7) Runners shall extend over a min- stalled from the base of the end posts imum of two poles, and shall be sup- upward to the opposite end posts, and ported by bearing blocks securely at- then in alternating directions until tached to the poles. reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac- (8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall ing shall be installed as close as pos- not be spliced between poles. sible to the intersection of the bearer (9) Where wooden poles are spliced, and post or runner and post. the ends shall be squared and the upper (4) Where conditions preclude the at- section shall rest squarely on the lower tachment of bracing to posts, bracing section. Wood splice plates shall be shall be attached to the runners as provided on at least two adjacent sides, close to the post as possible. and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) (5) Bearers shall be installed trans- on either side of the splice, overlap the versely between posts, and when cou- abutted ends equally, and have at least pled to the posts, shall have the in- the same cross-sectional areas as the board coupler bear directly on the run- pole. Splice plates of other materials of ner coupler. When the bearers are cou- equivalent strength may be used. pled to the runners, the couplers shall (10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in be as close to the posts as possible. height shall be designed by a registered (6) Bearers shall extend beyond the professional engineer, and shall be con- posts and runners, and shall provide structed and loaded in accordance with full contact with the coupler. that design. Non-mandatory Appendix (7) Runners shall be installed along A to this subpart contains examples of the length of the scaffold, located on

294

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00294 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

both the inside and outside posts at (iii) Be used only to support per- level heights (when tube and coupler sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de- guardrails and midrails are used on signed for other loads by a qualified en- outside posts, they may be used in lieu gineer and built to withstand the tip- of outside runners). ping forces caused by those other loads (8) Runners shall be interlocked on being placed on the bracket-supported straight runs to form continuous section of the scaffold. lengths, and shall be coupled to each (6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in post. The bottom runners and bearers height above their base plates shall be shall be located as close to the base as designed by a registered professional possible. engineer, and shall be constructed and (9) Couplers shall be of a structural loaded in accordance with such design. metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle- (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large able iron, or structural grade alu- area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con- minum. The use of gray cast iron is structed in accordance with paragraphs prohibited. (a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro- (10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over priate. 125 feet in height shall be designed by (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds a registered professional engineer, and (squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood shall be constructed and loaded in ac- shall be reinforced with gussets on cordance with such design. Non-manda- both sides of each corner. tory Appendix A to this subpart con- (2) Diagonal braces shall be installed tains examples of criteria that will en- on all sides of each square. able an employer to comply with de- (3) Diagonal braces shall be installed sign and loading requirements for tube between squares on the rear and front and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in sides of the scaffold, and shall extend height. from the bottom of each square to the (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular top of the next square. welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov- (4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three ing platforms to the next level, the ex- tiers in height, and shall be so con- isting platform shall be left undis- structed and arranged that one square turbed until the new end frames have rests directly above the other. The been set in place and braced prior to re- upper tiers shall stand on a continuous ceiving the new platforms. row of planks laid across the next (2) Frames and panels shall be braced lower tier, and shall be nailed down or by cross, horizontal, or diagonal otherwise secured to prevent displace- braces, or combination thereof, which ment. secure vertical members together lat- (f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall erally. The cross braces shall be of such not be constructed or arranged more length as will automatically square than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in and align vertical members so that the height, whichever is less. erected scaffold is always plumb, level, (2) When horses are arranged in tiers, and square. All brace connections shall each horse shall be placed directly over be secured. the horse in the tier below. (3) Frames and panels shall be joined (3) When horses are arranged in tiers, together vertically by coupling or the legs of each horse shall be nailed stacking pins or equivalent means. down or otherwise secured to prevent (4) Where uplift can occur which displacement. would displace scaffold end frames or (4) When horses are arranged in tiers, panels, the frames or panels shall be each tier shall be crossbraced. locked together vertically by pins or (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ equivalent means. bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, ex- (5) Brackets used to support canti- cept those for wooden bracket-form levered loads shall: scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup- (i) Be seated with side-brackets par- porting formwork or structure by allel to the frames and end-brackets at means of one or more of the following: 90 degrees to the frames; nails; a metal stud attachment device; (ii) Not be bent or twisted from these welding; hooking over a secured struc- positions; and tural supporting member, with the

295

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00295 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

form wales either bolted to the form or fessional engineer and shall be con- secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex- structed and loaded in accordance with tending through the form and securely such design. anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack scaffolds only, by a bolt extending brackets, braces, and accessories shall through to the opposite side of the be fabricated from metal plates and an- structure’s wall. gles. Each pump jack bracket shall (2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds have two positive gripping mechanisms shall be an integral part of the form to prevent any failure or slippage. panel. (2) Poles shall be secured to the (3) Folding type metal brackets, structure by rigid triangular bracing or when extended for use, shall be either equivalent at the bottom, top, and bolted or secured with a locking-type other points as necessary. When the pin. pump jack has to pass bracing already (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold installed, an additional brace shall be brackets shall be constructed to fit the installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) pitch of the roof and shall provide a above the brace to be passed, and shall level support for the platform. be left in place until the pump jack has (2) Brackets (including those pro- been moved and the original brace re- vided with pointed metal projections) installed. shall be anchored in place by nails un- (3) When guardrails are used for fall less it is impractical to use nails. When protection, a workbench may be used nails are not used, brackets shall be se- as the toprail only if it meets all the cured in place with first-grade manila requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii), rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9 (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451. cm) diameter, or equivalent. (4) Work benches shall not be used as (i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard scaffold platforms. end of outrigger beams, measured from (5) When poles are made of wood, the the fulcrum point to the extreme point pole lumber shall be straight-grained, of anchorage, shall be not less than one free of shakes, large loose or dead and one-half times the outboard end in knots, and other defects which might length. impair strength. (2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the shape of an I-beam or channel shall be (6) When wood poles are constructed placed so that the web section is of two continuous lengths, they shall vertical. be joined together with the seam par- (3) The fulcrum point of outrigger allel to the bracket. beams shall rest on secure bearings at (7) When two by fours are spliced to least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori- make a pole, mending plates shall be zontal dimension. installed at all splices to develop the (4) Outrigger beams shall be secured full strength of the member. in place against movement, and shall (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms be securely braced at the fulcrum point shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1 against tipping. m). (5) The inboard ends of outrigger (2) All ladders used to support ladder beams shall be securely anchored ei- jack scaffolds shall meet the require- ther by means of braced struts bearing ments of subpart X of this part—Stair- against sills in contact with the over- ways and Ladders, except that job- head beams or ceiling, or by means of made ladders shall not be used to sup- tension members secured to the floor port ladder jack scaffolds. joists underfoot, or by both. (3) The ladder jack shall be so de- (6) The entire supporting structure signed and constructed that it will bear shall be securely braced to prevent any on the side rails and ladder rungs or on horizontal movement. the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on (7) To prevent their displacement, rungs only, the bearing area shall in- platform units shall be nailed, bolted, clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4 or otherwise secured to outriggers. cm) on each rung. (8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or

296

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00296 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

equipped with devices to prevent slip- (iii) The supporting rope is protected ping. to ensure that it will not chafe at any (5) Scaffold platforms shall not be point where a change in direction oc- bridged one to another. curs, and (l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds (iv) The scaffold is positioned so that shall be securely attached to the win- swinging cannot bring the scaffold into dow opening. contact with another surface. (2) Scaffolds shall be used only for (3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall the purpose of working at the window consist of correct size ball bearings or opening through which the jack is bushed blocks containing safety hooks placed. and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum (3) Window jacks shall not be used to five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter support planks placed between one win- first-grade manila rope, or other rope dow jack and another, or for other ele- which will satisfy the criteria (e.g., ments of scaffolding. strength and durability) of manila (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). rope. (1) Crawling boards shall extend from (4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall the roof peak to the eaves when used in be reeved through four corner holes in connection with roof construction, re- the seat; shall cross each other on the pair, or maintenance. underside of the seat; and shall be (2) Crawling boards shall be secured rigged so as to prevent slippage which to the roof by ridge hooks or by means could cause an out-of-level condition. that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., (5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall strength and durability). be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder (1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall other rope which will satisfy the cri- not be placed any higher than the sec- teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du- ond highest rung or step of the ladder rability, etc.) of first grade manila supporting the platform. rope. (2) All ladders used in conjunction (6) When a heat-producing process with step, platform and trestle ladder such as gas or arc welding is being con- scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re- ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings quirements of subpart X of this part— shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8) Stairways and Ladders, except that inch (1.0 cm) wire rope. job-made ladders shall not be used to (7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat- support such scaffolds. swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on (3) Ladders used to support step, plat- their underside by cleats securely fas- form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall tened to prevent the board from split- be placed, fastened, or equipped with ting. devices to prevent slipping. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension (4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one scaffolds (swing stages). The following to another. requirements do not apply to two-point (o) Single-point adjustable suspension adjustable suspension scaffolds used as scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad- masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds. justable suspension scaffolds are com- Such scaffolds are covered by para- bined to form a two-point adjustable graph (q) of this section. suspension scaffold, the resulting two- (1) Platforms shall not be more than point scaffold shall comply with the re- 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed quirements for two-point adjustable by a qualified person to prevent unsta- suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of ble conditions. this section. (2) The platform shall be securely fas- (2) The supporting rope between the tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts scaffold and the suspension device shall or by other means which satisfy the re- be kept vertical unless all of the fol- quirements of § 1926.451(a). lowing conditions are met: (3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic (i) The rigging has been designed by a ropes shall consist of at least one dou- qualified person, and ble and one single block. The sheaves (ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- of all blocks shall fit the size of the cuers, and rope used.

297

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00297 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(4) Platforms shall be of the ladder- project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) type, plank-type, beam-type, or light- beyond the platform on both sides. metal type. Light metal-type plat- Each bearer shall be securely fastened forms having a rated capacity of 750 to the platform. pounds or less and platforms 40 feet (2) Rope connections shall be such (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested that the platform cannot shift or slip. and listed by a nationally recognized (3) When only two ropes are used testing laboratory. with each float: (5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be (i) They shall be arranged so as to bridged or otherwise connected one to provide four ends which are securely another during raising and lowering fastened to overhead supports. operations unless the bridge connec- (ii) Each supporting rope shall be tions are articulated (attached), and hitched around one end of the bearer the hoists properly sized. and pass under the platform to the (6) Passage may be made from one other end of the bearer where it is platform to another only when the hitched again, leaving sufficient rope platforms are at the same height, are at each end for the supporting ties. abutting, and walk-through stirrups (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf- specifically designed for this purpose folds shall be suspended only from the are used. roof structure or other structural (q) Multi-point adjustable suspension member such as ceiling beams. scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust- (2) Overhead supporting members able suspension scaffolds, and masons’ (roof structure, ceiling beams, or other multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- structural members) shall be inspected folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds and checked for strength before the are used they shall not be bridged one scaffold is erected. to another unless they are designed to (3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be bridged, the bridge connections are be connected to the overhead sup- articulated, and the hoists are properly porting members by shackles, clips, sized. thimbles, or other means that meet (2) If bridges are not used, passage equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- may be made from one platform to an- rability). other only when the platforms are at the same height and are abutting. (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold (3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from support beams shall be installed on metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope edge. slings, hooks, or means that meet (2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- supports, except that one end of a nee- rability). dle beam scaffold may be supported by (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more a permanent structural member. than one platform shall be placed be- (3) The ropes shall be securely at- tween consecutive vertical pickups, tached to the needle beams. and no more than two platforms shall (4) The support connection shall be be used on a catenary scaffold. arranged so as to prevent the needle (2) Platforms supported by wire ropes beam from rolling or becoming dis- shall have hook-shaped stops on each placed. end of the platforms to prevent them (5) Platform units shall be securely from slipping off the wire ropes. These attached to the needle beams by bolts hooks shall be so placed that they will or equivalent means. Cleats and over- prevent the platform from falling if hang are not considered to be adequate one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks. means of attachment. (3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened (v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1) to the extent that the application of a Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi- scaffold load will overstress them. tional independent support lines, equal (4) Wire ropes shall be continuous in number to the number of points sup- and without splices between anchors. ported, and of equivalent strength to (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- the suspension ropes, and rigged to form shall be supported by a minimum support the scaffold in the event the of two bearers, each of which shall suspension rope(s) fail.

298

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00298 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

(2) Independent support lines and sus- (iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are pension ropes shall not be attached to installed on both sides of the scaffold; the same points of anchorage. (iv) When power systems are used, (3) Supports for platforms shall be at- the propelling force is applied directly tached directly to the support stirrup to the wheels, and does not produce a and not to any other platform. speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3 (w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall mps); and be braced by cross, horizontal, or di- (v) No employee is on any part of the agonal braces, or combination thereof, scaffold which extends outward beyond to prevent racking or collapse of the the wheels, casters, or other supports. scaffold and to secure vertical mem- (7) Platforms shall not extend out- bers together laterally so as to auto- ward beyond the base supports of the matically square and align the vertical scaffold unless outrigger frames or members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, equivalent devices are used to ensure level, and squared. All brace connec- stability. tions shall be secured. (8) Where leveling of the scaffold is (i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and necessary, screw jacks or equivalent coupler components shall also comply means shall be used. with the requirements of paragraph (b) (9) Caster stems and wheel stems of this section; shall be pinned or otherwise secured in (ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab- scaffold legs or adjustment screws. ricated frame components shall also (10) Before a scaffold is moved, each comply with the requirements of para- employee on the scaffold shall be made graph (c) of this section. aware of the move. (2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack- be locked with positive wheel and/or ets shall be secured in place by at least wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) means, to prevent movement of the in diameter. scaffold while the scaffold is used in a (2) Each bracket shall be attached to stationary manner. the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a (3) Manual force used to move the positive locking device capable of pre- scaffold shall be applied as close to the venting the unintentional detachment base as practicable, but not more than of the bracket from the rope, or by 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur- equivalent means. face. (3) Each bracket, at the contact point (4) Power systems used to propel mo- between the supporting structure and bile scaffolds shall be designed for such the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro- use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor vided with a shoe (heel block or foot) vehicles or add-on motors shall not be capable of preventing the lateral move- used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf- ment of the bracket. fold is designed for such propulsion sys- (4) Platforms shall be secured to the tems. brackets in a manner that will prevent (5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to the separation of the platforms from prevent tipping during movement. the brackets and the movement of the (6) Employees shall not be allowed to platforms or the brackets on a com- ride on scaffolds unless the following pleted scaffold. conditions exist: (5) When a wire rope is placed around (i) The surface on which the scaffold the structure in order to provide a safe is being moved is within 3 degrees of anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- level, and free of pits, holes, and ob- tems used by employees erecting or structions; dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope (ii) The height to base width ratio of shall meet the requirements of subpart the scaffold during movement is two to M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16 one or less, unless the scaffold is de- inch (0.8 cm) in diameter. signed and constructed to meet or ex- (6) Each wire rope used for securing ceed nationally recognized stability brackets in place or as an anchorage test requirements such as those listed for personal fall arrest systems shall be in paragraph (x) of Appendix A to this protected from damage due to contact subpart (ANSI/SIA A92.5 and A92.6); with edges, corners, protrusions, or

299

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00299 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.453 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

other discontinuities of the supporting less they shall have been modified so as structure or scaffold components. to conform with the applicable design (7) Tensioning of each wire rope used and construction requirements of ANSI for securing brackets in place or as an A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol- anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle devices used to elevate personnel to at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or job-sites above ground: by equivalent means. (i) Extensible boom platforms; (8) Each turnbuckle shall be con- (ii) Aerial ladders; nected to the other end of its rope by (iii) Articulating boom platforms; use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap- (iv) Vertical towers; and propriate to the turnbuckle to which it (v) A combination of any such de- is attached. vices. Aerial equipment may be made (9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced used on any wire rope used to secure plastic (FRP), or other material; may brackets or to serve as an anchor for be powered or manually operated; and personal fall arrest systems. are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or (10) The employer shall ensure that not they are capable of rotating about materials shall not be dropped to the a substantially vertical axis. outside of the supporting structure. (2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi- (11) Scaffold erection shall progress fied’’ for uses other than those in- in only one direction around any struc- tended by the manufacturer provided ture. the modification has been certified in (y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be writing by the manufacturer or by any used in accordance with the following other equivalent entity, such as a na- requirements: tionally recognized testing laboratory, (1) An employee may wear stilts on a to be in conformity with all applicable scaffold only if it is a large area scaf- provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this fold. section and to be at least as safe as the (2) When an employee is using stilts equipment was before modification. on a large area scaffold where a guard- (b) Specific requirements. (1) Ladder rail system is used to provide fall pro- trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders tection, the guardrail system shall be shall be secured in the lower traveling increased in height by an amount equal position by the locking device on top of to the height of the stilts being used by the truck cab, and the manually oper- the employee. ated device at the base of the ladder be- (3) Surfaces on which stilts are used fore the truck is moved for highway shall be flat and free of pits, holes and travel. obstructions, such as debris, as well as (2) Extensible and articulating boom other tripping and falling hazards. platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test- (4) Stilts shall be properly main- ed each day prior to use to determine tained. Any alteration of the original that such controls are in safe working equipment shall be approved by the condition. manufacturer. (ii) Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift. § 1926.453 Aerial lifts. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, (a) General requirements. (1) Unless structure, or equipment while working otherwise provided in this section, aer- from an aerial lift shall not be per- ial lifts acquired for use on or after mitted. January 22, 1973 shall be designed and (iv) Employees shall always stand constructed in conformance with the firmly on the floor of the basket, and applicable requirements of the Amer- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle basket or use planks, ladders, or other Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work devices for a work position. Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including (v) A body belt shall be worn and a appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before lanyard attached to the boom or bas- January 22, 1973 which do not meet the ket when working from an aerial lift. requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): AS OF JANU- not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ARY 1, 1998, SUBPART M OF THIS PART

300

VerDate 1899 17:37 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00300 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.454

(§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not 1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shall apply to all critical hydraulic and system. The use of a body belt in a tethering pneumatic components. Critical com- system or in a restraint system is acceptable ponents are those in which a failure and is regulated under § 1926.502(e). would result in a free fall or free rota- (vi) Boom and basket load limits tion of the boom. All noncritical com- specified by the manufacturer shall not ponents shall have a bursting safety be exceeded. factor of at least 2 to 1. (vii) The brakes shall be set and when (5) Welding standards. All welding outriggers are used, they shall be posi- shall conform to the following stand- tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel ards as applicable: chocks shall be installed before using (i) Standard Qualification Procedure, an aerial lift on an incline, provided AWS B3.0–41. they can be safely installed. (ii) Recommended Practices for (viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be Automotive Welding Design, AWS moved when the boom is elevated in a D8.4–61. working position with men in the bas- (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld- ket, except for equipment which is spe- ing Procedures and Welders for Piping cifically designed for this type of oper- and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69. ation in accordance with the provisions (iv) Specifications for Welding High- of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec- way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69. tion. (ix) Articulating boom and extensible NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory Appen- dix C to this subpart lists examples of na- boom platforms, primarily designed as tional consensus standards that are consid- personnel carriers, shall have both ered to provide employee protection equiva- platform (upper) and lower controls. lent to that provided through the application Upper controls shall be in or beside the of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This platform within easy reach of the oper- incorporation by reference was approved by ator. Lower controls shall provide for the Director of the Federal Register in ac- overriding the upper controls. Controls cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part shall be plainly marked as to their 51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer- ican National Standards Institute. Copies function. Lower level controls shall not may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu- be operated unless permission has been pational Safety and Health Administration, obtained from the employee in the lift, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution except in case of emergency. Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or (x) Climbers shall not be worn while at the Office of the Federal Register, 800 performing work from an aerial lift. North Capitol Street, NW., suite 700, Wash- (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial ington, DC. lift shall not be altered in any manner [61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. that might reduce its insulating value. 25, 1996] (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected § 1926.454 Training requirements. to see that it is properly cradled and This section supplements and clari- outriggers are in stowed position ex- fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2) cept as provided in paragraph as these relate to the hazards of work (b)(2)(viii) of this section. on scaffolds. (3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests (a) The employer shall have each em- shall conform to the requirements of ployee who performs work while on a ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However scaffold trained by a person qualified equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be in the subject matter to recognize the used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified hazards associated with the type of in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which scaffold being used and to understand are approved by the equipment manu- the procedures to control or minimize facturer or equivalent entity shall be those hazards. The training shall in- considered an equivalent test for the clude the following areas, as applica- purpose of this paragraph (b)(3). ble: (4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- (1) The nature of any electrical haz- sions of the American National Stand- ards, fall hazards and falling object ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– hazards in the work area;

301

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00301 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(2) The correct procedures for dealing NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES with electrical hazards and for erect- (NON-MANDATORY)APPENDIX A TO SUBPART ing, maintaining, and disassembling L—SCAFFOLD SPECIFICATIONS the fall protection systems and falling object protection systems being used; This Appendix provides non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying (3) The proper use of the scaffold, and with the requirements of subpart L of this the proper handling of materials on the part. An employer may use these guidelines scaffold; and tables as a starting point for designing (4) The maximum intended load and scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do the load-carrying capacities of the not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is scaffolds used; and still responsible for designing and assem- (5) Any other pertinent requirements bling these components in such a way that of this subpart. the completed system will meet the require- (b) The employer shall have each em- ments of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components ployee who is involved in erecting, dis- which are not selected and loaded in accordance with this Appendix, and components for assembling, moving, operating, repair- which no specific guidelines or tables are ing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf- given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, ties, fold trained by a competent person to components for wood pole scaffolds more recognize any hazards associated with than 60 feet in height, components for heavy- the work in question. The training duty horse scaffolds, components made with shall include the following topics, as other materials, and components with other dimensions, etc.) must be designed and con- applicable: structed in accordance with the capacity re- (1) The nature of scaffold hazards; quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac- (2) The correct procedures for erect- cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1). ing, disassembling, moving, operating, Index to Appendix A for Subpart L repairing, inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold in question; 1. General guidelines and tables. 2. Specific guidelines and tables. (3) The design criteria, maximum in- (a) Pole scaffolds: tended load-carrying capacity and in- Single-pole wood pole scaffolds. tended use of the scaffold; Independent wood pole scaffolds. (4) Any other pertinent requirements (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. of this subpart. (d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area (c) When the employer has reason to scaffolds. believe that an employee lacks the (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. skill or understanding needed for safe (f) Horse scaffolds. work involving the erection, use or dis- (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket scaffolds. mantling of scaffolds, the employer (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. shall retrain each such employee so (i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level). that the requisite proficiency is re- (j) Pump jack scaffolds. gained. Retraining is required in at (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. least the following situations: (l) Window jack scaffolds. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (1) Where changes at the worksite (n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf- present a hazard about which an em- folds. ployee has not been previously trained; (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- or folds. (2) Where changes in the types of (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. scaffolds, fall protection, falling object (q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable protection, or other equipment present suspension scaffolds. a hazard about which an employee has (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- not been previously trained; or sion scaffolds. (3) Where inadequacies in an affected (r) Catenary scaffolds. (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (t) Interior hung scaffolds. dicate that the employee has not re- (u) Needle beam scaffolds. tained the requisite proficiency. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds.

302

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00302 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

(w) Mobile scaffolds. (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. compliance with the National Design Speci- (y) Stilts. fication for Wood Construction published by (z) Tank builders’ scaffolds. the National Forest Products Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding- 1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES Safety Requirements published by the Amer- (a) The following tables, and the tables in ican National Standards Institute; or for 2 x Part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as- 10 inch (nominal) or 2 x 9 inch (rough) solid sume that all load-carrying timber members sawn wood planks, as shown in the following (except planks) of the scaffold are a min- table: imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construction grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi- Maximum per- Maximum permissible span missible span nal sizes as provided in the American Maximum intended nominal using full thick- Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January using nominal load ness un- thickness 1970, except that, where rough sizes are (lb/ft2) dressed lumber lumber noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the (ft) (ft) size specified will satisfy minimum requirements. 25 ...... 10 8 (b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks 50 ...... 8 6 shall be selected for such use following the 75 ...... 6 grading rules established by a recognized lumber grading association or by an inde- (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4 pendent lumber grading inspection agency. × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick- Such planks shall be identified by the grade ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/ stamp of such association or agency. The as- ft.2 shall be 4 feet. sociation or agency and the grading rules (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may under which the wood is graded shall be cer- be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. tified by the Board of Review, American Maximum spans for such units shall be as Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in recommended by the manufacturer based on the American Softwood Lumber Standard of the maximum intended load being calculated the U.S. Department of Commerce. as follows:

Rated load capacity Intended load

Light-duty ...... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Medium-duty ...... • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Heavy-duty ...... • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. One-person ...... • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds). Two-person ...... • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds). Three-person ...... • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 750 pounds).

NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or fold platforms intended for light-duty use 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or shall be capable of supporting at least 25 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- pounds per square foot applied uniformly ing. over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength point load placed on the unit at the center of to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or the span, whichever load produces the great- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle er shear force. iron; or (d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or (i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or ing. 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or (v) Distance between posts shall not exceed 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 8 feet. × inch .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2 (ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3⁄4-inch to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or plywood. 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural (f) Screen installed between toeboards and angle iron; or midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh. ing. 2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES. (iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or (a) Pole Scaffolds.

303

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00303 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to 20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high

Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ...... 25 ...... 25 ...... 50 ...... 75 Poles or uprights ...... 2×4 in ...... 4×4 in ...... 4×4 in ...... 4×6 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 6 feet Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet Runners ...... 1×4 in ...... 11¤4×9 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet ...... 2×4 in ...... 2×4 in ...... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in. 5 feet ...... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in. (rough). 6 feet ...... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in. 8 feet ...... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in Planking ...... 11¤4×9 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ...... 9 feet ...... 7 feet ...... 6 ft. 6 in. members. Bracing horizontal ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×6 in. or 11¤4×4 in 2×4 in. Bracing diagonal ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 2×4 in. Tie-ins ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in.

NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3¤16×2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.

INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to 20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high

Maximum intended load ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 50 lbs/ft2 ...... 75 lbs/ft2. Poles or uprights ...... 2×4 in ...... 4×4 in ...... 4×4 in ...... 4×4 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 6 feet. Maximum (transverse) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 8 feet. Runners ...... 11¤4×4 in ...... 11¤4×9 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet ...... 2×4 in ...... 2×4 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. (rough). 6 feet ...... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. (rough). 3×8 in. 8 feet ...... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in ...... 3×8 in. 10 feet ...... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in.Ð (rough) ...... or 3×3 in. Planking ...... 11¤4×9 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in ...... 2×10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ...... 7 feet ...... 6 feet ...... 6 feet. members. Bracing horizontal ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×6 in. or 11¤4×4 in 2×4 in. Bracing diagonal ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 2×4 in. Tie-ins ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in ...... 1×4 in.

(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.

MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty

Maximum intended load ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 50 lbs/ft2 ...... 75 lbs/ft2. Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. Bearers ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21¤2 in. (2.375 in.). OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6 ft.×10 ft.. ft.×7 ft. or. ft.×6 ft. Nominal 21¤2 in. (2.375 in.). OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 6 ft.×8 ft.*. Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in ...... 6 ft. 6 in ...... 6 ft. 6 in. vertically. * Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.

304

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00304 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of additional planked levels Maximum height of Me- scaffold Light dium Heavy (in feet) duty duty duty

Number of Working Levels: 1 ...... 16 11 6 125 2 ...... 11 1 0 125 3 ...... 6 0 0 125 4 ...... 1 0 0 125

(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials their prefabricated nature, no additional shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are occupancy. being adopted in this Appendix. (5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in. tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a) Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in. and (b)) may be applied. Braces: 1 × 6 in. (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2* Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 Maximum width: 5 ft. ft. 6 in. Maximum height: 5 ft. (i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two Gussets: 1 × 6 in. pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite Braces: 1 × 8 in. sides of the vertical support. Legs: 2 × 6 in. (ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches (f) Horse scaffolds. from the outside of the form support, and Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ shall be braced and secured to prevent tip- ft.2 ** ping or turning. The knee or angle brace Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from lb/ft.2 ** the form at an angle of approximately 45 de- Horizontal members or bearers: grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a Light duty: 2 × 4 in. vertical support. Medium duty: 3 × 4 in. (6) Metal bracket scaffolds: × Legs: 2 4 in. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 × Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 6 in. Uprights: 2 × 4 inch Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. Bearers: As designed. Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. Braces: As designed. (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket scaffolds. (7) Wood bracket scaffolds: (1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular- Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 shaped frame made of wood with a cross-sec- Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in tion not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of Bearers: 2 × 6 in 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in iron. Braces: 1 × 6 in (2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc- (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide- 5 tures shall not be less than ⁄8 inches in di- lines or tables are given. ameter. (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe- (3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 cific guidelines or tables are given. feet on centers. (j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not (4) No more than two employees shall oc- exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the center of the span. Not more than two em- * The squares shall be set not more than 8 ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not one time between any two supports. When 2 more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf- × 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch folds. wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10 ** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches feet apart for light duty loads, and not more center to center, staggered uniformly from than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. the opposite outside edges.

305

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00305 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in- of the building face than the corresponding tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more attachment points on the platform, thus than two employees shall occupy any plat- causing the platform to press against the form at any one time. Maximum span be- face of the building. Static lines are separate tween supports shall be 8 feet. ropes secured at their top and bottom ends (l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than closer to the plane of the building face than one employee shall occupy a window jack the outermost edge of the platform. By draw- scaffold at any one time. ing the static line taut, the platform is (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). drawn against the face of the building. Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats working load of 500 pounds, no more than × 1 having a minimum 1 1 ⁄2 inch cross-sec- two employees shall be permitted on the tional area. The cleats shall be equal in scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds length to the width of the board and spaced with a working load of 750 pounds, no more at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches. than three employees shall be permitted on (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf- the scaffold at one time. folds. No additional guidelines or tables are given. (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string- (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce. folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame- than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated ter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the 7 wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine side stringers at least ⁄8 inch. The stringers quality plywood. shall be tied together with tie rods not less (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through (1) In addition to direct connections to build- the stringers and riveted up tight against ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac- washers on both ends. The flooring strips ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in- shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart, clude angulated roping and static lines. An- except at the side rails where the space may gulated roping is a system of platform sus- be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves constructed in accordance with the following or suspension points are closer to the plane table:

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS

Length of Platform ...... 12 feet ...... 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends ...... 13¤4 × 23¤4 in ...... 13¤4 × 23¤4 in ...... 13¤4 × 3 in. At middle ...... 13¤4 × 33¤4 in ...... 13¤4 × 33¤4 in ...... 13¤4 × 4 in. Reinforcing strip (minimum) ...... A 1¤8 × 7¤8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length. Rungs ...... Rungs shall be 11¤8 inch minimum diameter with at least 7¤8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods: Number (minimum) ...... 3 ...... 4 ...... 4 Diameter (minimum) ...... 1¤4 inch ...... 1¤4 inch ...... 1¤4 inch Flooring, minimum finished size ...... 1¤2 × 23¤4 in ...... 1¤2 × 23¤4 in ...... 1¤2 × 23¤4 in.

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS

Length of Platform ...... 22 & 24 ft ...... 28 & 30 ft. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends ...... 13¤4×3 in ...... 13¤4 × 31¤2 in. At middle ...... 13¤4 × 41¤4 in ...... 13¤4 × 5 in. Reinforcing strip (minimum) ...... A 1¤8 × 7¤8-inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length.

306

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00306 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMSÐContinued

Rungs ...... Rungs shall be 11¤8 inch minimum diameter with at least 7¤8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods. Number (minimum) ...... 5 ...... 6. Diameter (minimum) ...... 1¤4 in ...... 1¤4 in. Flooring, minimum finished size ...... 1¤2 × 23¤4 in ...... 1¤2 × 23¤4 in.

(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- (3) Bearers shall be made from 2×4 inch, or forms shall be composed of not less than 1×10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- knots and other flaws. nected together on the underside with cleats (4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade inches from each end. A bar or other effec- manila rope. tive means shall be securely fastened to the (t) Interior hung scaffolds. platform at each end to prevent the platform Bearers (use on edge): 2×10 in. from slipping off the hanger. The span be- Maximum intended load: Maximum span tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall 25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. not exceed 10 feet. 50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. (5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms 75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft. shall have side stringers of lumber not less (u) Needle beam scaffolds. than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be- 2 tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. Beams: 4×6 in. beam platforms are used. The flooring shall Maximum platform span: 8 ft. be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid Maximum beam span: 10 ft. flat and set into the upper edge of the string- (1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced bowline knot or by a round turn and a half more than 1⁄2 inch apart. hitch. (q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- (2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or manila rope. tables are given for these scaffolds. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi- (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension tional guidelines or tables are being given 2 scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft . for these scaffolds. Each outrigger beam shall be at least a (w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de- standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the used to establish stability for the purpose of bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 § 1926.452(w)(6). feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. guidelines or tables are being given for these (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- scaffolds. tended load—500 lbs. (y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables (2) Not more than two employees shall be are given. permitted on the scaffold at one time. (z) Tank builder’s scaffold. (3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall (1) The maximum distance between brack- be 2,000 lbs. ets to which scaffolding and guardrail sup- (4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not ports are attached shall be no more than 10 more than 50 feet apart. feet 6 inches. (5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to (2) Not more than three employees shall at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank- plow steel wire rope. ing at any time. (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- (3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported tended load—750 lbs. on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at (2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply- the scaffold plank level between the inner- wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply- most edge of the scaffold platform and the wood Association Grade B–B, Group I, Exte- curved plate structure of the tank shell to rior. serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner

307

VerDate 1899 15:56 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00307 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

guardrail assembly where the space between • General Overview of Scaffolding the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12 • regulations and standards inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space • erection/dismantling planning on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches • PPE and proper procedures (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope • fall protection appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac- • materials handling cordance with § 1926.451(e)(4), shall be in- • stalled in order to reduce that open space to access less than 12 inches (30.48 cm). • working platforms (4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen- • foundations sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm)×12-inch (30.5 cm) Doug- • guys, ties and braces las Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select • Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir • specific regulations and standards planks shall have a fiber stress of at least • components 2 2 1900 lb/in (130,929 n/cm ) and a modulus of • parts inspection elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2 • erection/dismantling planning (130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks • guys, ties and braces shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2 • (172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of fall protection at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2). • general safety (5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a • access and platforms taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup- • erection/dismantling procedures ported by angle irons attached to brackets • rolling scaffold assembly welded to the steel plates. These guardrails • putlogs shall comply with § 1926.451(e)(4). Guardrail • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds supports shall be located at no greater than • specific regulations and standards 10 feet 6 inch intervals. • components • NON-MANDATORY APPENDIX B TO SUB- parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning PART L—CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING • guys, ties and braces THE FEASIBILITY OF PROVIDING SAFE • fall protection ACCESS AND FALL PROTECTION FOR • general safety SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DISMAN- • access and platforms TLERS [RESERVED] • erection/dismantling procedures • NON-MANDATORY APPENDIX C TO SUB- buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges • PART L—LIST OF NATIONAL CON- System Scaffolds • SENSUS STANDARDS specific regulations and standards • components ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele- • parts inspection vating and Rotating Aerial Devices • erection/dismantling planning ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele- • guys, ties and braces vating Aerial Platforms • fall protection ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele- • vating Work Platforms general safety ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating • access and platforms Work Platforms • erection/dismantling procedures ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge Inspection and Maintenance Devices all receive the general overview, and, in ad- ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work dition, specific training for the type of sup- Platforms ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.

NON-MANDATORY APPENDIX D TO SUB- (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUB- PART L—LIST OF TRAINING TOPICS PART L—DRAWINGS AND ILLUSTRA- FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS- TIONS MANTLERS This Appendix provides drawings of par- This Appendix D is provided to serve as a ticular types of scaffolds and scaffold compo- guide to assist employers when evaluating nents, and graphic illustrations of bracing the training needs of employees erecting or patterns and tie spacing patterns. dismantling supported scaffolds. This Appendix is intended to provide visual The Agency believes that employees erect- guidance to assist the user in complying ing or dismantling scaffolds should be with the requirements of subpart L, part trained in the following topics: 1926.

308

VerDate 1899 16:49 Jul 31, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00308 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX pfrm01 PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

309

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00309 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD

310

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00310 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

311

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00311 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

312

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00312 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

313

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00313 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

314

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00314 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

315

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00315 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

316

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00316 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.500

[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. § 1926.500 Scope, application, and defi- 25, 1996] nitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub- Subpart M—Fall Protection part sets forth requirements and criteria for fall protection in construction AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours workplaces covered under 29 CFR part and Safety Standards Act (Construction 1926. Exception: The provisions of this Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 4, 6, 8, Occu- subpart do not apply when employees pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 are making an inspection, investiga- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s tion, or assessment of workplace condi- Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR Part tions prior to the actual start of con- 1911. struction work or after all construc- SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless tion work has been completed. otherwise noted. (2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces, conditions, operations, and

317

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00317 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.500 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

circumstances for which fall protection cept in relation to steel erection ac- shall be provided except as follows: tivities. (i) Requirements relating to fall pro- (b) Definitions. tection for employees working on scaf- Anchorage means a secure point of at- folds are provided in subpart L of this tachment for lifelines, lanyards or depart. celeration devices. (ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- Body belt (safety belt) means a strap tection for employees working on cer- with means both for securing it about tain cranes and derricks are provided the waist and for attaching it to a lan- in subpart N of this part. yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. (iii) Requirements relating to fall Body harness means straps which protection for employees performing may be secured about the employee in steel erection work are provided in a manner that will distribute the fall § 1926.105 and in subpart R of this part. arrest forces over at least the thighs, (iv) Requirements relating to fall pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with protection for employees working on means for attaching it to other compo- certain types of equipment used in tun- nents of a personal fall arrest system. neling operations are provided in sub- Buckle means any device for holding part S of this part. the body belt or body harness closed (v) Requirements relating to fall pro- around the employee’s body. tection for employees engaged in the Connector means a device which is construction of electric transmission used to couple (connect) parts of the and distribution lines and equipment personal fall arrest system and posi- are provided in subpart V of this part. tioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of (vi) Requirements relating to fall the system, such as a carabiner, or it protection for employees working on may be an integral component of part stairways and ladders are provided in of the system (such as a buckle or dee- subpart X of this part. ring sewn into a body belt or body har- (3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to quirements for the installation, con- a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). struction, and proper use of fall protec- Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an tion required by part 1926, except as area in which certain work (e.g., follows: overhand bricklaying) may take place (i) Performance requirements for without the use of guardrail systems, guardrail systems used on scaffolds and personal fall arrest systems, or safety performance requirements for falling net systems and access to the zone is object protection used on scaffolds are controlled. provided in subpart L of this part. Dangerous equipment means equip- (ii) Performance requirements for ment (such as pickling or galvanizing stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- tanks, degreasing units, machinery, rails are provided in subpart X of this electrical equipment, and other units) part. which, as a result of form or function, (iii) Additional performance require- may be hazardous to employees who ments for personal climbing equip- fall onto or into such equipment. ment, lineman’s body belts, safety Deceleration device means any mecha- straps, and lanyards are provided in nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch subpart V of this part. lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- (iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to ing or deforming lanyards, automatic steel erection activities. (Note: Section self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., 1926.104 sets the criteria for body belts, which serves to dissipate a substantial lanyards and lifelines used for fall pro- amount of energy during a fall arrest, tection in steel erection activities. or otherwise limit the energy imposed Paragraphs (b), (c) and (f) of § 1926.107 on an employee during fall arrest. provide definitions for the pertinent Deceleration distance means the addi- terms). tional vertical distance a falling em- (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require- ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- ments for training in the installation gation and free fall distance, before and use of fall protection systems, ex- stopping, from the point at which the

318

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00318 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.500

deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad- It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed, or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con- the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac- device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con- that attachment point after the em- struction. ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con- Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con- can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life- ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per- Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- or separation of component parts. Load age. refusal is the point where the ultimate Low-slope roof means a roof having a strength is exceeded. slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 Free fall means the act of falling be- (vertical to horizontal). fore a personal fall arrest system be- Lower levels means those areas or sur- gins to apply force to arrest the fall. faces to which an employee can fall. Free fall distance means the vertical Such areas or surfaces include, but are displacement of the fall arrest attach- not limited to, ground levels, floors, ment point on the employee’s body belt platforms, ramps, runways, exca- or body harness between onset of the vations, pits, tanks, material, water, fall and just before the system begins equipment, structures, or portions to apply force to arrest the fall. This thereof. distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, Mechanical equipment means all but includes any deceleration device motor or human propelled wheeled slide distance or self-retracting life- equipment used for roofing work, ex- line/lanyard extension before they op- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts. erate and fall arrest forces occur. Opening means a gap or void 30 Guardrail system means a barrier inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 erected to prevent employees from fall- inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall ing to lower levels. or partition, through which employees Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 can fall to a lower level. cm) or more in its least dimension, in Overhand bricklaying and related work a floor, roof, or other walking/working means the process of laying bricks and surface. masonry units such that the surface of Infeasible means that it is impossible the wall to be jointed is on the opposite to perform the construction work using side of the wall from the mason, requir- a conventional fall protection system ing the mason to lean over the wall to (i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys- complete the work. Related work in- tem, or personal fall arrest system) or cludes mason tending and electrical in- that it is technologically impossible to stallation incorporated into the brick use any one of these systems to provide wall during the overhand bricklaying fall protection. process. Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, Personal fall arrest system means a wire rope, or strap which generally has system used to arrest an employee in a a connector at each end for connecting fall from a working level. It consists of the body belt or body harness to a de- an anchorage, connectors, a body belt celeration device, lifeline, or anchor- or body harness and may include a lan- age. yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or Leading edge means the edge of a suitable combinations of these. As of floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt other walking/working surface (such as for fall arrest is prohibited.

319

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00319 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.501 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Positioning device system means a body Steep roof means a roof having a slope belt or body harness system rigged to greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori- allow an employee to be supported on zontal). an elevated vertical surface, such as a Toeboard means a low protective bar- wall, and work with both hands free rier that will prevent the fall of mate- while leaning. rials and equipment to lower levels and Rope grab means a deceleration de- provide protection from falls for per- vice which travels on a lifeline and sonnel. automatically, by friction, engages the Unprotected sides and edges means any lifeline and locks so as to arrest the side or edge (except at entrances to fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- points of access) of a walking/working ally employs the principle of inertial surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run- locking, cam/level locking, or both. way where there is no wall or guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high. Roof means the exterior surface on Walking/working surface means any the top of a building. This does not in- surface, whether horizontal or vertical clude floors or formwork which, be- on which an employee walks or works, cause a building has not been com- including, but not limited to, floors, pleted, temporarily become the top roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, surface of a building. formwork and concrete reinforcing Roofing work means the hoisting, steel but not including ladders, vehi- storage, application, and removal of cles, or trailers, on which employees roofing materials and equipment, in- must be located in order to perform cluding related insulation, sheet metal, their job duties. and vapor barrier work, but not includ- Warning line system means a barrier ing the construction of the roof deck. erected on a roof to warn employees Safety-monitoring system means a safe- that they are approaching an unpro- ty system in which a competent person tected roof side or edge, and which des- is responsible for recognizing and warn- ignates an area in which roofing work ing employees of fall hazards. may take place without the use of Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys- deceleration device containing a drum- tems to protect employees in the area. wound line which can be slowly ex- Work area means that portion of a tracted from, or retracted onto, the walking/working surface where job du- drum under slight tension during nor- ties are being performed. mal employee movement, and which, [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60 after onset of a fall, automatically FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995] locks the drum and arrests the fall. Snaphook means a connector com- § 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. prised of a hook-shaped member with a (a) General. (1) This section sets forth normally closed keeper, or similar ar- requirements for employers to provide rangement, which may be opened to fall protection systems. All fall protec- permit the hook to receive an object tion required by this section shall con- and, when released, automatically form to the criteria set forth in closes to retain the object. Snaphooks § 1926.502 of this subpart. are generally one of two types: (2) The employer shall determine if (1) The locking type with a self-clos- the walking/working surfaces on which ing, self-locking keeper which remains its employees are to work have the closed and locked until unlocked and strength and structural integrity to pressed open for connection or dis- support employees safely. Employees connection; or shall be allowed to work on those sur- (2) The non-locking type with a self- faces only when the surfaces have the closing keeper which remains closed requisite strength and structural integ- until pressed open for connection or rity. disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, (b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. the use of a non-locking snaphook as Each employee on a walking/working part of personal fall arrest systems and surface (horizontal and vertical sur- positioning device systems is prohib- face) with an unprotected side or edge ited. which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a

320

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00320 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.501

lower level shall be protected from fall- skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m) ing by the use of guardrail systems, above lower levels, by personal fall ar- safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail sys- rest systems. tems erected around such holes. (2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee (ii) Each employee on a walking/ who is constructing a leading edge 6 working surface shall be protected feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels from tripping in or stepping into or shall be protected from falling by through holes (including skylights) by guardrail systems, safety net systems, covers. or personal fall arrest systems. Excep- (iii) Each employee on a walking/ tion: When the employer can dem- working surface shall be protected onstrate that it is infeasible or creates from objects falling through holes (in- a greater hazard to use these systems, cluding skylights) by covers. the employer shall develop and imple- (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel. ment a fall protection plan which Each employee on the face of formwork meets the requirements of paragraph or reinforcing steel shall be protected (k) of § 1926.502. from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- lower levels by personal fall arrest sys- sible and will not create a greater hazard to tems, safety net systems, or posi- implement at least one of the above-listed tioning device systems. fall protection systems. Accordingly, the (6) Ramps, runways, and other walk- employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run- tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro- for a particular workplace situation, in lieu tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or of implementing any of those systems. more to lower levels by guardrail sys- (ii) Each employee on a walking/ tems. working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at above a lower level where leading edges the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) are under construction, but who is not or more in depth shall be protected engaged in the leading edge work, shall from falling by guardrail systems, be protected from falling by a guard- fences, or barricades when the exca- rail system, safety net system, or per- vations are not readily seen because of sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail plant growth or other visual barrier; system is chosen to provide the fall (ii) Each employee at the edge of a protection, and a controlled access well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation zone has already been established for 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be leading edge work, the control line protected from falling by guardrail sys- may be used in lieu of a guardrail along tems, fences, barricades, or covers. the edge that parallels the leading (8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em- edge. ployee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above (3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a dangerous equipment shall be pro- hoist area shall be protected from fall- tected from falling into or onto the ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev- dangerous equipment by guardrail sys- els by guardrail systems or personal tems or by equipment guards. fall arrest systems. If guardrail sys- (ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or more above dangerous equipment shall portions thereof, are removed to facili- be protected from fall hazards by tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur- guardrail systems, personal fall arrest ing landing of materials), and an em- systems, or safety net systems. ployee must lean through the access (9) Overhand bricklaying and related opening or out over the edge of the ac- work. (i) Except as otherwise provided cess opening (to receive or guide equip- in paragraph (b) of this section, each ment and materials, for example), that employee performing overhand brick- employee shall be protected from fall laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) hazards by a personal fall arrest sys- or more above lower levels, shall be tem. protected from falling by guardrail sys- (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk- tems, safety net systems, personal fall ing/working surfaces shall be protected arrest systems, or shall work in a con- from falling through holes (including trolled access zone.

321

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00321 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.501 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) Each employee reaching more implement at least one of the above-listed than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level fall protection systems. Accordingly, the of the walking/working surface on employer has the burden of establishing that which they are working, shall be pro- it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) tected from falling by a guardrail sys- for a particular workplace situation, in lieu tem, safety net system, or personal fall of implementing any of those systems. arrest system. (13) Residential construction. Each em- NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on ployee engaged in residential construc- scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf- tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more folds of this part. above lower levels shall be protected (10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. by guardrail systems, safety net sys- Except as otherwise provided in para- tem, or personal fall arrest system un- graph (b) of this section, each employee less another provision in paragraph (b) engaged in roofing activities on low- of this section provides for an alter- slope roofs, with unprotected sides and native fall protection measure. Excep- edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower tion: When the employer can dem- levels shall be protected from falling onstrate that it is infeasible or creates by guardrail systems, safety net sys- a greater hazard to use these systems, tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a the employer shall develop and imple- combination of warning line system ment a fall protection plan which and guardrail system, warning line sys- meets the requirements of paragraph tem and safety net system, or warning (k) of § 1926.502. line system and personal fall arrest NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- system, or warning line system and sible and will not create a greater hazard to safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs implement at least one of the above-listed 50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see fall protection systems. Accordingly, the Appendix A to subpart M of this part), employer has the burden of establishing that the use of a safety monitoring system it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- alone [i.e. without the warning line tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) system] is permitted. for a particular workplace situation, in lieu (11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a of implementing any of those systems. steep roof with unprotected sides and (14) Wall openings. Each employee edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower working on, at, above, or near wall levels shall be protected from falling openings (including those with chutes by guardrail systems with toeboards, attached) where the outside bottom safety net systems, or personal fall ar- edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) rest systems. or more above lower levels and the in- (12) Precast concrete erection. Each em- side bottom edge of the wall opening is ployee engaged in the erection of pre- less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the cast concrete members (including, but walking/working surface, shall be pro- not limited to the erection of wall pan- tected from falling by the use of a els, columns, beams, and floor and roof guardrail system, a safety net system, ‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as or a personal fall arrest system. grouting of precast concrete members, (15) Walking/working surfaces not oth- who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above erwise addressed. Except as provided in lower levels shall be protected from § 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1) falling by guardrail systems, safety net through (b)(14), each employee on a systems, or personal fall arrest sys- walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) tems, unless another provision in para- or more above lower levels shall be pro- graph (b) of this section provides for an tected from falling by a guardrail sys- alternative fall protection measure. tem, safety net system, or personal fall Exception: When the employer can arrest system. demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre- (c) Protection from falling objects. ates a greater hazard to use these sys- When an employee is exposed to falling tems, the employer shall develop and objects, the employer shall have each implement a fall protection plan which employee wear a hard hat and shall im- meets the requirements of paragraph plement one of the following measures: (k) of § 1926.502. (1) Erect toeboards, screens, or NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- guardrail systems to prevent objects sible and will not create a greater hazard to from falling from higher levels; or,

322

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00322 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep entire opening between top rail sup- potential fall objects far enough from ports. the edge of the higher level so that (iii) Intermediate members (such as those objects would not go over the balusters), when used between posts, edge if they were accidentally dis- shall be not more than 19 inches (48 placed; or, cm) apart. (3) Barricade the area to which ob- (iv) Other structural members (such jects could fall, prohibit employees as additional midrails and architec- from entering the barricaded area, and tural panels) shall be installed such keep objects that may fall far enough that there are no openings in the away from the edge of a higher level so guardrail system that are more than 19 that those objects would not go over inches (.5 m) wide. the edge if they were accidentally dis- (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa- placed. ble of withstanding, without failure, a § 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap- teria and practices. plied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top (a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- edge, in any outward or downward di- tems required by this part shall comply rection, at any point along the top with the applicable provisions of this edge. section. (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test (2) Employers shall provide and in- load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of stall all fall protection systems re- this section is applied in a downward quired by this subpart for an employee, direction, the top edge of the guardrail and shall comply with all other perti- shall not deflect to a height less than nent requirements of this subpart be- 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/ fore that employee begins the work working level. Guardrail system com- that necessitates the fall protection. ponents selected and constructed in ac- (b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- cordance with the Appendix B to sub- tems and their use shall comply with part M of this part will be deemed to the following provisions: meet this requirement. (1) Top edge height of top rails, or (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- equivalent guardrail system members, mediate vertical members, solid pan- shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus els, and equivalent structural members 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ shall be capable of withstanding, with- working level. When conditions war- out failure, a force of at least 150 rant, the height of the top edge may pounds (666 N) applied in any downward exceed the 45-inch height, provided the or outward direction at any point guardrail system meets all other cri- along the midrail or other member. teria of this paragraph. (6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the faced as to prevent injury to an em- top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent ployee from punctures or lacerations, member, shall be increased an amount equal and to prevent snagging of clothing. to the height of the stilts. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- (7) The ends of all top rails and mediate vertical members, or equiva- midrails shall not overhang the ter- lent intermediate structural members minal posts, except where such over- shall be installed between the top edge hang does not constitute a projection of the guardrail system and the walk- hazard. ing/working surface when there is no (8) Steel banding and plastic banding wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches shall not be used as top rails or (53 cm) high. midrails. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in- (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at stalled at a height midway between the least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal top edge of the guardrail system and diameter or thickness to prevent cuts the walking/working level. and lacerations. If wire rope is used for (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, top rails, it shall be flagged at not shall extend from the top rail to the more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with walking/working level and along the high-visibility material.

323

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00323 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(10) When guardrail systems are used pact force equal to the drop test speci- at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section. movable guardrail section shall be (4) Safety nets and their installations placed across the access opening be- shall be capable of absorbing an impact tween guardrail sections when hoisting force equal to that produced by the operations are not taking place. drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) (11) When guardrail systems are used of this section. at holes, they shall be erected on all (i) Except as provided in paragraph unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and (12) When guardrail systems are used safety net installations shall be drop- around holes used for the passage of tested at the jobsite after initial in- materials, the hole shall have not more stallation and before being used as a than two sides provided with remov- fall protection system, whenever relo- able guardrail sections to allow the cated, after major repair, and at 6- passage of materials. When the hole is month intervals if left in one place. not in use, it shall be closed over with The drop-test shall consist of a 400 a cover, or a guardrail system shall be pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ± 2 inches provided along all unprotected sides or (76 ± 5 cm) in diameter dropped into the edges. net from the highest walking/working (13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level. shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem- offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per- rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para- (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em- and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per- each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system. paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include (c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in- tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that (1) Safety nets shall be installed as it was determined that the identified close as practicable under the walking/ net and net installation were in com- working surface on which employees pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this are working, but in no case more than section and the signature of the person 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When making the determination and certifi- nets are used on bridges, the potential cation. The most recent certification fall area from the walking/working sur- record for each net and net installation face to the net shall be unobstructed. shall be available at the jobsite for in- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward spection. from the outermost projection of the (5) Defective nets shall not be used. work surface as follows: Safety nets shall be inspected at least Minimum required horizontal once a week for wear, damage, and Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net other deterioration. Defective compo- level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working surface nents shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be inspected Up to 5 feet ...... 8 feet. More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet. after any occurrence which could affect More than 10 feet ...... 13 feet. the integrity of the safety net system. (6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (3) Safety nets shall be installed with ment, and tools which have fallen into sufficient clearance under them to pre- the safety net shall be removed as soon vent contact with the surface or struc- as possible from the net and at least tures below when subjected to an im- before the next work shift.

324

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00324 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

(7) The maximum size of each safety (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 rope; square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (ii) to each other; than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another the opening, measured center-to-center snaphook or other connector is at- of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be tached; longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or crossings shall be secured to prevent (v) to any object which is incom- enlargement of the mesh opening. patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- (8) Each safety net (or section of it) tion to the snaphook such that unin- shall have a border rope for webbing tentional disengagement could occur with a minimum breaking strength of by the connected object being able to 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). depress the snaphook keeper and re- (9) Connections between safety net lease itself. panels shall be as strong as integral (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar net components and shall be spaced not work platforms with horizontal life- more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines which may become vertical life- (d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- lines, the devices used to connect to a sonal fall arrest systems and their use horizontal lifeline shall be capable of shall comply with the provisions set locking in both directions on the lifeline. forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de- body belts are not acceptable as part of signed, installed, and used, under the a personal fall arrest system. Note: The supervision of a qualified person, as use of a body belt in a positioning depart of a complete personal fall arrest vice system is acceptable and is regu- system, which maintains a safety fac- lated under paragraph (e) of this sector of at least two. tion. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, shall have a minimum breaking pressed or formed steel, or made of strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). equivalent materials. (10) (i) Except as provided in para- (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when resistant finish, and all surfaces and vertical lifelines are used, each em- edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- ployee shall be attached to a separate age to interfacing parts of the system. lifeline. (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall (ii) During the construction of eleva- have a minimum tensile strength of tor shafts, two employees may be at- 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tached to the same lifeline in the (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be hoistway, provided both employees are proof-tested to a minimum tensile load working atop a false car that is of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- equipped with guardrails; the strength ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 formation. pounds per employee attached] (44.4 (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be kN); and all other criteria specified in compatible with the member to which this paragraph for lifelines have been they are connected to prevent uninten- met. tional disengagement of the snaphook (11) Lifelines shall be protected by depression of the snaphook keeper against being cut or abraded. by the connected member, or shall be a (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- locking type snaphook designed and yards which automatically limit free used to prevent disengagement of the fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less snaphook by the contact of the shall be capable of sustaining a min- snaphook keeper by the connected imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 member. Effective January 1, 1998, only kN) applied to the device with the life- locking type snaphooks shall be used. line or lanyard in the fully extended (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking position. type and designed for the following (13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- connections, snaphooks shall not be en- yards which do not limit free fall dis- gaged: tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch

325

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00325 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

lanyards, and tearing and deforming requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec- lanyards shall be capable of sustaining tion. a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (17) The attachment point of the (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the body belt shall be located in the center lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended of the wearer’s back. The attachment position. point of the body harness shall be lo- (14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used cated in the center of the wearer’s back in lanyards, lifelines, and strength near shoulder level, or above the wear- components of body belts and body har- er’s head. nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com- bers. ponents shall be used only for em- (15) Anchorages used for attachment ployee protection (as part of a personal of personal fall arrest equipment shall fall arrest system or positioning device be independent of any anchorage being system) and not to hoist materials. used to support or suspend platforms (19) Personal fall arrest systems and and capable of supporting at least 5,000 components subjected to impact load- pounds (22.2 kN) per employee ating shall be immediately removed from tached, or shall be designed, installed, service and shall not be used again for and used as follows: employee protection until inspected (i) as part of a complete personal fall and determined by a competent person arrest system which maintains a safety to be undamaged and suitable for factor of at least two; and reuse. (ii) under the supervision of a quali- (20) The employer shall provide for fied person. prompt rescue of employees in the (16) Personal fall arrest systems, event of a fall or shall assure that em- when stopping a fall, shall: ployees are able to rescue themselves. (i) limit maximum arresting force on (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when be inspected prior to each use for wear, used with a body belt; damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed (ii) limit maximum arresting force from service. on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) (22) Body belts shall be at least one when used with a body harness; and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) (iii) be rigged such that an employee wide. can neither free fall more than 6 feet (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; not be attached to guardrail systems, (iv) bring an employee to a complete nor shall they be attached to hoists ex- stop and limit maximum deceleration cept as specified in other subparts of distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet this part. (1.07 m); and, (24) When a personal fall arrest sys- (v) have sufficient strength to with- tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be stand twice the potential impact en- rigged to allow the movement of the ergy of an employee free falling a dis- employee only as far as the edge of the tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall walking/working surface. distance permitted by the system, (e) Positioning device systems. Posi- whichever is less. tioning device systems and their use NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system shall conform to the following provi- meets the criteria and protocols contained in Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system sions: is being used by an employee having a com- (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged bined person and tool weight of less than 310 such that an employee cannot free fall pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- more than 2 feet (.6 m). ered to be in compliance with the provisions (2) Positioning devices shall be se- of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the cured to an anchorage capable of sup- system is used by an employee having a com- porting at least twice the potential im- bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 kg) or more, then the employer must appropriately modify the criteria and protocols of pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. the Appendix to provide proper protection (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, for such heavier weights, or the system will pressed or formed steel, or made of not be deemed to be in compliance with the equivalent materials.

326

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00326 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (i) When mechanical equipment is resistant finish, and all surfaces and not being used, the warning line shall edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) age to interfacing parts of this system. from the roof edge. (5) Connecting assemblies shall have (ii) When mechanical equipment is a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 being used, the warning line shall be pounds (22.2 kN) erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be the roof edge which is parallel to the proof-tested to a minimum tensile load direction of mechanical equipment op- of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1 ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- m) from the roof edge which is perpen- formation. dicular to the direction of mechanical (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be equipment operation. compatible with the member to which (iii) Points of access, materials han- they are connected to prevent uninten- dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting tional disengagement of the snaphook areas shall be connected to the work by depression of the snaphook keeper area by an access path formed by two by the connected member, or shall be a warning lines. locking type snaphook designed and (iv) When the path to a point of ac- used to prevent disengagement of the cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, snaphook by the contact of the or other barricade, equivalent in snaphook keeper by the connected strength and height to the warning member. As of January 1, 1998, only line, shall be placed across the path at locking type snaphooks shall be used. the point where the path intersects the (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking warning line erected around the work type and designed for the following area, or the path shall be offset such connections, snaphooks shall not be en- that a person cannot walk directly into gaged: the work area. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire (2) Warning lines shall consist of rope; ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting stanchions erected as follows: (ii) to each other; (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) snaphook or other connector is at- intervals with high-visibility material; tached; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or rigged and supported in such a way (v) to any object which is incom- that its lowest point (including sag) is patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the tion to the snaphook such that unin- walking/working surface and its high- tentional disengagement could occur est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0 by the connected object being able to m) from the walking/working surface; depress the snaphook keeper and re- (iii) After being erected, with the lease itself. rope, wire, or chain attached, stan- (9) Positioning device systems shall chions shall be capable of resisting, be inspected prior to each use for wear, without tipping over, a force of at least damage, and other deterioration, and 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally defective components shall be removed against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) from service. above the walking/working surface, (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com- perpendicular to the warning line, and ponents shall be used only for em- in the direction of the floor, roof, or ployee protection (as part of a personal platform edge; fall arrest system or positioning device (iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall system) and not to hoist materials. have a minimum tensile strength of 500 (f) Warning line systems. Warning line pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- use shall comply with the following ble of supporting, without breaking, provisions: the loads applied to the stanchions as (1) The warning line shall be erected prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of around all sides of the roof work area. this section; and

327

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00327 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(v) The line shall be attached at each shall be approximately parallel to the stanchion in such a way that pulling on working edge. one section of the line between stan- (iii) Additional control lines shall be chions will not result in slack being erected at each end to enclose the con- taken up in adjacent sections before trolled access zone. the stanchion tips over. (iv) Only employees engaged in (3) No employee shall be allowed in overhand bricklaying or related work the area between a roof edge and a shall be permitted in the controlled ac- warning line unless the employee is cess zone. performing roofing work in that area. (3) Control lines shall consist of (4) Mechanical equipment on roofs ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate- shall be used or stored only in areas rials, and supporting stanchions as fol- where employees are protected by a lows: warning line system, guardrail system, (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth- or personal fall arrest system. erwise clearly marked at not more (g) Controlled access zones. Controlled than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high- access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and visibility material. § 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con- (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup- form to the following provisions. ported in such a way that its lowest (1) When used to control access to point (including sag) is not less than 39 areas where leading edge and other op- inches (1 m) from the walking/working erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op- that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the (i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface. shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 the unprotected or leading edge, except kN). when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard- bers. rail systems are not in place prior to (ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en- more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han- length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas. whichever is less, from the leading (5) On floors and roofs where guard- edge. rail systems are in place, but need to (iii) The control line shall extend be removed to allow overhand brick- along the entire length of the unpro- laying work or leading edge work to tected or leading edge and shall be ap- take place, only that portion of the proximately parallel to the unpro- guardrail necessary to accomplish that tected or leading edge. day’s work shall be removed. (iv) The control line shall be con- (h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety nected on each side to a guardrail sys- monitoring systems [See tem or wall. §§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and (2) When used to control access to their use shall comply with the fol- areas where overhand bricklaying and lowing provisions: related work are taking place: (1) The employer shall designate a (i) The controlled access zone shall competent person to monitor the safe- be defined by a control line erected not ty of other employees and the em- less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than ployer shall ensure that the safety 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge. monitor complies with the following (ii) The control line shall extend for requirements: a distance sufficient for the controlled (i) The safety monitor shall be com- access zone to enclose all employees petent to recognize fall hazards; performing overhand bricklaying and (ii) The safety monitor shall warn related work at the working edge and the employee when it appears that the

328

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00328 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

employee is unaware of a fall hazard or along the edge of the overhead walking/ is acting in an unsafe manner; working surface for a distance suffi- (iii) The safety monitor shall be on cient to protect employees below. the same walking/working surface and (2) Toeboards shall be capable of within visual sighting distance of the withstanding, without failure, a force employee being monitored; of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in (iv) The safety monitor shall be close any downward or outward direction at enough to communicate orally with any point along the toeboard. the employee; and (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of (v) The safety monitor shall not have 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height other responsibilities which could take from their top edge to the level of the the monitor’s attention from the moni- walking/working surface. They shall toring function. have not more than 1⁄4 inch (0.6 cm) (2) Mechanical equipment shall not clearance above the walking/working be used or stored in areas where safety surface. They shall be solid or have monitoring systems are being used to openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in monitor employees engaged in roofing greatest dimension. operations on low-slope roofs. (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate- (3) No employee, other than an em- rials are piled higher than the top edge ployee engaged in roofing work [on of a toeboard, paneling or screening low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- shall be erected from the walking/ ered by a fall protection plan, shall be working surface or toeboard to the top allowed in an area where an employee of a guardrail system’s top rail or is being protected by a safety moni- midrail, for a distance sufficient to toring system. protect employees below. (4) Each employee working in a con- (5) Guardrail systems, when used as trolled access zone shall be directed to falling object protection, shall have all comply promptly with fall hazard openings small enough to prevent pas- warnings from safety monitors. sage of potential falling objects. (i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, (6) During the performance of roofs, and other walking/working sur- overhand bricklaying and related work: faces shall meet the following require- (i) No materials or equipment except ments: masonry and mortar shall be stored (1) Covers located in roadways and within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- edge. porting, without failure, at least twice (ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat- the maximum axle load of the largest tered masonry units, and all other ma- vehicle expected to cross over the terials and debris shall be kept clear cover. from the work area by removal at reg- (2) All other covers shall be capable ular intervals. of supporting, without failure, at least twice the weight of employees, equip- (7) During the performance of roofing ment, and materials that may be im- work: posed on the cover at any one time. (i) Materials and equipment shall not (3) All covers shall be secured when be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof installed so as to prevent accidental edge unless guardrails are erected at displacement by the wind, equipment, the edge. or employees. (ii) Materials which are piled, (4) All covers shall be color coded or grouped, or stacked near a roof edge they shall be marked with the word shall be stable and self-supporting. ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn- (8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- ing of the hazard. ject protection, shall be strong enough NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- iron manhole covers or steel grates used on etration by any objects which may fall streets or roadways. onto the canopy. (j) Protection from falling objects. Fall- (k) Fall protection plan. This option is ing object protection shall comply with available only to employees engaged in the following provisions: leading edge work, precast concrete (1) Toeboards, when used as falling erection work, or residential construc- object protection, shall be erected tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12),

329

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00329 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.503 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that other employees may enter controlled it is infeasible or it creates a greater access zones. hazard to use conventional fall protec- (10) In the event an employee falls, or tion equipment. The fall protection some other related, serious incident oc- plan must conform to the following curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer provisions. shall investigate the circumstances of (1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce- the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents. be maintained up to date. (2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements. plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions person. supplement and clarify the require- (3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part. maintained at the job site. (a) Training Program. (1) The em- (4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex- pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program (5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog- ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards. feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as (6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas: measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area; who cannot be provided with protection from the conventional fall protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect- tion systems. For example, the em- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and ployer shall discuss the extent to inspecting the fall protection systems which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle to be used; mounted work platforms can be used to (iii) The use and operation of guard- provide a safer working surface and rail systems, personal fall arrest sys- thereby reduce the hazard of falling. tems, safety net systems, warning line (7) The fall protection plan shall systems, safety monitoring systems, identify each location where conven- controlled access zones, and other pro- tional fall protection methods cannot tection to be used; be used. These locations shall then be (iv) The role of each employee in the classified as controlled access zones safety monitoring system when this and the employer must comply with system is used; the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec- (v) The limitations on the use of me- tion. chanical equipment during the per- (8) Where no other alternative meas- formance of roofing work on low-sloped ure has been implemented, the em- roofs; ployer shall implement a safety moni- (vi) The correct procedures for the toring system in conformance with handling and storage of equipment and § 1926.502(h). materials and the erection of overhead (9) The fall protection plan must in- protection; and clude a statement which provides the (vii) The role of employees in fall name or other method of identification protection plans; for each employee who is designated to (viii) The standards contained in this work in controlled access zones. No subpart.

330

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00330 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

(b) Certification of training. (1) The APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M— employer shall verify compliance with DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS paragraph (a) of this section by pre- Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With paring a written certification record. § 1926.501(b)(10) The written certification record shall contain the name or other identity of (1) This Appendix serves as a guideline to assist employers complying with the require- the employee trained, the date(s) of the ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section training, and the signature of the per- 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon- son who conducted the training or the itoring system alone as a means of providing signature of the employer. If the em- fall protection during the performance of ployer relies on training conducted by roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in another employer or completed prior to the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and the effective date of this section, the indicates where each roof or roof area is to certification record shall indicate the be measured to determine its width. Section date the employer determined the prior views or elevation views are shown where ap- training was adequate rather than the propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’ date of actual training. and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly (2) The latest training certification shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension shall be maintained. selected to be the width of an area is the (c) Retraining. When the employer has lesser of the two primary dimensions of the reason to believe that any affected em- area, as viewed from above. Example A ployee who has already been trained shows that on a simple rectangular roof, width is the lesser of the two primary overall does not have the understanding and dimensions. This is also the case with roofs skill required by paragraph (a) of this which are sloped toward or away from the section, the employer shall retrain roof center, as shown in Example B. each such employee. Circumstances (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. where retraining is required include, Such roofs may be broken down into sub- but are not limited to, situations areas as shown in Example C. The process of dividing a roof area can produce many dif- where: ferent configurations. Example C gives the (1) Changes in the workplace render general rule of using dividing lines of min- previous training obsolete; or imum length to minimize the size and num- (2) Changes in the types of fall pro- ber of the areas which are potentially less tection systems or equipment to be than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to minimize the number of roof areas where used render previous training obsolete; safety monitoring systems alone are suffi- or cient protection. (3) Inadequacies in an affected em- (3) Roofs which are comprised of several ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro- separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in tection systems or equipment indicate Example D, may be considered as a series of that the employee has not retained the individual roofs. Some roofs have penthouses, additional floors, courtyard open- requisite understanding or skill. ings, or similar architectural features; Ex- NOTE: The following appendices to subpart ample E shows how the rule for dividing M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide- roofs into subareas is applied to such con- lines to assist employers in complying with figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs the appropriate requirements of subpart M of must be considered on an individual basis, as this part. shown in Example F. Example A

331

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00331 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Rectangular Shaped Roofs

Example B

Sloped Rectangular Shaped Roofs

Example C which are potentially less than or equal to 50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS WITH the size of roof areas where the safety moni- RECTANGULAR SHAPED SECTIONS toring system alone can be used [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas examples to show the location of dividing by using dividing lines of minimum length to lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of minimize the size and number of the areas width.

332

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00332 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

Example D

333

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00333 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Separate, Non-Contiguous Roof Areas

Example E minimize the size and number of the areas which are potentially less than or equal to 50 ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN COURTYARDS, feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC. the size of roof areas where the safety moni- Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas toring system alone can be used by using dividing lines of minimum length to [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the

334

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00334 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

examples to show the location of dividing lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of width.

Example F

335

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00335 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Irregular, Non-Rectangular Shaped Roofs

APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M—GUARDRAIL plying with these requirements. An employer SYSTEMS may use these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail systems. However, Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with the guidelines do not provide all the infor- § 1926.502(b) mation necessary to build a complete sys- The standard requires guardrail systems tem, and the employer is still responsible for and components to be designed and built to designing and assembling these components meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), in such a way that the completed system and (5). This Appendix serves as a non-man- will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3), datory guideline to assist employers in com- (4), and (5). Components for which no specific

336

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00336 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C

guidelines are given in this Appendix (e.g., of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm joints, base connections, components made plus or minus 10 cm). with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas- pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used § 1926.502. with the system. (1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre- shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 ciable motion imparted to it. cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de- the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used. by 6-inch (2.5 cm x 15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation. the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 (2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of intermediate railings shall be at least one this section.) and one-half inches nominal diameter (2) The test consists of dropping the test (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more weight once. A new unused system should be than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test. (3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness. (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys- APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M—PERSONAL tems, the length of the lifeline above the FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m). § 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automati- I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m and positioning device systems—(a) General. ) or less, and for systems with deceleration This appendix serves as a non-mandatory devices which have a connection distance in guideline to assist employers comply with excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs the centerline of the lifeline and the attach- (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Appendix describe ment point to the body belt or harness), the test procedures which may be used to deter- test weight should be rigged to free fall a dis- mine compliance with the requirements in tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is § 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D of 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to this subpart, the test methods listed here in its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor- Appendix C can also be used to assist em- age). The test weight should fall without in- ployers comply with the requirements in terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor § 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device or ground during the test. In some cases a systems. non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length (b) General conditions for all tests in the Ap- may need to be added to the system (for test pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall and deceleration devices should be attached distance. to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto- they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be (2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 should not have a deflection greater than m). 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test. (3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. of dropping the respective test weight once (4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test.

337

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00337 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de- 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg vices. The locking mechanisms of other self- plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See activating-type deceleration devices de- paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). signed for more than one arrest should lock (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or each of 1,000 times as they would in normal minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) service. as measured from the fixed anchorage to the II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for attachment on the body belt or body har- personal fall arrest systems. The following in- ness. formation constitutes additional guidelines (iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system. (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation, (3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg kept to a minimum. Consideration should be plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment. paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) For example, the presence of acids, dirt, (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse ef- normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet used where an electrical hazard is antici- (1.83 m), except as follows: pated. As required by the standard, the em- (A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to connection link or lanyard, the test weight promptly rescue an employee should a fall should free fall a distance equal to the con- occur, since the suspended employee may not nection distance (measured between the cen- be able to reach a work level independently. terline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness). (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by work oper- (B) For deceleration device systems with ations such as welding, chemical cleaning, integral lifelines or lanyards which auto- and sandblasting, the component should be matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free protected, or other securing systems should fall a distance equal to that permitted by the be used. The employer should fully evaluate system in normal use. (For example, to test the work conditions and environment (in- a system with a self-retracting lifeline or cluding seasonal weather changes) before se- lanyard, the test weight should be supported lecting the appropriate personal fall protec- and the system allowed to retract the life- tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec- line or lanyard as it would in normal use. tiveness should be monitored. In some cases, The test weight would then be released and a program for cleaning and maintenance of the force and deceleration distance meas- the system may be necessary. ured). (b) Testing considerations. Before pur- (4) A system fails the force test if the re- chasing or putting into use a personal fall corded maximum arresting force exceeds arrest system, an employer should obtain 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, from the supplier information about the sys- and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when tem based on its performance during testing using a body harness. so that the employer can know if the system (5) The maximum elongation and decelera- meets this standard. Testing should be done tion distance should be recorded during the using recognized test methods. This Appen- force test. dix contains test methods recognized for (e) Deceleration device tests. (1) General. The evaluating the performance of fall arrest device should be evaluated or tested under systems. Not all systems may need to be in- the environmental conditions, (such as rain, dividually tested; the performance of some ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for systems may be based on data and calcula- which the device is designed. tions derived from testing of similar sys- (2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) tems, provided that enough information is Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 available to demonstrate similarity of func- times over the same length of line a distance tion and design. of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the (c) Component compatibility considerations. mechanism should lock each time. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de- (ii) Unless the device is permanently signed, tested, and supplied as a complete marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline system. However, it is common practice for which must be used, several types (different lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration diameters and different materials), of life- devices, body belts and body harnesses to be lines should be used to test the device. interchanged since some components wear

338

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00338 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C

out before others. The employer and em- can rescue themselves should a fall occur. ployee should realize that not all compo- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders nents are interchangeable. For instance, a or other rescue equipment should be evalu- lanyard should not be connected between a ated. In some situations, equipment which body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable, result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa- system was not designed. Any substitution bility. or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts, in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; (d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func- ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed. use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro- ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit- well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build- tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build- mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con- use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards. unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an- tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately (e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro- should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design- from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali- use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and cable: experience should design an anchor point to (1) The force measured during the sample be installed. force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes (2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of (3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable (4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto (5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro- (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre- (7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to (9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’ This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength. ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all (f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per- § 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such

339

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00339 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- greatly reduced if the force is applied at an hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). tachment is used that will reduce the Also, care should be exercised in selecting strength of the system, that component the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci- should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de- that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection. imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the (3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and- length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’ one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to (4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be- around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re- percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to (5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards, avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well. should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec- wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit- around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high- (6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi- to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha- lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef- amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring. 15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol- 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used: times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline. lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring. zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each movement of the falling employee and the other. horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte- may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard. zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard. be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook. (7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware

340

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00340 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D

that a system’s maximum arresting force is be considered. In addition, when a body belt evaluated under normal use conditions es- is used, the employee’s body will go through tablished by the manufacturer, and in no a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi- case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob- feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur. ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de- tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad- required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera- tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup- belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract- free fall distance is added to the length of ing equipment is connected to a horizontal the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach- lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be ing to the working surface will often result minimized to prevent the device from sliding in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For down the lifeline to a position which creates instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all the total free fall distance will be the distance from the working level to the body cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 followed. feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another important consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M— force which the fall system must withstand POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS also goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With system. § 1926.502(e) (l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man- tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c), elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relat- tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys- distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may with the lanyard or device’s instructions and be used, along with the procedures listed must be added to the free fall distance to ar- below, to determine compliance with the re- rive at the total fall distance before an em- quirements for positioning device systems in ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop- § 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M. ping distance may be very significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de- near or at the end of a long lifeline, which vices shall have one end attached to a fixed may itself add considerable distance due to anchorage and the other end connected to a its own elongation. As required by the stand- body belt or harness in the same manner as ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of they would be used to protect employees. these factors must also be maintained be- Double strap positioning devices, similar to tween the employee and obstructions below, window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of to prevent an injury due to impact before the the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a the other end shall hang free. The body belt minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro- grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span. ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04 working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied. vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. (m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a of the tie-off should also consider the hazard girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm). the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of

341

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00341 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the system being tested. A new system shall SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS be used for each test. (5) The test weight for each test shall be Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete Structures hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to This Fall Protection Plan is specific for permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). the following project: (6) The test is failed whenever any break- Location of Job lllllllllllllll age or slippage occurs which permits the Erecting Company lllllllllllll weight to fall free of the system. Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll (7) Following the test, the system need not Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll be capable of further operation; however, all Plan Approved By llllllllllllll such incapacities shall be readily apparent. Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll II. Inspection Considerations. As required in The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention § 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- must be regularly inspected. Any component tection Plan must be developed and evalu- with any significant defect, such as cuts, ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; ommended that erectors discuss the written alterations or additions which might affect Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; Office prior to going on a jobsite. contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro- loose or damaged mountings; non-func- tection of its employees from on-the-job in- tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- juries. All employees of (Company Name) ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from have the responsibility to work safely on the service immediately, and should be tagged or job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup- marked as unusable, or destroyed. plement our standard safety policy by providing safety standards specifically designed APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M—SAMPLE to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to FALL PROTECTION PLAN ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the safety provisions which Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With are to be implemented by this plan prior to § 1926.502(k) the start of erection. This Fall Protection Plan addresses the Employers engaged in leading edge work, use of other than conventional fall protec- precast concrete construction work and resi- tion at a number of areas on the project, as dential construction work who can dem- well as identifying specific activities that re- onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a quire non-conventional means of fall protec- greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- tion. These areas include: tection systems must develop and follow a a. Connecting activity (point of erection). fall protection plan. Below are sample fall b. Leading edge work. protection plans developed for precast con- c. Unprotected sides or edge. crete construction and residential work that d. Grouting. could be tailored to be site specific for other This plan is designed to enable employers precast concrete or residential jobsite. This and employees to recognize the fall hazards sample plan can be modified to be used for on this job and to establish the procedures other work involving leading edge work. The that are to be followed in order to prevent sample plan outlines the elements that must falls to lower levels or through holes and be addressed in any fall protection plan. The openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained in these procedures reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employees opinion, rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad- sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding. protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple- site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac- that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac- tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort

342

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00342 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

by every individual involved with the project 2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, from management down to the last em- or ployee. Each employee must understand 3. They will wear a blue colored vest. their value to the company; the costs of acci- Only individuals with the appropriate experi- dents, both monetary, physical, and emo- ence, skills, and training will be authorized tional; the objective of the safety policy and as designated erectors. All employees that procedures; the safety rules that apply to the will be working as designated erectors under safety policy and procedures; and what their the safety monitoring system shall have individual role is in administering, imple- been trained and instructed in the following menting, monitoring, and compliance of areas: their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec- standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion). by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab- unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made be implemented. known to the employees. It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work- petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions. responsible for continual observational safety checks of their work operations and to en- 4. The function, use, and operation of safe- force the safety policy and procedures. The ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems, foreman also is responsible to correct any body belt/harness systems, control zones and unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is other protection to be used. the responsibility of the employee to under- 5. The correct procedure for erecting, stand and adhere to the procedures of this maintaining, disassembling and inspecting plan and to follow the instructions of the the system(s) to be used. foreman. It is also the responsibility of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or employee to bring to managements attention the erection plan. any unsafe or hazardous conditions or acts A conference will take place prior to start- that may cause injury to either themselves ing work involving all members of the erec- or any other employees. Any changes to this tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any Fall Protection Plan must be approved by other concerned contractors. This conference (name of Qualified Person). will be conducted by the precast concrete erection supervisor in charge of the project. II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON During the pre-work conference, erection THIS PROJECT procedures and sequences pertinent to this job will be thoroughly discussed and safety Where conventional fall protection is in- practices to be used throughout the project feasible or creates a greater hazard at the will be specified. Further, all personnel will leading edge and during initial connecting be informed that the controlled access zones activity, we plan to do this work using a are off limits to all personnel other than safety monitoring system and expose only a those designated erectors specifically minimum number of employees for the time trained to work in that area. necessary to actually accomplish the job. The maximum number of workers to be mon- Safety Monitoring System itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We are designating the following trained em- A safety monitoring system means a fall ployees as designated erectors and they are protection system in which a competent per- permitted to enter the controlled access son is responsible for recognizing and warn- zones and work without the use of conven- ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of tional fall protection. the safety monitor are to: 1. Warn by voice when approaching the Safety monitor: open edge in an unsafe manner. Designated erector: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit- Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by Designated erector: another person involved with product place- Designated erector: ment, such as a member getting out of con- Designated erector: trol. Designated erector: 3. Make the designated erectors aware they The safety monitor shall be identified by are in a dangerous area. wearing an orange hard hat. The designated 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz- erectors will be identified by one of the fol- ards. lowing methods: 5. Warn employees when they appear to be 1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an or unsafe manner.

343

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00343 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

6. Be on the same walking/working surface shipped with the member to the jobsite. as the monitored employees and within vis- Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- ual sighting distance of the monitored em- tection for the hole must be provided to pro- ployees. tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- 7. Be close enough to communicate orally ers will not be removed without the approval with the employees. of the erection foreman. 8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- Precast concrete column erection through cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- the existing deck requires that many holes comes too encumbered with other respon- be provided through this deck. These are to sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- be covered and protected. Except for the tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- opening being currently used to erect a col- sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn umn, all opening protection is to be left un- over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc- radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open- walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a fall hazard at this location. Control Zone System III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION A controlled access zone means an area PLAN designated and clearly marked, in which leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members. ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and 1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job: where leading edge and other operations are Columns taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har- erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column, 2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce 3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left 4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an 5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized. 6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it. the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at 7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam, ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final alignment from a ladder. If the employee needs to Holes reach over the side of the beam to bar or All openings greater than 12 in. x 12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en- covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its

344

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00344 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

bearing. To disconnect the crane from the the direction and supervision of the safety beam an employee will stand a ladder monitor. against the beam. Because the use of ladders Designated erectors, while waiting for the is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams next floor or roof member, will be constantly will be initially placed with the use of tag under the control of the safety monitor for lines and their final alignment made by a fall protection and are directed to stay a person on a manlift or similar employee po- minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the sitioning systems. event a designated erector must move from one end of a member, which has just been Spandrel Beams placed at the leading edge, they must first Spandrel beams at the exterior of the move away from the leading edge a min- building will be aligned as closely as possible imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times. der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge, crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider- double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high- a ladder with an employee on it. er than the other to allow for the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket using the Floor and Roof Members following procedure. During installation of the precast concrete The double tee will be rigged with a stand- floor and/or roof members, the work deck ard four-way spreader off of the main load continuously increases in area as more and line. An additional choker will be attached more units are being erected and positioned. to the married point of the two-legged Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is spreader at the end of the tee that is to be constantly modified with the leading edge elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with changing location as each member is in- the main load line and swung into a position stalled. The fall protection for workers at as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing the leading edge shall be assured by properly elevation. When the tee is in this position constructed and maintained control zone and stabilized, the whip line load block will lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus- toring system to ensure the safety of all des- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem- ignated erectors working within the area de- ber and pull the load block to the end of the fined by the control zone lines. tee to be elevated and attach the additional The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- choker to the load block. The possibility of sonry portion of the building will be erected entanglement with the crane lines and other and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- obstacles during this two lining process tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- while raising and lowering the crane block tween the end of the slab and face shell of on that second line could be hazardous to an the concrete masonry by dumping from a encumbered employee. Therefore, the des- wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- ignated erectors will not tie off during any tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- part of this process. While the designated barrow and then spread with long handled erectors are on the double tee, the safety tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- monitoring system will be used. After ating toward the unprotected edge and back taching the choker, the two erectors then from any work deck edge. step back on the previously erected tee deck Whenever possible, the designated erectors and signal the crane operator to hoist the will approach the incoming member at the load with the whip line to the elevation that leading edge only after it is below waist will allow for enough clearance to let the low height so that the member itself provides end tee legs slide into the pockets when the protection against falls. main load line is lowered. The erector, who Except for the situations described below, is handling the lowered end of the tee at the when the arriving floor or roof member is closed pocket bearing, will step out on the within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the suspended tee. An erection bar will then be designated erectors can then proceed to their placed between the end of the tee leg and the position of erection at each end of the mem- inside face of the pocketed spandrel member. ber under the control of the safety monitor. The tee is barred away from the pocketed Crane hooks will be unhooked from double member to reduce the friction and lateral tee members by designated erectors under force against the pocketed member. As the

345

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00345 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

tee is being lowered, the other erector re- ed to remind employees they are approach- mains on the tee which was previously erecting an area where fall protection is required. ed to handle the other end. At this point the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID- where the tee legs can freely slide into the ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD- pockets. The erector working the lowered ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems between the tee and the face of the pocketed spandrel member to very gradually let the In this particular erection sequence and tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper procedure, personal fall arrest systems re- bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines lowered into its final erected position. and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards The designated erector should be allowed to workers and will create offsetting hazards onto the suspended double tee, otherwise during their usage at the leading edge of pre- there is no control over the horizontal move- cast/prestressed concrete construction. ment of the double tee and this movement Leading edge erection and initial connec- could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or tions are conducted by employees who are the column out of plumb. The control nec- specifically trained to do this type of work essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can and are trained to recognize the fall hazards. only be done safely from the top of the dou- The nature of such work normally exposes ble tee being erected. the employee to the fall hazard for a short Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of period of time and installation of fall protec- the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated tion systems for a short duration is not fea- decks requires the use of a safety monitor sible because it exposes the installers of the and a controlled access zone that is a min- system to the same fall hazard, but for a longer period of time. imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the length of the wall panels away from the un- 1. It is necessary that the employee be able protected edge, so that designated erectors to move freely without encumbrance in order can move freely and unencumbered when re- to guide the sections of precast concrete into their final position without having lifelines ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for attached which will restrict the employees stability, will be installed by ladder. After ability to move about at the point of erec- the braces are secured, the crane will be dis- tion. connected from the wall by using a ladder. 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more The wall to wall connections will also be per- workers to maneuver around each other as a formed from a ladder. concrete member is positioned to fit into the Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The structure. If they are each attached to a life- locating of survey lines, panel layout and line, part of their attention must be diverted other installation prerequisites (prewelding, from their main task of positioning a mem- etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) ber weighing several tons to the task of will not commence until floor perimeter and avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if areas, it is necessary because of panel con- these workers are attached to lanyards, figuration to remove the perimeter protec- more fall potential would result than from tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- not using such a device. moval of perimeter protection will be per- In this specific erection sequence and pro- formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the cladding erection to minimize temporarily problem of two workers becoming tangled. In unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning from retracting as the worker moved, thus the cladding when the perimeter protection potentially exposing the worker to a fall is removed shall be tied off. greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing over the lifeline of another worker can cre- Detailing ate a hazard because the movement of one Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or person can unbalance the other. In the event more to lower levels, who are not actively of a fall by one person there is a likelihood engaged in leading edge work or connecting that the other person will be caused to fall activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting, as well. In addition, if contamination such as bracing, guying, patching, painting or other grout (during hollow core grouting) enters operations, and who are working less than the retractable housing it can cause exces- six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be sive wear and damage to the device and tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- could clog the retracting mechanism as the stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct- ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an ing the cable orifice can defeat the devices unprotected edge as defined by the control shock absorbing function, produce cable zone lines, do not require fall protection but slack and damage, and adversely affect cable a warning line or control lines must be erect- extraction and retraction.

346

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00346 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be 4. Anchorages or special attachment points trapped and crushed by moving structural could be cast into the precast concrete mem- members if the employee becomes restrained bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ation of erectors position is done before the cannot get out of the path of the moving members are cast. Any hole or other attach- load. ment must be approved by the engineer who The sudden movement of a precast con- designed the member. It is possible that crete member being raised by a crane can be some design restrictions will not allow a caused by a number of factors. When this member to be weakened by an additional happens, a connector may immediately have hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit- to move a considerable distance to avoid in- uations would be the exception, not the rule. jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being Attachment points, other than on the deck used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex- specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un- When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach- tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis- ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops, build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time. their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre- suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines and lanyards on a moving member could pull (a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the (1) Operator error. structure is being created and, in most cases, (2) Site conditions (soft or unstable there is no structure above the members ground). being placed. (3) Mechanical failure. (a) Temporary structural supports, in- (4) Structural failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life- (5) Rigging failure. lines limit the space which is essential for (6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- orderly positioning, alignment and place- ure. ment of the precast concrete members. To keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage- (b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would nec- (1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- essarily need to be in proximity to the posi- ticularly a problem with the large surface tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast areas of precast concrete members. concrete member being positioned because of (2) Snow/rain (visibility). wind pressure or crane movement could (3) Fog (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting (4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- structure, moving it suddenly and causing chanical problems. tied off employees to fall. (c) Structure/Product Conditions. (b) The time in manhours which would be (1) Lifting Eye failure. expended in placing and maintaining tem- (2) Bearing failure or slippage. porary structural supports for lifeline at- (3) Structure shifting. taching points could exceed the expended (4) Bracing failure. manhours involved in placing the precast (5) Product failure. concrete members. No protection could be (d) Human Error. provided for the employees erecting the tem- (1) Incorrect tag line procedure. porary structural supports and these sup- (2) Tag line hang-up. ports would have to be moved for each suc- (3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- cessive step in the construction process, thus nals. greatly increasing the employees exposure to (4) Misjudged elevation of member. the fall hazard. (5) Misjudged speed of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally (6) Misjudged angle of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines

347

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00347 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

for erecting or walking a beam for con- feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, necting work is not feasible and creates a impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- greater hazard on this multi-story building rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- for the following reasons: ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- (1) If a connector is to use such a line, it ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the must be installed between the two columns. walking-working surface; and the potential To perform this installation requires an for swing hazards is increased. erector to have more fall exposure time at- Manufacturers also require that workers taching the cable to the columns than would not work at a level where the point of be spent to make the beam to column con- snaphook attachment to the body harness is nection itself. above the device because this will increase (2) If such a line is to be installed so that the free fall distance and the deceleration an erector can walk along a beam, it must be distance and will cause higher forces on the overhead or below him. For example, if a body in the event of an accidental fall. connector must walk along a 24 in. wide Manufacturers recommend an anchorage beam, the presence of a line next to the con- for the retractable lifeline which is immov- nector at waist level, attached directly to ably fixed in space and is independent of the the columns, would prevent the connector user’s support systems. A moveable anchor- from centering their weight over the beam age is one which can be moved around (such and balancing themselves. Installing the line as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which above the connector might be possible on the can deflect substantially under shock load- first level of a two-story column; however, ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi- the column may extend only a few feet above ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an- the floor level at the second level or be flush chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor- with the floor level. Attaching the line to age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of the side of the beam could be a solution; the flexible anchorage such that the retract- however, it would require the connector to able brake mechanism may undergo one or attach the lanyard below foot level which more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking would most likely extend a fall farther than (ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec- 6 ft. tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move- (3) When lines are strung over every beam, able anchorage involves critical engineering it becomes more and more difficult for the and safety factors and should only be consid- crane operator to lower a precast concrete ered after fixed anchorage has been deter- member into position without the member mined to be not feasible. becoming fouled. Should the member become Horizontal cables used as an anchorage entangled, it could easily dislodge the line present an additional hazard due to amplifi- from a column. If a worker is tied to it at cation of the horizontal component of max- the time, a fall could be caused. imum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to 6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National the points where the horizontal cable is at- Standard for Construction and Demolition tached to the structure. This amplification Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- cable and is most severe for small angles of struction and Demolition Use, states that sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration horizontal force on the points of cable at- device should, if possible, be located above tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15. the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. It is also necessary to install the retract- ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- able device vertically overhead to minimize chorage point is one which is located as high swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous struction below should the worker fall. Most situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori- manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- zontal speed of the user may be high enough book that the safety block/retractable life- to cause injury when an obstacle in the line must be positioned above the D-ring swing fall path is struck by either the user (above the work space of the intended user) or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis- and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and tance of the user may be much greater than restraint equipment be used in accordance if the user had fallen only vertically without with the manufacturer’s instructions. a swing fall path. Attachment of a retractable device to a With retractable lines, overconfidence may horizontal cable near floor level or using the cause the worker to engage in inappropriate inserts in the floor or roof members may re- behavior, such as approaching the perimeter sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher greater than the shortest distance between than the attachment point of the snaphook the anchorage point and the leading edge. to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few or surface, reduces the working length to feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of only one foot, by placing the anchorage five the floor or beam and swing the worker like

348

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00348 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

a pendulum until the line has moved to a po- tested. With the point of erection constantly sition where the distance between the an- changing, the time necessary to install and chorage point and floor edge is the shortest test a safety net significantly exceeds the distance between those two points. Accom- time necessary to position and secure the panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of concrete member. the worker, with the attendant danger that 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter he or she may violently impact the floor or wall openings and opensided floors, causes some obstruction below. attachment points to be left in architectural The risk of a cable breaking is increased if concrete which must be patched and filled a lifeline is dragged sideways across the with matching material after the net sup- rough surface or edge of a concrete member porting hardware is removed. In order to at the same moment that the lifeline is patch these openings, additional numbers of being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo- of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees. 7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc- performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There would be a high probability that the member B. Safety Net Systems being lifted could become entangled in net The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc. crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation. 1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be supporting devices for nets can be attached placed. in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup- and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in- nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not 2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be- the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten- net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage. tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or C. Guardrail Systems the possibility of a move to a different level or area of the structure) to protect workers On this particular worksite, guardrails, placing the next piece in the construction se- barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter quence. The result would be the installation guarding devices or methods on the erection and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly floor will pose problems to safe erection pro- throughout the normal work day. As the cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected time necessary to install a net, test, and re- by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members move it is significantly greater than the next to one another and welding or grouting time necessary to position and secure a pre- them together. The perimeter of a floor and cast concrete member, the exposure time for roof changes each time a new member is the worker installing the safety net would be placed into position. It is unreasonable and far longer than for the workers whom the net virtually impossible to erect guardrails and is intended to protect. The time exposure re- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge peats itself each time the nets and sup- of a floor or roof. porting hardware must be moved laterally or 1. To position a member safely it is nec- upward to provide protection at the point of essary to remove all obstructions extending erection or leading edge. above the floor level near the point of erec- 3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to quires that operations shall not be under- swing a new member across the erected sur- taken until the net is in place and has been face as necessary to position it properly

349

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00349 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

without worrying about knocking material particular jobsite. If during the course of off of this surface. erecting the building the employee sees an Hollow core slab erection on the masonry area that could be erected more safely by the wall requires installation of the perimeter use of these fall protection measures, the protection where the masonry wall has to be foreman should be notified. constructed. This means the guardrail is in- A. Scaffolds are not used because: stalled then subsequently removed to con- 1. The leading edge of the building is continue the masonry construction. The erector stantly changing and the scaffolding would will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer have to be moved at very frequent intervals. period of time while installing and removing Employees erecting and dismantling the perimeter protection than while erecting the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards slabs. for a greater length of time than they would In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete concrete erection, others are not typically member. on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane. plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding. tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used the next day after the installation is com- because: plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not 2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over all structural members have been placed in other levels. the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu- ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform. with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter- and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment. over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform. would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are align the new member and connect it to the not used because: structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected. absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work 3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job. sections by creating the possibility of employees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT suspended loads. The lack of a clear work area in which to guide the suspended load Constant awareness of and respect for fall into position for placement and welding of hazards, and compliance with all safety rules members into the existing structure creates are considered conditions of employment. still further hazards. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi- 4. Where erection processes require precast viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart- concrete stairways or openings to be in- ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary stalled as an integral part of the overall warnings to employees, up to and including erection process, it must also be recognized termination, for failure to follow the guide- that guardrails or handrails must not project lines of this program. above the surface of the erection floor. Such guardrails should be terminated at the level VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work- ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of any safety program that documentation take V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB and means of prevention can be identified to The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence. other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident

350

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00350 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- c. Roof sheathing operations; and termine if additional practices, procedures, d. Erecting exterior walls. or training need to be implemented to pre- In these cases, conventional fall protection vent similar types of falls or incidents from systems may not be the safest choice for occurring. builders. This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize the fall VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN hazards associated with this job and to es- Any changes to the plan will be approved tablish the safest procedures that are to be by (name of the qualified person). This plan followed in order to prevent falls to lower shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the levels or through holes and openings in walk- job progresses to determine if additional ing/working surfaces. practices, procedures or training needs to be Each employee will be trained in these pro- implemented by the competent person to im- cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex- prove or provide additional fall protection. cept when doing so would expose the em- Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ- essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is plan and all approved changes shall be main- to notify the competent person of their contained at the jobsite. cern and have the concern addressed before proceeding. Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential It is the responsibility of (name of com- Construction petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- tection Plan. Continual observational safety (INSERT COMPANY NAME) checks of work operations and the enforce- This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For ment of the safety policy and procedures The Following Project: shall be regularly enforced. The crew super- Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi- Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately. Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super- of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em- tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac- ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them- Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be approved by (name of qualified person). I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON (Your company name here) is dedicated to THIS JOB the protection of its employees from on-the- job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec- who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here) This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards. use of conventional fall protection at a num- Controlled Access Zones ber of areas on the project, as well as identifies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven- sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog- a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com- b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains.

351

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00351 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(Your company name here) shall take the (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to ensure that the CAZ is following steps to protect workers who are clearly marked or controlled by the com- exposed to fall hazards while working from petent person: the top plate installing trusses/rafters: • All access to the CAZ must be restricted • Only the following trained workers will to authorized entrants; be allowed to work on the top plate during • All workers who are permitted in the roof truss or rafter installation: CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- llllllllllllllllllllllll tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable llllllllllllllllllllllll by the competent person) prior to implemen- llllllllllllllllllllllll tation; • The competent person shall ensure that • Workers shall have no other duties to all protective elements of the CAZ be imple- perform during truss/rafter erection proce- mented prior to the beginning of work. dures; • All trusses/rafters will be adequately Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/ Rafter Erection rafter as a support; • During the erection and bracing of roof Workers will remain on the top plate trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as may present a greater hazard to workers. On a support while other trusses/rafters are this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal being erected; fall arrest systems will not provide adequate • Workers will leave the area of the se- fall protection because the nets will cause cured trusses only when it is necessary to se- the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- cure another truss/rafter; able attachment or anchorage points for • The first two trusses/rafters will be set guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. from ladders leaning on side walls at points On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- where the walls can support the weight of der for the entire installation process will the ladder; and cause a greater hazard because the worker • A worker will climb onto the interior top must stand on the ladder with his back or plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the side to the front of the ladder. While erecting first two trusses/rafters being set. the truss or rafter the worker will need both The workers responsible for detaching hands to maneuver the truss and therefore trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad- at the peaks traditionally are positioned at ders cannot be adequately protected from the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are movement while trusses are being maneu- also situations where workers securing vered into place. Many workers may experi- rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on ence additional fatigue because of the in- top of the ridge beam. crease in overhead work with heavy mate- (Your company name here) shall take the rials, which can also lead to a greater haz- following steps to protect workers who are ard. exposed to fall hazards while securing truss- Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge this job because the ground, after recent beam: backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding. • Only the following trained workers will In most cases, the erection and dismantling be allowed to work at the peak during roof of the scaffold would expose workers to a truss or rafter installation: greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll On all walls eight feet or less, workers will install interior scaffolds along the interior llllllllllllllllllllllll wall below the location where the trusses/ • Once truss or rafter installation begins, rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds workers not involved in that activity shall constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2x10 not stand or walk below or adjacent to the planks will often allow workers to be ele- roof opening or exterior walls in any area vated high enough to allow for the erection where they could be struck by falling ob- of trusses and rafters without working on jects; the top plate of the wall. • Workers shall have no other duties than In structures that have walls higher than securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam; eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the ladders would create a greater hazard, safe webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam working procedures will be utilized when shall work from a stable position, either by working on the top plate and will be mon- sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent itored by the crew supervisor. During all surface that provides additional stability or stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of by positioning themselves in previously sta- the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and times. reaching through the trusses/rafters;

352

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00352 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

• Workers shall not remain on or in the • Additional slide guards shall be securely peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe- attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- ly complete the task. ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex- Roof Sheathing Operations cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed Workers typically install roof sheathing at four-foot intervals. after all trusses/rafters and any permanent • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are are present, roof sheathing operations shall unstable until some sheathing is installed, so be suspended unless safe footing can be as- workers installing roof sheathing cannot be sured for those workers installing sheathing. protected from fall hazards by conventional • When strong winds (above 40 miles per fall protection systems until it is determined hour) are present, roof sheathing operations that the roofing system can be used as an an- are to be suspended unless wind breakers are chorage point. At that point, employees erected. shall be protected by a personal fall arrest Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing system. Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a During the installation of floor sheathing/ worker falls while attached to a single truss joists (leading edge construction), the fol- with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause lowing steps shall be taken to protect work- collapse, and there is no place to attach ers: guardrails. • Only the following trained workers will All workers will ensure that they have se- be allowed to install floor joists or sheath- cure footing before they attempt to walk on ing: the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots llllllllllllllllllllllll of mud or other slip hazards. llllllllllllllllllllllll To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll posed to a fall hazard, materials will be • Materials for the operations shall be con- staged to allow for the quickest installation veniently staged to allow for easy access to of sheathing. workers; (Your company name here) shall take the • The first floor joists or trusses will be following steps to protect workers who are rolled into position and secured either from exposed to fall hazards while installing roof the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds; sheathing: • Each successive floor joist or truss will • Once roof sheathing installation begins, be rolled into place and secured from a plat- workers not involved in that activity shall form created from a sheet of plywood laid not stand or walk below or adjacent to the over the previously secured floor joists or roof opening or exterior walls in any area trusses; where they could be struck by falling ob- • Except for the first row of sheathing jects; which will be installed from ladders or the • The competent person shall determine ground, workers shall work from the estab- the limits of this area, which shall be clearly lished deck; and communicated to workers prior to place- • Any workers not assisting in the leading ment of the first piece of roof sheathing; edge construction while leading edges still • The competent person may order work exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install- on the roof to be suspended for brief periods ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of as necessary to allow other workers to pass the leading edge under construction. through such areas when this would not create a greater hazard; Erection of Exterior Walls • Only qualified workers shall install roof sheathing; During the construction and erection of ex- • The bottom row of roof sheathing may be terior walls, employers shall take the fol- installed by workers standing in truss webs; lowing steps to protect workers: • After the bottom row of roof sheathing is • Only the following trained workers will installed, a slide guard extending the width be allowed to erect exterior walls: of the roof shall be securely attached to the llllllllllllllllllllllll roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no llllllllllllllllllllllll less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim- llllllllllllllllllllllll iting the uncontrolled slide of workers. • A painted line six feet from the perim- Workers should install the slide guard while eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall standing in truss webs and leaning over the erection activities to warn of the approach- sheathing; ing unprotected edge; • Additional rows of roof sheathing may be • Materials for operations shall be conven- installed by workers positioned on pre- iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide • Workers constructing exterior walls guard can be used to assist workers in re- shall complete as much cutting of materials taining their footing during successive and other preparation as possible away from sheathing operations; and the edge of the deck.

353

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00353 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.550 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

III. ENFORCEMENT minations of a qualified engineer com- Constant awareness of and respect for fall petent in this field and such determina- hazards, and compliance with all safety rules tions will be appropriately documented are considered conditions of employment. and recorded. Attachments used with The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as cranes shall not exceed the capacity, individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- rating, or scope recommended by the partment, reserve the right to issue discipli- manufacturer. nary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the (2) Rated load capacities, and rec- guidelines of this program. ommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, or instruction, shall IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS be conspicuously posted on all equip- All accidents that result in injury to work- ment. Instructions or warnings shall be ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- visible to the operator while he is at tigated and reported. It is an integral part of his control station. any safety program that documentation take (3) [Reserved] place as soon as possible so that the cause (4) Hand signals to crane and derrick and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a reoccurrence. operators shall be those prescribed by In the event that an employee falls or the applicable ANSI standard for the there is some other related, serious incident type of crane in use. An illustration of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- the signals shall be posted at the job termine if additional practices, procedures, site. or training need to be implemented to pre- (5) The employer shall designate a vent similar types of falls or incidents from competent person who shall inspect all occurring. machinery and equipment prior to each V. CHANGES TO PLAN use, and during use, to make sure it is Any changes to the plan will be approved in safe operating condition. Any defi- by (name of the qualified person). This plan ciencies shall be repaired, or defective shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the parts replaced, before continued use. job progresses to determine if additional (6) A thorough, annual inspection of practices, procedures or training needs to be the hoisting machinery shall be made implemented by the competent person to im- by a competent person, or by a govern- prove or provide additional fall protection. ment or private agency recognized by Workers shall be notified and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this the U.S. Department of Labor. The em- plan and all approved changes shall be main- ployer shall maintain a record of the tained at the jobsite. dates and results of inspections for [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] each hoisting machine and piece of equipment. (7) Wire rope shall be taken out of Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, service when any of the following con- Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors ditions exist: (i) In running ropes, six randomly AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours distributed broken wires in one lay or and Safety Standards Act (Construction three broken wires in one strand in one Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- lay; pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 (ii) Wear of one-third the original di- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ameter of outside individual wires. 25059), or 9–83 (49 FR 35736), as applicable. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any Section 1926.550 also issued under 29 CFR other damage resulting in distortion of Part 1911. the rope structure; (iii) Evidence of any heat damage § 1926.550 Cranes and derricks. from any cause; (a) General requirements. (1) The em- (iv) Reductions from nominal diame- ployer shall comply with the manufac- ter of more than one-sixty-fourth inch turer’s specifications and limitations for diameters up to and including five- applicable to the operation of any and sixteenths inch, one-thirty-second inch all cranes and derricks. Where manu- for diameters three-eighths inch to and facturer’s specifications are not avail- including one-half inch, three-sixty- able, the limitations assigned to the fourths inch for diameters nine-six- equipment shall be based on the deter- teenths inch to and including three-

354

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00354 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.550

fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch for di- (14) Fuel tank filler pipe shall be lo- ameters seven-eighths inch to 11⁄8 cated in such a position, or protected inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds in such manner, as to not allow spill or inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in- overflow to run onto the engine, exclusive; haust, or electrical equipment of any (v) In standing ropes, more than two machine being fueled. broken wires in one lay in sections be- (i) An accessible fire extinguisher of yond end connections or more than one 5BC rating, or higher, shall be avail- broken wire at an end connection. able at all operator stations or cabs of (vi) Wire rope safety factors shall be equipment. in accordance with American National (ii) All fuels shall be transported, Standards Institute B30.5–1968 or SAE stored, and handled to meet the rules J959–1966. of subpart F of this part. When fuel is (8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, transported by vehicles on public high- sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, ways, Department of Transportation chains, or other reciprocating, rotat- rules contained in 49 CFR Parts 177 and ing, or other moving parts or equip- 393 concerning such vehicular transpor- ment shall be guarded if such parts are tation are considered applicable. exposed to contact by employees, or (15) Except where electrical distribu- otherwise create a hazard. Guarding tion and transmission lines have been shall meet the requirements of the deenergized and visibly grounded at American National Standards Institute point of work or where insulating bar- B15.1–1958 Rev., Safety Code for Me- riers, not a part of or an attachment to chanical Power Transmission Appa- the equipment or machinery, have been ratus. erected to prevent physical contact (9) Accessible areas within the swing with the lines, equipment or machines radius of the rear of the rotating super- shall be operated proximate to power structure of the crane, either perma- lines only in accordance with the fol- nently or temporarily mounted, shall lowing: be barricaded in such a manner as to (i) For lines rated 50 kV. or below, prevent an employee from being struck minimum clearance between the lines or crushed by the crane. and any part of the crane or load shall (10) All exhaust pipes shall be guard- be 10 feet; ed or insulated in areas where contact (ii) For lines rated over 50 kV., min- by employees is possible in the per- imum clearance between the lines and formance of normal duties. any part of the crane or load shall be 10 (11) Whenever internal combustion feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV. over 50 engine powered equipment exhausts in kV., or twice the length of the line in- enclosed spaces, tests shall be made sulator, but never less than 10 feet; and recorded to see that employees are (iii) In transit with no load and boom not exposed to unsafe concentrations of lowered, the equipment clearance shall toxic gases or oxygen deficient be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages atmospheres. less than 50 kV., and 10 feet for (12) All windows in cabs shall be of voltages over 50 kV., up to and includ- safety glass, or equivalent, that intro- ing 345 kV., and 16 feet for voltages up duces no visible distortion that will to and including 750 kV. interfere with the safe operation of the (iv) A person shall be designated to machine. observe clearance of the equipment and (13) (i) Where necessary for rigging or give timely warning for all operations service requirements, a ladder, or where it is difficult for the operator to steps, shall be provided to give access maintain the desired clearance by vis- to a cab roof. ual means; (ii) Guardrails, handholds, and steps (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu- shall be provided on cranes for easy ac- lating links, or proximity warning de- cess to the car and cab, conforming to vices may be used on cranes, but the American National Standards Institute use of such devices shall not alter the B30.5. requirements of any other regulation (iii) Platforms and walkways shall of this part even if such device is re- have anti-skid surfaces. quired by law or regulation;

355

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00355 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.550 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(vi) Any overhead wire shall be con- belly slings does not constitute compli- sidered to be an energized line unless ance with this rule. and until the person owning such line (2) All crawler, truck, or locomotive or the electrical utility authorities in- cranes in use shall meet the applicable dicate that it is not an energized line requirements for design, inspection, and it has been visibly grounded; construction, testing, maintenance and (vii) Prior to work near transmitter operation as prescribed in the ANSI towers where an electrical charge can B30.5–1968, Safety Code for Crawler, Lo- be induced in the equipment or mate- comotive and Truck Cranes. However, rials being handled, the transmitter the written, dated, and signed inspec- shall be de-energized or tests shall be tion reports and records of the monthly made to determine if electrical charge inspection of critical items prescribed is induced on the crane. The following in section 5–2.1.5 of the ANSI B30.5–1968 precautions shall be taken when nec- standard are not required. Instead, the essary to dissipate induced voltages: employer shall prepare a certification (a) The equipment shall be provided record which includes the date the with an electrical ground directly to crane items were inspected; the signa- the upper rotating structure sup- ture of the person who inspected the porting the boom; and crane items; and a serial number, or (b) Ground jumper cables shall be at- other identifier, for the crane in- tached to materials being handled by spected. The most recent certification boom equipment when electrical record shall be maintained on file until charge is induced while working near a new one is prepared. energized transmitters. Crews shall be (c) Hammerhead tower cranes. (1) Ade- provided with nonconductive poles hav- quate clearance shall be maintained ing large alligator clips or other simi- between moving and rotating struc- lar protection to attach the ground tures of the crane and fixed objects to cable to the load. allow the passage of employees without (c) Combustible and flammable mate- harm. rials shall be removed from the imme- (2) Each employee required to per- diate area prior to operations. form duties on the horizontal boom of (16) No modifications or additions hammerhead tower cranes shall be pro- which affect the capacity or safe oper- tected against falling by guardrails or ation of the equipment shall be made by a personal fall arrest system in con- by the employer without the manufac- formance with subpart M of this part. turer’s written approval. If such modi- (3) Buffers shall be provided at both fications or changes are made, the ca- ends of travel of the trolley. pacity, operation, and maintenance in- (4) Cranes mounted on rail tracks struction plates, tags, or decals, shall shall be equipped with limit switches be changed accordingly. In no case limiting the travel of the crane on the shall the original safety factor of the track and stops or buffers at each end equipment be reduced. of the tracks. (17) The employer shall comply with (5) All hammerhead tower cranes in Power Crane and Shovel Association use shall meet the applicable require- Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standard No. ments for design, construction, instal- 2. lation, testing, maintenance, inspec- (18) Sideboom cranes mounted on tion, and operation as prescribed by wheel or crawler tractors shall meet the manufacturer. the requirements of SAE J743a–1964. (d) Overhead and gantry cranes. (1) (19) All employees shall be kept clear The rated load of the crane shall be of loads about to be lifted and of sus- plainly marked on each side of the pended loads. crane, and if the crane has more than (b) Crawler, locomotive, and truck one hoisting unit, each hoist shall have cranes. (1) All jibs shall have positive its rated load marked on it or its load stops to prevent their movement of block, and this marking shall be clear- more than 5° above the straight line of ly legible from the ground or floor. the jib and boom on conventional type (2) Bridge trucks shall be equipped crane booms. The use of cable type with sweeps which extend below the

356

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00356 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.550

top of the rail and project in front of tion of employees working onboard ma- the truck wheels. rine vessels specified in § 1926.605. (3) Except for floor-operated cranes, a (g) Crane or derrick suspended per- gong or other effective audible warning sonnel platforms—(1) Scope, application signal shall be provided for each crane and definitions—(i) Scope and applica- equipped with a power traveling mech- tion. This standard applies to the de- anism. sign, construction, testing, use and (4) All overhead and gantry cranes in maintenance of personnel platforms, use shall meet the applicable require- and the hoisting of personnel platforms ments for design, construction, instal- on the load lines of cranes or derricks. lation, testing, maintenance, inspec- (ii) Definitions. For the purposes of tion, and operation as prescribed in the this paragraph (g), the following defini- ANSI B30.2.0–1967, Safety Code for tions apply: Overhead and Gantry Cranes. (A) Failure means load refusal, break- (e) Derricks. All derricks in use shall age, or separation of components. meet the applicable requirements for (B) Hoist (or hoisting) means all design, construction, installation, in- crane or derrick functions such as low- spection, testing, maintenance, and op- ering, lifting, swinging, booming in and eration as prescribed in American Na- out or up and down, or suspending a tional Standards Institute B30.6–1969, personnel platform. Safety Code for Derricks. (C) Load refusal means the point (f) Floating cranes and derricks—(1) where the ultimate strength is exceed- Mobile cranes mounted on barges. (i) ed. When a mobile crane is mounted on a (D) Maximum intended load means the barge, the rated load of the crane shall total load of all employees, tools, ma- not exceed the original capacity speci- terials, and other loads reasonably an- fied by the manufacturer. ticipated to be applied to a personnel platform or personnel platform compo- (ii) A load rating chart, with clearly nent at any one time. legible letters and figures, shall be pro- (E) Runway means a firm, level sur- vided with each crane, and securely face designed, prepared and designated fixed at a location easily visible to the as a path of travel for the weight and operator. configuration of the crane being used (iii) When load ratings are reduced to to lift and travel with the crane sus- stay within the limits for list of the pended platform. An existing surface barge with a crane mounted on it, a may be used as long as it meets these new load rating chart shall be pro- criteria. vided. (2) General requirements. The use of a (iv) Mobile cranes on barges shall be crane or derrick to hoist employees on positively secured. a personnel platform is prohibited, ex- (2) Permanently mounted floating cept when the erection, use, and dis- cranes and derricks. (i) When cranes and mantling of conventional means of derricks are permanently installed on a reaching the worksite, such as a per- barge, the capacity and limitations of sonnel hoist, ladder, stairway, aerial use shall be based on competent design lift, elevating work platform or scaf- criteria. fold, would be more hazardous, or is (ii) A load rating chart with clearly not possible because of structural de- legible letters and figures shall be pro- sign or worksite conditions. vided and securely fixed at a location (3) Cranes and derricks—(i) Operational easily visible to the operator. criteria. (A) Hoisting of the personnel (iii) Floating cranes and floating der- platform shall be performed in a slow, ricks in use shall meet the applicable controlled, cautious manner with no requirements for design, construction, sudden movements of the crane or der- installation, testing, maintenance, and rick, or the platform. operation as prescribed by the manu- (B) Load lines shall be capable of sup- facturer. porting, without failure, at least seven (3) Protection of employees working on times the maximum intended load, ex- barges. The employer shall comply with cept that where rotation resistant rope the applicable requirements for protec- is used, the lines shall be capable of

357

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00357 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.550 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

supporting without failure, at least ten trolled load lowering.) Free fall is pro- times the maximum intended load. The hibited. required design factor is achieved by (4) Personnel platforms—(i) Design cri- taking the current safety factor of 3.5 teria. (A) The personnel platform and (required under paragraph (b)(2)) of this suspension system shall be designed by section and applying the 50 per cent de- a qualified engineer or a qualified per- rating of the crane capacity which is son competent in structural design. required by paragraph (g)(3)(i)(F) of (B) The suspension system shall be this section. designed to minimize tipping of the (C) Load and boom hoist drum platform due to movement of employ- brakes, swing brakes, and locking de- ees occupying the platform. vices such as pawls or dogs shall be en- (C) The personnel platform itself, ex- gaged when the occupied personnel cept the guardrail system and personal platform is in a stationary working po- fall arrest system anchorages, shall be sition. capable of supporting, without failure, (D) The crane shall be uniformly its own weight and at least five times level within one percent of level grade the maximum intended load. Criteria and located on firm footing. Cranes for guardrail systems and personal fall equipped with outriggers shall have arrest system anchorages are con- them all fully deployed following man- tained in subpart M of this Part. ufacturer’s specifications, insofar as (ii) Platform specifications. (A) Each applicable, when hoisting employees. personnel platform shall be equipped (E) The total weight of the loaded with a guardrail system which meets personnel platform and related rigging the requirements of subpart M, and, shall not exceed 50 percent of the rated shall be enclosed at least from the capaciy for the radius and configura- toeboard to mid-rail with either solid tion of the crane or derrick. construction or expanded metal having (F) The use of machines having live openings no greater than 1⁄2 inch (1.27 booms (booms in which lowering is con- cm). trolled by a brake without aid from (B) A grab rail shall be installed in- other devices which slow the lowering side the entire perimeter of the per- speeds) is prohibited. sonnel platform. (ii) Instruments and components. (A) (C) Access gates, if installed, shall Cranes and derricks with variable not swing outward during hoisting. angle booms shall be equipped with a (D) Access gates, including sliding or boom angle indicator, readily visible to folding gates, shall be equipped with a the operator. restraining device to prevent acci- (B) Cranes with telescoping booms dental opening. shall be equipped with a device to indi- (E) Headroom shall be provided which cate clearly to the operator, at all allows employees to stand upright in times, the boom’s extended length, or the platform. an accurate determination of the load (F) In addition to the use of hard radius to be used during the lift shall hats, employees shall be protected by be made prior to hoisting personnel. overhead protection on the personnel (C) A positive acting device shall be platform when employees are exposed used which prevents contact between to falling objects. the load block or overhaul ball and the (G) All rough edges exposed to con- boom tip (anti-two-blocking device), or tact by employees shall be surfaced or a system shall be used which deacti- smoothed in order to prevent injury to vates the hoisting action before dam- employees from punctures or lacera- age occurs in the event of a two-block- tions. ing situation (two block damage pre- (H) All welding of the personnel plat- vention feature). form and its components shall be per- (D) The load line hoist drum shall formed by a qualified welder familiar have a system or device on the power with the weld grades, types and mate- train, other than the load hoist brake, rial specified in the platform design. which regulates the lowering rate of (I) The personnel platform shall be speed of the hoist mechanism (con- conspicuously posted with a plate or

358

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00358 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.550

other permanent marking which indi- platform and the necessary employees, cates the weight of the platform and their tools and the materials necessary its rated load capacity or maximum in- to do their work, and shall not be used tended load. for any other purpose when not hoist- (iii) Personnel platform loading. (A) ing personnel. The personnel platform shall not be (5) Trial lift, inspection, and proof test- loaded in excess of its rated load capac- ing. (i) A trial lift with the unoccupied ity. When a personnel platform does personnel platform loaded at least to not have a rated load capacity then the the anticipated liftweight shall be personnel platform shall not be loaded made from ground level, or any other in excess of its maximum intended location where employees will enter load. the platform, to each location at which (B) The number of employees occu- the personnel platform is to be hoisted pying the personnel platform shall not and positioned. This trial lift shall be exceed the number required for the performed immediately prior to plac- work being performed. ing personnel on the platform. The op- (C) Personnel platforms shall be used erator shall determine that all sys- only for employees, their tools, and the tems, controls and safety devices are materials necessary to do their work, activated and functioning properly; and shall not be used to hoist only ma- that no interferences exist; and that all terials or tools when not hoisting per- configurations necessary to reach sonnel. those work locations will allow the op- (D) Materials and tools for use during erator to remain under the 50 percent a personnel lift shall be secured to pre- limit of the hoist’s rated capacity. Ma- vent displacement. terials and tools to be used during the (E) Materials and tools for use during actual lift can be loaded in the plat- a personnel lift shall be evenly distrib- form, as provided in paragraphs uted within the confines of the plat- (g)(4)(iii) (D), and (E) of this section for form while the platform is suspended. the trial lift. A single trial lift may be (iv) Rigging. (A) When a wire rope bri- performed at one time for all locations dle is used to connect the personnel that are to be reached from a single set platform to the load line, each bridle up position. leg shall be connected to a master link (ii) The trial lift shall be repeated or shackle in such a manner to ensure prior to hoisting employees whenever that the load is evenly divided among the crane or derrick is moved and set the bridle legs. up in a new location or returned to a (B) Hooks on overhaul ball assem- previously used location. Additionally, blies, lower load blocks, or other at- the trial lift shall be repeated when the tachment assemblies shall be of a type lift route is changed unless the oper- that can be closed and locked, elimi- ator determines that the route change nating the hook throat opening. Alter- is not significant (i.e. the route change natively, an alloy anchor type shackle would not affect the safety of hoisted with a bolt, nut and retaining pin may employees.) be used. (iii) After the trial lift, and just prior (C) Wire rope, shackles, rings, master to hoisting personnel, the platform links, and other rigging hardware must shall be hoisted a few inches and in- be capable of supporting, without fail- spected to ensure that it is secure and ure, at least five times the maximum properly balanced. Employees shall not intended load applied or transmitted to be hoisted unless the following condi- that component. Where rotation resist- tions are determined to exist: ant rope is used, the slings shall be ca- (A) Hoist ropes shall be free of kinks; pable of supporting without failure at (B) Multiple part lines shall not be least ten times the maximum intended twisted around each other; load. (C) The primary attachment shall be (D) All eyes in wire rope slings shall centered over the platform; and be fabricated with thimbles. (D) The hoisting system shall be in- (E) Bridles and associated rigging for spected if the load rope is slack to en- attaching the personnel platform to sure all ropes are properly stated on the hoist line shall be used only for the drums and in sheaves.

359

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00359 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.550 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(iv) A visual inspection of the crane a signal person would create a greater or derrick, rigging, personnel platform, hazard for that person, direct commu- and the crane or derrick base support nication alone such as by radio may be or ground shall be conducted by a com- used. petent person immediately after the (vii) Except over water, employees trial lift to determine whether the occupying the personnel platform shall testing has exposed any defect or pro- use a body belt/harness system with duced any adverse effect upon any com- lanyard appropriately attached to the ponent or structure. lower load block or overhaul ball, or to (v) Any defects found during inspec- a structural member within the per- tions which create a safety hazard sonnel platform capable of supporting a shall be corrected before hoisting per- fall impact for employees using the an- sonnel. chorage. When working over water, the (vi) At each job site, prior to hoisting requirements of § 1926.106 shall apply. employees on the personnel platform, (viii) No lifts shall be made on an- and after any repair or modification, other of the crane’s or derrick’s the platform and rigging shall be proof loadlines while personnel are sus- tested to 125 percent of the platform’s pended on a platform. rated capacity by holding it in a sus- (7) Traveling. (i) Hoisting of employ- pended position for five minutes with ees while the crane is traveling is pro- the test load evenly distributed on the hibited, except for portal, tower and lo- platform (this may be done concur- comotive cranes, or where the em- rently with the trial lift). After ployer demonstrates that there is no prooftesting, a competent person shall less hazardous way to perform the inspect the platform and rigging. Any work. deficiencies found shall be corrected (ii) Under any circumstances where a and another proof test shall be con- crane would travel while hoisting per- ducted. Personnel hoisting shall not be sonnel, the employer shall implement conducted until the proof testing re- the following procedures to safeguard quirements are satisfied. employees: (6) Work practices. (i) Employees shall (A) Crane travel shall be restricted to keep all parts of the body inside the a fixed track or runway; platform during raising, lowering, and (B) Travel shall be limited to the positioning. This provision does not load radius of the boom used during the apply to an occupant of the platform lift; and performing the duties of a signal per- (C) The boom must be parallel to the son. direction of travel. (ii) Before employees exit or enter a (D) A complete trial run shall be per- hoisted personnel platform that is not formed to test the route of travel be- landed, the platform shall be secured to fore employees are allowed to occupy the structure where the work is to be the platform. This trial run can be per- performed, unless securing to the formed at the same time as the trial structure creates an unsafe situation. lift required by paragraph (g)(5)(i) of (iii) Tag lines shall be used unless this section which tests the route of their use creates an unsafe condition. the lift. (iv) The crane or derrick operator (E) If travel is done with a rubber shall remain at the controls at all tired-carrier, the condition and air times when the crane engine is running pressure of the tires shall be checked. and the platform is occupied. The chart capacity for lifts on rubber (v) Hoisting of employees shall be shall be used for application of the 50 promptly discontinued upon indication percent reduction of rated capacity. of any dangerous weather conditions or Notwithstanding paragraph (g)(3)(i)(E) other impending danger. of this section, outriggers may be par- (vi) Employees being hoisted shall re- tially retracted as necessary for travel. main in continuous sight of and in di- (8) Pre-lift meeting. (i) A meeting at- rect communication with the operator tended by the crane or derrick oper- or signal person. In those situations ator, signal person(s) (if necessary for where direct visual contact with the the lift), employee(s) to be lifted, and operator is not possible, and the use of the person responsible for the task to

360

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00360 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.551

be performed shall be held to review vide for the protection of the employ- the appropriate requirements of para- ees from flying objects in the rotor graph (g) of this section and the proce- downwash. All loose gear within 100 dures to be followed. feet of the place of lifting the load, de- (ii) This meeting shall be held prior positing the load, and all other areas to the trial lift at each new work loca- susceptible to rotor downwash shall be tion, and shall be repeated for any em- secured or removed. ployees newly assigned to the oper- (g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping ation. shall be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, (h) Operator responsibility. The heli- 1987; 53 FR 29139, Aug. 2, 1988; 54 FR 15406, copter operator shall be responsible for Apr. 18, 1989; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR size, weight, and manner in which 35183, June 30, 1993; 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994; loads are connected to the helicopter. 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] If, for any reason, the helicopter operator believes the lift cannot be made § 1926.551 Helicopters. safely, the lift shall not be made. (a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When cranes shall be expected to comply employees are required to perform with any applicable regulations of the work under hovering craft, a safe Federal Aviation Administration. means of access shall be provided for (b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- employees to reach the hoist line hook ation a briefing shall be conducted. and engage or disengage cargo slings. This briefing shall set forth the plan of Employees shall not perform work operation for the pilot and ground per- under hovering craft except when nec- sonnel. essary to hook or unhook loads. (c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be (j) Static charge. Static charge on the properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a suspended load shall be dissipated with length that will not permit their being a grounding device before ground per- drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve, sonnel touch the suspended load, or swedged eyes, or equivalent means protective rubber gloves shall be worn shall be used for all freely suspended by all ground personnel touching the loads to prevent hand splices from suspended load. spinning open or cable clamps from (k) Weight limitation. The weight of an loosening. external load shall not exceed the man- (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper- ufacturer’s rating. ated cargo hooks shall have the elec- (l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other trical activating device so designed and gear, except for pulling lines or con- installed as to prevent inadvertent op- ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ eration. In addition, these cargo hooks from a container or roll off a reel, shall shall be equipped with an emergency not be attached to any fixed ground mechanical control for releasing the structure, or allowed to foul on any load. The hooks shall be tested prior to fixed structure. each day’s operation to determine that (m) Visibility. When visibility is re- the release functions properly, both duced by dust or other conditions, electrically and mechanically. ground personnel shall exercise special (e) Personal protective equipment. (1) caution to keep clear of main and sta- Personal protective equipment for em- bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also ployees receiving the load shall consist be taken by the employer to eliminate of complete eye protection and hard as far as practical reduced visibility. hats secured by chinstraps. (n) Signal systems. Signal systems be- (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to tween aircrew and ground personnel flap in the downwash, and thus be shall be understood and checked in ad- snagged on hoist line, shall not be vance of hoisting the load. This applies worn. to either radio or hand signal systems. (f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac- Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig- tical precaution shall be taken to pro- ure N–1.

361

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00361 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.551 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot

362

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00362 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.552

and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches. cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu- work there. facturers’ recommendations. (q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited. for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro- (r) Communications. There shall be hibited. constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist. a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con- (s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state- mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’ such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride downwash. on material hoists except for the purposes of inspection and maintenance. § 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways hoists, and elevators. shall be protected by substantial gates (a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint- applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors, and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes. specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4- limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo- shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line. a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36 the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above (2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor. ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en- cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device. (3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2- service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent (i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat- lay or three broken wires in one strand form. in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist- (ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick. the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec- (iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength. sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How- wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen, (iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met: inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en- for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of

363

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00363 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.552 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

1⁄2-inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or (6) A door or gate shall be provided at equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall (ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening. be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2- for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist. enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open. at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stopping and holding the car and rated load (6) Car arresting devices shall be in- when traveling at governor tripping stalled to function in case of rope fail- speed. ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca- (7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con- designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead. gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines (8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive. to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop- Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided. Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall (c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’ for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists. entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist- closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch. floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors: closed to a height of 10 feet above the level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION (2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of (3) Towers shall be anchored to the safety structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ...... 7.60 feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 75 ...... 7.75 100 ...... 7.95 guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ...... 8.10 are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ...... 8.25 chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ...... 8.40 200 ...... 8.60 rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ...... 8.75 securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ...... 8.90 sure stability. 300 ...... 9.20 350 ...... 9.50 (4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ...... 9.75 not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ...... 10.00 shall be provided with mechanical 500 ...... 10.25 550 ...... 10.45 locks which cannot be operated from 600 ...... 10.70 the landing side, and shall be accessible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection (5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv- closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func- sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent

364

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00364 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.553

person. A similar inspection and test is (c) Evidence of any heat damage from required following major alteration of any cause; an existing installation. All hoists (d) Reductions from nominal diame- shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8 spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in- nature of the person who performed the clusive; inspection and test; and a serial num- (e) In standing ropes, more than two ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be- that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection. be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the (16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require- specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969, American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord- 1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967. paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to canti- lever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (17) (i) Personnel hoists used in 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, 1987] bridge tower construction shall be approved by a registered professional en- § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists. gineer and erected under the supervision of a qualified engineer com- (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed petent in this field. moving parts such as gears, projecting (ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat- be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard, for the full height between the floor shall be guarded. and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor- with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta- enclosure shall include the required tion. gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists (iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with: and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position; (iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed service when any of the following con- preventive device; ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper- (a) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in- distributed broken wires in one lay or effective. three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in lay; use shall meet the applicable require- (b) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal- ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte- Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer. the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]

365

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00365 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.554 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

§ 1926.554 Overhead hoists. suitable signs, as required by subpart G of this part. (a) General requirements. (1) The safe (7) Conveyors shall be locked out or working load of the overhead hoist, as otherwise rendered inoperable, and determined by the manufacturer, shall tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’ be indicated on the hoist, and this safe tag during repairs and when operation working load shall not be exceeded. is hazardous to employees performing (2) The supporting structure to which maintenance work. the hoist is attached shall have a safe (8) All conveyors in use shall meet working load equal to that of the hoist. the applicable requirements for design, (3) The support shall be arranged so construction, inspection, testing, as to provide for free movement of the maintenance, and operation, as pre- hoist and shall not restrict the hoist scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety from lining itself up with the load. Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and (4) The hoist shall be installed only Related Equipment. in locations that will permit the operator to stand clear of the load at all times. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, (5) Air hoists shall be connected to an Mechanized Equipment, and air supply of sufficient capacity and Marine Operations pressure to safely operate the hoist. All air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con- coming disconnected during use. struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, (6) All overhead hoists in use shall 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of meet the applicable requirements for 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La- construction, design, installation, test- bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. Section ation, as prescribed by the manufac- 1926.602 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. turer. (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] § 1926.600 Equipment. (a) General requirements. (1) All equip- § 1926.555 Conveyors. ment left unattended at night, adja- (a) General requirements. (1) Means for cent to a highway in normal use, or ad- stopping the motor or engine shall be jacent to construction areas where provided at the operator’s station. Con- work is in progress, shall have appro- veyor systems shall be equipped with priate lights or reflectors, or barri- an audible warning signal to be sound- cades equipped with appropriate lights ed immediately before starting up the or reflectors, to identify the location of conveyor. the equipment. (2) If the operator’s station is at a re- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv- mote point, similar provisions for stop- alent protection shall be provided and ping the motor or engine shall be pro- used when inflating, mounting, or dis- vided at the motor or engine location. mounting tires installed on split rims, (3) Emergency stop switches shall be or rims equipped with locking rings or arranged so that the conveyor cannot similar devices. be started again until the actuating (3) (i) Heavy machinery, equipment, stop switch has been reset to running or parts thereof, which are suspended or ‘‘on’’ position. or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or (4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded jacks shall be substantially blocked or to prevent employee contact with turn- cribbed to prevent falling or shifting ing flights. before employees are permitted to (5) Where a conveyor passes over work under or between them. Bulldozer work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares, and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, suitable guards shall be provided to dump bodies, and similar equipment, protect employees required to work shall be either fully lowered or blocked below the conveyors. when being repaired or when not in (6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage- use. All controls shall be in a neutral ways shall be conspicuously marked by position, with the motors stopped and

366

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00366 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.601

brakes set, unless work being per- (4) No employer shall use any motor formed requires otherwise. vehicle equipment having an ob- (ii) Whenever the equipment is structed view to the rear unless: parked, the parking brake shall be set. (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal Equipment parked on inclines shall alarm audible above the surrounding have the wheels chocked and the park- noise level or: ing brake set. (ii) The vehicle is backed up only (4) The use, care and charging of all when an observer signals that it is safe batteries shall conform to the require- to do so. ments of subpart K of this part. (5) All vehicles with cabs shall be (5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, equipped with windshields and powered or equivalent, that introduces no visi- wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall ble distortion affecting the safe oper- be replaced. Vehicles operating in ation of any machine covered by this areas or under conditions that cause subpart. fogging or frosting of the windshields (6) All equipment covered by this shall be equipped with operable subpart shall comply with the require- defogging or defrosting devices. ments of § 1926.550(a)(15) when working (6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay or being moved in the vicinity of power load is loaded by means of cranes, lines or energized transmitters. power shovels, loaders, or similar (7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or equipment, shall have a cab shield and/ bumper blocks shall be provided on or canopy adequate to protect the oper- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car ator from shifting or falling materials. could contact other cars being worked, (7) Tools and material shall be se- enter a building, work or traffic area. cured to prevent movement when (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] transported in the same compartment [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, with employees. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] (8) Vehicles used to transport employees shall have seats firmly secured § 1926.601 Motor vehicles. and adequate for the number of em- (a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov- ployees to be carried. ered by this part are those vehicles (9) Seat belts and anchorages meet- that operate within an off-highway job- ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571 site, not open to public traffic. The re- (Department of Transportation, Fed- quirements of this section do not apply eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards) to equipment for which rules are pre- shall be installed in all motor vehicles. scribed in § 1926.602. (10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be (b) General requirements. (1) All vehi- equipped with positive means of sup- cles shall have a service brake system, port, permanently attached, and capa- an emergency brake system, and a ble of being locked in position to pre- parking brake system. These systems vent accidental lowering of the body may use common components, and while maintenance or inspection work shall be maintained in operable condi- is being done. tion. (11) Operating levers controlling (2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions hoisting or dumping devices on haulage warrant additional light, all vehicles, bodies shall be equipped with a latch or or combinations of vehicles, in use other device which will prevent acci- shall be equipped with at least two dental starting or tripping of the mech- headlights and two taillights in oper- anism. able condition. (12) Trip handles for tailgates of (ii) All vehicles, or combination of dump trucks shall be so arranged that, vehicles, shall have brake lights in opin dumping, the operator will be in the erable condition regardless of light clear. conditions. (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle (3) All vehicles shall be equipped with equipment manufactured on or after an adequate audible warning device at May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with the operator’s station and in an oper- fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle able condition. equipment manufactured before May 1,

367

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00367 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.602 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

1972, shall be equipped with fenders not (3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No later than May 1, 1973. employer shall move or cause to be (ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of moved construction equipment or vehi- fenders whenever motor vehicle equip- cles upon any access roadway or grade ment is not designed for fenders. unless the access roadway or grade is (14) All vehicles in use shall be constructed and maintained to accom- checked at the beginning of each shift modate safely the movement of the to assure that the following parts, equipment and vehicles involved. equipment, and accessories are in safe (ii) Every emergency access ramp operating condition and free of appar- and berm used by an employer shall be ent damage that could cause failure constructed to restrain and control while in use: service brakes, including runaway vehicles. trailer brake connections; parking sys- (4) Brakes. All earthmoving equipment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a) tem (hand brake); emergency stopping shall have a service braking system ca- system (brakes); tires; horn; steering pable of stopping and holding the mechanism; coupling devices; seat equipment fully loaded, as specified in belts; operating controls; and safety Society of Automotive Engineers SAE– devices. All defects shall be corrected J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders– before the vehicle is placed in service. 1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake These requirements also apply to systems for self-propelled rubber-tired equipment such as lights, reflectors, off-highway equipment manufactured windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex- after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap- tinguishers, etc., where such equip- plicable minimum performance criteria ment is necessary. set forth in the following Society of Automotive Engineers Recommended § 1926.602 Material handling equip- Practices: ment. Self-Propelled Scrapers ...... SAE J319b±1971. (a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1) Self-Propelled Graders ...... SAE J236±1971. Trucks and Wagons ...... SAE J166±1971. These rules apply to the following Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237±1971. types of earthmoving equipment: scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel (5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth- tractors, bulldozers, off-highway moving haulage equipment (trucks, trucks, graders, agricultural and indus- scrapers, tractors, and trailing units) trial tractors, and similar equipment. whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles The promulgation of specific rules for per hour, shall be equipped with fend- compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid- ers on all wheels to meet the require- steer’’ equipment is reserved pending ments of Society of Automotive Engi- neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for consideration of standards currently Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage being developed. Equipment. An employer may, of (2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be course, at any time seek to show under provided on all equipment covered by § 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials. Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection. ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off- neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc- Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved (ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop- for equipment which is designed only ment. for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and (iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section, roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1, or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer

368

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00368 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.602

after that date, shall comply with the the normal seating arrangement for applicable rules prescribed therein contractor operation, even though back- cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment hoes, breakers, or other similar attach- mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5) ments are used on these machines for of this section, and manufactured be- excavating or other work. fore January 1, 1972, which is used by (2) For the purposes of this subpart any employer after that date, shall and of subpart N of this part, the no- meet the applicable rules prescribed menclatures and descriptions for meas- herein not later than June 30, 1973. It urement of dimensions of machinery should be noted that, as permitted and attachments shall be as described under § 1926.2, employers may request in Society of Automotive Engineers variations from the applicable brakes 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103. and fender standards required by this (3) The safety requirements, ratios, subpart. Employers wishing to seek or limitations applicable to machines variations from the applicable brakes or attachment usage covered in Power and fenders rules may submit any re- Crane and Shovel Associations Stand- quests for variations after the publica- ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 tion of this document in the FEDERAL of 1969, shall be complied with, and REGISTER. Any statements intending to shall apply to cranes, machines, and meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4), attachments under this part. should specify how the variation would (c) Lifting and hauling equipment protect the safety of the employees by (other than equipment covered under sub- providing for any compensating re- part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks strictions on the operation of equip- shall meet the requirements of ment. § 1926.600 and the following: (ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of (i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this have the rated capacity clearly posted section, the requirement that fenders on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi- be installed on pneumatic-tired ble to the operator. When auxiliary re- earthmoving haulage equipment, is movable counterweights are provided suspended pending reconsideration of by the manufacturer, corresponding al- the requirement. ternate rated capacities also shall be (9) Audible alarms. (i) All clearly shown on the vehicle. These bidirectional machines, such as rollers, ratings shall not be exceeded. compacters, front-end loaders, bull- (ii) No modifications or additions dozers, and similar equipment, shall be which affect the capacity or safe oper- equipped with a horn, distinguishable ation of the equipment shall be made from the surrounding noise level, without the manufacturer’s written ap- which shall be operated as needed when proval. If such modifications or the machine is moving in either direc- changes are made, the capacity, oper- tion. The horn shall be maintained in ation, and maintenance instruction an operative condition. plates, tags, or decals shall be changed (ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi- earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be which has an obstructed view to the reduced. rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor- verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity. employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall so. not be attached to the steering wheel (10) Scissor points. Scissor points on unless the steering mechanism is of a all front-end loaders, which constitute type that prevents road reactions from a hazard to the operator during normal causing the steering handwheel to spin. operation, shall be guarded. The steering knob shall be mounted (b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) within the periphery of the wheel. Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of (v) All high lift rider industrial this section shall have seat belts as re- trucks shall be equipped with overhead quired for the operators when seated in guards which meet the configuration

369

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00369 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.603 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and structural requirements as defined and which meets the requirements of in paragraph 421 of American National subpart N of this part, shall be pro- Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety vided. Protection shall be the equiva- Standards for Powered Industrial lent of 2-inch planking or other solid Trucks. material of equivalent strength. (vi) All industrial trucks in use shall (4) Stop blocks shall be provided for meet the applicable requirements of the leads to prevent the hammer from design, construction, stability, inspec- being raised against the head block. tion, testing, maintenance, and oper- (5) A blocking device, capable of safe- ation, as defined in American National Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety ly supporting the weight of the ham- Standards for Powered Industrial mer, shall be provided for placement in Trucks. the leads under the hammer at all (vii) Unauthorized personnel shall times while employees are working not be permitted to ride on powered in- under the hammer. dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride (6) Guards shall be provided across shall be provided where riding of the top of the head block to prevent trucks is authorized. the cable from jumping out of the (viii) Whenever a truck is equipped sheaves. with vertical only, or vertical and hori- (7) When the leads must be inclined zontal controls elevatable with the lift- in the driving of batter piles, provi- ing carriage or forks for lifting per- sions shall be made to stabilize the sonnel, the following additional pre- leads. cautions shall be taken for the protec- (8) Fixed leads shall be provided with tion of personnel being elevated. ladder, and adequate rings, or similar (A) Use of a safety platform firmly attachment points, so that the loft secured to the lifting carriage and/or worker may engage his safety belt lan- forks. yard to the leads. If the leads are pro- (B) Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can shut off vided with loft platforms(s), such plat- power to the truck. form(s) shall be protected by standard (C) Such protection from falling ob- guardrails. jects as indicated necessary by the op- (9) Steam hose leading to a steam erating conditions shall be provided. hammer or jet pipe shall be securely (d) Powered industrial truck operator attached to the hammer with an ade- training. quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diameter chain or cable to prevent whipping NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this paragraph are in the event the joint at the hammer is identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro- this chapter. vided with the same protection as re- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, quired for steam lines. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; (10) Safety chains, or equivalent 63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] means, shall be provided for each hose connection to prevent the line from § 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. thrashing around in case the coupling (a) General requirements. (1) Boilers becomes disconnected. and piping systems which are a part of, (11) Steam line controls shall consist or used with, pile driving equipment of two shutoff valves, one of which shall meet the applicable requirements shall be a quick-acting lever type with- of the American Society of Mechanical in easy reach of the hammer operator. Engineers, Power Boilers (section I). (12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or (2) All pressure vessels which are a counterbalances shall be provided as part of, or used with, pile driving equipment shall meet the applicable necessary to maintain stability of pile requirements of the American Society driver rigs. of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- (b) Pile driving from barges and floats. sels (section VIII). Barges or floats supporting pile driving (3) Overhead protection, which will operations shall meet the applicable not obscure the vision of the operator requirements of § 1926.605.

370

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00370 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.605

(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi- of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring neers and winchmen shall accept sig- operations’’ means the loading, unload- nals only from the designated signaling, moving, or handling of construc- men. tion materials, equipment and supplies, (2) All employees shall be kept clear etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel when piling is being hoisted into the from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves- leads. sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure (3) When piles are being driven in an or vessel-to-vessel. excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall (b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac- be sloped to the angle of repose or cess of vehicles to or between barges sheet-piled and braced. shall be of adequate strength, provided (4) When steel tube piles are being with side boards, well maintained, and ‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept properly secured. well beyond the range of falling mate- (2) Unless employees can step safely rials. to or from the wharf, float, barge, or (5) When it is necessary to cut off the river towboat, either a ramp, meeting tops of driven piles, pile driving oper- the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of ations shall be suspended except where this section, or a safe walkway, shall the cutting operations are located at be provided. least twice the length of the longest (3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the pile from the driver. double rung or flat tread type. They (6) When driving jacked piles, all ac- shall be well maintained and properly cess pits shall be provided with ladders secured. and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate- (4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang rial from falling into the pit. without slack from its lashings or be § 1926.604 Site clearing. pulled up entirely. (5) When the upper end of the means (a) General requirements. (1) Employ- of access rests on or is flush with the ees engaged in site clearing shall be top of the bulwark, substantial steps protected from hazards of irritant and properly secured and equipped with at toxic plants and suitably instructed in least one substantial hand rail approxi- the first aid treatment available. mately 33 inches in height, shall be (2) All equipment used in site clear- provided between the top of the bul- ing operations shall be equipped with wark and the deck. rollover guards meeting the require- (6) Obstructions shall not be laid on ments of this subpart. In addition, or across the gangway. rider-operated equipment shall be equipped with an overhead and rear (7) The means of access shall be ade- canopy guard meeting the following re- quately illuminated for its full length. quirements: (8) Unless the structure makes it im- (i) The overhead covering on this possible, the means of access shall be canopy structure shall be of not less so located that the load will not pass over employees. than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh with openings no (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em- greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. ployees shall not be permitted to walk (ii) The opening in the rear of the along the sides of covered lighters or canopy structure shall be covered with barges with coamings more than 5 feet not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh high, unless there is a 3-foot clear with openings no greater than 1 inch. walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] handline is provided. (2) Decks and other working surfaces § 1926.605 Marine operations and shall be maintained in a safe condition. equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted (a) Material handling operations. (1) to pass fore and aft, over, or around Operations fitting the definition of deckloads, unless there is a safe pas- ‘‘material handling’’ shall be per- sage. formed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage.

371

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00371 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.606 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

If it is necessary to stand at the out- 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable, and board or inboard edge of the deckload 29 CFR part 1911. where less than 24 inches of bulwark, SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless rail, coaming, or other protection ex- otherwise noted. ists, all employees shall be provided with a suitable means of protection § 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi- against falling from the deckload. nitions applicable to this subpart. (d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment. (a) Scope and application. This sub- (1) Provisions for rendering first aid part applies to all open excavations and medical assistance shall be in ac- made in the earth’s surface. Exca- cordance with subpart D of this part. vations are defined to include trenches. (2) The employer shall ensure that (b) Definitions applicable to this sub- there is in the vicinity of each barge in part. use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap- Accepted engineering practices means proved 30-inch lifering with not less those requirements which are compat- than 90 feet of line attached, and at ible with standards of practice required least one portable or permanent ladder by a registered professional engineer. which will reach the top of the apron Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a to the surface of the water. If the above pre-engineered shoring system com- equipment is not available at the pier, prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders the employer shall furnish it during (crossbraces) used in conjunction with the time that he is working the barge. vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal (3) Employees walking or working on rails (walers). Such system is designed, the unguarded decks of barges shall be specifically to support the sidewalls of protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap- an excavation and prevent cave-ins. proved work vests or buoyant vests. Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of (e) Commercial diving operations. Com- shaft or footing excavation, the bottom mercial diving operations shall be sub- of which is made larger than the cross ject to subpart T of part 1910, section above to form a belled shape. §§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter. Benching (Benching system) means a [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42 method of protecting employees from FR 37674, July 22, 1977] cave-ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of § 1926.606 Definitions applicable to horizontal levels or steps, usually with this subpart. vertical or near-vertical surfaces be- (a) Apron—The area along the water- tween levels. front edge of the pier or wharf. Cave-in means the separation of a (b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above mass of soil or rock material from the the upper deck. side of an excavation, or the loss of soil (c) Coaming—The raised frame, as from under a trench shield or support around a hatchway in the deck, to keep system, and its sudden movement into out water. the excavation, either by falling or (d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it rope or chain with wooden or metal could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure rungs. and immobilize a person. (e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, Competent person means one who is means a light structure serving as a capable of identifying existing and pre- guard at the outer edge of a ship’s dictable hazards in the surroundings, deck. or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- Subpart P—Excavations ployees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker Cross braces mean the horizontal Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, members of a shoring system installed Occupational Safety and Hea1th Act of 1970 perpendicular to the sides of the exca- (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s vation, the ends of which bear against Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR either uprights or wales.

372

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00372 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.650

Excavation means any man-made cut, accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or cavity, trench, or depression in an (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu- earth surface, formed by earth really referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or moval. ‘‘trench shields.’’ Faces or sides means the vertical or Shoring (Shoring system) means a inclined earth surfaces formed as a re- structure such as a metal hydraulic, sult of excavation work. mechanical or timber shoring system Failure means the breakage, displace- that supports the sides of an exca- ment, or permanent deformation of a vation and which is designed to prevent structural member or connection so as cave-ins. to reduce its structural integrity and Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’ its supportive capabilities. Sloping (Sloping system) means a Hazardous atmosphere means an at- method of protecting employees from mosphere which by reason of being ex- cave-ins by excavating to form sides of plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro- an excavation that are inclined away sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi- from the excavation so as to prevent cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may cave-ins. The angle of incline required cause death, illness, or injury. to prevent a cave-in varies with dif- Kickout means the accidental release ferences in such factors as the soil or failure of a cross brace. type, environmental conditions of ex- Protective system means a method of posure, and application of surcharge protecting employees from cave-ins, loads. from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an ex- Stable rock means natural solid min- cavation, or from the collapse of adja- eral material that can be excavated cent structures. Protective systems in- with vertical sides and will remain include support systems, sloping and tact while exposed. Unstable rock is benching systems, shield systems, and considered to be stable when the rock other systems that provide the nec- material on the side or sides of the ex- essary protection. cavation is secured against caving-in Ramp means an inclined walking or or movement by rock bolts or by an- working surface that is used to gain ac- other protective system that has been cess to one point from another, and is designed by a registered professional constructed from earth or from struc- engineer. tural materials such as steel or wood. Structural ramp means a ramp built of Registered Professional Engineer means steel or wood, usually used for vehicle a person who is registered as a profes- access. Ramps made of soil or rock are sional engineer in the state where the not considered structural ramps. work is to be performed. However, a Support system means a structure professional engineer, registered in any such as underpinning, bracing, or shor- state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- ing, which provides support to an adja- fessional engineer’’ within the meaning cent structure, underground installa- of this standard when approving de- tion, or the sides of an excavation. signs for ‘‘manufactured protective Tabulated data means tables and systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be charts approved by a registered profes- used in interstate commerce. sional engineer and used to design and Sheeting means the members of a construct a protective system. shoring system that retain the earth in Trench (Trench excavation) means a position and in turn are supported by narrow excavation (in relation to its other members of the shoring system. length) made below the surface of the Shield (Shield system) means a struc- ground. In general, the depth is greater ture that is able to withstand the than the width, but the width of a forces imposed on it by a cave-in and trench (measured at the bottom) is not thereby protect employees within the greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or structure. Shields can be permanent other structures are installed or con- structures or can be designed to be structed in an excavation so as to re- portable and moved along as work produce the dimension measured from the gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- forms or structure to the side of the ex- ther premanufactured or job-built in cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less

373

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00373 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.651 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(measured at the bottom of the exca- (4) While the excavation is open, un- vation), the excavation is also consid- derground installations shall be pro- ered to be a trench. tected, supported or removed as nec- Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’ essary to safeguard employees. Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’ (c) Access and egress—(1) Structural Uprights means the vertical members ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are of a trench shoring system placed in used solely by employees as a means of contact with the earth and usually po- access or egress from excavations shall sitioned so that individual members do be designed by a competent person. not contact each other. Uprights Structural ramps used for access or placed so that individual members are egress of equipment shall be designed closely spaced, in contact with or by a competent person qualified in interconnected to each other, are often structural design, and shall be con- called ‘‘sheeting.’’ structed in accordance with the design. Wales means horizontal members of a (ii) Ramps and runways constructed shoring system placed parallel to the of two or more structural members excavation face whose sides bear shall have the structural members con- against the vertical members of the nected together to prevent displace- shoring system or earth. ment. (iii) Structural members used for § 1926.651 Specific excavation require- ramps and runways shall be of uniform ments. thickness. (a) Surface encumbrances. All surface (iv) Cleats or other appropriate encumbrances that are located so as to means used to connect runway struc- create a hazard to employees shall be tural members shall be attached to the removed or supported, as necessary, to bottom of the runway or shall be at- safeguard employees. tached in a manner to prevent tripping. (b) Underground installations. (1) The (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of estimated location of utility installa- steps shall be provided with cleats or tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, other surface treatments on the top electric, water lines, or any other un- surface to prevent slipping. derground installations that reason- (2) Means of egress from trench exca- ably may be expected to be encoun- vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or tered during excavation work, shall be other safe means of egress shall be lo- determined prior to opening an exca- cated in trench excavations that are 4 vation. feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to (2) Utility companies or owners shall require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of be contacted within established or cus- lateral travel for employees. tomary local response times, advised of (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em- the proposed work, and asked to estab- ployees exposed to public vehicular lish the location of the utility under- traffic shall be provided with, and shall ground installations prior to the start wear, warning vests or other suitable of actual excavation. When utility garments marked with or made of companies or owners cannot respond to reflectorized or high-visibility mate- a request to locate underground utility rial. installations within 24 hours (unless a (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em- longer period is required by state or ployee shall be permitted underneath local law), or cannot establish the loads handled by lifting or digging exact location of these installations, equipment. Employees shall be re- the employer may proceed, provided quired to stand away from any vehicle the employer does so with caution, and being loaded or unloaded to avoid being provided detection equipment or other struck by any spillage or falling mate- acceptable means to locate utility in- rials. Operators may remain in the stallations are used. cabs of vehicles being loaded or un- (3) When excavation operations ap- loaded when the vehicles are equipped, proach the estimated location of under- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to ground installations, the exact loca- provide adequate protection for the option of the installations shall be deter- erator during loading and unloading mined by safe and acceptable means. operations.

374

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00374 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.651

(f) Warning system for mobile equip- mospheric conditions exist or may rea- ment. When mobile equipment is oper- sonably be expected to develop during ated adjacent to an excavation, or work in an excavation. This equipment when such equipment is required to ap- shall be attended when in use. proach the edge of an excavation, and (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom the operator does not have a clear and pier holes, or other similar deep and direct view of the edge of the exca- confined footing excavations, shall vation, a warning system shall be uti- wear a harness with a life-line securely lized such as barricades, hand or me- attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep- chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos- arate from any line used to handle ma- sible, the grade should be away from terials, and shall be individually at- the excavation. tended at all times while the employee (g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing wearing the lifeline is in the exca- and controls. In addition to the require- vation. ments set forth in subparts D and E of (h) Protection from hazards associated this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to with water accumulation. (1) Employees prevent exposure to harmful levels of shall not work in excavations in which atmospheric contaminants and to as- there is accumulated water, or in exca- sure acceptable atmospheric condi- vations in which water is accumu- tions, the following requirements shall lating, unless adequate precautions apply: have been taken to protect employees (i) Where oxygen deficiency against the hazards posed by water ac- (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 cumulation. The precautions necessary percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos- to protect employees adequately vary phere exists or could reasonably be ex- with each situation, but could include pected to exist, such as in excavations special support or shield systems to in landfill areas or excavations in areas protect from cave-ins, water removal where hazardous substances are stored to control the level of accumulating nearby, the atmospheres in the exca- water, or use of a safety harness and vation shall be tested before employees lifeline. enter excavations greater than 4 feet (2) If water is controlled or prevented (1.22 m) in depth. from accumulating by the use of water (ii) Adequate precautions shall be removal equipment, the water removal taken to prevent employee exposure to equipment and operations shall be atmospheres containing less than 19.5 monitored by a competent person to percent oxygen and other hazardous ensure proper operation. atmospheres. These precautions in- (3) If excavation work interrupts the clude providing proper respiratory pro- natural drainage of surface water (such tection or ventilation in accordance as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or with subparts D and E of this part re- other suitable means shall be used to spectively. prevent surface water from entering (iii) Adequate precaution shall be the excavation and to provide adequate taken such as providing ventilation, to drainage of the area adjacent to the ex- prevent employee exposure to an at- cavation. Excavations subject to runoff mosphere containing a concentration from heavy rains will require an in- of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and the gas. (h)(2) of this section. (iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1) intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build- pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en- els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations, as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac- phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided (2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc- Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees. breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re- readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably

375

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00375 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.652 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

expected to pose a hazard to employees the shift. Inspections shall also be shall not be permitted except when: made after every rainstorm or other (i) A support system, such as under- hazard increasing occurrence. These in- pinning, is provided to ensure the safe- spections are only required when em- ty of employees and the stability of the ployee exposure can be reasonably an- structure; or ticipated. (ii) The excavation is in stable rock; (2) Where the competent person finds or evidence of a situation that could re- (iii) A registered professional engi- sult in a possible cave-in, indications neer has approved the determination of failure of protective systems, haz- that the structure is sufficently re- ardous atmospheres, or other haz- moved from the excavation so as to be ardous conditions, exposed employees unaffected by the excavation activity; shall be removed from the hazardous or area until the necessary precautions (iv) A registered professional engi- have been taken to ensure their safety. neer has approved the determination (l) Walkways shall be provided where that such excavation work will not employees or equipment are required pose a hazard to employees. or permitted to cross over excavations. (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur- Guardrails which comply with tenant structure shall not be under- § 1926.502(b) shall be provided where mined unless a support system or an- walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more other method of protection is provided above lower levels. to protect employees from the possible collapse of such structures. [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended by 59 (j) Protection of employees from loose FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection § 1926.652 Requirements for protective shall be provided to protect employees systems. from loose rock or soil that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an (a) Protection of employees in exca- excavation face. Such protection shall vations. (1) Each employee in an exca- consist of scaling to remove loose ma- vation shall be protected from cave-ins terial; installation of protective barri- by an adequate protective system de- cades at intervals as necessary on the signed in accordance with paragraph face to stop and contain falling mate- (b) or (c) of this section except when: rial; or other means that provide equiv- (i) Excavations are made entirely in alent protection. stable rock; or (2) Employees shall be protected from (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet excavated or other materials or equip- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the ment that could pose a hazard by fall- ground by a competent person provides ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- no indication of a potential cave-in. tion shall be provided by placing and (2) Protective systems shall have the keeping such materials or equipment capacity to resist without failure all at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of loads that are intended or could rea- excavations, or by the use of retaining sonably be expected to be applied or devices that are sufficient to prevent transmitted to the system. materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys- rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be (k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em- of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative, uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative, cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative, tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows: atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical

376

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00376 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.652

(34 degrees measured from the hori- (B) The configurations that were de- zontal), unless the employer uses one termined to be safe for the particular of the other options listed below. project; and (ii) Slopes specified in paragraph (C) The identity of the registered pro- (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca- fessional engineer approving the de- vated to form configurations that are sign. in accordance with the slopes shown (iii) At least one copy of the design for Type C soil in Appendix B to this shall be maintained at the jobsite subpart. while the slope is being constructed. (2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes After that time the design need not be and configurations using Appendices A at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and available to the Secretary upon re- allowable configurations for sloping quest. and benching systems, shall be deter- (c) Design of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems. De- mined in accordance with the condi- signs of support systems shield sys- tions and requirements set forth in ap- tems, and other protective systems pendices A and B to this subpart. shall be selected and constructed by (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- the employer or his designee and shall ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or be in accordance with the requirements benching systems shall be selected of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter- from and be in accordance with tab- native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al- ulated data, such as tables and charts. ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the (ii) The tabulated data shall be in alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows: written form and shall include all of (1) Option (1)—Designs using appen- the following: dices A, C and D. Designs for timber (A) Identification of the parameters shoring in trenches shall be determined that affect the selection of a sloping or in accordance with the conditions and benching system drawn from such data; requirements set forth in appendices A (B) Identification of the limits of use and C to this subpart. Designs for alu- of the data, to include the magnitude minum hydraulic shoring shall be in and configuration of slopes determined accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this to be safe; section, but if manufacturer’s tab- (C) Explanatory information as may ulated data cannot be utilized, designs be necessary to aid the user in making shall be in accordance with appendix D. a correct selection of a protective sys- (2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac- tem from the data. turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup- (iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems, shield systems, or other ulated data which identifies the reg- protective systems that are drawn istered professional engineer who ap- from manufacturer’s tabulated data proved the data, shall be maintained at shall be in accordance with all speci- the jobsite during construction of the fications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made by the manufac- protective system. After that time the turer. data may be stored off the jobsite, but (ii) Deviation from the specifications, a copy of the data shall be made avail- recommendations, and limitations able to the Secretary upon request. issued or made by the manufacturer (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu- professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap- benching systems not utilizing Option proval. (1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications, paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate engineer. from the specifications, recommenda- (ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ- and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con- (A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system. were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall

377

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00377 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.652 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

be made available to the Secretary ner that is consistent with the rec- upon request. ommendations of the manufacturer, (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- and in a manner that will prevent em- ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys- ployee exposure to hazards. tems, shield systems, or other protec- (3) When material or equipment that tive systems shall be selected from and is used for protective systems is dam- be in accordance with tabulated data, aged, a competent person shall exam- such as tables and charts. ine the material or equipment and (ii) The tabulated data shall be in evaluate its suitability for continued written form and include all of the fol- use. If the competent person cannot as- lowing: sure the material or equipment is able (A) Identification of the parameters to support the intended loads or is oth- that affect the selection of a protective erwise suitable for safe use, then such system drawn from such data; material or equipment shall be re- (B) Identification of the limits of use moved from service, and shall be evalu- of the data; ated and approved by a registered pro- (C) Explanatory information as may fessional engineer before being re- be necessary to aid the user in making turned to service. a correct selection of a protective sys- (e) Installation and removal of sup- tem from the data. port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup- (iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems shall be securely con- ulated data, which identifies the reg- nected together to prevent sliding, fall- istered professional engineer who ap- ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail- proved the data, shall be maintained at ure. the jobsite during construction of the (ii) Support systems shall be in- protective system. After that time the stalled and removed in a manner that data may be stored off the jobsite, but protects employees from cave-ins, a copy of the data shall be made avail- structural collapses, or from being able to the Secretary upon request. struck by members of the support sys- (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered tem. professional engineer. (i) Support sys- (iii) Individual members of support tems, shield systems, and other protec- systems shall not be subjected to loads tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op- exceeding those which those members tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap- were designed to withstand. proved by a registered professional en- (iv) Before temporary removal of in- gineer. dividual members begins, additional (ii) Designs shall be in written form precautions shall be taken to ensure and shall include the following: the safety of employees, such as in- (A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, stalling other structural members to and configurations of the materials to carry the loads imposed on the support be used in the protective system; and system. (B) The identity of the registered (v) Removal shall begin at, and professional engineer approving the de- progress from, the bottom of the exca- sign. vation. Members shall be released slow- (iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos- shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation. be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to- the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys- the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations. (d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca- systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of function. the members of a support system shall (2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated shall be used and maintained in a man- for the full depth of the trench, and

378

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00378 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A

there are no indications while the to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu- trench is open of a possible loss of soil minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac- from behind or below the bottom of the cordance with appendix D. This Appendix support system. also applies if other protective systems are designed and selected for use from data pre- (ii) Installation of a support system pared in accordance with the requirements shall be closely coordinated with the set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the excavation of trenches. data is predicated on the use of the soil clas- (f) Sloping and benching systems. Em- sification system set forth in this appendix. ployees shall not be permitted to work (b) Definitions. The definitions and exam- on the faces of sloped or benched exca- ples given below are based on, in whole or in vations at levels above other employ- part, the following: American Society for ees except when employees at the lower Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85 and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification levels are adequately protected from System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and material or equipment. The National Bureau of Standards Report (g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i) BSS–121. Shield systems shall not be subjected Cemented soil means a soil in which the par- to loads exceeding those which the sys- ticles are held together by a chemical agent, tem was designed to withstand. such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand- (ii) Shields shall be installed in a size sample cannot be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by finger pressure. manner to restrict lateral or other haz- Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil), ardous movement of the shield in the or soil with a high clay content, which has event of the application of sudden lat- cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not eral loads. crumble, can be excavated with vertical (iii) Employees shall be protected sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe- from the hazard of cave-ins when enter- sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and ing or exiting the areas protected by exhibits significant cohesion when sub- shields. merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. (iv) Employees shall not be allowed Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit in shields when shields are being in- visible signs of moisture content. stalled, removed, or moved vertically. Fissured means a soil material that has a (2) Additional requirement for shield tendency to break along definite planes of systems used in trench excavations. Exca- fracture with little resistance, or a material vations of earth material to a level not that exhibits open cracks, such as tension greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the cracks, in an exposed surface. bottom of a shield shall be permitted, Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt, (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay but only if the shield is designed to re- content. Granular soil has no cohesive sist the forces calculated for the full strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit depth of the trench, and there are no apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be indications while the trench is open of molded when moist and crumbles easily a possible loss of soil from behind or when dry. below the bottom of the shield. Layered system means two or more distinctly different soil or rock types arranged APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P—SOIL in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered layered. (a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This Moist soil means a condition in which a soil appendix describes a method of classifying looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can soil and rock deposits based on site and envi- easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into ronmental conditions, and on the structure small diameter threads before crumbling. and composition of the earth deposits. The Moist granular soil that contains some cohe- appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles. and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al- (2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with- a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change. accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura- also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in- vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane.

379

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00379 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Soil classification system means, for the pur- (v) Material in a sloped, layered system pose of this subpart, a method of catego- where the layers dip into the excavation or a rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy slope of four horizontal to one vertical of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, (4H:1V) or steeper. in decreasing order of stability. The cat- Unconfined compressive strength means the egories are determined based on an analysis load per unit area at which a soil will fail in of the properties and performance character- compression. It can be determined by labora- istics of the deposits and the environmental tory testing, or estimated in the field using conditions of exposure. a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra- Stable rock means natural solid mineral tion tests, and other methods. matter that can be excavated with vertical Wet soil means soil that contains signifi- sides and remain intact while exposed. cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in Submerged soil means soil which is under- such a range of values that cohesive material water or is free seeping. will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Type A means cohesive soils with an Granular material that would exhibit cohe- unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton sive properties when moist will lose those co- per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex- hesive properties when wet. amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, (c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce- shall be classified by a competent person as mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in also considered Type A. However, no soil is accordance with the definitions set forth in Type A if: paragraph (b) of this appendix. (i) The soil is fissured; or (2) Basis of classification. The classification of the deposits shall be made based on the re- (ii) The soil is subject to vibration from sults of at least one visual and at least one heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con- or ducted by a competent person using tests de- (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed; scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other or recognized methods of soil classification and (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered testing such as those adopted by the Amer- system where the layers dip into the exca- ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S. vation on a slope of four horizontal to one Department of Agriculture textural classi- vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or fication system. (v) The material is subject to other factors (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual that would require it to be classified as a less and manual analyses, such as those noted as stable material. being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap- Type B means: pendix, shall be designed and conducted to (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- provide sufficient quantitative and quali- pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 tative information as may be necessary to kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or identify properly the properties, factors, and (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: conditions affecting the classification of the angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), deposits. silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some (4) Layered systems. In a layered system, cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. the system shall be classified in accordance (iii) Previously disturbed soils except those with its weakest layer. However, each layer which would otherwise be classed as Type C may be classified individually where a more soil. stable layer lies under a less stable layer. (iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a depressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a (v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re- (vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances. cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests.—(1) zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja- Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material. (ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca- and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation. (iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or that is primarily composed of fine-grained

380

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00380 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

material is cohesive material. Soil composed designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is Practice for Description of Soils (Visual— granular material. Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf that remains in clumps when excavated is can be readily indented by the thumb; how- cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb not stay in clumps is granular. only with very great effort. Type C soils with (iii) Observe the side of the opened exca- an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf vation and the surface area adjacent to the can be easily penetrated several inches by excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten- the thumb, and can be molded by light finger sion cracks could indicate fissured material. pressure. This test should be conducted on If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi- clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after dence of moving ground and are indications excavation to keep to a miminum the effects of potentially hazardous situations. of exposure to drying influences. If the exca- (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences vation and the excavation itself for evidence (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil of existing utility and other underground must be changed accordingly. structures, and to identify previously dis- (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of turbed soil. unconfined compressive strength of soils can (v) Observe the opened side of the exca- also be obtained by use of a pocket pene- vation to identify layered systems. Examine trometer or by using a hand-operated layered systems to identify if the layers shearvane. slope toward the excavation. Estimate the (v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the degree of slope of the layers. drying test is to differentiate between cohe- (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe- vation and the sides of the opened exca- sive material, and granular material. The vation for evidence of surface water, water procedure for the drying test involves drying seeping from the sides of the excavation, or a sample of soil that is approximately one the location of the level of the water table. inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- in diameter until it is thoroughly dry: vation and the area within the excavation (A) If the sample develops cracks as it for sources of vibration that may affect the dries, significant fissures are indicated. stability of the excavation face. (B) Samples that dry without cracking are (2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil to be broken by hand. If considerable force is samples is conducted to determine quan- necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig- titative as well as qualitative properties of nificant cohesive material content. The soil soil and to provide more information in can be classified as a unfissured cohesive ma- order to classify soil properly. terial and the unconfined compressive (i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of strength should be determined. soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe- either a fissured cohesive material or a sive material can be successfully rolled into granular material. To distinguish between threads without crumbling. For example, if the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch sample by hand or by stepping on them. If thread can be held on one end without tear- the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate- ing, the soil is cohesive. rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul- (ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular. sure into individual grains or fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P—SLOPING or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into AND BENCHING clumps which break up into smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps can only be broken (a) Scope and application. This appendix up with difficulty, it may be clay in any contains specifications for sloping and combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the benching when used as methods of protecting dry soil breaks into clumps which do not employees working in excavations from break up into small clumps and which can cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix only be broken with difficulty, and there is apply when the design of sloping and bench- no visual indication the soil is fissured, the ing protective systems is to be performed in soil may be considered unfissured. accordance with the requirements set forth (iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetra- in § 1926.652(b)(2). tion test can be used to estimate the (b) Definitions. unconfined compressive strength of cohesive Actual slope means the slope to which an soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- excavation face is excavated. tration test described in American Society Distress means that the soil is in a condi- for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely

381

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00381 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe- (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum nomena as the development of fissures in the allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit face of or adjacent to an open excavation; shall be determined from Table B–1 of this the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; appendix. the slumping of material from the face or (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall the bulging or heaving of material from the not be steeper than the maximum allowable bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma- slope. terial from the face of an excavation; and (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material than the maximum allowable slope, when such as pebbles or little clumps of material there are signs of distress. If that situation suddenly separating from the face of an exca- occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac- vation and trickling or rolling down into the tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to excavation. one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the Maximum allowable slope means the steep- maximum allowable slope. est incline of an excavation face that is ac- (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma- ceptable for the most favorable site condi- terial or equipment, operating equipment, or tions as protection against cave-ins, and is traffic are present, a competent person shall expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance determine the degree to which the actual to vertical rise (H:V). slope must be reduced below the maximum Short term exposure means a period of time allowable slope, and shall assure that such less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca- reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from vation is open. adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac- (c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil cordance with § 1926.651(i). and rock deposits shall be classified in ac- (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop- cordance with appendix A to subpart P of ing and benching systems shall be in accord- part 1926. ance with Figure B–1.

382

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00382 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

Figure B–1

Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)

B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil. 1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

383

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00383 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SIMPLE BENCH

MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.

UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.

384

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00384 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield system must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.

SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION 4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).

B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

385

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00385 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SINGLE BENCH

MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.

VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION 4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

386

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00386 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

B–1.3 EXCAVATIONS MADE IN TYPE C SOIL 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE 2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.

VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION 3. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils 1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope for each layer as set forth below.

387

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00387 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

388

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00388 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P—TIMBER (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in which the excavation is made (a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas- tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part. ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows: when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta- with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para- configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre- such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and § 1926.652(c).

389

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00389 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis- lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace. horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds. condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a (2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless: is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical; (3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from (4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion. tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor- this appendix. ing system that are to be selected using this (5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta- information are the cross braces, the bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1 uprights, and the wales, where wales are re- through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci- of this Appendix. fied for use in different types of soil. There (d) Basis and limitations of the data.—(1) Di- are six tables of information, two for each mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the soil type. The soil type must first be deter- timber members listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica- Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub- ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and, analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. (ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac- bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori- to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac- (2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap- tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table. apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C– enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3. to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1. commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide. tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange- appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used. § 1926.652(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1 are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4×4 crossbraces at six feet hori- bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically. alternate timber shoring system must be de- Wales are not required. signed or another type of protective system Space 3×8 uprights at six feet horizontally. designed in accordance with § 1926.652. (A) When loads imposed by structures or This arrangement is commonly called ‘‘skip by stored material adjacent to the trench shoring.’’ weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2 foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4×6 crossbraces at eight feet hori- distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically. the depth of the trench. Space 8×8 wales at four feet vertically.

390

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00390 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

Space 2×6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically. zontally. Position 2×6 uprights in a close sheeting configuration unless water pressure must be Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where Space 6×6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained. zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4. Space 8×10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep Space 2×6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of zontally. members for the section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is determined using Arrangement #B4 Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem- Space 6×6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided. zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8×10 crossbraces at six feet hori- Space 10×10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically. × Spaces 3 8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically. zontally. Use 3×6 tight sheeting. (2) Example 2. A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol- and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures. acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables. listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated are to be determined as specified in Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’ Space 6×6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub- zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting Space 8×8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or similar construction that when driven or Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re- Space 6×8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre- zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close Space 10×10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos- zontally. sible between them. 3. All spacing indicated is measured center Arrangement #B3 to center. Space 8×8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di- zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal. Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center Space 2×6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the (3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet, A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches. Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis- Space 8×8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side. Position 2×6 uprights as closely together as 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in possible. combination with timber crossbraces. If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet, sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two feet below the top of the trench. When the Arrangement #B2 vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet, Space 8×10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5 zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.

391

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00391 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

392

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00392 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

393

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00393 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

394

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00394 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

395

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00395 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

396

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00396 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P—ALUMINUM pendix must be used when design of the alu- HYDRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot be performed in accordance with (a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- § 1926.652(c)(2). tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap-

397

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00397 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective (c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652. (1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis- Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder. with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 contains data only for the particular soil pounds. type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion 1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless: soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical; (2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from dix. the toe of the sloped portion. (3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D– tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that this appendix. are to be selected using this information are (4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber (5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B (6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4. Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac- (d) Basis and limitations of the data. cordance with the soil classification system (1) Vertical shore rails and horizontal described in appendix A to subpart P of part wales are those that meet the Section Mod- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec- ulus requirements in the D–1 Tables. Alu- tion of the size and spacing of the members minum material is 6061–T6 or material of is made. The selection is based on the depth equivalent strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members (2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables, Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau- of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing. (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables: inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1: pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders (3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and (i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.) tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2: These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) § 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does (ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The

398

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00398 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width, Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves (3.5×3.5×0.1875) oversleeves, or structural as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet oversleeves of manufacturer’s specification, o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, extending the full, collapsed length. plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2 should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity (4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres- viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man- feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer. cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac- tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com- vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max- spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of × 3 12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer. installation.) (4) All spacing indicated is measured cen- (5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C ter to center. soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min- for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find imum section modulus of 0.40 inch. horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group. wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that vertically. 3×12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav- typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between (g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores. D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica- (1) For applications other than those listed tions. in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions. depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and § 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.

399

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00399 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

400

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00400 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

401

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00401 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

402

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00402 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

403

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00403 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING

404

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00404 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E

405

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00405 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS The following figures are a graphic summary of the requirements contained in subpart P for excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c).

406

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00406 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F

407

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00407 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

408

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00408 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F

409

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00409 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.700 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and construction loads. (7) Shore means a supporting member AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im- and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8 posed by a load. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete. 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs) SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a temporary (parked) location, or from a § 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem- nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location (a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc- part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used. hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55 masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990] formed in workplaces covered under 29 CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements. quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc- evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete struction operations. structure unless the employer deter- (b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc- forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or portions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup- (1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads. spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding (2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement. mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during hardware. tensioning operations. (3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post- roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper- and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations. (4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em- alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con- under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets. ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No employees. ployee shall be permitted to work (5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi- columns, and beams) which have been tion. formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so (6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num- operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the (also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con- equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.

410

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00410 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.703

(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections. and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles, [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener- FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be constructed of nonconductive material § 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan- (a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva- age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed equipped with the following: of nonconductive material. (i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws (ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade. (2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag- enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de- tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure. out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform (b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on with one cubic yard (.8 m3) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix- loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete the following: and masonry construction activities) (1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in- (2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous of the skip. energy sources have been locked out (c) Powered Power concrete trowels. and tagged. and rotating type concrete troweling (2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or machines that are manually guided similar language to indicate that the shall be equipped with a control switch equipment is not to be operated. that will automatically shut off the power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in- ator are removed from the equipment place concrete. handles. (d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork. handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab- wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and (e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the (2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de- crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported, with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance to prevent separation of sections when with the Appendix to this section will pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of (f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph. buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout, safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip- installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds, dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite. (2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor- signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be

411

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00411 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.703 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be— drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur- (2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en- duced to less than that required by cased in concrete. § 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre- shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc- (3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation. be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat- placement. forms where employees are required to (4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass. to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca- § 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks. inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices (5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure (6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha- tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs. shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main- when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances and the form. specified for plumbness during the jacking operation. (7) Eccentric loads on shore heads (7) The predetermined safe rate of lift and similar members shall be prohib- shall not be exceeded. ited unless these members have been (d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing designed for such loading. steel for walls, piers, columns, and (8) Whenever single post shores are similar vertical structures shall be used one on top of another (tiered), the adequately supported to prevent over- employer shall comply with the fol- turning and to prevent collapse. lowing specific requirements in addi- (2) Employers shall take measures to tion to the general requirements for prevent unrolled wire mesh from re- formwork: coiling. Such measures may include, (i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll. the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be (ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient (iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su- spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination (iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following: pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu- level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have (9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM (10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi- original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient

412

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00412 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.705

strength to support its weight and su- § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab perimposed loads. construction operations. (2) Reshoring shall not be removed (a) Lift-slab operations shall be de- until the concrete being supported has signed and planned by a registered pro- attained adequate strength to support fessional engineer who has experience its weight and all loads in place upon in lift-slab construction. Such plans it. and designs shall be implemented by the employer and shall include detailed APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(A)(1) instructions and sketches indicating the prescribed method of erection. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK These plans and designs shall also in- (This Appendix is non-mandatory.) clude provisions for ensuring lateral stability of the building/structure dur- This appendix serves as a non-mandatory ing construction. guideline to assist employers in complying with the formwork requirements in (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be § 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been de- marked to indicate their rated capac- signed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported ity as established by the manufacturer. and maintained in accordance with Sections (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be 6 and 7 of the American National Standard loaded beyond their rated capacity as for Construction and Demolition Oper- established by the manufacturer. ations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI (d) Jacking equipment shall be capa- A10.9–1983, shall be deemed to be in compli- ble of supporting at least two and one- ance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1). half times the load being lifted during [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 jacking operations and the equipment FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] shall not be overloaded. For the purpose of this provision, jacking equip- § 1926.704 Requirements for precast ment includes any load bearing compo- concrete. nent which is used to carry out the lift- (a) Precast concrete wall units, ing operation(s). Such equipment in- structural framing, and tilt-up wall cludes, but is not limited, to the fol- panels shall be adequately supported to lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach- prevent overturning and to prevent col- ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T- lapse until permanent connections are caps, shearheads, columns, and foot- completed. ings. (b) Lifting inserts which are embed- (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de- ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up signed and installed so that they will precast concrete members shall be ca- neither lift nor continue to lift when pable of supporting at least two times they are loaded in excess of their rated the maximum intended load applied or capacity. transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a (c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability. imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn- mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure even and uniform lifting of the slab. (d) Lifting hardware shall be capable During lifting, all points at which the of supporting at least five times the slab is supported shall be kept within 1/ maximum intended load applied or 2 inch of that needed to maintain the transmitted to the lifting hardware. slab in a level position. (e) No employee shall be permitted (h) If leveling is automatically con- under precast concrete members being trolled, a device shall be installed that lifted or tilted into position except will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch those employees required for the erec- tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of tion of those members. this section is exceeded or where there [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting) FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] system.

413

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00413 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.705 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(i) If leveling is maintained by man- (m) All welding on temporary and ual controls, such controls shall be lo- permanent connections shall be per- cated in a central location and at- formed by a certified welder, familiar tended by a competent person while with the welding requirements speci- lifting is in progress. In addition to fied in the plans and specifications for meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), the lift-slab operation. the competent person must be experi- (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting enced in the lifting operation and with units to building columns shall not be the lifting equipment being used. executed until the welds on the column (j) The maximum number of manu- shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to ally controlled jacks/lifting units on air temperature. one slab shall be limited to a number that will permit the operator to main- (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi- tain the slab level within specified tol- tively secured to building columns so erances of paragraph (g) of this section, that they do not become dislodged or but in no case shall that number ex- dislocated. ceed 14. (p) Equipment shall be designed and (k)(1) No employee, except those es- installed so that the lifting rods cannot sential to the jacking operation, shall slip out of position or the employer be permitted in the building/structure shall institute other measures, such as while any jacking operation is taking the use of locking or blocking devices, place unless the building/structure has which will provide positive connection been reinforced sufficiently to ensure between the lifting rods and attach- its integrity during erection. The ments and will prevent components phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- from disengaging during lifting oper- sure its integrity’’ used in this para- ations. graph means that a registered professional engineer, independent of the en- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB gineer who designed and planned the OPERATIONS lifting operation, has determined from the plans that if there is a loss of sup- (This Appendix is non-mandatory.) port at any jack location, that loss will In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires be confined to that location and the employees to be removed from the building/ structure as a whole will remain sta- structure during jacking operations unless ble. an independent registered professional engi- (2) Under no circumstances, shall any neer, other than the engineer who designed employee who is not essential to the and planned the lifting operation, has deter- jacking operation be permitted imme- mined that the building/structure has been diately beneath a slab while it is being sufficiently reinforced to insure the integ- lifted. rity of the building/structure. One method to (3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) comply with this provision is for the em- of this section, a jacking operation be- ployer to ensure that continuous bottom steel is provided in every slab and in both di- gins when a slab or group of slabs is rections through every wall or column head lifted and ends when such slabs are se- area. (Column head area means the distance cured (with either temporary connec- between lines that are one and one half tions or permanent connections). times the thickness of the slab or drop panel. (4) Employers who comply with ap- These lines are located outside opposite pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sec- ered to be in compliance with the pro- tions—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through steel shall be established by assuming loss of (k)(3) of this section. support at a given lifting jack and then de- (l) When making temporary connec- termining the steel necessary to carry, by tions to support slabs, wedges shall be catenary action over the span between sur- secured by tack welding, or an equiva- rounding supports, the slab service dead load plus any service dead and live loads likely to lent method of securing the wedges to be acting on the slab during jacking. In addi- prevent them from falling out of position, the surrounding supports must be capa- tion. Lifting rods may not be released ble of resisting any additional load trans- until the wedges at that column have ferred to them as a result of the loss of sup- been secured. port at the lifting jack considered.

414

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00414 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.706

[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]

§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry constructed plus four feet, and shall construction. run the entire length of the wall. (a) A limited access zone shall be es- (3) The limited access zone shall be tablished whenever a masonry wall is established on the side of the wall being constructed. The limited access which will be unscaffolded. zone shall conform to the following. (4) The limited access zone shall be (1) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees ac- established prior to the start of con- tively engaged in constructing the struction of the wall. wall. No other employees shall be per- (2) The limited access zone shall be mitted to enter the zone. equal to the height of the wall to be

415

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00415 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.750 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(5) The limited access zone shall re- Insulating Concrete for Compressive main in place until the wall is ade- Strength (ASTM C513–86). quately supported to prevent over- • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength turning and to prevent collapse unless of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM C495–86). the height of wall is over eight feet, in • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing, which case, the limited access zone and Testing of Concrete Compression Test shall remain in place until the require- Specimens (ASTM C684–81). ments of paragraph (b) of this section • Test Method for Compressive Strength of have been met. Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in (b) All masonry walls over eight feet Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)). in height shall be adequately braced to prevent overturning and to prevent col- Subpart R—Steel Erection lapse unless the wall is adequately supported so that it will not overturn or AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours collapse. The bracing shall remain in and Safety Standards Act (Construction place until permanent supporting ele- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- ments of the structure are in place. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q— Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable. (This Appendix is non-mandatory.) The following non-mandatory references § 1926.750 Flooring requirements. provide information which can be helpful in (a) Permanent flooring—skeleton steel understanding and complying with the reconstruction in tiered buildings. (1) The quirements contained in subpart Q. permanent floors shall be installed as • Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- the erection of structural members trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National Safety Council. progresses, and there shall be not more • Building Code Requirements for Rein- than eight stories between the erection forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). floor and the uppermost permanent • Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4). floor, except where the structural in- • Recommended Practice for Concrete tegrity is maintained as a result of the Formwork (ACI 347–78). design. • Safety Requirements for Concrete and (2) At no time shall there be more Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). than four floors or 48 feet of unfinished • Standard Test Method for Compressive bolting or welding above the founda- Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens tion or uppermost permanently secured (ASTM C39–86). • Standard Test Method for Making and floor. Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field (b) Temporary flooring—skeleton steel (ASTM C31–85). construction in tiered buildings. (1) (i) • Standard Test Method for Penetration The derrick or erection floor shall be Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM solidly planked or decked over its en- C803–82). tire surface except for access openings. • Standard Test Method for Compressive Planking or decking of equivalent Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place strength, shall be of proper thickness in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85). to carry the working load. Planking • Standard Method for Developing Early Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting shall be not less than 2 inches thick Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80). full size undressed, and shall be laid • Recommended Practice for Inspection tight and secured to prevent move- and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and ment. Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc- (ii) On buildings or structures not tion (ASTM E329–77). adaptable to temporary floors, and • Method of Making and Curing Concrete where scaffolds are not used, safety Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM nets shall be installed and maintained C192–88). whenever the potential fall distance • Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM exceeds two stories or 25 feet. The nets C42–87). shall be hung with sufficient clearance • Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test- to prevent contacts with the surface of ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight structures below.

416

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00416 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.752

(iii) Floor periphery—safety railing. work unless such framework is safely A safety railing of 1⁄2-inch wire rope or bolted or welded. equal shall be installed, approximately (c) (1) In steel framing, where bar 42 inches high, around the periphery of joists are utilized, and columns are not all temporary-planked or temporary framed in at least two directions with metal-decked floors of tier buildings structural steel members, a bar joist and other multifloored structures dur- shall be field-bolted at columns to pro- ing structural steel assembly. vide lateral stability during construc- (2) (i) Where skeleton steel erection tion. is being done, a tightly planked and (2) Where longspan joists or trusses, substantial floor shall be maintained 40 feet or longer, are used, a center row within two stories or 30 feet, whichever of bolted bridging shall be installed to is less, below and directly under that provide lateral stability during con- portion of each tier of beams on which struction prior to slacking of hoisting any work is being performed, except line. when gathering and stacking tem- (3) No load shall be placed on open porary floor planks on a lower floor, in web steel joists until these security re- preparation for transferring such quirements are met. planks for use on an upper floor. Where (d) Tag lines shall be used for con- such a floor is not practicable, para- trolling loads. graph (b)(1)(ii) of this section applies. (ii) When gathering and stacking § 1926.752 Bolting, riveting, fitting-up, temporary floor planks, the planks and plumbing-up. shall be removed successively, working toward the last panel of the temporary (a) General requirements. (1) Con- floor so that the work is always done tainers shall be provided for storing or from the planked floor. carrying rivets, bolts, and drift pins, (iii) When gathering and stacking and secured against accidental dis- temporary floor planks from the last placement when aloft. panel, the employees assigned to such (2) Pneumatic hand tools shall be dis- work shall be protected by safety belts connected from the power source, and with safety lines attached to a cat- pressure in hose lines shall be released, enary line or other substantial anchor- before any adjustments or repairs are age. made. (c) Flooring—other construction. (1) In (3) Air line hose sections shall be tied the erection of a building having dou- together except when quick disconnect ble wood floor construction, the rough couplers are used to join sections. flooring shall be completed as the (4) Eye protection shall be provided building progresses, including the tier in accordance with subpart E of this below the one on which floor joists are part. being installed. (b) Bolting. (1) When bolts or drift (2) For single wood floor or other pins are being knocked out, means flooring systems, the floor imme- shall be provided to keep them from diately below the story where the floor falling. joists are being installed shall be kept (2) Impact wrenches shall be provided planked or decked over. with a locking device for retaining the [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 39 socket. FR 24361, July 2, 1974] (c) Riveting. (1) Riveting shall not be done in the vicinity of combustible ma- § 1926.751 Structural steel assembly. terial unless precautions are taken to (a) During the final placing of solid prevent fire. web structural members, the load shall (2) When rivet heads are knocked off, not be released from the hoisting line or backed out, means shall be provided until the members are secured with not to keep them from falling. less than two bolts, or the equivalent (3) A safety wire shall be properly in- at each connection and drawn up stalled on the snap and on the handle wrench tight. of the pneumatic riveting hammer and (b) Open web steel joists shall not be shall be used at all times. The wire size placed on any structural steel frame- shall be not less than No. 9 (B&S

417

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00417 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

gauge), leaving the handle and an- and passageways. This section also ap- nealed No. 14 on the snap, or equiva- plies to cut-and-cover excavations lent. which are both physically connected to (d) Plumbing-up. (1) Connections of ongoing underground construction op- the equipment used in plumbing-up erations within the scope of this sec- shall be properly secured. tion, and covered in such a manner as (2) The turnbuckles shall be secured to create conditions characteristic of to prevent unwinding while under underground construction. stress. (2) This section does not apply to the (3) Plumbing-up guys related equip- following: ment shall be placed so that employees (i) Excavation and trenching oper- can get at the connection points. ations covered by subpart P of this (4) Plumbing-up guys shall be re- part, such as foundation operations for moved only under the supervision of a above-ground structures that are not competent person. physically connected to underground (e) Wood planking shall be of proper construction operations, and surface thickness to carry the working load, excavation; nor but shall be not less than 2 inches (ii) Underground electrical trans- thick full size undressed, exterior grade mission and distribution lines, as ad- plywood, at least 3⁄4-inch thick, or dressed in subpart V of this part. equivalent material. (b) Access and egress. (1) The employer (f) Metal decking of sufficient shall provide and maintain safe means strength shall be laid tight and secured of access and egress to all work sta- to prevent movement. tions. (g) Planks shall overlap the bearing (2) The employer shall provide access on each end by a minimum of 12 inches. and egress in such a manner that em- (h) Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or ployees are protected from being equivalent, shall be used around col- struck by excavators, haulage ma- umns where planks do not fit tightly. chines, trains and other mobile equip- (i) Provisions shall be made to secure ment. temporary flooring against displace- (3) The employer shall control access ment. to all openings to prevent unauthorized (j) All unused openings in floors, tem- entry underground. Unused chutes, porary or permanent, shall be com- manways, or other openings shall be pletely planked over or guarded in ac- tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced cordance with subpart M of this part. off, and shall be posted with warning (k) Employees shall be provided with signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar safety belts in accordance with language. Completed or unused sec- § 1926.104 when they are working on tions of the underground facility shall float scaffolds. be barricaded. (c) Check-in/check-out. The employer Subpart S—Underground Con- shall maintain a check-in/check-out struction, Caissons, procedure that will ensure that above- Cofferdams and Compressed ground personnel can determine an ac- Air curate count of the number of persons underground in the event of an emergency. However, this procedure is not AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours required when the construction of un- and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); derground facilities designed for secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); human occupancy has been sufficiently Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR completed so that the permanent envi- 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1– ronmental controls are effective, and 90 (55 FR 9033), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applica- when the remaining construction ac- ble. tivity will not cause any environmental hazard or structural failure § 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities. (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated

418

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00418 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

with underground construction activi- is both out of the range of natural un- ties including, where appropriate, the assisted voice communication and not following subjects: under observation by other persons, (1) Air monitoring; shall be provided with an effective (2) Ventilation; means of obtaining assistance in an (3) Illumination; emergency. (4) Communications; (g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting (5) Flood control; capability. When a shaft is used as a (6) Mechanical equipment; means of egress, the employer shall (7) Personal protective equipment; make advance arrangements for power- (8) Explosives; assisted hoisting capability to be read- (9) Fire prevention and protection; ily available in an emergency, unless and the regular hoisting means can con- (10) Emergency procedures, including tinue to function in the event of an evacuation plans and check-in/check- electrical power failure at the jobsite. out systems. Such hoisting means shall be designed (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts so that the load hoist drum is powered shall be informed of any hazardous oc- in both directions of rotation and so currences or conditions that have af- that the brake is automatically applied fected or might affect employee safety, upon power release or failure. including liberation of gas, equipment (2) Self-rescuers. The employer must failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins, provide self-rescuers approved by the floodings, fires or explosions. National Institute for Occupational (2) The employer shall establish and Safety and Health under 42 CFR part maintain direct communications for 84. The respirators must be imme- coordination of activities with other diately available to all employees at employers whose operations at the job- work stations in underground areas site affect or may affect the safety of where employees might be trapped by employees underground. smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, (f) Communications. (1) When natural use, and care of respirators must be in unassisted voice communication is in- accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. effective, a power-assisted means of (3) Designated person. At least one voice communication shall be used to designated person shall be on duty provide communication between the above ground whenever any employee work face, the bottom of the shaft, and is working underground. This des- the surface. ignated person shall be responsible for (2) Two effective means of commu- securing immediate aid and keeping an nication, at least one of which shall be accurate count of employees under- voice communication, shall be provided ground in case of emergency. The des- in all shafts which are being developed ignated person must not be so busy or used either for personnel access or with other responsibilities that the for hoisting. Additional requirements counting function is encumbered. for hoist operator communication are (4) Emergency lighting. Each employee contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of underground shall have an acceptable this section. portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his (3) Powered communication systems or her work area for emergency use, shall operate on an independent power unless natural light or an emergency supply, and shall be installed so that lighting system provides adequate illu- the use of or disruption of any one mination for escape. phone or signal location will not dis- (5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where rupt the operation of the system from 25 or more employees work under- any other location. ground at one time, the employer shall (4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad- tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per- necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from (5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2 derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time.

419

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00419 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em- containing the flammable gas con- ployees work underground at one time, centration. the employer shall provide (or make (3) Declassification to potentially gassy arrangements in advance with locally operations. Underground construction available rescue services to provide) at gassy operations may be declassified to least one 5-person rescue team to be ei- Potentially Gassy when air monitoring ther on the jobsite or within one-half results remain under 10 percent of the hour travel time from the entry point. lower explosive limit for methane or (iii) Rescue team members shall be other flammable gases for three con- qualified in rescue procedures, the use secutive days. and limitations of breathing apparatus, (i) Gassy operations-additional require- and the use of firefighting equipment. ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, Qualifications shall be reviewed not maintained in suitable condition, shall less than annually. be used in gassy operations. (iv) On jobsites where flammable or (2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment noxious gases are encountered or an- used in gassy operations shall be either ticipated in hazardous quantities, res- approved in accordance with the re- cue team members shall practice don- quirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly ning and using self-contained breathing Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem- apparatus monthly. onstrated by the employer to be fully (v) The employer shall ensure that equivalent to such MSHA-approved rescue teams are familiar with condi- equipment, and shall be operated in actions at the jobsite. cordance with that part. (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po- (3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- tentially gassy operations. Underground ation shall be prominently posted with construction operations shall be classi- signs notifying all entrants of the fied as potentially gassy if either: gassy classification. (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per- (4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all cent or more of the lower explosive gassy operations and the employer limit for methane or other flammable shall be responsible for collecting all gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) personal sources of ignition, such as ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, matches and lighters, from all persons floor or walls in any underground work entering a gassy operation. area for more than a 24-hour period; or (5) A fire watch as described in (ii) The history of the geographical § 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when area or geological formation indicates hot work is performed. that 10 percent or more of the lower ex- (6) Once an operation has met the cri- plosive limit for methane or other teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting flammable gases is likely to be encoun- classification as gassy, all operations tered in such underground operations. in the affected area, except the fol- (2) Gassy operations. Underground lowing, shall be discontinued until the construction operations shall be classi- operation either is in compliance with fied as gassy if: all of the gassy operation requirements (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per- or has been declassified in accordance cent or more of the lower explosive with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: limit for methane or other flammable (i) Operations related to the control gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the gas concentration; ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, (ii) Installation of new equipment, or floor or walls in any underground work conversion of existing equipment, to area for three consecutive days; or comply with this paragraph (i); and (ii) There has been an ignition of (iii) Installation of above-ground con- methane or of other flammable gases trols for reversing the air flow. emanating from the strata that indi- (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen- cates the presence of such gases; or eral. Air quality limits and control re- (iii) The underground construction quirements for construction are found operation is both connected to an unin § 1926.55, except as modified by this derground work area which is cur- section. rently classified as gassy and is also (i)(A) The employer shall assign a subject to a continuous course of air competent person who shall perform all

420

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00420 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

air monitoring required by this sec- are used, an initial test shall be made tion. of the inlet air of the fan or com- (B) Where this paragraph requires pressor, with the engines operating, to monitoring of airborne contaminants ensure that the air supply is not con- ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent taminated by engine exhaust. person shall make a reasonable deter- (D) Testing shall be performed as mination as to which substances to often as necessary to ensure that the monitor and how frequently to mon- ventilation requirements of paragraph itor, considering at least the following (k) of this section are met. factors: (iv) When rapid excavation machines (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to are used, a continuous flammable gas fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land- monitor shall be operated at the face fills, coal deposits, and swamps; with the sensor(s) placed as high and (2) Geology: Geological studies of the close to the front of the machine’s cut- jobsite, particularly involving the soil ter head as practicable. type and its permeability; (v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi- (3) History: Presence of air contami- cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of nants in nearby jobsites, changes in hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con- levels of substances monitored on the ducted in the affected underground prior shift; and work area(s), at least at the beginning (4) Work practices and jobsite condi- and midpoint of each shift, until the tions: The use of diesel engines, use of concentration of hydrogen sulfide has explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric days. conditions, decompression of the at- (B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- mosphere, welding, cutting and hot tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, work, and employees’ physical reac- a continuous sampling and indicating tions to working underground. hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under- to monitor the affected work area. ground work areas shall be tested as (C) Employees shall be informed often as necessary to assure that the when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro- atmosphere at normal atmospheric gen sulfide is exceeded. pressure contains at least 19.5 percent (D) The continuous sampling and in- oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox- dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall ygen. be designed, installed, and maintained (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be to provide a visual and aural alarm made before tests for air contaminants. when the hydrogen sulfide concentra- (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under- tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- ground work areas shall be tested tional measures, such as respirator use, quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni- increased ventilation, or evacuation, trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and might be necessary to maintain hydro- other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists, gen sulfide exposure below the permis- and fumes as often as necessary to en- sible exposure limit. sure that the permissible exposure lim- (vi) When the competent person de- its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex- termines, on the basis of air moni- ceeded. toring results or other information, (B) The atmosphere in all under- that air contaminants may be present ground work areas shall be tested in sufficient quantity to be dangerous quantitatively for methane and other to life, the employer shall: flammable gases as often as necessary (A) Prominently post a notice at all to determine: entrances to the underground jobsite (1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and (ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre- (2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken. classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth- (C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de- driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s)

421

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00421 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

or in the air return, steps shall be percent or more of the lower explosive taken to increase ventilation air vol- limit for methane or other flammable ume or otherwise control the gas con- gases is encountered. centration, unless the employer is op- (iii) A manual flammable gas mon- erating in accordance with the poten- itor shall be used as needed, but at tially gassy or gassy operation require- least at the beginning and midpoint of ments. Such additional ventilation each shift, to ensure that the limits controls may be discontinued when gas prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are concentrations are reduced below five not exceeded. In addition, a manual percent of the lower explosive limit, electrical shut down control shall be but shall be reinstituted whenever the provided near the heading. five percent level is exceeded. (iv) Local gas tests shall be made (viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of prior to and continuously during any the lower explosive limit for methane welding, cutting, or other hot work. or other flammable gases is detected in (v) In underground operations driven the vicinity of welding, cutting, or by drill-and-blast methods, the air in other hot work, such work shall be sus- the affected area shall be tested for pended until the concentration of such flammable gas prior to re-entry after flammable gas is reduced to less than blasting, and continuously when em- 10 percent of the lower explosive limit. ployees are working underground. (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of (3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air the lower explosive limit for methane quality tests shall be maintained above or other flammable gases is detected in any underground work area(s) or in the ground at the worksite and be made air return: available to the Secretary of Labor (A) All employees, except those nec- upon request. The record shall include essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be the location, date, time, substance and immediately withdrawn to a safe loca- amount monitored. Records of expo- tion above ground; and sures to toxic substances shall be re- (B) Electrical power, except for ac- tained in accordance with § 1910.20 of ceptable pumping and ventilation this chapter. All other air quality test equipment, shall be cut off to the area records shall be retained until comple- endangered by the flammable gas until tion of the project. the concentration of such gas is re- (k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall duced to less than 20 percent of the be supplied to all underground work lower explosive limit. areas in sufficient quantities to pre- (2) Additional monitoring for potentially vent dangerous or harmful accumula- gassy and gassy operations. Operations tion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or which meet the criteria for potentially gases. gassy and gassy operations set forth in (ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be paragraph (h) of this section shall be provided in all underground work areas subject to the additional monitoring except when the employer can dem- requirements of this paragraph. onstrate that natural ventilation pro- (i) A test for oxygen content shall be vides the necessary air quality through conducted in the affected underground sufficient air volume and air flow. work areas and work areas imme- (2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7 diately adjacent to such areas at least m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup- at the beginning and midpoint of each plied for each employee underground. shift. (3) The linear velocity of air flow in (ii) When using rapid excavation ma- the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all chines, continuous automatic flam- other underground work areas shall be mable gas monitoring equipment shall at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute be used to monitor the air at the head- where blasting or rock drilling is con- ing, on the rib, and in the return air ducted, or where other conditions like- duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va- nal the heading, and shut down electric pors, or gases in harmful or explosive power in the affected underground quantities are present. work area, except for acceptable pump- (4) The direction of mechanical air ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 flow shall be reversible.

422

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00422 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

(5) Following blasting, ventilation (11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper- systems shall exhaust smoke and ations shall have ventilation systems fumes to the outside atmosphere before installed which shall: work is resumed in affected areas. (i) Be constructed of fire-resistant (6) Ventilation doors shall be de- materials; and signed and installed so that they re- (ii) Have acceptable electrical sys- main closed when in use, regardless of tems, including fan motors. the direction of the air flow. (12) Gassy operations shall be pro- (7) When ventilation has been re- vided with controls located above duced to the extent that hazardous lev- ground for reversing the air flow of els of methane or flammable gas may ventilation systems. have accumulated, a competent person (13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- shall test all affected areas after ven- erations, wherever mine-type ventila- tilation has been restored and shall de- tion systems using an offset main fan termine whether the atmosphere is installed on the surface are used, they within flammable limits before any shall be equipped with explosion-doors power, other than for acceptable equip- or a weak-wall having an area at least ment, is restored or work is resumed. equivalent to the cross-sectional area (8) Whenever the ventilation system of the airway. has been shut down with all employees (l) Illumination. (1) Illumination requirements applicable to underground out of the underground area, only com- construction operations are found in petent persons authorized to test for Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. air contaminants shall be allowed un- (2) Only acceptable portable lighting derground until the ventilation has equipment shall be used within 50 feet been restored and all affected areas (15.24 m) of any underground heading have been tested for air contaminants during explosives handling. and declared safe. (m) Fire prevention and control. Fire (9) When drilling rock or concrete, prevention and protection require- appropriate dust control measures ments applicable to underground con- shall be taken to maintain dust levels struction operations are found in sub- within limits set in § 1926.55. Such part F of this part, except as modified measures may include, but are not lim- by the following additional standards. ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum (1) Open flames and fires are prohib- collectors, and water mix spray sys- ited in all underground construction tems. operations except as permitted for (10)(i) Internal combustion engines, welding, cutting and other hot work except diesel-powered engines on mo- operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- bile equipment, are prohibited under- tion. ground. (2) (i) Smoking may be allowed only (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment in areas free of fire and explosion haz- used underground in atmospheres other ards. than gassy operations shall be either (ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting approved by MSHA in accordance with smoking and open flames shall be post- the provisions of 30 CFR part 32 (for- ed in areas having fire or explosion merly Schedule 24), or shall be dem- hazards. onstrated by the employer to be fully (3) The employer may store under- equivalent to such MSHA-approved ground no more than a 24-hour supply equipment, and shall be operated in ac- of diesel fuel for the underground cordance with that part. (Each brake equipment used at the worksite. horsepower of a diesel engine requires (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the at least 100 cubic feet (28.32 m3) of air surface to an underground location is per minute for suitable operation in ad- permitted only if: dition to the air requirements for per- (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur- sonnel. Some engines may require a face in a tank whose maximum capac- greater amount of air to ensure that ity is no more than the amount of fuel the allowable levels of carbon mon- required to supply for a 24-hour period oxide, nitric oxide, and nitrogen diox- the equipment serviced by the under- ide are not exceeded.) ground fueling station; and

423

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00423 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) The surface tank is connected to of hydraulic equipment involved, but the underground fueling station by an rated at least 4A:40B:C. acceptable pipe or hose system that is (9)(i) Electrical installations in uncontrolled at the surface by a valve, derground areas where oil, grease, or and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz- diesel fuel are stored shall be used only zle; and for lighting fixtures. (iii) The pipe is empty at all times (ii) Lighting fixtures in storage except when transferring diesel fuel areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- from the surface tank to a piece of derground areas where oil, grease, or equipment in use underground; and diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac- are suspended during refueling oper- cordance with subpart K of this part. ations if the supply piping in the shaft (10) Leaks and spills of flammable or is not protected from damage. combustible fluids shall be cleaned up (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried, immediately. stored, or used underground. (11) A fire extinguisher of at least (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum 4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene tinguishing means shall be provided at Stabilized gas may be used under- the head pulley and at the tail pulley ground only for welding, cutting and of underground belt conveyors. other hot work, and only in accordance (12) Any structure located under- with subpart J of this part, and para- ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec- opening to the underground shall be tion. constructed of material having a fire- (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored resistance rating of at least one hour. underground shall be kept in tightly (n) Welding, cutting, and other hot sealed containers in fire-resistant areas work. In addition to the requirements at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under- of subpart J of this part, the following ground explosive magazines, and at requirements shall apply to under- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta- ground welding, cutting, and other hot tions and steeply inclined passageways. work. Storage areas shall be positioned or (1) No more than the amount of fuel diked so that the contents of ruptured gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to or overturned containers will not flow perform welding, cutting, or other hot from the storage area. work during the next 24-hour period (7) Flammable or combustible mate- shall be permitted underground. rials shall not be stored above ground (2) Noncombustible barriers shall be within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access installed below welding, cutting, or opening to any underground operation. other hot work being done in or over a Where this is not feasible because of shaft or raise. space limitations at the jobsite, such (o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. materials may be located within the Portal openings and access areas shall 100-foot limit, provided that: be guarded by shoring, fencing, head (i) They are located as far as prac- walls, shotcreting or other equivalent ticable from the opening; and protection to ensure safe access of em- (ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas not less than one-hour rating is placed shall be scaled or otherwise secured to between the stored material and the prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured opening, or additional precautions are materials from endangering the portal taken which will protect the materials and access area. from ignition sources. (2) Subsidence areas. The employer (8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids shall ensure ground stability in haz- shall be used in hydraulically-actuated ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by underground machinery and equipment filling in, or by erecting barricades and unless such equipment is protected by posting warning signs to prevent entry. a fire suppression system or by multi- (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com- purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of petent person shall inspect the roof, sufficient capacity for the type and size face, and walls of the work area at the

424

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00424 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

start of each shift and as often as nec- for shear, the casing or bracing shall essary to determine ground stability. extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the (B) Competent persons conducting solid rock. When the shaft terminates such inspections shall be protected in solid rock, the casing or bracing from loose ground by location, ground shall extend to the end of the shaft or support or equivalent means. 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, (ii) Ground conditions along whichever is less. haulageways and travelways shall be (B) The casing or bracing shall ex- inspected as frequently as necessary to tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 ensure safe passage. inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- (iii) Loose ground that might be haz- cept that the minimum casing height ardous to employees shall be taken may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m), down, scaled or supported. provided that a standard railing is in- (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be stalled; that the ground adjacent to the used wherever bolts that depend on top of the shaft is sloped away from the torsionally applied force are used for shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids; ground support. and that effective barriers are used to (B) A competent person shall deter- prevent mobile equipment operating mine whether rock bolts meet the nec- near the shaft from jumping over the 12 essary torque, and shall determine the inch (0.3 m) barrier. testing frequency in light of the bolt (iii) After blasting operations in system, ground conditions and the dis- shafts, a competent person shall deter- tance from vibration sources. mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, (v) Suitable protection shall be pro- blocking, or wedges have loosened. If vided for employees exposed to the haz- so, necessary repairs shall be made be- ard of loose ground while installing fore employees other than those as- ground support systems. signed to make the repairs are allowed (vi) Support sets shall be installed so in or below the affected areas. that the bottoms have sufficient an- (p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in chorage to prevent ground pressures addition to the requirements for blast- from dislodging the support base of the ing and explosives operations, includ- sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing, ing handling of misfires, which are tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided found in subpart U of this part. between immediately adjacent sets to ensure added stability. (1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and supports that create a hazardous condi- other conductive material, excluding tion shall be promptly repaired or re- earth, to prevent explosives initiation placed. When replacing supports, the or employee exposure to electric cur- new supports shall be installed before rent. the damaged supports are removed. (2) Following blasting, an employee (viii) A shield or other type of sup- shall not enter a work area until the port shall be used to maintain a safe air quality meets the requirements of travelway for employees working in paragraph (j) of this section. dead-end areas ahead of any support re- (q) Drilling. (1) A competent person placement operation. shall inspect all drilling and associated (4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5 equipment prior to each use. Equip- feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees ment defects affecting safety shall be must enter shall be supported by a corrected before the equipment is used. steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, (2) The drilling area shall be in- solid rock or other suitable material. spected for hazards before the drilling (ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft operation is started. shall be supported by casing or bracing (3) Employees shall not be allowed on except where the shaft penetrates into a drill mast while the drill bit is in op- solid rock having characteristics that eration or the drill machine is being will not change as a result of exposure. moved. Where the shaft passes through earth (4) When a drill machine is being into solid rock, or through solid rock moved from one drilling area to an- into earth, and where there is potential other, drill steel, tools, and other

425

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00425 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

equipment shall be secured and the (r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person mast shall be placed in a safe position. shall inspect haulage equipment before (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro- each shift. vided for storing drill steel located on (ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- jumbos. ty and health shall be corrected before (6) Employees working below jumbo the equipment is used. decks shall be warned whenever drill- (2) Powered mobile haulage equip- ing is about to begin. ment shall have suitable means of stop- (7) Drills on columns shall be an- ping. chored firmly before starting drilling, (3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- and shall be retightened as necessary ment, including trains, shall have audi- thereafter. ble warning devices to warn employees (8) (i) The employer shall provide me- to stay clear. The operator shall sound chanical means on the top deck of a the warning device before moving the jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma- equipment and whenever necessary terial. during travel. (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10 (ii) The operator shall assure that feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer lights which are visible to employees shall install stairs wide enough for two at both ends of any mobile equipment, persons. including a train, are turned on when- (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet ever the equipment is operating. (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped (4) In those cabs where glazing is with guardrails on all open sides, ex- used, the glass shall be safety glass, or cluding access openings of platforms, its equivalent, and shall be maintained unless an adjacent surface provides and cleaned so that vision is not ob- equivalent fall protection. structed. (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the (5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes operator shall be allowed to ride on shall be installed on inclined conveyor jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re- drive units to prevent conveyors from quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of inadvertently running in reverse. this section. (6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre- mitted to ride a power-driven chain, vent movement while employees are belt, or bucket conveyor unless the working on them. conveyor is specifically designed for (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces the transportation of persons. of jumbos shall be maintained to pre- (B) Endless belt-type manlifts are vent the hazards of slipping, tripping prohibited in underground construc- and falling. tion. (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads (C) General requirements also appli- shall be designed to be slip-resistent cable to underground construction for and secured to prevent accidental dis- use of conveyors in construction are placement. found in § 1926.555 of this part. (9) Scaling bars shall be available at (ii) No employee shall ride haulage scaling operations and shall be main- equipment unless it is equipped with tained in good condition at all times. seating for each passenger and protects Blunted or severely worn bars shall not passengers from being struck, crushed, be used. or caught between other equipment or (10) (i) Blasting holes shall not be surfaces. Members of train crews may drilled through blasted rock (muck) or ride on a locomotive if it is equipped water. with handholds and nonslip steps or (ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro- footboards. Requirements applicable to tected either by location or by suitable Underground Construction for motor barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part. containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip- (11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post- unattended unless the master switch or ed where air lines are buried or other- motor is turned off; operating controls wise hidden by water or debris. are in neutral or park position; and the

426

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00426 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

brakes are set, or equivalent pre- transported with employees in man- cautions are taken to prevent rolling. cars, or on top of a locomotive. (8) Whenever rails serve as a return (ii) When small hand tools or other for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be small items are carried on top of a lo- bonded at every joint and crossbonded comotive, the top shall be designed or every 200 feet (60.96 m). modified to retain them while trav- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the eling. car dumps shall have tiedown chains, (18)(i) Where switching facilities are bumper blocks, or other locking or available, occupied personnel-cars shall holding devices to prevent the cars be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars from overturning. must be pushed and visibility of the (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump track ahead is hampered, then a quali- cars shall be equipped with positive fied person shall be stationed in the locking devices to prevent unintended lead car to give signals to the loco- dumping. motive operator. (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be (ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- loaded and secured to prevent sliding sonnel-loads only. or dislodgement. (s) Electrical safety. This paragraph (12)(i) Mobile equipment, including applies in addition to the general re- rail-mounted equipment, shall be quirements for electrical safety which stopped for manual connecting or serv- are found in subpart K of this part. ice work. (1) Electric power lines shall be insulated or located away from water lines, (ii) Employees shall not reach be- telephone lines, air lines, or other con- tween moving cars during coupling op- ductive materials so that a damaged erations. circuit will not energize the other sys- (iii) Couplings shall not be aligned, tems. shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo- (2) Lighting circuits shall be located comotives. so that movement of personnel or (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec- equipment will not damage the circuits tions shall be used in addition to cou- or disrupt service. plers to connect man cars or powder (3) Oil-filled transformers shall not cars whenever the locomotive is uphill be used underground unless they are lo- of the cars. cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- (ii) When the grade exceeds one per- ably vented to the outside and sur- cent and there is a potential for run- rounded by a dike to retain the con- away cars, safety chains or other contents of the transformers in the event nections shall be used in addition to of rupture. couplers to connect haulage cars or, as (t) Hoisting unique to underground con- an alternative, the locomotive must be struction. Except as modified by this downhill of the train. paragraph (t), the following provisions (iii) Such safety chains or other con- of subpart N of this part apply: Re- nections shall be capable of maintain- quirements for cranes are found in ing connection between cars in the § 1926.550 of this part. Paragraph (g) of event of either coupler disconnect, fail- § 1926.550 applies to crane-hoisting of ure or breakage. personnel, except that the limitation (14) Parked rail equipment shall be in paragraph (g)(2) does not apply to chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to the routine access of employees to the prevent inadvertent movement. underground via a shaft. Requirements (15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety for material hoists are found in hooks, or equivalent means shall be § 1926.552 (a) and (b) of this part. Re- provided to prevent overtravel and quirements for personnel hoists are overturning of haulage equipment at found in the personnel hoist require- dumping locations. ments of § 1926.552 (a) and (c) of this (16) Bumper blocks or equivalent part and in the elevator requirement of stopping devices shall be provided at § 1926.552 (a) and (d) of this part. all track dead ends. (1) General requirements for cranes and (17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies pails or similar small items may be being raised or lowered, whether within

427

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00427 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or only to limit travel of loads when oper- stacked in a manner to prevent the ational controls malfunction and shall load from shifting, snagging or falling not be used as a substitute for other into the shaft. operational controls. (ii) A warning light suitably located (3) Additional requirements for hoists. to warn employees at the shaft bottom (i) Hoists shall be designed so that the and subsurface shaft entrances shall load hoist drum is powered in both di- flash whenever a load is above the rections of rotation, and so that brakes shaft bottom or subsurface entrances, are automatically applied upon power or the load is being moved in the shaft. release or failure. This paragraph does not apply to fully (ii) Control levers shall be of the enclosed hoistways. ‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully matically to their center (neutral) po- enclosed and employees are at the sition upon release. shaft bottom, conveyances or equip- (iii) When a hoist is used for both ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet personnel hoisting and material hoist- (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft ing, load and speed ratings for per- and held there until the signalman at sonnel and for materials shall be as- the bottom of the shaft directs the op- signed to the equipment. erator to continue lowering the load, (iv) Material hoisting may be per- except that the load may be lowered formed at speeds higher than the rated without stopping if the load or convey- speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist ance is within full view of a bottom and components have been designed for signalman who is in constant voice such higher speeds and if shaft condi- communication with the operator. tions permit. (iv) (A) Before maintenance, repairs, (v) Employees shall not ride on top of or other work is commenced in the any cage, skip or bucket except when shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket, necessary to perform inspection or the operator and other employees in maintenance of the hoisting system, in the area shall be informed and given which case they shall be protected by a suitable instructions. body belt/harness system to prevent (B) A sign warning that work is being falling. done in the shaft shall be installed at (vi) Personnel and materials (other the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta- than small tools and supplies secured tion, and at each underground landing. in a manner that will not create a haz- (v) Any connection between the ards to employees) shall not be hoisted hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall together in the same conveyance. How- be compatible with the type of wire ever, if the operator is protected from rope used for hoisting. the shifting of materials, then the op- (vi) Spin-type connections, where erator may ride with materials in used, shall be maintained in a clean cages or skips which are designed to be condition and protected from foreign controlled by an operator within the matter that could affect their oper- cage or skip. ation. (vii) Line speed shall not exceed the (vii) Cage, skip, and load connections design limitations of the systems. to the hoist rope shall be made so that (viii) Hoists shall be equipped with the force of the hoist pull, vibration, landing level indicators at the opera- misalignment, release of lift force, or tor’s station. Marking of the hoist rope impact will not disengage the connec- does not satisfy this requirement. tion. Moused or latched open-throat (ix) Whenever glazing is used in the hooks do not meet this requirement. hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or (viii) When using wire rope wedge its equivalent, and be free of distor- sockets, means shall be provided to tions and obstructions. prevent wedge escapement and to en- (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated sure that the wedge is properly seated. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry (2) Additional requirements for cranes. chemical) shall be mounted in each Cranes shall be equipped with a limit hoist house. switch to prevent overtravel at the (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged boom tip. Limit switches are to be used so that the operator can perform all

428

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00428 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

operating cycle functions and reach the weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- emergency power cutoff without hav- able operation and safe condition. ing to reach beyond the operator’s nor- (xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper- mal operating position. ation and safe condition of all func- (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with tions and safety devices, each hoist as- limit switches to prevent overtravel at sembly shall be inspected and load- the top and bottom of the hoistway. tested to 100 percent of its rated capac- (xiii) Limit switches are to be used ity: at the time of installation; after only to limit travel of loads when oper- any repairs or alterations affecting its ational controls malfunction and shall structural integrity; after the oper- not be used as a substitute for other ation of any safety device; and annu- operational controls. ally when in use. The employer shall (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro- prepare a certification record which in- vided with a closed-circuit voice com- cludes the date each inspection and munication system to each landing sta- load-test was performed; the signature tion, with speaker-microphones so lo- of the person who performed the in- cated that the operator can commu- spection and test; and a serial number nicate with individual landing stations or other identifier for the hoist that during hoist use. was inspected and tested. The most recent certification record shall be main- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86 tained on file until completion of the m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and project. buckets that may swing, bump, or snag (xxii) Before hoisting personnel or against shaft sides or other structural material, the operator shall perform a protrusions shall be guided by fenders, test run of any cage or skip whenever rails, ropes, or a combination of those it has been out of service for one com- means. plete shift, and whenever the assembly (xvi) When sinking shafts more than or components have been repaired or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages, adjusted. skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail- (xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- guided to within a rail length from the rected before using the equipment. sinking operation. (4) Additional requirements for per- (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems completed shafts, or in all shafts being shall be equipped with at least two used as completed shafts, shall be rope means of stopping the load, each of or rail-guided for the full length of which shall be capable of stopping and their travel. holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety material hoists shall be capable of sup- catch, or arrestment device is not a porting, without failure, at least five permissible means of stopping under times the maximum intended load or this paragraph. the factor recommended by the rope (ii) The operator shall remain within manufacturer, whichever is greater. sight and sound of the signals at the Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part operator’s station. for design factors for wire rope used in (iii) All sides of personnel cages shall personnel hoists. The design factor be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm) shall be calculated by dividing the wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge breaking strength of wire rope, as re- or equivalent) to a height of not less ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta- than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the bles, by the total static load, including cage or skip is being used as a work the weight of the wire rope in the shaft platform, its sides may be reduced in when fully extended. height to 42 inches 1.07 m) when the (xix) A competent person shall vis- conveyance is not in motion. ually check all hoisting machinery, (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro- equipment, anchorages, and hoisting vided with positive locking door that rope at the beginning of each shift and does not open outward. during hoist use, as necessary. (v) All personnel cages shall be pro- (xx) Each safety device shall be vided with a protective canopy. The checked by a competent person at least canopy shall be made of steel plate, at

429

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00429 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.801 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

least 3⁄16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness, shield shall be erected therein for the or material of equivalent strength and protection of the employees. impact resistance. The canopy shall be (b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy- sloped to the outside, and so designed drostatic or air-pressure test, at which that a section may be readily pushed pressure they shall be tight. The shaft upward to afford emergency egress. shall be stamped on the outside shell The canopy shall cover the top in such about 12 inches from each flange to a manner as to protect those inside show the pressure to which they have from objects falling in the shaft. been subjected. (vi) Personnel platforms operating on (c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall guide rails or guide ropes shall be be provided, where space permits, with equipped with broken-rope safety de- a safe, proper, and suitable staircase vices, safety catches or arrestment de- for its entire length, including landing vices that will stop and hold 150 percent of the weight of the personnel platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. platform and its maximum rated load. Where this is impracticable, suitable (vii) During sinking operations in ladders shall be installed with landing shafts where guides and safeties are platforms located about 20 feet apart to not yet used, the travel speed of the break the climb. personnel platform shall not exceed 200 (d) All caissons having a diameter or feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per vided with a man lock and shaft for the minute shall be installed in the control exclusive use of employees. system and shall be used during per- (e) In addition to the gauge in the sonnel hoisting. locks, an accurate gauge shall be main- (viii) The personnel platform may tained on the outer and inner side of travel over the controlled length of the each bulkhead. These gauges shall be hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet accessible at all times and kept in ac- (182.88 m) per minute during sinking curate working order. operations in shafts where guides and (f) In caisson operations where em- safeties are used. ployees are exposed to compressed air (ix) The personnel platform may working environments, the require- travel at rated speeds greater than 600 ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed complied with. shafts. (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de- § 1926.802 Cofferdams. vice, equipment, or appliance that is (a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by either approved by MSHA and maintained in permissible condition, or is high waters is possible, means shall be listed or labeled for the class and loca- provided for controlled flooding of the tion under subpart K of this part. work area. ‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun- (b) Warning signals for evacuation of nel boring machines, shields, employees in case of emergency shall roadheaders, or any other similar exca- be developed and posted. vation machine. (c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or ramps with at least two means of rapid [54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June exit shall be provided with guardrails 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998] as specified in subpart M of this part. (d) Cofferdams located close to navi- § 1926.801 Caissons. gable shipping channels shall be pro- (a) Wherever, in caisson work in tected from vessels in transit, where which compressed air is used, and the possible. working chamber is less than 11 feet in § 1926.803 Compressed air. length, and when such caissons are at any time suspended or hung while work (a) General provisions. (1) There shall is in progress so that the bottom of the be present, at all times, at least one excavation is more than 9 feet below competent person designated by and the deck of the working chamber, a representing the employer, who shall

430

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00430 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

be familiar with this subpart in all re- sible the cause of said death or decom- spects, and responsible for full compli- pression illness, and the place where ance with these and other applicable the injured or sick employee was subparts. taken, and such other relative informa- (2) Every employee shall be in- tion as may be required by the Sec- structed in the rules and regulations retary. which concern his safety or the safety (7) A fully equipped first aid station of others. shall be provided at each tunnel project (b) Medical attendance, examination, regardless of the number of persons and regulations. (1) There shall be re- employed. An ambulance or transpor- tained one or more licensed physicians tation suitable for a litter case shall be familiar with and experienced in the at each project. physical requirements and the medical (8) Where tunnels are being excavated aspects of compressed air work and the from portals more than 5 road miles treatment of decompression illness. He apart, a first aid station and transpor- shall be available at all times while tation facilities shall be provided at work is in progress in order to provide each portal. medical supervision of employees em- (9) A medical lock shall be estab- ployed in compressed air work. He lished and maintained in immediate shall himself be physically qualified working order whenever air pressure in and be willing to enter a pressurized the working chamber is increased environment. above the normal atmosphere. (2) No employee shall be permitted to (10) The medical lock shall: enter a compressed air environment (i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- until he has been examined by the phy- room at the center, and be subdivided sician and reported by him to be phys- into not less than two compartments; ically qualified to engage in such work. (ii) Be readily accessible to employ- (3) In the event an employee is absent ees working under compressed air; from work for 10 days, or is absent due (iii) Be kept ready for immediate use to sickness or injury, he shall not re- for at least 5 hours subsequent to the sume work until he is reexamined by emergence of any employee from the the physician, and his physical condi- working chamber; tion reported, as provided in this para- (iv) Be properly heated, lighted and graph, to be such as to permit him to ventilated; work in compressed air. (v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- (4) After an employee has been em- dition; ployed continuously in compressed air (vi) Have a nonshatterable port for a period designated by the physi- through which the occupant(s) may be cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall kept under constant observation; be reexamined by the physician to de- (vii) Be designed for a working pres- termine if he is still physically quali- sure of 75 p.s.i.g. fied to engage in compressed air work. (viii) Be equipped with internal con- (5) Such physician shall at all times trols which may be overridden by ex- keep a complete and full record of external controls; aminations made by him. The physi- (ix) Be provided with air pressure cian shall also keep an accurate record gauges to show the air pressure within of any decompression illness or other each compartment to observers inside illness or injury incapacitating any and outside the medical lock. employee for work, and of all loss of (x) Be equipped with a manual type life that occurs in the operation of a sprinkler system that can be activated tunnel, caisson, or other compartment inside the lock or by the outside lock in which compressed air is used. tender. (6) Records shall be available for the (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines inspection of the Secretary or his rep- and fittings leading into external resentatives, and a copy thereof shall tanks. The lines shall be fitted with be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours check valves to prevent reverse flow. following the occurrence of the acci- The oxygen system inside the chamber dent, death, injury, or decompression shall be of a closed circuit design and illness. It shall state as fully as pos- be so designed as to automatically shut

431

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00431 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

off the oxygen supply whenever the fire (d) Signs and records. (1) The time of system is activated. decompression shall be posted in each (xii) Be in constant charge of an at- man lock as follows: tendant under the direct control of the retained physician. The attendant shall TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK be trained in the use of the lock and ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. suitably instructed regarding steps to ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. be taken in the treatment of employee (Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) exhibiting symptoms compatible with This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at a diagnosis of decompression illness; all times. (xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate emergency medical facility; (2) Any code of signals used shall be (xiv) The medical facility shall be conspicuously posted near workplace equipped with demand-type oxygen in- entrances and such other locations as halation equipment approved by the may be necessary to bring them to the U.S. Bureau of Mines; attention of all employees concerned. (xv) Be capable of being maintained (3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of at a temperature, in use, not to exceed employees employed under air pressure ° ° 90 F. nor be less than 70 F.; and shall be kept by an employee who shall (xvi) Be provided with sources of air, remain outside the lock near the en- free of oil and carbon monoxide, for trance. This record shall show the pe- normal and emergency use, which are riod each employee spends in the air capable of raising the air pressure in chamber and the time taken from de- the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min- compression. A copy shall be submitted utes. to the appointed physician after each (11) Identification badges shall be shift. furnished to all employees, indicating (e) Compression. (1) Every employee that the wearer is a compressed air going under air pressure for the first worker. A permanent record shall be time shall be instructed on how to kept of all identification badges issued. avoid excessive discomfort. The badge shall give the employee’s name, address of the medical lock, the (2) During the compression of em- telephone number of the licensed phy- ployees, the pressure shall not be in- sician for the compressed air project, creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within and contain instructions that in case of the first minute. The pressure shall be emergency of unknown or doubtful held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. cause or illness, the wearer shall be sufficiently long to determine if any rushed to the medical lock. The badge employees are experiencing discomfort. shall be worn at all times—off the job, (3) After the first minute the pres- as well as on the job. sure shall be raised uniformly and at a (c) Telephone and signal communica- rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of (4) If any employee complains of dis- communication, such as bells, whistles, comfort, the pressure shall be held to or telephones, shall be maintained, at determine if the symptoms are re- all times between all the following lo- lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom- cations: fort does not disappear, the lock at- (i) The working chamber face; tendant shall gradually reduce the (ii) The working chamber side of the pressure until the employee signals man lock near the door; that the discomfort has ceased. If he (iii) The interior of the man lock; does not indicate that the discomfort (iv) Lock attendant’s station; has disappeared, the lock attendant (v) The compressor plant; shall reduce the pressure to atmos- (vi) The first-aid station; pheric and the employee shall be re- (vii) The emergency lock (if one is released from the lock. quired); and (5) No employee shall be subjected to (viii) The special decompression pressure exceeding 50 pounds per chamber (if one is required). square inch except in emergency.

432

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00432 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

(f) Decompression. (1) Decompression variations in pressure within the man to normal condition shall be in accord- lock and shall be visible to the lock at- ance with the Decompression Tables in tendant. A copy of each graph shall be Appendix A of this subpart. submitted to the appointed physician (2) In the event it is necessary for an after each shift. In addition, a pressure employee to be in compressed air more gauge, clock, and thermometer shall than once in a 24-hour period, the ap- also be installed in each man lock. Ad- pointed physician shall be responsible ditional fittings shall be provided so for the establishment of methods and that test gauges may be attached procedures of decompression applicable whenever necessary. to repetitive exposures. (vi) Except where air pressure is (3) If decanting is necessary, the ap- below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger pointed physician shall establish proce- of rapid flooding, all caissons having a dures before any employee is permitted working area greater than 150 square to be decompressed by decanting meth- feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 ods. The period of time that the em- feet or more in diameter, or equivalent ployees spend at atmospheric pressure area, shall have at least two locks in between the decompression following perfect working condition, one of the shift and recompression shall not which shall be used exclusively as a exceed 5 minutes. man lock, the other, as a materials (g) Man locks and special decompres- lock. sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except (vii) Where only a combination man- in emergency, no employees employed and-materials lock is required, this in compressed air shall be permitted to single lock shall be of sufficient capac- pass from the working chamber to at- ity to hold the employees constituting mospheric pressure until after decom- two successive shifts. pression, in accordance with the proce- (viii) Emergency locks shall be large dures in this subpart. enough to hold an entire heading shift (ii) The lock attendant in charge of a and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. man lock shall be under the direct supervision of the appointed physician. There shall be a chamber available for He shall be stationed at the lock con- oxygen decompression therapy to 28 trols on the free air side during the pe- p.s.i.g. riod of compression and decompression (ix) The man lock shall be large and shall remain at the lock control enough so that those using it are not station whenever there are men in the compelled to be in a cramped position, working chamber or in the man lock. and shall not have less than 5 feet clear (iii) Except where air pressure in the head room at the center and a min- working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g., imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per each man lock shall be equipped with occupant. automatic controls which, through (x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- taped programs, cams, or similar appa- cated that the bottom door shall be not ratus, shall automatically regulate de- less than 3 feet above the water level compressions. It shall also be equipped surrounding the caisson on the outside. with manual controls to permit the (The water level, where it is affected by lock attendant to override the auto- tides, is construed to mean high tide.) matic mechanism in the event of an (xi) In addition to the pressure gauge emergency, as provided in paragraph in the locks, an accurate pressure (g)(1)(viii) of this section. gauge shall be maintained on the outer (iv) A manual control, which can be and inner side of each bulkhead. These used in the event of an emergency, gauges shall be accessible at all times shall be placed inside the man lock. and shall be kept in accurate working (v) A clock, thermometer, and con- order. tinuous recording pressure gauge with (xii) Man locks shall have an observa- a 4-hour graph shall be installed out- tion port at least 4 inches in diameter side of each man lock and shall be located in such a position that all oc- changed prior to each shift’s decom- cupants of the man lock may be ob- pression. The chart shall be of suffi- served from the working chamber and cient size to register a legible record of from the free air side of the lock.

433

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00433 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(xiii) Adequate ventilation in the (f) An observation port at the en- lock shall be provided. trance to permit observation of the (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained chamber occupants. at a minimum temperature of 70 °F. (iii) Seating facilities in special de- (xv) When locks are not in use and compression chambers shall be so ar- employees are in the working chamber, ranged as to permit a normal sitting lock doors shall be kept open to the posture without cramping. Seating working chamber, where practicable. space, not less than 18 inches by 24 (xvi) Provision shall be made to inches wide, shall be provided per occu- allow for rescue parties to enter the pant. tunnel if the working force is disabled. (iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa- (xvii) A special decompression cham- cilities, in a screened or enclosed re- ber of sufficient size to accommodate cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls the entire force of employees being de- shall have a built-in protector on the compressed at the end of a shift shall be provided whenever the regularly es- rim so that an air space is created tablished working period requires a when the seat lid is closed. total time of decompression exceeding (v) Fresh and pure drinking water 75 minutes. shall be available. This may be accom- (2) Special decompression chamber. (i) plished by either piping water into the The headroom in the special decom- special decompression chamber and pression chamber shall be not less than providing drinking fountains, or by a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con- providing individual canteens, or by tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet some other sanitary means. Commu- of airspace for each employee. For each nity drinking vessels are prohibited. occupant, there shall be provided 4 (vi) No refuse or discarded material square feet of free walking area and 3 of any kind shall be permitted to accu- square feet of seating space, exclusive mulate, and the chamber shall be kept of area required for lavatory and toilet clean. facilities. The rated capacity shall be (vii) Unless the special decompres- based on the stated minimum space per sion chamber is serving as the man employee and shall be posted at the lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- chamber entrance. The posted capacity cial decompression chamber shall be shall not be exceeded, except in case of situated, where practicable, adjacent emergency. to the man lock on the atmospheric (ii) Each special decompression pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- chamber shall be equipped with the fol- sageway shall be provided, connecting lowing: the special chamber with the man lock, (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed to permit employees in the process of so that the attendant and the chamber decompression to move from the man occupants can readily ascertain the lock to the special chamber without a time; (b) Pressure gauges which will indi- reduction in the ambient pressure from cate to the attendants and to the that designated for the next stage of chamber occupants the pressure in the decompression. The passageway shall chamber; be so arranged as to not interfere with (c) Valves to enable the attendant to the normal operation of the man lock, control the supply and discharge of nor with the release of the occupants of compressed air into and from the the special chamber to atmospheric chamber; pressure upon the completion of the de- (d) Valves and pipes, in connection compression procedure. with the air supply and exhaust, ar- (h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1) ranged so that the chamber pressure At all times there shall be a thor- can be controlled from within and oughly experienced, competent, and re- without; liable person on duty at the air control (e) Effective means of oral inter- valves as a gauge tender who shall reg- communication between the attendant, ulate the pressure in the working occupants of the chamber, and the air areas. During tunneling operations, compressor plant; and one gauge tender may regulate the

434

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00434 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

pressure in not more than two head- pressure air supply line to the heading ings: Provided, That the gauge and con- to eliminate such pockets of dead air. trols are all in one location. In caisson Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 work, there shall be a gauge tender for cubic feet per minute. each caisson. (2) The air in the workplace shall be (2) The low air compressor plant shall analyzed by the employer not less than be of sufficient capacity to not only once each shift, and records of such permit the work to be done safely, but tests shall be kept on file at the place shall also provide a margin to meet where the work is in progress. The test emergencies and repairs. results shall be within the threshold (3) Low air compressor units shall limit values specified in subpart D of have at least two independent and sep- this part, for hazardous gases, and arate sources of power supply and each within 10 percent of the lower explosive shall be capable of operating the entire limit of flammable gases. If these lim- low air plant and its accessory sys- its are not met, immediate action to tems. correct the situation shall be taken by (4) The capacity, arrangement, and the employer. number of compressors shall be suffi- (3) The temperature of all working cient to maintain the necessary pres- chambers which are subjected to air sure without overloading the equip- pressure shall, by means of after-cool- ment and to assure maintenance of ers or other suitable devices, be main- such pressure in the working chamber tained at a temperature not to exceed during periods of breakdown, repair, or 85 °F. emergency. (4) Forced ventilation shall be pro- (5) Switching from one independent vided during decompression. During source of power supply to the other the entire decompression period, forced shall be done periodically to ensure the ventilation through chemical or me- workability of the apparatus in an chanical air purifying devices that will emergency. ensure a source of fresh air shall be (6) Duplicate low-pressure air provided. feedlines and regulating valves shall be (5) Whenever heat-producing ma- provided between the source of air sup- chines (moles, shields) are used in comply and a point beyond the locks with pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- one of the lines extending to within 100 tive means of removing the heat build- feet of the working face. up at the heading shall be provided. (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup- (j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in comply lines shall be equipped with check pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- valves. tricity exclusively, and two inde- (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu- pendent electric-lighting systems with lated automatically. In addition, independent sources of supply shall be manually operated valves shall be pro- used. The emergency source shall be vided for emergency conditions. arranged to become automatically op- (9) The air intakes for all air com- erative in the event of failure of the pressors shall be located at a place regularly used source. where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other (2) The minimum intensity of light air contaminants will be at a min- on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or imum. working level shall be not less than 10 (10) Gauges indicating the pressure in foot-candles, and in all workplaces the the working chamber shall be installed lighting shall at all times be such as to in the compressor building, the lock at- enable employees to see clearly. tendant’s station, and at the employ- (3) All electrical equipment and wir- er’s field office. ing for light and power circuits shall (i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex- comply with the requirements of sub- haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be part K of this part for use in damp, provided and operated so that the hazardous, high temperature, and com- working chamber shall be well venti- pressed air environments. lated, and there shall be no pockets of (4) External parts of lighting fixtures dead air. Outlets may be required at in- and all other electrical equipment, termediate points along the main low- when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be

435

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00435 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

constructed of noncombustible, non- tilating equipment, shall be provided absorptive, insulating materials, ex- with at least one hose connection in cept that metal may be used if it is ef- the water line, with a fire hose con- fectively grounded. nected thereto. A fire hose shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped maintained within reach of structures with noncombustible, nonabsorptive, of wood over or near shafts. insulating sockets, approved handles, (6) Tunnels shall be provided with a basket guards, and approved cords. 2-inch minimum diameter water line (6) The use of worn or defective port- extending into the working chamber able and pendant conductors is prohib- and to within 100 feet of the working ited. face. Such line shall have hose outlets (k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated, with 100 feet of fire hose attached and lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms maintained as follows: One at the and drying rooms shall be provided for working face; one immediately inside all employees engaged in compressed of the bulkhead of the working cham- air work. Such rooms shall contain ber; and one immediately outside such suitable benches and lockers. Bathing bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets accommodations (showers at the ratio shall be provided at 200-foot intervals of one to 10 employees per shift), throughout the length of the tunnel, equipped with running hot and cold and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- water, and suitable and adequate toilet tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- accommodations, shall be provided. cation where flammable material is One toilet for each 15 employees, or being kept or stored or where any fractional part thereof, shall be pro- flame is being used. vided. (7) In addition to fire hose protection (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a required by this subpart, on every floor cover, there should be an air space so of every building not under compressed that the bowl or bucket does not im- air, but used in connection with the plode when pressure is increased. compressed air work, there shall be (3) All parts of caissons and other provided at least one approved fire ex- working compartments shall be kept in tinguisher of the proper type for the a sanitary condition. hazard involved. At least two approved (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1) Firefighting equipment shall be avail- fire extinguishers shall be provided in able at all times and shall be main- the working chamber as follows: One at tained in working condition. the working face and one immediately (2) While welding or flame-cutting is inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- being done in compressed air, a tinguishers in the working chamber firewatch with a fire hose or approved shall use water as the primary extin- extinguisher shall stand by until such guishing agent and shall not use any operation is completed. extinguishing agent which could be (3) Shafts and caissons containing harmful to the employees in the work- flammable material of any kind, either ing chamber. The fire extinguisher above or below ground, shall be pro- shall be protected from damage. vided with a waterline and a fire hose (8) Highly combustible materials connected thereto, so arranged that all shall not be used or stored in the work- points of the shaft or caisson are with- ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar in reach of the hose stream. combustible material shall not be used (4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2 in the working chamber in quantities inches in nominal diameter; the water which could cause a fire hazard. The pressure shall at all times be adequate compressor building shall be con- for efficient operation of the type of structed of non-combustible material. nozzle used; and the water supply shall (9) Man locks shall be equipped with be such as to ensure an uninterrupted a manual type fire extinguisher system flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall that can be activated inside the man be located or guarded to prevent injury lock and also by the outside lock at- thereto. tendant. In addition, a fire hose and (5) The power house, compressor portable fire extinguisher shall be pro- house, and all buildings housing ven- vided inside and outside the man lock.

436

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00436 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.804

The portable fire extinguisher shall be the highest air pressure which may be the dry chemical type. expected to be used. (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, niture in man locks and special decom- 1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6, pression chambers shall be constructed 1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, of noncombustible materials. Bedding, Feb. 13, 1996] etc., shall be chemically treated so as to be fire resistant. § 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (11) Head frames shall be constructed of structural steel or open frame-work (a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure fireproofed timber. Head houses and separating the working chamber from other temporary surface buildings or free air or from another chamber under structures within 100 feet of the shaft, a lesser pressure than the working caisson, or tunnel opening shall be pressure. built of fire-resistant materials. (b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete or reinforced concrete, air- and water- (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus- tight chamber in which it is possible tible material shall be stored within for men to work under air pressure 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel greater than atmospheric pressure to opening, except that oils may be stored excavate material below water level. in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof (c) Decanting—A method used for de- buildings, provided such buildings are compressing under emergency cir- not less than 50 feet from any shaft, cumstances. In this procedure, the em- caisson, or tunnel opening, or any ployees are brought to atmospheric building directly connected thereto. pressure with a very high gas tension (13) Positive means shall be taken to in the tissues and then immediately re- prevent leaking flammable liquids compressed in a second and separate from flowing into the areas specifically chamber or lock. mentioned in the preceding paragraph. (d) Emergency locks—A lock designed (14) All explosives used in connection to hold and permit the quick passage of with compressed air work shall be se- an entire shift of employees. lected, stored, transported, and used as (e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- specified in subpart U of this part. ply power to pneumatic tools and de- (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1) vices. Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or (f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize intermediate safety screens or both, working chambers and locks. are required where there is the danger (g) Man lock—A chamber through of rapid flooding. which men pass from one air pressure (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di- environment into another. ameter, hanging walkways shall be (h) Materials lock—A chamber provided from the face to the man lock through which materials and equipment pass from one air pressure envi- as high in the tunnel as practicable, ronment into another. with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk- (i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ways shall be constructed of non- which employees are treated for de- combustible material. Standard rail- compression illness. It may also be ings shall be securely installed used in preemployment physical ex- throughout the length of all walkways aminations to determine the adapt- on open sides in accordance with sub- ability of the prospective employee to part M of this part. Where walkways changes in pressure. are ramped under safety screens, the (j) Normal condition—One during walkway surface shall be skidproofed which exposure to compressed air is by cleats or by equivalent means. limited to a single continuous working (3) Bulkheads used to contain com- period followed by a single decompres- pressed air shall be tested, where prac- sion in any given 24-hour period; the ticable, to prove their ability to resist total time of exposure to compressed

437

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00437 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

air during the single continuous work- Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the ing period is not interrupted by expo- body of the table the total decompression sure to normal atmospheric pressure, time in minutes for various combinations of and a second exposure to compressed working chamber pressure and exposure time. air does not occur until at least 12 con- Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for secutive hours of exposure to normal the same various combinations of working atmospheric pressure has elapsed since chamber pressure and exposure time the fol- the employee has been under pressure. lowing: (k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit a. The number of stages required; area. Usually shown as pounds per b. The reduction in pressure and the ter- square inch. (p.s.i.) minal pressure for each required stage; c. The time in minutes through which the (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The reduction in pressure is accomplished for sum of the atmospheric pressure and each required stage; gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.). d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres- per pound for each required stage; sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7 IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction in p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g. Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values measured by a gauge and indicating Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher the pressure exceeding atmospheric. Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Ex- posure Time Should the Actual Working (o) Safety screen—An air- and water- Chamber Pressure or the Actual Exposure tight diaphragm placed across the Time, Respectively, Fall Between Those upper part of a compressed air tunnel for Which Calculated Values Are Shown in between the face and bulkhead, in the Body of the Tables. order to prevent flooding the crown of the tunnel between the safety screen Examples Minutes and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20 means of refuge and exit from a flood- pounds gauge. ing or flooded tunnel. Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4 hours, total decompression time ...... 43 (p) Special decompression chamber—A Decompression Table No. 2: chamber to provide greater comfort of Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds employees when the total decompres- to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 pounds per minute. sion time exceeds 75 minutes. Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ...... 3 (q) Working chamber—The space or Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a compartment under air pressure in uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound gage over a period of 40 minutes. which the work is being done. RateÐ0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes per pound. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S— Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ...... 40 DECOMPRESSION TABLES 1. Explanation. The decompression tables Total time ...... 43 Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24 are computed for working chamber pressures pounds gage. from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5 per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound hours, total decompression time ...... 117 increments and for exposure times for each Decompression Table No. 2: pressure extending from one-half to over 8 Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con- to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 ducted by two or more stages with a max- pounds per minute. Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ...... 3 imum of four stages, the latter for a working Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period inch gauge or over. of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient elapsed time, stage 2 ...... 4 pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16 Transfer men to special decompression pounds per square inch, but in no instance chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres- will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds sure during the transfer operation. Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decom- at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres- pression chamber, reduce the pressure at sure in stage 1 will always take place at a a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute. gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate, Further reduction in pressure will take 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110 required at a slower rate, but in no event at Total time ...... 117 a rate greater than 1 pound per minute.

438

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00438 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1ÐTOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours Work pressure p.s.i.g. 1 1 Over ¤2 1 1 ¤2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8

9 to 12 ...... 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 14 ...... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33 16 ...... 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62 18 ...... 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87 20 ...... 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113 22 ...... 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133 24 ...... 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151 26 ...... 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163 28 ...... 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183 30 ...... 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204 32 ...... 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226 34 ...... 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248 36 ...... 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273 38 ...... 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278 40 ...... 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288 42 ...... 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293 44 ...... 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293 46 ...... 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318 48 ...... 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ...... 50 ...... 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 ......

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2 [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

Decompression data Working chamber pressure Working Total time p.s.i.g. period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure decom- hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min- From To utes Min/pound utes

14 ...... 1¤2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 11¤2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 30 7.50 32 16 ...... 1¤2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11¤2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 3.50 17 6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 30 7.50 33

439

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00439 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 18 ...... 1¤2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11¤2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 8 2.00 11 4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 17 5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 84 21.00 87 20 ...... 1¤2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11¤2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 40 10.00 43 5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 80 20.00 83 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 100 25.00 103 Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 110 27.50 113 22 ...... 1¤2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 11¤2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 13 2.20 16 2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 21 3.50 24 3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 35 5.85 38 4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 65 10.83 68 5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 90 15.00 93 6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 100 16.67 103

440

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00440 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 110 18.35 113 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 125 20.80 128 Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 130 21.70 133 24 ...... 1¤2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 11 1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 12 11¤2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 16 4.00 23 2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 27 3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 45 11.25 52 4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.25 92 5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 117 6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.80 122 7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 127 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 137 Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 8 2.00 ...... 3 4 0 140 35.00 151 26 ...... 1¤2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 13 1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 14 11¤2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 29 2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 34 3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 69 4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 95 23.75 104 5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 8 1.33 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.80 126 6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 8 1.33 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 141 7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ...... 2 10 4 9 1.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 142

441

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00441 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 9 1.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 142 Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 30 5.00 ...... 3 4 0 30 32.50 163 28 ...... 1¤2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 15 1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 12 3.00 23 11¤2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 31 2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 41 3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 10 1.25 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.20 98 4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 14 1.75 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 127 5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 143 6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 153 7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 120 32.50 153 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 32 4.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 50 6.25 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 183 30 ...... 1¤2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 17 1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 15 3.75 28 11¤2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 38 2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 14 1.40 ...... 3 4 0 45 11.25 62 3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 17 1.70 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.20 105 4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 30 3.00 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 143 5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 168 7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 45 4.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 178

442

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00442 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 55 5.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 188 Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 71 7.10 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 204 32 ...... 1¤2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 19 1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 35 11¤2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 15 1.25 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 43 2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 22 1.83 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 85 3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 28 2.33 ...... 3 4 0 95 23.75 126 4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 40 3.33 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 163 5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 45 3.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 178 6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 60 5.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 193 7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 70 5.83 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 203 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 80 6.67 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 213 Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 93 7.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 226 34 ...... 1¤2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 21 1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 22 5.50 39 11¤2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 25 1.80 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 58 2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 35 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 98 3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 43 3.10 ...... 3 4 0 105 26.25 151 4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 55 3.93 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 178 5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 62 4.43 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 195 6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 85 6.07 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 218 7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 90 6.43 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 223

443

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00443 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 100 7.15 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 115 8.23 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 248 36 ...... 1¤2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 16 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 24 1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 16 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 44 11¤2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 30 1.88 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 63 2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 40 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 70 17.50 113 3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 52 3.25 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.75 170 4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 65 4.06 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 198 5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 90 5.63 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 223 6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 100 6.25 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 110 6.88 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 243 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 120 7.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 253 Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 140 8.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 273 38 ...... 1¤2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 16 1.00 ...... 3 6 0 9 1.50 28 1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 16 1.00 ...... 3 6 0 30 5.00 49 11¤2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 20 1.25 ...... 3 6 0 50 8.34 73 2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 30 1.88 ...... 3 6 0 95 15.83 128 3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 35 2.19 ...... 3 6 0 140 23.35 178 4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 50 3.12 ...... 3 6 0 150 25.00 203 5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 55 3.44 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 223 6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 70 4.38 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 238 7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 85 5.32 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 253

444

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00444 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 95 5.93 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 263 Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 110 6.88 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 278 40 ...... 1¤2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 8 2.00 31 1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 5 1.25 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 49 11¤2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 20 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 45 11.25 84 2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 1 24 8 25 1.56 ...... 3 8 4 20 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 143 3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 30 1.88 ...... 3 8 4 30 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 183 4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 45 2.81 ...... 3 8 4 35 8.75 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 213 5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 47 2.94 ...... 3 8 4 53 13.25 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 233 6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 55 3.44 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 248 7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 65 4.06 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 258 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 75 4.70 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 95 5.93 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 288 42 ...... 1¤2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 12 3.00 37 1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 12 2.00 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 56 11¤2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 23 3.83 ...... 4 4 0 60 15.00 102 2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 30 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 144

445

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00445 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 50 8.34 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 189 4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 17 1.06 ...... 3 10 4 65 10.83 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 215 5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 27 1.69 ...... 3 10 4 85 14.18 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 245 6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 27 1.69 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 260 7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 30 1.88 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 263 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 35 2.19 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 60 3.75 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 293 44 ...... 1¤2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 16 4.00 43 1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 64 11¤2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 27 3.38 ...... 4 4 0 72 18.00 118 2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 40 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 154 3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 60 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 199 4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 85 10.62 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 234 5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 105 13.13 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 254 6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 115 14.38 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 264 7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ......

446

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00446 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 40 2.50 ...... 3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 293 46 ...... 1¤2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 15 3.75 44 1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 25 2.50 ...... 4 4 0 30 7.50 74 11¤2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 4 4 0 85 21.20 139 2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 47 4.70 ...... 4 4 0 105 26.25 171 3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 65 6.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 214 4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 95 9.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 244 5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 120 12.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 125 12.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 274 7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 140 14.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 289 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 150 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 299 Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 25 1.56 ...... 3 14 4 160 16.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 318 48 ...... 1¤2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 20 5.00 51 1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 35 2.92 ...... 4 4 0 35 8.75 89 11¤2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 45 3.75 ...... 4 4 0 80 20.00 144 2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 60 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 110 27.50 189

447

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00447 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐContinued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 90 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 229 4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 120 10.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 140 11.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 209 6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 160 13.33 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 309 7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 170 14.17 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 ...... 8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 170 14.17 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 ...... 50 ...... 1¤2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 58 1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 40 2.86 ...... 4 4 0 35 8.75 94 11¤2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 55 3.93 ...... 4 4 0 90 22.50 164 2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 70 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 209 3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 100 7.15 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 249 4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 130 8.58 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 279 5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 160 11.42 ......

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2ÐCONTINUED [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

4 4 0 130 32.50 309 6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 180 12.85 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 329

448

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00448 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.851

[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979; as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]

Subpart T—Demolition opening shall be protected to a height of approximately 42 inches. (h) When debris is dropped through AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction holes in the floor without the use of Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- chutes, the area onto which the mate- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 rial is dropped shall be completely en- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s closed with barricades not less than 42 Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR inches high and not less than 6 feet 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. back from the projected edge of the opening above. Signs, warning of the § 1926.850 Preparatory operations. hazard of falling materials, shall be (a) Prior to permitting employees to posted at each level. Removal shall not start demolition operations, an engi- be permitted in this lower area until neering survey shall be made, by a debris handling ceases above. competent person, of the structure to (i) All floor openings, not used as ma- determine the condition of the fram- terial drops, shall be covered over with ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of material substantial enough to support unplanned collapse of any portion of the weight of any load which may be the structure. Any adjacent structure imposed. Such material shall be prop- where employees may be exposed shall erly secured to prevent its accidental also be similarly checked. The em- movement. ployer shall have in writing evidence (j) Except for the cutting of holes in that such a survey has been performed. floors for chutes, holes through which (b) When employees are required to to drop materials, preparation of stor- work within a structure to be demol- age space, and similar necessary pre- ished which has been damaged by fire, paratory work, the demolition of exte- flood, explosion, or other cause, the rior walls and floor construction shall walls or floor shall be shored or braced. begin at the top of the structure and (c) All electric, gas, water, steam, proceed downward. Each story of exte- sewer, and other service lines shall be rior wall and floor construction shall shut off, capped, or otherwise con- be removed and dropped into the stor- trolled, outside the building line before age space before commencing the re- demolition work is started. In each moval of exterior walls and floors in case, any utility company which is in- the story next below. volved shall be notified in advance. (k) Employee entrances to multi- (d) If it is necessary to maintain any story structures being demolished shall power, water or other utilities during be completely protected by sidewalk demolition, such lines shall be tempo- sheds or canopies, or both, providing rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- protection from the face of the build- tected. ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such (e) It shall also be determined if any canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- than the building entrances or open- plosives, flammable materials, or simi- ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof), larly dangerous substances have been and shall be capable of sustaining a used in any pipes, tanks, or other load of 150 pounds per square foot. equipment on the property. When the presence of any such substances is ap- § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and parent or suspected, testing and purg- ladders. ing shall be performed and the hazard (a) Only those stairways, passage- eliminated before demolition is start- ways, and ladders, designated as means ed. of access to the structure of a building, (f) Where a hazard exists from frag- shall be used. Other access ways shall mentation of glass, such hazards shall be entirely closed at all times. be removed. (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders (g) Where a hazard exists to employ- and incidental equipment thereto, ees falling through wall openings, the which are covered by this section, shall

449

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00449 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.852 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

be periodically inspected and main- § 1926.853 Removal of materials tained in a clean safe condition. through floor openings. (c) In a multistory building, when a Any openings cut in a floor for the stairwell is being used, it shall be prop- disposal of materials shall be no larger erly illuminated by either natural or in size than 25 percent of the aggregate artificial means, and completely and of the total floor area, unless the lat- substantially covered over at a point eral supports of the removed flooring not less than two floors below the floor remain in place. Floors weakened or on which work is being performed, and otherwise made unsafe by demolition access to the floor where the work is in operations shall be shored to carry progress shall be through a properly safely the intended imposed load from lighted, protected, and separate pas- demolition operations. sageway. § 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry § 1926.852 Chutes. sections, and chimneys. (a) No material shall be dropped to (a) Masonry walls, or other sections any point lying outside the exterior of masonry, shall not be permitted to walls of the structure unless the area is fall upon the floors of the building in effectively protected. such masses as to exceed the safe car- (b) All materials chutes, or sections rying capacities of the floors. thereof, at an angle of more than 45° (b) No wall section, which is more from the horizontal, shall be entirely than one story in height, shall be per- enclosed, except for openings equipped mitted to stand alone without lateral with closures at or about floor level for bracing, unless such wall was origi- the insertion of materials. The open- nally designed and constructed to ings shall not exceed 48 inches in stand without such lateral support, and height measured along the wall of the is in a condition safe enough to be self- chute. At all stories below the top supporting. All walls shall be left in a floor, such openings shall be kept stable condition at the end of each closed when not in use. shift. (c) A substantial gate shall be in- (c) Employees shall not be permitted stalled in each chute at or near the dis- to work on the top of a wall when charge end. A competent employee weather conditions constitute a haz- shall be assigned to control the oper- ard. ation of the gate, and the backing and (d) Structural or load-supporting loading of trucks. members on any floor shall not be cut (d) When operations are not in or removed until all stories above such progress, the area surrounding the dis- a floor have been demolished and re- charge end of a chute shall be securely moved. This provision shall not pro- closed off. hibit the cutting of floor beams for the (e) Any chute opening, into which disposal of materials or for the instal- workmen dump debris, shall be pro- lation of equipment, provided that the tected by a substantial guardrail ap- requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855 proximately 42 inches above the floor are met. or other surface on which the men (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of stand to dump the material. Any space any wall being demolished shall be between the chute and the edge of planked solid, except when employees openings in the floors through which it are kept out of the area below. passes shall be solidly covered over. (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’ (f) Where the material is dumped construction, the steel framing may be from mechanical equipment or wheel- left in place during the demolition of barrows, a securely attached toeboard masonry. Where this is done, all steel or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick beams, girders, and similar structural and 6 inches high, shall be provided at supports shall be cleared of all loose each chute opening. material as the masonry demolition (g) Chutes shall be designed and con- progresses downward. structed of such strength as to elimi- (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro- nate failure due to impact of materials vided to enable employees to safely or debris loaded therein. reach or leave any scaffold or wall.

450

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00450 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.858

(h) Walls, which serve as retaining § 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, walls to support earth or adjoining and material with equipment. structures, shall not be demolished (a) Mechanical equipment shall not until such earth has been properly be used on floors or working surfaces braced or adjoining structures have unless such floors or surfaces are of been properly underpinned. sufficient strength to support the im- (i) Walls, which are to serve as re- posed load. taining walls against which debris will (b) Floor openings shall have curbs or be piled, shall not be so used unless ca- stop-logs to prevent equipment from pable of safely supporting the imposed running over the edge. load. (c) Mechanical equipment used shall meet the requirements specified in sub- § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors. parts N and O of this part. (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex- § 1926.857 Storage. tend the full span of the arch between supports. (a) The storage of waste material and (b) Before demolishing any floor debris on any floor shall not exceed the arch, debris and other material shall be allowable floor loads. removed from such arch and other ad- (b) In buildings having wooden floor jacent floor area. Planks not less than construction, the flooring boards may 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section, be removed from not more than one floor above grade to provide storage full size undressed, shall be provided space for debris, provided falling mate- for, and shall be used by employees to rial is not permitted to endanger the stand on while breaking down floor stability of the structure. arches between beams. Such planks (c) When wood floor beams serve to shall be so located as to provide a safe brace interior walls or free-standing support for the workmen should the exterior walls, such beams shall be left arch between the beams collapse. The in place until other equivalent support open space between planks shall not can be installed to replace them. exceed 16 inches. (d) Floor arches, to an elevation of (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18 not more than 25 feet above grade, may inches wide, formed of planks not less be removed to provide storage area for than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv- debris: Provided, That such removal alent strength if metal, shall be pro- does not endanger the stability of the vided and used by workmen when nec- structure. essary to enable them to reach any (e) Storage space into which material point without walking upon exposed is dumped shall be blocked off, except beams. for openings necessary for the removal (d) Stringers of ample strength shall of material. Such openings shall be be installed to support the flooring kept closed at all times when material planks, and the ends of such stringers is not being removed. shall be supported by floor beams or § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc- girders, and not by floor arches alone. tion. (e) Planks shall be laid together over solid bearings with the ends overlap- (a) When floor arches have been re- ping at least 1 foot. moved, planking in accordance with § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the (f) When floor arches are being re- workers engaged in razing the steel moved, employees shall not be allowed framing. in the area directly underneath, and (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoist- such an area shall be barricaded to pre- ing equipment used shall meet the re- vent access to it. quirements specified in subpart N of (g) Demolition of floor arches shall this part. not be started until they, and the sur- (c) Steel construction shall be dis- rounding floor area for a distance of 20 mantled column length by column feet, have been cleared of debris and length, and tier by tier (columns may any other unnecessary materials. be in two-story lengths).

451

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00451 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.859 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(d) Any structural member being dis- secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health membered shall not be overstressed. Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition. (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. (a) No workers shall be permitted in any area, which can be adversely af- § 1926.900 General provisions. fected by demolition operations, when balling or clamming is being per- (a) The employer shall permit only formed. Only those workers necessary authorized and qualified persons to for the performance of the operations handle and use explosives. shall be permitted in this area at any (b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open other time. flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (b) The weight of the demolition ball heat producing devices and sparks shall shall not exceed 50 percent of the be prohibited in or near explosive mag- crane’s rated load, based on the length azines or while explosives are being of the boom and the maximum angle of handled, transported or used. operation at which the demolition ball (c) No person shall be allowed to han- will be used, or it shall not exceed 25 dle or use explosives while under the percent of the nominal breaking influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- strength of the line by which it is sus- cotics, or other dangerous drugs. pended, whichever results in a lesser (d) All explosives shall be accounted value. for at all times. Explosives not being (c) The crane boom and loadline shall used shall be kept in a locked maga- be as short as possible. zine, unavailable to persons not au- (d) The ball shall be attached to the thorized to handle them. The employer loadline with a swivel-type connection shall maintain an inventory and use to prevent twisting of the loadline, and record of all explosives. Appropriate shall be attached by positive means in authorities shall be notified of any such manner that the weight cannot loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into become accidentally disconnected. (e) When pulling over walls or por- a magazine. tions thereof, all steel members af- (e) No explosives or blasting agents fected shall have been previously cut shall be abandoned. free. (f) No fire shall be fought where the (f) All roof cornices or other such or- fire is in imminent danger of contact namental stonework shall be removed with explosives. All employees shall be prior to pulling walls over. removed to a safe area and the fire area (g) During demoliton, continuing in- guarded against intruders. spections by a competent person shall (g) Original containers, or Class II be made as the work progresses to de- magazines, shall be used for taking det- tect hazards resulting from weakened onators and other explosives from stor- or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- age magazines to the blasting area. ened material. No employee shall be (h) When blasting is done in con- permitted to work where such hazards gested areas or in proximity to a struc- exist until they are corrected by shor- ture, railway, or highway, or any other ing, bracing, or other effective means. installation that may be damaged, the blaster shall take special precautions § 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees. this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct blasting Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable of Explosives precaution including, but not limited to, visual and audible warning signals, AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours flags, or barricades, to ensure employee and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety.

452

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00452 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.900

(j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper- (5) Compliance with the rec- ations above ground shall be conducted ommendations of The Institute of the between sunup and sundown. Makers of Explosives with regard to (k) Due precautions shall be taken to blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- prevent accidental discharge of electric mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- blasting caps from current induced by quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in radar, radio transmitters, lightning, the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or Publication No. 20, March 1971. other sources of extraneous electricity. (l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber These precautions shall include: packing materials, which have pre- (1) Detonators shall be short- viously contained high explosives, circuited in holes which have been shall not be used again for any purpose, primed and shunted until wired into but shall be destroyed by burning at an the blasting circuit. approved location. (2) The suspension of all blasting op- (m) Explosives, blasting agents, and erations and removal of persons from blasting supplies that are obviously de- the blasting area during the approach teriorated or damaged shall not be and progress of an electric storm; used. (3) (i) The prominent display of ade- (n) Delivery and issue of explosives quate signs, warning against the use of shall only be made by and to author- mobile radio transmitters, on all roads ized persons and into authorized maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations. zines or approved temporary storage or Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot handling areas. distance would create an operational (o) Blasting operations in the prox- handicap, a competent person shall be imity of overhead power lines, commu- consulted to evaluate the particular nication lines, utility services, or other situation, and alternative provisions services and structures shall not be may be made which are adequately de- carried on until the operators and/or signed to prevent any premature firing owners have been notified and meas- of electric blasting caps. A description ures for safe control have been taken. of any such alternatives shall be re- (p) The use of black powder shall be duced to writing and shall be certified prohibited. as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di- sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this tained at the construction site during field. the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec- available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma- tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric (ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r). (k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of blasting agents shall conform to the requirements of this section. (1) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal on wood studs. (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other nonabsorbent materials. (3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall be separated from the mixing plant and (4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- located in such a manner that in case mitters which are less than 100 feet of tank rupture, the oil will drain away away from electric blasting caps, in from the mixing plant building. other than original containers, shall be (4) The building shall be well venti- deenergized and effectively locked; lated.

453

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00453 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.901 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(5) Heating units which do not depend (c) A blaster shall be qualified, by on combustion processes, when prop- reason of training, knowledge, or expe- erly designed and located, may be used rience, in the field of transporting, in the building. All direct sources of storing, handling, and use of explo- heat shall be provided exclusively from sives, and have a working knowledge of units located outside the mixing build- State and local laws and regulations ing. which pertain to explosives. (6) All internal-combustion engines (d) Blasters shall be required to fur- used for electric power generation shall nish satisfactory evidence of com- be located outside the mixing plant petency in handling explosives and per- building, or shall be properly venti- forming in a safe manner the type of lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex- blasting that will be required. haust systems on all such engines shall (e) The blaster shall be knowledge- be located so any spark emission can- able and competent in the use of each not be a hazard to any materials in or type of blasting method used. adjacent to the plant. (t) Buildings used for the mixing of § 1926.902 Surface transportation of water gels shall conform to the re- explosives. quirements of this subdivision. (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus- (a) Transportation of explosives shall tible construction or sheet metal on meet the provisions of Department of wood studs. Transportation regulations contained (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; of concrete or of other nonabsorbent 49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and materials. Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- storage facilities shall be separated riers. from the mixing plant and located in (b) Motor vehicles or conveyances such a manner that in case of tank rup- transporting explosives shall only be ture, the oil will drain away from the driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- mixing plant building. censed driver who is physically fit. He (4) The building shall be well venti- shall be familiar with the local, State, lated. and Federal regulation governing the (5) Heating units that do not depend transportation of explosives. on combustion processes, when prop- (c) No person shall smoke, or carry erly designed and located, may be used matches or any other flame-producing in the building. All direct sources of device, nor shall firearms or loaded heat shall be provided exclusively from cartridges be carried while in or near a units located outside of the mixing motor vehicle or conveyance trans- building. porting explosives. (6) All internal-combustion engines (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and used for electric power generation shall blasting supplies shall not be trans- be located outside the mixing plant ported with other materials or cargoes. building, or shall be properly venti- Blasting caps (including electric) shall lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex- not be transported in the same vehicle haust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives. be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex- not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, shall be in good mechanical condition. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] (f) When explosives are transported by a vehicle with an open body, a Class § 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s (a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo. (b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor- condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be

454

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00454 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.903

covered with wood, or other non- certification record which includes the sparking material, to prevent contact date of the inspection; the signature of with containers of explosives. the person who performed the inspec- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey- tion; and a serial number, or other ance used for transporting explosives identifier, of the truck inspected shall shall be marked or placarded on both be prepared and the most recent cer- sides, the front, and the rear with the tification record shall be maintained word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not on file. less than 4 inches in height, on white (f) The installation of auxiliary background. In addition to such mark- lights on truck beds, which are pow- ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or ered by the truck’s electrical system, conveyance may display, in such a shall be prohibited. manner that it will be readily visible (g) Explosives and blasting agents from all directions, a red flag 18 inches shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo- in a powder car. No other materials, sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed supplies, or equipment shall be trans- thereon, in white letters, at least 6 ported in the same conveyance at the inches in height. same time. (i) Each vehicle used for transpor- (h) No one, except the operator, his tation of explosives shall be equipped helper, and the powderman, shall be with a fully charged fire extinguisher, permitted to ride on a conveyance in good condition. An Underwriters transporting explosives and blasting Laboratory-approved extinguisher of agents. not less than 10-ABC rating will meet (i) No person shall ride in any shaft the minimum requirement. The driver conveyance transporting explosives shall be trained in the use of the extin- and blasting agents. guisher on his vehicle. (j) No explosives or blasting agents (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be transported on any loco- carrying explosives, blasting agents, or motive. At least two car lengths shall blasting supplies, shall not be taken in- separate the locomotive from the pow- side a garage or shop for repairs or der car. servicing. (k) No explosives or blasting agents (k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- shall be transported on a man haul plosives shall be left unattended. trip. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (l) The car or conveyance containing 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] explosives or blasting agents shall be pulled, not pushed, whenever possible. § 1926.903 Underground transpor- (m) The powder car or conveyance es- tation of explosives. pecially built for the purpose of trans- (a) All explosives or blasting agents porting explosives or blasting agents in transit underground shall be taken shall bear a reflectorized sign on each to the place of use or storage without side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let- delay. ters, not less than 4 inches in height; (b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con- blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color. ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically (c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches (d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick. fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same veyance. time in any shaft conveyance. (e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans- have the electrical system checked ported with other materials. weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed

455

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00455 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.904 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

in a suitable container when trans- be avoided. The primer shall never be ported manually. tamped. (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex- (d) No holes shall be loaded except plosives shall be carried in separate those to be fired in the next round of containers when transported manually. blasting. After loading, all remaining [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, explosives and detonators shall be im- 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, mediately returned to an authorized 1987] magazine. (e) Drilling shall not be started until § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and all remaining butts of old holes are ex- blasting agents. amined for unexploded charges, and if (a) Explosives and related materials any are found, they shall be refired be- shall be stored in approved facilities fore work proceeds. required under the applicable provi- (f) No person shall be allowed to sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco deepen drill holes which have con- and Firearms regulations contained in tained explosives or blasting agents. 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo- (g) No explosives or blasting agents sives. shall be left unattended at the blast (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting site. caps, detonating primers, and primed (h) Machines and all tools not used cartridges shall not be stored in the for loading explosives into bore holes same magazine with other explosives shall be removed from the immediate or blasting agents. location of holes before explosives are (c) Smoking and open flames shall delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- not be permitted within 50 feet of ex- ated within 50 feet of loaded holes. plosives and detonator storage maga- (i) No activity of any nature other zine. than that which is required for loading (d) No explosives or blasting agents holes with explosives shall be per- shall be permanently stored in any un- mitted in a blast area. derground operation until the oper- (j) Powerlines and portable electric ation has been developed to the point cables for equipment being used shall where at least two modes of exit have be kept a safe distance from explosives been provided. or blasting agents being loaded into (e) Permanent underground storage drill holes. Cables in the proximity of magazines shall be at least 300 feet the blast area shall be deenergized and from any shaft, adit, or active under- locked out by the blaster. ground working area. (k) Holes shall be checked prior to (f) Permanent underground maga- loading to determine depth and condi- zines containing detonators shall not tions. Where a hole has been loaded be located closer than 50 feet to any with explosives but the explosives have magazine containing other explosives failed to detonate, there shall be no or blasting agents. drilling within 50 feet of the hole. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (l) When loading a long line of holes 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] with more than one loading crew, the crews shall be separated by practical § 1926.905 Loading of explosives or distance consistent with efficient oper- blasting agents. ation and supervision of crews. (a) Procedures that permit safe and (m) No explosive shall be loaded or efficient loading shall be established used underground in the presence of before loading is started. combustible gases or combustible (b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently dusts. large to admit freely the insertion of (n) No explosives other than those in the cartridges of explosives. Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti- (c) Tamping shall be done only with tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be wood rods or plastic tamping poles used; however, explosives complying without exposed metal parts, but non- with the requirements of Fume Class 2 sparking metal connectors may be used and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade- for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall quate ventilation has been provided.

456

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00456 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.906

(o) All blast holes in open work shall tractor or his designated representa- be stemmed to the collar or to a point tive. which will confine the charge. (e) When firing a circuit of electric (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast blasting caps, care must be exercised to area, shall be maintained at all ap- ensure that an adequate quantity of de- proaches to the blast area. The warn- livered current is available, in according sign lettering shall not be less than ance with the manufacturer’s rec- 4 inches in height on a contrasting ommendations. background. (f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung shall be insulated single solid wires of when it is adjacent to or near a hole sufficient current-carrying capacity. that is loaded. Flashlight batteries (g) Bus wires shall be solid single shall not be used for springing holes. wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- (r) Drill holes which have been pacity. sprung or chambered, and which are (h) When firing electrically, the insu- not water-filled, shall be allowed to lation on all firing lines shall be ade- cool before explosives are loaded. quate and in good condition. (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat- (i) A power circuit used for firing tended or unprotected. electric blasting caps shall not be (t) The blaster shall keep an accu- grounded. rate, up-to-date record of explosives, (j) In underground operations when blasting agents, and blasting supplies firing from a power circuit, a safety used in a blast and shall keep an accu- switch shall be placed in the perma- rate running inventory of all explosives nent firing line at intervals. This and blasting agents stored on the oper- switch shall be made so it can be ation. locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and (u) When loading blasting agents shall be provided with a short- pneumatically over electric blasting circuiting arrangement of the firing caps, semiconductive delivery hose lines to the cap circuit. shall be used and the equipment shall (k) In underground operations there be bonded and grounded. shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 feet in the firing system ahead of the [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, main firing switch; that is, between 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993] this switch and the source of power. This gap shall be bridged by a flexible § 1926.906 Initiation of explosive jumper cord just before firing the blast. charges—electric blasting. (l) When firing from a power circuit, (a) Electric blasting caps shall not be the firing switch shall be locked in the used where sources of extraneous elec- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex- tricity make the use of electric blast- cept when firing. It shall be so designed ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg that the firing lines to the cap circuit wires shall be kept short-circuited are automatically short-circuited when (shunted) until they are connected into the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position. the circuit for firing. Keys to this switch shall be entrusted (b) Before adopting any system of only to the blaster. electrical firing, the blaster shall con- (m) Blasting machines shall be in duct a thorough survey for extraneous good condition and the efficiency of currents, and all dangerous currents the machine shall be tested periodi- shall be eliminated before any holes cally to make certain that it can de- are loaded. liver power at its rated capacity. (c) In any single blast using electric (n) When firing with blasting ma- blasting caps, all caps shall be of the chines, the connections shall be made same style or function, and of the same as recommended by the manufacturer manufacture. of the electric blasting caps used. (d) Electric blasting shall be carried (o) The number of electric blasting out by using blasting circuits or power caps connected to a blasting machine circuits in accordance with the electric shall not be in excess of its rated ca- blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast- ommendations, or an approved con- ing, a series circuit shall contain no

457

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00457 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.907 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

more caps than the limits rec- (e) No unused cap or short capped ommended by the manufacturer of the fuse shall be placed in any hole to be electric blasting caps in use. blasted; such unused detonators shall (p) The blaster shall be in charge of be removed from the working place and the blasting machines, and no other destroyed. person shall connect the leading wires (f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers to the machine. made up, in any magazine or near any (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to possible source of ignition. charged holes, shall use only blasting (g) No one shall be permitted to carry galvanometers or other instruments detonators or primers of any kind on that are specifically designed for this his person. purpose. (h) The minimum length of safety (r) Whenever the possibility exists fuse to be used in blasting shall be as that a leading line or blasting wire required by State law, but shall not be might be thrown over a live powerline less than 30 inches. by the force of an explosion, care shall (i) At least two men shall be present be taken to see that the total length of when multiple cap and fuse blasting is wires are kept too short to hit the done by hand lighting methods. lines, or that the wires are securely an- (j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be chored to the ground. If neither of lighted by each blaster when hand these requirements can be satisfied, a lighting devices are used. However, nonelectric system shall be used. when two or more safety fuses in a (s) In electrical firing, only the man group are lighted as one by means of making leading wire connections shall igniter cord, or other similar fuse- fire the shot. All connections shall be lighting devices, they may be consid- made from the bore hole back to the ered as one fuse. source of firing current, and the lead- (k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method ing wires shall remain shorted and not of dropping or pushing a primer or any be connected to the blasting machine explosive with a lighted fuse attached or other source of current until the is forbidden. charge is to be fired. (l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for (t) After firing an electric blast from firing mudcap charges unless charges a blasting machine, the leading wires are separated sufficiently to prevent shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast. (m) When blasting with safety fuses, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, consideration shall be given to the 1979, as amended at 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] length and burning rate of the fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safe- § 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. ty, shall always be provided for the (a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety. where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord. dangerous. The use of a fuse that has (a) Care shall be taken to select a been hammered or injured in any way detonating cord consistent with the shall be forbidden. type and physical condition of the bore (b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or hole and stemming and the type of ex- other projections which will cause a plosives used. sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is (b) Detonating cord shall be handled prohibited. and used with the same respect and (c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives. length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex- supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply (d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges. shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging

458

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00458 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.911

or severing the cord during and after (e) Before firing an underground loading and hooking-up. blast, warning shall be given, and all (e) Detonating cord connections shall possible entries into the blasting area, be competent and positive in accord- and any entrances to any working ance with approved and recommended place where a drift, raise, or other methods. Knot-type or other cord-to- opening is about to hole through, shall cord connections shall be made only be carefully guarded. The blaster shall with detonating cord in which the ex- make sure that all employees are out plosive core is dry. of the blast area before firing a blast. (f) All detonating cord trunklines and branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp TABLE U–1 kinks, or angles that direct the cord WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long back toward the oncoming line of deto- blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal. nation. BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 (g) All detonating cord connections minute prior to the shot. shall be inspected before firing the ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- blast. lowing the inspection of blast area. (h) When detonating cord milli- second-delay connectors or short-inter- § 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. val-delay electric blasting caps are (a) Immediately after the blast has used with detonating cord, the practice been fired, the firing line shall be dis- shall conform strictly to the manufac- connected from the blasting machine, turer’s recommendations. or where power switches are used, they (i) When connecting a blasting cap or shall be locked open or in the off posi- an electric blasting cap to detonating tion. cord, the cap shall be taped or other- (b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, wise attached securely along the side not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for or the end of the detonating cord, with the smoke and fumes to leave the the end of the cap containing the ex- blasted area before returning to the plosive charge pointed in the direction shot. An inspection of the area and the in which the detonation is to proceed. surrounding rubble shall be made by (j) Detonators for firing the trunk- the blaster to determine if all charges line shall not be brought to the loading have been exploded before employees area nor attached to the detonating are allowed to return to the operation, cord until everything else is in readi- and in tunnels, after the muck pile has ness for the blast. been wetted down.

§ 1926.909 Firing the blast. § 1926.911 Misfires. (a) A code of blasting signals equiva- (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on shall provide proper safeguards for ex- one or more conspicuous places at the cluding all employees from the danger operation, and all employees shall be zone. required to familiarize themselves with (b) No other work shall be done ex- the code and conform to it. Danger cept that necessary to remove the haz- signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ard of the misfire and only those em- tions. ployees necessary to do the work shall (b) Before a blast is fired, a loud remain in the danger zone. warning signal shall be given by the (c) No attempt shall be made to ex- blaster in charge, who has made cer- tract explosives from any charged or tain that all surplus explosives are in a misfired hole; a new primer shall be safe place and all employees, vehicles, put in and the hole reblasted. If re- and equipment are at a safe distance, firing of the misfired hole presents a or under sufficient cover. hazard, the explosives may be removed (c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed by washing out with water or, where on highways which pass through the the misfire is under water, blown out danger zone so as to stop traffic during with air. blasting operations. (d) If there are any misfires while (d) It shall be the duty of the blaster using cap and fuse, all employees shall to fix the time of blasting. remain away from the charge for at

459

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00459 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.912 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled from the magazines to the blasting under the direction of the person in zone and immediately loaded. Deto- charge of the blasting. All wires shall nators and explosives left over after be carefully traced and a search made loading a round shall be removed from for unexploded charges. the working chamber before the con- (e) No drilling, digging, or picking necting wires are connected up. shall be permitted until all missed (b) When detonators or explosives are holes have been detonated or the au- brought into an air lock, no employee thorized representative has approved except the powderman, blaster, lock that work can proceed. tender and the employees necessary for carrying, shall be permitted to enter § 1926.912 Underwater blasting. the air lock. No other material, sup- (a) A blaster shall conduct all blast- plies, or equipment shall be locked ing operations, and no shot shall be through with the explosives. fired without his approval. (c) Detonators and explosives shall be (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis- taken separately into pressure working similar metals shall not be used be- chambers. cause of possible electric transient cur- (d) The blaster or powderman shall be rents from galvanic action of the met- responsible for the receipt, unloading, als and water. storage, and on-site transportation of (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps explosives and detonators. and detonating cords shall be used for (e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, all marine blasting. Loading shall be and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- done through a nonsparking metal trically bonded together and grounded loading tube when tube is necessary. at or near the portal or shaft, and such (d) No blast shall be fired while any pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- vessel under way is closer than 1,500 gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- feet to the blasting area. Those on vals throughout the length of the tun- board vessels or craft moored or an- nel. In addition, each low air supply chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti- pipe shall be grounded at its delivery fied before a blast is fired. end. (e) No blast shall be fired while any (f) The explosives suitable for use in swimming or diving operations are in wet holes shall be water-resistant and progress in the vicinity of the blasting shall be Fume Class 1. area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with water. light charges and with light burden on (f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be (g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter- water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad- (h) When more than one charge is vances. placed under water, a float device shall be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to charge in such manner that it will be this subpart. released by the firing. Misfires shall be (a) American Table of Distances (also handled in accordance with the re- known as Quantity Distance Tables) quirements of § 1926.911. means American Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives as revised and § 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work approved by the Institute of the Mak- under compressed air. ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964. (a) Detonators and explosives shall (b) Approved storage facility—A facil- not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, ity for the storage of explosive mate- or caissons. Detonators and explosives rials conforming to the requirements of for each round shall be taken directly this part and covered by a license or

460

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00460 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.914

permit issued under authority of the (2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire- pendable wire used between electric arms. (See 27 CFR Part 55) blasting caps and the leading wires or (c) Blast area—The area in which ex- between the bus wire and the leading plosives loading and blasting oper- wires. ations are being conducted. (3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (d) Blaster—The person or persons au- used between the electric power source thorized to use explosives for blasting and the electric blasting cap circuit. purposes and meeting the qualifica- (4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- tions contained in § 1926.901. manently mounted insulated wire used (e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is between the electric power source and any material or mixture consisting of a the electric blasting cap circuit. fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but (m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps not classified an explosive and in which designed to detonate at a predeter- none of the ingredients is classified as mined period of time after energy is an explosive provided the furnished applied to the ignition system. (mixed) product cannot be detonated (n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical com- with a No. 8 test blasting cap when pound, mixture, or device, the primary confined. A common blasting agent or common purpose of which is to func- presently in use is a mixture of ammo- tion by explosion; that is, with sub- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo- stantially instantaneous release of gas naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil and heat, unless such compound, mix- or coal, and may either be procured, ture or device is otherwise specifically premixed and packaged from explosives classified by the U.S. Department of companies or mixed in the field. Transportation. (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube (2) All material which is classified as closed at one end, containing a charge Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- of one or more detonating compounds, sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- and designed for and capable of detona- portation. tion from the sparks or flame from a (3) Classification of explosives by the safety fuse inserted and crimped into U.S. Department of Transportation is the open end. as follows: (g) Block holing—The breaking of boulders by firing a charge of explo- Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating sives that has been loaded in a drill hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic- hole. ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury, black powder, blasting caps, and detonating (h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- primers. porting explosives or blasting agents, Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable including but not limited to trucks, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ- trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. ing some smokeless propellants. (i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord Class C Explosives. Include certain types of containing a center core of high explo- manufactured articles which contain Class A sives which when detonated, will have or Class B explosives, or both, as compo- sufficient strength to detonate other nents, but in restricted quantities. cap-sensitive explosives with which it (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for is in contact. the purpose of igniting safety fuse. (j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric (p) Magazine—Any building or struc- blasting caps, delay electric blasting ture, other than an explosives manu- caps, and nonelectric delay blasting facturing building, used for the storage caps. of explosives. (k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting (q) Misfire—An explosive charge cap designed for and capable of detona- which failed to detonate. tion by means of an electric current. (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as (l) Electric blasting circuitry— bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying). (1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, The blasting of boulders by placing a used in parallel or series, in parallel quantity of explosives against a rock, circuits, to which are connected the leg boulder, or other object without con- wires of electric blasting caps. fining the explosives in a drill hole.

461

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00461 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.950 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A not less than 5,000 ohms per foot meets blasting cap with an integral delay ele- the requirement. ment in conjunction with and capable of being detonated by a detonation im- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184 and 35311, pulse or signal from miniaturized deto- June 30, 1993] nating cord. (t) Primary blasting—The blasting operation by which the original rock for- Subpart V—Power Transmission mation is dislodged from its natural lo- and Distribution cation. (u) Primer—A cartridge or container AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours of explosives into which a detonator or and Safety Standards Act (Construction detonating cord is inserted or attached. Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s taining an internal burning medium by Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR which fire is conveyed at a continuous 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), and uniform rate for the purpose of fir- as applicable. Section 1926.951 also issued ing blasting caps. under 29 CFR Part 1911. (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction of oversize material by the use of ex- § 1926.950 General requirements. plosives to the dimension required for (a) Application. The occupational handling, including mudcapping and safety and health standards contained blockholing. in this subpart V shall apply to the (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom- construction of electric transmission bustible material or device used to con- and distribution lines and equipment. fine or separate explosives in a drill (1) As used in this subpart V the term hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap- ‘‘construction’’ includes the erection of ping. new electric transmission and distribu- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock- tion lines and equipment, and the al- et in the bottom of a drill hole by the teration, conversion, and improvement use of a moderate quantity of explo- of existing electric transmission and sives in order that larger quantities or distribution lines and equipment. explosives may be inserted therein. (2) Existing electric transmission and (z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A distribution lines and electrical equip- wide variety of materials used for ment need not be modified to conform blasting. They all contain substantial to the requirements of applicable proportions of water and high propor- standards in this subpart V, until such tions of ammonium nitrate, some of work as described in paragraph (a)(1) of which is in solution in the water. Two this section is to be performed on such broad classes of water gels are: (1) Those which are sensitized by a mate- lines or equipment. rial classed as an explosive, such as (3) The standards set forth in this TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those subpart V provide minimum require- which contain no ingredient classified ments for safety and health. Employers as an explosive; these are sensitized may require adherence to additional with metals such as aluminum or with standards which are not in conflict other fuels. Water gels may be with the standards contained in this premixed at an explosives plant or subpart V. mixed at the site immediately before (b) Initial inspections, tests, or deter- delivery into the bore hole. minations. (1) Existing conditions shall (aa) Semiconductive hose. Semicon- be determined before starting work, by ductive hose—a hose with an electrical an inspection or a test. Such condi- resistance high enough to limit flow of tions shall include, but not be limited stray electric currents to safe levels, to, energized lines and equipment, con- yet not so high as to prevent drainage ditions of poles, and the location of cir- of static electric charges to ground; cuits and equipment, including power hose of not more than 2 megohms re- and communication lines, CATV and sistance over its entire length and of fire alarm circuits.

462

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00462 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.950

(2) Electric equipment and lines shall TABLE V±1ÐALTERNATING CURRENTÐMINIMUM be considered energized until deter- DISTANCESÐContinued mined to be deenergized by tests or Minimum other appropriate methods or means. working (3) Operating voltage of equipment Voltage range (phase to phase) kilovolt) and clear and lines shall be determined before hot stick distance working on or near energized parts. (c) Clearances. The provisions of para- 700 to 765 ...... 1 15 ft. 0 graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section shall in. be observed. 1 NOTE: For 345±362 kv., 500±552 kv., and 700±765 kv., the minimum working distance and the minimum clear hot (1) No employee shall be permitted to stick distance may be reduced provided that such distances approach or take any conductive object are not less than the shortest distance between the energized without an approved insulating handle part and a grounded surface. closer to exposed energized parts than (d) Deenergizing lines and equipment. shown in Table V–1, unless: (1) When deenergizing lines and equip- (i) The employee is insulated or ment operated in excess of 600 volts, guarded from the energized part (gloves and the means of disconnecting from or gloves with sleeves rated for the electric energy is not visibly open or voltage involved shall be considered in- visibly locked out, the provisions of sulation of the employee from the en- paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (vii) of ergized part), or this section shall be complied with: (ii) The energized part is insulated or (i) The particular section of line or guarded from him and any other con- equipment to be deenergized shall be ductive object at a different potential, clearly identified, and it shall be iso- or lated from all sources of voltage. (iii) The employee is isolated, insu- (ii) Notification and assurance from lated, or guarded from any other con- the designated employee shall be ob- ductive object(s), as during live-line tained that: bare-hand work. (2) (i) The minimum working dis- (a) All switches and disconnectors tance and minimum clear hot stick dis- through which electric energy may be tances stated in Table V–1 shall not be supplied to the particular section of violated. The minimum clear hot stick line or equipment to be worked have distance is that for the use of live-line been deenergized; tools held by linemen when performing (b) All switches and disconnectors are live-line work. plainly tagged indicating that men are (ii) Conductor support tools, such as at work; link sticks, strain carriers, and insu- (c) And that where design of such lator cradles, may be used: Provided, switches and disconnectors permits, That the clear insulation is at least as they have been rendered inoperable. long as the insulator string or the min- (iii) After all designated switches and imum distance specified in Table V–1 disconnectors have been opened, ren- for the operating voltage. dered inoperable, and tagged, visual inspection or tests shall be conducted to TABLE V±1ÐALTERNATING CURRENTÐMINIMUM insure that equipment or lines have DISTANCES been deenergized. (iv) Protective grounds shall be ap- Minimum working plied on the disconnected lines or Voltage range (phase to phase) kilovolt) and clear equipment to be worked on. hot stick distance (v) Guards or barriers shall be erected as necessary to adjacent energized 2.1 to 15 ...... 2 ft. 0 in. 15.1 to 35 ...... 2 ft. 4 in. lines. 35.1 to 46 ...... 2 ft. 6 in. (vi) When more than one independent 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 3 ft. 0 in. crew requires the same line or equip- 72.6 to 121 ...... 3 ft. 4 in. 138 to 145 ...... 3 ft. 6 in. ment to be deenergized, a prominent 161 to 169 ...... 3 ft. 8 in. tag for each such independent crew 230 to 242 ...... 5 ft. 0 in. shall be placed on the line or equip- 345 to 362 ...... 1 7 ft. 0 in. 500 to 552 ...... 1 11 ft. 0 ment by the designated employee in in. charge.

463

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00463 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.951 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(vii) Upon completion of work on de- of the insulating type. The require- energized lines or equipment, each des- ments for fire resistant fluids of ignated employee in charge shall deter- § 1926.302(d)(1) do not apply to hydraulic mine that all employees in his crew are tools covered by this paragraph. clear, that protective grounds installed by his crew have been removed, and he § 1926.951 Tools and protective equip- shall report to the designated author- ment. ity that all tags protecting his crew (a) Protective equipment. (1)(i) Rubber may be removed. protective equipment shall be in ac- (2) When a crew working on a line or cordance with the provisions of the equipment can clearly see that the American National Standards Institute means of disconnecting from electric (ANSI), ANSI J6 series, as follows: energy are visibly open or visibly locked-out, the provisions of para- Item Standard graphs (d)(i), and (ii) of this section Rubber insulating gloves ...... J6.6±1971. shall apply: Rubber matting for use around electric J6.7±1935 (R1971). (i) Guards or barriers shall be erected apparatus. Rubber insulating blankets ...... J6.4±1971. as necessary to adjacent energized Rubber insulating hoods ...... J6.2±1950 (R1971). lines. Rubber insulating line hose ...... J6.1±1950 (R1971). (ii) Upon completion of work on de- Rubber insulating sleeves ...... J6.5±1971. energized lines or equipment, each designated employee in charge shall deter- (ii) Rubber protective equipment mine that all employees in his crew are shall be visually inspected prior to use. clear, that protective grounds installed (iii) In addition, an ‘‘air’’ test shall by his crew have been removed, and he be performed for rubber gloves prior to shall report to the designated author- use. ity that all tags protecting his crew (iv) Protective equipment of material may be removed. other than rubber shall provide equal (e) Emergency procedures and first aid. or better electrical and mechanical (1) The employer shall provide training protection. or require that his employees are (2) Protective hats shall be in accord- knowledgeable and proficient in: ance with the provisions of ANSI Z89.2– (i) Procedures involving emergency 1971 Industrial Protective Helmets for situations, and Electrical Workers, Class B, and shall (ii) First-aid fundamentals including be worn at the jobsite by employees resuscitation. who are exposed to the hazards of fall- (2) In lieu of paragraph (e)(1) of this ing objects, electric shock, or burns. section the employer may comply with (b) Personal climbing equipment. (1) the provisions of § 1926.50(c) regarding Body belts with straps or lanyards first-aid requirements. shall be worn to protect employees (f) Night work. When working at working at elevated locations on poles, night, spotlights or portable lights for towers, or other structures except emergency lighting shall be provided where such use creates a greater haz- as needed to perform the work safely. ard to the safety of the employees, in (g) Work near and over water. When which case other safeguards shall be crews are engaged in work over or near employed. water and when danger of drowning ex- (2) Body belts and safety straps shall ists, suitable protection shall be pro- meet the requirements of § 1926.959. In vided as stated in § 1926.104, or § 1926.105, addition to being used as an employee or § 1926.106. safeguarding item, body belts with ap- (h) Sanitation facilities. The require- proved tool loops may be used for the ments of § 1926.51 of subpart D of this purpose of holding tools. Body belts part shall be complied with for sanita- shall be free from additional metal tion facilities. hooks and tool loops other than those (i) Hydraulic fluids. All hydraulic permitted in § 1926.959. fluids used for the insulated sections of (3) Body belts and straps shall be in- derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydrau- spected before use each day to deter- lic tools which are used on or around mine that they are in safe working energized lines and equipment shall be condition.

464

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00464 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.952

(4)(i) Lifelines and lanyards shall (ii) Be of the double insulated type comply with the provisions of § 1926.502. and permanently labeled as ‘‘Double (ii) Safety lines are not intended to Insulated’’; or be subjected to shock loading and are (iii) Be connected to the power sup- used for emergency rescue such as low- ply by means of an isolating trans- ering a man to the ground. Such safety former, or other isolated power supply. lines shall be a minimum of one-half- (3) All hydraulic tools which are used inch diameter and three or four strand on or around energized lines or equip- first-grade manila or its equivalent in ment shall use nonconducting hoses strength (2,650 lb.) and durability. having adequate strength for the nor- (5) Defective ropes shall be replaced. mal operating pressures. It should be (c) Ladders. (1) Portable metal or con- noted that the provisions of ductive ladders shall not be used near § 1926.302(d)(2) shall also apply. energized lines or equipment except as (4) All pneumatic tools which are may be necessary in specialized work used on or around energized lines or such as in high voltage substations equipment shall: where nonconductive ladders might (i) Have nonconducting hoses having present a greater hazard than conduc- adequate strength for the normal oper- tive ladders. Conductive or metal lad- ating pressures, and ders shall be prominently marked as (ii) Have an accumulator on the com- conductive and all necessary pre- pressor to collect moisture. cautions shall be taken when used in [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, specialized work. 1979, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] (2) Hook or other type ladders used in structures shall be positively secured § 1926.952 Mechanical equipment. to prevent the ladder from being acci- (a) General. (1) Visual inspections dentally displaced. shall be made of the equipment to de- (d) Live-line tools. (1) Only live-line termine that it is in good condition tool poles having a manufacturer’s cer- each day the equipment is to be used. tification to withstand the following (2) Tests shall be made at the begin- minimum tests shall be used: ning of each shift during which the (i) 100,000 volts per foot of length for equipment is to be used to determine 5 minutes when the tool is made of fi- that the brakes and operating systems berglass; or are in proper working condition. (ii) 75,000 volts per foot of length for (3) No employer shall use any motor 3 minutes when the tool is made of vehicle equipment having an ob- wood; or structed view to the rear unless: (iii) Other tests equivalent to para- (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal graph (d) (i) or (ii) of this section as ap- alarm audible above the surrounding propriate. noise level or: (2) All live-line tools shall be visually (ii) The vehicle is backed up only inspected before use each day. Tools to when an observer signals that it is safe be used shall be wiped clean and if any to do so. hazardous defects are indicated such (b) Aerial lifts. (1) The provisions of tools shall be removed from service. § 1926.556, subpart N of this part, shall (e) Measuring tapes or measuring ropes. apply to the utilization of aerial lifts. Measuring tapes or measuring ropes (2) When working near energized which are metal or contain conductive lines or equipment, aerial lift trucks strands shall not be used when working shall be grounded or barricaded and on or near energized parts. considered as energized equipment, or (f) Handtools. (1) Switches for all pow- the aerial lift truck shall be insulated ered hand tools shall comply with for the work being performed. § 1926.300(d). (3) Equipment or material shall not (2) All portable electric handtools be passed between a pole or structure shall: and an aerial lift while an employee (i) Be equipped with three-wire cord working from the basket is within having the ground wire permanently reaching distance of energized conduc- connected to the tool frame and means tors or equipment that are not covered for grounding the other end; or with insulating protective equipment.

465

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00465 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.953 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(c) Derrick trucks, cranes and other lift- shall be exercised when moving mate- ing equipment. (1) All derrick trucks, rials near such energized equipment. cranes and other lifting equipment (d) Tag line. Where hazards to em- shall comply with subpart N and O of ployees exist tag lines or other suitable this part except: devices shall be used to control loads (i) As stated in § 1926.550(a)(15) (i) and being handled by hoisting equipment. (ii) relating to clearance (for clear- (e) Oil filled equipment. During con- ances in this subpart see Table V–1) struction or repair of oil filled equip- and ment the oil may be stored in tem- (ii) Derrick truck (electric line porary containers other than those re- trucks) shall not be required to comply quired in § 1926.152, such as pillow with § 1926.550(a)(7)(vi), (a)(17), (b)(2), tanks. and (e). (f) Framing. During framing oper- (2) With the exception of equipment ations, employees shall not work under certified for work on the proper volt- a pole or a structure suspended by a age, mechanical equipment shall not be crane, A-frame or similar equipment operated closer to any energized line or unless the pole or structure is ade- equipment than the clearances set quately supported. forth in § 1926.950(c) unless: (g) Attaching the load. The hoist rope (i) An insulated barrier is installed shall not be wrapped around the load. between the energized part and the me- This provision shall not apply to elec- chanical equipment, or tric construction crews when setting or (ii) The mechanical equipment is removing poles. grounded, or (iii) The mechanical equipment is in- § 1926.954 Grounding for protection of sulated, or employees. (iv) The mechanical equipment is considered as energized. (a) General. All conductors and equipment shall be treated as energized § 1926.953 Material handling. until tested or otherwise determined to be deenergized or until grounded. (a) Unloading. Prior to unloading steel, poles, cross arms and similar ma- (b) New construction. New lines or terial, the load shall be thoroughly ex- equipment may be considered deener- amined to ascertain if the load has gized and worked as such where: shifted, binders or stakes have broken (1) The lines or equipment are or the load is otherwise hazardous to grounded, or employees. (2) The hazard of induced voltages is (b) Pole hauling. (1) During pole haul- not present, and adequate clearances or ing operations, all loads shall be se- other means are implemented to pre- cured to prevent displacement and a vent contact with energized lines or red flag shall be displayed at the trail- equipment and the new lines or equip- ing end of the longest pole. ment. (2) Precautions shall be exercised to (c) Communication conductors. Bare prevent blocking of roadways or endan- wire communication conductors on gering other traffic. power poles or structures shall be (3) When hauling poles during the treated as energized lines unless pro- hours of darkness, illuminated warning tected by insulating materials. devices shall be attached to the trail- (d) Voltage testing. Deenergized con- ing end of the longest pole. ductors and equipment which are to be (c) Storage. (1) No materials or equip- grounded shall be tested for voltage. ment shall be stored under energized Results of this voltage test shall deter- bus, energized lines, or near energized mine the subsequent procedures as re- equipment, if it is practical to store quired in § 1926.950(d). them elsewhere. (e) Attaching grounds. (1) When at- (2) When materials or equipment are taching grounds, the ground end shall stored under energized lines or near en- be attached first, and the other end ergized equipment, applicable clear- shall be attached and removed by ances shall be maintained as stated in means of insulated tools or other suit- Table V–1; and extraordinary caution able devices.

466

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00466 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.955

(2) When removing grounds, the anced stresses to which they will be grounding device shall first be removed subjected. fromt the line or equipment using insu- (3) Where poles or structures may be lating tools or other suitable devices. unsafe for climbing, they shall not be (f) Grounds shall be placed between climbed until made safe by guying, work location and all sources of energy bracing, or other adequate means. and as close as practicable to the work (4) Before installing or removing wire location, or grounds shall be placed at or cable, strains to which poles and the work location. If work is to be per- structures will be subjected shall be formed at more than one location in a considered and necessary action taken line section, the line section must be to prevent failure of supporting struc- grounded and short circuited at one lo- tures. cation in the line section and the conductor to be worked on shall be (5)(i) When setting, moving, or re- grounded at each work location. The moving poles using cranes, derricks, minimum distance shown in Table V–1 gin poles, A-frames, or other mecha- shall be maintained from ungrounded nized equipment near energized lines or conductors at the work location. Where equipment, precautions shall be taken the making of a ground is impracti- to avoid contact with energized lines or cable, or the conditions resulting equipment, except in bare-hand live- therefrom would be more hazardous line work, or where barriers or protec- than working on the lines or equip- tive devices are used. ment without grounding, the grounds (ii) Equipment and machinery oper- may be omitted and the line or equip- ating adjacent to energized lines or ment worked as energized. equipment shall comply with (g) Testing without grounds. Grounds § 1926.952(c)(2). may be temporarily removed only (6)(i) Unless using suitable protective when necessary for test purposes and equipment for the voltage involved, extreme caution shall be exercised dur- employees standing on the ground shall ing the test procedures. avoid contacting equipment or machin- (h) Grounding electrode. When ground- ery working adjacent to energized lines ing electrodes are utilized, such elec- or equipment. trodes shall have a resistance to (ii) Lifting equipment shall be bond- ground low enough to remove the dan- ed to an effective ground or it shall be ger of harm to personnel or permit considered energized and barricaded prompt operation of protective devices. when utilized near energized equip- (i) Grounding to tower. Grounding to ment or lines. tower shall be made with a tower (7) Pole holes shall not be left unat- clamp capable of conducting the antici- tended or unguarded in areas where pated fault current. employees are currently working. (j) Ground lead. A ground lead, to be attached to either a tower ground or (8) Tag lines shall be of a nonconduc- driven ground, shall be capable of con- tive type when used near energized ducting the anticipated fault current lines. and shall have a minimum conductance (b) Metal tower construction. (1) When of No. 2 AWG copper. working in unstable material the excavation for pad- or pile-type footings in § 1926.955 Overhead lines. excess of 5 feet deep shall be either (a) Overhead lines. (1) When working sloped to the angle of repose as re- on or with overhead lines the provi- quired in § 1926.652 or shored if entry is sions of paragraphs (a) (2) through (8) required. Ladders shall be provided for of this section shall be complied with access to pad- or pile-type footing ex- in addition to other applicable provi- cavations in excess of 4 feet. sions of this subpart. (2) When working in unstable mate- (2) Prior to climbing poles, ladders, rial provision shall be made for clean- scaffolds, or other elevated structures, ing out auger-type footings without re- an inspection shall be made to deter- quiring an employee to enter the foot- mine that the structures are capable of ing unless shoring is used to protect sustaining the additional or unbal- the employee.

467

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00467 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.955 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(3)(i) A designated employee shall be or other adverse weather conditions used in directing mobile equipment ad- which would make the work hazardous. jacent to footing excavations. (v) Equipment and rigging shall be (ii) No one shall be permitted to re- regularly inspected and maintained in main in the footing while equipment is safe operating condition. being spotted for placement. (7) Adequate traffic control shall be (iii) Where necessary to assure the maintained when crossing highways stability of mobile equipment the loca- and railways with equipment as re- tion of use for such equipment shall be quired by the provisions of § 1926.200(g) graded and leveled. (1) and (2). (4)(i) Tower assembly shall be carried (8) A designated employee shall be out with a minimum exposure of em- utilized to determine that required ployees to falling objects when working clearance is maintained in moving at two or more levels on a tower. equipment under or near energized (ii) Guy lines shall be used as nec- lines. essary to maintain sections or parts of (c) Stringing or removing deenergized sections in position and to reduce the conductors. (1) When stringing or re- possibility of tipping. moving deenergized conductors, the (iii) Members and sections being as- provisions of paragraphs (c) (2) through sembled shall be adequately supported. (12) of this section shall be complied (5) When assembling and erecting with. towers the provisions of paragraphs (2) Prior to stringing operations a (b)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this section briefing shall be held setting forth the shall be complied with: plan of operation and specifying the (i) The construction of transmission type of equipment to be used, ground- towers and the erecting of poles, hoisting devices and procedures to be fol- ing machinery, site preparation ma- lowed, crossover methods to be em- chinery, and other types of construc- ployed, and the clearance authorization machinery shall conform to the tion required. applicable requirements of this part. (3) Where there is a possibility of the (ii) No one shall be permitted under a conductor accidentally contacting an tower which is in the process of erec- energized circuit or receiving a dan- tion or assembly, except as may be re- gerous induced voltage buildup, to fur- quired to guide and secure the section ther protect the employee from the being set. hazards of the conductor, the con- (iii) When erecting towers using ductor being installed or removed shall hoisting equipment adjacent to ener- be grounded or provisions made to in- gized transmission lines, the lines shall sulate or isolate the employee. be deenergized when practical. If the (4)(i) If the existing line is deener- lines are not deenergized, extraor- gized, proper clearance authorization dinary caution shall be exercised to shall be secured and the line grounded maintain the minimum clearance dis- on both sides of the crossover or, the tances required by § 1926.950(c), includ- line being strung or removed shall be ing Table V–1. considered and worked as energized. (6)(i) Erection cranes shall be set on (ii) When crossing over energized firm level foundations and when the conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope cranes are so equipped outriggers shall nets or guard structures shall be in- be used. stalled unless provision is made to iso- (ii) Tag lines shall be utilized to late or insulate the workman or the en- maintain control of tower sections ergized conductor. Where practical the being raised and positioned, except automatic reclosing feature of the cir- where the use of such lines would cre- cuit interrupting device shall be made ate a greater hazard. inoperative. In addition, the line being (iii) The loadline shall not be de- strung shall be grounded on either side tached from a tower section until the of the crossover or considered and section is adequately secured. worked as energized. (iv) Except during emergency res- (5) Conductors being strung in or re- toration procedures erection shall be moved shall be kept under positive discontinued in the event of high wind control by the use of adequate tension

468

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00468 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.955

reels, guard structures, tielines, or (iii) Each pull shall be snubbed or other means to prevent accidental con- dead ended at both ends before subse- tact with energized circuits. quent pulls. (6) Guard structure members shall be (d) Stringing adjacent to energized sound and of adequate dimension and lines. (1) Prior to stringing parallel to strength, and adequately supported. an existing energized transmission line (7)(i) Catch-off anchors, rigging, and a competent determination shall be hoists shall be of ample capacity to made to ascertain whether dangerous prevent loss of the lines. induced voltage buildups will occur, (ii) The manufacturer’s load rating particularly during switching and shall not be exceeded for stringing ground fault conditions. When there is lines, pulling lines, sock connections, a possibility that such dangerous in- and all load-bearing hardware and ac- duced voltage may exist the employer cessories. shall comply with the provisions of (iii) Pulling lines and accessories paragraphs (d) (2) through (9) of this shall be inspected regularly and re- section in addition to the provisions of placed or repaired when damaged or paragraph (c) of this § 1926.955, unless when dependability is doubtful. The the line is worked as energized. provisions of § 1926.251(c)(4)(ii) (con- (2) When stringing adjacent to ener- cerning splices) shall not apply. gized lines the tension stringing method or other methods which preclude un- (8) Conductor grips shall not be used intentional contact between the lines on wire rope unless designed for this being pulled and any employee shall be application. used. (9) While the conductor or pulling (3) All pulling and tensioning equip- line is being pulled (in motion) employment shall be isolated, insulated, or ef- ees shall not be permitted directly fectively grounded. under overhead operations, nor shall (4) A ground shall be installed be- any employee be permitted on the tween the tensioning reel setup and the crossarm. first structure in order to ground each (10) A transmission clipping crew bare conductor, subconductor, and shall have a minimum of two struc- overhead ground conductor during tures clipped in between the crew and stringing operations. the conductor being sagged. When (5) During stringing operations, each working on bare conductors, clipping bare conductor, subconductor, and and tying crews shall work between overhead ground conductor shall be grounds at all times. The grounds shall grounded at the first tower adjacent to remain intact until the conductors are both the tensioning and pulling setup clipped in, except on dead end struc- and in increments so that no point is tures. more than 2 miles from a ground. (11)(i) Except during emergency res- (i) The grounds shall be left in place toration procedures, work from struc- until conductor installation is com- tures shall be discontinued when ad- pleted. verse weather (such as high wind or ice (ii) Such grounds shall be removed as on structures) makes the work haz- the last phase of aerial cleanup. ardous. (iii) Except for moving type grounds, (ii) Stringing and clipping operations the grounds shall be placed and re- shall be discontinued during the moved with a hot stick. progress of an electrical storm in the (6) Conductors, subconductors, and immediate vicinity. overhead ground conductors shall be (12)(i) Reel handling equipment, in- grounded at all dead-end or catch-off cluding pulling and braking machines, points. shall have ample capacity, operate (7) A ground shall be located at each smoothly, and be leveled and aligned in side and within 10 feet of working areas accordance with the manufacturer’s where conductors, subconductors, or operating instructions. overhead ground conductors are being (ii) Reliable communications be- spliced at ground level. The two ends tween the reel tender and pulling rig to be spliced shall be bonded to each operator shall be provided. other. It is recommended that splicing

469

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00469 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.955 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

be carried out on either an insulated (5) The automatic reclosing feature platform or on a conductive metallic of circuit interrupting devices shall be grounding mat bonded to both grounds. made inoperative where practical be- When a grounding mat is used, it is fore working on any energized line or recommended that the grounding mat equipment. be roped off and an insulated walkway (6) Work shall not be performed dur- provided for access to the mat. ing the progress of an electrical storm (8)(i) All conductors, subconductors, in the immediate vicinity. and overhead ground conductors shall (7) A conductive bucket liner or other be bonded to the tower at any isolated suitable conductive device shall be pro- tower where it may be necessary to vided for bonding the insulated aerial complete work on the transmission device to the energized line or equip- line. ment. (ii) Work on dead-end towers shall re- (i) The employee shall be connected quire grounding on all deenergized to the bucket liner by use of conduc- lines. tive shoes, leg clips, or other suitable (iii) Grounds may be removed as soon means. as the work is completed: Provided, (ii) Where necessary, adequate elec- That the line is not left open circuited trostatic shielding for the voltage at the isolated tower at which work is being worked or conductive clothing being completed. shall be provided. (9) When performing work from the structures, clipping crews and all oth- (8) Only tools and equipment in- ers working on conductors, subconduc- tended for live-line bare-hand work tors, or overhead ground conductors shall be used, and such tools and equip- shall be protected by individual ment shall be kept clean and dry. grounds installed at every work loca- (9) Before the boom is elevated, the tion. outriggers on the aerial truck shall be (e) Live-line bare-hand work. In addi- extended and adjusted to stabilize the tion to any other applicable standards truck and the body of the truck shall contained elsewhere in this subpart all be bonded to an effective ground, or live-line bare-hand work shall be per- barricaded and considered as energized formed in accordance with the fol- equipment. lowing requirements: (10) Before moving the aerial lift into (1) Employees shall be instructed and the work position, all controls (ground trained in the live-line bare-hand tech- level and bucket) shall be checked and nique and the safety requirements per- tested to determine that they are in tinent thereto before being permitted proper working condition. to use the technique on energized cir- (11) Arm current tests shall be made cuits. before starting work each day, each (2) Before using the live-line bare- time during the day when higher volt- hand technique on energized high-voltage is going to be worked and when age conductors or parts, a check shall changed conditions indicate a need for be made of: additional tests. Aerial buckets used (i) The voltage rating of the circuit for bare-hand live-line work shall be on which the work is to be performed; subjected to an arm current test. This (ii) The clearances to ground of lines test shall consist of placing the bucket and other energized parts on which in contact with an energized source work is to be performed; and equal to the voltage to be worked upon (iii) The voltage limitations of the for a minimum time of three (3) min- aerial-lift equipment intended to be utes. the leakage current shall not ex- used. ceed 1 microampere per kilo-volt of (3) Only equipment designed, tested, nominal line-to-line voltage. Work op- and intended for live-line bare-hand erations shall be suspended imme- work shall be used. diately upon any indication of a mal- (4) All work shall be personally su- function in the equipment. pervised by a person trained and quali- (12) All aerial lifts to be used for live- fied to perform live-line bare-hand line bare-hand work shall have dual work. controls (lower and upper) as required

470

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00470 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.956

by paragraph (e)(12) (i) and (ii) of this (16) When approaching, leaving, or section. bonding to an energized circuit the (i) The upper controls shall be within minimum distances in Table V–2 shall easy reach of the employee in the bas- be maintained between all parts of the ket. If a two basket type lift is used ac- insulated boom assembly and any cess to the controls shall be within grounded parts (including the lower easy reach from either basket. arm or portions of the truck). (ii) The lower set of controls shall be (17) When positioning the bucket located near base of the boom that will alongside an energized bushing or insu- permit over-ride operation of equip- lator string, the minimum line-to- ment at any time. ground clearances of Table V–2 must be (13) Ground level lift control shall maintained between all parts of the not be operated unless permission has bucket and the grounded end of the been obtained from the employee in bushing or insulator string. lift, except in case of emergency. (18)(i) The use of handlines between (14) Before the employee contacts the buckets, booms, and the ground is pro- energized part to be worked on, the hibited. conductive bucket liner shall be bond- (ii) No conductive materials over 36 ed to the energized conductor by means inches long shall be placed in the buck- of a positive connection which shall re- et, except for appropriate length jump- main attached to the energized con- ers, armor rods, and tools. ductor until the work on the energized (iii) Nonconductive-type handlines circuit is completed. may be used from line to ground when (15) The minimum clearance dis- not supported from the bucket. tances for live-line bare-hand work (19) The bucket and upper insulated shall be as specified in Table V–2. boom shall not be overstressed by at- These minimum clearance distances tempting to lift or support weights in shall be maintained from all grounded excess of the manufacturer’s rating. objects and from lines and equipment (20)(i) A minimum clearance table (as at a different potential than that to shown in table V–2) shall be printed on which the insulated aerial device is a plate of durable nonconductive mate- bonded unless such grounded objects or rial, and mounted in the buckets or its other lines and equipment are covered vicinity so as to be visible to the oper- by insulated guards. These distances ator of the boom. shall be maintained when approaching, (ii) It is recommended that insulated leaving, and when bonded to the ener- measuring sticks be used to verify gized circuit. clearance distances.

TABLE V±2ÐMINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES § 1926.956 Underground lines. FOR LIVE-LINE BARE-HAND WORK (ALTER- NATING CURRENT) (a) Guarding and ventilating street opening used for access to underground Distance in feet and lines or equipment. (1) Appropriate inches for maximum Voltage range (phase-to-phase) voltage warning signs shall be promptly placed kilovolts when covers of manholes, handholes, or Phase to Phase to ground phase vaults are removed. What is an appropriate warning sign is dependent upon 2.1 to 15 ...... 2′0″ 2′0″ the nature and location of the hazards ′ ″ ′ ″ 15.1 to 35 ...... 2 4 2 4 involved. 35.1 to 46 ...... 2′6″ 2′6″ 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 3′0″ 3′0″ (2) Before an employee enters a street 72.6 to 121 ...... 3′4″ 4′6″ opening, such as a manhole or an 138 to 145 ...... 3′6″ 5′0″ unvented vault, it shall be promptly ′ ″ ′ ″ 161 to 169 ...... 3 8 5 6 protected with a barrier, temporary 230 to 242 ...... 5′0″ 8′4″ 345 to 362 ...... 1 7′0″ 1 13′4″ cover, or other suitable guard. 500 to 552 ...... 1 11′0″ 1 20′0″ (3) When work is to be performed in a 700 to 765 ...... 1 15′0″ 1 31′0″ manhole or unvented vault: 1 For 345±362kv., 500±552kv., and 700±765kv., the min- (i) No entry shall be permitted unless imum clearance distance may be reduced provided the distances are not made less than the shortest distance between forced ventilation is provided or the at- the energized part and a grounded surface. mosphere is found to be safe by testing

471

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00471 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.957 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

for oxygen deficiency and the presence shall be identified by electrical means of explosive gases or fumes; unless its identity is obvious by reason (ii) Where unsafe conditions are de- of distinctive appearance. tected, by testing or other means, the (6) Before cutting into a cable or work area shall be ventilated and oth- opening a splice, the cable shall be erwise made safe before entry; identified and verified to be the proper (iii) Provisions shall be made for an cable. adequate continuous supply of air. (7) When working on buried cable or (b) Work in manholes. (1) While work on cable in manholes, metallic sheath is being performed in manholes, an em- continuity shall be maintained by ployee shall be available in the imme- bonding across the opening or by equiv- diate vicinity to render emergency as- alent means. sistance as may be required. This shall not preclude the employee in the im- § 1926.957 Construction in energized mediate vicinity from occasionally en- substations. tering a manhole to provide assistance, (a) Work near energized equipment fa- other than emergency. This require- cilities. (1) When construction work is ment does not preclude a qualified em- performed in an energized substation, ployee, working alone, from entering authorization shall be obtained from for brief periods of time, a manhole the designated, authorized person be- where energized cables or equipment fore work is started. are in service, for the purpose of in- (2) When work is to be done in an en- spection, housekeeping, taking read- ergized substation, the following shall ings, or similar work if such work can be determined: be performed safely. (i) What facilities are energized, and (2) When open flames must be used or (ii) What protective equipment and smoking is permitted in manholes, precautions are necessary for the safe- extra precautions shall be taken to ty of personnel. provide adequate ventilation. (3) Extraordinary caution shall be ex- (3) Before using open flames in a ercised in the handling of busbars, manhole or excavation in an area tower steel, materials, and equipment where combustible gases or liquids may in the vicinity of energized facilities. be present, such as near a gasoline The requirements set forth in service station, the atmosphere of the § 1926.950(c), shall be complied with. manhole or excavation shall be tested (b) Deenergized equipment or lines. and found safe or cleared of the com- When it is necessary to deenergize bustible gases or liquids. equipment or lines for protection of (c) Trenching and excavating. (1) Dur- employees, the requirements of ing excavation or trenching, in order to § 1926.950(d) shall be complied with. prevent the exposure of employees to (c) Barricades and barriers. (1) Barri- the hazards created by damage to dan- cades or barriers shall be installed to gerous underground facilities, efforts prevent accidental contact with ener- shall be made to determine the loca- gized lines or equipment. tion of such facilities and work con- (2) Where appropriate, signs indi- ducted in a manner designed to avoid cating the hazard shall be posted near damage. the barricade or barrier. These signs (2) Trenching and excavation oper- shall comply with § 1926.200. ations shall comply with §§ 1926.651 and (d) Control panels. (1) Work on or ad- 1926.652. jacent to energized control panels shall (3) When underground facilities are be performed by designated employees. exposed (electric, gas, water, tele- (2) Precaution shall be taken to pre- phone, etc.) they shall be protected as vent accidental operation of relays or necessary to avoid damage. other protective devices due to jarring, (4) Where multiple cables exist in an vibration, or improper wiring. excavation, cables other than the one (e) Mechanized equipment. (1) Use of being worked on shall be protected as vehicles, gin poles, cranes, and other necessary. equipment in restricted or hazardous (5) When multiple cables exist in an areas shall at all times be controlled excavation, the cable to be worked on by designated employees.

472

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00472 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.959

(2) All mobile cranes and derricks (2) All buckles shall withstand a shall be effectively grounded when 2,000-pound tensile test with a max- being moved or operated in close prox- imum permanent deformation no imity to energized lines or equipment, greater than one sixty-fourth inch. or the equipment shall be considered (3) D rings shall withstand a 5,000- energized. pound tensile test without failure. (3) Fenders shall not be required for Failure of a D ring shall be considered lowboys used for transporting large cracking or breaking. electrical equipment, transformers, or (4) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000- breakers. pound tensile test without failure. (f) Storage. The storage requirements Failure of a snaphook shall be distor- of § 1926.953(c) shall be complied with. tion sufficient to release the keeper. (g) Substation fences. (1) When a sub- (b) Specific requirements. (1)(i) All fab- station fence must be expanded or re- ric used for safety straps shall with- moved for construction purposes, a stand an A.C. dielectric test of not less temporary fence affording similar pro- than 25,000 volts per foot ‘‘dry’’ for 3 tection when the site is unattended, minutes, without visible deterioration. shall be provided. Adequate inter- (ii) All fabric and leather used shall connection with ground shall be main- be tested for leakage current and shall tained between temporary fence and not exceed 1 milliampere when a permanent fence. potention of 3,000 volts is applied to the (2) All gates to all unattended sub- electrodes positioned 12 inches apart. stations shall be locked, except when (iii) Direct current tests may be perwork is in progress. mitted in lieu of alternating current (h) Footing excavation. (1) Excavation tests. for auger, pad and piling type footings (2) The cushion part of the body belt for structures and towers shall require shall: the same precautions as for metal (i) Contain no exposed rivets on the tower construction (see § 1926.955(b)(1)). inside; (ii) Be at least three (3) inches in (2) No employee shall be permitted to width; enter an unsupported auger-type exca- (iii) Be at least five thirty-seconds vation in unstable material for any (5⁄32) inch thick, if made of leather; and purpose. Necessary clean-out in such (iv) Have pocket tabs that extended cases shall be accomplished without at least 11⁄2 inches down and three (3) entry. inches back of the inside of circle of § 1926.958 External load helicopters. each D ring for riveting on plier or tool pockets. On shifting D belts, this meas- In all operations performed using a urement for pocket tabs shall be taken rotorcraft for moving or placing exter- when the D ring section is centered. nal loads, the provisions of § 1926.551 of (3) A maximum of four (4) tool loops subpart N of this part shall be complied shall be so situated on the body belt with. that four (4) inches of the body belt in the center of the back, measuring from § 1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety D ring to D ring, shall be free of tool straps, and lanyards. loops, and any other attachments. (a) General requirements. The require- (4) Suitable copper, steel, or equiva- ments of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this lent liners shall be used around bar of section shall be complied with for all D rings to prevent wear between these lineman’s body belts, safety straps and members and the leather or fabric en- lanyards acquired for use after the ef- closing them. fective date of this subpart. (5) All stitching shall be of a min- (1) Hardware for lineman’s body imum 42-pound weight nylon or equiva- belts, safety straps, and lanyards shall lent thread and shall be lock stitched. be drop forged or pressed steel and have Stitching parallel to an edge shall not a corrosive resistive finish tested to be less than three-sixteenths (3⁄16) inch American Society for Testing and Ma- from edge of narrowest member caught terials B117–64 (50-hour test). Surfaces by the thread. The use of cross stitch- shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. ing on leather is prohibited.

473

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00473 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.960 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(6) The keeper of snaphooks shall (c) Barrier. The term means a phys- have a spring tension that will not ical obstruction which is intended to allow the keeper to begin to open with prevent contact with energized lines or a weight of 21⁄2 pounds or less, but the equipment. keeper of snaphooks shall begin to (d) Barricade. The term means a phys- open with a weight of four (4) pounds, ical obstruction such as tapes, screens, when the weight is supported on the or cones intended to warn and limit ac- keeper against the end of the nose. cess to a hazardous area. (7) Testing of lineman’s safety straps, (e) Bond. The term means an elec- body belts and lanyards shall be in ac- trical connection from one conductive cordance with the following procedure: element to another for the purpose of (i) Attach one end of the safety strap minimizing potential differences or or lanyard to a rigid support, the other providing suitable conductivity for fault current or for mitigation of leak- end shall be attached to a 250-pound age current and electrolytic action. canvas bag of sand: (f) Bushing. The term means an insu- (ii) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of lating structure including a through sand to free fall 4 feet for (safety strap conductor, or providing a passageway test) and 6 feet for (lanyard test); in for such a conductor, with provision for each case stopping the fall of the 250- mounting on a barrier, conducting or pound bag: otherwise, for the purpose of insulating (iii) Failure of the strap or lanyard the conductor from the barrier and shall be indicated by any breakage, or conducting current from one side of the slippage sufficient to permit the bag to barrier to the other. fall free of the strap or lanyard. The (g) Cable. The term means a con- entire ‘‘body belt assembly’’ shall be ductor with insulation, or a stranded tested using one D ring. A safety strap conductor with or without insulation or lanyard shall be used that is capable and other coverings (single-conductor of passing the ‘‘impact loading test’’ cable) or a combination of conductors and attached as required in paragraph insulated from one another (multiple- (b)(7)(i) of this section. The body belt conductor cable). shall be secured to the 250-pound bag of (h) Cable sheath. The term means a sand at a point to simulate the waist of protective covering applied to cables. a man and allowed to drop as stated in NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul- paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section. tiple layers of which one or more is conduc- Failure of the body belt shall be indi- tive. cated by any breakage, or slippage suf- (i) Circuit. The term means a con- ficient to permit the bag to fall free of ductor or system of conductors the body belt. through which an electric current is intended to flow. § 1926.960 Definitions applicable to (j) Communication lines. The term this subpart. means the conductors and their sup- (a) Alive or live (energized). The term porting or containing structures which means electrically connected to a are used for public or private signal or source of potential difference, or elec- communication service, and which op- trically charged so as to have a poten- erate at potentials not exceeding 400 tial significantly different from that of volts to ground or 750 volts between the earth in the vicinity. The term any two points of the circuit, and the ‘‘live’’ is sometimes used in place of transmitted power of which does not the term ‘‘current-carrying,’’ where exceed 150 watts. When operating at the intent is clear, to avoid repetition less than 150 volts no limit is placed on of the longer term. the capacity of the system. (b) Automatic circuit recloser. The term NOTE: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sig- means a self-controlled device for auto- nal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, commu- matically interrupting and reclosing nity television antenna, and other systems conforming with the above are included. an alternating current circuit with a Lines used for signaling purposes, but not in- predetermined sequence of opening and cluded under the above definition, are con- reclosing followed by resetting, hold sidered as supply lines of the same voltage closed, or lockout operation. and are to be so run.

474

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00474 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.960

(k) Conductor. The term means a ma- (t) Exposed. The term means not iso- terial, usually in the form of a wire, lated or guarded. cable, or bus bar suitable for carrying (u) Electric supply lines. The term an electric current. means those conductors used to trans- (l) Conductor shielding. The term mit electric energy and their necessary means an envelope which encloses the supporting or containing structures. conductor of a cable and provides an Signal lines of more than 400 volts to equipotential surface in contact with ground are always supply lines within the cable insulation. the meaning of the rules, and those of (m) Current-carrying part. The term less than 400 volts to ground may be means a conducting part intended to be considered as supply lines, if so run and connected in an electric circuit to a operated throughout. source of voltage. Non-current-car- (v) Guarded. The term means protected by personnel, covered, fenced, or rying parts are those not intended to enclosed by means of suitable casings, be so connected. barrier rails, screens, mats, platforms, (n) Dead (deenergized). The term or other suitable devices in accordance means free from any electrical connec- with standard barricading techniques tion to a source of potential difference designed to prevent dangerous ap- and from electrical charges: Not having proach or contact by persons or ob- a potential difference from that of jects. earth. NOTE: Wires, which are insulated but not NOTE: The term is used only with reference otherwise protected, are not considered as to current-carrying parts which are some- guarded. times alive (energized). (w) Ground. (Reference). The term (o) Designated employee. The term means that conductive body, usually means a qualified person delegated to earth, to which an electric potential is perform specific duties under the con- referenced. ditions existing. (x) Ground (as a noun). The term (p) Effectively grounded. The term means a conductive connection wheth- means intentionally connected to earth er intentional or accidental, by which through a ground connection or con- an electric circuit or equipment is connections of sufficiently low impedance nected to reference ground. and having sufficient current-carrying (y) Ground (as a verb). The term capacity to prevent the buildup of means the connecting or establishment voltages which may result in undue of a connection, whether by intention hazard to connected equipment or to or accident of an electric circuit or persons. equipment to reference ground. (z) Grounding electrode (ground elec- (q) Electric line trucks. The term trode). The term grounding electrode means a truck used to transport men, means a conductor embedded in the tools, and material, and to serve as a earth, used for maintaining ground po- traveling workshop for electric power tential on conductors connected to it, line construction and maintenance and for dissipating into the earth cur- work. It is sometimes equipped with a rent conducted to it. boom and auxiliary equipment for set- (aa) Grounding electrode resistance. ting poles, digging holes, and elevating The term means the resistance of the material or men. grounding electrode to earth. (r) Enclosed. The term means sur- (bb) Grounding electrode conductor rounded by a case, cage, or fence, (grounding conductor). The term means which will protect the contained equip- a conductor used to connect equipment ment and prevent accidental contact of or the grounded circuit of a wiring sys- a person with live parts. tem to a grounding electrode. (s) Equipment. This is a general term (cc) Grounded conductor. The term which includes fittings, devices, appli- means a system or circuit conductor ances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, which is intentionally grounded. used as part of, or in connection with, (dd) Grounded system. The term an electrical power transmission and means a system of conductors in which distribution system, or communication at least one conductor or point (usu- systems. ally the middle wire, or neutral point

475

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00475 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.960 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

of transformer or generator windings) tems or equipment for the purpose of is intentionally grounded, either sol- alerting persons that the circuit, sys- idly or through a current-limiting de- tem or equipment is being worked on. vice (not a current-interrupting de- (oo) Unstable material. The term vice). means earth material, other than run- (ee) Hotline tools and ropes. The term ning, that because of its nature or the means those tools and ropes which are influence of related conditions, cannot especially designed for work on ener- be depended upon to remain in place gized high voltage lines and equipment. without extra support, such as would Insulated aerial equipment especially be furnished by a system of shoring. designed for work on energized high voltage lines and equipment shall be (pp) Vault. The term means an enclo- considered hot line. sure above or below ground which per- (ff) Insulated. The term means sepa- sonnel may enter and is used for the rated from other conducting surfaces purpose of installing, operating, and/or by a dielectric substance (including air maintaining equipment and/or cable. space) offering a high resistance to the (qq) Voltage. The term means the ef- passage of current. fective (rms) potential difference be- NOTE: When any object is said to be insu- tween any two conductors or between a lated, it is understood to be insulated in conductor and ground. Voltages are ex- suitable manner for the conditions to which pressed in nominal values. The nominal it is subjected. Otherwise, it is within the voltage of a system or circuit is the purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Insu- lating covering of conductors is one means of value assigned to a system or circuit of making the conductor insulated. a given voltage class for the purpose of (gg) Insulation (as applied to cable). convenient designation. The operating The term means that which is relied voltage of the system may vary above upon to insulate the conductor from or below this value. other conductors or conducting parts (rr) Voltage of an effectively grounded or from ground. circuit. The term means the voltage be- (hh) Insulation shielding. The term tween any conductor and ground unless means an envelope which encloses the otherwise indicated. insulation of a cable and provides an (ss) Voltage of a circuit not effectively equipotential surface in contact with grounded. The term means the voltage cable insulation. between any two conductors. If one cir- (ii) Isolated. The term means an ob- cuit is directly connected to and sup- ject that is not readily accessible to plied from another circuit of higher persons unless special means of access voltage (as in the case of an are used. autotransformer), both are considered (jj) Manhole. The term means a sub- as of the higher voltage, unless the cir- surface enclosure which personnel may cuit of lower voltage is effectively enter and which is used for the purpose grounded, in which case its voltage is of installing, operating, and maintaining equipment and/or cable. not determined by the circuit of higher (kk) Pulling tension. The term means voltage. Direct connection implies the longitudinal force exerted on a electric connection as distinguished cable during installation. from connection merely through elec- (ll) Qualified person. The term means tromagnetic or electrostatic induction. a person who by reason of experience or training is familiar with the operation Subpart W—Rollover Protective to be performed and the hazards in- Structures; Overhead Protection volved. (mm) Switch. The term means a device for opening and closing or chang- AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction ing the connection of a circuit. In these Safety Act), 40 U.S.C. 333; secs. 4, 6, and 8, rules, a switch is understood to be Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 manually operable, unless otherwise (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s stated. Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR (nn) Tag. The term means a system 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or method of identifying circuits, sys- as applicable.

476

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00476 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1000

§ 1926.1000 Rollover protective struc- tailed in §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as ap- tures (ROPS) for material handling plicable or shall be designed, fab- equipment. ricated, and installed in a manner (a) Coverage. (1) This section applies which will support, based on the ulti- to the following types of material han- mate strength of the metal, at least dling equipment: To all rubber-tired, two times the weight of the prime self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired mover applied at the point of impact. front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, (i) The design objective shall be to wheel-type agricultural and industrial minimize the likelihood of a complete tractors, crawler tractors, crawler-type overturn and thereby minimize the loaders, and motor graders, with or possibility of the operator being without attachments, that are used in crushed as a result of a rollover or construction work. This requirement upset. does not apply to sideboom pipelaying tractors. (ii) The design shall provide a (2) The promulgation of specific vertical clearance of at least 52 inches standards for rollover protective struc- from the work deck to the ROPS at the tures for compactors and rubber-tired point of ingress or egress. skid-steer equipment is reserved pend- (d) Remounting. ROPS removed for ing consideraton of standards currently any reason, shall be remounted with being developed. equal quality, or better, bolts or weld- (b) Equipment manufactured on or after ing as required for the original mount- September 1, 1972. Material handling ing. machinery described in paragraph (a) (e) Labeling. Each ROPS shall have of this section and manufactured on or the following information permanently after September 1, 1972, shall be affixed to the structure: equipped with rollover protective (1) Manufacturer or fabricator’s name structures which meet the minimum and address; performance standards prescribed in (2) ROPS model number, if any; §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as applicable. (3) Machine make, model, or series (c) Equipment manufactured before Sep- number that the structure is designed tember 1, 1972. (1) All material handling equipment described in paragraph (a) to fit. of this section and manufactured or (f) Machines meeting certain existing placed in service (owned or operated by governmental requirements. Any machine the employer) prior to September 1, in use, equipped with rollover protec- 1972, shall be fitted with rollover pro- tive structures, shall be deemed in tective structures no later than the compliance with this section if it dates listed below: meets the rollover protective structure (i) Machines manufactured on or requirements of the State of Cali- after January 1, 1972, shall be fitted no fornia, the U.S. Army Corps of Engi- later than April 1, 1973. neers, or the Bureau of Reclamation of (ii) Machines manufactured between the U.S. Department of the Interior in July 1, 1971, and December 31, 1971, effect on April 5, 1972. The require- shall be fitted no later than July 1, ments in effect are: 1973. (1) State of California: Construction (iii) Machines manufactured between Safety Orders, issued by the Depart- July 1, 1970, and June 30, 1971, shall be ment of Industrial Relations pursuant fitted no later than January 1, 1974. to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State (iv) Machines manufactured between of California. July 1, 1969, and June 30, 1970, shall be fitted no later than July 1, 1974. (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: (v) Machines manufactured before General Safety Requirements, EM–385– July 1, 1969: Reserved pending further 1–1 (March 1967). study, development, and review. (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. De- (2) Rollover protective structures and partment of the Interior: Safety and supporting attachment shall meet the Health Regulations for Construction. minimum performance criteria de- Part II (September 1971).

477

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00477 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1001 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

§ 1926.1001 Minimum performance cri- and Figure W–4 for crawler tractors teria for rollover protective struc- and crawler-type loaders. tures for designated scrapers, load- (2) Table W–1 contains a listing of the ers, dozers, graders, and crawler required apparatus for all types of tractors. equipment described in paragraph (a) (a) General. This section prescribes of this section. minimum performance criteria for rollover protective structures (ROPS) for TABLE W±1 rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers; rubber-tired front-end loaders and rub- Means to measure Accuracy ber-tired dozers; crawler tractors, and Deflection of ROPS, inches ...... ±5% of deflection meas- crawler-type loaders, and motor grad- ured. ers. The vehicle and ROPS as a system Vehicle weight, pounds ...... ±5% of the weight meas- shall have the structural characteris- ured. tics prescribed in paragraph (f) of this Force applied to frame, pounds ... ±5% of force measured. Dimensions of critical zone, ±0.5 in. section for each type of machine de- inches. scribed in this paragraph. (b) The static laboratory test pre- (d) Vehicle condition. The ROPS to be scribed herein will determine the ade- tested must be attached to the vehicle quacy of the structures used to protect structure in the same manner as it will the operator under the following condi- be attached during vehicle use. A to- tions: tally assembled vehicle is not required. (1) For rubber-tired self-propelled However, the vehicle structure and scrapers, rubber-tired front-end load- frame which support the ROPS must ers, and rubber-tired dozers: Operating represent the actual vehicle installa- between 0 and 10 miles per hour over tion. All normally detachable windows, hard clay where rollover would be lim- panels, or nonstructural fittings shall ited to a maximum roll angle of 360° be removed so that they do not con- down a slope of 30° maximum. tribute to the strength of the ROPS. (2) For motor graders: Operating between 0 and 10 miles per hour over hard (e) Test procedure. The test procedure clay where rollover would be limited to shall include the following, in the se- 360° down a slope of 30° maximum. quence indicated: (3) For crawler tractors and crawler- (1) Energy absorbing capabilities of type loaders: Operating between 0 and ROPS shall be verified when loaded lat- 10 miles per hour over hard clay where erally by incrementally applying a dis- rollover would be limited to a max- tributed load to the longitudinal out- imum roll angle of 360° down a slope of side top member of the ROPS, as shown 45°. in Figure W–1, W–2, or W–3, as applica- (c) Facilities and apparatus. (1) The ble. The distributed load must be ap- following material is necessary: plied so as to result in approximately (i) Material, equipment, and tiedown uniform deflection of the ROPS. The means adequate to insure that the load increments should correspond ROPS and its vehicle frame absorb the with approximately 0.5 in. ROPS de- applied energy. flection increment in the direction of (ii) Equipment necessary to measure the load application, measured at the and apply loads to the ROPS. Adequate ROPS top edge. Should the operator’s means to measure deflections and seat be offcenter, the load shall be ap- lengths should also be provided. plied on the offcenter side. For each ap- (iii) Recommended, but not manda- plied load increment, the total load tory, types of test setups are illus- (lb.) versus corresponding deflection trated in Figure W–1 for all types of (in.) shall be plotted, and the area equipment to which this section ap- under the load -deflection curve shall plies; and in Figure W–2 for rubber- be calculated. This area is equal to the tired self-propelled scrapers; Figure W– energy (in.-lb.) absorbed by the ROPS. 3 for rubber-tired front-end loaders, For a typical load-deflection curve and rubber-tired dozers, and motor graders; calculation method, see Figure W–5.

478

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00478 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1001

479

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00479 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1001 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

ROPS shall be verified by suitable material tests or material certification (see paragraph (f)(2)(iv) of this section).

Incremental loading shall be continued until the ROPS has absorbed the amount of energy and the minimum applied load specified under paragraph (f) of this section has been reached or surpassed. (2) To cover the possibility of the vehicle coming to rest on its top, the support capability shall be verified by applying a distributed vertical load to the top of the ROPS so as to result in approximately uniform deflection (see Figure W–1). The load magnitude is specified in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section. (3) The low temperature impact strength of the material used in the

480

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00480 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1001

(f) Performance requirements—(1) Gen- tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired eral performance requirements. (i) No re- dozers; in Figure W–12 for crawler trac- pairs or straightening of any member tors and crawler-type loaders; and in shall be carried out between each pre- Figure W–13 for motor graders. scribed test. (iii) The load magnitude for purposes (ii) During each test, no part of the of compliance with paragraph (e)(2) of ROPS shall enter the critical zone as this section is equal to the vehicle detailed in SAE J397 (1969). Deforma- weight. The test of load magnitude tion of the ROPS shall not allow the shall only be made after the require- plane of the ground to enter this zone. ments of paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this sec- (2) Specific performance requirements. tion are met. (i) The energy requirement for purposes of meeting the requirements of paragraph (e)(1) of this section is to be determined by referring to the plot of the energy versus weight of vehicle (see Figure W–6 for rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers; Figure W–7 for rubber- tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired dozers; Figure W–8 for crawler tractors and crawler-type loaders; and Figure W–9 for motor graders). For purposes of this section, force and weight are measured as pounds (lb.); energy (U) is measured as inch-pounds.

(iv) Material used in the ROPS must have the capability of performing at zero degrees Fahrenheit, or exhibit Charpy V notch impact strength of 8 foot-pounds at minus 20 °Fahrenheit. This is a standard Charpy specimen as described in American Society of Test- ing and Materials A 370, Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products (available at each Re- gional Office of the Occupational Safe- ty and Health Administration). The purpose of this requirement is to re- (ii) The applied load must attain at duce the tendency of brittle fracture least a value which is determined by associated with dynamic loading, low multiplying the vehicle weight by the corresponding factor shown in Figure temperature operation, and stress rais- W–10 for rubber-tired self-propelled ers which cannot be entirely avoided scrapers; in Figure W–11 for rubber- on welded structures.

481

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00481 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1001 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

weight of the vehicle plus the heaviest attachment.

(g) Definitions. For purposes of this section, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the manufacturer’s maximum weight of the prime mover for rubber-tired self- propelled scrapers. For other types of equipment to which this section applies, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the manufacturer’s maximum recommended

482

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00482 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1002

of interpretation arise. The recommended practices appear in the 1971 SAE Handbook, which may be examined in each of the Regional Offices of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

§ 1926.1002 Protective frames (rollover protective structures, known as ROPS) for wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors used in construction. (a) General. (1) The purpose of this section is to set forth requirements for frames for the protection of operators of wheel type agricultural and industrial tractors to minimize the possibility of operator injury resulting from accidental upsets during normal operation. These frames shall meet the test and performance requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers Standard J334a–1970, Protective Frame Test Procedures and Performance Re- quirements, which is incorporated by reference. The incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Soci- ety of Automotive Engineers, 485 Lex- ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017. Copies may be inspected at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Ave., NW., Room N2634, or at the Office of the FEDERAL REGISTER, 800 North Capitol St., NW., Suite 700, Washington, D.C. The standard also appears in the 1971 SAE Handbook, which may be exam- (h) Source of standard. This standard ined in each of OSHA’s Regional Of- is derived from, and restates, the fol- fices. With respect to agricultural and lowing Society of Automotive Engi- industrial tractors, the provisions of §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1003 for rubber-tired neers Recommended Practices: SAE dozers and rubber-tired loaders may be J320a, Minimum Performance Criteria utilized in lieu of the requirements of for Roll-Over Protective Structure for this section. Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers; (2) The protective frame which is the SAE J394, Minimum Performance Cri- subject of this standard is a structure teria for Roll-Over Protective Struc- mounted to the tractor that extends ture for Rubber-Tired Front End Load- above the operator’s seat and conforms ers and Rubber-Tired Dozers; SAE J395, generally to Figure W–14. Minimum Performance Criteria for (3) If an overhead weather shield is Roll-Over Protective Structure for attached to the protective frame, it Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type may be in place during tests: Provided, Loaders; and SAE J396, Minimum Per- That it does not contribute to the formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- strength of the protective frame. If tive Structure for Motor Graders. such an overhead weather shield is at- These recommended practices shall be tached, it must meet the requirements resorted to in the event that questions of paragraph (i) of this section.

483

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00483 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1003 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

loading, digging, grounds keeping, and highway maintenance. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996]

§ 1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators of agricultural and industrial tractors. (a) General—(1) Purpose. When over- (4) For overhead protection require- head protection is provided on wheel- ments, see § 1926.1003. type agricultural and industrial trac- (5) If protective enclosures are used tors, the overhead protection shall be on wheel-type agricultural and indus- designed and installed according to the requirements contained in the test and trial tractors, they shall meet the re- performance requirements of Society quirements of Society of Automotive of Automotive Engineers Standard Engineers Standard J168 (July 1970), J167–1970, Protective Frame with Over- Protective Enclosures, Test Proce- head Protection-Test Procedures and dures, and Performance Requirements. Performance Requirements, which per- This standard appears in the 1971 SAE tains to overhead protection require- Handbook and may be examined in ments and is incorporated by reference. each Regional Office of the Occupa- The incorporation by reference was ap- tional Safety and Health Administra- proved by the Director of the Federal tion. Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. (b) Applicability. The requirements of 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be this section apply to wheel-type agri- obtained from the Society of Auto- cultural tractors used in construction motive Engineers, 485 Lexington Ave- work and to wheel-type industrial trac- nue, New York, NY 10017. Copies may tors used in construction work. See be inspected at the OSHA Docket Of- paragraph (j) of this section for defini- fice, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 tions of agricultural tractors and in- Constitution Ave., NW., Room N2634, or dustrial tractors. at the Office of the Federal Register, (c)—(i) [Reserved] 800 North Capitol St., NW., Suite 700, Washington, D.C. The standard also ap- (j) Definitions applicable to this section. pears in the 1971 SAE Handbook, which (1) SAE J333a, Operator Protection for may be examined in each of OSHA’s Wheel-Type Agricultural and Indus- Regional Offices. The provisions of trial Tractors (July 1970) defines agri- § 1926.1001 for rubber-tired dozers and cultural tractor as a ‘‘wheel-type vehicle rubber-tired loaders may be used in of more than 20 engine horsepower de- lieu of the standards contained in this signed to furnish the power to pull, section. The purpose of the standard is carry, propel, or drive implements that to minimize the possibility of operator are designed for agricultural usage.’’ injury resulting from overhead hazards Since this Part 1926 applies only to such as flying and falling objects, and construction work, the following defi- at the same time to minimize the pos- nition of ‘‘agricultural tractor’’ is sibility of operator injury from the adopted for purposes of this subpart: cover itself in the event of accidental ‘‘Agricultural tractor’’ means a wheel- upset. type vehicle of more than 20 engine (2) Applicability. This standard applies horsepower, used in construction work, to wheel-type agricultural tractors which is designed to furnish the power used in construction work and to to pull, propel, or drive implements. wheel-type industrial tractors used in (2) Industrial tractor means that class construction work. See § 1926.1002 (b) of wheeled type tractor of more than 20 and (j). In the case of machines to engine horsepower (other than rubber- which § 1926.604 (relating to site clearing) also applies, the overhead protec- tired loaders and dozers described in tion may be either the type of protec- § 1926.1001), used in operations such as tion provided in § 1926.604 or the type of landscaping, construction services, protection provided by this section.

484

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00484 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1050

(b) Overhead protection. When over- employees than the method or item head protection is installed on wheel- specified in the standard. type agricultural or industrial tractors Extension trestle ladder means a self- used in construction work, it shall supporting portable ladder, adjustable meet the requirements of this para- in length, consisting of a trestle ladder graph. The overhead protection may be base and a vertically adjustable exten- constructed of a solid material. If grid sion section, with a suitable means for or mesh is used, the largest permissible locking the ladders together. opening shall be such that the max- Failure means load refusal, breakage, imum circle which can be inscribed be- or separation of component parts. Load tween the elements of the grid or mesh refusal is the point where the struc- is 1.5 in. (38 mm.) in diameter. The tural members lose their ability to overhead protection shall not be in- carry the loads. stalled in such a way as to become a hazard in the case of upset. Fixed ladder means a ladder that cannot be readily moved or carried be- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, cause it is an integral part of a build- 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] ing or structure. A side-step fixed ladder is a fixed ladder that requires a person Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders getting off at the top to step to the side of the ladder side rails to reach the AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work landing. A through fixed ladder is a Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- fixed ladder that requires a person get- tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, ting off at the top to step between the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s side rails of the ladder to reach the Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR part landing. 1911. Handrail means a rail used to provide

SOURCE: 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990, unless employees with a handhold for support. otherwise noted. Individual-rung/step ladders means ladders without a side rail or center § 1926.1050 Scope, application, and rail support. Such ladders are made by definitions applicable to this sub- mounting individual steps or rungs di- part. rectly to the side or wall of the struc- (a) Scope and application. This sub- ture. part applies to all stairways and lad- Job-made ladder means a ladder that ders used in construction, alteration, is fabricated by employees, typically at repair (including painting and deco- the construction site, and is not com- rating), and demolition workplaces mercially manufactured. This defini- covered under 29 CFR part 1926, and tion does not apply to any individual- also sets forth, in specified cir- rung/step ladders. cumstances, when ladders and stair- Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size self- ways are required to be provided. Addi- supporting ladder consisting of a wide tional requirements for ladders used on flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. or with scaffolds are contained in sub- The assenbly may include handrails. part L—Scaffolds (b) Definitions. Cleat means a ladder Lower levels means those areas to crosspiece of rectangular cross section which an employee can fall from a placed on edge upon which a person stairway or ladder. Such areas include may step while ascending or descend- ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, run- ing a ladder. ways, excavations, pits, tanks, mate- Double-cleat ladder means a ladder rial, water, equipment, and similar sur- similar in construction to a single- faces. It does not include the surface cleat ladder, but with a center rail to from which the employee falls. allow simultaneous two-way traffic for Maximum intended load means the employees ascending or descending. total load of all employees, equipment, Equivalent means alternative designs, tools, materials, transmitted loads, materials, or methods that the em- and other loads anticipated to be ap- ployer can demonstrate will provide an plied to a ladder component at any one equal or greater degree of safety for time.

485

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00485 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1051 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Nosing means that portion of a tread points of access) of a stairway landing, projecting beyond the face of the riser or ladder platform where there is no immediately below. wall or guardrail system 39 inches (1 m) Point of access means all areas used or more in height. by employees for work-related passage [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, from one area or level to another. Such 1991, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993] open areas include doorways, 1passageways, stairway openings, stud- § 1926.1051 General requirements. ded walls, and various other permanent or temporary openings used for such (a) A stairway or ladder shall be pro- travel. vided at all personnel points of access Portable ladder means a ladder that where there is a break in elevation of can be readily moved or carried. 19 inches (48 cm) or more, and no ramp, Riser height means the vertical dis- runway, sloped embankment, or per- tance from the top of a tread to the top sonnel hoist is provided. of the next higher tread or platform/ (1) Employees shall not use any spi- landing or the distance from the top of ral stairways that will not be a perma- a platform/landing to the top of the nent part of the structure on which next higher tread or platform/landing. construction work is being performed. Side-step fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad- (2) A double-cleated ladder or two or der.’’ more separate ladders shall be provided Single-cleat ladder means a ladder when ladders are the only mean of ac- consisting of a pair of side rails, con- cess or exit from a working area for 25 nected together by cleats, rungs, or or more employees, or when a ladder is steps. to serve simultaneous two-way traffic. Single-rail ladder means a portable (3) When a building or structure has ladder with rungs, cleats, or steps only one point of access between levels, mounted on a single rail instead of the that point of access shall be kept clear normal two rails used on most other to permit free passage of employees. ladders. When work must be performed or Spiral stairway means a series of steps equipment must be used such that free attached to a vertical pole and pro- passage at that point of access is re- gressing upward in a winding fashion stricted, a second point of access shall within a cylindrical space. be provided and used. Stairrail system means a vertical bar- (4) When a building or structure has rier erected along the unprotected two or more points of access between sides and edges of a stariway to pre- levels, at least one point of access shall vent employees from falling to lower be kept clear to permit free passage of levels. The top surface of a stairrail employees. system may also be a ‘‘handrail.’’ (b) Employers shall provide and in- Step stool (ladder type) means a self- stall all stairway and ladder fall pro- supporting, foldable, portable ladder, tection systems required by this sub- nonadjustable in length, 32 inches or part and shall comply with all other less in overall size, with flat steps and pertinent requirements of this subpart without a pail shelf, designed to be before employees begin the work that climbed on the ladder top cap as well necessitates the installation and use of as all steps. The side rails may con- stairways, ladders, and their respective tinue above the top cap. fall protection systems. Through fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed ladder.’’ § 1926.1052 Stairways. Tread depth means the horizontal dis- (a) General. The following require- tance from front to back of a tread (ex- ments apply to all stairways as indi- cluding nosing, if any). cated: Unprotected sides and edges means any (1) Stairways that will not be a per- side or edge (except at entrances to manent part of the structure on which points of access) of a stairway where construction work is being performed there is no stairrail system or wall 36 shall have landings of not less than 30 inches (.9 m) or more in height, and inches (76 cm) in the direction of travel any side or edge (except at entrances to and extend at least 22 inches (56 cm) in

486

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00486 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1052

width at every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of cm), whichever is less, shall be vertical rise. equipped with: (2) Stairs shall be installed between (i) At least one handrail; and 30° and 50° from horizontal. (ii) One stairrail system along each (3) Riser height and tread depth shall unprotected side or edge. be uniform within each flight of stairs, NOTE: When the top edge of a stairrail sys- including any foundation structure tem also serves as a handrail, paragraph used as one or more treads of the (c)(7) of this section applies. stairs. Variations in riser height or (2) Winding and spiral stairways shall be equipped with a handrail offset suf- tread depth shall not be over 1⁄4-inch (0.6 cm) in any stairway system. ficiently to prevent walking on those (4) Where doors or gates open directly portions of the stairways where the on a stairway, a platform shall be pro- tread width is less than 6 inches (15 vided, and the swing of the door shall cm). not reduce the effective width of the (3) The height of stairrails shall be as platform to less than 20 inches (51 cm). follows: (i) Stairrails installed after March 15, (5) Metal pan landings and metal pan 1991, shall be not less than 36 inches treads, when used, shall be secured in (91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the place before filling with concrete or stairrail system to the surface of the other material. tread, in line with the face of the riser (6) All parts of stairways shall be free at the forward edge of the tread. of hazardous projections, such as pro- (ii) Stairrails installed before March truding nails. 15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches (7) Slippery conditions on stairways (76 cm) nor more than 34 inches (86 cm) shall be eliminated before the stair- from the upper surface of the stairrail ways are used to reach other levels. system to the surface of the tread, in (b) Temporary service. The following line with the face of the riser at the requirements apply to all stairways as forward edge of the tread. indicated: (4) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- (1) Except during stairway construc- mediate vertical members, or equiva- tion, foot traffic is prohibited on stair- lent intermediate structural members, ways with pan stairs where the treads shall be provided between the top rail and/or landings are to be filled in with of the stairrail system and the stair- concrete or other material at a later way steps. date, unless the stairs are temporarily (i) Midrails, when used, shall be lo- fitted with wood or other solid mate- cated at a height midway between the rial at least to the top edge of each top edge of the stairrail system and the pan. Such temporary treads and land- stairway steps. ings shall be replaced when worn below (ii) Screens or mesh, when used, shall the level of the top edge of the pan. extend from the top rail to the stair- (2) Except during stairway construc- way step, and along the entire opening tion, foot traffic is prohibited on skel- between top rail supports. eton metal stairs where permanent (iii) When intermediate vertical treads and/or landings are to be in- members, such as balusters, are used stalled at a later date, unless the stairs between posts, they shall be not more are fitted with secured temporary than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. treads and landings long enough to (iv) Other structural members, when cover the entire tread and/or landing used, shall be installed such that there area. are no openings in the stairrail system (3) Treads for temporary service shall that are more than 19 inches (48 cm) be made of wood or other solid mate- wide. rial, and shall be installed the full (5) Handrails and the top rails of width and depth of the stair. stairrail systems shall be capable of (c) Stairrails and handrails. The fol- withstanding, without failure, a force lowing requirements apply to all stair- of at least 200 pounds (890 n) applied ways as indicated: within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, (1) Stairways having four or more ris- in any downward or outward direction, ers or rising more than 30 inches (76 at any point along the top edge.

487

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00487 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1053 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(6) The height of handrails shall be downward vertical direction. Ladders not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor built and tested in conformance with less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the the applicable provisions of appendix A upper surface of the handrail to the of this subpart will be deemed to meet surface of the tread, in line with the this requirement. face of the riser at the forward edge of (ii) Each portable ladder that is not the tread. self-supporting: At least four times the (7) When the top edge of a stairrail maximum intended load, except that system also serves as a handrail, the each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal height of the top edge shall be not or plastic ladders shall sustain at least more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less 3.3 times the maximum intended load. than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper The ability of a ladder to sustain the surface of the stairrail system to the surface of the tread, in line with the loads indicated in this paragraph shall face of the riser at the forward edge of be determined by applying or transmit- the tread. ting the requisite load to the ladder in (8) Stairrail systems and handrails a downward vertical direction when the shall be so surfaced as to prevent in- ladder is placed at an angle of 751⁄2 de- jury to employees from punctures or grees from the horizontal. Ladders lacerations, and to prevent snagging of built and tested in conformance with clothing. the applicable provisions of appendix A (9) Handrails shall provide an ade- will be deemed to meet this require- quate handhold for employees grasping ment. them to avoid falling. (iii) Each fixed ladder: At least two (10) The ends of stairrail systems and loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, con- handrails shall be constructed so as not centrated between any two consecutive to constitute a projection hazard. attachments (the number and position (11) Handrails that will not be a per- of additional concentrated loads of 250 manent part of the structure being pounds (114 kg) each, determined from built shall have a minimum clearance anticipated usage of the ladder, shall of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail also be included), plus anticipated and walls, stairrail systems, and other loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rig- objects. ging, and impact loads resulting from (12) Unprotected sides and edges of the use of ladder safety devices. Each stairway landings shall be provided step or rung shall be capable of sup- with guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- porting a single concentrated load of at tem criteria are contained in subpart least 250 pounds (114 kg) applied in the M of this part. middle of the step or rung. Ladders [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, built in conformance with the applica- 1991; 56 FR 5061, Feb. 7, 1991; 56 FR 41794, Aug. ble provisions of appendix A will be 23, 1991] deemed to meet this requirement. § 1926.1053 Ladders. (2) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly (a) General. The following require- spaced when the ladder is in position ments apply to all ladders as indicated, for use. including job-made ladders. (1) Ladders shall be capable of sup- (3)(i) Rungs, cleats, and steps of port- porting the following loads without able ladders (except as provided below) failure: and fixed ladders (including individual- (i) Each self-supporting portable lad- rung/step ladders) shall be spaced not der: At least four times the maximum less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor intended load, except that each extra- more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic measured between center lines of the ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times rungs, cleats, and steps. the maximum intended load. The abil- (ii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step ity of a ladder to sustain the loads in- stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20 dicated in this paragraph shall be de- cm) apart, nor more than 12 inches (31 termined by applying or transmitting cm) apart, as measured between center the requisite load to the ladder in a lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.

488

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00488 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1053

(iii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the to have guardrail systems with base section of extension trestle lad- toeboards for falling object and over- ders shall not be less than 8 inches (20 head protection on platforms and land- cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) ings are set forth in subpart M of this apart, as measured between center part.) lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (11) Ladder components shall be sur- The rung spacing on the extension sec- faced so as to prevent injury to an em- tion of the extension trestle ladder ployee from punctures or lacerations, shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm) and to prevent snagging of clothing. nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as (12) Wood ladders shall not be coated measured between center lines of the with any opaque covering, except for rungs, cleats, and steps. identification or warning labels which (4)(i) The minimum clear distance be- may be placed on one face only of a tween the sides of individual-rung/step side rail. ladders and the minimum clear dis- (13) The minimum perpendicular tance between the side rails of other clearance between fixed ladder rungs, fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm). cleats, and steps, and any obstruction (ii) The minimum clear distance be- behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 tween side rails for all portable ladders cm), except in the case of an elevator shall be 111⁄2 inches (29 cm). pit ladder, for which a minimum per- (5) The rungs of individual-rung/step pendicular clearance of 41⁄2 inches (11 ladders shall be shaped such that em- cm) is required. ployees’ feet cannot slide off the end of (14) The minimum perpendicular the rungs. clearance between the center line of (6)(i) The rungs and steps of fixed fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, metal ladders manufactured after and any obstruction on the climbing March 15, 1991, shall be corrugated, side of the ladder shall be 30 inches (76 knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re- cm), except as provided in paragraph sistant material, or otherwise treated (a)(15) of this section. to minimize slipping. (15) When unavoidable obstructions (ii) The rungs and steps of portable are encountered, the minimum perpen- metal ladders shall be corrugated, dicular clearance between the center- knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re- line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and sistant material, or otherwise treated steps, and the obstruction on the to minimize slipping. climbing side of the ladder may be re- (7) Ladders shall not be tied or fas- duced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided tened together to provide longer sec- that a deflection device is installed to tions unless they are specifically de- guide employees around the obstruc- signed for such use. tion. (8) A metal spreader or locking de- (16) Through fixed ladders at their vice shall be provided on each step- point of access/egress shall have a step- ladder to hold the front and back sec- across distance of not less than 7 tions in an open position when the lad- inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches der is being used. (30 cm) as measured from the center- (9) When splicing is required to ob- line of the steps or rungs to the nearest tain a given length of side rail, the re- edge of the landing area. If the normal sulting side rail must be at least equiv- step-across distance exceeds 12 inches alent in strength to a one-piece side (30 cm), a landing platform shall be rail made of the same material. provided to reduce the distance to the (10) Except when portable ladders are specified limit. used to gain access to fixed ladders (17) Fixed ladders without cages or (such as those on utility towers, bill- wells shall have a clear width to the boards, and other structures where the nearest permanent object of at least 15 bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated inches (38 cm) on each side of the cen- to limit access), when two or more sep- terline of the ladder. arate ladders are used to reach an ele- (18) Fixed ladders shall be provided vated work area, the ladders shall be with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, offset with a platform or landing be- or self-retracting lifelines where the tween the ladders. (The requirements length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3

489

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00489 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1053 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

m) but the top of the ladder is at a dis- (i) They shall completely encircle the tance greater than 24 feet (7.3 m) above ladder; lower levels. (ii) They shall be free of projections; (19) Where the total length of a climb (iii) Their inside face on the climbing equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed side of the ladder shall extend not less ladders shall be equipped with one of than 27 inches (68 cm) nor more than 30 the following: inches (76 cm) from the centerline of (i) Ladder safety devices; or the step or rung; (ii) Self-retracting lifelines, and rest (iv) The inside clear width shall be at platforms at intervals not to exceed 150 least 30 inches (76 cm); feet (45.7 m); or (v) The bottom of the wall on the ac- (iii) A cage or well, and multiple lad- cess side shall start at a level not less der sections, each ladder section not to than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder (2.4 m) above the point of access to the sections shall be offset from adjacent bottom of the ladder. sections, and landing platforms shall (22) Ladder safety devices, and re- be provided at maximum intervals of 50 lated support systems, for fixed ladders feet (15.2 m). shall conform to all of the following: (20) Cages for fixed ladders shall con- (i) They shall be capable of with- form to all of the following: standing without failure a drop test consisting of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of (i) Horizontal bands shall be fastened a 500-pound (226 kg) weight; to the side rails of rail ladders, or di- (ii) They shall permit the employee rectly to the structure, building, or using the device to ascend or descend equipment for individual-rung ladders; without continually having to hold, (ii) Vertical bars shall be on the in- push or pull any part of the device, side of the horizontal bands and shall leaving both hands free for climbing; be fastened to them; (iii) They shall be activated within 2 (iii) Cages shall extend not less than feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30 limit the descending velocity of an em- inches (76 cm) from the centerline of ployee to 7 feet/sec. (2.1 m/sec.) or less; the step or rung (excluding the flare at (iv) The connection between the car- the bottom of the cage), and shall not rier or lifeline and the point of attach- be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width; ment to the body belt or harness shall (iv) The inside of the cage shall be not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length. clear of projections; (23) The mounting of ladder safety (v) Horizontal bands shall be spaced devices for fixed ladders shall conform not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) on center to the following: vertically; (i) Mountings for rigid carriers shall (vi) Vertical bars shall be spaced at be attached at each end of the carrier, intervals not more than 91⁄2 inches (24 with intermediate mountings, as nec- cm) on center horizontally; essary, spaced along the entire length (vii) The bottom of the cage shall be of the carrier, to provide the strength at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) necessary to stop employees’ falls. nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the (ii) Mountings for flexible carriers point of access to the bottom of the shall be attached at each end of the ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be carrier. When the system is exposed to flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all wind, cable guides for flexible carriers around within the distance between the shall be installed at a minimum spac- bottom horizontal band and the next ing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and maximum higher band; spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the en- (viii) The top of the cage shall be a tire length of the carrier, to prevent minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the wind damage to the system. top of the platform, or the point of ac- (iii) The design and installation of cess at the top of the ladder, with pro- mountings and cable guides shall not vision for access to the platform or reduce the design strength of the lad- other point of access. der. (21) Wells for fixed ladders shall con- (24) The side rails of through or side- form to all of the following: step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches

490

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00490 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1053

(1.1 m) above the top of the access level which they were built, nor beyond or landing platform served by the lad- their manufacturer’s rated capacity. der. For a parapet ladder, the access (4) Ladders shall be used only for the level shall be the roof if the parapet is purpose for which they were designed. cut to permit passage through the (5)(i) Non-self-supporting ladders parapet; if the parapet is continuous, shall be used at an angle such that the the access level shall be the top of the horizontal distance from the top sup- parapet. port to the foot of the ladder is ap- (25) For through-fixed-ladder exten- proximately one-quarter of the work- sions, the steps or rungs shall be omit- ing length of the ladder (the distance ted from the extension and the exten- along the ladder between the foot and sion of the side rails shall be flared to the top support). provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm) (ii) Wood job-made ladders with nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) clear- spliced side rails shall be used at an ance between side rails. Where ladder angle such that the horizontal distance safety devices are provided, the max- is one-eighth the working length of the imum clearance between side rails of ladder. the extensions shall not exceed 36 (iii) Fixed ladders shall be used at a inches (91 cm). pitch no greater than 90 degrees from (26) For side-step fixed ladders, the the horizontal, as measured to the side rails and the steps or rungs shall back side of the ladder. be continuous in the extension. (6) Ladders shall be used only on sta- (27) Individual-rung/step ladders, ex- ble and level surfaces unless secured to cept those used where their access prevent accidental displacement. openings are covered with manhole (7) Ladders shall not be used on slip- covers or hatches, shall extend at least pery surfaces unless secured or pro- 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level vided with slip-resistant feet to pre- or landing platform either by the con- vent accidental displacement. Slip-re- tinuation of the rung spacings as hori- sistant feet shall not be used as a sub- zontal grab bars or by providing stitute for care in placing, lashing, or vertical grab bars that shall have the holding a ladder that is used upon slip- same lateral spacing as the vertical pery surfaces including, but not lim- legs of the rungs. ited to, flat metal or concrete surfaces (b) Use. The following requirements that are constructed so they cannot be apply to the use of all ladders, includ- prevented from becoming slippery. ing job-made ladders, except as other- (8) Ladders placed in any location wise indicated: where they can be displaced by work- (1) When portable ladders are used for place activities or traffic, such as in access to an upper landing surface, the passageways, doorways, or driveways, ladder side rails shall extend at least 3 shall be secured to prevent accidental feet (.9 m) above the upper landing sur- displacement, or a barricade shall be face to which the ladder is used to gain used to keep the activities or traffic access; or, when such an extension is away from the ladder. not possible because of the ladder’s (9) The area around the top and bot- length, then the ladder shall be secured tom of ladders shall be kept clear. at its top to a rigid support that will (10) The top of a non-self-supporting not deflect, and a grasping device, such ladder shall be placed with the two as a grabrail, shall be provided to as- rails supported equally unless it is sist employees in mounting and dis- equipped with a single support attach- mounting the ladder. In no case shall ment. the extension be such that ladder de- (11) Ladders shall not be moved, flection under a load would, by itself, shifted, or extended while occupied. cause the ladder to slip off its support. (12) Ladders shall have nonconduc- (2) Ladders shall be maintained free tive siderails if they are used where the of oil, grease, and other slipping haz- employee or the ladder could contact ards. exposed energized electrical equip- (3) Ladders shall not be loaded be- ment, except as provided in yond the maximum intended load for § 1926.951(c)(1) of this part.

491

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00491 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T §§ 1926.1054—1926.1059 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(13) The top or top step of a step- §§ 1926.1054—1926.1059 [Reserved] ladder shall not be used as a step. (14) Cross-bracing on the rear section § 1926.1060 Training requirements. of stepladders shall not be used for The following training provisions climbing unless the ladders are de- clarify the requirements of signed and provided with steps for § 1926.21(b)(2), regarding the hazards ad- climbing on both front and rear sec- dressed in subpart X. tions. (a) The employer shall provide a (15) Ladders shall be inspected by a training program for each employee competent person for visible defects on using ladders and stairways, as nec- a periodic basis and after any occur- essary. The program shall enable each rence that could affect their safe use. employee to recognize hazards related to ladders and stairways, and shall (16) Portable ladders with structural train each employee in the procedures defects, such as, but not limited to, to be followed to minimize these haz- broken or missing rungs, cleats, or ards. steps, broken or split rails, corroded (1) The employer shall ensure that components, or other faulty or defec- each employee has been trained by a tive components, shall either be imme- competent person in the following diately marked in a manner that read- areas, as applicable: ily identifies them as defective, or be (i) The nature of fall hazards in the tagged with ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or similar work area; language, and shall be withdrawn from (ii) The correct procedures for erect- service until repaired. ing, maintaining, and disassembling (17) Fixed ladders with structural de- the fall protection systems to be used; fects, such as, but not limited to, bro- (iii) The proper construction, use, ken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, placement, and care in handling of all broken or split rails, or corroded com- stairways and ladders; ponents, shall be withdrawn from serv- (iv) The maximum intended load-car- ice until repaired. The requirement to rying capacities of ladders used; and withdraw a defective ladder from serv- (v) The standards contained in this ice is satisfied if the ladder is either: subpart. (b) Retraining shall be provided for (i) Immediately tagged with ‘‘Do Not each employee as necessary so that the Use’’ or similar language, employee maintains the understanding (ii) Marked in a manner that readily and knowledge acquired through com- identifies it as defective; pliance with this section. (iii) Or blocked (such as with a plywood attachment that spans several APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X—LADDERS rungs). This appendix serves as a non-mandatory (18) Ladder repairs shall restore the guideline to assist employers in complying ladder to a condition meeting its origi- with the ladder loading and strength require- nal design criteria, before the ladder is ments of § 1926.1053(a)(1). A ladder designed returned to use. and built in accordance with the applicable (19) Single-rail ladders shall not be national consensus standards, as set forth below, will be considered to meet the reused. quirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1): (20) When ascending or descending a • Manufactured portable wood ladders: ladder, the user shall face the ladder. American National Standards Institute (21) Each employee shall use at least (ANSI) A14.1–1982—American National one hand to grasp the ladder when pro- Standard for Ladders-Portable Wood-Safety Requirements. gressing up and/or down the ladder. • Manufactured portable metal ladders: (22) An employee shall not carry any ANSI A14.2–1982—American National Stand- object or load that could cause the em- ard for Ladders—Portable Metal-Safety Re- ployee to lose balance and fall. quirements. • Manufactured fixed ladders: ANSI A14.3– [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, 1984—American National Standard for Lad- 1991, as amended at 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991] ders-Fixed-Safety Requirements.

492

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00492 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1090

• Job-made ladders: ANSI A14.4–1979—Safe- tical to those set forth at § 1910.421 of this ty Requirements for Job-Made Ladders. chapter. • Plastic ladders: ANSI A14.5–1982—Amer- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] ican National Standard for Ladders-Portable Reinforced Plastic-Safety Requirements. § 1926.1082 Procedures during dive.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Subpart Y—Diving struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.422 of this AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8, Occupa- chapter. tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Con- § 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers’ Compensa- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tion Act (33 U.S.C. 941); Secretary of Labor’s struction work under this section are iden- Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR tical to those set forth at § 1910.423 of this 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), chapter. as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] SOURCE: 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993, unless otherwise noted. SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES

GENERAL § 1926.1084 SCUBA diving. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- § 1926.1071 Scope and application. struction work under this section are iden- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tical to those set forth at § 1910.424 of this struction work under this section are iden- chapter. tical to those set forth at § 1910.401 of this [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving.

§ 1926.1072 Definitions. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- NOTE: The provisions applicable to con- tical to those set forth at § 1910.425 of this struction work under this section are iden- chapter. tical to those set forth at § 1910.402 of this [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.426 of this § 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.410 of this § 1926.1087 Liveboating. chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.427 of this GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES chapter.

§ 1926.1080 Safe practices manual. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND struction work under this section are iden- REQUIREMENTS tical to those set forth at § 1910.420 of this chapter. § 1926.1090 Equipment.

[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- § 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. tical to those set forth at § 1910.430 of this chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]

493

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00493 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1091 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

RECORDKEEPING (1) Demolition or salvage of structures where asbestos is present; § 1926.1091 Recordkeeping require- (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- ments. terials containing asbestos; NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (3) Construction, alteration, repair, struction work under this section are iden- maintenance, or renovation of struc- tical to those set forth at § 1910.440 of this tures, substrates, or portions thereof, chapter. that contain asbestos; [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (4) Installation of products containing asbestos; § 1926.1092 Effective date. (5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup; NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- and struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.441 of this (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, chapter. containment of and housekeeping activities involving asbestos or products [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] containing asbestos, on the site or lo- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y—EXAMPLES cation at which construction activities OF CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT are performed. OR LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC (7) Coverage under this standard CONDITIONS shall be based on the nature of the work operation involving asbestos ex- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- posure. struction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth at Appendix A to (8) This section does not apply to as- Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. bestos-containing asphalt roof coatings, cements and mastics. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (b) Definitions. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y—GUIDELINES Aggressive method means removal or FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING disturbance of building material by sanding, abrading, grinding or other NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- method that breaks, crumbles, or dis- struction work under this appendix B are integrates intact ACM. identical to those set forth at Appendix B to Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. Amended water means water to which surfactant (wetting agent) has been [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] added to increase the ability of the liquid to penetrate ACM. Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, Substances crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite as- AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); bestos, and any of these minerals that Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health has been chemically treated and/or al- Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary tered. For purposes of this standard, of Labor’s Order Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 ‘‘asbestos’’ includes PACM, as defined (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR below. 9033), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; 29 Asbestos-containing material (ACM), CFR part 1911. means any material containing more Section 1926.1102 not issued under 29 U.S.C. 655 or 29 CFR part 1911; also issued under 5 than one percent asbestos. U.S.C. 553. Assistant Secretary means the Assist- ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- SOURCE: 58 FR 35190, June 30, 1993, unless otherwise noted. tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- ment of Labor, or designee. § 1926.1100 [Reserved] Authorized person means any person authorized by the employer and re- § 1926.1101 Asbestos. quired by work duties to be present in (a) Scope and application. This section regulated areas. regulates asbestos exposure in all work Building/facility owner is the legal en- as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), includ- tity, including a lessee, which exercises ing but not limited to the following: control over management and record

494

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00494 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

keeping functions relating to a build- and custodial staff as set forth at 40 ing and/or facility in which activities CFR 763.92 (a)(2). covered by this standard take place. Critical barrier means one or more Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) layers of plastic sealed over all open- means one certified in the practice of ings into a work area or any other industrial hygiene by the American similarly placed physical barrier suffi- Board of Industrial Hygiene. cient to prevent airborne asbestos in a Class I asbestos work means activities work area from migrating to an adja- involving the removal of TSI and sur- cent area. facing ACM and PACM. Decontamination area means an en- Class II asbestos work means activities closed area adjacent and connected to involving the removal of ACM which is the regulated area and consisting of an not thermal system insulation or sur- equipment room, shower area, and facing material. This includes, but is clean room, which is used for the de- not limited to, the removal of asbestos- contamination of workers, materials, containing wallboard, floor tile and and equipment that are contaminated sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, with asbestos. and construction mastics. Demolition means the wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting Class III asbestos work means repair structural member and any related and maintenance operations, where razing, removing, or stripping of asbes- ‘‘ACM’’, including TSI and surfacing tos products. ACM and PACM, is likely to be dis- Director means the Director, National turbed. Institute for Occupational Safety and Class IV asbestos work means mainte- Health, U.S. Department of Health and nance and custodial activities during Human Services, or designee. which employees contact but do not Disturbance means activities that dis- disturb ACM or PACM and activities to rupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, clean up dust, waste and debris result- crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or ing from Class I, II, and III activities. generate visible debris from ACM or Clean room means an uncontaminated PACM. In no event shall the amount of room having facilities for the storage ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that of employees’ street clothing and which can be contained in one glove uncontaminated materials and equip- bag or waste bag which shall not ex- ment. ceed 60 inches in length and width. Closely resemble means that the major Employee exposure means that expo- workplace conditions which have con- sure to airborne asbestos that would tributed to the levels of historic asbes- occur if the employee were not using tos exposure, are no more protective respiratory protective equipment. than conditions of the current work- Equipment room (change room) means place. a contaminated room located within Competent person means, in addition the decontamination area that is sup- to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32 (f), plied with impermeable bags or con- one who is capable of identifying exist- tainers for the disposal of contami- ing asbestos hazards in the workplace nated protective clothing and equip- and selecting the appropriate control ment. strategy for asbestos exposure, who has Fiber means a particulate form of as- the authority to take prompt correc- bestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a tive measures to eliminate them, as length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f): in addi- 1. tion, for Class I and Class II work who Glovebag means not more than a 60 x is specially trained in a training course 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like en- which meets the criteria of EPA’s closure affixed around an asbestos-con- Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR part taining material, with glove-like ap- 763) for supervisor, or its equivalent pendages through which material and and, for Class III and Class IV work, tools may be handled. who is trained in a manner consistent High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) with EPA requirements for training of filter means a filter capable of trapping local education agency maintenance and retaining at least 99.97 percent of

495

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00495 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 mi- quirements for regulated areas are set crometers in diameter. out in paragraph (e) of this section. Homogeneous area means an area of Removal means all operations where surfacing material or thermal system ACM and/or PACM is taken out or insulation that is uniform in color and stripped from structures or substrates, texture. and includes demolition operations. Industrial hygienist means a profes- Renovation means the modifying of sional qualified by education, training, any existing structure, or portion and experience to anticipate, recog- thereof. nize, evaluate and develop controls for Repair means overhauling, rebuild- occupational health hazards. ing, reconstructing, or reconditioning Intact means that the ACM has not of structures or substrates, including crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise encapsulation or other repair of ACM deteriorated so that the asbestos is no or PACM attached to structures or sub- longer likely to be bound with its ma- strates. trix. Surfacing material means material Modification for purposes of para- that is sprayed, troweled-on or other- graph (g)(6)(ii), means a changed or al- wise applied to surfaces (such as acous- tered procedure, material or compo- tical plaster on ceilings and fire- nent of a control system, which re- proofing materials on structural mem- places a procedure, material or compo- bers, or other materials on surfaces for nent of a required system. Omitting a acoustical, fireproofing, and other pur- procedure or component, or reducing or poses). diminishing the stringency or strength of a material or component of the con- Surfacing ACM means surfacing mate- trol system is not a ‘‘modification’’ for rial which contains more than 1% as- purposes of paragraph (g)(6) of this sec- bestos. tion. Thermal system insulation (TSI) means Negative Initial Exposure Assessment ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, means a demonstration by the em- breeching, tanks, ducts or other struc- ployer, which complies with the cri- tural components to prevent heat loss teria in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this sec- or gain. tion, that employee exposure during an Thermal system insulation ACM is operation is expected to be consist- thermal system insulation which con- ently below the PELs. tains more than 1% asbestos. PACM means ‘‘presumed asbestos (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS). containing material’’. (1) Time-weighted average limit (TWA). Presumed Asbestos Containing Material The employer shall ensure that no em- means thermal system insulation and ployee is exposed to an airborne con- surfacing material found in buildings centration of asbestos in excess of 0.1 constructed no later than 1980. The des- fiber per cubic centimeter of air as an ignation of a material as ‘‘PACM’’ may eight (8) hour time-weighted average be rebutted pursuant to paragraph (TWA), as determined by the method (k)(5) of this section. prescribed in Appendix A to this sec- Project Designer means a person who tion, or by an equivalent method. has successfully completed the train- (2) Excursion limit. The employer shall ing requirements for an abatement ensure that no employee is exposed to project designer established by 40 an airborne concentration of asbestos U.S.C. 763.90(g). in excess of 1.0 fiber per cubic centi- Regulated area means: an area estab- meter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a lished by the employer to demarcate sampling period of thirty (30) minutes, areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos as determined by the method pre- work is conducted, and any adjoining scribed in Appendix A to this section, area where debris and waste from such or by an equivalent method. asbestos work accumulate; and a work (d) Multi-employer worksites. (1) On area within which airborne concentra- multi-employer worksites, an employer tions of asbestos, exceed or there is a performing work requiring the estab- reasonable possibility they may exceed lishment of a regulated area shall in- the permissible exposure limit. Re- form other employers on the site of the

496

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00496 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

nature of the employer’s work with as- lated area where airborne concentra- bestos and/or PACM, of the existence of tions of asbestos exceed, or there is a and requirements pertaining to regu- reasonable possibility they may exceed lated areas, and the measures taken to a PEL. Regulated areas shall comply ensure that employees of such other with the requirements of paragraphs employers are not exposed to asbestos. (2), (3),(4) and (5) of this section. (2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-em- (2) Demarcation. The regulated area ployer work site shall be abated by the shall be demarcated in any manner contractor who created or controls the that minimizes the number of persons source of asbestos contamination. For example, if there is a significant within the area and protects persons breach of an enclosure containing Class outside the area from exposure to air- I work, the employer responsible for borne asbestos. Where critical barriers erecting the enclosure shall repair the or negative pressure enclosures are breach immediately. used, they may demarcate the regu- (3) In addition, all employers of em- lated area. Signs shall be provided and ployees exposed to asbestos hazards displayed pursuant to the requirements shall comply with applicable protective of paragraph (k)(7) of this section. provisions to protect their employees. (3) Access. Access to regulated areas For example, if employees working im- shall be limited to authorized persons mediately adjacent to a Class I asbes- and to persons authorized by the Act or tos job are exposed to asbestos due to regulations issued pursuant thereto. the inadequate containment of such (4) Respirators. All persons entering a job, their employer shall either remove regulated area where employees are re- the employees from the area until the quired pursuant to paragraph (h)(1) of enclosure breach is repaired; or per- this section to wear respirators shall form an initial exposure assessment pursuant to (f) of this section. be supplied with a respirator selected (4) All employers of employees work- in accordance with paragraph (h)(2) of ing adjacent to regulated areas estab- this section. lished by another employer on a multi- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer employer work-site, shall take steps on shall ensure that employees do not eat, a daily basis to ascertain the integrity drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or of the enclosure and/or the effective- apply cosmetics in the regulated area. ness of the control method relied on by (6) Competent Persons. The employer the primary asbestos contractor to as- shall ensure that all asbestos work per- sure that asbestos fibers do not mi- formed within regulated areas is super- grate to such adjacent areas. vised by a competent person, as defined (5) All general contractors on a con- in paragraph (b) of this section. The struction project which includes work duties of the competent person are set covered by this standard shall be out in paragraph (o) of this section. deemed to exercise general supervisory (f) Exposure assessments and moni- authority over the work covered by this standard, even though the general toring—(1) General monitoring criteria. (i) contractor is not qualified to serve as Each employer who has a workplace or the asbestos ‘‘competent person’’ as de- work operation where exposure moni- fined by paragraph (b) of this section. toring is required under this section As supervisor of the entire project, the shall perform monitoring to determine general contractor shall ascertain accurately the airborne concentrations whether the asbestos contractor is in of asbestos to which employees may be compliance with this standard, and exposed. shall require such contractor to come (ii) Determinations of employee ex- into compliance with this standard posure shall be made from breathing when necessary. zone air samples that are representa- (e) Regulated areas. (1) All Class I, II tive of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute and III asbestos work shall be con- short-term exposures of each employee. ducted within regulated areas. All (iii) Representative 8-hour TWA em- other operations covered by this stand- ployee exposure shall be determined on ard shall be conducted within a regu-

497

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00497 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

the basis of one or more samples rep- the standard, the employer may dem- resenting full-shift exposure for em- onstrate that employee exposures will ployees in each work area. Representa- be below the PELs by data which con- tive 30-minute short-term employee ex- form to the following criteria; posures shall be determined on the (A) Objective data demonstrating basis of one or more samples rep- that the product or material con- resenting 30 minute exposures associ- taining asbestos minerals or the activated with operations that are most ity involving such product or material likely to produce exposures above the cannot release airborne fibers in con- excursion limit for employees in each centrations exceeding the TWA and ex- work area. cursion limit under those work condi- (2) Initial Exposure Assessment. (i) tions having the greatest potential for Each employer who has a workplace or releasing asbestos; or work operation covered by this stand- (B) Where the employer has mon- ard shall ensure that a ‘‘competent per- itored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL son’’ conducts an exposure assessment and the excursion limit within 12 immediately before or at the initiation months of the current or projected job, of the operation to ascertain expected the monitoring and analysis were per- exposures during that operation or formed in compliance with the asbestos workplace. The assessment must be standard in effect; and the data were completed in time to comply with re- obtained during work operations con- quirements which are triggered by ex- ducted under workplace conditions posure data or the lack of a ‘‘negative ‘‘closely resembling’’ the processes, exposure assessment,’’ and to provide type of material, control methods, information necessary to assure that work practices, and environmental all control systems planned are appro- conditions used and prevailing in the priate for that operation and will work employer’s current operations, the op- properly. erations were conducted by employees (ii) Basis of Initial Exposure Assess- whose training and experience are no ment: Unless a negative exposure as- more extensive than that of employees sessment has been made pursuant to performing the current job, and these paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the data show that under the conditions initial exposure assessment shall, if prevailing and which will prevail in the feasible, be based on monitoring con- current workplace there is a high de- ducted pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii) gree of certainty that employee expo- of this section. The assessment shall sures will not exceed the TWA and ex- take into consideration both the moni- cursion limit; or toring results and all observations, in- (C) The results of initial exposure formation or calculations which indi- monitoring of the current job made cate employee exposure to asbestos, in- from breathing zone air samples that cluding any previous monitoring con- are representative of the 8-hour TWA ducted in the workplace, or of the oper- and 30-minute short-term exposures of ations of the employer which indicate each employee covering operations the levels of airborne asbestos likely to which are most likely during the per- be encountered on the job. For Class I formance of the entire asbestos job to asbestos work, until the employer con- result in exposures over the PELs. ducts exposure monitoring and docu- (3) Periodic monitoring—(i) Class I and ments that employees on that job will II operations. The employer shall con- not be exposed in excess of the PELs, duct daily monitoring that is rep- or otherwise makes a negative expo- resentative of the exposure of each em- sure assessment pursuant to paragraph ployee who is assigned to work within (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer a regulated area who is performing shall presume that employees are ex- Class I or II work, unless the employer posed in excess of the TWA and excur- pursuant to (f)(2)(iii) of this section, sion limit. has made a negative exposure assess- (iii) Negative Exposure Assessment: ment for the entire operation. For any one specific asbestos job which (ii) All operations under the standard will be performed by employees who other than Class I and II operations. have been trained in compliance with The employer shall conduct periodic

498

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00498 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

monitoring of all work where exposures that is accessible to affected employ- are expected to exceed a PEL, at inter- ees. vals sufficient to document the valid- (6) Observation of monitoring. (i) The ity of the exposure prediction. employer shall provide affected em- (iii) Exception: When all employees ployees and their designated represent- required to be monitored daily are atives an opportunity to observe any equipped with supplied-air respirators monitoring of employee exposure to as- operated in the pressure demand mode, bestos conducted in accordance with or other positive pressure mode res- this section. pirator, the employer may dispense (ii) When observation of the moni- with the daily monitoring required by toring of employee exposure to asbes- this paragraph. However, employees tos requires entry into an area where performing Class I work using a con- the use of protective clothing or equip- trol method which is not listed in para- ment is required, the observer shall be graph (g)(4) (i), (ii), or (iii) of this sec- provided with and be required to use tion or using a modification of a listed such clothing and equipment and shall control method, shall continue to be comply with all other applicable safety monitored daily even if they are and health procedures. equipped with supplied-air respirators. (g) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the neering controls and work practices for periodic monitoring required by para- all operations covered by this section. graph (f)(3) of this section reveals that The employer shall use the following employee exposures, as indicated by engineering controls and work prac- statistically reliable measurements, tices in all operations covered by this are below the permissible exposure section, regardless of the levels of ex- limit and excursion limit the employer posure: may discontinue monitoring for those (i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with employees whose exposures are rep- HEPA filters to collect all debris and resented by such monitoring. dust containing ACM and PACM, ex- (ii) Additional monitoring. Notwith- cept as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) standing the provisions of paragraph (f) of this section in the case of roofing (2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the material. employer shall institute the exposure (ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents, monitoring required under paragraph to control employee exposures during (f)(3) of this section whenever there has asbestos handling, mixing, removal, been a change in process, control cutting, application, and cleanup, ex- equipment, personnel or work practices cept where employers demonstrate that may result in new or additional that the use of wet methods is infeasi- exposures above the permissible expo- ble due to for example, the creation of sure limit and/or excursion limit or electrical hazards, equipment malfunc- when the employer has any reason to tion, and, in roofing, except as provided suspect that a change may result in in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section; new or additional exposures above the and permissible exposure limit and/or ex- (iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of cursion limit. Such additional moni- wastes and debris contaminated with toring is required regardless of whether asbestos in leak-tight containers ex- a ‘‘negative exposure assessment’’ was cept in roofing operations, where the previously produced for a specific job. procedures specified in paragraph (5) Employee notification of monitoring (g)(8)(ii) of this section apply. results. (i) The employer shall notify af- (2) In addition to the requirements of fected employees of the monitoring re- paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the em- sults that represent that employee’s ployer shall use the following control exposure as soon as possible following methods to achieve compliance with receipt of monitoring results. the TWA permissible exposure limit (ii) The employer shall notify af- and excursion limit prescribed by para- fected employees of the results of mon- graph (c) of this section; itoring representing the employee’s ex- (i) Local exhaust ventilation posure in writing either individually or equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- by posting at a centrally located place tion systems;

499

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00499 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(ii) Enclosure or isolation of proc- square feet of thermal system insula- esses producing asbestos dust; tion or surfacing material; for all other (iii) Ventilation of the regulated area Class I jobs, where the employer can- to move contaminated air away from not produce a negative exposure assess- the breathing zone of employees and ment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) toward a filtration or collection device of this section, or where employees are equipped with a HEPA filter; working in areas adjacent to the regu- (iv) Use of other work practices and lated area, while the Class I work is engineering controls that the Assistant being performed, the employer shall Secretary can show to be feasible. use one of the following methods to en- (v) Wherever the feasible engineering sure that airborne asbestos does not and work practice controls described migrate from the regulated area: above are not sufficient to reduce em- (A) Critical barriers shall be placed ployee exposure to or below the permis- over all the openings to the regulated sible exposure limit and/or excursion area, except where activities are per- limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this formed outdoors; or section, the employer shall use them to (B) The employer shall use another reduce employee exposure to the lowest barrier or isolation method which pre- levels attainable by these controls and vents the migration of airborne asbes- shall supplement them by the use of tos from the regulated area, as verified respiratory protection that complies by perimeter area surveillance during with the requirements of paragraph (h) each work shift at each boundary of of this section. the regulated area, showing no visible (3) Prohibitions. The following work asbestos dust; and perimeter area mon- practices and engineering controls itoring showing that clearance levels shall not be used for work related to contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpt. E, asbestos or for work which disturbs of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule ACM or PACM, regardless of measured are met, or that perimeter area levels, levels of asbestos exposure or the re- measured by Phase Contrast Micros- sults of initial exposure assessments: copy (PCM) are no more than back- (i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that ground levels representing the same are not equipped with point of cut ven- area before the asbestos work began. tilator or enclosures with HEPA fil- The results of such monitoring shall be tered exhaust air. made known to the employer no later (ii) Compressed air used to remove than 24 hours from the end of the work asbestos, or materials containing as- shift represented by such monitoring. bestos, unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed Exception: For work completed out- ventilation system designed to capture doors where employees are not working the dust cloud created by the com- in areas adjacent to the regulated pressed air. areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satis- (iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other fied when the specific control methods dry clean-up of dust and debris con- in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are taining ACM and PACM. used. (iv) Employee rotation as a means of (iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC sys- reducing employee exposure to asbes- tems shall be isolated in the regulated tos. area by sealing with a double layer of (4) Class I Requirements. In addition to 6 mil plastic or the equivalent; the provisions of paragraphs (g) (1) and (iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable (2) of this section, the following engi- dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces neering controls and work practices beneath all removal activity; and procedures shall be used. (v) For all Class I jobs, all objects (i) All Class I work, including the in- within the regulated area shall be cov- stallation and operation of the control ered with impermeable dropcloths or system shall be supervised by a com- plastic sheeting which is secured by petent person as defined in paragraph duct tape or an equivalent. (b) of this section; (vi) For all Class I jobs where the em- (ii) For all Class I jobs involving the ployer cannot produce a negative expo- removal of more than 25 linear or 10 sure assessment, or where exposure

500

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00500 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

monitoring shows that a PEL is ex- (B) Work Practices: ceeded, the employer shall ventilate (1) Each glovebag shall be installed the regulated area to move contami- so that it completely covers the cir- nated air away from the breathing zone cumference of pipe or other structure of employees toward a HEPA filtration where the work is to be done. or collection device. (2) Glovebags shall be smoke-tested (5) Specific control methods for Class I for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to work. In addition, Class I asbestos work use. shall be performed using one or more of (3) Glovebags may be used only once the following control methods pursu- and may not be moved. ant to the limitations stated below: (4) Glovebags shall not be used on (i) Negative Pressure Enclosure surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150 (NPE) systems: NPE systems may be °F. used where the configuration of the (5) Prior to disposal, glovebags shall work area does not make the erection be collapsed by removing air within of the enclosure infeasible, with the them using a HEPA vacuum. following specifications and work prac- (6) Before beginning the operation, tices. loose and friable material adjacent to (A) Specifications: the glovebag/box operation shall be (1) The negative pressure enclosure wrapped and sealed in two layers of six (NPE) may be of any configuration, mil plastic or otherwise rendered in- (2) At least 4 air changes per hour tact, shall be maintained in the NPE, (7) Where system uses attached waste (3) A minimum of ¥0.02 column bag, such bag shall be connected to col- inches of water pressure differential, lection bag using hose or other mate- relative to outside pressure, shall be rial which shall withstand pressure of maintained within the NPE as evi- ACM waste and water without losing denced by manometric measurements, its integrity: (4) The NPE shall be kept under negative pressure throughout the period of (8) Sliding valve or other device shall its use, and separate waste bag from hose to ensure (5) Air movement shall be directed no exposure when waste bag is discon- away from employees performing as- nected: bestos work within the enclosure, and (9) At least two persons shall perform toward a HEPA filtration or a collec- Class I glovebag removal operations. tion device. (iii) Negative Pressure Glove Bag Sys- (B) Work Practices: tems. Negative pressure glove bag sys- (1) Before beginning work within the tems may be used to remove ACM or enclosure and at the beginning of each PACM from piping. shift, the NPE shall be inspected for (A) Specifications: In addition to spec- breaches and smoke-tested for leaks, ifications for glove bag systems above, and any leaks sealed. negative pressure glove bag systems (2) Electrical circuits in the enclo- shall attach HEPA vacuum systems or sure shall be deactivated, unless other devices to bag to prevent collapse equipped with ground-fault circuit in- during removal. terrupters. (B) Work Practices: (1) The employer (ii) Glove bag systems may be used to shall comply with the work practices remove PACM and/or ACM from for glove bag systems in paragraph straight runs of piping and elbows and (g)(5)(ii)(B)(4) of this section. other connections with the following (2) The HEPA vacuum cleaner or specifications and work practices: other device used to prevent collapse of (A) Specifications: bag during removal shall run contin- (1) Glovebags shall be made of 6 mil ually during the operation until it is thick plastic and shall be seamless at completed at which time the bag shall the bottom. be collapsed prior to removal of the (2) Glovebags used on elbows and bag from the pipe. other connections must be designed for (3) Where a separate waste bag is that purpose and used without modi- used along with a collection bag and fications. discarded after one use, the collection

501

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00501 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

bag may be reused if rinsed clean with pressure separate water line, shall be amended water before reuse. formed around the piping. (iv) Negative Pressure Glove Box (3) The spray shall collide to form a Systems: Negative pressure glove boxes fine aerosol which provides a liquid may be used to remove ACM or PACM barrier between workers and the ACM from pipe runs with the following spec- and PACM. ifications and work practices. (B) Work Practices: (A) Specifications: (1) The system shall be run for at (1) Glove boxes shall be constructed least 10 minutes before removal begins. with rigid sides and made from metal (2) All removal shall take place with- or other material which can withstand in the water barrier. the weight of the ACM and PACM and (3) The system shall be operated by water used during removal: at least three persons, one of whom (2) A negative pressure generator shall not perform removal, but shall shall be used to create negative pres- check equipment, and ensure proper sure in the system: operation of the system. (3) An air filtration unit shall be at- (4) After removal, the ACM and tached to the box: PACM shall be bagged while still inside (4) The box shall be fitted with gloved the water barrier. apertures: (vi) A small walk-in enclosure which (5) An aperture at the base of the box accommodates no more than two per- shall serve as a bagging outlet for sons (mini-enclosure) may be used if waste ACM and water: the disturbance or removal can be com- (6) A back-up generator shall be pletely contained by the enclosure with present on site: the following specifications and work (7) Waste bags shall consist of 6 mil practices. thick plastic double-bagged before they (A) Specifications: are filled or plastic thicker than 6 mil. (B) Work practices: (1) The fabricated or job-made enclo- (1) At least two persons shall perform sure shall be constructed of 6 mil plas- the removal: tic or equivalent: (2) The box shall be smoke-tested for (2) The enclosure shall be placed leaks and any leaks sealed prior to under negative pressure by means of a each use. HEPA filtered vacuum or similar ven- (3) Loose or damaged ACM adjacent tilation unit: to the box shall be wrapped and sealed (B) Work practices: in two layers of 6 mil plastic prior to (1) Before use, the mini-enclosure the job, or otherwise made intact prior shall be inspected for leaks and smoke- to the job. tested to detect breaches, and any (4) A HEPA filtration system shall be breaches sealed. used to maintain pressure barrier in (2) Before reuse, the interior shall be box. completely washed with amended (v) Water Spray Process System. A water and HEPA-vacuumed.. water spray process system may be (3) During use, air movement shall be used for removal of ACM and PACM directed away from the employee’s from cold line piping if, employees car- breathing zone within the mini-enclo- rying out such process have completed sure. a 40-hour separate training course in (6) Alternative control methods for Class its use, in addition to training required I work. Class I work may be performed for employees performing Class I work. using a control method which is not The system shall meet the following referenced in paragraph (g)(5) of this specifications and shall be performed section, or which modifies a control by employees using the following work method referenced in paragraph (g)(5)of practices. this section, if the following provisions (A) Specifications: are complied with: (1) Piping shall be surrounded on 3 (i) The control method shall enclose, sides by rigid framing, contain or isolate the processes or (2) A 360 degree water spray, deliv- source of airborne asbestos dust, or ered through nozzles supplied by a high otherwise capture or redirect such dust

502

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00502 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

before it enters the breathing zone of (ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where employees. the employer has not produced a nega- (ii) A certified industrial hygienist or tive exposure assessment pursuant to licensed professional engineer who is paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or also qualified as a project designer as where during the job, changed condi- defined in paragraph (b) of this section, tions indicate there may be exposure shall evaluate the work area, the pro- above the PEL or where the employer jected work practices and the engineer- does not remove the ACM in a substan- ing controls and shall certify in writ- tially intact state, the employer shall ing that the planned control method is use one of the following methods to en- adequate to reduce direct and indirect sure that airborne asbestos does not employee exposure to below the PELs migrate from the regulated area; under worst-case conditions of use, and (A) Critical barriers shall be placed that the planned control method will over all openings to the regulated area; prevent asbestos contamination out- or, side the regulated area, as measured by (B) The employer shall use another clearance sampling which meets the re- barrier or isolation method which pre- quirements of EPA’s Asbestos in vents the migration of airborne asbes- Schools rule issued under AHERA, or tos from the regulated area, as verified perimeter monitoring which meets the by perimeter area monitoring or clear- criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of ance monitoring which meets the cri- this section. teria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) (A) Where the TSI or surfacing mate- of this section. rial to be removed is 25 linear or 10 (C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be square feet or less , the evaluation replaced on surfaces beneath all removal quired in paragraph (g)(6) of this sec- activity; tion may be performed by a ‘‘com- (iii) [Reserved] petent person’’, and may omit consid- (iv) All Class II asbestos work shall eration of perimeter or clearance moni- be performed using the work practices toring otherwise required. and requirements set out above in (B) The evaluation of employee expo- paragraph (g)(1) (i) through (g)(1)(iii) of sure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this this section. section, shall include and be based on (8) Additional Controls for Class II sampling and analytical data rep- work. Class II asbestos work shall also resenting employee exposure during be performed by complying with the the use of such method under worst- work practices and controls designated case conditions and by employees for each type of asbestos work to be whose training and experience are performed, set out in this paragraph. equivalent to employees who are to Where more than one control method perform the current job. may be used for a type of asbestos (iii) Before work which involves the work, the employer may choose one or removal of more than 25 linear or 10 a combination of designated control square feet of thermal system insula- methods. Class II work also may be tion or surfacing material is begun performed using a method allowed for using an alternative method which has Class I work, except that glove bags been the subject of a paragraph (g)(6) of and glove boxes are allowed if they this section required evaluation and fully enclose the Class II material to be certification, the employer shall send a removed. copy of such evaluation and certifi- (i) For removing vinyl and asphalt cation to the national office of OSHA, flooring materials which contain ACM Office of Technical Support, Room or for which in buildings constructed N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW, no later than 1980, the employer has Washington, DC 20210. The submission not verified the absence of ACM pursu- shall not constitute approval by OSHA. ant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this sec- (7) Work Practices and Engineering tion. The employer shall ensure that Controls for Class II work. employees comply with the following (i) All Class II work shall be super- work practices and that employees are vised by a competent person as defined trained in these practices pursuant to in paragraph (b) of this section. paragraph (k)(9):

503

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00503 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(A) Flooring or its backing shall not felts and a smooth surface using a be sanded. power roof cutter, the dust resulting (B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA fil- from the cutting operation shall be col- ter, disposable dust bag, and metal lected either by a HEPA dust collector floor tool (no brush) shall be used to or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line, clean floors. or by gently sweeping and then care- (C) Resilient sheeting shall be re- fully and completely wiping up the moved by cutting with wetting of the still-wet dust and debris left along the snip point and wetting during cut line. The dust and debris shall be delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet immediately bagged or placed in cov- floor material is prohibited. ered containers. (D) All scraping of residual adhesive (E) Asbestos-containing material and/or backing shall be performed that has been removed from a roof using wet methods. shall not be dropped or thrown to the (E) Dry sweeping is prohibited. ground. Unless the material is carried (F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited or passed to the ground by hand, it unless performed in a negative pressure shall be lowered to the ground via cov- enclosure which meets the require- ered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist: ments of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this sec- (1) Any ACM that is not intact shall tion. be lowered to the ground as soon as is (G) Tiles shall be removed intact, un- practicable, but in any event no later less the employer demonstrates that than the end of the work shift. While intact removal is not possible. the material remains on the roof it (H) When tiles are heated and can be shall either be kept wet, placed in an removed intact, wetting may be omit- impermeable waste bag, or wrapped in ted. plastic sheeting. (I) Resilient flooring material includ- (2) Intact ACM shall be lowered to ing associated mastic and backing the ground as soon as is practicable, shall be assumed to be asbestos-con- but in any event no later than the end taining unless an industrial hygienist determines that it is asbestos-free of the work shift. using recognized analytical techniques. (F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped (ii) For removing roofing material material shall be transferred to a which contains ACM the employer closed receptacle in such manner so as shall ensure that the following work to preclude the dispersion of dust. practices are followed: (G) Roof level heating and ventila- (A) Roofing material shall be re- tion air intake sources shall be isolated moved in an intact state to the extent or the ventilation system shall be shut feasible. down. (B) Wet methods shall be used to re- (H) Notwithstanding any other provi- move roofing materials that are not in- sion of this section, removal or repair tact, or that will be rendered not in- of sections of intact roofing less than tact during removal, unless such wet 25 square feet in area does not require methods are not feasible or will create use of wet methods or HEPA safety hazards. vacuuming as long as manual methods (C) Cutting machines shall be con- which do not render the material non- tinuously misted during use, unless a intact are used to remove the material competent person determines that and no visible dust is created by the re- misting substantially decreases worker moval method used. In determining safety. whether a job involves less than 25 (D) When removing built-up roofs square feet, the employer shall include with asbestos-containing roofing felts all removal and repair work performed and an aggregate surface using a power on the same roof on the same day. roof cutter, all dust resulting from the (iii) When removing cementitious as- cutting operation shall be collected by bestos-containing siding and shingles a HEPA dust collector, or shall be or transite panels containing ACM on HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along building exteriors (other than roofs, the cut line. When removing built-up where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this sec- roofs with asbestos-containing roofing tion applies) the employer shall ensure

504

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00504 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

that the following work practices are (vi) Alternative Work Practices and followed: Controls. Instead of the work practices (A) Cutting, abrading or breaking and controls listed in paragraph (g)(8) siding, shingles, or transite panels, (i) through (v) of this section, the em- shall be prohibited unless the employer ployer may use different or modified can demonstrate that methods less engineering and work practice controls likely to result in asbestos fiber re- if the following provisions are complied lease cannot be used. with. (B) Each panel or shingle shall be (A) The employer shall demonstrate sprayed with amended water prior to by data representing employee expo- removal. sure during the use of such method (C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or under conditions which closely resem- shingles shall be immediately lowered ble the conditions under which the to the ground via covered dust-tight method is to be used, that employee ex- chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an posure will not exceed the PELs under impervious waste bag or wrapped in any anticipated circumstances. plastic sheeting and lowered to the ground no later than the end of the (B) A competent person shall evalu- work shift. ate the work area, the projected work (D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp practices and the engineering controls, instruments. and shall certify in writing, that the (iv) When removing gaskets con- different or modified controls are ade- taining ACM, the employer shall en- quate to reduce direct and indirect em- sure that the following work practices ployee exposure to below the PELs are followed: under all expected conditions of use (A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated and that the method meets the require- and unlikely to be removed intact, re- ments of this standard. The evaluation moval shall be undertaken within a shall include and be based on data rep- glovebag as described in paragraph resenting employee exposure during (g)(5)(ii) of this section. the use of such method under condi- (B) [Reserved] tions which closely resemble the condi- (C) The gasket shall be immediately tions under which the method is to be placed in a disposal container. used for the current job, and by em- (D) Any scraping to remove residue ployees whose training and experience must be performed wet. are equivalent to employees who are to (v) When performing any other Class perform the current job. II removal of asbestos containing ma- (9) Work Practices and Engineering terial for which specific controls have Controls for Class III asbestos work. Class not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(iv) III asbestos work shall be conducted (A) through (D) of this section, the em- using engineering and work practice ployer shall ensure that the following controls which minimize the exposure work practices are complied with. to employees performing the asbestos (A) The material shall be thoroughly work and to bystander employees. wetted with amended water prior to (i) The work shall be performed using and during its removal. (B) The material shall be removed in wet methods. an intact state unless the employer (ii) To the extent feasible, the work demonstrates that intact removal is shall be performed using local exhaust not possible. ventilation. (C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the (iii) Where the disturbance involves material shall be prohibited unless the drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding, employer can demonstrate that meth- chipping, breaking, or sawing of ther- ods less likely to result in asbestos mal system insulation or surfacing ma- fiber release are not feasible. terial, the employer shall use imper- (D) Asbestos-containing material re- meable dropcloths, and shall isolate moved, shall be immediately bagged or the operation using mini-enclosures or wrapped, or kept wetted until trans- glove bag systems pursuant to para- ferred to a closed receptacle, no later graph (g)(5) of this section or another than the end of the work shift. isolation method.

505

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00505 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(iv) Where the employer does not graph (g)(11) or if during the course of produce a ‘‘negative exposure assess- the job the material does not remain ment’’ for a job, or where monitoring intact, the provisions of paragraph results show the PEL has been exceed- (g)(8) of this section apply instead of ed, the employer shall contain the area this paragraph (g)(11). using impermeable dropcloths and (i) Before work begins and as needed plastic barriers or their equivalent, or during the job, a competent person who shall isolate the operation using a con- is capable of identifying asbestos haz- trol system listed in and in compliance ards in the workplace and selecting the with paragraph (g)(5) of this section. appropriate control strategy for asbes- (v) Employees performing Class III tos exposure, and who has the author- jobs, which involve the disturbance of ity to take prompt corrective measures thermal system insulation or surfacing to eliminate such hazards, shall con- material, or where the employer does duct an inspection of the worksite and not produce a ‘‘negative exposure as- determine that the roofing material is sessment’’ or where monitoring results intact and will likely remain intact. show a PEL has been exceeded, shall (ii) All employees performing work wear respirators which are selected, covered by this paragraph (g)(11) shall used and fitted pursuant to provisions be trained in a training program that of paragraph (h) of this section. meets the requirements of paragraph (10) Class IV asbestos work. Class IV (k)(9)(viii) of this section. asbestos jobs shall be conducted by em- (iii) The material shall not be sand- ployees trained pursuant to the asbes- ed, abraded, or ground. Manual meth- tos awareness training program set out ods which do not render the material in paragraph (k)(9) of this section. In non-intact shall be used. addition, all Class IV jobs shall be conducted in conformity with the require- (iv) Material that has been removed ments set out in paragraph (g)(1) of from a roof shall not be dropped or this section, mandating wet methods, thrown to the ground. Unless the mate- HEPA vacuums, and prompt clean up rial is carried or passed to the ground of debris containing ACM or PACM. by hand, it shall be lowered to the (i) Employees cleaning up debris and ground via covered, dust-tight chute, waste in a regulated area where res- crane or hoist. All such material shall pirators are required shall wear res- be removed from the roof as soon as is pirators which are selected, used and practicable, but in any event no later fitted pursuant to provisions of para- than the end of the work shift. graph (h) of this section. (v) Where roofing products which (ii) Employers of employees who have been labeled as containing asbes- clean up waste and debris in, and em- tos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this ployers in control of, areas where fri- section are installed on non-residential able thermal system insulation or sur- roofs during operations covered by this facing material is accessible, shall as- paragraph (g)(11), the employer shall sume that such waste and debris con- notify the building owner of the pres- tain asbestos. ence and location of such materials no (11) Alternative methods of compliance later than the end of the job. for installation, removal, repair, and (vi) All removal or disturbance of maintenance of certain roofing and pipe- pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be per- line coating materials. Notwithstanding formed using wet methods. any other provision of this section, an (h) Respiratory protection. (1) General. employer who complies with all provi- For employees who use respirators re- sions of this paragraph (g)(11) when in- quired by this section, the employer stalling, removing, repairing, or main- must provide respirators that comply taining intact pipeline asphaltic wrap, with the requirements of this para- or roof flashings which contain asbes- graph. Respirators must be used dur- tos fibers encapsulated or coated by bi- ing: tuminous or resinous compounds shall (i) Class I asbestos work. be deemed to be in compliance with (ii) Class II asbestos work when ACM this section. If an employer does not is not removed in a substantially in- comply with all provisions of this para- tact state.

506

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00506 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(iii) Class II and III asbestos work 29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except that is not performed using wet meth- (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m). ods, except for removal of ACM from (ii) No employee shall be assigned to sloped roofs when a negative-exposure asbestos work that requires respirator assessment has been conducted and use if, based on their most recent med- ACM is removed in an intact state. ical examination, the examining physi- (iv) Class II and III asbestos work for cian determines that the employee will which a negative-exposure assessment be unable to function normally while has not been conducted. using a respirator, or that the safety or (v) Class III asbestos work when TSI health of the employee or other em- or surfacing ACM or PACM is being ployees will be impaired by the employee’s respirator use. Such employ- disturbed. ees must be assigned to another job or (vi) Class IV asbestos work performed given the opportunity to transfer to a within regulated areas where employ- different position that they can per- ees who are performing other work are form. If such a transfer position is required to use respirators. available, it must be with the same em- (vii) Work operations covered by this ployer, in the same geographical area, section for which employees are ex- and with the same seniority, status, posed above the TWA or excursion rate of pay, and other job benefits the limit. employee had just prior to such trans- (viii) Emergencies. fer. (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- (3) Respirator selection. (i) The employer must implement a respiratory ployer must select the appropriate res- protection program in accordance with pirator from Table 1 of this section.

TABLE 1ÐRESPIRATORY PROTECTION FOR ASBESTOS FIBERS

Airborne concentrations of asbestos or conditions of use Required respirator

Not in excess of 1 f/cc (10 X PEL), or oth- Half-mask air purifying respirator other than a disposable respirator, equipped with erwise as required independent of expo- high efficiency filters. sure pursuant to paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section. Not in excess of 5 f/cc (50 X PEL) ...... Full facepiece air-purifying respirator equipped with high efficiency filters. Not in excess of 10 f/cc (100 X PEL) ...... Any powered air-purifying respirator equipped with high efficiency filter or any supplied air respirator operated in continuous flow mode. Not in excess of 100 f/cc (1,000 X PEL) or Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in pressure demand mode. unknown concentration. Greater than 100 f/cc (1,000 X PEL) or un- Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in pressure demand mode, equipped known concentration. with an auxiliary positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.

NOTE: a. Respirators assigned for high environmental concentrations may be used at lower concentrations, or when required respirator use is independent of concentration. b. A high efficiency filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 percent efficient against mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameters in diameter or larger.

(ii) The employer must provide an (A) Class II and III asbestos work and employee with a tight-fitting, powered a negative-exposure assessment has not air-purifying respirator instead of a been conducted by the employer. negative-pressure respirator from (B) Class III asbestos work when TSI Table 1 when the employee chooses to or surfacing ACM or PACM is being use this type of respirator and such a disturbed. respirator will provide adequate pro- (iv) In addition to the above selection tection to the employee. criteria, when employees are in a regu- (iii) The employer must provide a lated area where Class I work is being half-mask air-purifying respirator, performed, a negative exposure assess- other than a disposable respirator, that ment of the area has not been pro- is equipped with high-efficiency filters duced, and the exposure assessment of when the employee performs: the area indicates the exposure level will not exceed 1 f/cc as an 8-hour time

507

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00507 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

weighted average, employers must pro- (4) Inspection of protective clothing. (i) vide the employees with one of the fol- The competent person shall examine lowing respirators: worksuits worn by employees at least (A) A tight-fitting powered air-puri- once per workshift for rips or tears fying respirator equipped with high ef- that may occur during performance of ficiency filters; work. (B) A full facepiece supplied-air res- (ii) When rips or tears are detected pirator operated in the pressure-de- while an employee is working, rips and mand mode equipped with HEPA egress tears shall be immediately mended, or cartridges; or the worksuit shall be immediately re- (C) A full facepiece supplied-air res- placed. pirator operated in the pressure-de- (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for mand mode equipped with an auxiliary employees. (1) Requirements for employ- positive pressure self-contained breath- ees performing Class I asbestos jobs ining apparatus. A full facepiece sup- volving over 25 linear or 10 square feet plied-air respirator operated in the of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM. pressure-demand mode equipped with (i) Decontamination areas. The em- an auxiliary positive pressure self-con- ployer shall establish a decontamina- tained breathing apparatus must be tion area that is adjacent and con- provided under such conditions when nected to the regulated area for the de- the exposure assessment indicates ex- contamination of such employees. The posure levels above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour decontamination area shall consist of time weighted average. an equipment room, shower area, and (i) Protective clothing—(1) General. The clean room in series. The employer employer shall provide or require the shall ensure that employees enter and use of protective clothing, such as cov- exit the regulated area through the de- eralls or similar whole-body clothing, contamination area. head coverings, gloves, and foot cov- (A) Equipment room. The equipment erings for any employee exposed to air- room shall be supplied with imper- borne concentrations of asbestos that meable, labeled bags and containers for exceed the TWA and/or excursion limit the containment and disposal of con- prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- taminated protective equipment. tion, or for which a required negative (B) Shower area. Shower facilities exposure assessment is not produced, shall be provided which comply with 29 or for any employee performing Class I CFR 1910.141(d)(3), unless the employer operations which involve the removal can demonstrate that they are not fea- of over 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI sible. The showers shall be adjacent or surfacing ACM and PACM. both to the equipment room and the (2) Laundering. (i) The employer shall clean room, unless the employer can ensure that laundering of contami- demonstrate that this location is not nated clothing is done so as to prevent feasible. Where the employer can dem- the release of airborne asbestos in ex- onstrate that it is not feasible to lo- cess of the TWA or excursion limit pre- cate the shower between the equipment scribed in paragraph (c) of this section. room and the clean room, or where the (ii) Any employer who gives contami- work is performed outdoors, the em- nated clothing to another person for ployers shall ensure that employees: laundering shall inform such person of (1) Remove asbestos contamination the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i) from their worksuits in the equipment of this section to effectively prevent room using a HEPA vacuum before pro- the release of airborne asbestos in exceeding to a shower that is not adja- cess of the TWA and excursion limit cent to the work area; or prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- (2) Remove their contaminated tion. worksuits in the equipment room, then (3) Contaminated clothing. Contami- don clean worksuits, and proceed to a nated clothing shall be transported in shower that is not adjacent to the work sealed impermeable bags, or other area. closed, impermeable containers, and be (C) Clean change room. The clean labeled in accordance with paragraph room shall be equipped with a locker or (k) of this section. appropriate storage container for each

508

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00508 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

employee’s use. When the employer can bestos work operations where expo- demonstrate that it is not feasible to sures exceed a PEL or where there is provide a clean change area adjacent to no negative exposure assessment pro- the work area or where the work is per- duced before the operation. formed outdoors, the employer may (i) The employer shall establish an permit employees engaged in Class I equipment room or area that is adja- asbestos jobs to clean their protective cent to the regulated area for the de- clothing with a portable HEPA- contamination of employees and their equipped vacuum before such employ- equipment which is contaminated with ees leave the regulated area. Following asbestos which shall consist of an area showering, such employees however covered by a impermeable drop cloth must then change into street clothing on the floor or horizontal working sur- in clean change areas provided by the face. employer which otherwise meet the re- (ii) The area must be of sufficient quirements of this section. size as to accommodate cleaning of (ii) Decontamination area entry proce- equipment and removing personal pro- dures. The employer shall ensure that tective equipment without spreading employees: contamination beyond the area (as de- (A) Enter the decontamination area termined by visible accumulations). through the clean room; (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned (B) Remove and deposit street cloth- with a HEPA vacuum before it is re- ing within a locker provided for their moved. use; and (iv) All equipment and surfaces of (C) Put on protective clothing and containers filled with ACM must be respiratory protection before leaving cleaned prior to removing them from the clean room. the equipment room or area. (D) Before entering the regulated (v) The employer shall ensure that area, the employer shall ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated employees pass through the equipment area through the equipment room or room. area. (iii) Decontamination area exit proce- (3) Requirements for Class IV work. dures. The employer shall ensure that: Employers shall ensure that employees (A) Before leaving the regulated area, performing Class IV work within a reg- employees shall remove all gross con- ulated area comply with the hygiene tamination and debris from their pro- practice required of employees per- tective clothing. forming work which has a higher clas- (B) Employees shall remove their sification within that regulated area. protective clothing in the equipment Otherwise employers of employees room and deposit the clothing in la- cleaning up debris and material which beled impermeable bags or containers. is TSI or surfacing ACM or identified (C) Employees shall not remove their as PACM shall provide decontamina- respirators in the equipment room. tion facilities for such employees (D) Employees shall shower prior to which are required by paragraph (j)(2) entering the clean room. of this section. (E) After showering, employees shall (4) Smoking in work areas. The em- enter the clean room before changing ployer shall ensure that employees do into street clothes. not smoke in work areas where they (iv) Lunch Areas. Whenever food or are occupationally exposed to asbestos beverages are consumed at the work- because of activities in that work area. site where employees are performing (k) Communication of hazards. (1) This Class I asbestos work, the employer section applies to the communication shall provide lunch areas in which the of information concerning asbestos airborne concentrations of asbestos are hazards in construction activities to below the permissible exposure limit facilitate compliance with this stand- and/or excursion limit. ard. Most asbestos-related construction (2) Requirements for Class I work in- activities involve previously installed volving less than 25 linear or 10 square building materials. Building owners feet of TSI or surfacing ACM and often are the only and/or best sources PACM, and for Class II and Class III as- of information concerning them.

509

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00509 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Therefore, they, along with employers performing work within or adjacent to of potentially exposed employees, are areas containing such materials; assigned specific information con- (D) Tenants who will occupy areas veying and retention duties under this containing such material. section. Installed Asbestos Containing (3) Duties of employers whose em- Building Material. Employers and ployees perform work subject to this building owners shall identify TSI and standard in or adjacent to areas con- sprayed or troweled on surfacing mate- taining ACM and PACM. Building/facil- rials in buildings as asbestos-con- ity owners whose employees perform taining, unless they determine in com- such work shall comply with these pro- pliance with paragraph (k)(5) of this visions to the extent applicable. section that the material is not asbes- (i) Before work in areas containing tos-containing. Asphalt and vinyl ACM and PACM is begun; employers flooring material installed no later shall identify the presence, location, than 1980 must also be considered as as- and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM bestos containing unless the employer, therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1) of pursuant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section. this section determines that it is not (ii) Before work under this standard asbestos-containing. If the employer/ is performed employers of employees building owner has actual knowledge, who will perform such work shall in- or should have known through the ex- form the following persons of the loca- ercise of due diligence, that other mation and quantity of ACM and/or PACM terials are asbestos-containing, they present in the area and the precautions too must be treated as such. When to be taken to insure that airborne as- communicating information to em- bestos is confined to the area. ployees pursuant to this standard, own- (A) Owners of the building/facility; ers and employers shall identify (B) Employees who will perform such ‘‘PACM’’ as ACM. Additional require- work and employers of employees who ments relating to communication of work and/or will be working in adja- asbestos work on multi-employer cent areas. worksites are set out in paragraph (d) (iii) Within 10 days of the completion of this section. of such work, the employer whose em- (2) Duties of building and facility own- ployees have performed work subject to ers. (i) Before work subject to this this standard, shall inform the build- standard is begun, building and facility ing/facility owner and employers of owners shall determine the presence, employees who will be working in the location, and quantity of ACM and/or area of the current location and quan- PACM at the work site pursuant to tity of PACM and/or ACM remaining in paragraph (k)(1) of this section. the area and final monitoring results, (ii) Building and/or facility owners if any. shall notify the following persons of (4) In addition to the above require- the presence, location and quantity of ments, all employers who discover ACM or PACM, at the work sites in ACM and/or PACM on a worksite shall their buildings and facilities. Notifica- convey information concerning the tion either shall be in writing, or shall presence, location and quantity of such consist of a personal communication newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to between the owner and the person to the owner and to other employers of whom notification must be given or employees working at the work site, their authorized representatives: within 24 hours of the discovery. (A) Prospective employers applying (5) Criteria to rebut the designation or bidding for work whose employees of installed material as PACM. (i) At reasonably can be expected to work in any time, an employer and/or building or adjacent to areas containing such owner may demonstrate, for purposes material; of this standard, that PACM does not (B) Employees of the owner who will contain asbestos. Building owners and/ work in or adjacent to areas containing or employers are not required to com- such material: municate information about the pres- (C) On multi-employer worksites, all ence of building material for which employers of employees who will be such a demonstration pursuant to the

510

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00510 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of the use of foreign languages, picto- this section has been made. However, graphs, graphics, and awareness train- in all such cases, the information, data ing. and analysis supporting the determina- (7) Signs. (i) Warning signs that de- tion that PACM does not contain as- marcate the regulated area shall be bestos, shall be retained pursuant to provided and displayed at each location paragraph (n) of this section. where a regulated area is required to be (ii) An employer or owner may dem- established by paragraph (e) of this sec- onstrate that PACM does not contain tion. Signs shall be posted at such a more than 1% asbestos by the fol- distance from such a location that an lowing: (A) Having a completed inspec- employee may read the signs and take tion conducted pursuant to the require- necessary protective steps before en- ments of AHERA (40 CFR Part 763, subpart E) which demonstrates that the tering the area marked by the signs. material is not ACM; or (ii) (A) The warning signs required by (B) Performing tests of the material paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall containing PACM which demonstrate bear the following information: that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of DANGER bulk samples collected in the manner ASBESTOS described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE be conducted by an accredited inspec- HAZARD tor or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or lab- AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY oratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful partici- (B) In addition, where the use of res- pation in a nationally recognized test- pirators and protective clothing is re- ing program such as the National Vol- quired in the regulated area under this untary Laboratory Accreditation Pro- section, the warning signs shall include gram (NVLAP) or the National Insti- the following: tute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE samples administered by the American CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) AREA or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. (iii) The employer shall ensure that (iii) The employer and/or building employees working in and contiguous owner may demonstrate that flooring to regulated areas comprehend the material including associated mastic warning signs required to be posted by and backing does not contain asbestos, paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section. by a determination of an industrial hy- Means to ensure employee comprehen- gienist based upon recognized analyt- sion may include the use of foreign lan- ical techniques showing that the mate- guages, pictographs and graphics. rial is not ACM. (8) Labels. (i) Labels shall be affixed (6) At the entrance to mechanical to all products containing asbestos and rooms/areas in which employees rea- to all containers containing such prod- sonably can be expected to enter and ucts, including waste containers. which contain ACM and/or PACM, the Where feasible, installed asbestos prod- building owner shall post signs which ucts shall contain a visible label. identify the material which is present, (ii) Labels shall be printed in large, its location, and appropriate work bold letters on a contrasting back- practices which, if followed, will ensure ground. that ACM and/or PACM will not be disturbed. The employer shall ensure, to (iii) Labels shall be used in accord- the extent feasible, that employees ance with the requirements of 29 CFR who come in contact with these signs 1910.1200(f) of OSHA’s Hazard Commu- can comprehend them. Means to ensure nication standard, and shall contain employee comprehension may include the following information:

511

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00511 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

DANGER (iii) Training for Class I operations CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS and for Class II operations that require the use of critical barriers (or equiva- AVOID CREATING DUST lent isolation methods) and/or negative CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE pressure enclosures under this section HAZARD shall be the equivalent in curriculum, (iv) [Reserved] training method and length to the EPA (v) Labels shall contain a warning Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbes- statement against breathing asbestos tos abatement workers training (40 fibers. CFR Part 763, subpart E, appendix C). (vi) The provisions for labels required (iv) Training for other Class II work. by paragraphs (k)(8)(i) through (A) For work with asbestos con- (k)(8)(iii) of this section do not apply taining roofing materials, flooring ma- where: terials, siding materials, ceiling tiles, (A) Asbestos fibers have been modi- or transite panels, training shall in- fied by a bonding agent, coating, bind- clude at a minimum all the elements er, or other material, provided that the included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of manufacturer can demonstrate that, this section and in addition, the spe- during any reasonably foreseeable use, cific work practices and engineering handling, storage, disposal, processing, controls set forth in paragraph (g) of or transportation, no airborne con- this section which specifically relate to centrations of asbestos fibers in excess that category. Such course shall in- of the permissible exposure limit and/ clude ‘‘hands-on’’ training and shall or excursion limit will be released, or take at least 8 hours. (B) Asbestos is present in a product (B) An employee who works with in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. more than one of the categories of ma- (vii) When a building owner or em- terial specified in paragraph ployer identifies previously installed (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall re- PACM and/or ACM, labels or signs shall ceive training in the work practices ap- be affixed or posted so that employees plicable to each category of material will be notified of what materials con- that the employee removes and each tain PACM and/or ACM. The employer removal method that the employee shall attach such labels in areas where uses. they will clearly be noticed by employ- (C) For Class II operations not in- ees who are likely to be exposed, such volving the categories of material spec- as at the entrance to mechanical room/ ified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this areas. Signs required by paragraph section, training shall be provided (k)(6) of this section may be posted in which shall include at a minimum all lieu of labels so long as they contain the elements included in paragraph information required for labelling. The (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- employer shall ensure, to the extent tion, the specific work practices and feasible, that employees who come in engineering controls set forth in para- contact with these signs or labels can graph (g) of this section which specifi- comprehend them. Means to ensure em- cally relate to the category of material ployee comprehension may include the being removed, and shall include use of foreign languages, pictographs, ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the work prac- graphics, and awareness training. tices applicable to each category of (9) Employee Information and Training. material that the employee removes (i) The employer shall, at no cost to and each removal method that the em- the employee, institute a training pro- ployee uses. gram for all employees who are likely (v) Training for Class III employees to be exposed in excess of a PEL and shall be consistent with EPA require- for all employees who perform Class I ments for training of local education through IV asbestos operations, and agency maintenance and custodial staff shall ensure their participation in the as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such program. a course shall also include ‘‘hands-on’’ (ii) Training shall be provided prior training and shall take at least 16 to or at the time of initial assignment hours. Exception: For Class III oper- and at least annually thereafter. ations for which the competent person

512

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00512 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

determines that the EPA curriculum controls to minimize exposure includ- does not adequately cover the training ing, as applicable, engineering con- needed to perform that activity, train- trols, work practices, respirators, ing shall include as a minimum all the housekeeping procedures, hygiene fa- elements included in paragraph cilities, protective clothing, decon- (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- tamination procedures, emergency pro- tion, the specific work practices and cedures, and waste disposal procedures, engineering controls set forth in para- and any necessary instruction in the graph (g) of this section which specifi- use of these controls and procedures; cally relate to that activity, and shall where Class III and IV work will be or include ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the is performed, the contents of EPA 20T– work practices applicable to each cat- 2003, ‘‘Managing Asbestos In-Place’’ egory of material that the employee July 1990 or its equivalent in content; disturbs. (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting (vi) Training for employees per- instructions, and limitations of res- forming Class IV operations shall be pirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134; consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency (F) The appropriate work practices maintenance and custodial staff as set for performing the asbestos job; forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a (G) Medical surveillance program re- course shall include available informa- quirements; tion concerning the locations of ther- (H) The content of this standard in- mal system insulation and surfacing cluding appendices; ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing (I) The names, addresses and phone flooring material, or flooring material numbers of public health organizations where the absence of asbestos has not which provide information, materials yet been certified; and instruction in and/or conduct programs concerning recognition of damage, deterioration, smoking cessation. The employer may and delamination of asbestos con- distribute the list of such organiza- taining building materials. Such course tions contained in Appendix J to this shall take at least 2 hours. section, to comply with this require- (vii) Training for employees who are ment; and likely to be exposed in excess of the (J) The requirements for posting PEL and who are not otherwise re- signs and affixing labels and the mean- quired to be trained under paragraph ing of the required legends for such (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, signs and labels. shall meet the requirements of para- (10) Access to training materials. (i) graph (k)(9)(viii) of this section. The employer shall make readily avail- (viii) The training program shall be able to affected employees without conducted in a manner that the em- cost, written materials relating to the ployee is able to understand. In addi- employee training program, including tion to the content required by provi- a copy of this regulation. sions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, the employer shall (ii) The employer shall provide to the ensure that each such employee is in- Assistant Secretary and the Director, formed of the following: upon request, all information and (A) Methods of recognizing asbestos, training materials relating to the em- including the requirement in paragraph ployee information and training pro- (k)(1) of this section to presume that gram. certain building materials contain as- (iii) The employer shall inform all bestos; employees concerning the availability (B) The health effects associated with of self-help smoking cessation program asbestos exposure; material. Upon employee request, the (C) The relationship between smok- employer shall distribute such mate- ing and asbestos in producing lung can- rial, consisting of NIH Publication No, cer; 89–1647, or equivalent self-help mate- (D) The nature of operations that rial, which is approved or published by could result in exposure to asbestos, a public health organization listed in the importance of necessary protective Appendix J to this section.

513

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00513 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(l) Housekeeping—(1) Vacuuming. ing cleanup) and, while doing so, ad- Where vacuuming methods are se- heres fully to the work practices speci- lected, HEPA filtered vacuuming fied in this standard, shall not be equipment must be used. The equip- counted. ment shall be used and emptied in a (B) For employees otherwise required manner that minimizes the reentry of by this standard to wear a negative asbestos into the workplace. pressure respirator, employers shall en- (2) Waste disposal. Asbestos waste, sure employees are physically able to scrap, debris, bags, containers, equip- perform the work and use the equipment, and contaminated clothing con- ment. This determination shall be signed for disposal shall be collected made under the supervision of a physi- and disposed of in sealed, labeled, im- cian. permeable bags or other closed, la- (ii) Examination. (A) The employer beled, impermeable containers except shall ensure that all medical examina- in roofing operations, where the proce- tions and procedures are performed by dures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of or under the supervision of a licensed this section apply. physician, and are provided at no cost (3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring to the employee and at a reasonable material. (i) All vinyl and asphalt floor- time and place. ing material shall be maintained in ac- (B) Persons other than such licensed cordance with this paragraph unless physicians who administer the pul- the building/facility owner dem- monary function testing required by onstrates, pursuant to paragraph this section shall complete a training (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section that the floor- course in spirometry sponsored by an ing does not contain asbestos. appropriate academic or professional (ii) Sanding of flooring material is institution. prohibited. (2) Medical examinations and consulta- (iii) Stripping of finishes shall be tions. (i) Frequency. The employer conducted using low abrasion pads at shall make available medical examina- speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet tions and consultations to each em- methods. ployee covered under paragraph (iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be (m)(1)(i) of this section on the fol- performed only on flooring which has lowing schedules: sufficient finish so that the pad cannot (A) Prior to assignment of the em- contact the flooring material. ployee to an area where negative-pres- (4) Waste and debris and accom- sure respirators are worn; panying dust in an area containing ac- (B) When the employee is assigned to cessible thermal system insulation or an area where exposure to asbestos surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly dete- may be at or above the permissible ex- riorated ACM: posure limit for 30 or more days per (i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry, year, or engage in Class I, II, or III or vacuumed without using a HEPA fil- work for a combined total of 30 or more ter; days per year, a medical examination (ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and must be given within 10 working days disposed of in leak tight containers. following the thirtieth day of exposure; (m) Medical surveillance. (1) General— (C) And at least annually thereafter. (i) Employees covered. (A) The employer (D) If the examining physician deter- shall institute a medical surveillance mines that any of the examinations program for all employees who for a should be provided more frequently combined total of 30 or more days per than specified, the employer shall pro- year are engaged in Class I, II and III vide such examinations to affected em- work or are exposed at or above a per- ployees at the frequencies specified by missible exposure limit. For purposes the physician. of this paragraph, any day in which a (E) Exception: No medical examina- worker engages in Class II or Class III tion is required of any employee if ade- operations or a combination thereof on quate records show that the employee intact material for one hour or less has been examined in accordance with (taking into account the entire time this paragraph within the past 1-year spent on the removal operation, includ- period.

514

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00514 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(ii) Content. Medical examinations material health impairment from expo- made available pursuant to paragraphs sure to asbestos; (m)(2)(i)(A) through (m)(2)(i)(C) of this (B) Any recommended limitations on section shall include: the employee or on the use of personal (A) A medical and work history with protective equipment such as res- special emphasis directed to the pul- pirators; and monary, cardiovascular, and gastro- (C) A statement that the employee intestinal systems. has been informed by the physician of (B) On initial examination, the the results of the medical examination standardized questionnaire contained and of any medical conditions that in Part 1 of Appendix D to this section, may result from asbestos exposure. and, on annual examination, the abbre- (D) A statement that the employee viated standardized questionnaire con- has been informed by the physician of tained in Part 2 of Appendix D to this the increased risk of lung cancer at- section. tributable to the combined effect of (C) A physical examination directed smoking and asbestos exposure. to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal (ii) The employer shall instruct the systems, including a chest roentgeno- physician not to reveal in the written gram to be administered at the discre- opinion given to the employer specific tion of the physician, and pulmonary findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- function tests of forced vital capacity cupational exposure to asbestos. (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at (iii) The employer shall provide a one second (FEV(1)). Interpretation and classification of chest shall be con- copy of the physician’s written opinion ducted in accordance with Appendix E to the affected employee within 30 days to this section. from its receipt. (D) Any other examinations or tests (n) Recordkeeping. (1) Objective data deemed necessary by the examining relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) to physician. this section. (i) Where the employer (3) Information provided to the physi- has relied on objective data that dem- cian. The employer shall provide the onstrates that products made from or following information to the exam- containing asbestos or the activity in- ining physician: volving such products or material are (i) A copy of this standard and Ap- not capable of releasing fibers of asbes- pendices D, E, and I to this section; tos in concentrations at or above the permissible exposure limit and/or ex- (ii) A description of the affected employee’s duties as they relate to the cursion limit under the expected condi- employee’s exposure; tions of processing, use, or handling to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (iii) The employee’s representative exposure level or anticipated exposure (f), the employer shall establish and level; maintain an accurate record of objective data reasonably relied upon in sup- (iv) A description of any personal port of the exemption. protective and respiratory equipment used or to be used; and (ii) The record shall include at least (v) Information from previous med- the following information: ical examinations of the affected em- (A) The product qualifying for ex- ployee that is not otherwise available emption; to the examining physician. (B) The source of the objective data; (4) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The (C) The testing protocol, results of employer shall obtain a written opin- testing, and/or analysis of the material ion from the examining physician. This for the release of asbestos; written opinion shall contain the re- (D) A description of the operation ex- sults of the medical examination and empted and how the data support the shall include: exemption; and (A) The physician’s opinion as to (E) Other data relevant to the oper- whether the employee has any detected ations, materials, processing, or em- medical conditions that would place ployee exposures covered by the ex- the employee at an increased risk of emption.

515

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00515 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(iii) The employer shall maintain (4) Training records. The employer this record for the duration of the em- shall maintain all employee training ployer’s reliance upon such objective records for one (1) year beyond the last data. date of employment by that employer. (2) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- (5) Data to Rebut PACM. Where the ployer shall keep an accurate record of building owner and employer have re- all measurements taken to monitor lied on data to demonstrate that PACM employee exposure to asbestos as pre- is not asbestos-containing, such data scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. shall be maintained for as long as they NOTE: The employer may utilize the are relied upon to rebut the presump- services of competent organizations tion. such as industry trade associations and (6) Records of required notifications. employee associations to maintain the Where the building owner has commu- records required by this section. nicated and received information con- (ii) This record shall include at least cerning the identification, location and the following information: quantity of ACM and PACM, written (A) The date of measurement; records of such notifications and their (B) The operation involving exposure content shall be maintained by the to asbestos that is being monitored; building owner for the duration of own- (C) Sampling and analytical methods ership and shall be transferred to suc- used and evidence of their accuracy; cessive owners of such buildings/facili- (D) Number, duration, and results of ties. samples taken; (7) Availability. (i) The employer, (E) Type of protective devices worn, upon written request, shall make all if any; and records required to be maintained by (F) Name, social security number, this section available to the Assistant and exposure of the employees whose Secretary and the Director for exam- exposures are represented. ination and copying. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) (ii) The employer, upon request, shall years, in accordance with 29 CFR make any exposure records required by 1910.20. paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- available for examination and copying ployer shall establish and maintain an to affected employees, former employ- accurate record for each employee sub- ees, designated representatives, and ject to medical surveillance by para- the Assistant Secretary, in accordance graph (m) of this section, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20(a) through (e) and with 29 CFR 1910.20. (g) through (i). (ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer, upon request, the following information: shall make employee medical records (A) The name and social security required by paragraphs (m) and (n) of number of the employee; this section available for examination (B) A copy of the employee’s medical and copying to the subject employee, examination results, including the anyone having the specific written con- medical history, questionnaire re- sent of the subject employee, and the sponses, results of any tests, and physi- Assistant Secretary, in accordance cian’s recommendations. with 29 CFR 1910.20. (C) Physician’s written opinions; (8) Transfer of records. (i) The em- (D) Any employee medical com- ployer shall comply with the require- plaints related to exposure to asbestos; ments concerning transfer of records and set forth in 29 CFR 1910.20 (h). (E) A copy of the information pro- (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to vided to the physician as required by do business and there is no successor paragraph (m) of this section. employer to receive and retain the (iii) The employer shall ensure that records for the prescribed period, the this record is maintained for the dura- employer shall notify the Director at tion of employment plus thirty (30) least 90 days prior to disposal and, years, in accordance with 29 CFR upon request, transmit them to the Di- 1910.20. rector.

516

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00516 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(o) Competent person. (1) General. On equipment in compliance with all re- all construction worksites covered by quirements; this standard, the employer shall des- (G) Ensure that employees use the ignate a competent person, having the hygiene facilities and observe the de- qualifications and authorities for en- contamination procedures specified in suring worker safety and health re- paragraph (j) of this section; quired by subpart C, General Safety (H) Ensure that through on-site in- and Health Provisions for Construction spection, engineering controls are func- (29 CFR 1926.20 through 1926.32). tioning properly and employees are (2) Required inspections by the com- using proper work practices; and, petent person. Section 1926.20(b)(2) (I) Ensure that notification require- which requires health and safety pre- ment in paragraph (k) of this section vention programs to provide for fre- are met. quent and regular inspections of the (ii) [Reserved] job sites, materials, and equipment to (4) Training for the competent person. be made by competent persons, is in- (i) For Class I and II asbestos work the corporated. competent person shall be trained in (3) Additional inspections. In addition, all aspects of asbestos removal and the competent person shall make fre- handling, including: abatement, instal- quent and regular inspections of the lation, removal and handling; the con- job sites, in order to perform the duties tents of this standard; the identifica- set out below in paragraph (o)(3)(i) of tion of asbestos; removal procedures, this section. For Class I jobs, on-site where appropriate; and other practices inspections shall be made at least once for reducing the hazard. Such training during each work shift, and at any shall be obtained in a comprehensive time at employee request. For Class II, course for supervisors that meets the III, and IV jobs, on-site inspections criteria of EPA’s Model Accreditation shall be made at intervals sufficient to Plan (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, Ap- assess whether conditions have pendix C), such as a course conducted changed, and at any reasonable time at by an EPA-approved or state-approved employee request. training provider, certified by EPA or a state, or a course equivalent in strin- (i) On all worksites where employees gency, content, and length. are engaged in Class I or II asbestos (ii) For Class III and IV asbestos work, the competent person designated work, the competent person shall be in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of trained in aspects of asbestos handling this section shall perform or supervise appropriate for the nature of the work, the following duties, as applicable: to include procedures for setting up (A) Set up the regulated area, enclo- glove bags and mini-enclosures, prac- sure, or other containment; tices for reducing asbestos exposures, (B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the use of wet methods, the contents of integrity of the enclosure or contain- this standard, and the identification of ment; asbestos. Such training shall include (C) Set up procedures to control successful completion of a course that entry to and exit from the enclosure is consistent with EPA requirements and/or area; for training of local education agency (D) Supervise all employee exposure maintenance and custodial staff as set monitoring required by this section forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its and ensure that it is conducted as re- equivalent in stringency, content and quired by paragraph (f) of this section; length. Competent persons for Class III (E) Ensure that employees working and IV work, may also be trained pur- within the enclosure and/or using glove suant to the requirements of paragraph bags wear respirators and protective (o)(4)(i) of this section. clothing as required by paragraphs (h) (p) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, C, D, and (i) of this section; and E to this section are incorporated (F) Ensure through on-site super- as part of this section and the contents vision, that employees set up, use, and of these appendices are mandatory. remove engineering controls, use work (2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to practices and personal protective this section are informational and are

517

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00517 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

not intended to create any additional use this procedure, or an equivalent method, obligations not otherwise imposed or for collecting and analyzing samples. to detract from any existing obliga- Sampling and Analytical Procedure tions. (q) Dates. (1) This standard shall be- 1. The sampling medium for air samples come effective October 11, 1994. shall be mixed cellulose ester filter mem- branes. These shall be designated by the (2) The provisions of 29 CFR 1926.58 manufacturer as suitable for asbestos count- remain in effect until the start-up ing. See below for rejection of blanks. dates of the equivalent provisions of 2. The preferred collection device shall be this standard. the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open- (3) Start-up dates. All obligations of faced 50-mm electrically conductive exten- this standard commence on the effec- sion cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if tive date except as follows: necessary but only if written justification (i) Methods of compliance. The engi- for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette accompanies the sample results in the em- neering and work practice controls re- ployee’s exposure monitoring record. Do not quired by paragraph (g) of this section reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample shall be implemented by October 1, collection. 1995. 3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min (ii) Respiratory protection. Respiratory and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25/ protection required by paragraph (h) of mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, this section shall be provided by Octo- an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 ber 1, 1995. liters/min shall be selected. 4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume (iii) Hygiene facilities and practices for for each air sample shall be collected to employees. Hygience facilities and prac- yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square tices required by paragraph (j) of this millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter section shall be provided by October 1, darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen 1995. on the filter, a second sample shall be start- (iv) Communication of hazards. Identi- ed. fication, notification, labeling and sign 5. Ship the samples in a rigid container posting, and training required by para- with sufficient packing material to prevent dislodging the collected fibers. Packing ma- graph (k) of this section shall be pro- terial that has a high electrostatic charge on vided by October 1, 1995. its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) can- (v) Housekeeping. Housekeeping prac- not be used because such material can cause tices and controls required by para- loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette. graph (1) of this section shall be pro- 6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump vided by October 1, 1995. before and after use with a representative fil- (vi) Medical surveillance required by ter cassette installed between the pump and paragraph (m) of this section shall be the calibration devices. 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the provided by October 1, 1995. ‘‘breathing zone’’ of the employee (i.e., at- (vii) The designation and training of tached to or near the collar or lapel near the competent persons required by para- worker’s face). graph (o) of this section shall be com- 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive pleted by October 1, 1995. phase contrast using a microscope with an 8 to 10 X eyepiece and a 40 to 45 X objective for APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1101— OSHA a total magnification of approximately 400 X REFERENCE METHOD—MANDATORY and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The microscope shall also be fitted with a green This mandatory appendix specifies the pro- or blue filter. cedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos 9. The microscope shall be fitted with a and specifies quality control procedures that Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule cali- must be implemented by laboratories per- brated for a field diameter of 100 microm- forming the analysis. The sampling and ana- eters (+/¥2 micrometers). lytical methods described below represent 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the the elements of the available monitoring microscope shall be about 3 degrees meas- methods (such as Appendix B of this regula- ured using the HSE phase shift test slide as tion, the most current version of the OSHA outlined below. method ID–160, or the most current version a. Place the test slide on the microscope of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers stage and center it under the phase objec- who are required to conduct air monitoring tive. under paragraph (f) of the standard are re- b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into quired to utilize analytical laboratories that focus.

518

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00518 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

NOTE: The slide consists of seven sets of e. Count enough graticule fields to yield grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block) 100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop in descending order of visibility from sets 1 counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber to 7, seven being the least visible. The recount. quirements for asbestos counting are that 14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at the microscope optics must resolve the the rate of 10 percent. groooved lines in set 3 completely, although they may appear somewhat faint, and that Quality Control Procedures the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be in- visible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least par- 1. Intralaboratory program. Each labora- tially visible but may vary slightly in visi- tory and/or each company with more than bility between microscopes. A microscope one microscopist counting slides shall estab- that fails to meet these requirements has ei- lish a statistically designed quality assur- ther too low or too high a resolution to be ance program involving blind recounts and used for asbestos counting. comparisons between microscopists to mon- c. If the image deteriorates, clean and ad- itor the variability of counting by each just the microscope optics. If the problem microscopist and between microscopists. In a persists, cosult the microscope manufac- company with more than one laboratory, the turer. program shall include all laboratories, and 11. Each set of samples taken will include shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-labora- 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field blanks. These blanks must come from the tory variability. same lot as the filters used for sample collec- 2a. Interlaboratory program. Each labora- tion. The field blank results shall be aver- tory analyzing asbestos samples for compli- aged and subtracted from the analytical re- ance determination shall implement an sults before reporting. A set consists of any interlaboratory quality assurance program sample or group of samples for which an that, as a minimum, includes participation evaluation for this standard must be made. of at least two other independent labora- Any samples represented by a field blank tories. Each laboratory shall participate in having a fiber count in excess of the detec- round robin testing at least once every 6 tion limit of the method being used shall be months with at least all the other labora- rejected. tories in its interlaboratory quality assur- 12. The samples shall be mounted by the ance group. Each laboratory shall submit acetone/triacetin method or a method with slides typical of its own workload for use in an equivalent index of refraction and similar this program. The round robin shall be de- clarity. signed and results analyzed using appro- 13. Observe the following counting rules. a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than priate statistical methodology. 5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved b. All laboratories should also participate fibers along the curve. in a national sample testing scheme such as b. In the absence of other information, the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program count all particles as asbestos, that have a (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or the American Industrial Hygiene Association greater. (AIHA). c. Fibers lying entirely within the bound- 3. All individuals performing asbestos anal- ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field ysis must have taken the NIOSH course for shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos boundary once, having one end within the dust or an equivalent course. circle, shall receive the count of one half 4. When the use of different microscopes (1⁄2). Do not count any fiber that crosses the graticule boundary more than once. Reject contributes to differences between counters and do not count any other fibers even and laboratories, the effect of the different though they may be visible outside the grati- microscope shall be evaluated and the micro- cule area. scope shall be replaced, as necessary. d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- 5. Current results of these quality assur- less individual fibers can be identified by ob- ance programs shall be posted in each lab- serving both ends of an individual fiber. oratory to keep the microscopists informed.

APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1101—SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS (NON-MANDATORY)

Matrix Air: OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits: Time Weighted Average ...... 0.1 fiber/cc Excursion Level (30 minutes) ...... 1.0 fiber/cc Collection Procedure:

519

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00519 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter.

Recommended Sampling Rate ...... 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute (L/min) Recommended Air Volumes: Minimum ...... 25 L Maximum ...... 2,400 L

Analytical Procedure: Fiber: A particle that is 5 µ m or longer, A portion of the sample filter is cleared with a length-to-width ratio of 3 to 1 or and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by longer. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. Field: The area within the graticule circle Commercial manufacturers and products that is superimposed on the microscope mentioned in this method are for descriptive image. use only and do not constitute endorsements Set: The samples which are taken, sub- by USDOL–OSHA. Similar products from mitted to the laboratory, analyzed, and for other sources can be substituted. which, interim or final result reports are 1. Introduction generated. Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: The This method describes the collection of airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated non-asbestos form of these minerals which sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester meet the definition of a fiber. It includes any (MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast of these minerals that have been chemically microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are treated and/or altered. unique to this method and are defined below: Walton-Beckett Graticule: An eyepiece grati- Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- cule specifically designed for asbestos fiber brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, counting. It consists of a circle with a pro- crocidolite, amosite (cummingtonite- jected diameter of 100±2 µ m (area of about grunerite asbestos), tremolite asbestos, ac- 0.00785 mm2) with a crosshair having tic- tinolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and marks at 3-µ m intervals in one direction and any of these minerals that have been chemi- 5-µ m in the orthogonal direction. There are cally treated and/or altered. The precise marks around the periphery of the circle to chemical formulation of each species will demonstrate the proper sizes and shapes of vary with the location from which it was fibers. This design is reproduced in Figure 1. mined. Nominal compositions are listed: The disk is placed in one of the microscope Chrysotile ...... Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4 eyepieces so that the design is superimposed 2∂ 3∂ Crocidolite ...... Na2 Fe3 Fe2 Si8 on the field of view. O22(OH)2 Amosite ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 1.1. History Tremolite-actin- Early surveys to determine asbestos expo- olite ...... Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2 sures were conducted using impinger counts Anthophyllite .... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 of total dust with the counts expressed as Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos which million particles per cubic foot. The British meets the criteria specified below for a fiber. Asbestos Research Council recommended fil- Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a ter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969, fiber to it’s diameter (e.g. 3:1, 5:1 aspect ra- the Bureau of Occupational Safety and tios). Health published a filter membrane method Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles formed by comminution of minerals, espe- for counting asbestos fibers in the United cially those characterized by parallel sides States. This method was refined by NIOSH and a moderate aspect ratio (usually less and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29, than 20:1). 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sam- Detection Limit: The number of fibers nec- pling with phase contrast counting for eval- essary to be 95% certain that the result is uation of asbestos exposures at work sites in greater than zero. the United States. The use of this technique Differential Counting: The term applied to was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- contrast microscopy has continued to be the bers from the fiber count because they do method of choice for the measurement of oc- not appear to be asbestos. cupational exposure to asbestos.

520

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00520 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

1.2. Principle 1.5. Physical Properties Air is drawn through a MCE filter to cap- Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile ture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped strength along its axis, is chemically inert, portion of the filter is removed, placed on a non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a glass microscope slide and made transparent. high electrical resistance and good sound ab- A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM. sorbing properties. It can be weaved into ca- All the fibers meeting defined criteria for as- bles, fabrics or other textiles, and also mat- bestos are counted and considered a measure ted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. of the airborne asbestos concentration. 2. Range and Detection Limit 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages 2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. With a Walton- There are four main advantages of PCM Beckett graticule this range is equivalent to over other methods: 0.8 to 10 fibers/field. Using NIOSH counting (1) The technique is specific for fibers. statistics, a count of 0.8 fibers/field would Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique give an approximate coefficient of variation which excludes non-fibrous particles from (CV) of 0.13. the analysis. 2.2. The detection limit for this method is (2) The technique is inexpensive and does 4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm2. This not require specialized knowledge to carry was determined using an equation to esti- out the analysis for total fiber counts. mate the maximum CV possible at a specific (3) The analysis is quick and can be per- concentration (95% confidence) and a Lower formed on-site for rapid determination of air Control Limit of zero. The CV value was concentrations of asbestos fibers. then used to determine a corresponding concentration from historical CV vs fiber rela- (4) The technique has continuity with his- tionships. As an example: torical epidemiological studies so that estimates of expected disease can be inferred Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) = from long-term determinations of asbestos AC—1.645(CV)(AC) exposures. Where: The main disadvantage of PCM is that it AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber con- does not positively identify asbestos fibers. centration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower Other fibers which are not asbestos may be Control Limit=0 and solving for CV: included in the count unless differential 0 = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) counting is performed. This requires a great CV = 0.61 deal of experience to adequately differen- This value was compared with CV vs. count tiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Posi- curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for tive identification of asbestos must be per- Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an formed by polarized light or electron micros- OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA– copy techniques. A further disadvantage of SLTC) CV curve (see Appendix A for further PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per about 0.2 µ m in diameter while the finest as- 100 fields, respectively. Although a lower de- bestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 µ m in tection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is sup- diameter. For some exposures, substantially ported by the OSHA–SLTC data, both data more fibers may be present than are actually sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. counted. 3. Method Performance—Precision and 1.4. Workplace Exposure Accuracy Asbestos is used by the construction indus- Precision is dependent upon the total num- try in such products as shingles, floor tiles, ber of fibers counted and the uniformity of asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation the fiber distribution on the filter. A general rule is to count at least 20 and not more than and acoustical products. Non-construction 100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100 uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most have already been counted. Counting more significant exposures in the workplace is the than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in removal and encapsulation of asbestos in precision. As the total count drops below 10 schools, public buildings, and homes. Many fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is workers have the potential to be exposed to noted. asbestos during these operations. At this time, there is no known method to About 95% of the asbestos in commercial determine the absolute accuracy of the as- use in the United States is chrysotile. Cro- bestos analysis. Results of samples prepared cidolite and amosite make up most of the re- through the Proficiency Analytical Testing mainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or ac- (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA– tinolite are likely to be encountered as con- SLTC showed no significant bias when com- taminants in various industrial products. pared to PAT reference values. The PAT

521

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00521 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989 5.2. Sampling Procedure (N=36) and the concentration range was from 5.2.1. Seal the point where the base and 120 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. cowl of each cassette meet with a gel band or tape. 4. Interferences 5.2.2. Charge the pumps completely before Fibrous substances, if present, may inter- beginning. fere with asbestos analysis. 5.2.3. Connect each pump to a calibration Some common fibers are: cassette with an appropriate length of 6-mm fiberglass bore plastic tubing. Do not use luer connec- anhydrite tors—the type of cassette specified above has plant fibers built-in adapters. perlite veins 5.2.4. Select an appropriate flow rate for gypsum the situation being monitored. The sampling some synthetic fibers flow rate must be between 0.5 and 5.0 L/min membrane structures for personal sampling and is commonly set sponge spicules between 1 and 2 L/min. Always choose a flow diatoms rate that will not produce overloaded filters. microorganisms 5.2.5. Calibrate each sampling pump before wollastonite and after sampling with a calibration cas- The use of electron microscopy or optical sette in-line (Note: This calibration cassette tests such as polarized light, and dispersion should be from the same lot of cassettes used staining may be used to differentiate these for sampling). Use a primary standard (e.g. materials from asbestos when necessary. bubble burette) to calibrate each pump. If possible, calibrate at the sampling site. 5. Sampling NOTE: If sampling site calibration is not 5.1. Equipment possible, environmental influences may affect the flow rate. The extent is dependent 5.1.1. Sample assembly (The assembly is on the type of pump used. Consult with the shown in Figure 3). Conductive filter holder pump manufacturer to determine dependence consisting of a 25-mm diameter, 3-piece cas- on environmental influences. If the pump is sette having a 50-mm long electrically con- affected by temperature and pressure ductive extension cowl. Backup pad, 25-mm, changes, correct the flow rate using the for- cellulose. Membrane filter, mixed-cellulose mula shown in the section ‘‘Sampling Pump ester (MCE), 25-mm, plain, white, 0.4 to 1.2-µ Flow Rate Corrections’’ at the end of this ap- m pore size. pendix. NOTES: (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES. 5.2.6. Connect each pump to the base of (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required each sampling cassette with flexible tubing. to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the Remove the end cap of each cassette and cassette due to electrostatic attraction. take each air sample open face. Assure that (c) Purchase filters which have been selected each sample cassette is held open side down by the manufacturer for asbestos count- in the employee’s breathing zone during ing or analyze representative filters for sampling. The distance from the nose/mouth fiber background before use. Discard the of the employee to the cassette should be filter lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields about 10 cm. Secure the cassette on the col- are found. lar or lapel of the employee using spring (d) To decrease the possibility of contamina- clips or other similar devices. tion, the sampling system (filter-backup 5.2.7. A suggested minimum air volume pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually when sampling to determine TWA compli- preassembled by the manufacturer. ance is 25 L. For Excursion Limit (30 min (e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-mouth, sampling time) evaluations, a minimum air may be used within the limits of their volume of 48 L is recommended. validation. 5.2.8. The most significant problem when 5.1.2. Gel bands for sealing cassettes. sampling for asbestos is overloading the fil- 5.1.3. Sampling pump. ter with non-asbestos dust. Suggested max- Each pump must be a battery operated, imum air sample volumes for specific envi- self-contained unit small enough to be ronments are: placed on the monitored employee and not interfere with the work being performed. The Environment Air Vol. (L) pump must be capable of sampling at the collection rate for the required sampling time. Asbestos removal operations (visible 100. 5.1.4. Flexible tubing, 6-mm bore. dust). 5.1.5. Pump calibration. Asbestos removal operations (little 240. dust). Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or elec- Office environments ...... 400 to 2,400. tronic meter.

522

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00522 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

CAUTION: Do not overload the filter with laboratory hood. Do not use acetone near dust. High levels of non-fibrous dust par- any open flame. For generation of acetone ticles may obscure fibers on the filter and vapor, use a spark free heat source. lower the count or make counting impos- 6.1.2. Any asbestos spills should be cleaned sible. If more than about 25 to 30% of the up immediately to prevent dispersal of fi- field area is obscured with dust, the result bers. Prudence should be exercised to avoid may be biased low. Smaller air volumes may contamination of laboratory facilities or ex- be necessary when there is excessive non-as- posure of personnel to asbestos. Asbestos bestos dust in the air. spills should be cleaned up with wet methods While sampling, observe the filter with a and/or a High Efficiency Particulate-Air small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of (HEPA) filtered vacuum. dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and CAUTION: Do not use a vacuum without a seal the cassette, and replace with a new HEPA filter—It will disperse fine asbestos fi- sampling assembly. The total dust loading bers in the air. should not exceed 1 mg. 5.2.9. Blank samples are used to determine 6.2. Equipment if any contamination has occurred during 6.2.1. Phase contrast microscope with bin- sample handling. Prepare two blanks for the ocular or trinocular head. first 1 to 20 samples. For sets containing 6.2.2. Widefield or Huygenian 10X eyepieces greater than 20 samples, prepare blanks as (NOTE: The eyepiece containing the grati- 10% of the samples. Handle blank samples in cule must be a focusing eyepiece. Use a 40X the same manner as air samples with one ex- phase objective with a numerical aperture of ception: Do not draw any air through the 0.65 to 0.75). blank samples. Open the blank cassette in 6.2.3. Kohler illumination (if possible) with the place where the sample cassettes are green or blue filter. mounted on the employee. Hold it open for 6.2.4. Walton-Beckett Graticule, type G–22 about 30 seconds. Close and seal the cassette with 100 ±2 µ m projected diameter. appropriately. Store blanks for shipment 6.2.5. Mechanical stage. A rotating me- with the sample cassettes. chanical stage is convenient for use with po- 5.2.10. Immediately after sampling, close larized light. and seal each cassette with the base and 6.2.6. Phase telescope. plastic plugs. Do not touch or puncture the 6.2.7. Stage micrometer with 0.01-mm sub- filter membrane as this will invalidate the divisions. analysis. 6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Avail- 5.2.11 Attach and secure a sample seal able from PTR optics Ltd., and also around each sample cassette in such a way McCrone). as to assure that the end cap and base plugs 6.2.9. Precleaned glass slides, 25 mm X 75 cannot be removed without destroying the mm. One end can be frosted for convenience seal. Tape the ends of the seal together since in writing sample numbers, etc., or paste-on the seal is not long enough to be wrapped labels can be used. end-to-end. Also wrap tape around the cas- 6.2.10. Cover glass #11⁄2. sette at each joint to keep the seal secure. 6.2.11. Scalpel (#10, curved blade). 5.3.1. Send the samples to the laboratory 6.2.12. Fine tipped forceps. with paperwork requesting asbestos analysis. 6.2.13. Aluminum block for clearing filter List any known fibrous interferences present (see Appendix D and Figure 4). during sampling on the paperwork. Also, 6.2.14. Automatic adjustable pipette, 100- to note the workplace operation(s) sampled. 500-µ L. 5.3.2. Secure and handle the samples in 6.2.15. Micropipette, 5 µ L. such that they will not rattle during shipment nor be exposed to static electricity. Do 6.3. Reagents not ship samples in expanded polystyrene peanuts, vermiculite, paper shreds, or excel- 6.3.1. Acetone (HPLC grade). sior. Tape sample cassettes to sheet bubbles 6.3.2. Triacetin (glycerol triacetate). and place in a container that will cushion 6.3.3. Lacquer or nail polish. the samples in such a manner that they will 6.4. Standard Preparation not rattle. 5.3.3. To avoid the possibility of sample A way to prepare standard asbestos sam- contamination, always ship bulk samples in ples of known concentration has not been de- separate mailing containers. veloped. It is possible to prepare replicate samples of nearly equal concentration. This 6. Analysis has been performed through the PAT program. These asbestos samples are distributed 6.1. Safety Precautions by the AIHA to participating laboratories. 6.1.1. Acetone is extremely flammable and Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm precautions must be taken not to ignite it. sample membrane is required for an asbestos Avoid using large containers or quantities of count, any PAT sample can serve as a acetone. Transfer the solvent in a ventilated ‘‘standard’’ for replicate counting.

523

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00523 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

6.5. Sample Mounting 6.6. Sample Analysis NOTE: See Safety Precautions in Section Completely align the microscope according 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to to the manufacturer’s instructions. Then, produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy) align the microscope using the following background in a medium with a refractive general alignment routine at the beginning index of approximately 1.46. The technique of every counting session and more often if below collapses the filter for easier focusing necessary. and produces permanent mounts which are useful for quality control and interlabora- 6.6.1. Alignment tory comparison. (1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small An aluminum block or similar device is re- amount of dirt can significantly degrade the quired for sample preparation. image. 6.5.1. Heat the aluminum block to about 70 (2) Rough focus the objective on a sample. °C. The hot block should not be used on any (3) Close down the field iris so that it is surface that can be damaged by either the visible in the field of view. Focus the image heat or from exposure to acetone. of the iris with the condenser focus. Center 6.5.2. Ensure that the glass slides and cover the image of the iris in the field of view. glasses are free of dust and fibers. (4) Install the phase telescope and focus on 6.5.3. Remove the top plug to prevent a the phase rings. Critically center the rings. vacuum when the cassette is opened. Clean Misalignment of the rings results in astig- the outside of the cassette if necessary. Cut matism which will degrade the image. the seal and/or tape on the cassette with a (5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the razor blade. Very carefully separate the base microscope stage and focus on the lines. The from the extension cowl, leaving the filter analyst must see line set 3 and should see at and backup pad in the base. least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6 6.5.4. With a rocking motion cut a tri- or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination angular wedge from the filter using the scal- which does not pass this test may not be pel. This wedge should be one-sixth to one- used. fourth of the filter. Grasp the filter wedge with the forceps on the perimeter of the fil- 6.6.2. Counting Fibers ter which was clamped between the cassette (1) Place the prepared sample slide on the pieces. DO NOT TOUCH the filter with your mechanical stage of the microscope. Position finger. Place the filter on the glass slide the center of the wedge under the objective sample side up. Static electricity will usu- lens and focus upon the sample. ally keep the filter on the slide until it is (2) Start counting from one end of the cleared. wedge and progress along a radial line to the 6.5.5. Place the tip of the micropipette con- other end (count in either direction from pe- taining about 200 µ L acetone into the alu- rimeter to wedge tip). Select fields ran- minum block. Insert the glass slide into the domly, without looking into the eyepieces, receiving slot in the aluminum block. Inject by slightly advancing the slide in one direc- the acetone into the block with slow, steady tion with the mechanical stage control. pressure on the plunger while holding the pi- (3) Continually scan over a range of focal pette firmly in place. Wait 3 to 5 seconds for planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 µ m of the filter to clear, then remove the pipette the filter surface) with the fine focus control and slide from the aluminum block. during each field count. Spend at least 5 to 6.5.6. Immediately (less than 30 seconds) 15 seconds per field. place 2.5 to 3.5 µ L of triacetin on the filter (4) Most samples will contain asbestos fi- (NOTE: Waiting longer than 30 seconds will bers with fiber diameters less than 1 µ m. result in increased index of refraction and Look carefully for faint fiber images. The decreased contrast between the fibers and small diameter fibers will be very hard to the preparation. This may also lead to sepa- see. However, they are an important con- ration of the cover slip from the slide). tribution to the total count. 6.5.7. Lower a cover slip gently onto the fil- (5) Count only fibers equal to or longer ter at a slight angle to reduce the possibility than 5 µ m. Measure the length of curved fi- of forming air bubbles. If more than 30 sec- bers along the curve. onds have elapsed between acetone exposure (6) Count fibers which have a length to and triacetin application, glue the edges of width ratio of 3:1 or greater. the cover slip to the slide with lacquer or (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields. nail polish. Continue counting until either 100 fibers are 6.5.8. If clearing is slow, warm the slide for counted or 100 fields have been viewed; 15 min on a hot plate having a surface tem- whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers perature of about 50 °C to hasten clearing. in the final field. The top of the hot block can be used if the (8) Fibers lying entirely within the bound- slide is not heated too long. ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field 6.5.9. Counting may proceed immediately shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the after clearing and mounting are completed. boundary once, having one end within the

524

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00524 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

circle shall receive a count of 1⁄2. Do not 6.8.4. Each analyst shall select and count count any fiber that crosses the graticule prepared slides from a ‘‘slide bank’’. These boundary more than once. Reject and do not are quality assurance counts. The slide bank count any other fibers even though they may shall be prepared using uniformly distributed be visible outside the graticule area. If a samples taken from the workload. Fiber den- fiber touches the circle, it is considered to sities should cover the entire range routinely cross the line. analyzed by the laboratory. These slides are (9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- counted blind by all counters to establish an less individual fibers can be clearly identi- original standard deviation. This historical fied and each individual fiber is clearly not distribution is compared with the quality as- connected to another counted fiber. See Fig- surance counts. A counter must have 95% of ure 1 for counting conventions. all quality control samples counted within (10) Record the number of fibers in each three standard deviations of the historical field in a consistent way such that filter mean. This count is then integrated into a non-uniformity can be assessed. new historical mean and standard deviation (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment. for the slide. (12) When an agglomerate (mass of mate- The analyses done by the counters to es- rial) covers more than 25% of the field of tablish the slide bank may be used for an in- view, reject the field and select another. Do terim quality control program if the data are not include it in the number of fields count- treated in a proper statistical fashion. ed. (13) Perform a ‘‘blind recount’’ of 1 in every 7. Calculations 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides 7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbes- using a person other than the original tos fiber concentration on the filter sample counter. using the following formula: 6.7. Fiber Identification  FB  BFB  As previously mentioned in Section 1.3.,   −    × ECA PCM does not provide positive confirmation  FL  BFL   of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential AC = counting techniques should be used if dis- × × × crimination is desirable. Differential count- 1000 FR T MFA ing may include primary discrimination where: based on morphology, polarized light anal- AC=Airborne fiber concentration µ ysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data FB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 by Scanning Electron or Transmission Elec- m counted tron Microscopy. FL=Total number of fields counted on the A great deal of experience is required to filter routinely and correctly perform differential BFB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 µ counting. It is discouraged unless it is le- m counted in the blank gally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obvi- BFL=Total number of fields counted on the ously not asbestos should it be excluded from blank the count. Further discussion of this tech- ECA=Effective collecting area of filter (385 2 nique can be found in reference 8.10. mm nominal for a 25-mm filter.) If there is a question whether a fiber is as- FR=Pump flow rate (L/min) MFA=Microscope count field area (mm2). bestos or not, follow the rule: 2 ‘‘WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.’’ This is 0.00785 mm for a Walton-Beckett Graticule. 6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality T=Sample collection time (min) Control System 1,000=Conversion of L to cc NOTE: The collection area of a filter is sel- 6.8.1. All individuals performing asbestos dom equal to 385 mm2. It is appropriate for analysis must have taken the NIOSH course laboratories to routinely monitor the exact for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes- diameter using an inside micrometer. The tos or an equivalent course. collection area is calculated according to the 6.8.2. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos formula: counting shall set up a slide trading arrange- Area = ²(d/2)2 ment with at least two other laboratories in order to compare performance and eliminate 7.2. Short-Cut Calculation inbreeding of error. The slide exchange occurs at least semiannually. The round robin Since a given analyst always has the same results shall be posted where all analysts can interpupillary distance, the number of fields view individual analyst’s results. per filter for a particular analyst will remain 6.8.3. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos constant for a given size filter. The field size counting shall participate in the Proficiency for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst Analytical Testing Program, the Asbestos is using an assigned microscope and is not Analyst Registry or equivalent. changing the reticle).

525

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00525 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

For example, if the exposed area of the fil- 7.4. Reporting Results 2 ter is always 385 mm and the size of the field Report results to the industrial hygienist is always 0.00785 mm2 the number of fields as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If per filter will always be 49,000. In addition it multiple analyses are performed on a sam- is necessary to convert liters of air to cc. ple, an average of the results is to be re- These three constants can then be combined ported unless any of the results can be re- such that ECA/(1,000×MFA)=49. The previous jected for cause. equation simplifies to: 8. References  FB  BFB 8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al., U.S. Public Health   −   × 49 Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos  FL  BFL  Textile Industry (Public Health Bulletin No. AC = 241), U.S. Treasury Dept., Washington, DC, FR× T 1938. 8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measure- 7.3. Recount Calculations ment of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Mem- brane Filter Method (Technical Note), Asbes- As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a tos Research Council, Rockdale, Lancashire, ‘‘blind recount’’ of 10% of the slides is per- Great Britain, 1969. formed. In all cases, differences will be ob- 8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, served between the first and second counts of T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting the same filter wedge. Most of these dif- Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers ferences will be due to chance alone, that is, by Phase Contrast Microscopy, Bureau of Oc- due to the random variability (precision) of cupational Health, U.S. Dept. of Health, Edu- the count method. Statistical recount cri- cation and Welfare, Cincinnati, OH, 1969. teria enables one to decide whether observed 8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, differences can be explained due to chance 2nd ed., Vol. 1 (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77– alone or are probably due to systematic dif- 157–A). National Institute for Occupational ferences between analysts, microscopes, or Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1977. pp. 239–1—239–21. other biasing factors. 8.5. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations The following recount criterion is for a 29 CFR 1910.1001. 1971. pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc. 8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, The criterion is given at the type-I error Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk Rule, Federal Register 51:119 (20 June 1986). that we will reject a pair of counts for the pp. 22612–22790. reason that one might be biased, when the 8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and large observed difference is really due to Actinolite, Code of Federal Regulations chance. 1910.1001. 1988. pp. 711–752. Reject a pair of counts if: 8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard— Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (DHEW/ − > NIOSH Pub. No. HSM 72–10267), National In- AC2 AC 1 2. 78 stitute for Occupational Safety and Health, NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, 1972. pp. III–1—III–24. × × 8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, ()ACAVG CV FB R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Where: Fibers (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 79–127). Na- AC1=lower estimated airborne fiber con- tional Institute for Occupational Safety and centration Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1979. AC2=higher estimated airborne fiber con- 8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- centration croscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, ACavg=average of the two concentration esti- Analytical Techniques in Occupational mates Health Chemistry, edited by D.D. Dollberg

CVFB=CV for the average of the two con- and A.W. Verstuyft. Wash. DC: American centration estimates Chemical Society, (ACS Symposium Series If a pair of counts are rejected by this cri- 120) 1980. pp. 13–41. terion then, recount the rest of the filters in Quality Control the submitted set. Apply the test and reject any other pairs failing the test. Rejection The OSHA asbestos regulations require shall include a memo to the industrial hy- each laboratory to establish a quality con- gienist stating that the sample failed a sta- trol program. The following is presented as tistical test for homogeneity and the true air an example of how the OSHA–SLTC constructed its internal CV curve as part of concentration may be significantly different meeting this requirement. Data is from 395 than the reported value. samples collected during OSHA compliance

526 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

inspections and analyzed from October 1980 (1) Insert any available graticule into the through April 1986. focusing eyepiece and focus so that the grati- Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 dif- cule lines are sharp and clear. ferent counters independently of one an- (2) Align the microscope. other. The standard deviation and the CV (3) Place a stage micrometer on the micro- statistic was calculated for each sample. scope object stage and focus the microscope This data was then plotted on a graph of CV on the graduated lines. vs. fibers/mm2. A least squares regression (4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL was performed using the following equation: (µ m), using the stage micrometer. (5) Remove the graticule from the micro- 2 CV = antilog10[A(log10(x)) +B(log10(x))+C] scope and measure its actual grid length, AL where: (mm). This can be accomplished by using a x = the number of fibers/mm2 mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a Application of least squares gave: jeweler’s loupe with a direct reading scale. A = 0.182205 (6) Let D=100 µ m. Calculate the circle di- B = 0.973343 ameter, dc (mm), for the Walton-Beckett C = 0.327499 graticule and specify the diameter when making a purchase: Using these values, the equation becomes: 2 AL× D CV = antilog10[0.182205(log10(x)) = ¥0.973343(log (x))+0.327499] dc 10 PL Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections Example: If PL=108 µ m, AL=2.93 mm and D=100 µ m, then, This correction is used if a difference greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/ 2. 93× 100 or pressure is noted between calibration and d= = 2. 71 mm sampling sites and the pump does not com- c pensate for the differences. 108 (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle combination on the microscope must be cali-  P   T  brated. Should any of the three be changed = × cal × act (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replace- QQact cal      P   T  ment, etc.), the combination must be recali- act cal brated. Calibration may change if interpupil- Where: lary distance is changed. Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable Q = actual flow rate act range: 100±2 µ m) with a stage micrometer Qcal = calibrated flow rate (if a rotameter was upon receipt of the graticule from the manu- used, the rotameter value) facturer. Determine the field area (mm2). Pcal = uncorrected air pressure at calibration Field Area = ²(D/2) 2 Pact = uncorrected air pressure at sampling If D = 100 µ m=0.1 mm, then site Field Area = ²(0.1 mm/2) 2=0.00785 mm 2 T = temperature at sampling site (K) act The Graticule is available from: Graticules Tcal = temperature at calibration (K) Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN, Kent, England (Telephone 011–44–732–359061). Walton-Beckett Graticule Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145 When ordering the Graticule for asbestos Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [tele- counting, specify the exact disc diameter phone (617) 891–6000] or McCrone Accessories needed to fit the ocular of the microscope and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chi- and the diameter (mm) of the circular count- cago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842–7100]. The ing area. Instructions for measuring the di- graticule is custom made for each micro- mensions necessary are listed: scope.

527

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00527 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE istered to all employees who are exposed to asbestos above the permissible exposure Structure No. Count Explanation limit, and who will therefore be included in 1 to 6 ...... 1 Single fibers all contained within the their employer’s medical surveillance pro- Circle. gram. Part 1 of the appendix contains the 7 ...... 1¤2 Fiber crosses circle once. Initial Medical Questionnaire, which must be 8 ...... 0 Fiber too short. obained for all new hires who will be covered 9 ...... 2 Two crossing fibers. by the medical surveillance requirements. 10 ...... 0 Fiber outside graticule. 11 ...... 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice. Part 2 includes the abbreviated Periodical 12 ...... 1¤2 Although split, fiber only crosses Medical Questionnaire, which must be ad- once. ministered to all employees who are provided periodic medical examinations under APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] the medical surveillance provisions of the standard. APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL QUESTIONNAIRES; MANDATORY This mandatory appendix contains the medical questionnaires that must be admin-

528

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00528 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

529

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00529 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

530

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00530 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

531

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00531 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

532

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00532 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

533

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00533 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

534

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00534 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

535

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00535 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

536

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00536 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

537

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00537 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

538

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00538 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

539

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00539 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1101—INTERPRETA- APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1101—WORK PRAC- TION AND CLASSIFICATION OF CHEST TICES AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS ROENTGENOGRAMS—MANDATORY FOR CLASS I ASBESTOS OPERATIONS (NON-MANDATORY) (a) Chest roentgenograms shall be interpreted and classified in accordance with a This is a non-mandatory appendix to the professionally accepted classification system asbestos standards for construction and for and recorded on an interpretation form fol- shipyards. It describes criteria and proce- lowing the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 dures for erecting and using negative pres- form. As a minimum, the content within the sure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work, when NPEs are used as an allowable control bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) method to comply with paragraph (g)(5)(i) of shall be included. This form is not to be sub- this section. Many small and variable details mitted to NIOSH.. are involved in the erection of a negative (b) Roentgenograms shall be interpreted pressure enclosure. OSHA and most partici- and classified only by a B-reader, a board eli- pants in the rulemaking agreed that only the gible/certified radiologist, or an experienced major, more performance oriented criteria physician with known s. should be made mandatory. These criteria (c) All interpreters, whenever interpreting are set out in paragraph (g) of this section. chest roentgenograms made under this sec- In addition, this appendix includes these tion, shall have immediately available for mandatory specifications and procedures in reference a complete set of the ILO–U/C its guidelines in order to make this appendix International Classification of Radiographs coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature for Pneumoconioses, 1980. of the criteria which appear in the regulatory text is not changed because they are

540

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00540 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

included in this ‘‘non-mandatory’’ appendix. A physical description of the work area; Similarly, the additional criteria and proce- A description of the approximate amount of dures included as guidelines in the appendix, material to be removed; do not become mandatory because manda- A schedule for turning off and sealing exist- tory criteria are also included in these coming ventilation systems; prehensive guidelines. Personnel hygiene procedures; In addition, none of the criteria, both man- A description of personal protective equip- datory and recommended, are meant to ment and clothing to be worn by employ- specify or imply the need for use of patented ees; or licensed methods or equipment. Rec- A description of the local exhaust ventila- ommended specifications included in this at- tion systems to be used and how they are tachment should not discourage the use of to be tested; creative alternatives which can be shown to A description of work practices to be ob- reliably achieve the objectives of negative- pressure enclosures. served by employees; Requirements included in this appendix, An air monitoring plan; cover general provisions to be followed in all A description of the method to be used to asbestos jobs, provisions which must be fol- transport waste material; and lowed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provi- The location of the dump site. sions governing the construction and testing of negative pressure enclosures. The first Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos category includes the requirement for use of Removal wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and imme- Although individual asbestos removal diate bagging of waste; Class I work must projects vary in terms of the equipment re- conform to the following provisions: quired to accomplish the removal of the ma- • oversight by competent person terials, some equipment and materials are • use of critical barriers over all openings common to most asbestos removal oper- to work area ations. • isolation of HVAC systems Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal • use of impermeable dropcloths and cov- surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal erage of all objects within regulated areas vertical openings and ceilings should have a In addition, more specific requirements for minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other NPEs include: adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting • maintenance of 0.02 inches water gauge ¥ should be of sufficient adhesive strength to within enclosure support the weight of the material plus all • manometric measurements stresses encountered during the entire dura- • air movement away from employees per- tion of the project without becoming deforming removal work tached from the surface. • smoke testing or equivalent for detection of leaks and air direction Other equipment and materials which • deactivation of electrical circuits, if not should be available at the beginning of each provided with ground-fault circuit inter- project are: rupters. —HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for cleaning the work area after the asbestos Planning the Project has been removed. It should have a long The standard requires that an exposure as- hose capable of reaching out-of-the-way sessment be conducted before the asbestos places, such as areas above ceiling tiles, job is begun [§ 1926.1101 (f)(1)]. Information behind pipes, etc. needed for that assessment, includes data re- —Portable air ventilation systems installed lating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the to provide the negative air pressure and air specific variables of the current job. The in- removal from the enclosure must be formation needed to conduct the assessment equipped with a HEPA filter. The number will be useful in planning the project, and in and capacity of units required to ventilate complying with any reporting requirements an enclosure depend on the size of the area under this standard, when significant to be ventilated. The filters for these sys- changes are being made to a control system tems should be designed in such a manner listed in the standard, [see also those of that they can be replaced when the air flow USEPA (40 CFR 61, subpart M). Thus, al- volume is reduced by the build-up of dust though the standard does not explicitly rein the filtration material. Pressure moni- quire the preparation of a written asbestos toring devices with alarms and strip chart removal plan, the usual constituents of such recorders attached to each system to indi- a plan, i.e., a description of the enclosure, cate the pressure differential and the loss the equipment, and the procedures to be used due to dust buildup on the filter are rec- throughout the project, must be determined ommended. before the enclosure can be erected. The fol- —Water sprayers should be used to keep the lowing information should be included in the asbestos material as saturated as possible planning of the system: during removal; the sprayers will provide a

541

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00541 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

fine mist that minimizes the impact of the sheeting should be secured with duct tape or spray on the material. an equivalent method to provide a tight seal —Water used to saturate the asbestos con- around the object. taining material can be amended by adding Bagging Waste: In addition to the require- at least 15 milliliters (1⁄4 ounce) of wetting ment for immediate bagging of waste for dis- agent in 1 liter (1 pint) of water. An exam- posal, it is further recommended that the ple of a wetting agent is a 50/50 mixture of waste material be double-bagged and sealed polyoxyethylene ether and in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal. polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester. The bags should be stored in a waste storage —Backup power supplies are recommended, area that can be controlled by the workers especially for ventilation systems. conducting the removal. Filters removed —Shower and bath water should be with from air handling units and rubbish removed mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water from the area are to be bagged and handled that has been used to clean personnel or as hazardous waste. equipment should either be filtered or be collected and discarded as asbestos waste. Constructing the Enclosure Soap and shampoo should be provided to The enclosure should be constructed to aid in removing dust from the workers’ provide an air-tight seal around ducts and skin and hair. openings into existing ventilation systems —See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section and around penetrations for electrical con- for appropriate respiratory protection and duits, telephone wires, water lines, drain protective clothing. pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight —See paragraph (k) of this section for re- and watertight except for those openings de- quired signs and labels. signed to provide entry and/or air flow control. Preparing the Work Area Size: An enclosure should be the minimum Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to volume to encompass all of the working sur- the heating, ventilation, and air condi- faces yet allow unencumbered movement by tioning systems that service the restricted the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow area must be deactivated and locked off. All past the worker(s), and ensure walking sur- ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents faces can be kept free of tripping hazards. must be sealed off with two layers of plastic Shape: The enclosure may be any shape to prevent entrainment of contaminated air. that optimizes the flow of ventilation air Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted past the worker(s). Area: If components of a HVAC system lo- Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings cated in the restricted area are connected to and floors must be supported in such a man- a system that will service another zone dur- ner that portions of the enclosure will not ing the project, the portion of the duct in the fall down during normal use. restricted area must be sealed and pressur- Openings: It is not necessary that the ized. Necessary precautions include caulking structure be airtight; openings may be de- the duct joints, covering all cracks and open- signed to direct air flow. Such openings ings with two layers of sheeting, and pres- should be located at a distance from active surizing the duct throughout the duration of removal operations. They should be designed the project by restricting the return air flow. to draw air into the enclosure under all an- The power to the fan supplying the positive ticipated circumstances. In the event that pressure should be locked ‘‘on’’ to prevent negative pressure is lost, they should be pressure loss. fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is or automatic trap doors that prevent dust located in the restricted area, it should be ei- from escaping the enclosure. Openings for ther shut down or isolated by sealing with exits should be controlled by an airlock or a two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting vestibule. should provide enough slack to accommo- Barrier Supports: Frames should be con- date the pressure changes in the shaft with- structed to support all unsupported spans of out breaking the air-tight seal. sheeting. Removing Mobile Objects: All movable ob- Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and jects should be cleaned and removed from floors should be lined with two layers of the work area before an enclosure is con- plastic sheeting having a thickness of at structed unless moving the objects creates a least 6 mil. hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be Seams: Seams in the sheeting material contaminated and should be either cleaned should be minimized to reduce the possibili- with amended water and a HEPA vacuum ties of accidental rips and tears in the adhe- and then removed from the area or wrapped sive or connections. All seams in the sheet- and then disposed of as hazardous waste. ing should overlap, be staggered and not be Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After located at corners or wall-to-floor joints. cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum, Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure surfaces of stationary objects should be cov- consists of a work area, a decontamination ered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The area, and waste storage area. The work area

542

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00542 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

where the asbestos removal operations occur figuration, and shape of the enclosure as well should be separated from both the waste as ambient and mechanical air pressure con- storage area and the contamination control ditions around the enclosure. area by physical curtains, doors, and/or air- Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past flow patterns that force any airborne con- each worker shall be enhanced by posi- tamination back into the work area. tioning the intakes and exhaust ports to re- See paragraph (j) of this section for remove contaminated air from the worker’s quirements for hygiene facilities. breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacu- During egress from the work area, each um cleaners to draw air from the worker’s worker should step into the equipment room, breathing zone, by forcing relatively clean tools and equipment, and remove gross uncontaminated air past the worker toward contamination from clothing by wet clean- an exhaust port, or by using a combination ing and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering of methods to reduce the worker’s exposure. the shower area, foot coverings, head cov- Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust erings, hand coverings, and coveralls are re- plume from air handling units should be lo- moved and placed in impervious bags for dis- cated away from adjacent personnel and in- posal or cleaning. Airline connections from takes for HVAC systems. airline respirators with HEPA disconnects Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume and power cables from powered air-purifying (cubic meters per minute) exhausted (re- respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected moved) from the workplace must exceed the just prior to entering the shower room. amount of makeup air supplied to the enclosure. The rate of air exhausted from the en- Establishing Negative Pressure Within the closure should be designed to maintain a Enclosure negative pressure in the enclosure and air Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into movement past each worker. The volume of the enclosure under all anticipated condi- air flow removed from the enclosure should tions and exhausted through a HEPA filter replace the volume of the container at every for 24 hours a day during the entire duration 5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to of the project. be relatively high for large enclosures, enclo- Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be sures with awkward shapes, enclosures with checked before removal operations begin, at multiple openings, and operations employing least once per operating shift and any time several workers in the enclosure. there is a question regarding the integrity of Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air the enclosure. The primary test for air flow flow velocity must visibly ‘‘drag’’ air into is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within other visual methods. Flow checks are made the enclosure must be adequate to remove at each opening and at each doorway to dem- airborne contamination from each worker’s onstrate that air is being drawn into the en- breathing zone without disturbing the asbes- closure and at each worker’s position to tos-containing material on surfaces. show that air is being drawn away from the Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on breathing zone. doors and curtains that control the air flow Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure: patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs, After the initial air flow patterns have been the patterns through doorways must be such checked, the static pressure must be mon- that the air flows toward the inside of the itored within the enclosure. Monitoring may enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double be made using manometers, pressure gauges, doors, or double curtains are used to prevent or combinations of these devices. It is rec- air movement through the doorways. To use ommended that they be attached to alarms a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by and strip chart recorders at points identified opening the door or curtain and then closing by the design engineer. the entry before opening the exit door or Corrective Actions: If the manometers or curtain. pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in Airlocks should be located between the pressure differential below the required equipment room and shower room, between level, work should cease and the reason for the shower room and the clean room, and be- the change investigated and appropriate tween the waste storage area and the outside changes made. The air flow patterns should of the enclosure. The air flow between adja- be retested before work begins again. cent rooms must be checked using smoke Pressure Differential: The design param- tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow eters for static pressure differentials be- patterns draw air toward the work area with- tween the inside and outside of enclosures out producing eddies. typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations water gauge, depending on conditions. All zones inside the enclosure must have less In addition to the breathing zone samples pressure than the ambient pressure outside taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of this sec- of the enclosure (¥0.02 inches water gauge tion, samples of air should be taken to dem- differential). Design specifications for the onstrate the integrity of the enclosure, the differential vary according to the size, con- cleanliness of the clean room and shower

543

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00543 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA fil- C. The potential for an asbestos-containing ter. If the clean room is shown to be con- product to release breathable fibers depends taminated, the room must be relocated to an largely on its degree of friability. Friable uncontaminated area. means that the material can be crumbled Samples taken near the exhaust of port- with hand pressure and is therefore likely to able ventilation systems must be done with emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on care. materials used for fireproofing, insulation, or sound proofing are considered to be fri- General Work Practices able, and they readily release airborne fibers Preventing dust dispersion is the primary if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos means of controlling the spread of asbestos floor tile or roofing felt are considered non- within the enclosure. Whenever practical, friable if intact and generally do not emit the point of removal should be isolated, en- airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding, closed, covered, or shielded from the workers sawing and other aggressive operations. As- in the area. Waste asbestos containing mate- bestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit air- rials must be bagged during or immediately borne fibers if the materials are cut or after removal; the material must remain sawed, or if they are broken. saturated until the waste container is sealed. D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to air- Waste material with sharp points or cor- borne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fi- ners must be placed in hard air-tight con- bers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) tainers rather than bags. averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1 Whenever possible, large components fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) should be sealed in plastic sheeting and re- averaged over a 30 minute work period. moved intact. Bags or containers of waste will be moved II. Health Hazard Data to the waste holding area, washed, and wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels. A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory disease and various types of cancers if the fi- Cleaning the Work Area bers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers Surfaces within the work area should be from contaminated clothing or skin can also kept free of visible dust and debris to the ex- result in these diseases. The symptoms of tent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears these diseases generally do not appear for 20 on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclo- or more years after initial exposure. sure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer with a HEPA vacuum. of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a All surfaces within the enclosure should be rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of cleaned before the exhaust ventilation sys- the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of meso- tem is deactivated and the enclosure is dis- thelioma include shortness of breath, pain in assembled. An approved encapsulant may be the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has pain. been removed. III. Respirators and Protective Clothing APPENDIX G TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] A. Respirators: You are required to wear a respirator when performing tasks that result APPENDIX H TO § 1926.1101—SUBSTANCE in asbestos exposure that exceeds the per- TECHNICAL INFORMATION FOR ASBES- missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and TOS. NON-MANDATORY when performing certain designated operations. Air-purifying respirators equipped I. Substance Identification with a high-efficiency particulate air A. Substance: ‘‘Asbestos’’ is the name of a (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne as- class of magnesium-silicate minerals that bestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0 occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are in- f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators cluded in this group are chrysotile, crocid- such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full olite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, facepiece respirators must be used. Dispos- tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. able respirators or dust masks are not per- B. Asbestos is and was used in the manu- mitted to be used for asbestos work. For ef- facture of heat-resistant clothing, auto- fective protection, respirators must fit your motive brake and clutch linings, and a vari- face and head snugly. Your employer is re- ety of building materials including floor quired to conduct a fit test when you are tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-ce- first assigned a respirator and every 6 ment pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant months thereafter. Respirators should not be drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and loosened or removed in work situations boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on where their use is required. materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, B. Protective Clothing: You are required to and between walls. wear protective clothing in work areas where

544

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00544 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the per- aminations. These exposure records must be missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical records must be kept for the period of your IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up employment plus thirty (30) years. A. Wastes that are generated by processes D. Your employer is required to release where asbestos is present include: your exposure and medical records to your 1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. physician or designated representative upon 2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trim- your written request. mings, or reject materials. 3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping APPENDIX I TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL SURVEIL- or HEPA-vacuuming. LANCE GUIDELINES FOR ASBESTOS, NON- 4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating mate- MANDATORY rial that is removed from buildings. 5. Asbestos-containing building products I. Route of Entry removed during building renovation or dem- Inhalation, ingestion. olition. 6. Contaminated disposable protective II. Toxicology clothing. B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened Clinical evidence of the adverse effects as- under exhaust hoods and packed into air- sociated with exposure to asbestos is present tight containers for disposal. Empty ship- in the form of several well-conducted epide- ping drums are difficult to clean and should miological studies of occupationally exposed be sealed. workers, family contacts of workers, and C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters persons living near asbestos mines. These should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed studies have shown a definite association be- with a fine water mist and placed into a la- tween exposure to asbestos and an increased beled waste container. incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peri- D. Process waste and housekeeping waste toneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal can- should be wetted with water or a mixture of cer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling water and surfactant prior to packaging in fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by disposable containers. exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos E. Asbestos-containing material that is re- has also been associated with an increased moved from buildings must be disposed of in incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal, leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal with other known chronic occupational dis- containers. These wastes, which are removed eases, disease associated with asbestos gen- while wet, should be sealed in containers be- erally appears about 20 years following the fore they dry out to minimize the release of first occurrence of exposure: There are no asbestos fibers during handling. known acute effects associated with exposure to asbestos. V. Access to Information Epidemiological studies indicate that the A. Each year, your employer is required to risk of lung cancer among exposed workers inform you of the information contained in who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased this standard and appendices for asbestos. In over the risk of lung cancer among non-ex- addition, your employer must instruct you posed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These in the proper work practices for handling as- studies suggest that cessation of smoking bestos-containing materials, and the correct will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a per- use of protective equipment. son exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it B. Your employer is required to determine to the same level of risk as that existing for whether you are being exposed to asbestos. an exposed worker who has never smoked. Your employer must treat exposure to ther- III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure- mal system insulation and sprayed-on and Related Disease troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos exposure, unless results of laboratory anal- The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or ysis show that the material does not contain gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure asbestos. You or your representative has the to asbestos are not unique, except that a right to observe employee measurements and chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung to record the results obtained. Your em- cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural ployer is required to inform you of your ex- calcification, or pleural fibrosis. Symptoms posure, and, if you are exposed above the per- characteristic of mesothelioma include missible exposure limit, he or she is required shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the to inform you of the actions that are being chest, or abdominal pain. Mesothelioma has taken to reduce your exposure to within the a much longer latency period compared with permissible limit. lung cancer (40 years versus 15–20 years), and C. Your employer is required to keep mesothelioma is therefore more likely to be records of your exposures and medical ex- found among workers who were first exposed

545

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00545 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

to asbestos at an early age. Mesothelioma is (ii) Completion of the respiratory disease always fatal. questionnaire contained in Appendix D. Asbestosis is pulmonary tibrosis caused by (iii) A physical examination including a the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the chest roentgenogram and pulmonary func- lungs. Symptoms include shortness of tion test that includes measurement of the breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings employee’s forced vital capacity (FVC) and of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, short- forced expiratory volume at one second ness of breath occurs even at rest. The diag- (FEV1). nosis of asbestosis is based on a history of (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the exposure to asbestos, the presence of charac- examining physician deems by sound med- teristics radiologic changes, end-inspiratory ical practice to be necessary. crackles (rales), and other clinical features The employer is required to make the pre- of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and scribed tests available at least annually to thickening are observed on X-rays taken those employees covered; more often than during the early stages of the disease. Asbes- specified if recommended by the examining tosis is often a progressive disease even in physician; and upon termination of employ- the absence of continued exposure, although ment. this appears to be a highly individualized The employer is required to provide the characteristic. In severe cases, death may be physician with the following information: A caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. copy of this standard and appendices; a description of the employee’s duties as they re- IV. Surveillance and Preventive late to asbestos exposure; the employee’s Considerations representative level of exposure to asbestos; As noted above, exposure to asbestos has a description of any personal protective and been linked to an increased risk of lung can- respiratory equipment used; and information cer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, from previous medical examinations of the and asbestosis among occupationally ex- affected employee that is not otherwise posed workers. Adequate screening tests to available to the physician. Making this in- determine an employee’s potential for devel- formation available to the physician will aid oping serious chronic diseases, such as a can- in the evaluation of the employee’s health in cer, from exposure to asbestos do not pres- relation to assigned duties and fitness to ently exist. However, some tests, particu- wear personal protective equipment, if re- larly chest X-rays and pulmonary function quired. tests, may indicate that an employee has The employer is required to obtain a writ- been overexposed to asbestos increasing his ten opinion from the examining physician or her risk of developing exposure related containing the results of the medical exam- chronic diseases. It is important for the phy- ination; the physician’s opinion as to wheth- sician to become familiar with the operating er the employee has any detected medical conditions in which occupational exposure to conditions that would place the employee at asbestos is likely to occur. This is particu- an increased risk of exposure-related disease; larly important in evaluating medical and any recommended limitations on the em- work histories and in conducting physical ployee or on the use of personal protective examinations. When an active employee has equipment; and a statement that the em- been identified as having been overexposed ployee has been informed by the physician of to asbestos measures taken by the employer the results of the medical examination and to eliminate or mitigate further exposure of any medical conditions related to asbestos should also lower the risk of serious long- exposure that require further explanation or term consequences. treatment. This written opinion must not re- The employer is required to institute a veal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated medical surveillance program for all employ- to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the ees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at opinion must be provided to the affected em- or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 ployee. fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All exami- APPENDIX J TO § 1926.1101—SMOKING CES- nations and procedures must be performed SATION PROGRAM INFORMATION FOR ASBES- by or under the supervision of a licensed TOS—NON-MANDATORY physician, at a reasonable time and place, and at no cost to the employee. The following organizations provide smok- Although broad latitude is given to the ing cessation information. physician in prescribing specific tests to be 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a included in the medical surveillance pro- toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS) gram, OSHA requires inclusion of the fol- with trained personnel to help you. Call 1– lowing elements in the routine examination: 800–4–CANCER* to reach the CIS office serv- (i) Medical and work histories with special ing your area, or write: Office of Cancer emphasis directed to symptoms of the res- Communications, National Cancer Institute, piratory system, cardiovascular system, and National Institutes of Health, Building 31 digestive tract. Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892.

546

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00546 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree ID–191 Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) Matrix: Bulk 320–3333 Collection Procedure: The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each voluntary organization composed of 58 divi- type of material and place into separate sions and 3,100 local units. Through ‘‘The 20 mL scintillation vials. Great American Smokeout’’ in November, Analytical Procedure: the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and nu- A portion of each separate phase is ana- merous educational materials, ACS helps lyzed by gross examination, phase-polar people learn about the health hazards of examination, and central stop dispersion smoking and become successful ex-smokers. microscopy. 3. American Heart Association, 7320 Green- Commercial manufacturers and products ville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750– mentioned in this method are for descriptive 5300 use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from The American Heart Association (AHA) is other sources may be substituted. a voluntary organization with 130,000 members (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) 1. Introduction in 55 state and regional groups. AHA produces a variety of publications and audio- This method describes the collection and visual materials about the effects of smok- analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light ing on the heart. AHA also has developed a microscopy techniques including phase- guidebook for incorporating a weight-control polar illumination and central-stop disper- component into smoking cessation pro- sion microscopy. Some terms unique to as- grams. bestos analysis are defined below: Amphibole: A family of minerals whose 4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broad- crystals are formed by long, thin units which way, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245– have two thin ribbons of double chain sili- 8000 cate with a brucite ribbon in between. The A voluntary organization of 7,500 members shape of each unit is similar to an ‘‘I beam’’. (physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the Minerals important in asbestos analysis in- American Lung Association (ALA) conducts clude cummingtonite-grunerite, crocidolite, numerous public information programs tremolite-actinolite and anthophyllite. about the health effects of smoking. ALA Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- has 59 state and 85 local units. The organiza- brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, tion actively supports legislation and infor- cummingtonite-grunerite asbestos (amosite), mation campaigns for non-smokers’ rights anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, and provides help for smokers who want to crocidolite, actinolite asbestos and any of quit, for example, through ‘‘Freedom From these minerals which have been chemically Smoking,’’ a self-help smoking cessation treated or altered. The precise chemical for- program. mulation of each species varies with the lo- 5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. De- cation from which it was mined. Nominal partment of Health and Human Services, compositions are listed: 5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room Chrysotile...... Mg Si O (OH) 110, Rockville, Maryland 20857 3 2 5 4 Crocidolite (Riebeckite asbestos)...... Na2 The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is Fe32+Fe23+Si8 O22(OH)2 the Department of Health and Human Serv- Cummingtonite-Grunerite asbestos ices’ lead agency in smoking control. OSH (Amosite) ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 has sponsored distribution of publications on Tremolite-Actinolite asbestos .....Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 smoking-related topics, such as free flyers on Si8 O22(OH)2 relapse after initial quitting, helping a Anthophyllite asbestos ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 friend or family member quit smoking, the O22(OH)2 health hazards of smoking, and the effects of Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos meeting parental smoking on teenagers. the criteria for a fiber. (See section 3.5. of *In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524–1234 (call col- this Appendix) lect from neighboring islands), Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a Spanish-speaking staff members are avail- fiber to its diameter usually defined as able during daytime hours to callers from ‘‘length : width’’, e.g. 3:1. the following areas: California, Florida, Brucite: A sheet mineral with the composi- Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201), tion Mg(OH)2. New York, and Texas. Consult your local Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope): telephone directory for listings of local chap- This is a dark field microscope technique ters. that images particles using only light re- fracted by the particle, excluding light that APPENDIX K TO § 1926.1101—POLARIZED LIGHT travels through the particle unrefracted. MICROSCOPY OF ASBESTOS (NON-MANDATORY) This is usually accomplished with a McCrone Method number: objective or other arrangement which places

547

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00547 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

a circular stop with apparent aperture equal tos mines. Although known to be injurious to the objective aperture in the back focal for centuries, the first modern references to plane of the microscope. its toxicity were by the British Labor Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust formed by the comminution of minerals, es- from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases pecially those characterized by relatively were described in the literature after the parallel sides and moderate aspect ratio. turn of the century. Cancer was first sus- Differential Counting: The term applied to pected in the mid 1930’s and a causal link to the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of bers from a phase contrast asbestos count the public concern for worker and public because they are not asbestos. safety with the use of this material, several Fiber: A particle longer than or equal to 5 µm with a length to width ratio greater than different types of analysis were applied to or equal to 3:1. This may include cleavage the determination of asbestos content. Light fragments. (see section 3.5 of this appendix). microscopy requires a great deal of experi- Phase Contrast: Contrast obtained in the ence and craft. Attempts were made to apply microscope by causing light scattered by less subjective methods to the analysis. X- small particles to destructively interfere ray diffraction was partially successful in with unscattered light, thereby enhancing determining the mineral types but was un- the visibility of very small particles and parable to separate out the fibrous portions ticles with very low intrinsic contrast. from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the min- Phase Contrast Microscope: A microscope imum detection limit for asbestos analysis configured with a phase mask pair to create by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Dif- phase contrast. The technique which uses ferential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no this is called Phase Contrast Microscopy more successful. These provide useful cor- (PCM). roborating information when the presence of Phase-Polar Analysis: This is the use of po- asbestos has been shown by microscopy; larized light in a phase contrast microscope. however, neither can determine the dif- It is used to see the same size fibers that are ference between fibrous and non-fibrous min- visible in air filter analysis. Although fibers erals when both habits are present. The same finer than 1 µ m are visible, analysis of these is true of Infrared Absorption (IR). is inferred from analysis of larger bundles that are usually present. When electron microscopy was applied to Phase-Polar Microscope: The phase-polar asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were microscope is a phase contrast microscope discovered present too small to be visible in which has an analyzer, a polarizer, a first any light microscope. There are two dif- order red plate and a rotating phase con- ferent types of electron microscope used for denser all in place so that the polarized light asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Micro- image is enhanced by phase contrast. scope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Mi- Sealing Encapsulant: This is a product croscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Micros- which can be applied, preferably by spraying, copy is useful in identifying minerals. The onto an asbestos surface which will seal the SEM can provide two of the three pieces of surface so that fibers cannot be released. information required to identify fibers by Serpentine: A mineral family consisting of electron microscopy: morphology and chem- minerals with the general composition istry. The third is structure as determined Mg3(Si2 O5(OH)4 having the magnesium in by Selected Area Electron Diffraction— brucite layer over a silicate layer. Minerals SAED which is performed in the TEM. Al- important in asbestos analysis included in though the resolution of the SEM is suffi- this family are chrysotile, lizardite, cient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy antigorite. of chemical analysis that can be performed 1.1. History on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fibers of less than 0.2 µ m diameter. The TEM Light microscopy has been used for well is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small over 100 years for the determination of min- to be resolved by light microscopy and eral species. This analysis is carried out using specialized polarizing microscopes as should be used in conjunction with this well as bright field microscopes. The identi- method when necessary. The TEM can pro- fication of minerals is an on-going process vide all three pieces of information required with many new minerals described each for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker year. The first recorded use of asbestos was than 1 µ m can adequately be defined in the in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the mate- light microscope. The light microscope re- rial was used in the mud wattle for the wood- mains as the best instrument for the deter- en huts the people lived in as well as mination of mineral type. This is because strengthening for pottery. Adverse health as- the minerals under investigation were first pects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000 described analytically with the light micro- years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote scope. It is inexpensive and gives positive about the poor health of slaves in the asbes- identification for most samples analyzed.

548

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00548 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

Further, when optical techniques are inad- (c) The analysis is quick, requires little equate, there is ample indication that alter- preparation time, and can be performed on- native techniques should be used for com- site if a suitably equipped microscope is plete identification of the sample. available. The disadvantages are: 1.2. Principle (a) Even using phase-polar illumination, Minerals consist of atoms that may be ar- not all the fibers present may be seen. This ranged in random order or in a regular ar- is a problem for very low asbestos concentra- rangement. Amorphous materials have tions where agglomerations or large bundles atoms in random order while crystalline ma- of fibers may not be present to allow identi- terials have long range order. Many mate- fication by inference. rials are transparent to light, at least for (b) The method requires a great degree of small particles or for thin sections. The sophistication on the part of the properties of these materials can be inves- microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as tigated by the effect that the material has his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a on light passing through it. The six asbestos microscopist’s accuracy is enhanced by expe- minerals are all crystalline with particular rience. The mineralogical training of the analyst is very important. It is the basis on properties that have been identified and cat- which subjective decisions are made. aloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of They have a regular array of atoms, but the material for analysis. This may lead to sam- arrangement is not the same in all direc- pling bias and false results (high or low). tions. Each major direction of the crystal This is especially true if the sample is se- presents a different regularity. Light pho- verely inhomogeneous. tons travelling in each of these main direc- (d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and tions will encounter different electrical not distinguishable as fibers so identifica- neighborhoods, affecting the path and time tion cannot be made. of travel. The techniques outlined in this method use the fact that light traveling 1.4. Method Performance through fibers or crystals in different directions will behave differently, but predict- 1.4.1. This method can be used for deter- ably. The behavior of the light as it travels mination of asbestos content from 0 to 100% through a crystal can be measured and com- asbestos. The detection limit has not been pared with known or determined values to adequately determined, although for selected identify the mineral species. Usually, Polar- samples, the limit is very low, depending on the number of particles examined. For most- ized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed ly homogeneous, finely divided samples, with with strain-free objectives on a bright-field no difficult fibrous interferences, the detec- microscope platform. This would limit the tion limit is below 1%. For inhomogeneous resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 µm. samples (most samples), the detection limit Because OSHA requires the counting and remains undefined. NIST has conducted pro- identification of fibers visible in phase con- ficiency testing of laboratories on a national trast, the phase contrast platform is used to scale. Although each round is reported sta- visualize the fibers with the polarizing ele- tistically with an average, control limits, ments added into the light path. Polarized etc., the results indicate a difficulty in es- light methods cannot identify fibers finer tablishing precision especially in the low µ than about 1 m in diameter even though concentration range. It is suspected that they are visible. The finest fibers are usually there is significant bias in the low range es- identified by inference from the presence of pecially near 1%. EPA tried to remedy this larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers by requiring a mandatory point counting are present, but not identifiable by light mi- scheme for samples less than 10%. The point croscopy, use either SEM or TEM to deter- counting procedure is tedious, and may in- mine the fiber identity. troduce significant biases of its own. It has 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages not been incorporated into this method. 1.4.2. The precision and accuracy of the The advantages of light microcopy are: quantitation tests performed in this method (a) Basic identification of the materials are unknown. Concentrations are easier to was first performed by light microscopy and determine in commercial products where as- gross analysis. This provides a large base of bestos was deliberately added because the published information against which to amount is usually more than a few percent. check analysis and analytical technique. An analyst’s results can be ‘‘calibrated’’ (b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The against the known amounts added by the minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fi- manufacturer. For geological samples, the brous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at degree of homogeneity affects the precision. the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of 1.4.3. The performance of the method is an- analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR anal- alyst dependent. The analyst must choose ysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the carefully and not necessarily randomly the material is not known to be fibrous. portions for analysis to assure that detection

549

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00549 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

of asbestos occurs when it is present. For States is composed of minerals which may this reason, the analyst must have adequate contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual training in sample preparation, and experi- formation of great amounts of asbestos is ence in the location and identification of as- relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are loca- bestos in samples. This is usually accom- tions in which environmental exposure can plished through substantial on-the-job train- be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of ing as well as formal education in min- California. eralogy and microscopy. There are thousands of uses for asbestos in industry and the home. Asbestos abatement 1.5. Interferences workers are the most current segment of the Any material which is long, thin, and population to have occupational exposure to small enough to be viewed under the micro- great amounts of asbestos. If the material is scope can be considered an interference for undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure asbestos. There are literally hundreds of occurs when the asbestos-containing mate- interferences in workplaces. The techniques rial is abraded or otherwise disturbed during described in this method are normally suffi- maintenance operations or some other activ- cient to eliminate the interferences. An ana- ity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in lyst’s success in eliminating the inter- place in the United States is chrysotile. ferences depends on proper training. Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral all the difference. Tremolite and families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. anthophyllite make up a very small percent- In the serpentine family, the only common age. Tremolite is found in extremely small fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Ac- the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril tinolite exposure is probably greatest from habit with morphology similar to the environmental sources, but has been identi- amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist fied in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on of a score of different minerals of which only insulating materials which may have been five are regulated by federal standard: certified as asbestos-free. amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. 1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties These are the only amphibole minerals that have been commercially exploited for their The nominal chemical compositions for fibrous properties; however, the rest can and the asbestos minerals were given in Section do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the In addition to the related mineral inter- same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a ferences, other minerals common in building high tensile strength along the fiber axis. material may present a problem for some They are chemically inert, non-combustible, microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile, quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollas- they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid tonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fi- (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl. brous materials commonly present in work- Asbestos has high electrical resistance and places are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic good sound absorbing characteristics. It can wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar, be woven into cables, fabrics or other tex- nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon tiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats. fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal fibers, etc. 1.8. Toxicology (This Section is for Informa- Matrix embedding material can sometimes tion Only and Should Not Be Taken as be a negative interference. The analyst may OSHA Policy) not be able to easily extract the fibers from Possible physiologic results of respiratory the matrix in order to use the method. exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the Where possible, remove the matrix before pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis, the analysis, taking careful note of the loss asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory of weight. Some common matrix materials are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, ce- cancer. The possible consequences of asbes- ment, and epoxy. A further negative inter- tos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Cri- ference is that the asbestos fibers themselves teria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos may be either too small to be seen in Phase Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001. fibrous quality, having the appearance of 2. Sampling Procedure plant fibers. The analyst’s ability to deal with these materials increases with experi- 2.1. Equipment for sampling ence. (a) Tube or cork borer sampling device 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure (b) Knife Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment. (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial More than 40% of the land area of the United (d) Sealing encapsulant

550

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00550 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

2.2. Safety Precautions 3. Analysis Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care The analysis of asbestos samples can be di- when sampling. While in an asbestos-con- vided into two major parts: sample prepara- taining atmosphere, a properly selected and tion and microscopy. Because of the different fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take asbestos uses that may be encountered by samples in a manner to cause the least the analyst, each sample may need different amount of dust. Follow these general guide- preparation steps. The choices are outlined lines: below. There are several different tests that (a) Do not make unnecessary dust. are performed to identify the asbestos spe- (b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). cies and determine the percentage. They will be explained below. (c) Tightly close the sample container. (d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where 3.1. Safety the sample was taken, if necessary. (a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle 2.3. Sampling Procedure the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods. If samples are received in bags, envelopes or Samples of any suspect material should be other inappropriate container, open them taken from an inconspicuous place. Where only in a hood having a face velocity at or the material is to remain, seal the sampling greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the amount to a scintillation vial and only han- potential for exposure from the sample site. dle the smaller amount. Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL open lab area. scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic. sure to collect samples from all layers and Take care not to get this material on the phases of material. If possible, make sepa- skin. Wash immediately with soap and water rate samples of each different phase of the if this happens. material. This will aid in determining the (d) Samples that have been heated in the actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, muffle furnace or the drying oven may be PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO hot. Handle them with tongs until they are COLLECT SAMPLES. The use of plastic bags cool enough to handle. presents a contamination hazard to labora- (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF tory personnel and to other samples. When (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only these containers are opened, a bellows effect be handled in an appropriate fume hood and blows fibers out of the container onto every- according to instructions given in the Mate- thing, including the person opening the con- rial Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). tainer. 3.2. Equipment If a cork-borer type sampler is available, push the tube through the material all the (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x way, so that all layers of material are sam- and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces, pled. Some samplers are intended to be dis- G–22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple posable. These should be capped and sent to disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotat- borer is used, empty the contents into a scin- ing position condenser with oversize phase tillation vial and send to the laboratory. rings, central stop dispersion objective, Vigorously and completely clean the cork Kohler illumination and a rotating mechan- borer between samples. ical stage. (b) Stereo microscope with reflected light 2.4 Shipment illumination, transmitted light illumination, polarizer, analyzer and first order red Samples packed in glass vials must not or gypsum plate, and rotating stage. touch or they might break in shipment. (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo (a) Seal the samples with a sample seal microscope over the end to guard against tampering and (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C to identify the sample. (e) Drying oven capable of 50—150 °C (b) Package the bulk samples in separate (f) Aluminum specimen pans packages from the air samples. They may (g) Tongs for handling samples in the fur- cross-contaminate each other and will inval- nace idate the results of the air samples. (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils (c) Include identifying paperwork with the (Special for dispersion staining.) samples, but not in contact with the sus- n = 1.550 pected asbestos. n = 1.585 (d) To maintain sample accountability, n = 1.590 ship the samples by certified mail, overnight n = 1.605 express, or hand carry them to the labora- n = 1.620 tory. n = 1.670

551

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00551 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

n = 1.680 chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at n = 1.690 lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a (i) A set of index of refraction oils from measurable effect on the optical properties about n=1.350 to n=2.000 in n=0.005 incre- of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of ments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) what to expect, a sample of standard asbes- (j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends tos should be heated to the same tempera- 1x3 inches 1mm (thick, precleaned. ture for the same length of time so that it (k) Cover Slips 22x22 mm, #11⁄2 can be examined for the proper interpreta- (l) Paper clips or dissection needles tion. (m) Hand grinder (n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF (o) 0.1 molar HCl Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common (p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific material treated with this solvent, although, Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, substances containing tar will sometimes Tetrasodium ...... 0.7 g/l yield to this treatment. Select a portion of Sodium Potassium Tartrate ...... 8.0 mg/liter the material and then grind it up if possible. Hydrochloric Acid ...... 99.2 g/liter Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube. Sodium Tartrate...... 0.14 g/liter Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic (q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Re- (r) Hotplate capable of 60 °C member, THF is highly flammable. Filter the (s) Balance remaining material through a tared silver (t) Hacksaw blade membrane, dry and weigh to determine how (u) Ruby mortar and pestle much is left after the solvent extraction. Further process the sample to remove car- 3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation bonate or mount directly. Sample preparation begins with pre-preparation which may include chemical reduc- (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference tion of the matrix, heating the sample to Carbonate material is often found on fibers dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The and sometimes must be removed in order to end result is a sample which has been re- perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a duced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to portion of the material and place it in a test fit under the cover slip. Analyze different tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and decalcifying solution in the tube to react all the tile mastic should be analyzed separately the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation; as the mastic may contain asbestos while i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little the tile may not. more solution. If no more gas forms, the re- (a) Wet Samples action is complete. Filter the material out Samples with a high water content will not through a tared silver membrane, dry and give the proper dispersion colors and must be weigh to determine the weight lost. dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle 3.4. Sample Preparation in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dry- Samples must be prepared so that accurate ness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are determination can be made of the asbestos not submitted to the lab in glass must be re- type and amount present. The following moved and placed in glass vials or aluminum steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a weighing pans before placing them in the low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow): drying oven. (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard, (b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muffle or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip, Furnace the grain size must be reduced. Place a small amount between two slides and grind the These may include samples with tar as a material between them or grind a small matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other or- amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The ganic that can be reduced by heating. Re- choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby, move the sample from the vial and weigh in or diamond mortar depends on the hardness a balance to determine the weight of the sub- of the material. Impact damage can alter the mitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle asbestos mineral if too much mechanical furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvi- shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely ous organic material has been removed. Re- destroy the observable crystallinity of asbes- trieve, cool and weigh again to determine tos and should not be used). For some sam- the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary ples, a portion of material can be shaved off to determine the asbestos content of the sub- with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grind- mitted sample, because the analyst will be er or hack saw blade. looking at a reduced sample. The preparation tools should either be dis- NOTE: Heating above 600 °C will cause the posable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous sample to undergo a structural change scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the which, given sufficient time, will convert the washing. Rinse the implements with copious

552

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00552 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free This is useful to identify asbestos in severely environment. inhomogeneous samples. (2) If the sample is powder or has been re- When it is determined that amphiboles duced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. may be present, repeat the above process Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tis- using the appropriate high-dispersion oils sue and write the identification on the paint- until an identification is made or all six as- ed or frosted end. Place two drops of index of bestos minerals have been ruled out. Note refraction medium n=1.550 on the slide. (The that percent determination must be done in medium n=1.550 is chosen because it is the the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of tend to disappear in their matching medi- a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into ums. the droplet of refraction medium on the slide to moisten it. Then dip the probe into the 3.5. Analytical procedure powder sample. Transfer what sticks on the probe to the slide. The material on the end of NOTE: This method presumes some knowl- the probe should have a diameter of about 3 edge of mineralogy and optical petrography. mm for a good mount. If the material is very The analysis consists of three parts: The fine, less sample may be appropriate. For determination of whether there is asbestos non-powder samples such as fiber mats, for- present, what type is present and the deter- ceps should be used to transfer a small mination of how much is present. The gen- amount of material to the slide. Stir the ma- eral flow of the analysis is: terial in the medium on the slide, spreading (1) Gross examination. it out and making the preparation as uni- (2) Examination under polarized light on form as possible. Place a cover-slip on the the stereo microscope. preparation by gently lowering onto the (3) Examination by phase-polar illumina- slide and allowing it to fall ‘‘trapdoor’’ fash- tion on the compound phase microscope. ion on the preparation to push out any bubbles. Press gently on the cover slip to even (4) Determination of species by dispersion out the distribution of particulate on the stain. Examination by Becke line analysis slide. If there is insufficient mounting oil on may also be used; however, this is usually the slide, one or two drops may be placed more cumbersome for asbestos determina- near the edge of the coverslip on the slide. tion. Capillary action will draw the necessary (5) Difficult samples may need to be ana- amount of liquid into the preparation. Re- lyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from move excess oil with the point of a labora- those techniques combined with light mi- tory wiper. croscopy for a definitive identification. Treat at least two different areas of each Identification of a particle as asbestos re- phase in this fashion. Choose representative quires that it be asbestiform. Description of areas of the sample. It may be useful to se- particles should follow the suggestion of lect particular areas or fibers for analysis. Campbell. (Figure 1)

553

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00553 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

For the purpose of regulation, the mineral ily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very must be one of the six minerals covered and long compared with their widths. The fibers must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large have a very high tensile strength as dem- specimen samples of asbestos generally have onstrated by bending without breaking. As- the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are eas- bestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily

554

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00554 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

parted, show longitudinal fine structure and venience. Examine with the polarizing stereo may be tufted at the ends showing ‘‘bundle microscope. Estimate the percentage of as- of sticks’’ morphology. In the microscope bestos based on the amount of birefringent some of these properties may not be observ- fiber present. able. Amphiboles do not always show stri- (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar ations along their length even when they are microscopes at magnifications of 160 and asbestos. Neither will they always show tuft- 400×. Note the morphology of the fibers. ing. They generally do not show a curved na- Long, thin, very straight fibers with little ture except for very long fibers. Asbestos and curvature are indicative of fibers from the asbestiform minerals are usually character- amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are ized in groups by extremely high aspect ra- usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate tios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar analysis is useful for characterizing popu- microscope under conditions of crossed lations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller individual fibers of intermediate to short as- than 1.0 µm in thickness must be identified pect ratio. Observation of many fibers is by inference to the presence of larger, identi- often necessary to determine whether a sam- fiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fi- ple consists of ‘‘cleavage fragments’’ or of as- bers are visible, electron microscopy should bestos fibers. be performed. At this point, only a tentative Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos identification can be made. Full identifica- minerals are easily distinguishable from true tion must be made with dispersion micros- asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage copy. Details of the tests are included in the fragments usually have larger diameters appendices. than 1 µm. Internal structure of particles (4) Once fibers have been determined to be larger than this usually shows them to have present, they must be identified. Adjust the no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, microscope for dispersion mode and observe cleavage fragments of the monoclinic the fibers. The microscope has a rotating amphiboles show inclined extinction under stage, one polarizing element, and a system crossed polars with no compensator. Asbes- for generating dark-field dispersion micros- tos fibers usually show extinction at zero de- copy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align grees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. a fiber with its length parallel to the polar- Morphologically, the larger cleavage frag- izer and note the color of the Becke lines. ments are obvious by their blunt or stepped Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they perpendicular to the polarizer and note the tend to be acicular rather than filiform. color. Repeat this process for every fiber or Where the particles are less than 1 µm in fiber bundle examined. The colors must be diameter and have an aspect ratio greater consistent with the colors generated by than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that standard asbestos reference materials for a the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if positive identification. In n=1.550, there is any question whether the fibers are amphiboles will generally show a yellow to cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber Care must be taken when analyzing by indices of refraction are higher than the liq- electron microscopy because the inter- uid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the col- ferences are different from those in light mi- ors are yellow, prepare further slides as croscopy and may structurally be very simi- above in the suggested matching liquids list- lar to asbestos. The classic interference is ed below: between anthophyllite and biopyribole or intermediate fiber. Use the same morpho- Type of asbestos Index of refraction logical clues for electron microscopy as are used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril split- Chrysotile ...... n=1.550. Amosite ...... n=1.670 r 1.680. ting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, Crocidolite ...... n=1.690. curvature, etc. Anthophyllite ...... n=1.605 nd 1.620. (1) Gross examination: Tremolite ...... n=1.605 and 1.620. Examine the sample, preferably in the Actinolite ...... n=1.620. glass vial. Determine the presence of any obvious fibrous component. Estimate a per- Where more than one liquid is suggested, centage based on previous experience and the first is preferred; however, in some cases current observation. Determine whether any this liquid will not give good dispersion pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the color. Take care to avoid interferences in the number of phases present. This step may be other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n=1.620 will carried out or augmented by observation at give the same colors as tremolite. In n=1.605 6 to 40× under a stereo microscope. wollastonite will appear yellow in all direc- (2) After performing any necessary pre- tions. Wollastonite may be determined under preparation, prepare slides of each phase as crossed polars as it will change from blue to described above. Two preparations of the yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by same phase in the same index medium can be tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals made side-by-side on the same glass for con- will not change in this way.

555

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00555 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Determination of the angle of extinction Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines may, when present, aid in the determination that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbes- of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbestos. tos fibers usually have 0° extinction or am- The reported result is: biguous extinction, while cleavage fragments × have more definite extinction. R = (Microvisual result in percent) (Frac- × Continue analysis until both preparations tion remaining after step 2) (Fraction re- have been examined and all present species maining of original sample after step 1) × × of asbestos are identified. If there are no fi- R = (5) (.30) (.60)=0.9% bers present, or there is less than 0.1% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos present, end the analysis with the minimum present. For samples where asbestos was number of slides (2). identified, but is less than 1.0%, report ‘‘As- (5) Some fibers have a coating on them bestos present, less than 1.0%.’’ There must which makes dispersion microscopy very dif- have been at least two observed fibers or ficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be electron microscopy may be performed in reported as present. For samples where as- those cases. Determine the percentage by bestos was not seen, report as ‘‘None De- light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to tected.’’ overestimate the actual percentage present. (6) Percentage determination is an esti- Auxiliary Information mate of occluded area, tempered by gross ob- Because of the subjective nature of asbes- servation. Gross observation information is tos analysis, certain concepts and procedures used to make sure that the high magnifica- need to be discussed in more depth. This in- tion microscopy does not greatly over- or formation will help the analyst understand underestimate the amount of fiber present. why some of the procedures are carried out This part of the analysis requires a great the way they are. deal of experience. Satisfactory models for asbestos content analysis have not yet been 4.1. Light developed, although some models based on metallurgical grain-size determination have Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels found some utility. Estimation is more eas- from its source in packets called quanta. It ily handled in situations where the grain is instructive to consider light as a plane sizes visible at about 160× are about the same wave. The light has a direction of travel. and the sample is relatively homogeneous. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpen- View all of the area under the cover slip to dicular to each other, are two vector compo- make the percentage determination. View nents. One is the magnetic vector and the the fields while moving the stage, paying at- other is the electric vector. We shall only be tention to the clumps of material. These are concerned with the electric vector. In this not usually the best areas to perform disper- description, the interaction of the vector and sion microscopy because of the interference the mineral will describe all the observable from other materials. But, they are the areas phenomena. From a light source such a mi- most likely to represent the accurate per- croscope illuminator, light travels in all dif- centage in the sample. Small amounts of as- ferent direction from the filament. bestos require slower scanning and more fre- In any given direction away from the fila- quent analysis of individual fields. ment, the electric vector is perpendicular to Report the area occluded by asbestos as the direction of travel of a light ray. While the concentration. This estimate does not perpendicular, its orientation is random generally take into consideration the dif- about the travel axis. If the electric vectors ference in density of the different species from all the light rays were lined up by pass- present in the sample. For most samples this ing the light through a filter that would only is adequate. Simulation studies with similar let light rays with electric vectors oriented materials must be carried out to apply in one direction pass, the light would then be microvisual estimation for that purpose and POLARIZED. is beyond the scope of this procedure. Polarized light interacts with matter in (7) Where successive concentrations have the direction of the electric vector. This is been made by chemical or physical means, the polarization direction. Using this prop- the amount reported is the percentage of the erty it is possible to use polarized light to material in the ‘‘as submitted’’ or original probe different materials and identify them state. The percentage determined by micros- by how they interact with light. copy is multiplied by the fractions remain- The speed of light in a vacuum is a con- ing after pre-preparation steps to give the stant at about 2.99×108 m/s. When light trav- percentage in the original sample. For exam- els in different materials such as air, water, ple: minerals or oil, it does not travel at this Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C speed. It travels slower. This slowing is a for 1 h. function of both the material through which Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains the light is traveling and the wavelength or after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. frequency of the light. In general, the more

556

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00556 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

dense the material, the slower the light trav- tion to fiber length is used to aid in the iden- els. Also, generally, the higher the fre- tification of asbestos. quency, the slower the light will travel. The ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to 4.3. Polarized Light Technique that in a material is called the index of re- Polarized light microscopy as described in fraction (n). It is usually measured at 589 nm this section uses the phase-polar microscope (the sodium D line). If white light (light containing all the visible wavelengths) travels described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast through a material, rays of longer wave- microscope is fitted with two polarizing ele- lengths will travel faster than those of short- ments, one below and one above the sample. er wavelengths, this separation is called dis- The polarizers have their polarization direc- persion. Dispersion is used as an identifier of tions at right angles to each other. Depend- materials as described in Section 4.6. ing on the tests performed, there may be a compensator between these two polarizing 4.2. Material Properties elements. A compensator is a piece of min- Materials are either amorphous or crys- eral with known properties that ‘‘com- talline. The difference between these two de- pensates’’ for some deficiency in the optical scriptions depends on the positions of the train. Light emerging from a polarizing ele- atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous ma- ment has its electric vector pointing in the terials are randomly arranged with no long polarization direction of the element. The range order. An example of an amorphous light will not be subsequently transmitted material is glass. The atoms in crystalline through a second element set at a right materials, on the other hand, are in regular angle to the first element. Unless the light is arrays and have long range order. Most of altered as it passes from one element to the the atoms can be found in highly predictable other, there is no transmission of light. locations. Examples of crystalline material are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. 4.4. Angle of Extinction It is beyond the scope of this method to de- Crystals which have different crystal regu- scribe the different types of crystalline materials that can be found, or the full descrip- larity in two or three main directions are tion of the classes into which they can fall. said to be anisotropic. They have a different However, some general crystallography is index of refraction in each of the main direc- provided below to give a foundation to the tions. When such a crystal is inserted be- procedures described. tween the crossed polars, the field of view is With the exception of anthophyllite, all no longer dark but shows the crystal in the asbestos minerals belong to the color. The color depends on the properties of monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the the crystal. The light acts as if it travels basic repeating unit of the crystal and for through the crystal along the optical axes. If monoclinic crystals can be described as hav- a crystal optical axis were lined up along one ing three unequal sides, two 90° angles and of the polarizing directions (either the polar- one angle not equal to 90°. The orthorhombic izer or the analyzer) the light would appear group, of which anthophyllite is a member to travel only in that direction, and it would has three unequal sides and three 90° angles. blink out or go dark. The difference in de- The unequal sides are a consequence of the grees between the fiber direction and the complexity of fitting the different atoms angle at which it blinks out is called the into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in angle of extinction. When this angle can be a regular array, that array is not symmet- measured, it is useful in identifying the min- rical in all directions. There is long range eral. The procedure for measuring the angle order in the three major directions of the of extinction is to first identify the polariza- crystal. However, the order is different in tion direction in the microscope. A commer- each of the three directions. This has the ef- cial alignment slide can be used to establish fect that the index of refraction is different the polarization directions or use in each of the three directions. Using polar- anthophyllite or another suitable mineral. ized light, we can investigate the index of re- This mineral has a zero degree angle of ex- fraction in each of the directions and iden- tinction and will go dark to extinction as it tify the mineral or material under investigation. The indices α, β, and γ are used to iden- aligns with the polarization directions. When tify the lowest, middle, and highest index of a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinc- refraction respectively. The x direction, as- tion, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule sociated with α is called the fast axis. Con- with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as versely, the z direction is associated with γ to the direction of polarization in the field of and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has α view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece along the fiber length making it ‘‘length- in this position so it will not shift. fast’’. The remainder of the asbestos min- After the polarization direction has been erals have the γ axis along the fiber length. identified in the field of view, move the par- They are called ‘‘length-slow’’. This orienta- ticle of interest to the center of the field of

557

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00557 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

view and align it with the polarization direc- thickness and birefringence. Such a compen- tion. For fibers, align the fiber along this di- sator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer direction. Note the angular reading of the ro- rection, provides a retardation of 530 nm of tating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances the stage until the fiber goes dark or ‘‘blinks the red color and gives the background a out’’. Again note the reading of the stage. characteristic red to red-magenta color. If The difference in the first reading and the this ‘‘full-wave’’ compensator is in place second is an angle of extinction. when the asbestos preparation is inserted The angle measured may vary as the ori- into the light train, the colors seen on the fi- entation of the fiber changes about its long bers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbes- axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually re- tos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a port the maximum angle of extinction. As- fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same bestos forming minerals, when they exhibit direction as the fast axis of the gypsum an angle of extinction, usually do show an plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction angle of extinction close to the reported is retarded by both the asbestos and the gyp- maximum, or as appropriate depending on sum. This results in a higher retardation the substitution chemistry. than would be present for either of the two minerals. The color seen is a second order 4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the When the optical axes of a crystal are not rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber lined up along one of the polarizing direc- is now aligned with the fast direction of the tions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is part of the light travels along one axis and aligned with the slow direction of the gyp- part travels along the other visible axis. This sum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast is characteristic of birefringent materials. direction of the gypsum, and slower in the The color depends on the difference of the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will two visible indices of refraction and the vibrate slower in the slow direction of the thickness of the crystal. The maximum dif- gypsum and faster in the fast direction of ference available is the difference between the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtrac- the α and the γ axes. This maximum dif- tive and the color seen is a first order yel- ference is usually tabulated as the low. As long as the fiber thickness does not birefringence of the crystal. add appreciably to the color, the same basic For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the colors will be seen for all asbestos types ex- polarization directions in order to maximize cept crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors the contribution to each of the optical axes. will be weaker, may be in the opposite direc- The colors seen are called retardation colors. tions, and will be altered by the blue absorp- They arise from the recombination of light tion color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of which has traveled through the two separate other materials will give the same colors as directions of the crystal. One of the rays is asbestos, and therefore, this test is not defin- retarded behind the other since the light in itive for asbestos. The test is useful in dis- that direction travels slower. On recombina- criminating against fiberglass or other tion, some of the colors which make up amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fi- white light are enhanced by constructive in- bers. Certain synthetic fibers will show re- terference and some are suppressed by de- tardation colors different than asbestos; structive interference. The result is a color however, there are some forms of poly- dependent on the difference between the in- ethylene and aramid which will show mor- dices and the thickness of the crystal. The phology and retardation colors similar to as- proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations bestos minerals. This test must be supple- are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three mented with a positive identification test items, retardation, thickness and when birefringent fibers are present which birefringence are related by the following re- can not be excluded by morphology. This lationship: test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers R=t(nγ nα) ¥ less than 1 µ m in diameter. For positive con- R=retardation, t=crystal thickness in µ m, firmation TEM or SEM should be used if no and larger bundles or fibers are visible. nα,γ=indices of refraction. Examination of the equation for asbestos 4.6. Dispersion Staining minerals reveals that the visible colors for almost all common asbestos minerals and Dispersion microscopy or dispersion stain- fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The ing is the method of choice for the identi- eye is relatively poor at discriminating dif- fication of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke ferent shades of gray. It is very good at dis- line analysis is used by some laboratories criminating different colors. In order to and yields the same results as does disper- compensate for the low retardation, a com- sion staining for asbestos and can be used in pensator is added to the light train between lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion stain- the polarization elements. The compensator ing is performed on the same platform as the used for this test is a gypsum plate of known phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and

558

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00558 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

compensator removed. One polarizing ele- sistent with standard asbestos minerals in ment remains to define the direction of the the correct direction for a positive identi- light so that the different indices of refrac- fication of asbestos. If only one of the colors tion of the fibers may be separately deter- is correct while the other is not, the identi- mined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field fication is not positive. If the colors in both technique when used for asbestos. Particles directions are bluish-white, the analyst has are imaged with scattered light. Light which chosen a matching index oil which is higher is unscattered is blocked from reaching the than the correct matching oil, e.g. the ana- eye either by the back field image mask in a lyst has used n=1.620 where chrysotile is McCrone objective or a back field image present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.) mask in the phase condenser. The most con- should be used to prepare another specimen. venient method is to use the rotating phase If the color in both directions is yellow- condenser to move an oversized phase ring white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates into place. The ideal size for this ring is for that the index of the oil is lower than the the central disk to be just larger than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in objective entry aperture as viewed in the n=1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Select back focal plane. The larger the disk, the the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and prepare less scattered light reaches the eye. This will another slide. Continue in this fashion until have the effect of diminishing the intensity a positive identification of all asbestos spe- of dispersion color and will shift the actual cies present has been made or all possible as- color seen. The colors seen vary even on mi- bestos species have been ruled out by nega- croscopes from the same manufacturer. This tive results in this test. Certain plant fibers is due to the different bands of wavelength can have similar dispersion colors as asbes- exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask tos. Take care to note and evaluate the mor- may either reside in the condenser or in the phology of the fibers or remove the plant fi- objective back focal plane. It is imperative bers in pre-preparation. Coating material on that the analyst determine by experimen- the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may de- tation with asbestos standards what the ap- stroy the dispersion color. Usually, there propriate colors should be for each asbestos will be some outcropping of fiber which will type. The colors depend also on the tempera- show the colors sufficient for identification. ture of the preparation and the exact chem- When this is not the case, treat the sample istry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight as described in Section 3.3. and then perform differences from the standards should be al- dispersion staining. Some samples will yield lowed. This is not a serious problem for com- to Becke line analysis if they are coated or mercial asbestos uses. This technique is used electron microscopy can be used for identi- for identification of the indices of refraction fication. for fibers by recognition of color. There is no direct numerical readout of the index of re- 5. References fraction. Correlation of color to actual index 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, OSHA meth- of refraction is possible by referral to pub- od ID160, Revised November 1992. lished conversion tables. This is not nec- 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana’s Textbook of Min- essary for the analysis of asbestos. Recogni- eralogy; Fourth Ed.; John Wiley and Son, tion of appropriate colors along with the New York, 1950, p. vii. proper morphology are deemed sufficient to 5.3. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and pp. 3,20. XRD may be required to provide additional 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. Annual Re- information in order to identify other types port for 1898, H.M. Statistical Office, Lon- of asbestos. don, p. 170 (1898). Make a preparation in the suspected 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n=1.550 for Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to pp. 26,30. determine whether the fibers are 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate birefringent or not. Take note of the mor- Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties, phological character. Wavy fibers are indic- United States Department of the Interior, ative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, Bureau of Mines, Information Circular frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole as- 8751, 1977. bestos. This can aid in the selection of the 5.7. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations, 29 appropriate matching oil. The microscope is CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.58. set up and the polarization direction is noted 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the po- Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision, larization direction. Note the color. This is Federal Register, Vol. 55, No. 224, 20 November the color parallel to the polarizer. Then ro- 1990, p. 48410. tate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Defini- the polarization direction is across the fiber. tions, Description, Modes of Formation, Phys- This is the perpendicular position. Again ical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk note the color. Both colors must be con- to the Mining Community, Nation Bureau of

559

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00559 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1102 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

Standards Special Publication, Wash- § 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; in- ington, DC, 1977. terpretation of term. 5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Occ Medicine, 1981, 23,(8),548–550. struction work under this section are iden- 5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1002 of this U.S. Department of Health Education and chapter. Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Disease Control, National Institute for Oc- cupational Safety and Health, HSM–72– § 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4- 10267. Nitrobiphenyl, etc.). 5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, United struction work under this section are iden- States Department of the Interior, Bureau tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this of Mines, Information Circular 8367, 1979. chapter. 5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver, private communication, July 1987. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] 5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J., Rock Forming Minerals, Longman, Thetford, § 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine. UK, 1974. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; Third Ed. struction work under this section are iden- McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other chapter. Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in Mineralogy, Vol 9A, Michigan, 1982, pp 1– [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] 102. 5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- § 1926.1105 [Reserved] croscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, ACS Symposium Series, No. 120, § 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether. Analytical Techniques in Occupational NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Health Chemistry, 1979. struction work under this section are iden- 5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. chapter. 5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Re- search Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] 1987. 5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refrac- § 1926.1107 3,3’-Dichlorobenzidiene tive Indices from Dispersion Staining (and its salts). Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other struction work under this section are iden- Health Related Silicates, ASTM Technical Publication 834, ASTM, Philadelphia 1982. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. 5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. (Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of As- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] bestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, pp. 93– 101, SME–AIME, 1981. § 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether. 5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbes- tos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Hazards, pp. 45–67 Wiley, 1979. struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this [51 FR 22756, June 20, 1986, as amended at 52 chapter. FR 17755, May 12, 1987; 53 FR 27346, July 20, 1988; 55 FR 3732, Feb. 5, 1990; 57 FR 24331, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] June 8, 1992. Redesignated at 59 FR 41131, Aug. 10, 1994 and further amended at 59 FR § 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine. 41144, 41150, 41152, and 41153, Aug. 10, 1994; 60 FR 33345, June 28, 1995; 60 FR 33995, June 29, NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 1995; 60 FR 36044, July 13, 1995; 60 FR 50412, struction work under this section are iden- 50413, Sept. 29, 1995; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 61 FR 43458, Aug. 23, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, chapter. 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 63 FR 35138, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] June 29, 1998]

560

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00560 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

§ 1926.1110 Benzidine. § 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this tical to those set forth at § 1910.1018 of this chapter. chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]

§ 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. § 1926.1127 Cadmium. (a) Scope. This standard applies to all NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- occupational exposures to cadmium tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this and cadmium compounds, in all forms, chapter. in all construction work where an employee may potentially be exposed to [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] cadmium. Construction work is defined as work involving construction, alter- § 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. ation and/or repair, including but not NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- limited to the following: struction work under this section are iden- (1) Wrecking, demolition or salvage tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this of structures where cadmium or mate- chapter. rials containing cadmium are present; [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] (2) Use of cadmium containing-paints and cutting, brazing, burning, grinding § 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. or welding on surfaces that were painted with cadmium-containing paints; NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- (3) Construction, alteration, repair, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this maintenance, or renovation of struc- chapter. tures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain cadmium, or materials [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] containing cadmium; § 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. (4) Cadmium welding; cutting and welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- or welding with cadmium alloys; struction work under this section are iden- (5) Installation of products con- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this taining cadmium; chapter. (6) Electrical grounding with cad- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] mium welding, or electrical work using cadmium-coated conduit; § 1926.1115 4- (7) Maintaining or retrofitting cad- Dimethylaminoazobenzene. mium-coated equipment; NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (8) Cadmium contamination/emer- struction work under this section are iden- gency cleanup; and tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this (9) Transportation, disposal, storage, chapter. or containment of cadmium or mate- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] rials containing cadmium on the site or location at which construction ac- § 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. tivities are performed. (b) Definitions. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Action level (AL) is defined as an air- struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this borne concentration of cadmium of 2.5 chapter. micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 µ g/m3), calculated as an 8-hour time- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] weighted average (TWA). Assistant Secretary means the Assist- § 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- struction work under this section are iden- ment of Labor, or designee. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1017 of this Authorized person means any person chapter. authorized by the employer and re- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] quired by work duties to be present in

561

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00561 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

regulated areas or any person author- tion or determination that emerges ized by the OSH Act or regulations from that process. issued under it to be in regulated areas. High-efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] Competent person, in accordance with filter means a filter capable of trapping 29 CFR 1926.32(f), means a person des- and retaining at least 99.97 percent of ignated by the employer to act on the mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 microm- employer’s behalf who is capable of eters in diameter. identifying existing and potential cad- Regulated area means an area demar- mium hazards in the workplace and the cated by the employer where an em- proper methods to control them in ployee’s exposure to airborne con- order to protect workers, and has the centrations of cadmium exceeds, or can authority necessary to take prompt reasonably be expected to exceed the corrective measures to eliminate or permissible exposure limit (PEL). control such hazards. The duties of a This section means this cadmium competent person include at least the standard. following: Determining prior to the (c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). performance of work whether cadmium The employer shall assure that no em- is present in the workplace; estab- ployee is exposed to an airborne con- lishing, where necessary, regulated centration of cadmium in excess of five areas and assuring that access to and micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 µ from those areas is limited to author- g/m3), calculated as an eight-hour ized employees; assuring the adequacy time-weighted average exposure of any employee exposure monitoring (TWA). required by this standard; assuring (d) Exposure Monitoring—(1) General. that all employees exposed to air cad- (i) Prior to the performance of any con- mium levels above the PEL wear ap- struction work where employees may propriate personal protective equip- be potentially exposed to cadmium, the ment and are trained in the use of ap- employer shall establish the applica- propriate methods of exposure control; bility of this standard by determining assuring that proper hygiene facilities whether cadmium is present in the are provided and that workers are workplace and whether there is the trained to use those facilities; and as- possibility that employee exposures suring that the engineering controls will be at or above the action level. required by this standard are imple- The employer shall designate a com- mented, maintained in proper oper- petent person who shall make this de- ating condition, and functioning prop- termination. Investigation and mate- erly. rial testing techniques shall be used, as Director means the Director of the appropriate, in the determination. In- National Institute for Occupational vestigation shall include a review of Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- relevant plans, past reports, material partment of Health and Human Serv- safety data sheets, and other available ices, or designee. records, and consultations with the Employee exposure and similar lan- property owner and discussions with guage referring to the air cadmium appropriate individuals and agencies. level to which an employee is exposed (ii) Where cadmium has been deter- means the exposure to airborne cad- mined to be present in the workplace, mium that would occur if the employee and it has been determined that there were not using respiratory protective is a possibility the employee’s exposure equipment. will be at or above the action level, the Final medical determination is the competent person shall identify em- written medical opinion of the employ- ployees potentially exposed to cad- ee’s health status by the examining mium at or above the action level. physician under paragraphs (l)(3)-(12) of (iii) Determinations of employee ex- this section or, if multiple physician posure shall be made from breathing- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this zone air samples that reflect the mon- section or the alternative physician de- itored employee’s regular, daily 8-hour termination under paragraph (l)(14) of TWA exposure to cadmium. this section is invoked, it is the final, (iv) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall written medical finding, recommenda- be determined for each employee on

562

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00562 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

the basis of one or more personal (3) Monitoring frequency (periodic mon- breathing-zone air samples reflecting itoring). (i) If the initial monitoring or full shift exposure on each shift, for periodic monitoring reveals employee each job classification, in each work exposures to be at or above the action area. Where several employees perform level, the employer shall monitor at a the same job tasks, in the same job frequency and pattern needed to assure classification, on the same shift, in the that the monitoring results reflect same work area, and the length, dura- with reasonable accuracy the employ- tion, and level of cadmium exposures ee’s typical exposure levels, given the are similar, an employer may sample a variability in the tasks performed, representative fraction of the employ- work practices, and environmental ees instead of all employees in order to conditions on the job site, and to as- meet this requirement. In representa- sure the adequacy of respiratory selective sampling, the employer shall sam- tion and the effectiveness of engineer- ple the employee(s) expected to have ing and work practice controls. the highest cadmium exposures. (ii) If the initial monitoring or the (2) Specific. (i) Initial monitoring. Ex- periodic monitoring indicates that em- cept as provided for in paragraph ployee exposures are below the action (d)(2)(iii) of this section, where a deter- level and that result is confirmed by mination conducted under paragraph the results of another monitoring (d)(1)(i) of this section shows the possi- taken at least seven days later, the em- bility of employee exposure to cad- ployer may discontinue the monitoring mium at or above the action level, the for those employees whose exposures employer shall conduct exposure moni- are represented by such monitoring. toring as soon as practicable that is (4) Additional monitoring. The em- representative of the exposure for each ployer also shall institute the exposure employee in the workplace who is or monitoring required under paragraphs may be exposed to cadmium at or (d)(2)(i) and (d)(3) of this section when- above the action level. ever there has been a change in the raw (ii) In addition, if the employee peri- materials, equipment, personnel, work odically performs tasks that may ex- practices, or finished products that pose the employee to a higher concentration of airborne cadmium, the may result in additional employees employee shall be monitored while per- being exposed to cadmium at or above forming those tasks. the action level or in employees al- (iii) Where the employer has objec- ready exposed to cadmium at or above tive data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2) the action level being exposed above of this section, demonstrating that em- the PEL, or whenever the employer or ployee exposure to cadmium will not competent person has any reason to exceed airborne concentrations at or suspect that any other change might above the action level under the ex- result in such further exposure. pected conditions of processing, use, or (5) Employee notification of monitoring handling, the employer may rely upon results. (i) No later than five working such data instead of implementing ini- days after the receipt of the results of tial monitoring. any monitoring performed under this (iv) Where a determination con- section, the employer shall notify each ducted under paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2) affected employee individually in writ- of this section is made that a poten- ing of the results. In addition, within tially exposed employee is not exposed the same time period, the employer to airborne concentrations of cadmium shall post the results of the exposure at or above the action level, the em- monitoring in an appropriate location ployer shall make a written record of that is accessible to all affected em- such determination. The record shall ployees. include at least the monitoring data (ii) Wherever monitoring results indi- developed under paragraphs (d)(2)(i)– cate that employee exposure exceeds (iii) of this section, where applicable, the PEL, the employer shall include in and shall also include the date of deter- the written notice a statement that mination, and the name and social se- the PEL has been exceeded and a de- curity number of each employee. scription of the corrective action being

563

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00563 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

taken by the employer to reduce em- (B) The employee is not exposed ployee exposure to or below the PEL. above the PEL on 30 or more days per (6) Accuracy of measurement. The em- year (12 consecutive months). ployer shall use a method of moni- (iii) Wherever engineering and work toring and analysis that has an accu- practice controls are not sufficient to racy of not less than plus or minus 25 reduce employee exposure to or below percent (± 25%), with a confidence level the PEL, the employer nonetheless of 95 percent, for airborne concentra- shall implement such controls to re- tions of cadmium at or above the ac- duce exposures to the lowest levels tion level and the permissible exposure achievable. The employer shall supple- limit. ment such controls with respiratory (e) Regulated areas—(1) Establishment. protection that complies with the re- The employer shall establish a regu- quirements of paragraph (g) of this sec- lated area wherever an employee’s ex- tion and the PEL. posure to airborne concentrations of cadmium is, or can reasonably be ex- (iv) The employer shall not use em- pected to be in excess of the permis- ployee rotation as a method of compli- sible exposure limit (PEL). ance. (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall (2) Specific operations—(i) Abrasive be demarcated from the rest of the blasting. Abrasive blasting on cadmium workplace in any manner that ade- or cadmium-containing materials shall quately establishes and alerts employ- be conducted in a manner that will pro- ees of the boundaries of the regulated vide adequate protection. area, including employees who are or (ii) Heating cadmium and cadmium- may be incidentally in the regulated containing materials. Welding, cutting, areas, and that protects persons out- and other forms of heating of cadmium side the area from exposure to airborne or cadmium-containing materials shall concentrations of cadmium in excess of be conducted in accordance with the the PEL. requirements of 29 CFR 1926.353 and 29 (3) Access. Access to regulated areas CFR 1926.354, where applicable. shall be limited to authorized persons. (3) Prohibitions. (i) High speed abra- (4) Provision of respirators. Each per- sive disc saws and similar abrasive son entering a regulated area shall be power equipment shall not be used for supplied with and required to use a res- work on cadmium or cadmium-con- pirator, selected in accordance with taining materials unless they are paragraph (g)(2) of this section. equipped with appropriate engineering (5) Prohibited activities. The employer controls to minimize emissions, if the shall assure that employees do not eat, exposure levels are above the PEL. drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or (ii) Materials containing cadmium apply cosmetics in regulated areas, or shall not be applied by spray methods, carry the products associated with any if exposures are above the PEL, unless of these activities into regulated areas employees are protected with supplied- or store such products in those areas. air respirators with full facepiece, (f) Methods of compliance—(1) Compli- hood, helmet, suit, operated in positive ance hierarchy. (i) Except as specified in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, the pressure mode and measures are insti- employer shall implement engineering tuted to limit overspray and prevent and work practice controls to reduce contamination of adjacent areas. and maintain employee exposure to (4) Mechanical ventilation. (i) When cadmium at or below the PEL, except ventilation is used to control exposure, to the extent that the employer can measurements that demonstrate the ef- demonstrate that such controls are not fectiveness of the system in controlling feasible. exposure, such as capture velocity, (ii) The requirement to implement duct velocity, or static pressure shall engineering controls to achieve the be made as necessary to maintain its PEL does not apply where the em- effectiveness. ployer demonstrates the following: (ii) Measurements of the system’s ef- (A) The employee is only intermit- fectiveness in controlling exposure tently exposed; and shall be made as necessary within five

564

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00564 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

working days of any change in produc- practice controls when employee expo- tion, process, or control that might re- sures exceed the PEL. sult in a significant increase in em- (ii) Maintenance and repair activi- ployee exposure to cadmium. ties, and brief or intermittent work op- (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from erations, for which employee exposures exhaust ventilation is recirculated into exceed the PEL and engineering and the workplace, the system shall have a work-practice controls are not feasible high efficiency filter and be monitored or are not required. to assure effectiveness. (iii) Work operations in the regulated (iv) Procedures shall be developed areas specified in paragraph (e) of this and implemented to minimize em- section. ployee exposure to cadmium when (iv) Work operations for which the maintenance of ventilation systems employer has implemented all feasible and changing of filters is being con- engineering and work-practice conducted. trols, and such controls are not suffi- (5) Compliance program. (i) Where em- cient to reduce employee exposures to ployee exposure to cadmium exceeds or below the PEL. the PEL and the employer is required (v) Work operations for which an em- under paragraph (f)(1) of this section to ployee, who is exposed to cadmium at implement controls to comply with the or above the action level, requests a PEL, prior to the commencement of respirator. the job the employer shall establish (vi) Work operations for which engi- and implement a written compliance neering controls are not required by program to reduce employee exposure paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section to re- to or below the PEL. To the extent duce employee exposures that exceed that engineering and work practice the PEL. controls cannot reduce exposures to or (vii) Emergencies. below the PEL, the employer shall in- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- clude in the written compliance pro- ployer must implement a respiratory gram the use of appropriate respiratory protection program in accordance with protection to achieve compliance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except the PEL. (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m). (ii) Written compliance programs (ii) If an employee exhibits breathing shall be reviewed and updated as often difficulty during fit testing or res- and as promptly as necessary to reflect pirator use, the employer must provide significant changes in the employer’s the employee with a medical examina- compliance status or significant tion in accordance with paragraph changes in the lowest air cadmium (l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if level that is technologically feasible. the employee can use a respirator (iii) A competent person shall review while performing the required duties. the comprehensive compliance pro- (iii) No employee must use a res- gram initially and after each change. pirator when, based on their most re- (iv) Written compliance programs cent medical examination, the exam- shall be provided upon request for ex- ining physician determines that the amination and copying to the Assist- employee will be unable to continue to ant Secretary, the Director, affected function normally while using a res- employees, and designated employee pirator. If the physician determines the representatives. employee must be limited in, or re- (g) Respirator protection. (1) General. moved from, their current job because For employees who use respirators re- of the employee’s inability to use a res- quired by this section, the employer pirator, the job limitation or removal must provide respirators that comply must be conducted in accordance with with the requirements of this para- paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this sec- graph. Respirators must be used dur- tion. ing: (3) Respirator selection. (i) The em- (i) Periods necessary to install or im- ployer must select the appropriate res- plement feasible engineering and work- pirator from Table 1 of this section.

565

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00565 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

TABLE 1ÐRESPIRATORY PROTECTION FOR CADMIUM

Airborne concentration or condition of use a Required respirator type b

10 X or less ...... A half mask, air-purifying equipped with a HEPA c filter.d 25 X or less ...... A powered air-purifying respirator (``PAPR'') with a loose-fitting hood or helmet equipped with a HEPA filter, or a supplied-air respirator with a loose-fitting hood or helmet facepiece operated in the continuous flow mode. 50 X or less ...... A full facepiece air-purifying respirator equipped with a HEPA filter, or a powered air-purifying respirator with a tight-fitting half mask equipped with a HEPA filter, or a supplied-air respirator with a tight- fitting half mask operated in the continuous flow mode. 250 X or less ...... A powered air-purifying respirator with a tight fitting full facepiece equipped with a HEPA filter, or a supplied-air respirator with a tight- fitting full facepiece operated in the continuous flow mode. 1000 X or less ...... A supplied air respirator with half mask or full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive pressure mode. >1000 X or unknown concentrations ...... A self-contained breathing apparatus with a full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive pressure mode, or a supplied-air respirator with a full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive pressure mode and equipped with an auxiliary escape type self-contained breathing apparatus operated in the pressure demand mode. Firefighting ...... A self-contained breathing apparatus with full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive pressure mode. a Concentrations expressed as multiple of the PEL. b Respirators assigned for higher environmental concentrations may be used at lower exposure levels. Quantitative fit testing is required for all tight-fitting air purifying respirators where airborne concentration of cadmium exceeds 10 times the TWA PEL (10 X 5 ug/m(3) = 50 ug/m(3)). A full facepiece respirator is required when eye irritation is experienced. c HEPA means High-efficiency Particulate Air. d Fit testing, qualitative or quantitative, is required. SOURCE: Respiratory Decision Logic, NIOSH, 1987.

(ii) The employer must provide a contamination of the employee and the powered air-purifying respirator in- employee’s garments. Protective work stead of a negative-pressure respirator clothing and equipment includes, but is when an employee entitled to a res- not limited to: pirator chooses to use this type of res- (i) Coveralls or similar full-body pirator and such a respirator will pro- work clothing; vide adequate protection to the em- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots ployee. or foot coverings; and (h) Emergency situations. The em- (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or ployer shall develop and implement a other appropriate protective equip- written plan for dealing with emer- ment that complies with 29 CFR gency situations involving substantial 1910.133. releases of airborne cadmium. The plan (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- shall include provisions for the use of ployer shall assure that employees re- appropriate respirators and personal protective equipment. In addition, em- move all protective clothing and equip- ployees not essential to correcting the ment contaminated with cadmium at emergency situation shall be restricted the completion of the work shift and do from the area and normal operations so only in change rooms provided in ac- halted in that area until the emer- cordance with paragraph (j)(1) of this gency is abated. section. (i) Protective work clothing and equip- (ii) The employer shall assure that no ment—(1) Provision and use. If an em- employee takes cadmium-contami- ployee is exposed to airborne cadmium nated protective clothing or equipment above the PEL or where skin or eye ir- from the workplace, except for employ- ritation is associated with cadmium ees authorized to do so for purposes of exposure at any level, the employer laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or shall provide at no cost to the em- disposing of cadmium-contaminated ployee, and assure that the employee protective clothing and equipment at uses, appropriate protective work an appropriate location or facility clothing and equipment that prevents away from the workplace.

566

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00566 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(iii) The employer shall assure that lease of airborne cadmium in excess of contaminated protective clothing and the PEL. equipment, when removed for laun- (j) Hygiene areas and practices. (1) dering, cleaning, maintenance, or dis- General. For employees whose airborne posal, is placed and stored in sealed, exposure to cadmium is above the PEL, impermeable bags or other closed, im- the employer shall provide clean permeable containers that are designed change rooms, handwashing facilities, to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. showers, and lunchroom facilities that (iv) The employer shall assure that comply with 29 CFR 1926.51. containers of contaminated protective (2) Change rooms. The employer shall clothing and equipment that are to be assure that change rooms are equipped taken out of the change rooms or the with separate storage facilities for workplace for laundering, cleaning, street clothes and for protective cloth- maintenance or disposal shall bear la- ing and equipment, which are designed bels in accordance with paragraph to prevent dispersion of cadmium and (m)(2) of this section. contamination of the employee’s street (3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal. clothes. (i) The employer shall provide the pro- (3) Showers and handwashing facilities. tective clothing and equipment re- (i) The employer shall assure that em- quired by paragraph (i)(1) of this sec- ployees whose airborne exposure to tion in a clean and dry condition as cadmium is above the PEL shower dur- often as necessary to maintain its ef- ing the end of the work shift. fectiveness, but in any event at least (ii) The employer shall assure that weekly. The employer is responsible employees who are exposed to cad- for cleaning and laundering the protec- mium above the PEL wash their hands tive clothing and equipment required and faces prior to eating, drinking, by this paragraph to maintain its effec- smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or applying cosmetics. tiveness and is also responsible for dis- (4) Lunchroom facilities. (i) The em- posing of such clothing and equipment. ployer shall assure that the lunchroom (ii) The employer also is responsible facilities are readily accessible to em- for repairing or replacing required pro- ployees, that tables for eating are tective clothing and equipment as maintained free of cadmium, and that needed to maintain its effectiveness. no employee in a lunchroom facility is When rips or tears are detected while exposed at any time to cadmium at or an employee is working they shall be above a concentration of 2.5 µg/m3. immediately mended, or the worksuit (ii) The employer shall assure that shall be immediately replaced. employees do not enter lunchroom fa- (iii) The employer shall prohibit the cilities with protective work clothing removal of cadmium from protective or equipment unless surface cadmium clothing and equipment by blowing, has been removed from the clothing shaking, or any other means that dis- and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or perses cadmium into the air. some other method that removes cad- (iv) The employer shall assure that mium dust without dispersing it. any laundering of contaminated cloth- (k) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces ing or cleaning of contaminated equip- shall be maintained as free as prac- ment in the workplace is done in a ticable of accumulations of cadmium. manner that prevents the release of (2) All spills and sudden releases of airborne cadmium in excess of the per- material containing cadmium shall be missible exposure limit prescribed in cleaned up as soon as possible. paragraph (c) of this section. (3) Surfaces contaminated with cad- (v) The employer shall inform any mium shall, wherever possible, be person who launders or cleans protec- cleaned by vacuuming or other meth- tive clothing or equipment contami- ods that minimize the likelihood of nated with cadmium of the potentially cadmium becoming airborne. harmful effects of exposure to cad- (4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equip- mium, and that the clothing and equipment or equally effective filtration ment should be laundered or cleaned in methods shall be used for vacuuming. a manner to effectively prevent the re- The equipment shall be used and

567

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00567 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

emptied in a manner that minimizes (B) Previously exposed— The employer the reentry of cadmium into the work- shall also institute a medical surveil- place. lance program for all employees who (5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, might previously have been exposed to and brushing may be used only where cadmium by the employer prior to the vacuuming or other methods that min- effective date of this standard in tasks imize the likelihood of cadmium be- specified under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(A) of coming airborne have been tried and this section, unless the employer dem- found not to be effective. onstrates that the employee did not in (6) Compressed air shall not be used the years prior to the effective date of to remove cadmium from any surface this section work in those tasks for the unless the compressed air is used in employer with exposure to cadmium conjunction with a ventilation system for an aggregated total of more than 12 designed to capture the dust cloud cre- months. ated by the compressed air. (ii) To determine an employee’s fit- (7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con- ness for using a respirator, the em- tainers, personal protective equipment, ployer shall provide the limited med- and clothing contaminated with cad- ical examination specified in paragraph mium and consigned for disposal shall (l)(6) of this section. be collected and disposed of in sealed (iii) The employer shall assure that impermeable bags or other closed, im- all medical examinations and proce- permeable containers. These bags and dures required by this section are per- containers shall be labeled in accord- formed by or under the supervision of a ance with paragraph (m)(2) of this sec- licensed physician, who has read and is tion. familiar with the health effects section (l) Medical Surveillance—(1) General— of appendix A to this section, the regu- (i) Scope—(A) Currently exposed—The latory text of this section, the protocol employer shall institute a medical sur- for sample handling and lab selection veillance program for all employees in appendix F to this section, and the who are or may be exposed at or above questionnaire of appendix D to this sec- the action level and all employees who tion. perform the following tasks, operations (iv) The employer shall provide the or jobs: Electrical grounding with cad- medical surveillance required by this mium welding; cutting, brazing, burn- section, including multiple physician ing, grinding or welding on surfaces review under paragraph (l)(13) of this that were painted with cadmium-con- section without cost to employees, and taining paints; electrical work using at a time and place that is reasonable cadmium-coated conduit; use of cad- and convenient to employees. mium containing paints; cutting and (v) The employer shall assure that welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing the collecting and handling of biologi- or welding with cadmium alloys; fusing cal samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), of reinforced steel by cadmium weld- cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 ing; maintaining or retrofitting cad- microglobulin in urine (β2-M) taken mium-coated equipment; and, wrecking from employees under this section is and demolition where cadmium is done in a manner that assures their represent. A medical surveillance pro- liability and that analysis of biological gram will not be required if the em- samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), ployer demonstrates that the em- cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 ployee: microglobulin in urine (β2-M) taken (1) Is not currently exposed by the from employees under this section is employer to airborne concentrations of performed in laboratories with dem- cadmium at or above the action level onstrated proficiency to perform the on 30 or more days per year (twelve particular analysis. (See appendix F to consecutive months); and, this section.) (2) Is not currently exposed by the (2) Initial Examination. (i) For em- employer in those tasks on 30 or more ployees covered by medical surveil- days per year (twelve consecutive lance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this months). section, the employer shall provide an

568

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00568 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

initial medical examination. The ex- (B) For employees who are subject to amination shall be provided to those medical surveillance under paragraph employees within 30 days after initial (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section because of assignment to a job with exposure to prior but not current exposure, the em- cadmium or no later than 90 days after ployer shall provide biological moni- the effective date of this section, toring for CdU, B2-M, and CdB one year whichever date is later. after the initial biological monitoring (ii) The initial medical examination and then the employer shall comply shall include: with the requirements of paragraph (A) A detailed medical and work his- (l)(4)(vi) of this section. tory, with emphasis on: Past, present, (ii) For all employees who are subject and anticipated future exposure to cad- to medical surveillance under para- mium; any history of renal, cardio- graph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the re- vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, sults of the initial biological moni- reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal toring tests show the level of CdU to system dysfunction; current usage of exceed 3 µ g/g Cr, the level of β2-M to be medication with potential nephrotoxic in excess of 300 µ g/g Cr, or the level of side-effects; and smoking history and CdB to be in excess of 5 µ g/lwb, the em- current status; and ployer shall: (B) Biological monitoring that in- (A) Within two weeks after receipt of cludes the following tests: biological monitoring results, reassess (1) Cadmium in urine (CdU), stand- the employee’s occupational exposure ardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr); to cadmium as follows: (2) Beta-2 microglobulin in urine (β2- (1) Reassess the employee’s work M), standardized to grams of creatinine practices and personal hygiene; (g/Cr), with pH specified, as described (2) Reevaluate the employee’s res- in Appendix F to this section; and pirator use, if any, and the respirator (3) Cadmium in blood (CdB), stand- program; ardized to liters of whole blood (lwb). (3) Review the hygiene facilities; (iii) Recent Examination: An initial (4) Reevaluate the maintenance and examination is not required to be pro- effectiveness of the relevant engineer- vided if adequate records show that the ing controls; employee has been examined in accord- (5) Assess the employee’s smoking ance with the requirements of para- history and status; graph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within (B) Within 30 days after the exposure the past 12 months. In that case, such reassessment, specified in paragraph records shall be maintained as part of (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reason- the employee’s medical record and the able steps to correct any deficiencies prior exam shall be treated as if it were found in the reassessment that may be an initial examination for the purposes responsible for the employee’s excess of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this sec- exposure to cadmium; and, tion. (C) Within 90 days after receipt of bi- (3) Actions triggered by initial biological ological monitoring results, provide a monitoring. (i) If the results of the bio- full medical examination to the em- logical monitoring tests in the initial ployee in accordance with the require- examination show the employee’s CdU ments of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this sec- level to be at or below 3µg/g Cr, β2-M tion. After completing the medical ex- level to be at or below 300µg/g Cr and amination, the examining physician CdB level to be at or below 5µg/lwb, shall determine in a written medical then: opinion whether to medically remove (A) For employees who are subject to the employee. If the physician deter- medical surveillance under paragraphs mines that medical removal is not nec- (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of essary, then until the employee’s CdU current or anticipated exposure to cad- level falls to or below 3 µ g/g Cr, β2-M mium, the employer shall provide the level falls to or below 300 µ g/g Cr and minimum level of periodic medical sur- CdB level falls to or below 5 µ g/lwb, veillance in accordance with the re- the employer shall: quirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this (1) Provide biological monitoring in section; and accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B)

569

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00569 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

of this section on a semiannual basis; (C) Provide semiannual medical ex- and aminations in accordance with para- (2) Provide annual medical examina- graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. tions in accordance with paragraph (iv) For all employees to whom med- (l)(4)(ii) of this section. ical surveillance is provided, beginning (iii) For all employees who are sub- on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of para- ject to medical surveillance under graph (l)(3)(iii) of this section, when- paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the ever the results of initial biological results of the initial biological moni- monitoring tests show the employee’s toring tests show the level of CdU to be CdU level to be in excess of 7 µ g/g Cr, µ in excess of 15 g/g Cr, or the level of or β2-M level to be in excess of 750 µ g/ CdB to be in excess of 15 µ g/lwb, or the g Cr, or CdB level to be in excess of 10 level of β2-M to be in excess of 1,500 µ g/ µ g/lwb, the employer shall comply g Cr, the employer shall comply with with the requirements of paragraphs the requirements of paragraphs (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within 90 days after receipt of biological moni- 90 days after receipt of biological monitoring results, the employer shall pro- toring results, the employer shall provide a full medical examination to the vide a full medical examination to the employee in accordance with the re- employee in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. After completing the med- this section. After completing the medical examination, the examining physi- ical examination, the examining physician shall determine in a written med- cian shall determine in a written medical opinion whether to medically re- ical opinion whether to medically remove the employee. However, if the move the employee. However, if the initial biological monitoring results initial biological monitoring results and the biological monitoring results and the biological monitoring results obtained during the medical examina- obtained during the medical examination both show that: CdU exceeds 7 µ g/ tion both show that: CdU exceeds 15 µ g Cr; or CdB exceeds 10 µ g/lwb; or β -M g/g Cr; or CdB exceeds 15 µ g/lwb; or β - 2 2 exceeds 750 µ g/g Cr, and in addition M exceeds 1500 µ g/g Cr, and in addition CdU exceeds 3 µ g/g Cr or CdB exceeds CdU exceeds 3 µ g/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 µ g/liter of whole blood, then the phy- 5 µ g/liter of whole blood, then the physician shall medically remove the em- sician shall medically remove the employee from exposure to cadmium at or ployee from exposure to cadmium at or above the action level. If the second set above the action level. If the second set of biological monitoring results ob- of biological monitoring results obtained during the medical examination tained during the medical examination does not show that a mandatory re- does not show that a mandatory removal trigger level has been exceeded, moval trigger level has been exceeded, then the employee is not required to be then the employee is not required to be removed by the mandatory provisions removed by the mandatory provisions of this paragraph. If the employee is of this paragraph. If the employee is not required to be removed by the man- not required to be removed by the mandatory provisions of this paragraph or datory provisions of this paragraph or by the physician’s determination, then by the physician’s determination, then until the employee’s CdU level falls to until the employee’s CdU level falls to µ β or below 3 µ g/g Cr, β2-M level falls to or below 3 g/g Cr, 2-M level falls to or below 300 µ g/g Cr and CdB level falls or below 300 µ g/g Cr and CdB level falls to or below 5 µ g/lwb, the employer to or below 5 µ g/lwb, the employer shall: shall: (A) Periodically reassess the employ- (A) Periodically reassess the employee’s occupational exposure to cad- ee’s occupational exposure to cadmium; mium; (B) Provide biological monitoring in (B) Provide biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section on a quarterly basis; and of this section on a quarterly basis; and

570

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00570 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(C) Provide semiannual medical ex- (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the aminations in accordance with para- analysis required under paragraph graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including (4) Periodic medical surveillance. (i) the determination of albumin, glucose, For each employee who is covered by and total and low molecular weight medical surveillance under paragraph proteins; (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of (H) For males over 40 years old, pros- current or anticipated exposure to cad- tate palpation, or other at least as ef- mium, the employer shall provide at fective diagnostic test(s), and; least the minimum level of periodic (I) Any additional tests or procedures medical surveillance, which consists of deemed appropriate by the examining periodic medical examinations and physician. periodic biological monitoring. A periodic medical examination shall be pro- (iii) Periodic biological monitoring vided within one year after the initial shall be provided in accordance with examination required by paragraph paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. (l)(2) of this section and thereafter at (iv) If the results of periodic biologi- least biennially. Biological sampling cal monitoring or the results of bio- shall be provided at least annually ei- logical monitoring performed as part of ther as part of a periodic medical ex- the periodic medical examination show amination or separately as periodic bi- the level of the employee’s CdU, β2–M, ological monitoring. or CdB to be in excess of the levels (ii) The periodic medical examination specified in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iii) shall include: of this section; or beginning on Janu- (A) A detailed medical and work his- ary 1, 1999, in excess of the levels speci- tory, or update thereof, with emphasis fied in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iv), the on: Past, present and anticipated fu- employer shall take the appropriate ture exposure to cadmium; smoking actions specified in paragraphs history and current status; reproduc- (l)(3)(ii)–(iv) of this section, respective history; current use of medica- tively. tions with potential nephrotoxic side- (v) For previously exposed employees effects; any history of renal, cardio- under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this sec- vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, tion: and/or musculo-skeletal system dys- (A) If the employee’s levels of CdU function; and as part of the medical did not exceed 3 µg/g Cr, CdB did not and work history, for employees who exceed 5 µg/lwb, and β –M did not ex- wear respirators, questions 3–11 and 25– 2 ceed 300 µg/g Cr in the initial biological 32 in appendix D to this section; monitoring tests, and if the results of (B) A complete physical examination the followup biological monitoring re- with emphasis on: blood pressure, the quired by paragraph (l)(3)(i)(B) of this respiratory system, and the urinary section one year after the initial exam- system; (C) A 14 inch by 17 inch, or a reason- ination confirm the previous results, ably standard sized posterior-anterior the employer may discontinue all peri- chest X-ray (after the initial X-ray, the odic medical surveillance for that em- frequency of chest X-rays is to be de- ployee. termined by the examining physician); (B) If the initial biological moni- β (D) Pulmonary function tests, includ- toring results for CdU, CdB, or 2–M ing forced vital capacity (FVC) and were in excess of the levels specified in forced expiratory volume at 1 second paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, but (FEV1); subsequent biological monitoring re- (E) Biological monitoring, as results required by paragraph (l)(3)(ii)– quired in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this (iv) of this section show that the em- section; ployee’s CdU levels no longer exceed 3 (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the µg/g Cr, CdB levels no longer exceed 5 analysis required under paragraph µg/lwb, and β2–M levels no longer ex- (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including ceed 300 µg/g Cr, the employer shall blood urea nitrogen, complete blood provide biological monitoring for CdU, count, and serum creatinine; CdB, and β2–M one year after these 571

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00571 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

most recent biological monitoring re- may be responsible for the employee’s sults. If the results of the followup bio- excess exposure to cadmium. logical monitoring specified in this (B) Provide semi-annual medical re- paragraph, confirm the previous re- examinations to evaluate the abnormal sults, the employer may discontinue clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity all periodic medical surveillance for until the results are normal or the em- that employee. ployee is medically removed; and (C) However, if the results of the fol- (C) Where the results of tests for low-up tests specified in paragraph total proteins in urine are abnormal, (l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indi- provide a more detailed medical eval- cate that the level of the employee’s uation of the toxic effects of cadmium CdU, β2–M, or CdB exceeds these same on the employee’s renal system. levels, the employer is required to pro- (6) Examination for respirator use. (i) vide annual medical examinations in To determine an employee’s fitness for accordance with the provisions of para- respirator use, the employer shall pro- graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section until the vide a medical examination that in- results of biological monitoring are cludes the elements specified in para- consistently below these levels or the graph (l)(6)(i)(A)–(D) of this section. examining physician determines in a This examination shall be provided written medical opinion that further prior to the employee’s being assigned medical surveillance is not required to to a job that requires the use of a res- protect the employee’s health. pirator or no later than 90 days after (vi) A routine, biennial medical ex- this section goes into effect, whichever amination is not required to be pro- date is later, to any employee without vided in accordance with paragraphs a medical examination within the pre- (l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if ade- ceding 12 months that satisfies the re- quate medical records show that the quirements of this paragraph. employee has been examined in accord- (A) A detailed medical and work his- ance with the requirements of paratory, or update thereof, with emphasis graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within on: past exposure to cadmium; smoking the past 12 months. In that case, such history and current status; any history records shall be maintained by the em- of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, ployer as part of the employee’s med- hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal ical record, and the next routine, peri- system dysfunction; a description of odic medical examination shall be the job for which the respirator is re- made available to the employee within quired; and questions 3–11 and 25–32 in two years of the previous examination. appendix D; (5) Actions triggered by medical exami- (B) A blood pressure test; nations. (i) If the results of a medical (C) Biological monitoring of the em- examination carried out in accordance ployee’s levels of CdU, CdB and β2–M in with this section indicate any labora- accordance with the requirements of tory or clinical finding consistent with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, cadmium toxicity that does not require unless such results already have been employer action under paragraphs obtained within the twelve months; (l)(2), (3) or (4) of this section, the em- and ployer shall take the following steps (D) Any other test or precedure that and continue to take them until the the examining physician deems appro- physician determines that they are no priate. longer necessary. (ii) After reviewing all the informa- (A) Periodically reassess: The em- tion obtained from the medical exam- ployee’s work practices and personal ination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i) hygiene; the employee’s respirator use, of this section, the physician shall de- if any; the employee’s smoking history termine whether the employee is fit to and status; the respiratory protection wear a respirator. program; the hygiene facilities; the (iii) Whenever an employee has ex- maintenance and effectiveness of the hibited difficulty in breathing during a relevant engineering controls; and take respirator fit test or during use of a all reasonable steps to correct the defi- respirator, the employer, as soon as ciencies found in the reassessment that possible, shall provide the employee

572

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00572 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

with a periodic medical examination in (ii) A description of the affected em- accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of ployee’s former, current, and antici- this section to determine the employ- pated duties as they relate to the em- ee’s fitness to wear a respirator. ployee’s occupational exposure to cad- (iv) Where the results of the exam- mium; ination required under paragraphs (iii) The employee’s former, current, (l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are and anticipated future levels of occupa- abnormal, medical limitation or prohi- tional exposure to cadmium; bition of respirator use shall be consid- (iv) A description of any personal ered. If the employee is allowed to wear protective equipment, including res- a respirator, the employee’s ability to pirators, used or to be used by the em- continue to do so shall be periodically ployee, including when and for how evaluated by a physician. long the employee has used that equip- (7) Emergency Examinations. (i) In ad- ment; and dition to the medical surveillance re- (v) Relevant results of previous bio- quired in paragraphs (l)(2)–(6) of this logical monitoring and medical exami- section, the employer shall provide a nations. medical examination as soon as pos- (10) Physician’s written medical opin- sible to any employee who may have ion. (i) The employer shall promptly been acutely exposed to cadmium be- obtain a written, signed medical opin- cause of an emergency. ion from the examining physician for (ii) The examination shall include each medical examination performed the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii), on each employee. This written opinion of this section, with emphasis on the shall contain: respiratory system, other organ systems considered appropriate by the ex- (A) The physician’s diagnosis for the amining physician, and symptoms of employee; acute overexposure, as identified in (B) The physician’s opinion as to paragraphs II(B)(1)–(2) and IV of appen- whether the employee has any detected dix A of this section. medical condition(s) that would place (8) Termination of employment exam- the employee at increased risk of ma- ination. (i) At termination of employ- terial impairment to health from fur- ment, the employer shall provide a ther exposure to cadmium, including medical examination in accordance any indications of potential cadmium with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section, toxicity; including a chest X-ray where nec- (C) The results of any biological or essary, to any employee to whom at other testing or related evaluations any prior time the employer was re- that directly assess the employee’s ab- quired to provide medical surveillance sorption of cadmium; under paragraph (l)(1)(i) or (l)(7) of this (D) Any recommended removal from, section. However, if the last examina- or limitation on the activities or duties tion satisfied the requirements of para- of the employee or on the employee’s graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section and was use of personal protective equipment, less than six months prior to the date such as respirators; of termination, no further examination (E) A statement that the physician is required unless otherwise specified has clearly and carefully explained to in paragraph (l)(3) or (l)(5) of this sec- the employee the results of the medical tion; examination, including all biological (ii) In addition, if the employer has monitoring results and any medical discontinued all periodic medical sur- conditions related to cadmium expo- veillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of sure that require further evaluation or this section, no termination of employ- treatment, and any limitation on the ment medical examination is required. employee’s diet or use of medications. (9) Information provided to the physi- (ii) The employer shall promptly ob- cian. The employer shall provide the tain a copy of the results of any bio- following information to the exam- logical monitoring provided by an em- ining physician: ployer to an employee independently of (i) A copy of this standard and appen- a medical examination under para- dices; graphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section,

573

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00573 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

and, in lieu of a written medical opin- necessary to protect the employee’s ion, an explanation sheet explaining health. those results. (ii) Where an employee is found unfit (iii) The employer shall instruct the to wear a respirator under paragraph physician not to reveal orally or in the (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer written medical opinion given to the shall remove the employee from work employer specific findings or diagnoses where exposure to cadmium is above unrelated to occupational exposure to the PEL. cadmium. (iii) Where removal is based upon any (11) Medical Removal Protection reason other than the employee’s in- (MRP)—(i) General. (A) The employer ability to wear a respirator, the em- shall temporarily remove an employee ployer shall remove the employee from from work where there is excess expo- work where exposure to cadmium is at sure to cadmium on each occasion that or above the action level. medical removal is required under (iv) Except as specified in paragraph paragraphs (l)(3), (l)(4), or (l)(6) of this (l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee section and on each occasion that a who was removed because his/her level physician determines in a written med- of CdU, CdB and/or β2–M exceeded the ical opinion that the employee should trigger levels in paragraph (l)(3) or be removed from such exposure. The (l)(4) of this section may be returned to physician’s determination may be work with exposure to cadmium at or based on biological monitoring results, above the action level until the em- inability to wear a respirator, evidence ployee’s levels of CdU fall to or below 3 of illness, other signs or symptoms of µ g/g Cr, CdB fall to or below 5 µ g/lwb, cadmium-related dysfunction or dis- and β2–M fall to or below 300 µ g/g Cr. ease, or any other reason deemed medi- (v) However, when in the examining cally sufficient by the physician. physician’s opinion continued exposure (B) The employer shall medically re- to cadmium will not pose an increased move an employee in accordance with risk to the employee’s health and there paragraph (l)(11) of this section regard- are special circumstances that make less of whether at the time of removal continued medical removal an inappro- a job is available into which the re- priate remedy, the physician shall fully moved employee may be transferred. discuss these matters with the em- (C) Whenever an employee is medi- ployee, and then in a written deter- cally removed under paragraph (l)(11) mination may return a worker to his/ of this section, the employer shall her former job status despite what transfer the removed employee to a job would otherwise be unacceptably high where the exposure to cadmium is biological monitoring results. There- within the permissible levels specified after and until such time as the em- in that paragraph as soon as one be- ployee’s biological monitoring results comes available. have decreased to levels where he/she (D) For any employee who is medi- could have been returned to his/her cally removed under the provisions of former job status, the returned em- paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the ployee shall continue medical surveil- employer shall provide follow-up med- lance as if he/she were still on medical ical examinations semi-annually until, removal. Until such time, the employee in a written medical opinion, the ex- is no longer subject to mandatory med- amining physician determines that ei- ical removal. Subsequent questions re- ther the employee may be returned to garding the employee’s medical re- his/her former job status or the em- moval shall be decided solely by a final ployee must be permanently removed medical determination. from excess cadmium exposure. (vi) Where an employer, although not (E) The employer may not return an required by this section to do so, re- employee who has been medically removes an employee from exposure to moved for any reason to his/her former cadmium or otherwise places limita- job status until a physician determines tions on an employee due to the effects in a written medical opinion that con- of cadmium exposure on the employ- tinued medical removal is no longer ee’s medical condition, the employer

574

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00574 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

shall provide the same medical re- (A) Review any findings, determina- moval protection benefits to that em- tions, or recommendations of the ini- ployee under paragraph (l)(12) of this tial physician; and section as would have been provided (B) Conduct such examinations, con- had the removal been required under sultations, and laboratory tests as the paragraph (l)(11) of this section. second physician deems necessary to (12) Medical removal protection benefits. facilitate this review. (i) The employer shall provide medical (ii) The employer shall promptly no- removal protection benefits to an em- tify an employee of the right to seek a ployee for up to a maximum of 18 second medical opinion after each oc- months each time, and while the em- casion that an initial physician pro- ployee is temporarily medically re- vided by the employer conducts a med- moved under paragraph (l)(11) of this ical examination or consultation pur- section. suant to this section. The employer (ii) For purposes of this section, the may condition its participation in, and requirement that the employer provide payment for, multiple physician review medical removal protection benefits upon the employee doing the following means that the employer shall main- within fifteen (15) days after receipt of tain the total normal earnings, senior- this notice, or receipt of the initial ity, and all other employee rights and physician’s written opinion, whichever benefits of the removed employee, in- is later: cluding the employee’s right to his/her (A) Informing the employer that he former job status, as if the employee or she intends to seek a medical opin- had not been removed from the em- ion; and ployee’s job or otherwise medically (B) Initiating steps to make an ap- limited. pointment with a second physician. (iii) Where, after 18 months on med- (iii) If the findings, determinations, ical removal because of elevated bio- or recommendations of the second phy- logical monitoring results, the employ- sician differ from those of the initial ee’s monitoring results have not de- physician, then the employer and the clined to a low enough level to permit employee shall assure that efforts are the employee to be returned to his/her made for the two physicians to resolve former job status: any disagreement. (A) The employer shall make avail- (iv) If the two physicians have been able to the employee a medical exam- unable to quickly resolve their dis- ination pursuant to this section in agreement, then the employer and the order to obtain a final medical deter- employee, through their respective mination as to whether the employee physicians, shall designate a third phy- may be returned to his/her former job sician to: status or must be permanently re- (A) Review any findings, determina- moved from excess cadmium exposure; tions, or recommendations of the other and two physicians; and (B) The employer shall assure that (B) Conduct such examinations, con- the final medical determination indi- sultations, laboratory tests, and dis- cates whether the employee may be re- cussions with the other two physicians turned to his/her former job status and as the third physician deems necessary what steps, if any, should be taken to to resolve the disagreement among protect the employee’s health; them. (iv) The employer may condition the (v) The employer shall act consist- provision of medical removal protec- ently with the findings, determination benefits upon the employee’s par- tions, and recommendations of the ticipation in medical surveillance pro- third physician, unless the employer vided in accordance with this section. and the employee reach an agreement (13) Multiple physician review. (i) If that is consistent with the rec- the employer selects the initial physi- ommendations of at least one of the cian to conduct any medical examina- other two physicians. tion or consultation provided to an em- (14) Alternate physician determination. ployee under this section, the employee The employer and an employee or des- may designate a second physician to: ignated employee representative may

575

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00575 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

agree upon the use of any alternate DANGER, CADMIUM, CANCER HAZARD, form of physician determination in lieu CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DIS- of the multiple physician review pro- EASE, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY, vided by paragraph (l)(13) of this sec- RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA tion, so long as the alternative is expeditious and at least as protective of the (iii) The employer shall assure that employee. signs required by this paragraph are il- (15) Information the employer must pro- luminated, cleaned, and maintained as vide the employee. (i) The employer necessary so that the legend is readily shall provide a copy of the physician’s visible. written medical opinion to the exam- (3) Warning labels. (i) Shipping and ined employee within five working storage containers containing cad- days after receipt thereof. mium, cadmium compounds, or cad- (ii) The employer shall provide the mium contaminated clothing, equip- employee with a copy of the employment, waste, scrap, or debris shall bear ee’s biological monitoring results and appropriate warning labels, as specified an explanation sheet explaining the rein paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of this section. sults within five working days after re- (ii) The warning labels shall shall in- ceipt thereof. clude at least the following informa- (iii) Within 30 days after a request by tion: an employee, the employer shall provide the employee with the informa- DANGER, CONTAINS CADMIUM, CANCER tion the employer is required to pro- HAZARD, AVOID CREATING DUST, CAN vide the examining physician under CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE paragraph (l)(9) of this section. (iii) Where feasible, installed cad- (16) Reporting. In addition to other mium products shall have a visible medical events that are required to be label or other indication that cadmium reported on the OSHA Form No. 200, is present. the employer shall report any abnor- (4) mal condition or disorder caused by oc- Employee information and training. (i) The employer shall institute a cupational exposure to cadmium asso- training program for all employees who ciated with employment as specified in are potentially exposed to cadmium, Chapter (V)(E) of the Reporting Guide- assure employee participation in the lines for Occupational Injuries and Ill- program, and maintain a record of the nesses. contents of such program. (m) Communication of cadmium hazards to employees—(1) General. In com- (ii) Training shall be provided prior munications concerning cadmium haz- to or at the time of initial assignment ards, employers shall comply with the to a job involving potential exposure to requirements of OSHA’s Hazard Com- cadmium and at least annually there- munication Standard for the construc- after. tion industry, 29 CFR 1926.59, including (iii) The employer shall make the but not limited to the requirements training program understandable to concerning warning signs and labels, the employee and shall assure that material safety data sheets (MSDS), each employee is informed of the fol- and employee information and train- lowing: ing. In addition, employers shall com- (A) The health hazards associated ply with the following requirements: with cadmium exposure, with special (2) Warning signs. (i) Warning signs attention to the information incor- shall be provided and displayed in regu- porated in appendix A to this section; lated areas. In addition, warning signs (B) The quantity, location, manner of shall be posted at all approaches to use, release, and storage of cadmium in regulated areas so that an employee the workplace and the specific nature may read the signs and take necessary of operations that could result in expo- protective steps before entering the sure to cadmium, especially exposures area. above the PEL; (ii) Warning signs required by para- (C) The engineering controls and graph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall work practices associated with the em- bear the following information: ployee’s job assignment;

576

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00576 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(D) The measures employees can take including, where applicable, a descrip- to protect themselves from exposure to tion of how it was determined that the cadmium, including modification of employee’s monitoring result could be such habits as smoking and personal taken to represent other employee’s hygiene, and specific procedures the exposures; employer has implemented to protect (C) A description of the sampling and employees from exposure to cadmium analytical methods used and evidence such as appropriate work practices, of their accuracy; emergency procedures, and the provi- (D) The type of respiratory protec- sion of personal protective equipment; tive device, if any, worn by the mon- (E) The purpose, proper selection, fit- itored employee and by any other em- ting, proper use, and limitations of res- ployee whose exposure the monitoring pirators and protective clothing; result is intended to represent; (F) The purpose and a description of (E) A notation of any other condi- the medical surveillance program re- tions that might have affected the quired by paragraph (l) of this section; monitoring results. (G) The contents of this section and (F) Any exposure monitoring or ob- its appendices, and, jective data that were used and the lev- (H) The employee’s rights of access els. to records under § 1926.33(g) (1) and (2). (iii) The employer shall maintain (iv) Additional access to information this record for at least thirty (30) and training program and materials. years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of (A) The employer shall make a copy this part. of this section and its appendices read- (iv) The employer shall also provide a ily available to all affected employees copy of the results of an employee’s air and shall provide a copy without cost if monitoring prescribed in paragraph (d) requested. of this section to an industry trade as- (B) Upon request, the employer shall sociation and to the employee’s union, provide to the Assistant Secretary or if any, or, if either of such associations the Director all materials relating to or unions do not exist, to another com- the employee information and the parable organization that is competent training program. to maintain such records and is reason- (5) Multi-employer workplace. In a ably accessible to employers and em- multi-employer workplace, an employees in the industry. ployer who produces, uses, or stores (2) Objective data for exemption from re- cadmium in a manner that may expose quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For employees of other employers to cad- purposes of this section, objective data mium shall notify those employers of are information demonstrating that a the potential hazard in accordance particular product or material con- with paragraph (e) of the hazard com- taining cadmium or a specific process, munication standard for construction, operation, or activity involving cad- 29 CFR 1926.59. mium cannot release dust or fumes in (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure moni- concentrations at or above the action toring. (i) The employer shall establish level even under the worst-case release and keep an accurate record of all air conditions. Objective data can be ob- monitoring for cadmium in the work- tained from an industry-wide study or place. from laboratory product test results (ii) This record shall include at least from manufacturers of cadmium-con- the following information: taining products or materials. The data (A) The monitoring date, shift, dura- the employer uses from an industry- tion, air volume, and results in terms wide survey must be obtained under of an 8-hour TWA of each sample workplace conditions closely resem- taken, and if cadmium is not detected, bling the processes, types of material, the detection level; control methods, work practices and (B) The name, social security num- environmental conditions in the em- ber, and job classification of all employer’s current operations. ployees monitored and of all other em- (ii) The employer shall maintain the ployees whose exposures the moni- record for at least 30 years of the objec- toring result is intended to represent, tive data relied upon.

577

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00577 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- medical records required to be kept by ployer shall establish and maintain an paragraph (n)(3) of this section avail- accurate record for each employee cov- able for examination and copying to ered by medical surveillance under the subject employee, to designated paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section. representatives, to anyone having the (ii) The record shall include at least specific written consent of the subject the following information about the employee, and after the employee’s employee: death or incapacitation, to the employ- (A) Name, social security number, ee’s family members. and description of duties; (6) Transfer of records. Whenever an (B) A copy of the physician’s written employer ceases to do business and opinions and of the explanation sheets there is no successor employer or des- for biological monitoring results; ignated organization to receive and re- (C) A copy of the medical history, tain records for the prescribed period, and the results of any physical exam- the employer shall comply with the re- ination and all test results that are requirements concerning transfer of quired to be provided by this section, records set forth in § 1926.33 (h) of this including biological tests, X-rays, pul- part. monary function tests, etc., or that (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- have been obtained to further evaluate ployee observation. The employer shall any condition that might be related to provide affected employees or their cadmium exposure; designated representatives an oppor- (D) The employee’s medical symp- tunity to observe any monitoring of toms that might be related to exposure employee exposure to cadmium. to cadmium; and (2) Observation procedures. When ob- (E) A copy of the information pro- servation of monitoring requires entry vided to the physician as required by into an area where the use of protec- paragraph (l)(9) of this section. tive clothing or equipment is required, (iii) The employer shall assure that the employer shall provide the observer this record is maintained for the dura- with that clothing and equipment and tion of employment plus thirty (30) shall assure that the observer uses years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of such clothing and equipment and com- this part. plies with all other applicable safety (iv) At the employee’s request, the and health procedures. employer shall promptly provide a (p) Dates—(1) Effective date. This sec- copy of the employee’s medical record, tion shall become effective on Decem- or update as appropriate, to a medical ber 14, 1992. doctor or a union specified by the em- (2) Start-up dates. All obligations of ployee. this section commence on the effective (4) Training. The employer shall cer- date except as follows: tify that employees have been trained (i) Exposure monitoring. Except for by preparing a certification record small businesses (nineteen (19) or fewer which includes the identity of the per- employees), initial monitoring required son trained, the signature of the em- by paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall ployer or the person who conducted the be completed as soon as possible and in training, and the date the training was any event no later than 60 days after completed. The certification records the effective date of this standard. For shall be prepared at the completion of small businesses, initial monitoring retraining and shall be maintained on quired by paragraph (d)(2) of this sec- file for one (1) year beyond the date of tion shall be completed as soon as pos- training of that employee. sible and in any event no later than 120 (5) Availability. (i) Except as other- days after the effective date of this wise provided for in this section, access standard. to all records required to be main- (ii) The permissible exposure limit tained by paragraphs (n)(1)–(4) of this (PEL). Except for small businesses, as section shall be in accordance with the defined under paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this provisions of § 1926.33 of this part. section, the employer shall comply (ii) Within 15 days after a request, with the PEL established by paragraph the employer shall make an employee’s (c) of this section as soon as possible

578

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00578 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

and in any event no later than 90 days the effective date of this section. For after the effective date of this section. small businesses, the engineering con- For small businesses, the employer trols required by paragraph (f)(1) of shall comply with the PEL established this section shall be implemented as by paragraph (c) of this section as soon soon as possible and in any event no as possible and in any event no later later than 240 days after the effective than 150 days after the effective date of date of this section. Work practice con- this section. trols shall be implemented as soon as (iii) Regulated areas. Except for small possible. Work practice controls that businesses, as defined under paragraph are directly related to engineering con- (p)(2)(i) of this section, regulated areas trols to be implemented shall be imple- required to be established by paragraph mented as soon as possible after such (e) of this section shall be set up as engineering controls are implemented. soon as possible after the results of ex- (vii) Hygiene and lunchroom facilities. posure monitoring are known and in Except for small businesses, as defined any event no later than 90 days after under paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this sec- the effective date of this section. For tion, handwashing facilities, showers, small businesses, regulated areas re- change rooms and eating facilities required to be established by paragraph quired by paragraph (j) of this section, (e) of this section shall be set up as whether permanent or temporary, shall soon as possible after the results of ex- be provided as soon as possible and in posure monitoring are known and in any event no later than 60 days after any event no later than 150 days after the effective date of this section. For the effective date of this section. small businesses, handwashing facili- (iv) Respiratory protection. Except for ties, showers, change rooms and eating small businesses, as defined under facilities required by paragraph (j) of paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section, res- this section, whether permanent or piratory protection required by para- temporary, shall be provided as soon as graph (g) of this section shall be pro- possible and in any event no later than vided as soon as possible and in any 120 days after the effective date of this event no later than 90 days after the ef- section. fective date of this section. For small businesses, respiratory protection re- (viii) Employee information and train- quired by paragraph (g) of this section ing. Except for small businesses, as de- shall be provided as soon as possible fined under paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this and in any event no later than 150 days section, employee information and after the effective date of this section. training required by paragraph (m)(4) (v) Compliance program. Except for of this section shall be aprovided as small businesses, as defined under soon as possible and in any event no paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section, writ- later than 90 days after the effective ten compliance programs required by date of this standard. For small busi- paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be nesses, employee information and completed and available as soon as pos- training required by paragraph (m)(4) sible and in any event no later than 90 of this section shall be provided as soon days after the effective date of this sec- as possible and in any event no later tion. For small businesses, written than 180 days after the effective date of compliance programs required by para- this standard. graph (f)(2) of this section shall be (ix) Medical surveillance. Except for completed and available as soon as pos- small businesses, as defined under sible and in any event no later than 180 paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section, ini- days after the effective date of this sec- tial medical examinations required by tion. paragraph (l) of this section shall be (vi) Methods of compliance. Except for provided as soon as possible and in any small businesses, as defined under event no later than 90 days after the ef- paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section, the fective date of this standard. For small engineering controls required by para- businesses, initial medical examina- graph (f)(1) of this section shall be im- tions required by paragraph (l) of this plemented as soon as possible and in section shall be provided as soon as any event no later than 120 days after possible and in any event no later than

579

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00579 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T § 1926.1128 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

180 days after the effective date of this identical to those set forth in Appendix F to standard. § 1910.1027 of this chapter. (q) Appendices. (1) Appendix C to this [57 FR 42452, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57 section is incorporated as part of this FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21787, Apr. 23, section, and compliance with its con- 1993. Redesignated and amended at 59 FR 215, tents is mandatory. Jan. 3, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31433, 31434, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, (2) Except where portions of appen- 1998] dices A, B, D, E, and F to this section are expressly incorporated in require- § 1926.1128 Benzene. ments of this section, these appendices NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- are purely informational and are not struction work under this section are iden- intended to create any additional obli- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1028 of this gations not otherwise imposed or to de- chapter. tract from any existing obligations. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]

APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE § 1926.1129 Coke oven emissions. SAFETY DATA SHEET NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- struction work under this Appendix A are tical to those set forth at § 1910.1029 of this identical to those set forth in Appendix A to chapter. § 1910.1027 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]

APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE § 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3- TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR CADMIUM chloropropane.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this Appendix B are struction work under this section are iden- identical to those set forth in Appendix B to tical to those set forth at § 1910.1044 of this chapter. § 1910.1027 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1127 [RESERVED] § 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile. APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1127—OCCUPA- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- TIONAL HEALTH HISTORY INTERVIEW struction work under this section are iden- WITH REFERENCE TO CADMIUM EXPO- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1045 of this SURE chapter.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] struction work under this Appendix D are identical to those set forth in Appendix D to § 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. § 1910.1027 of this chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1127—CADMIUM IN tical to those set forth at § 1910.1047 of this WORKPLACE ATMOSPHERES chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this Appendix E are identical to those set forth in Appendix E to § 1926.1148 Formaldehyde. § 1910.1027 of this chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1127—NONMANDA- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1048 of this TORY PROTOCOL FOR BIOLOGICAL MONI- chapter. TORING [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- § 1926.1152 Methylene chloride. struction work under this Appendix F are NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction employment under this section are

580

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00580 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, App. A

identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1910.1052. STANDARDSÐContinued [62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997] New § no. and/or para. Source § no. and/or APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNA- para. TIONS FOR GENERAL INDUSTRY [Do.] (m) (1) ...... [Do.] (d)(1) STANDARDS INCORPORATED INTO [Do.] (2) ...... [Do.] (d)(2) BODY OF CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS [Do.] (3) ...... [Do.] (d)(7)(vii) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (d)(7)(viii) New Designations for General Industry [Do.] (n) ...... [Do.] (b)(5)(iii) Standards Incorporated Into Body of Con- [Do.] (o) ...... [Do.] (d)(10) struction Standards 1926.156 ...... 1910.160 1926.157 ...... 1910.162 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926.158 ...... 1910.164 STANDARDS 1926.159 ...... 1910.165 1926.200(c)(3) ...... 1910.145(d)(4) New § no. and/or para. Source § no. and/or 1926.250(c) ...... 1910.176(c) para. [Do.] (d) (1)Ð(4) ...... 1910.30(a) (1), (2), (4) and (5) 1926.20 (c) ...... 1910.5 (a) 1926.251(a)(5) ...... 1910.184(a) [Do.] (d) ...... [Do.] (c) [Do.] (a)(6) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (b)(6)(i)Ð(ii) ...... [Do.] (e)(3)(i)Ð(ii) 1926.32(g) ...... 1910.12(b) [Do.] (c)(6)Ð(7) ...... [Do.] (c) (2)Ð(3) 1926.33 ...... 1910.20 [Do.] (c)(8) ...... [Do.] (c)(5) 1926.34 (a) ...... 1910.36(b)(4) [Do.] (c)(9) ...... [Do.] (c)(7) [Do.] (b) ...... 1910.37 (q)(1) [Do.] (c)(10)Ð(12) ...... [Do.] (c)(10)Ð(12) [Do.] (c) ...... [Do.] (k)(2) [Do.] (c)(13)Ð(15) ...... [Do.](f) (2)Ð(4) 1926.35 ...... 1910.38(a) [Do.] (d)(3)Ð(6) ...... [Do.] (h) (2)Ð(5) 1926.50(g) ...... 1910.151(c) [Do.] (e)(3)Ð(5) ...... [Do.] (i) (2)Ð(4) 1926.51(a)(6) ...... 1910.141(a)(2)(v) [Do.] (e)(6)Ð(7) ...... [Do.] (i) (6)Ð(7) [Do.] (d)(2) ...... [Do.] (h) [Do.] (e)(8) ...... [Do.] (i)(9) [Do.] (f) (2)Ð(4) ...... [Do.] (d) (1)Ð(3) 1926.300(b) (3) ...... 1910.212(a)(1) [Do.] (g) ...... [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (a)(3) [Do.] (h) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (5) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (e) [Do.] (6) ...... [Do.] (b) 1926.53 (c)Ð(r) ...... 1910.96 [Do.] (7) ...... 1910.215(b)(9) 1926.57 (f)Ð(i) ...... 1910.94 [Do.] (8) and (9) ...... [Do.] (b) (3) and (4) 1926.64 ...... 1910.119 1926.302(b)(10) ...... 1910.244(b) 1926.65 ...... 1910.120 1926.303(b)(2) ...... 1910.215(a) (2) 1926.66 (a) ...... 1910.107 (a) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (4) [Do.] (b) ...... [Do.] (b) (1)Ð(10) 1926.304 (g) ...... 1910.213(h)(1) [Do.] (c)Ð(d) ...... [Do.] (c)Ð(d) [Do.] (h) ...... [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (e)Ð(g) ...... [Do.] (h)Ð(j) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (c)(1) 1926.95 ...... 1910.132 1926.305(d)(1) ...... 1910.244(a)(2) (iii)Ð(viii) 1926.96 ...... 1910.136 1926.306 ...... 1910.169 1926.97 (a)Ð(e) ...... 1910.156(e) 1926.307 ...... 1910.219 [Do.] (f)Ð(h) ...... [Do.] Subpt. L App. 1926.350(a) (10) ...... 1910.253(b) (4)(iii) E [Do.] (11) ...... [Do.] (2)(ii) 1926.98 ...... 1910.156(f) [Do.] (12) ...... 1910.101(b) 1926.102(a) (6) ...... 1910.133(a) (2) 1926.353(b)(3) ...... 1910.252(b)(4)(iv) [Do.] (7) ...... [Do.] (4) 1926.416 (a)(4) ...... 1910.333(c)(2) [Do.] (8) ...... [Do.] (5) [Do.] (f) (1) ...... [Do.] (c)(10) 1926.103 (d) ...... 1910.134 (a) [Do.] (2) ...... 1910.334(a)(1) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (3) ...... [Do.] (a)(2)(iii) [Do.] (f)Ð(i) ...... [Do.] (d)Ð(g) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) 1926.150(c)(1) (xi) ...... 1910.157 (g)(1) [Do.] (5)Ð(6) ...... [Do.] (b) (1)Ð(2) [Do.] (xii) ...... [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (7)Ð(9) ...... [Do.] (c) (1)Ð(3) [Do.] (xiii) ...... [Do.] (c)(4) [Do.] (10) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (xiv) ...... [Do.] (e)(3) 1926.417(d) ...... 1910.333(b)(2) 1926.152 (b)(5) ...... 1910.107(e)(2) 1926.451(a) (22) ...... 1910.28(a) (15) [Do.] (h) ...... 1910.106(j) [Do.] (23) ...... [Do.] (18) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (24) ...... [Do.] (20) [Do.] (j) ...... [Do.] (c) 1926.453 (a) ...... 1910.29(a) [Do.] (k) (1)Ð(3) ...... [Do.] (g)(4) [Do.] (b) ...... [Do.] (c) [Do.] (k)(4) ...... [Do.] (a)(22) 1926.550 (a)(19) ...... 1910.184(c)(9) 1926.153(a) (3) ...... 1910.110(a)(4) 1926.600(a)(7) ...... 1910.176(f)

581

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00581 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND STANDARDSÐContinued HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION

Source § no. and/or Subject term Part 1926 section New § no. and/or para. para. no. Abrasive Wheels and Tools ...... 303 1926.602(c)(1) (vii) ...... 1910.178(m) (3) Accident Prevention Responsibil- .20(b) [Do.] (viii) ...... [Do.] (12) ities. 1926.900 (s) ...... 1910.109 (g)(2)(ii) 2-Acetylaminofluorene ...... 1114 [Do.] (t) ...... [Do.] (h)(3)(ii) Acrylonitrile ...... 1145 1926.905(u) ...... [Do.] (e)(3)(iii) Administrative Adjudications ...... 4 1926.914(aa) ...... [Do.] (a)(12) Aerial Lifts ...... 453, .952(b), 1926.1050(b) ...... 1910.21(g)(9) .955(e) (10)± (12) 1926.1071 ...... 1910.401 Boom Platforms ...... 453(b)(2) 1926.1072 ...... 1910.402 Bursting Safety Factor ...... 453(b)(4) Electrical Tests ...... 453(b)(3) 1926.1076 ...... 1910.410 Field Modifications ...... 453(a)(2) 1926.1080 ...... 1910.420 Ladder Trucks ...... 453(b)(1) 1926.1081 ...... 1910.421 Tower Trucks ...... 453(b)(1) 1926.1082 ...... 1910.422 Welding Standards ...... 453(b)(5) 1926.1083 ...... 1910.423 Air Quality, underground con- .800(h), (j) 1926.1084 ...... 1910.424 struction. 1926.1085 ...... 1910.425 Airborne Contaminant Mists ...... 55 1926.1086 ...... 1910.426 Alarms: Fire ...... 150(e) 1926.1087 ...... 1910.427 Audible ...... 602(a)(9) 1926.1090 ...... 1910.430 4-Aminodiphenyl ...... 1111 1926.1091 ...... 1910.440 Angle of Repose, Pile Driving ...... 603(c)(3) 1926.1092 ...... 1910.441 Arc Welding and Cutting ...... 351 Arsenic, organic ...... 1118 1926.1102 ...... 1910.1002 Asbestos: 1926.1103 ...... 1910.1003 Airborne Concentration ...... 1101(c) 1926.1104 ...... 1910.1004 Competent Person ...... 1101(o) 1926.1105 ...... 1910.1005 Compliance ...... 1101(g) 1926.1106 ...... 1910.1006 Exposure, Permissible ...... 1101(c) Hazard communication ...... 1101(k) 1926.1107 ...... 1910.1007 Hygiene Facilities and Prac- .1101(j) 1926.1108 ...... 1910.1008 tices. 1926.1109 ...... 1910.1009 Medical Surveillance ...... 1101(m) 1926.1110 ...... 1910.1010 Monitoring ...... 1101(f) 1926.1111 ...... 1910.1011 Multi-employer worksites ...... 1101(d) 1926.1112 ...... 1910.1012 Personal Protective Clothing .1101(i) 1926.1113 ...... 1910.1013 Recordkeeping ...... 1101(n) 1926.1114 ...... 1910.1014 Regulated Areas ...... 1101(e) 1926.1115 ...... 1910.1015 Respiratory protection ...... 1101(h) Audible Warning ...... 601(b)(3) 1926.1116 ...... 1910.1016 Authorized Person (Definition) .... .32(d) 1926.1117 ...... 1910.1017 Automatic Circuit Recloser (Defi- .960(b) 1926.1118 ...... 1910.1018 nition). 1926.1128 ...... 1910.1028 Barges: 1926.1129 ...... 1910.1029 Access ...... 605(b) 1926.1144 ...... 1910.1044 First Aid and Lifesaving .605(d) 1926.1145 ...... 1910.1045 Equipment. 1926.1147 ...... 1910.1047 Mobile Cranes ...... 550(f) 1926.1148 ...... 1910.1048 Pile Driving ...... 603(b) Working Surfaces ...... 605(c) Barricades ...... 202 [58 FR 35305, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61 Cranes ...... 550(a)(9) FR 9255, Mar. 7, 1996] Definition ...... 203(a), .960(c) Motor Vehicle Equipment .... .600(a) EDITORIAL NOTE: This listing is provided Battery Rooms and Charging ...... 441 for informational purposes only. It is com- Belts, Safety ...... 104 piled and kept up-to-date by the Department Definition ...... 107(f) of Labor. Materials Storage ...... 250(b)(2)

582

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00582 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Pile Driving ...... 603(a)(8) Exposure, Permissible ...... 1127(c) Steel Erection ...... 752(k) Hazard Communication ...... 1127(m) Benzene ...... 1128 Housekeeping ...... 1127(k) Benzidene ...... 1110 Hygiene Facilities and Prac- .1127(j) Blasting (see also Explosives) .... .900±.914 tices. Agents, Storage ...... 904 Medical Surveillance ...... 1127(l) Blaster Qualifications ...... 901 Monitoring ...... 1127(d) Electric ...... 906 Personal Protective Equip- .1127(i) Excavation Work ...... 913 ment. Firing ...... 909 Clothing ...... 1127(i) Loading ...... 905 Recordkeeping ...... 1127(n) Misfires ...... 911 Regulated Areas ...... 1127(e) Underground construction ... .800(p) Respiratory protection ...... 1127(g) Underwater ...... 912 Caissons ...... 801 Blocking, Blocks: Carbon Tetrachloride ...... 150(c)(1) (viii) Jacks ...... 305(c) Cargo Hooks ...... 551(d) Motor Vehicles ...... 600(a)(3) Carpenters Bracket Scaffolds ...... 452(g) Pile-Driving Equipment ...... 603(a) Certifications: Boatswains Chair Scaffolds ...... 452(o) Boilers ...... 29(b) Body Belts ...... 453(b)(2)(iii), (v); Pressure Vessels ...... 29(a) .959 Chains, Alloy Steel ...... 251(b)(1) (see Body Belts, Safety Straps Chemical Hazard Information .59 and Lanyards) Communication, Transmittal to Cushion Parts ...... 959(b)(2)(i)±(iv) Employees. Tool Loops ...... 959(b)(3) Employee information and .59(h) Body Belts, Safety Straps and .959 training. Lanyards. Labels and other forms of .59(f) Buckles ...... 959(a)(2) warning. Dee Rings ...... 959(a)(3) Material safety data sheets .59(g) Liners ...... 959(b)(4) (MSDS). Hardware ...... 959(a)(1) Trade secrets ...... 59(i) and .59, Snap Hooks ...... 959(a)(4) App. D Keepers ...... 959(b)(6) Written program ...... 59(e) Stitching ...... 959(b)(5) Chemicals, highly hazardous; .64 Testing ...... 959(b)(1), (7) process safety management. Boilers ...... 29(b) Chemicals, toxic and reac- .64, App. A Pile-Driving Equipment ...... 603(a) tive, threshold list. Bolting, Bolts ...... 752(b) Compliance guidelines ...... 64, App. A Brackets, Roofing ...... 452(h) Contractor, employer re- .64(h) Brakes: sponsibilities. Earthmoving Equipment ...... 602(a)(4) Emergency planning and re- .64(h) Equipment ...... 600, .602 sponse. Motor Vehicles ...... 601 Hot work (welding) permits .. .64(n) Bricklayers Square Scaffolds ...... 452(e) Trade secrets ...... 64(p) Buildings, Temporary ...... 151(b) Training ...... 64(g) Bulkheads, Compressed Air ...... 803(m) Chimneys, Removal ...... 854 Cable Sheath (Definition) ...... 960(h) bis-Chloromethyl ether ...... 1106 Cables: Chutes: Definition ...... 960(g) Demolition ...... 852 Flexible Electric Cables and .405(a)(2)(ii) (F), Waste Disposal ...... 252 Cords. (J), (I), and Circuit, Voltage of ...... 960(rr)(ss) .405(b)(2) Circuits, Electric, Lockout and .417 Portable Electric Cables ...... 405(h) Tagging. Trenching Cables ...... 956(c)(4±7) Clearing, Clearances: Welding Cables and Con- .351(b) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(15) (iv), nectors. .950(c), Cadmium: .955(b)(8) Airborne Concentration ...... 1127(c) Electric equipment, work- .403(i)(1) and Compliance ...... 1127(f) space around. (j)(3) Emergency Situations ...... 1127(h) Fire Prevention ...... 151(c), (d)

583

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00583 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Subject term Part 1926 section Subject term no. no.

Materials Storage ...... 250 Personnel platforms, sus- .550(g) Site ...... 604 pended, by cranes and Temporary Heating Devices .154 derricks. Climbing Equipment ...... 951(b) Crawling Boards ...... 452(m) Body Belts ...... 951(b)(1)±(3) Cutoffs, Fire ...... 150(f) Lifelines ...... 951(b)(4)(i) Cylinders, Welding and Cutting .. .350 Lanyards ...... 951(b)(2), (4)(i); Decompression ...... 803(f) .959 Chambers ...... 803(g)(2) Ropes ...... 951(b)(5) Tables ...... 804 Safety Lines ...... 951(b)(4)(ii) Deenergized Conductors, String- .955(c) ing and Removing. Straps, Safety ...... 951(b)(1)±(3) Deenergizing Lines and Equip- .950(d) Clothing (see Personal Protec- ment. tive Equipment) Disconnecting ...... 950(d)(2) Coal tar pitch volatiles, interpre- .1102 Guards and Barriers ...... 950(d)(1)(v) and tation. (d)(2)(i) Cofferdams ...... 802 Identification ...... 950(d)(1)(i) Coke oven emissions ...... 1129 Inspections ...... 950(b), (d)(1)(iii) Competent Person (Definition) ... .32(f) Isolation ...... 950(d)(1)(i) Compressed Air ...... 803 Notification by Designated .950(d)(1)(ii) Excavations ...... 913 Employee. Pneumatic Power Tools ...... 302(b)(4) Protective Grounds ...... 950(d)(1)(iv) Compression ...... 803(e) Switches and Disconnectors .950(d)(1)(ii) Compressor Plants ...... 803(h) Tagging ...... 950(d)(1)(ii)(b), Concrete construction ...... 700±.705 (d)(1)(vi) Cast-in-place ...... 703 Work Completion ...... 950(d)(1)(vii), Forms, vertical slip ...... 703(c) (d)(2)(ii) Formwork, General ...... 703(a) Demolition ...... 850 Formwork, Removal ...... 703(e) Chutes ...... 852 Reinforcing steel ...... 701(b), .703(d) Entrances ...... 850(k) Shoring and reshoring .. .703(b) Explosives ...... 860 Test RequirementsÐ .703(e)(1) Flammable Gases ...... 850(e) Compressive Strength. Floors ...... 850±.860 Equipment and Tools ...... 702 Mechanical ...... 859 Lift-Slab Operations ...... 705 Passageways ...... 851 Lockout/Tagout ...... 702(j) Stairways ...... 851 Post-Tensioning ...... 701(c) Steel Construction ...... 858 Derrick Trucks ...... 952(c) Precast ...... 704 Derricks ...... 550 Pumping Systems ...... 702(e) Personnel platforms, sus- .550(g) Conductors, Deenergized ...... 955(c) pended, by cranes and Conductors, Wire ...... 954(c) derricks. Confined Spaces: Designated Person (Definition) ... .32(h) Heating devices, temporary .154(a)(2) Detonating Cords ...... 908 Instruction of employees re- .21(b)(6) Disposal: lating to. Exhaust Materials ...... 57(e) Underground lines (man- .956(a)(3) Waste Materials ...... 252 holes). Diving Operations ...... 605(e) Welding and Cutting ...... 353(b), .352(g) Drilling, underground construc- .800(q) Containers: tion. LP Gas ...... 153 Dusts ...... 55 Welding and Cutting ...... 352(i), (j) Ear Protection ...... 101 Contaminants (Definition) ...... 107(a) Education and Training ...... 21 Airborne, TLV ...... 55(a) Egress, means ...... 34 Contracts, Mixed Performance ... .14 Exit marking ...... 34(b) Conveyors ...... 555 Maintenance ...... 34(c) Cranes ...... 550, .952(c), Electric Transmission and Dis- .955(b)(6)(i) tribution Lines (see Power Electric equipment and wir- .406(a) Transmission and Distribution ing, installation of. Lines)

584

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00584 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Subject term Part 1926 section Part 1926 section no. Subject term no.

Electrical, Electricity ...... 400±.449 Installation and Restoration .159(c) Battery Rooms and Charg- .441 Maintenance and Testing .... .159(d) ing. Manual Operation ...... 159(e) Circuits, Lockout and Tag- .417 Employer (Definition) ...... 32(j) ging. Enclosed Spaces: Compressed Air Chambers .803(j) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(11) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(15) Welding and Cutting ...... 352(g) Equipment Installation and .402±.408, 431, Energized Substations ...... 957 Maintenance. and .432 Barricades and Barriers ...... 957(c) Grounding and Bonding ...... 404(f) Control Panels ...... 957(d) Hazardous Locations ...... 407, .432 Deenergized Equipment and .957(b) Power Operated Tools ...... 302(a) Lines. Safety-related work prac- .416 and .417 Fences ...... 957(g) tices. Lowboys ...... 957(e)(3) Underground construction ... .800(s) Mechanical Equipment ...... 957(e) Wiring design and methods .404 and .405 Storage ...... 957(f) Electrode Conductor, Grounding .954(h) Warning Signs ...... 957(c)(2) Definition ...... 960(bb) Work Authorizations ...... 957(a)(1) Electrode Holders ...... 351 (a), (d) Enforcement, Administrative, Ad- .4 Electrostatic Apparatus, Fixed .... .66(e) judications for. Spraying: Entrances (Demolition) ...... 850(k) Conformance ...... 66(e)(1) Entry, Right of ...... 3 Conveyors ...... 66(e)(7) Environmental Controls ...... 50±.57 Fail-Safe Controls ...... 66(e)(9) Equipment: Fire Protection ...... 66(e)(12) Earthmoving ...... 602 Grounding ...... 66(e)(5) Guarding ...... 66(e)(10) Electrical ...... 402±.408, .431, Insulators ...... 66(e)(5) and .432 Location ...... 66(e)(3) Firefighting ...... 150 Safe Distances ...... 66(e)(6) Lifesaving ...... 100±.106 Supports ...... 66(e)(4) Marine ...... 605 Ventilation ...... 66(e)(11) Mechanized ...... 600 Electrostatic Hand Spraying .66(f) Pile Driving ...... 603 Equipment. Rigging ...... 251 Application ...... 66(f)(1) Underground construction ... .800(i), (k)(10) Approval ...... 66(f)(3) Ethylene oxide ...... 1147 Conformance ...... 66(f)(2) Ethyleneimine ...... 1112 Electrical Support Equip- .66(f)(4) Area requirements ...... 1112(c) ment. Closed system oper- .1112(c)(2) Grounding ...... 66(f)(5)±(7) ation. Interlocks ...... 66(f)(8) Isolated systems ...... 1112(c)(1) Powder Coatings ...... 66(f)(6) Maintenance and de- .1112(c)(5) Specifications ...... 66(f)(3), (4) contamination activi- Spray Gun Grounding ...... 66(f)(5) ties. Ventilation ...... 66(f)(9) Open-vessel system op- .1112(c)(3) Elevators, escalators, etc., elec- .406(b) erations. trical connection. Transfer from a closed .1112(c)(4) Emergency Action Plan ...... 35(a) operation. Hazardous waste operations .65(f)(1)(ii) Medical surveillance ...... 1112(g) and emergency response, Examinations ...... 1112(g)(1) exemption. Records ...... 1112(g)(2) Highly hazardous chemicals, .64(n) Regulated area require- .1112(d) process safety managements. ment. Contamination control ... .1112(d)(4) Emergency Provisions: Emergencies ...... 1112(d)(2) Excavation rescue equip- .651(g)(2) Hygiene facilities and .1112(d)(3) ment. practices. Underground construction ... .800(g) Reports ...... 1112(f) Employee (Definition) ...... 32(i) Incidents ...... 1112(f)(2) Employee Alarm Systems ...... 159 Operations ...... 1112(f)(1)

585

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00585 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Signs, information, and train- .1112(e) Fire Alarm Devices ...... 150(e) ing. Fire Extinguishers ...... 150 Container contents .1112(e)(2) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(14) identification. Motor Vehicles ...... 600(b)(14) Lettering ...... 1112(e)(3) Table F±1 (Fire Extin- .150 Prohibited statements ... .1112(e)(4) guishers). Signs ...... 1112(e)(1) Underground construction ... .800(m)(8) and Training and indoctrina- .1112(e)(5) (11) tion. Welding and Cutting ...... 351 Excavations ...... Subpt. P (.650± Firefighting Equipment ...... 150 (c), (d) .652) Fire Prevention ...... 24, .150±.155 Access and egress ...... 651(c) Compressed Air ...... 803(1) Adjacent structure stability ... .651(i) Oil and Grease Hazards ...... 350(i) Emergency rescue equip- .651(g)(2) Preservative Coatings ...... 354 ment. Underground construction ... .800(m) Equipment ...... 602(b), Welding and Cutting ...... 352±.354 .955(b)(3)(i), Fire Protection: .956(c), .957(h) Cutoffs ...... 150(f) Fall protection ...... 651(l) Prevention Program ...... 24 Hazardous atmospheres ...... 651(g) Water Supply and Equip- .150±.155 Inspections ...... 651(k) ment. Pier holes, bell-bottomed ...... 651(g)(2)(ii) Fires ...... 551(s) Protective systems ...... 652, Subpt. P First Aid ...... 23, .50, .950(e) App. F Marine Operations ...... 605(d) Respiratory protection ...... 651(g)(1)(iii) Tunnels and Shafts ...... 803(b)(7) and Shield systems ...... 652(g), Subpt. P (8) App. B Flagmen ...... 201(a) Shoring ...... 652(c) Flammable Gases Demolition ...... 850(e) Timber ...... Subpt. P App. C Flammable and Combustible Liq- .152 Aluminum hydraulic ...... Subpt. P App. D uids. Sloping and benching ...... 652(b), Subpt. P Process safety management .64 App. B of highly hazardous Soil classification ...... Subpt. P App. A chemicals. Surface encumbrances ...... 651(a) Flashpoint (Definition) ...... 155(i) Trench excavation ...... Subpt. P (.650± Float Scaffolds ...... 452(s) .652) Floors, Flooring: Exhausts ...... 57 Demolition ...... 850±.860 Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a) Openings ...... 500 Explosives (see also Blasting) .... .900 Steel Erection ...... 750 Loading ...... 905 Food Handling ...... 51(d) Storage ...... 904 Footing Excavations ...... 955(b)(3)(i), Surface Transportation ...... 902 .957(h) Underground Transportation .903 Form, Forms, Formwork: Eye Protection ...... 102 Concrete ...... 700±.702 Face Protection ...... 102 Scaffolds ...... 452(g) Fall protection: .500±.503 Formaldehyde ...... 1148 Falling-object protection ...... 501(c) Exposure, cross-reference ... .55(d) Guardrail systems ...... 502(b), App. B Fuel, Fueling and Refueling: Leading edges ...... 501(b)(2) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(14) Personal fall-arrest systems .502(d), App. C Diesel, underground con- .800(m)(3), (4), Positioning device systems .502(e), App. D struction. (6) Retraining ...... 503(b) Flammable and Combustible .152 Roof-width determination .App. A Liquids. guidelines. Fuel Gases ...... 350(d), (e) Safety net systems ...... 502(c) Fuel Powered Tools ...... 302(c) Scaffolds ...... 451(g) LP Gas Dispensing ...... 153(e) Training certification ...... 503(b) Oxygen Manifolds ...... 350(e) Training program ...... 503(a) Fumes: (see Ventilation) ...... 55 Fenders, Earthmoving Equip- .602(a)(5) Fuses, Safety ...... 907 ment. Gases ...... 55

586

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00586 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Fuel Gases ...... 350(d) Engineering Controls and .65(g) Excavations; hazardous .651(g) Personal Protective Equip- atmospheres. ment. Gassy underground con- .800(h) Illumination ...... 65(m) struction operations. Information Program ...... 65(b)(1) Liquefied Petroleum (LP) .153 Laboratory Waste Packs ...... 65(j)(6) Gas. Material Handling ...... 65(j) Gloves ...... 951(a)(1)(iii) Medical Surveillance ...... 65(f), (p)(3), Goggles ...... 102(a)(3) (q)(9) Lasers ...... 102(b)(2) Monitoring ...... 65(c)(6), (h) Table E±1 (Eye and Face .102 Post-emergency Response .65(l)(5) Protector Selection Guide). Radioactive Wastes ...... 65(j)(4) Welding ...... 102(b)(1) Recordkeeping ...... 65(f)(7) Grades, Roadway ...... 602(a)(3) RCRA Facilities ...... 65(p) Grinding Machines ...... 303 Safety and Health Program .65(b) Ground Support: Sanitation ...... 65(n) Excavations ...... 651(a), (h)±(j), Shock-sensitive Wastes ...... 65(j)(5) .652 Site Characterization and .65(c) Underground construction ... .800(o) Analysis. Grounding, Electrical: Site Control ...... 65(d) Grounding and Bonding ...... 404(f) Site Safety and Health Plan .65(b)(4) Jumper Cables ...... 550(a)(15) Tank and Vault Procedures .65(j)(9) Power Transmission and .954 Totally-encapsulating Chem- .65(g)(4) Distribution. ical Protective Suits. Return and Machine .351(c) Training ...... 65(e), (p)(8)(iii), Grounding. (q)(6) Guarding (see Fall Protection Uncontrolled sites, emer- .65(l) and Guarding) gency responses. Guardrails ...... 500 Head Protection ...... 100 Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(13) Hearing Protection ...... 101 Scaffolds ...... 451 Heaters, Heating, Temporary De- .154 Stairways ...... 500(e) vices. Steel Erection ...... 752 Helicopters ...... 551, .958 Handlamps ...... 405(j)(1)(iii) Approach Distance ...... 551(o) Handrails, Stairways ...... 501 Approaching ...... 551(p) Handtools ...... 300±.305 Briefings ...... 551(b) Hats ...... 951(a)(2) Cargo Hooks ...... 551(d) Hauling, Haulage: Clothing ...... 551(e) Equipment ...... 602(c) Communications ...... 551(r) Underground construction ... .800(r) Electric power transmission .958 Hazard communication (see .59 and distribution, use in. Chemical Hazard Information Fires ...... 551(s) Communication). Ground Lines ...... 551(l) Hazardous: Ground Personnel ...... 551(g) Atmospheres, excavations ... .651(g) Hand Signals ...... 551(n) Chemicals, highly process .64 Hooking and Unhooking .551(i) safety management (See Loads. Chemicals, etc.). Housekeeping ...... 551(g) Locations, Electricity ...... 407, .432 Loose Gear ...... 551(f) Materials receipt or mate- .61 Operator Responsibility ...... 551(h) rials transport vehicles, re- Personal Protective Equip- .551(e) tention of DOT markings. ment. Substances (Definition) ...... 32(k) Regulations ...... 551(a) Hazardous Waste Operations: Signal Systems ...... 551(n) Contractors and Subcontrac- .65(b)(1)(iv) Hand Signals ...... Fig. N±1 tors. Slings ...... 551(c) Decontamination ...... 65(k), (p)(4) Static Charges ...... 551(j) Drums and Containers ...... 65(j) Visibility ...... 551(m) Emergency Response ...... 65(e)(7), (l), Weight Limitations ...... 551(k) (p)(8), (q) High Voltage Lines ...... 550(a)(15)

587

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00587 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Hoists, Hoisting: Defects and repairs ...... 1053(b) (16)± Base-Mounted Drum ...... 553 (18) Electric Equipment and Wir- .406(a) Demolition, use during ...... 851 (a), (b) ing, Installation of. Electric equipment, ener- .1053(b)(12) Materials ...... 552(b) gized, exposure to. Overhead ...... 554 Electric power transmission .951(v) Personnel (and Elevators) ... .552(c) and distribution lines, use Underground construction ... .800(g)(1), (t) near. Horse Scaffolds ...... 452(f) Inspection ...... 1053(b)(15) Hoses and Connections: Jacob's ladders, use in ma- .605(b) (3), (4) Air Line Steel Erection ...... 752(a)(3) rine operations. Fire ...... 150(c)(2) Ladder jack scaffolds ...... 452(k) Manifold ...... 350(f) Ladder trucks, manually pro- .453(b) Nozzles ...... 151(a)(5) pelled mobile. Pile Driving ...... 603(a)(9) Load capabilities ...... 1053(a)(1), Pneumatic Power Tools ...... 302(b) (b)(3) Hotline Tools (Definition) ...... 960(ee) Pile driving access pits ...... 603(c)(6) Housekeeping ...... 25 Safety devices ...... 1051(b), Hydraulic: .1053(a) (18), Jacks ...... 305 (19), (22), (23) Power Tools ...... 302(d) Scaffolds, use on or with ...... 1051(a) Incorporation by Reference ...... 31 Training requirements ...... 1060 Identification Badges ...... 803(b)(11) Trestle ladder scaffolds ...... 452(n) Ignition Hazards ...... 151(a) Lanyards ...... 104, .959 Illumination ...... 26 (see Body Belts, Safety Straps Demolition ...... 851(c) and Lanyards) Table D±3 (Minimum Illu- .56 Pile Driving ...... 603(a)(8) mination Intensities). Lasers: Temporary Lighting ...... 405(a)(2)(ii) (E), Eye Protection ...... 102(b)(2) (F), (G), and Nonionizing Radiation ...... 54 (J) Lead Exposure in Construction: Underground construction ... .800(l) Permissible exposure limit ... .62(c) Industrial Trucks ...... 602(c) Exposure assessment ...... 62(d) Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding ...... 353(d) Methods of compliance ...... 62(e) Inspections ...... 955(a)(2), Respiratory protection ...... 62(f) (b)(6)(v) Protective work clothing and .62(g) After Blasting ...... 910 equipment. Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(6) Housekeeping ...... 62(h) Excavations ...... 651(k) Hygiene facilities and prac- .62(i) Hoists and Elevators ...... 552(c)(15) tices. Right of Entry ...... 3 Medical surveillance ...... 62(j) Scaffolds ...... 451 Medical removal protection .. .62(k) Insulated (Definition) ...... 960(ff) Employee information and .62(l) Insulation (Cable) (Definition) ...... 960(gg) training. Insulation Shielding (Definition) .. .960(hh) Signs ...... 62(m) Interior Hung Scaffolds ...... 452(t) Lenses ...... 102(a)(3) Ionizing Radiation ...... 53 Lasers ...... 102(b)(2) Isolated (Definition) ...... 960(ii) Welding ...... 102(b)(1) Jacks ...... 305 Lever and Ratchet Jacks ...... 305 Lever and Ratchet Jacks ...... 305 Lifelines ...... 104 Lift-slab concrete construc- .705 Materials Storage ...... 250(b)(2) tion operations. Scaffolding ...... 451 (i), (h), Jacob's Ladders; marine oper- .605(b) (3), (4) (p),(u), (w) ations. Lifesaving Equipment ...... 100±.106 Ladders (see also Stairways) ...... 1050, .1051, Marine Operations ...... 605(d) 1053, and Lift Slab Construction ...... 705 .1060 Lifting Equipment ...... 602(c) Chicken ladders or crawling .452(m) Lighting: (see Illumination) ...... 26, 56 boards. Portable Equipment ...... 151(a)(4) Cranes and derricks, access .550(a)(13) Temporary ...... 405(a)(2)(ii)

588

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00588 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Linemen's Equipment (see Body Marine Operations ...... 605(a) Belts, Safety Straps and Lan- Safety Belts ...... 250(b)(2) yards) Mechanical Equipment ...... 952 Lines, Underground (see Under- Aerial Lifts ...... 952(b) ground Lines) Cranes ...... 952(c) Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LP .153 Derrick Trucks ...... 952(c) Gas). Energized Substations ...... 957(e) Liquids, Flammable and Com- .152 Inspections ...... 952(a) bustible. Medical: (see First Aid) Loads: Attention ...... 23 Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(2) Examinations ...... 803(b) Electric circuit ratings ...... 416(f) Lock ...... 803(b)(9) Helicopter cranes hooking .551(i) Services ...... 50 and unhooking. Metal Tower Construction ...... 955(b) Hoists and Elevators ...... 552(a)(2) Cranes ...... 955(b)(6)(i) Scaffolds, ratings ...... 451 Footings ...... 955(b)(1)±(3) Storage ...... 250(a)(2) Auger-type ...... 955(b)(2) Table H±19 (Safe Working .252 Excavations ...... 955(b)(3)(i) Loads for Shackles). Pad-type ...... 955(b)(1) Table H±20 (Number and .252 Pile-type ...... 955(b)(1) Spacing of U-Bolt Wire Guy Lines ...... 955(b)(4)(ii) Rope Clips). Supports ...... 955(b)(4)(iii) Locks: Methylene chloride ...... 1152 Man and Emergency ...... 803(g) Methyl chloromethyl ether ...... 1106 Medical ...... 803(b)(9) Midrails: Manholes ...... 956(b) Scaffolding ...... 451 Definition ...... 960(jj) Specifications ...... 500(f) Excavating ...... 956(c) Mobile Scaffolds, Manually Pro- .453 Guarding ...... 956(b)(1) pelled. Open Flames ...... 956(b) (2), (3) Motor Vehicles ...... 600, .601 Trenching Cables ...... 956(c), .956(c) Mud Flaps ...... 601(b)(13)(ii) (4)±(7) alpha-Naphthylamine ...... 1104 Manifolds, Oxygen ...... 350(e) beta-Naphthylamine ...... 1106 Marine Operations ...... 605 Needle Beam Scaffolds ...... 452(u) Working Over or Near Water .106 Nets, Safety ...... 105 Masonry: Steel Erection ...... 750(b)(1)(ii) Construction ...... 700, .706 4-Nitrobiphenyl ...... 1103 Bracing requirements .706 N-Nitrosodimethylamine ...... 1116 and Limited Access Noise Exposure ...... 52 Zone. Nonionizing Radiation ...... 54 Masons Scaffolds ...... 452 Nuclear Regulatory Commission .53 Removal ...... 854 Occupational health and environ- .50±.57 Materials Handling ...... 953 mental controls. Equipment ...... 602 Oil Filled Equipment ...... 953(e) Framing ...... 953(f) Openings: Load Attaching ...... 953(g) Demolition ...... 850(i), (j) Hazardous materials, reten- .61 Floors and Walls ...... 500 tion of DOT markings. Optical Density (Definition) ...... 107(d) Hoist Ropes ...... 953(g) Table E±3 (Selecting Laser .102(b)(2) Oil Filled Equipment ...... 953(e) Safety Glass). Pole Hauling ...... 953(b) Outrigger Scaffolds ...... 452(i) Rigging Equipment, safe .251 Overcurrent Protection ...... 404(e) working loads for. Overhead Power Transmission .955 Storage ...... 953(c) and Distribution Lines. Tag Lines ...... 953(d) Clearances ...... 955(b)(8) Unloading ...... 953(a) Climbing Elevated Struc- .955(a)(2), (3) Materials Storage ...... 250, .953(c), tures. .957(f) Conductor Grips ...... 955(c)(8) Hazardous materials, reten- .61 Deenergized Conductors ...... 955(c) tion of DOT markings. Erection Cranes ...... 955(b)(6)(i)

589

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00589 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Subject term Part 1926 section Part 1926 section no. Subject term no.

Inspections ...... 955(a)(2), Power Transmission and Dis- .950±.960 (b)(6)(v) tribution Lines. Lifting Equipment ...... 955(a)(6)(ii) Clearances ...... 950(c) Loadlines ...... 955(b)(6)(iii) Deenergizing Lines and .950(d) Pole Holes ...... 955(a)(7) Equipment. Reel Handling Equipment .... .955(c)(12) Emergency Procedures ...... 950(e) Splicing ...... 965(c)(7)(iii), Employee Insulation ...... 950(c)(1)(i), (iii) (d)(7) Energized Parts ...... 950(c)(1)(i), (ii) Stringing ...... 955(c), (d) Existing Lines and Equip- .950(a)(2) Tag Lines ...... 955(a)(8), ment. .955(b)(6)(ii) First Aid ...... 950(e) Tower Assembly ...... 955(b)(4)±(6) Hot Stick Distances ...... 950(c)(2)(i), Traffic Control ...... 955(b)(7) Table V±1 Transmission Clipping ...... 955(c)(10), Hydraulic Fluids ...... 950(i) (11)(ii); (d)(9) Live-line bare-hand work ...... 955(e) Wind, Bad Weather ...... 955(b)(6)(iv), Minimum Distances (see Hot (c)(11)(i) Stick and Working Distances). Overhead Protection ...... 451(h), .1003 Night Work ...... 950(f) Oxygen Manifolds ...... 350(e) Overhead lines ...... 955 Passageways (see also Run- .500(d) Sanitation ...... 950(h) ways). Substation fences ...... 957(g) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(13)(iii) Water ...... 950(e) Demolition ...... 851(a) Working Distances ...... 950(c)(2) Electrical Equipment ...... 416(b) Powered industrial trucks, oper- .602(d) Personal Climbing Equipment ator training. (see Climbing Equipment). Powerlines, Cranes and Derricks .550(a)(15) Personal Protective Equipment: .28, .95±.106, Pressure Vessels ...... 29(a) (see also Respiratory Protec- .551(e), Pile-Driving Equipment ...... 603(a) tion). .951(a) beta-Propiolactone ...... 1113 Cutting, Welding, Heating .... .353(c)(4) Foot protection ...... 96 Protective Equipment (see Per- Gloves ...... 951(a)(1)(iii) sonal Protective Equipment) Hats ...... 951(a)(2) Radiation: Non-rubber ...... 951(a)(1)(iv) Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding .353(d) Rubber ...... 951(a)(1)(i)±(iii) Ionizing ...... 53 Pier Holes, bell-bottomed ...... 651(g)(2)(ii) Nonionizing ...... 54 Pile Driving ...... 603 X-ray equipment, electrical .406(d) Pipelines, Piping ...... 351(c)(2), (3), connection. (4) Radiant Energy Protection: Planks, Planking: Lasers ...... 102(b)(2) Hoists and Elevators ...... 552(b)(3) Welding ...... 102(b)(1) Scaffolding ...... 451 Rated Capacity for material han- Steel Erection ...... 752 dling rigging equipment: Plasterers and Decorators Scaf- .452(d) Chain Slings ...... 251(b) folds. Synthetic Webbing ...... 251(e) Platforms: Table H±1 (Chain Slings, .251 Beam-Type ...... 451(i) Steel). Catch ...... 451(u)(3) Table H±2 (Maximum Allow- .251 Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(13) able Wear at Any Point of Elevating and Rotating Work .451(f) Link). Guarding ...... 500(d) Table H±3 (Single Leg .251 Ladder-Type (2-pt. Suspen- .451(i) slings). sion). Table H±4 (Single Leg .251 Light Metal-Type ...... 451(i) Slings). Pile Driving ...... 603(a)(8) Table H±5 (Single Leg .251 Pneumatic Power Tools ...... 302(b) Slings). Steel Erection ...... 752(a)(2) Table H±6 (Single Leg .251 Pole Hauling ...... 953(b) Slings). Powder-Actuated Tools ...... 302(e) Table H±7 (2-Leg and 3-Leg .251 Power-Operated Handtools ...... 302 Bridal slings).

590

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00590 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Table H±8 (2-Leg and 3-Leg .251 ROPS (Rollover Protection .1000±.1003 Bridal Slings). Structures):. Table H±9 (2-Leg and 3-Leg .251 Coverage ...... 1000(a), (f) Bridal Slings). Crawler Tractors ...... 1001 Table H±10 (2-Leg and 3- .251 Dozers ...... 1001 Leg Bridal Slings). Graders ...... 1001 Table H±11 (Strand Laid .251 Labeling ...... 1000(c) Grommet). Loaders ...... 1001 Table H±12 (Cable Laid .251 Performance Requirements .1001(f),.1002(c) Grommet). Protective Frames ...... 1002 Table H±13 (Strand Laid .251 Remounting ...... 1000(d) Endless SlingsÐMechan- Scrapers ...... 1001 ical Joint Improved Plow Test Procedures ...... 1001(e), Steel Grade Rope). .1002(d)±(h) Table H±14 (Cable Laid .251 Test Setups ...... 1001(e)(iii) Endless SlingsÐMechan- Vehicle Weight (Definition) .. .1001(g), ical Joint). .1002(e) Table H±15 (Manila Rope .251 Runways (see also Passage- Slings). ways): Table H±16 (Nylon Rope .251 Excavations ...... 651(c), (l) Slings). Guarding ...... 500(d) Table H±17 (Polyester Rope .251 Safety Belts (see Belts, Safety Slings). and Seat Belts) Table H±18 (Polypropylene .251 Safety Devices:. Rope Slings). Base-Mounted Drum Hoists .553(a)(3) Records, employee exposure .33 Can, Safety (Definition) ...... 155(1) and medical, access to. Conveyors ...... 555(a)(3) Preservation ...... 33(d) Hoists and Elevators ...... 552(b)(6) and Trade secrets ...... 33(f) (c)(9) Transfer of records ...... 33(h) Liquified Petroleum Gas ...... 153(d) Regulators, use of in gas weld- .350(d),(h) Pneumatic Power Tools ...... 302(b)(8) ing and cutting. Tire Racks ...... 600(a)(2) Rescue teams, underground .800(g)(5) Safety Factor: construction. Definition ...... 32(m) Respiratory Protection ...... 103 Suspension Wire Ropes ...... 552(c)(14)(iii) Excavations ...... 651(g)(1)(iii) Safety Fuses ...... 907 Respirators ...... 103 (b), (c) Safety Nets: (see Nets, Safety): Underground construction ... .800(g)(2) Safety Straps ...... 959 Welding and Cutting ...... 353(c)(3) (see Body Belts, Safety Rigging: Straps and Lanyards, Belts, Cranes and Derricks ...... 550 Safety and Belts) Hoists and Elevators ...... 550 Fabrics ...... 959(1)(i)(ii) Materials Handling ...... 251 Safe Working Loads ...... 252 Ring Buoys ...... 106(c) Table H±19 (Safe Working .252 Riveting ...... 752 Loads for Shackles). Rollover Protective Structures Table H±20 (Number and .252 (see ROPS) Spacing of U-Bolt Wire Roof, Roofing, Brackets ...... 452(h) Rope Clips). Roofing work, built-up ...... 500(g) Salamanders, Solid Fuel ...... 154(d) Roofs, low-pitched; guarding .500(g) Sanitation ...... 27, .51, .950(h) built-up roofing work. Compressed Air ...... 803(k) Ropes: Food Handling ...... 51(d) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550 Temporary Sleeping Quar- .51(e) Definition ...... 960(ee) ters. Natural and Synthetic ...... 251(d) Toilets ...... 51(c) Ropes, Wire: Water ...... 51(a), (b) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550 Scaffolds ...... 450±.454 Hoists and Elevators ...... 552 Access ...... 451(e) Rigging Equipment ...... 251(c) Aerial lifts ...... 453 Suspension ...... 552(c) Boatswains Chair ...... 452(o)

591

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00591 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Pt. 1926, Index 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–99 Edition)

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Part 1926 section Part 1926 section Subject term no. Subject term no.

Bricklayers Square ...... 452(e) Cranes and Derricks ...... 550(a)(4) Carpenters Bracket ...... 452(g) Cranes and Hoists ...... 201(b) Catenary ...... 452(r) Flagmen ...... 201(a) Crawling Boards or Chicken .452(m) Telephones ...... 803(c) Ladders. Signs, Accident Prevention ...... 200 Elevating and Rotating Work .453 Conveyors ...... 555(a)(7) Platforms. Explosives ...... 903(m), .902(h) Fabricated Frame ...... 452(c) Records ...... 803(d) Fall protection ...... 451(g) Site Clearing ...... 604 Falling object protection ...... 451(h) Excavations ...... 651(a), (j) Float (Ship) ...... 452(s) Fire Prevention ...... 151(c) Form ...... 452(g) Skiffs, Lifesaving ...... 106(d) Horse ...... 452(f) Sleeping Quarters, Temporary ... .51(e) Interior Hung ...... 452(t) Slings ...... 551(c) Ladder Jack ...... 452(k) Smoking ...... 151(a)(3) Ladder trucks ...... 453(b)(1) Soil classification for Excavations .652(b), (c), and Manually Propelled Mobile .. .453 Subpt. P App. Masons ...... 452 A Needle Beam ...... 452(u) Spectacles ...... 102 Outrigger ...... 452(i) Splicing ...... 955(c)(7)(iii), Plasterer, Decorators, and .452(d) (d)(7) Large Area. Stairways (see also ladders) ...... 1050±.1052, Pole ...... 452(a) .1060 Pump Jack ...... 452(j) Demolition, use during ...... 851 Repair Bracket ...... 452(x) Spiral stairways ...... 1051(a)(1), Roofing Bracket ...... 452(h) .1052(b)(2) Single-point Adjustable Sus- .452(o) Stairrails and handrails ...... 1052(c) pension. Temporary service ...... 1052(b) Step, Platform ...... 452(n) Training requirements ...... 1060 Stilts ...... 452(y) Standpipes ...... 150(d)(2) Stonesetters ...... 452(q) Steel: Suspension, criteria ...... 451(d) Erection ...... 750±.752 Supported, criteria ...... 451(e) Reinforcing for concrete ...... 701(b), .703(d) Swinging Stage, 2-Point .452 Removal of ...... 858 Suspension. Structural Steel Assembly ... .751 Training ...... 454 Storage: Trestle ladder ...... 452(n) Demolition ...... 857 Tube and Coupler ...... 452(b) Explosives ...... 904 Tubular Welded Frame (fab- .452(c) Indoor ...... 151(d), .152(b) ricated frame). LP Gas Containers ...... 153(j), (k) Window Jack ...... 452(l) Materials Handling ...... 250, .953(c), Screens, Screening ...... 351(e), .353(d) .957(f) Compressed Air ...... 803(m) Open Yard ...... 151(c) Screw Jacks ...... 305 Outdoor ...... 152(c) Seat Belts: Static Charges ...... 551(j) Earthmoving Equipment ...... 602(a)(2) Stringing: Motor Vehicles ...... 601(b)(9) Adjacent to Energized Lines .955(d) Shackles and Hooks ...... 251(f) Deenergized Conductors ...... 955(c) Shafts (see Underground Con- .800(o)(4) Suspension Scaffolds ...... 450±.451, struction). .452(o)±(r), (x), Shielding ...... 351(e) .454 Battery Rooms and Charg- .441(a)(5) Tag Lines ...... 551(c), .955(a), ing. .955(b)(6)(ii) Shipbuilding and Ship Repairing .30 Tags, Accident Prevention ...... 200(h) Ship Scaffolds ...... 452(s) Conveyors ...... 555(a)(7) Shoring: Definition ...... 960(nn) Excavations ...... 652(c) Electric Circuits, Tagging of .417 Concrete and Concrete .703(b) Tanks, Portable, Flammable and .152(c)(4) Forms. Combustible Liquid Outside Signaling, Signals ...... 201 Storage.

592

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00592 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Index

SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND SUBJECT INDEX TO PART 1926ÐSAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONÐ Continued Continued

Subject term Part 1926 section Part 1926 section no. Subject term no.

Temporary Buildings, Fire Pre- .151(b) Blasting ...... 800(p) vention. Check-in/Check-out ...... 800(c) Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) ... .55(a) Communications ...... 800(f) Tire Safety Rack ...... 600(a)(2) Drilling ...... 800(q) Toeboards: Electrical safety ...... 800(s) Scaffolds ...... 451(h) Fire prevention and control .. .800(m) Stand Specifications ...... 500(f) Haulage ...... 800(r) Toilets ...... 51(c) Hazardous classifications .... .800(h) Tools, Hand and Power ...... 300±.305, .951 Hazards instruction and noti- .800(d), (e) Air receivers ...... 306 fication. Grounding ...... 404(f)(7)(iv) Hoisting ...... 800((g)(1), (t) Hand ...... 951(f), .300, Illumination ...... 800(l) .302 Ventilation ...... 800(k) Hotline (Definition) ...... 960(ee) Welding and cutting ...... 800(n) Hydraulic ...... 951(f)(3) Underwater Blasting ...... 912 Inspections ...... 951(d)(2) Vapors (airborne contaminants) .55 Live-line ...... 951(d) Variations (relief) ...... 2 Measuring Ropes ...... 951(e) Ventilation ...... 57 Measuring Tapes ...... 951(e) Air Quality, underground .800(k) Pneumatic ...... 951(f)(4) construction. Portable Electric ...... 951(f)(2) Compressed Air ...... 803(i) Power-transmission appa- .307 Preservative Coatings ...... 354 ratus, mechanical. Temporary Heating Devices .154(a) Switches ...... 951(f)(1) Welding and Cutting ...... 353 Tests ...... 951(d)(1) Vests, Buoyant ...... 106 Torches ...... 350(g) Vinyl chloride ...... 1117 Toxic: Voltage (Definition) ...... 960(qq) Metals (Welding, Cutting .353(c) Walkways (see Passageways and Heating). and Runways) Preservative Coatings ...... 354 Wall: Training and Education ...... 21 Openings, Guarding ...... 500(c) Transformers, Electric ...... 403(i) and (j), Removal ...... 854±.856 and .405(j)(5) Washing Facilities ...... 51(f) Transmitter Towers ...... 550(a)(15) Waste Disposal: (see Disposal). Transportation Dept. (DOT) plac- .61 Water: ards for hazardous materials, Marine Operations ...... 605 retention. Potable ...... 51(a) Trenching (see Excavation) ...... 650±.652 Supply (for Fire Protection) .150(b) Trucks: Working Over or Near ...... 106 Industrial ...... 602(c) Webbing, Synthetic (for Slings) .. .251(e) Off-Highway ...... 602(a)(7) Welding and Cutting ...... 350±.354 Tube and Coupler Scaffolds ...... 452(b) Aerial lifts, standards for ...... 453(b)(5) Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds Electric welders, electrical .406(c) (see Scaffolds (Fabricated connection. Frame)). Eye Protection ...... 102(b) Tunnels and Shafts (see Under- .800 LPG Containers ...... 153(b) ground Construction). Window Jack Scaffolds ...... 452(l) Underground: Windows, Crane Cabs ...... 550(a)(12) Installations ...... 651(b) Wire Ropes (see Ropes, Wire). Lines ...... 956 Wiring, Temporary ...... 401(h) Transportation of Explosives .903 Wood Pole Scaffolds ...... 451(b) Underground construction: Woodworking Tools ...... 304 Access and egress ...... 800(b) X-ray (see Radiation) Air quality ...... 800(h), (j)

593

VerDate 1899 02:45 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00593 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\183110T.XXX 183110T PsN: 183110T FINDING AIDS

A list of CFR titles, subtitles, chapters, subchapters and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are included in the CFR Index and Finding Aids volume to the Code of Federal Regulations which is published separately and revised annually. Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference Table of CFR Titles and Chapters Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR Redesignation Table List of CFR Sections Affected

595

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00002 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

The Director of the Federal Register has approved under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51 the incorporation by reference of the following publications. This list contains only those incorporations by reference effective as of the revision date of this volume. Incorporations by reference found within a regulation are effective upon the effective date of that regulation. For more information on incorporation by reference, see the preliminary pages of this volume. 29 CFR (PART 1926) OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 29 CFR (Copies of the documents listed in this table are available through the Technical Data Center, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC, and through Regional Offices of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. For a complete listing of these addresses, see the end of this table.) American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists P.O. Box 1937, Cincinnati, OH 45201 ACGHI Threshold Limit Values (1970) ...... 1926.55 American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036; Telephone: (212) 642– 4900 ANSI A10.3–70 Safety Requirements for Explosive–Actuated Fas- 1926.302 tening Tools. ANSI A10.4–63 Safety Requirements for Workmen’s Hoists ...... 1926.552 ANSI A10.5–69 Safety Requirements for Material Hoists ...... 1926.552 ANSI A11.1–65 (R 70) Practices for Industrial Lighting (IES RP7– 1926.56 1965). ANSI A14.1–69 Safety Code for Portable Wood Ladders ...... 1926.450; 1926.451 ANSI A14.2–56 Safety Code for Portable Metal Ladders ...... 1926.450; 1926.451 ANSI A14.3–56 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders ...... 1926.450 ANSI A17.1–65 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving 1926.552 Walks. ANSI A17.1a–67 Supplement to A17.1–65 ...... 1926.552 ANSI A17.1b–68 Supplement to A17.1–65 and A17.1a–67 ...... 1926.552 ANSI A17.1c–69 Supplement to A17.1–65, A17.1a–67, and A17.1b– 1926.552 68. ANSI A17.1d–70 Supplement to A17.1–65, A17.1a–67, A17.1b–68, 1926.552 and A17.1c–69. ANSI A17.2–60 Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s 1926.552 Manual). ANSI A17.2a–65 Addenda to A17.2–60 ...... 1926.552 ANSI A17.2B–67 Supplement to A17.2–60 ...... 1926.552 ANSI A92.2–69 Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Plat- 1926.451; 1926.453 forms. ANSI A120.1–70 Safety Code for Power-Operated Platforms Used 1926.451 for Exterior Building Maintenance. 597

VerDate 1899 13:25 Aug 09, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00003 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX pfrm03 PsN: 183110B Title 29—Labor 29 CFR (PART 1926)—Continued OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR—Continued 29 CFR ANSI B7.1–70 Safety Code for the Use, Care and Protection of Abra- 1926.303 sive Wheels. ANSI B15.1–53 (R 58) Safety Code for Mechanical Power-Trans- 1926.300; 1926.550 mission Apparatus. ANSI B20.1–57 Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways and Related 1926.555 Equipment. ANSI B30.2.0–67 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Partial 1926.550 Revision of B30.2–43). ANSI B30.5–68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive and Truck 1926.550 Cranes (Partial Revision of B30.2–43). ANSI B30.6–69 Safety Code for Derricks (Partial Revision of B30.2– 1926.550 43). ANSI B56.1—69 Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks (ISO 1926.602 R1074). ANSI D6.1—71 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets 1926.200; 1926.201; and Highways. 1926.202 ANSI J6.1—50 (R 71) Rubber Insulating Line Hose ...... 1926.951 ANSI J6.2—50 (R 71) Rubber Insulating Hoods ...... 1926.951 ANSI J6.4—71 Rubber Insulating Blankets ...... 1926.951 ANSI J6.5—71 Rubber Insulating Sleeves ...... 1926.951 ANSI J6.6—71 Rubber Insulating Gloves ...... 1926.951 ANSI J6.7—35 Rubber Matting for Use Around Electrical Apparatus 1926.951 ANSI O1.1—61 Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery ...... 1926.304 ANSI Z35.1—68 Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs ...... 1926.200 ANSI Z35.2—68 Specifications for Accident Prevention Tags ...... 1926.200 ANSI Z49.1—67 Safety in Welding and Cutting ...... 1926.350 ANSI Z87.1—68 Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and 1926.102 Face Protection (Partial Revision of Z2.1—59). ANSI Z89.1—69 Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection 1926.100 ANSI Z89.2—71 Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets 1926.100; 1926.951 for Electrical Workers, Class B. American Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE) 2950 Niles Rd., P.O. Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085 ASAE R313 Soil Cone Penetrometer, 1971 ...... 1926.1002 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016–5990; Telephone: (800) THE–ASME Power Boilers (Sec. I), 1968 ...... 1926.603 Pressure Vessels (Sec. VIII), 1968 ...... 1926.603 American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959; Tele- phone: (610) 832–9585, FAX: (610) 832–9555 ASTM A 370–68 Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing 1926.1001 of Steel Products. ASTM B 117–64 (50 Hour Test) ...... 1926.959 ASTM D 56–69 Test for Flash Point by the Tag Closed Tester ...... 1926.155 ASTM D 93–69 Test for Flash Point by the Pensky-Martens Closed 1926.155 Tester. ASTM D 323–58 (R–68) Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products 1926.155 (Reid Method).

598

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00004 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference 29 CFR (PART 1926)—Continued OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR—Continued 29 CFR California, State of Construction Safety Orders, Department of Industrial Relations: Divi- 1926.1000 sion 5, Labor Code, Section 6312. Commerce, Department of National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly National 1926.451 Bureau of Standards) (Dept. of Commerce) PS 1–66, American Ply- wood Association (1966); PS 20–79, American Softwood Lumber Association (1970). General Services Administration QQ–P–416, Federal Specification Plating Cadmium (Electrodeposited) 1926.104 Institute of Makers of Explosives 1420 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017 Publication No. 2, June 5, 1964, American Table of Distances for 1926.914 Storage of Explosives. Publication No. 20, March 1968, Radio Frequency Energy—A Potential 1926.900 Hazard in the Use of Electric Blasting Caps. Interior, Department of Bureau of Reclamation (Dept. of Interior) Safety and Health Regula- 1926.1000 tions for Construction, Part II, (Sept. 1971). National Fire Protection Association 11 Tracy Drive, Avon, MA 02322; Telephone: (800) 344–3555 NFPA 10A—1970 Recommended Good Practice for the Maintenance 1926.150 and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers. NFPA 13—1969 Standards for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 1926.152 NFPA 30—1969 Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code, Chapters 1926.152 III and IV. NFPA 70—1971 National Electrical Code (ANSI C1–1971) ...... 1926.151; 1926.351; 1926.400; 1926.401; 1926.404; 1926.803 NFPA 80—1970 Standards for Fire Doors and Windows ...... 1926.152 NFPA 251—1969 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Con- 1926.151; 1926.155 struction and Materials. NFPA 385—1966 Recommended Regulatory Standards for Tank Vehi- 1926.152 cles and Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Power Crane and Shovel Association Std. No. 1—1968 Mobile Crane and Excavator Standards ...... 1926.602 Std. No. 2—1968 Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standards ...... 1926.550; 1926.602 Std. No. 3—1969 Mobile Hydraulic Excavator Standards ...... 1926.602 Society of Automotive Engineers 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096; Telephone: (412) 776–4841 SAE Handbook—1970, pages 1088–1103 (Nomenclature and Descrip- 1926.602 tion). SAE Handbook—1971 ...... 1926.1001; 1926.1002 SAE J166—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Brake Systems 1926.602 for Off-Highway Trucks and Wagons. SAE J167—1970 Protective Frame with Overhead Protection—Test 1926.1003 Procedures and Performance Requirements. 599

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00005 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 29—Labor 29 CFR (PART 1926)—Continued OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR—Continued 29 CFR SAE J168 (July 1970) Protective Enclosures—Test Procedures and 1926.1002 Performance Requirements. SAE J236—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Brake Systems 1926.602 for Rubber-Tire Self-Propelled Graders. SAE J237—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Brake Systems 1926.602 for Off-Highway Rubber-Tired Front End Loaders and Dozers. SAE J319b—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Brake Systems 1926.602 for Off-Highway Rubber-Tired Self-Propelled Scrapers. SAE J320a—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- 1926.1001 tive Structures for Rubber-Tired Self-Propelled Scrapers. SAE J321a—1970 Fenders for Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage 1926.602 Equipment. SAE J333a—1970 Operation Protection for Wheel-Type Agricultural 1926.602; 1926.1002 and Industry Tractors. SAE J334a—1970 Protective Frame Test Procedures and Performance 1926.1002 Requirements. SAE J386—1969 Seat Belt for Construction Equipment ...... 1926.602 SAE J394—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- 1926.1001 tive Structures for Rubber-Tired Front End Loaders and Rubber- Tired Dozers. SAE J395—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Protective 1926.1001 Structures for Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type Loaders. SAE J396—1971 Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- 1926.1001 tive Structures for Motor Graders. SAE J397—1969 Critical Zone Characteristics and Dimensions for 1926.1001 Operators of Construction and Industrial Machinery. SAE J743a—1964 Tractor Mounted Side Boom ...... 1926.550 SAE J959—1966 Lifting Crane Wire-Rope Strength Factors ...... 1926.550

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers EM–385–1 (Mar. 1967), General Safety Require- 1926.1000 ments.

Addresses Technical Data Center: Frances Perkins Department of Labor Build- ing, Room N2625, 200 Constitution Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20210. Boston Regional Office—Region I: Regional Administrator, U.S. De- partment of Labor—OSHA, JFK Federal Building, Rm. E–340, Bos- ton, MA 02203. New York Regional Office—Region II: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 201 Varick St., Room 670, New York, NY 10014. Philadelphia Regional Office—Region III: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, Gateway Bldg., Suite 2100, 3535 Market St., Philadelphia, PA 19104. Atlanta Regional Office—Region IV: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 1375 Peachtree St., NE., Suite 587, Atlanta, GA 30367. Chicago Regional Office—Region V: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 32nd Fl., Room 3244, 230 S. Dearborn St., Chicago, IL 60604.

600

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00006 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference 29 CFR (PART 1926)—Continued OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR—Continued 29 CFR Dallas Regional Office—Region VI: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 555 Griffin St., Room 602, Dallas, TX 75202. Kansas City Regional Office—Region VII: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 1100 Main St., Kansas City, MO 64106. Denver Regional Office—Region VIII: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 1999 Broadway, Suite 1690, Denver, CO 80202–5716. San Francisco Regional Office—Region IX: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 71 Stevenson St., Suite 420, San Francisco, CA 94105. Seattle Regional Office—Region X: Regional Administrator, U.S. Department of Labor—OSHA, 1111 Third Avenue, Suite 715, Se- attle, WA 98101–3212.

601

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00007 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00008 Fmt 8187 Sfmt 8187 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Table of CFR Titles and Chapters (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

Title 1—General Provisions

I Administrative Committee of the Federal Register (Parts 1—49) II Office of the Federal Register (Parts 50—299) IV Miscellaneous Agencies (Parts 400—500)

Title 2—[Reserved]

Title 3—The President

I Executive Office of the President (Parts 100—199)

Title 4—Accounts

I General Accounting Office (Parts 1—99) II Federal Claims Collection Standards (General Accounting Of- fice—Department of Justice) (Parts 100—299)

Title 5—Administrative Personnel

I Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1—1199) II Merit Systems Protection Board (Parts 1200—1299) III Office of Management and Budget (Parts 1300—1399) IV Advisory Committee on Federal Pay (Parts 1400—1499) V The International Organizations Employees Loyalty Board (Parts 1500—1599) VI Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Parts 1600—1699) VII Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations (Parts 1700—1799) VIII Office of Special Counsel (Parts 1800—1899) IX Appalachian Regional Commission (Parts 1900—1999) XI Armed Forces Retirement Home (Part 2100) XIV Federal Labor Relations Authority, General Counsel of the Fed- eral Labor Relations Authority and Federal Service Impasses Panel (Parts 2400—2499) XV Office of Administration, Executive Office of the President (Parts 2500—2599) XVI Office of Government Ethics (Parts 2600—2699) XXI Department of the Treasury (Parts 3100—3199)

603

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00009 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 5—Administrative Personnel—Continued Chap.

XXII Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Part 3201) XXIII Department of Energy (Part 3301) XXIV Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (Part 3401) XXV Department of the Interior (Part 3501) XXVI Department of Defense (Part 3601) XXVIII Department of Justice (Part 3801) XXIX Federal Communications Commission (Parts 3900—3999) XXX Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 4000—4099) XXXI Farm Credit Administration (Parts 4100—4199) XXXIII Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Part 4301) XXXV Office of Personnel Management (Part 4501) XL Interstate Commerce Commission (Part 5001) XLI Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Part 5101) XLII Department of Labor (Part 5201) XLIII National Science Foundation (Part 5301) XLV Department of Health and Human Services (Part 5501) XLVI Postal Rate Commission (Part 5601) XLVII Federal Trade Commission (Part 5701) XLVIII Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Part 5801) L Department of Transportation (Part 6001) LII Export-Import Bank of the United States (Part 6201) LIII Department of Education (Parts 6300—6399) LIV Environmental Protection Agency (Part 6401) LVII General Services Administration (Part 6701) LVIII Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Part 6801) LIX National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Part 6901) LX United States Postal Service (Part 7001) LXI National Labor Relations Board (Part 7101) LXII Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Part 7201) LXIII Inter-American Foundation (Part 7301) LXV Department of Housing and Urban Development (Part 7501) LXVI National Archives and Records Administration (Part 7601) LXIX Tennessee Valley Authority (Part 7901) LXXI Consumer Product Safety Commission (Part 8101) LXXIV Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission (Part 8401) LXXVI Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Part 8601) LXXVII Office of Management and Budget (Part 8701)

Title 6—[Reserved]

Title 7—Agriculture

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF AGRICULTURE (PARTS 0—26) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

604

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00010 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 7—Agriculture—Continued Chap.

I Agricultural Marketing Service (Standards, Inspections, Mar- keting Practices), Department of Agriculture (Parts 27—209) II Food and Nutrition Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 210—299) III Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department of Ag- riculture (Parts 300—399) IV Federal Crop Insurance Corporation, Department of Agriculture (Parts 400—499) V Agricultural Research Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 500—599) VI Natural Resources Conservation Service, Department of Agri- culture (Parts 600—699) VII Farm Service Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 700— 799) VIII Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards Administration (Fed- eral Grain Inspection Service), Department of Agriculture (Parts 800—899) IX Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements and Or- ders; Fruits, Vegetables, Nuts), Department of Agriculture (Parts 900—999) X Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements and Or- ders; Milk), Department of Agriculture (Parts 1000—1199) XI Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements and Or- ders; Miscellaneous Commodities), Department of Agriculture (Parts 1200—1299) XIII Northeast Dairy Compact Commission (Parts 1300—1399) XIV Commodity Credit Corporation, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1400—1499) XV Foreign Agricultural Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1500—1599) XVI Rural Telephone Bank, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1600— 1699) XVII Rural Utilities Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1700— 1799) XVIII Rural Housing Service, Rural Business-Cooperative Service, Rural Utilities Service, and Farm Service Agency, Depart- ment of Agriculture (Parts 1800—2099) XXVI Office of Inspector General, Department of Agriculture (Parts 2600—2699) XXVII Office of Information Resources Management, Department of Agriculture (Parts 2700—2799) XXVIII Office of Operations, Department of Agriculture (Parts 2800— 2899) XXIX Office of Energy, Department of Agriculture (Parts 2900—2999) XXX Office of the Chief Financial Officer, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3000—3099) XXXI Office of Environmental Quality, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3100—3199) XXXII Office of Procurement and Property Management, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3200—3299)

605

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00011 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 7—Agriculture—Continued Chap.

XXXIII Office of Transportation, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3300—3399) XXXIV Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3400—3499) XXXV Rural Housing Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3500— 3599) XXXVI National Agricultural Statistics Service, Department of Agri- culture (Parts 3600—3699) XXXVII Economic Research Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3700—3799) XXXVIII World Agricultural Outlook Board, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3800—3899) XLI [Reserved] XLII Rural Business-Cooperative Service and Rural Utilities Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 4200—4299)

Title 8—Aliens and Nationality

I Immigration and Naturalization Service, Department of Justice (Parts 1—499)

Title 9—Animals and Animal Products

I Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department of Ag- riculture (Parts 1—199) II Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards Administration (Packers and Stockyards Programs), Department of Agri- culture (Parts 200—299) III Food Safety and Inspection Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 300—599)

Title 10—Energy

I Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 0—199) II Department of Energy (Parts 200—699) III Department of Energy (Parts 700—999) X Department of Energy (General Provisions) (Parts 1000—1099) XVII Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board (Parts 1700—1799)

Title 11—Federal Elections

I Federal Election Commission (Parts 1—9099)

Title 12—Banks and Banking

I Comptroller of the Currency, Department of the Treasury (Parts 1—199) II Federal Reserve System (Parts 200—299) III Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Parts 300—399)

606

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00012 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 12—Banks and Banking—Continued Chap.

IV Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 400—499) V Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the Treasury (Parts 500—599) VI Farm Credit Administration (Parts 600—699) VII National Credit Union Administration (Parts 700—799) VIII Federal Financing Bank (Parts 800—899) IX Federal Housing Finance Board (Parts 900—999) XI Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council (Parts 1100—1199) XIV Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 1400—1499) XV Department of the Treasury (Parts 1500—1599) XVII Office of Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 1700—1799) XVIII Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, Depart- ment of the Treasury (Parts 1800—1899)

Title 13—Business Credit and Assistance

I Small Business Administration (Parts 1—199) III Economic Development Administration, Department of Com- merce (Parts 300—399)

Title 14—Aeronautics and Space

I Federal Aviation Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 1—199) II Office of the Secretary, Department of Transportation (Aviation Proceedings) (Parts 200—399) III Commercial Space Transportation, Federal Aviation Adminis- tration, Department of Transportation (Parts 400—499) V National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 1200— 1299)

Title 15—Commerce and Foreign Trade

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF COMMERCE (PARTS 0— 29) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO COMMERCE AND FOREIGN TRADE I Bureau of the Census, Department of Commerce (Parts 30—199) II National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce (Parts 200—299) III International Trade Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 300—399) IV Foreign-Trade Zones Board, Department of Commerce (Parts 400—499) VII Bureau of Export Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 700—799)

607

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00013 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 15—Commerce and Foreign Trade—Continued Chap.

VIII Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce (Parts 800—899) IX National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 900—999) XI Technology Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 1100—1199) XIII East-West Foreign Trade Board (Parts 1300—1399) XIV Minority Business Development Agency (Parts 1400—1499) SUBTITLE C—REGULATIONS RELATING TO FOREIGN TRADE AGREE- MENTS XX Office of the United States Trade Representative (Parts 2000— 2099) SUBTITLE D—REGULATIONS RELATING TO TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION XXIII National Telecommunications and Information Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 2300—2399)

Title 16—Commercial Practices

I Federal Trade Commission (Parts 0—999) II Consumer Product Safety Commission (Parts 1000—1799)

Title 17—Commodity and Securities Exchanges

I Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Parts 1—199) II Securities and Exchange Commission (Parts 200—399) IV Department of the Treasury (Parts 400—499)

Title 18—Conservation of Power and Water Resources

I Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, Department of Energy (Parts 1—399) III Delaware River Basin Commission (Parts 400—499) VI Water Resources Council (Parts 700—799) VIII Susquehanna River Basin Commission (Parts 800—899) XIII Tennessee Valley Authority (Parts 1300—1399)

Title 19—Customs Duties

I United States Customs Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 1—199) II United States International Trade Commission (Parts 200—299) III International Trade Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 300—399)

608

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00014 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 20—Employees’ Benefits Chap.

I Office of Workers’ Compensation Programs, Department of Labor (Parts 1—199) II Railroad Retirement Board (Parts 200—399) III Social Security Administration (Parts 400—499) IV Employees’ Compensation Appeals Board, Department of Labor (Parts 500—599) V Employment and Training Administration, Department of Labor (Parts 600—699) VI Employment Standards Administration, Department of Labor (Parts 700—799) VII Benefits Review Board, Department of Labor (Parts 800—899) VIII Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries (Parts 900—999) IX Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans’ Employment and Training, Department of Labor (Parts 1000—1099)

Title 21—Food and Drugs

I Food and Drug Administration, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 1—1299) II Drug Enforcement Administration, Department of Justice (Parts 1300—1399) III Office of National Drug Control Policy (Parts 1400—1499)

Title 22—Foreign Relations

I Department of State (Parts 1—199) II Agency for International Development (Parts 200—299) III Peace Corps (Parts 300—399) IV International Joint Commission, United States and Canada (Parts 400—499) V United States Information Agency (Parts 500—599) VII Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Parts 700—799) IX Foreign Service Grievance Board Regulations (Parts 900—999) X Inter-American Foundation (Parts 1000—1099) XI International Boundary and Water Commission, United States and Mexico, United States Section (Parts 1100—1199) XII United States International Development Cooperation Agency (Parts 1200—1299) XIII Board for International Broadcasting (Parts 1300—1399) XIV Foreign Service Labor Relations Board; Federal Labor Relations Authority; General Counsel of the Federal Labor Relations Authority; and the Foreign Service Impasse Disputes Panel (Parts 1400—1499) XV African Development Foundation (Parts 1500—1599) XVI Japan-United States Friendship Commission (Parts 1600—1699) XVII United States Institute of Peace (Parts 1700—1799)

609

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00015 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 23—Highways Chap.

I Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 1—999) II National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 1200—1299) III National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 1300—1399)

Title 24—Housing and Urban Development

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY, DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (PARTS 0—99) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO HOUSING AND URBAN DE- VELOPMENT I Office of Assistant Secretary for Equal Opportunity, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 100—199) II Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing-Federal Housing Com- missioner, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 200—299) III Government National Mortgage Association, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 300—399) IV Office of Multifamily Housing Assistance Restructuring, Depart- ment of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 400—499) V Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning and De- velopment, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 500—599) VI Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning and De- velopment, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 600—699) [Reserved] VII Office of the Secretary, Department of Housing and Urban Devel- opment (Housing Assistance Programs and Public and Indian Housing Programs) (Parts 700—799) VIII Office of the Assistant Secretary for Housing—Federal Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and Urban Develop- ment (Section 8 Housing Assistance Programs, Section 202 Di- rect Loan Program, Section 202 Supportive Housing for the El- derly Program and Section 811 Supportive Housing for Persons With Disabilities Program) (Parts 800—899) IX Office of Assistant Secretary for Public and Indian Housing, De- partment of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 900—999) X Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing—Federal Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and Urban Develop- ment (Interstate Land Sales Registration Program) (Parts 1700—1799) XII Office of Inspector General, Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 2000—2099) XX Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing—Federal Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and Urban Develop- ment (Parts 3200—3899) XXV Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation (Parts 4100—4199)

610

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00016 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 25—Indians Chap.

I Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior (Parts 1— 299) II Indian Arts and Crafts Board, Department of the Interior (Parts 300—399) III National Indian Gaming Commission, Department of the Inte- rior (Parts 500—599) IV Office of Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation (Parts 700—799) V Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior, and Indian Health Service, Department of Health and Human Services (Part 900) VI Office of the Assistant Secretary-Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior (Part 1001) VII Office of the Special Trustee for American Indians, Department of the Interior (Part 1200)

Title 26—Internal Revenue

I Internal Revenue Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 1— 799)

Title 27—Alcohol, Tobacco Products and Firearms

I Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Department of the Treasury (Parts 1—299)

Title 28—Judicial Administration

I Department of Justice (Parts 0—199) III Federal Prison Industries, Inc., Department of Justice (Parts 300—399) V Bureau of Prisons, Department of Justice (Parts 500—599) VI Offices of Independent Counsel, Department of Justice (Parts 600—699) VII Office of Independent Counsel (Parts 700—799)

Title 29—Labor

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF LABOR (PARTS 0—99) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR I National Labor Relations Board (Parts 100—199) II Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of Labor (Parts 200—299) III National Railroad Adjustment Board (Parts 300—399) IV Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of Labor (Parts 400—499) V Wage and Hour Division, Department of Labor (Parts 500—899) IX Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission (Parts 900—999) X National Mediation Board (Parts 1200—1299)

611

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 29—Labor—Continued Chap.

XII Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (Parts 1400—1499) XIV Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Parts 1600—1699) XVII Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor (Parts 1900—1999) XX Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (Parts 2200—2499) XXV Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration, Department of Labor (Parts 2500—2599) XXVII Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission (Parts 2700—2799) XL Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation (Parts 4000—4999)

Title 30—Mineral Resources

I Mine Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor (Parts 1—199) II Minerals Management Service, Department of the Interior (Parts 200—299) III Board of Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Department of the Interior (Parts 300—399) IV Geological Survey, Department of the Interior (Parts 400—499) VI Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior (Parts 600—699) VII Office of Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, Depart- ment of the Interior (Parts 700—999)

Title 31—Money and Finance: Treasury

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY (PARTS 0—50) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO MONEY AND FINANCE I Monetary Offices, Department of the Treasury (Parts 51—199) II Fiscal Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 200—399) IV Secret Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 400—499) V Office of Foreign Assets Control, Department of the Treasury (Parts 500—599) VI Bureau of Engraving and Printing, Department of the Treasury (Parts 600—699) VII Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Department of the Treasury (Parts 700—799) VIII Office of International Investment, Department of the Treasury (Parts 800—899)

Title 32—National Defense

SUBTITLE A—DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE I Office of the Secretary of Defense (Parts 1—399) V Department of the Army (Parts 400—699) VI Department of the Navy (Parts 700—799)

612

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00018 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 32—National Defense—Continued Chap.

VII Department of the Air Force (Parts 800—1099) SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO NATIONAL DE- FENSE XII Defense Logistics Agency (Parts 1200—1299) XVI Selective Service System (Parts 1600—1699) XIX Central Intelligence Agency (Parts 1900—1999) XX Information Security Oversight Office, National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 2000—2099) XXI National Security Council (Parts 2100—2199) XXIV Office of Science and Technology Policy (Parts 2400—2499) XXVII Office for Micronesian Status Negotiations (Parts 2700—2799) XXVIII Office of the Vice President of the United States (Parts 2800— 2899) XXIX Presidential Commission on the Assignment of Women in the Armed Forces (Part 2900)

Title 33—Navigation and Navigable Waters

I Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1—199) II Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 200—399) IV Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation, Department of Transportation (Parts 400—499)

Title 34—Education

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY, DEPARTMENT OF EDU- CATION (PARTS 1—99) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS OF THE OFFICES OF THE DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION I Office for Civil Rights, Department of Education (Parts 100—199) II Office of Elementary and Secondary Education, Department of Education (Parts 200—299) III Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, Depart- ment of Education (Parts 300—399) IV Office of Vocational and Adult Education, Department of Edu- cation (Parts 400—499) V Office of Bilingual Education and Minority Languages Affairs, Department of Education (Parts 500—599) VI Office of Postsecondary Education, Department of Education (Parts 600—699) VII Office of Educational Research and Improvement, Department of Education (Parts 700—799) XI National Institute for Literacy (Parts 1100—1199) SUBTITLE C—REGULATIONS RELATING TO EDUCATION XII National Council on Disability (Parts 1200—1299)

613

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 35—Panama Canal Chap.

I Panama Canal Regulations (Parts 1—299)

Title 36—Parks, Forests, and Public Property

I National Park Service, Department of the Interior (Parts 1—199) II Forest Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 200—299) III Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 300—399) IV American Battle Monuments Commission (Parts 400—499) V Smithsonian Institution (Parts 500—599) VII Library of Congress (Parts 700—799) VIII Advisory Council on Historic Preservation (Parts 800—899) IX Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation (Parts 900—999) X Presidio Trust (Parts 1000—1099) XI Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (Parts 1100—1199) XII National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 1200—1299) XIV Assassination Records Review Board (Parts 1400—1499)

Title 37—Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights

I Patent and Trademark Office, Department of Commerce (Parts 1—199) II Copyright Office, Library of Congress (Parts 200—299) IV Assistant Secretary for Technology Policy, Department of Com- merce (Parts 400—499) V Under Secretary for Technology, Department of Commerce (Parts 500—599)

Title 38—Pensions, Bonuses, and Veterans’ Relief

I Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 0—99)

Title 39—Postal Service

I United States Postal Service (Parts 1—999) III Postal Rate Commission (Parts 3000—3099)

Title 40—Protection of Environment

I Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1—799) V Council on Environmental Quality (Parts 1500—1599) VII Environmental Protection Agency and Department of Defense; Uniform National Discharge Standards for Vessels of the Armed Forces (Parts 1700—1799)

Title 41—Public Contracts and Property Management

SUBTITLE B—OTHER PROVISIONS RELATING TO PUBLIC CONTRACTS

614

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00020 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 41—Public Contracts and Property Management—Continued Chap.

50 Public Contracts, Department of Labor (Parts 50–1—50–999) 51 Committee for Purchase From People Who Are Blind or Severely Disabled (Parts 51–1—51–99) 60 Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employ- ment Opportunity, Department of Labor (Parts 60–1—60–999) 61 Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans Employment and Training, Department of Labor (Parts 61–1—61–999) SUBTITLE C—FEDERAL PROPERTY MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS SYSTEM 101 Federal Property Management Regulations (Parts 101–1—101–99) 105 General Services Administration (Parts 105–1—105–999) 109 Department of Energy Property Management Regulations (Parts 109–1—109–99) 114 Department of the Interior (Parts 114–1—114–99) 115 Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 115–1—115–99) 128 Department of Justice (Parts 128–1—128–99) SUBTITLE D—OTHER PROVISIONS RELATING TO PROPERTY MANAGE- MENT [RESERVED] SUBTITLE E—FEDERAL INFORMATION RESOURCES MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS SYSTEM 201 Federal Information Resources Management Regulation (Parts 201–1—201–99) [Reserved] SUBTITLE F—FEDERAL TRAVEL REGULATION SYSTEM 300 General (Parts 300–1—300.99) 301 Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances (Parts 301–1—301–99) 302 Relocation Allowances (Parts 302–1—302–99) 303 Payment of Expenses Connected with the Death of Certain Em- ployees (Parts 303–1—303–2) 304 Payment from a Non-Federal Source for Travel Expenses (Parts 304–1—304–99)

Title 42—Public Health

I Public Health Service, Department of Health and Human Serv- ices (Parts 1—199) IV Health Care Financing Administration, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 400—499) V Office of Inspector General-Health Care, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 1000—1999)

Title 43—Public Lands: Interior

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF THE INTERIOR (PARTS 1—199) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO PUBLIC LANDS I Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the Interior (Parts 200— 499) II Bureau of Land Management, Department of the Interior (Parts 1000—9999)

615

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00021 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 43—Public Lands: Interior—Continued Chap.

III Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation Commission (Parts 10000—10005)

Title 44—Emergency Management and Assistance

I Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 0—399) IV Department of Commerce and Department of Transportation (Parts 400—499)

Title 45—Public Welfare

SUBTITLE A—DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (PARTS 1—199) SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO PUBLIC WELFARE II Office of Family Assistance (Assistance Programs), Administra- tion for Children and Families, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 200—299) III Office of Child Support Enforcement (Child Support Enforce- ment Program), Administration for Children and Families, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 300—399) IV Office of Refugee Resettlement, Administration for Children and Families Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 400—499) V Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United States, Department of Justice (Parts 500—599) VI National Science Foundation (Parts 600—699) VII Commission on Civil Rights (Parts 700—799) VIII Office of Personnel Management (Parts 800—899) X Office of Community Services, Administration for Children and Families, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 1000—1099) XI National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities (Parts 1100—1199) XII Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 1200— 1299) XIII Office of Human Development Services, Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 1300—1399) XVI Legal Services Corporation (Parts 1600—1699) XVII National Commission on Libraries and Information Science (Parts 1700—1799) XVIII Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation (Parts 1800—1899) XXI Commission on Fine Arts (Parts 2100—2199) XXII Christopher Columbus Quincentenary Jubilee Commission (Parts 2200—2299) XXIII Arctic Research Commission (Part 2301) XXIV James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation (Parts 2400— 2499) XXV Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 2500— 2599)

616

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00022 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 46—Shipping Chap.

I Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1—199) II Maritime Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 200—399) III Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage), Department of Transpor- tation (Parts 400—499) IV Federal Maritime Commission (Parts 500—599)

Title 47—Telecommunication

I Federal Communications Commission (Parts 0—199) II Office of Science and Technology Policy and National Security Council (Parts 200—299) III National Telecommunications and Information Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 300—399)

Title 48—Federal Acquisition Regulations System

1 Federal Acquisition Regulation (Parts 1—99) 2 Department of Defense (Parts 200—299) 3 Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 300—399) 4 Department of Agriculture (Parts 400—499) 5 General Services Administration (Parts 500—599) 6 Department of State (Parts 600—699) 7 United States Agency for International Development (Parts 700—799) 8 Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 800—899) 9 Department of Energy (Parts 900—999) 10 Department of the Treasury (Parts 1000—1099) 12 Department of Transportation (Parts 1200—1299) 13 Department of Commerce (Parts 1300—1399) 14 Department of the Interior (Parts 1400—1499) 15 Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1500—1599) 16 Office of Personnel Management Federal Employees Health Ben- efits Acquisition Regulation (Parts 1600—1699) 17 Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1700—1799) 18 National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 1800— 1899) 19 United States Information Agency (Parts 1900—1999) 20 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 2000—2099) 21 Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal Acquisition Regulation (Parts 2100—2199) 23 Social Security Administration (Parts 2300—2399) 24 Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 2400— 2499) 25 National Science Foundation (Parts 2500—2599) 28 Department of Justice (Parts 2800—2899) 29 Department of Labor (Parts 2900—2999)

617

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00023 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 48—Federal Acquisition Regulations System—Continued Chap.

34 Department of Education Acquisition Regulation (Parts 3400— 3499) 35 Panama Canal Commission (Parts 3500—3599) 44 Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 4400—4499) 51 Department of the Army Acquisition Regulations (Parts 5100— 5199) 52 Department of the Navy Acquisition Regulations (Parts 5200— 5299) 53 Department of the Air Force Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (Parts 5300—5399) 54 Defense Logistics Agency, Department of Defense (Part 5452) 57 African Development Foundation (Parts 5700—5799) 61 General Services Administration Board of Contract Appeals (Parts 6100—6199) 63 Department of Transportation Board of Contract Appeals (Parts 6300—6399) 99 Cost Accounting Standards Board, Office of Federal Procure- ment Policy, Office of Management and Budget (Parts 9900— 9999)

Title 49—Transportation

SUBTITLE A—OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF TRANSPORTATION (PARTS 1—99) SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO TRANSPORTATION I Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 100—199) II Federal Railroad Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 200—299) III Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 300—399) IV Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 400—499) V National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 500—599) VI Federal Transit Administration, Department of Transportation (Parts 600—699) VII National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK) (Parts 700—799) VIII National Transportation Safety Board (Parts 800—999) X Surface Transportation Board, Department of Transportation (Parts 1000—1399) XI Bureau of Transportation Statistics, Department of Transpor- tation (Parts 1400—1499)

Title 50—Wildlife and Fisheries

I United States Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of the Inte- rior (Parts 1—199)

618

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00024 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 50—Wildlife and Fisheries—Continued Chap.

II National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic and Atmos- pheric Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 200— 299) III International Fishing and Related Activities (Parts 300—399) IV Joint Regulations (United States Fish and Wildlife Service, De- partment of the Interior and National Marine Fisheries Serv- ice, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, De- partment of Commerce); Endangered Species Committee Reg- ulations (Parts 400—499) V Marine Mammal Commission (Parts 500—599) VI Fishery Conservation and Management, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 600—699)

CFR Index and Finding Aids

Subject/Agency Index List of Agency Prepared Indexes Parallel Tables of Statutory Authorities and Rules List of CFR Titles, Chapters, Subchapters, and Parts Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR

619

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00025 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00026 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Administrative Committee of the Federal Register 1, I Advanced Research Projects Agency 32, I Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations 5, VII Advisory Committee on Federal Pay 5, IV Advisory Council on Historic Preservation 36, VIII African Development Foundation 22, XV Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 57 Agency for International Development, United States 22, II Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 7 Agricultural Marketing Service 7, I, IX, X, XI Agricultural Research Service 7, V Agriculture Department Agricultural Marketing Service 7, I, IX, X, XI Agricultural Research Service 7, V Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service 7, III; 9, I Chief Financial Officer, Office of 7, XXX Commodity Credit Corporation 7, XIV Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension 7, XXXIV Service Economic Research Service 7, XXXVII Energy, Office of 7, XXIX Environmental Quality, Office of 7, XXXI Farm Service Agency 7, VII, XVIII Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 4 Federal Crop Insurance Corporation 7, IV Food and Nutrition Service 7, II Food Safety and Inspection Service 9, III Foreign Agricultural Service 7, XV Forest Service 36, II Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards Administration 7, VIII; 9, II Information Resources Management, Office of 7, XXVII Inspector General, Office of 7, XXVI National Agricultural Library 7, XLI National Agricultural Statistics Service 7, XXXVI Natural Resources Conservation Service 7, VI Operations, Office of 7, XXVIII Procurement and Property Management, Office of 7, XXXII Rural Business-Cooperative Service 7, XVIII, XLII Rural Development Administration 7, XLII Rural Housing Service 7, XVIII, XXXV Rural Telephone Bank 7, XVI Rural Utilities Service 7, XVII, XVIII, XLII Secretary of Agriculture, Office of 7, Subtitle A Transportation, Office of 7, XXXIII World Agricultural Outlook Board 7, XXXVIII Air Force Department 32, VII Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement 48, 53 Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of 27, I AMTRAK 49, VII American Battle Monuments Commission 36, IV American Indians, Office of the Special Trustee 25, VII Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service 7, III; 9, I Appalachian Regional Commission 5, IX

621

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00027 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board 36, XI Arctic Research Commission 45, XXIII Armed Forces Retirement Home 5, XI Army Department 32, V Engineers, Corps of 33, II; 36, III Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 51 Assassination Records Review Board 36, XIV Benefits Review Board 20, VII Bilingual Education and Minority Languages Affairs, Office of 34, V Blind or Severely Disabled, Committee for Purchase From 41, 51 People Who Are Board for International Broadcasting 22, XIII Census Bureau 15, I Central Intelligence Agency 32, XIX Chief Financial Officer, Office of 7, XXX Child Support Enforcement, Office of 45, III Children and Families, Administration for 45, II, III, IV, X Christopher Columbus Quincentenary Jubilee Commission 45, XXII Civil Rights, Commission on 45, VII Civil Rights, Office for 34, I Coast Guard 33, I; 46, I; 49, IV Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage) 46, III Commerce Department 44, IV Census Bureau 15, I Economic Affairs, Under Secretary 37, V Economic Analysis, Bureau of 15, VIII Economic Development Administration 13, III Emergency Management and Assistance 44, IV Export Administration, Bureau of 15, VII Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 13 Fishery Conservation and Management 50, VI Foreign-Trade Zones Board 15, IV International Trade Administration 15, III; 19, III National Institute of Standards and Technology 15, II National Marine Fisheries Service 50, II, IV, VI National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, VI National Telecommunications and Information 15, XXIII; 47, III Administration National Weather Service 15, IX Patent and Trademark Office 37, I Productivity, Technology and Innovation, Assistant 37, IV Secretary for Secretary of Commerce, Office of 15, Subtitle A Technology, Under Secretary for 37, V Technology Administration 15, XI Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for 37, IV Commercial Space Transportation 14, III Commodity Credit Corporation 7, XIV Commodity Futures Trading Commission 5, XLI; 17, I Community Planning and Development, Office of Assistant 24, V, VI Secretary for Community Services, Office of 45, X Comptroller of the Currency 12, I Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission 29, IX Consumer Product Safety Commission 5, LXXI; 16, II Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension 7, XXXIV Service Copyright Office 37, II Corporation for National and Community Service 45, XII, XXV Cost Accounting Standards Board 48, 99 Council on Environmental Quality 40, V Customs Service, United States 19, I Defense Contract Audit Agency 32, I Defense Department 5, XXVI; 32, Subtitle A; 40, VII Advanced Research Projects Agency 32, I Air Force Department 32, VII

622

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00028 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Army Department 32, V; 33, II; 36, III, 48, 51 Defense Intelligence Agency 32, I Defense Logistics Agency 32, I, XII; 48, 54 Engineers, Corps of 33, II; 36, III Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 2 National Imagery and Mapping Agency 32, I Navy Department 32, VI; 48, 52 Secretary of Defense, Office of 32, I Defense Contract Audit Agency 32, I Defense Intelligence Agency 32, I Defense Logistics Agency 32, XII; 48, 54 Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board 10, XVII Delaware River Basin Commission 18, III Drug Enforcement Administration 21, II East-West Foreign Trade Board 15, XIII Economic Affairs, Under Secretary 37, V Economic Analysis, Bureau of 15, VIII Economic Development Administration 13, III Economic Research Service 7, XXXVII Education, Department of 5, LIII Bilingual Education and Minority Languages Affairs, Office 34, V of Civil Rights, Office for 34, I Educational Research and Improvement, Office of 34, VII Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of 34, II Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 34 Postsecondary Education, Office of 34, VI Secretary of Education, Office of 34, Subtitle A Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, Office of 34, III Vocational and Adult Education, Office of 34, IV Educational Research and Improvement, Office of 34, VII Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of 34, II Employees’ Compensation Appeals Board 20, IV Employees Loyalty Board 5, V Employment and Training Administration 20, V Employment Standards Administration 20, VI Endangered Species Committee 50, IV Energy, Department of 5, XXIII; 10, II, III, X Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 9 Federal Energy Regulatory Commission 5, XXIV; 18, I Property Management Regulations 41, 109 Energy, Office of 7, XXIX Engineers, Corps of 33, II; 36, III Engraving and Printing, Bureau of 31, VI Environmental Protection Agency 5, LIV; 40, I, VII Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 15 Property Management Regulations 41, 115 Environmental Quality, Office of 7, XXXI Equal Employment Opportunity Commission 5, LXII; 29, XIV Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant Secretary for 24, I Executive Office of the President 3, I Administration, Office of 5, XV Environmental Quality, Council on 40, V Management and Budget, Office of 25, III, LXXVII; 48, 99 National Drug Control Policy, Office of 21, III National Security Council 32, XXI; 47, 2 Presidential Documents 3 Science and Technology Policy, Office of 32, XXIV; 47, II Trade Representative, Office of the United States 15, XX Export Administration, Bureau of 15, VII Export-Import Bank of the United States 5, LII; 12, IV Family Assistance, Office of 45, II Farm Credit Administration 5, XXXI; 12, VI Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation 5, XXX; 12, XIV Farm Service Agency 7, VII, XVIII Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 1

623

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00029 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Federal Aviation Administration 14, I Commercial Space Transportation 14, III Federal Claims Collection Standards 4, II Federal Communications Commission 5, XXIX; 47, I Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office of 41, 60 Federal Crop Insurance Corporation 7, IV Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 5, XXII; 12, III Federal Election Commission 11, I Federal Emergency Management Agency 44, I Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 44 Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal Acquisition 48, 21 Regulation Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition Regulation 48, 16 Federal Energy Regulatory Commission 5, XXIV; 18, I Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 12, XI Federal Financing Bank 12, VIII Federal Highway Administration 23, I, II; 49, III Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation 1, IV Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight Office 12, XVII Federal Housing Finance Board 12, IX Federal Labor Relations Authority, and General Counsel of 5, XIV; 22, XIV the Federal Labor Relations Authority Federal Law Enforcement Training Center 31, VII Federal Maritime Commission 46, IV Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service 29, XII Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission 5, LXXIV; 29, XXVII Federal Pay, Advisory Committee on 5, IV Federal Prison Industries, Inc. 28, III Federal Procurement Policy Office 48, 99 Federal Property Management Regulations 41, 101 Federal Property Management Regulations System 41, Subtitle C Federal Railroad Administration 49, II Federal Register, Administrative Committee of 1, I Federal Register, Office of 1, II Federal Reserve System 12, II Board of Governors 5, LVIII Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board 5, VI, LXXVI Federal Service Impasses Panel 5, XIV Federal Trade Commission 5, XLVII; 16, I Federal Transit Administration 49, VI Federal Travel Regulation System 41, Subtitle F Fine Arts, Commission on 45, XXI Fiscal Service 31, II Fish and Wildlife Service, United States 50, I, IV Fishery Conservation and Management 50, VI Food and Drug Administration 21, I Food and Nutrition Service 7, II Food Safety and Inspection Service 9, III Foreign Agricultural Service 7, XV Foreign Assets Control, Office of 31, V Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United States 45, V Foreign Service Grievance Board 22, IX Foreign Service Impasse Disputes Panel 22, XIV Foreign Service Labor Relations Board 22, XIV Foreign-Trade Zones Board 15, IV Forest Service 36, II General Accounting Office 4, I, II General Services Administration 5, LVII Contract Appeals, Board of 48, 61 Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 5 Federal Property Management Regulations System 41, 101, 105 Federal Travel Regulation System 41, Subtitle F General 41, 300 Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel Expenses 41, 304 Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death of Certain 41, 303 Employees Relocation Allowances 41, 302

624

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00030 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances 41, 301 Geological Survey 30, IV Government Ethics, Office of 5, XVI Government National Mortgage Association 24, III Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards Administration 7, VIII; 9, II Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation 45, XVIII Health and Human Services, Department of 5, XLV; 45, Subtitle A Child Support Enforcement, Office of 45, III Children and Families, Administration for 45, II, III, IV, X Community Services, Office of 45, X Family Assistance, Office of 45, II Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 3 Food and Drug Administration 21, I Health Care Financing Administration 42, IV Human Development Services, Office of 45, XIII Indian Health Service 25, V Inspector General (Health Care), Office of 42, V Public Health Service 42, I Refugee Resettlement, Office of 45, IV Health Care Financing Administration 42, IV Housing and Urban Development, Department of 5, LXV; 24, Subtitle B Community Planning and Development, Office of Assistant 24, V, VI Secretary for Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant Secretary for 24, I Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 24 Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, Office of 12, XVII Government National Mortgage Association 24, III Housing—Federal Housing Commissioner, Office of 24, II, VIII, X, XX Assistant Secretary for Inspector General, Office of 24, XII Multifamily Housing Assistance Restructuring, Office of 24, IV Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant Secretary for 24, IX Secretary, Office of 24, Subtitle A, VII Housing—Federal Housing Commissioner, Office of Assistant 24, II, VIII, X, XX Secretary for Human Development Services, Office of 45, XIII Immigration and Naturalization Service 8, I Independent Counsel, Office of 28, VII Indian Affairs, Bureau of 25, I, V Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant Secretary 25, VI Indian Arts and Crafts Board 25, II Indian Health Service 25, V Information Agency, United States 22, V Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 19 Information Resources Management, Office of 7, XXVII Information Security Oversight Office, National Archives and 32, XX Records Administration Inspector General Agriculture Department 7, XXVI Health and Human Services Department 42, V Housing and Urban Development Department 24, XII Institute of Peace, United States 22, XVII Inter-American Foundation 5, LXIII; 22, X Intergovernmental Relations, Advisory Commission on 5, VII Interior Department American Indians, Office of the Special Trustee 25, VII Endangered Species Committee 50, IV Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 14 Federal Property Management Regulations System 41, 114 Fish and Wildlife Service, United States 50, I, IV Geological Survey 30, IV Indian Affairs, Bureau of 25, I, V Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant Secretary 25, VI Indian Arts and Crafts Board 25, II Land Management, Bureau of 43, II Minerals Management Service 30, II Mines, Bureau of 30, VI

625

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00031 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter National Indian Gaming Commission 25, III National Park Service 36, I Reclamation, Bureau of 43, I Secretary of the Interior, Office of 43, Subtitle A Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board of 30, III Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, Office of 30, VII Internal Revenue Service 26, I International Boundary and Water Commission, United States 22, XI and Mexico, United States Section International Development, United States Agency for 22, II Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 7 International Development Cooperation Agency, United 22, XII States International Development, United States Agency for 22, II; 48, 7 Overseas Private Investment Corporation 5, XXXIII; 22, VII International Fishing and Related Activities 50, III International Investment, Office of 31, VIII International Joint Commission, United States and Canada 22, IV International Organizations Employees Loyalty Board 5, V International Trade Administration 15, III; 19, III International Trade Commission, United States 19, II Interstate Commerce Commission 5, XL James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation 45, XXIV Japan–United States Friendship Commission 22, XVI Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries 20, VIII Justice Department 5, XXVIII; 28, I Drug Enforcement Administration 21, II Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 28 Federal Claims Collection Standards 4, II Federal Prison Industries, Inc. 28, III Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United 45, V States Immigration and Naturalization Service 8, I Offices of Independent Counsel 28, VI Prisons, Bureau of 28, V Property Management Regulations 41, 128 Labor Department 5, XLII Benefits Review Board 20, VII Employees’ Compensation Appeals Board 20, IV Employment and Training Administration 20, V Employment Standards Administration 20, VI Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 29 Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office of 41, 60 Federal Procurement Regulations System 41, 50 Labor-Management Standards, Office of 29, II, IV Mine Safety and Health Administration 30, I Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29, XVII Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration 29, XXV Public Contracts 41, 50 Secretary of Labor, Office of 29, Subtitle A Veterans’ Employment and Training, Office of the Assistant 41, 61; 20, IX Secretary for Wage and Hour Division 29, V Workers’ Compensation Programs, Office of 20, I Labor-Management Standards, Office of 29, II, IV Land Management, Bureau of 43, II Legal Services Corporation 45, XVI Library of Congress 36, VII Copyright Office 37, II Management and Budget, Office of 5, III, LXXVII; 48, 99 Marine Mammal Commission 50, V Maritime Administration 46, II Merit Systems Protection Board 5, II Micronesian Status Negotiations, Office for 32, XXVII Mine Safety and Health Administration 30, I Minerals Management Service 30, II Mines, Bureau of 30, VI

626

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00032 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Minority Business Development Agency 15, XIV Miscellaneous Agencies 1, IV Monetary Offices 31, I Multifamily Housing Assistance Restructuring, Office of 24, IV National Aeronautics and Space Administration 5, LIX; 14, V Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 18 National Agricultural Library 7, XLI National Agricultural Statistics Service 7, XXXVI National Archives and Records Administration 5, LXVI; 36, XII Information Security Oversight Office 32, XX National Bureau of Standards 15, II National Capital Planning Commission 1, IV National Commission for Employment Policy 1, IV National Commission on Libraries and Information Science 45, XVII National and Community Service, Corporation for 45, XII, XXV National Council on Disability 34, XII National Credit Union Administration 12, VII National Drug Control Policy, Office of 21, III National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities 45, XI National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 23, II, III; 49, V National Imagery and Mapping Agency 32, I National Indian Gaming Commission 25, III National Institute for Literacy 34, XI National Institute of Standards and Technology 15, II National Labor Relations Board 5, LXI; 29, I National Marine Fisheries Service 50, II, IV, VI National Mediation Board 29, X National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, VI National Park Service 36, I National Railroad Adjustment Board 29, III National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK) 49, VII National Science Foundation 5, XLIII; 45, VI Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 25 National Security Council 32, XXI National Security Council and Office of Science and 47, II Technology Policy National Telecommunications and Information 15, XXIII; 47, III Administration National Transportation Safety Board 49, VIII National Weather Service 15, IX Natural Resources Conservation Service 7, VI Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation, Office of 25, IV Navy Department 32, VI Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 52 Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation 24, XXV Northeast Dairy Compact Commission 7, XIII Nuclear Regulatory Commission 5, XLVIII; 10, I Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 20 Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29, XVII Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission 29, XX Offices of Independent Counsel 28, VI Operations Office 7, XXVIII Overseas Private Investment Corporation 5, XXXIII; 22, VII Panama Canal Commission 48, 35 Panama Canal Regulations 35, I Patent and Trademark Office 37, I Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel Expenses 41, 304 Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death of Certain 41, 303 Employees Peace Corps 22, III Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation 36, IX Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration 29, XXV Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation 29, XL Personnel Management, Office of 5, I, XXXV; 45, VIII Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 17 Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal 48, 21 Acquisition Regulation

627

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00033 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition Regulation 48, 16 Postal Rate Commission 5, XLVI; 39, III Postal Service, United States 5, LX; 39, I Postsecondary Education, Office of 34, VI President’s Commission on White House Fellowships 1, IV Presidential Commission on the Assignment of Women in the 32, XXIX Armed Forces Presidential Documents 3 Presidio Trust 36, X Prisons, Bureau of 28, V Procurement and Property Management, Office of 7, XXXII Productivity, Technology and Innovation, Assistant 37, IV Secretary Public Contracts, Department of Labor 41, 50 Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant Secretary for 24, IX Public Health Service 42, I Railroad Retirement Board 20, II Reclamation, Bureau of 43, I Refugee Resettlement, Office of 45, IV Regional Action Planning Commissions 13, V Relocation Allowances 41, 302 Research and Special Programs Administration 49, I Rural Business-Cooperative Service 7, XVIII, XLII Rural Development Administration 7, XLII Rural Housing Service 7, XVIII, XXXV Rural Telephone Bank 7, XVI Rural Utilities Service 7, XVII, XVIII, XLII Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation 33, IV Science and Technology Policy, Office of 32, XXIV Science and Technology Policy, Office of, and National 47, II Security Council Secret Service 31, IV Securities and Exchange Commission 17, II Selective Service System 32, XVI Small Business Administration 13, I Smithsonian Institution 36, V Social Security Administration 20, III; 48, 23 Soldiers’ and Airmen’s Home, United States 5, XI Special Counsel, Office of 5, VIII Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, Office of 34, III State Department 22, I Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 6 Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board of 30, III Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, Office of 30, VII Surface Transportation Board 49, X Susquehanna River Basin Commission 18, VIII Technology Administration 15, XI Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for 37, IV Technology, Under Secretary for 37, V Tennessee Valley Authority 5, LXIX; 18, XIII Thrift Supervision Office, Department of the Treasury 12, V Trade Representative, United States, Office of 15, XX Transportation, Department of 5, L Coast Guard 33, I; 46, I; 49, IV Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage) 46, III Commercial Space Transportation 14, III Contract Appeals, Board of 48, 63 Emergency Management and Assistance 44, IV Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 12 Federal Aviation Administration 14, I Federal Highway Administration 23, I, II; 49, III Federal Railroad Administration 49, II Federal Transit Administration 49, VI Maritime Administration 46, II National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 23, II, III; 49, V Research and Special Programs Administration 49, I Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation 33, IV

628

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00034 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B CFR Title, Subtitle or Agency Chapter Secretary of Transportation, Office of 14, II; 49, Subtitle A Surface Transportation Board 49, X Transportation Statistics Bureau 49, XI Transportation, Office of 7, XXXIII Transportation Statistics Brureau 49, XI Travel Allowances, Temporary Duty (TDY) 41, 301 Treasury Department 5, XXI; 12, XV; 17, IV Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of 27, I Community Development Financial Institutions Fund 12, XVIII Comptroller of the Currency 12, I Customs Service, United States 19, I Engraving and Printing, Bureau of 31, VI Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 10 Federal Law Enforcement Training Center 31, VII Fiscal Service 31, II Foreign Assets Control, Office of 31, V Internal Revenue Service 26, I International Investment, Office of 31, VIII Monetary Offices 31, I Secret Service 31, IV Secretary of the Treasury, Office of 31, Subtitle A Thrift Supervision, Office of 12, V Truman, Harry S. Scholarship Foundation 45, XVIII United States and Canada, International Joint Commission 22, IV United States and Mexico, International Boundary and Water 22, XI Commission, United States Section Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation Commission 43, III Veterans Affairs Department 38, I Federal Acquisition Regulation 48, 8 Veterans’ Employment and Training, Office of the Assistant 41, 61; 20, IX Secretary for Vice President of the United States, Office of 32, XXVIII Vocational and Adult Education, Office of 34, IV Wage and Hour Division 29, V Water Resources Council 18, VI Workers’ Compensation Programs, Office of 20, I World Agricultural Outlook Board 7, XXXVIII

629

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00035 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00036 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Redesignation Table

At 51 FR 25294, July 11, 1986, the Occupational Safety and Health Administra- tion revised the electrical safety standards for construction in Subpart K—Elec- trical (29 CFR part 1926). The revised provisions contain four major parts covering not only the design safety standards for electrical systems, but also safety-related work practices, safety-related maintenance and environmental conditions, and safety requirements for special equipment. The following Distribution Table shows the disposition of the sections formerly found in subpart K.

DISTRIBUTION TABLE DISTRIBUTION TABLEÐCONTINUED

Old section New section Old section New section

1926.400(a) ...... Removed. The old paragraph adopted 1926.401(e) ...... Removed. Requirement is ambiguous in the 1971 NEC by reference. The final that it implies that the resistance be- rule places the relevant NEC require- tween the ground and the grounded ments into the text of the regulation. power conductor is a controlling factor 1926.400(b) ...... 1926.402. in circuit overcurrent protection. Clari- fying the ambiguity would result in a 1926.400(c) ...... 1926.416(a). requirement for measuring the actual 1926.400(d) ...... 1926.416(b)(1). equipment grounding conductor im- 1926.400(e) ...... 1926.403(i)(1) [low voltage]; and pedance under fault conditions. The 1926.403(j)(3) [high voltage]Ðrequire- practicality of such measurements ments are consistent with the 1984 have been questioned and currently NEC.* Minimum clear working space no such requirement exists in the Na- 1 has been increased from 2 ¤2 feet to 3 tional Electrical Code. See discussion feet. of issue No. 4. 1926.400(f) ...... 1926.416(c); reference to NEC has been 1926.401(f) ...... 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(J). removed. 1926.401(g(1) ...... Conductor ampacity is covered by 1926.400(g) ...... 1926.417. 1926.404(f)(8)(ii) for grounding and by 1926.400(h) ...... 1926.404(b)(1). 1926.404(f)(9) for bonding. 1926.401(a) ...... 1926.404(f)(7)(iv); requirement has been 1926.401(g)(2) ..... Bonding as it relates to static electricity reworded to be consistent with the control for material handling is cov- 1984 NEC.* Requirement now lists ered in Subpart F (Fire Protection and specific conditions requiring the Prevention) of part 1926 instead of grounding of portable equipment. Subpart K. Bonding for this purpose is 1926.401(b) ...... 1926.404(f)(7) (iii) and (v); requirement addressed in 1926.151(a)(5) and has been reworded to be consistent 1926.152(e)(2). with the 1984 NEC.* Requirements 1926.401(h) ...... Temporary wiring is covered in 1926.405 now list specific conditions requiring (a)(2). Reference to the NEC has the grounding of fixed equipment. been removed. 1926.401(c) ...... 1926.404(f)(6); requirements relating to 1926.401(i) ...... Covered by 1926.403(i)(2) and impedance and ampacity of grounding 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(B). conductor have been removed to be 1926.401(j)(1) ...... 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(E). consistent with 29 CFR part 1910, 1926.401(j)(2) ...... First sentence removed. Hard usage Subpart S. Briefly, these requirements cords are required by have been removed because the pa- 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(J). Second sentence rameters cannot be accurately meas- is 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(F). Third sentence ured in operational workplaces. Fur- is covered by 1926.403(e) for conduc- ther discussion of OSHA's rationale tors and 1926.405(g)(2)(iii) for hard for removing these requirements can service flexible cords. be found in the preamble to the Sub- 1926.401(j)(3) ...... 1926.416(b)(2). part S final rule document (January 1926.401(j)(4) ...... 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(G); amended to allow 16, 1981, 46 FR 4044, Column 3, Dis- greater flexibility. cussion of Issue No. 5). 1926.402(a)(1) ..... Covered by 1926.403(a), 1926.403(i)(2), 1926.404(f) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(C). 1926.401(d) ...... Ground resistance of driven rod elec- 1926.402(a)(2) ..... 1926.405(j)(2)(i). trodes is covered by 1926.404(f)(10). 1926.402(a)(3) ..... Covered by 1926.403 (a), (b) and (c). 1926.402(a)(4) ..... Covered by 1926.403(b) and 1926.405(g)(2)(iv). 1926.402(a)(5) ..... 1926.405(g)(2)(iii); amended to be consistent with the 1984 NEC.* Splices are now permitted for hard service cords No. 12 and larger only.

631

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8013 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B Title 29—Labor

DISTRIBUTION TABLEÐCONTINUED DISTRIBUTION TABLEÐCONTINUED

Old section New section Old section New section

1926.402(a)(6) ..... 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(1) and 1926.402(c)(4) ..... 1926.405(e); amended to be consistent 1926.408(a)(4)(ii). with the 1984 NEC.* Editorial changes 1926.402(a)(7) ..... Covered by 1926.403(e) and only. 1926.405(g)(2)(iii). 1926.402(d) ...... Covered by 1926.403 (i)(2) and (j)(2) 1926.402(a)(8) ..... Covered by 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (B) and and by 1926.405(j)(5). (I). 1926.402(e) ...... Covered by Subparts F and J of Part 1926.402(a)(9) ..... 1926.405(j)(1)(iii), amended to conform 1926. to 1984 NEC.* Editorial changes only. 1926.403 ...... 1926.441, with minor editorial changes. 1926.402(a)(10) ... 1926.416(e)(1). 1926.404(a) ...... Placed in 1926.449 and amended to 1926.402(a)(11) ... 1926.405(a)(2)(ii)(I); amended to con- conform to 29 CFR Part 1910, Sub- form to the 1984 NEC.* Editorial part S. changes only. 1926.404(b) ...... 1926.407(b); amended to conform to 29 1926.402(a)(12) ... 1926.416(e)(2). CFR Part 1910, Subpart S. 1926.402(b)(1) ..... 1926.404(e)(1)(i); amended to simplify 1926.404(c) ...... Covered by 1926.407 (b)(2) and (d). requirement. 1926.404(d) ...... 1926.432. 1926.402(b)(2) ..... 1926.404(e)(1)(ii); amended to conform 1926.405 ...... 1926.449; amended to include more to 1984 NEC.* Editorial changes only. 1926.402(b)(3) ..... 1926.416(d). definitions and to be consistent with 1926.402(c)(1) ..... 1926.403(h); reworded for clarification. the 1984 NEC.* Editorial changes 1926.402(c)(2) ..... Covered by 1926.403(f) and only. 1926.404(e)(1)(v). * Note: OSHA is using language comparable to the 1984 1926.402(c)(3) ..... Covered by 1926.403(d)(1) and NEC version of these rules. See text for additional 1926.405(b)(2). explanation.

632

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00038 Fmt 8013 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B List of CFR Sections Affected All changes in this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations which were made by documents published in the FEDERAL REGISTER since Jan- uary 1, 1986, are enumerated in the following list. Entries indicate the nature of the changes effected. Page numbers refer to FEDERAL REGISTER pages. The user should consult the entries for chapters and parts as well as sections for revisions. For the period before January 1, 1986, see the ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949–1963, 1964–1972, and 1973–1985,’’ published in seven separate volumes.

1986 29 CFR—Continued 51 FR Page 29 CFR 51 FR Page Chapter XVII—Continued Authority citation added...... 24528 Chapter XVII 1926.151 (a)(1) amended...... 25318 1926 Authority citations re- 1926.152 (b)(4)(v) revised ...... 25318 moved ...... 24528 1926.1—1926.4 (Subpart A) Section 1926.200—1926.203 (Subpart G) authority citations re- Section authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.10—1926.16 (Subpart B) Sec- 1926.250—1926.252 (Subpart H) tion authority citations re- Section authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.20—1926.32 (Subpart C) Sec- 1926.300—1926.305 (Subpart I) Sec- tion authority citations re- tion authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.50—1926.57 (Subpart D) Sec- 1926.350—1926.354 (Subpart J) Sec- tion authority citations re- tion authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.50—1926.58 (Subpart D) Au- 1926.351 (d)(5) revised ...... 25318 thority citation added ...... 22756 1926.400—1926.405 (Subpart K) 1926.55 (c) revised; eff. 7–21–86 ...... 22756 Section authority citations re- (c) revised ...... 37007 moved ...... 24526 1926.58 Added; eff. in part 7–21–86 and effective date pending in Authority citation added...... 24528 part ...... 22756 1926.400—1926.449 (Subpart K) Re- Appendix I Note added; (o)(1) revised; authority citation vised; deferred in part to 4–21– added...... 25318 87 ...... 37004 1926.450—1926.452 (Subpart L) 1926.100—1926.107 (Subpart E) Section authority citations re- Section authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.500—1926.502 (Subpart M) 1926.150—1926.155 (Subpart F) Section authority citations re- Section authority citations removed ...... 24526 moved ...... 24526 Authority citation added...... 24528

633

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00039 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B 29 CFR (7–1–99 Edition)

29 CFR—Continued 51 FR 29 CFR—Continued 52 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued 1926.550—1926.556 (Subpart N) (b), (e)(6)(iv), (f)(2)(i), Section authority citations re- (h)(2)(iii)(B) Table D–4, (4)(ii), moved ...... 24526 (k)(3)(i), (iii) (F), (G), and (H), Authority citation added...... 24528 (o)(1) introductory text and 1926.600—1926.606 (Subpart O) (2)(i) and Appendixes A, B, C, Section authority citations re- and E through H amended; moved ...... 24526 (k)(3)(ii) revised...... 17755 Authority citation added...... 24528 OMB number ...... 17756 1926.650—1926.653 (Subpart P) 1926.59 Added ...... 31877 Section authority citations re- OMB number ...... 46080 moved ...... 24526 1926.550 (b)(2) revised ...... 36382 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.552 (c)(15) revised ...... 36382 1926.700—1926.702 (Subpart Q) 1926.903 (e) revised ...... 36382 Section authority citations removed ...... 24526 1988 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.750—1926.752 (Subpart R) 29 CFR 53 FR Section authority citations re- Page moved ...... 24526 Chapter XVII Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.58 Partial deferral extended 1926.800—1926.804 (Subpart S) Sec- to 7–21–89; Appendix I Note re- tion authority citations revised...... 27346 moved ...... 24526 (c), (e) (1) and (2), (f)(1) (ii) and Authority citation added...... 24528 (iii) and (2) (ii) and (iii), (f)(4), 1926.803 (j)(3) revised ...... 25318 (g)(1)(i) introductory text and 1926.850—1926.860 (Subpart T) (ii), (3), (h)(1)(iii), (i) (1) and Section authority citations re- (2), (j)(1)(iii), (k)(2)(vi)(A) and moved ...... 24526 (3)(i), (m)(1)(i), (n)(1)(i) and Authority citation added...... 24528 (o)(2) revised; (k)(1)(i) and 1926.900—1926.914 (Subpart U) (o)(1) amended (effective date Section authority citations re- pending in part) ...... 35627 moved ...... 24526 Technical correction ...... 37080 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.59 Note added; OMB num- 1926.950—1926.960 (Subpart V) ber...... 15035 Section authority citations re- Revision at 52 FR 31877 deferred moved ...... 24526 ...... 27679 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.302 (e) heading, (1), and (12) 1926.1000—1926.1003 (Subpart W) corrected; CFR correction ...... 36009 Section authority citations re- 1926.550—1926.556 (Subpart N) Au- moved ...... 24526 thority citation revised ...... 29139 Authority citation added...... 24528 1926.550 (g) added ...... 29139 1926.1050—1926.1051 (Subpart X) Technical correction ...... 35953 Section authority citations re- 1926.700—1926.706 (Subpart Q) Re- moved ...... 24526 vised; eff. 8–15–88 ...... 22643 Authority citation added...... 24528 1989 1987 29 CFR 54 FR 29 CFR 52 FR Page Page Chapter XVII Chapter XVII 1926.58 (f) (2), (3), (6), (h)(3)(i), (k) 1926.50—1926.59 (Subpart D) Au- (3) and (4), (m) and (n) amended thority citation revised ...... 31877 (OMB number) ...... 29546 1926.55 (d) added ...... 46312 (f)(4) redesignated as (f)(4)(i); 1926.58 Partial deferral extended (f)(4)(ii) added; (g)(2)(iii) re- to 7–21–88; Appendix I Note removed...... 52028 vised...... 15723 Note revised ...... 30705

634

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00040 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B List of CFR Sections Affected

29 CFR—Continued 54 FR 1991 Page 29 CFR 56 FR Chapter XVII—Continued Page 1926.59 Note removed; OMB num- Chapter XVII ber ...... 6888 1926.58 Note revised ...... 43700 Amended (OMB numbers) ...... 24334 1926.1050 (b) corrected...... 2585 Effective date note correctly re- 1926.1052 (c)(5) corrected ...... 2585, 5061 moved...... 49279 (c)(1) revised ...... 41794 1926.250 Amended (OMB num- 1926.1053 (a)(5), (6)(i) and (20)(v) bers) ...... 24334 and (vi) corrected ...... 2585 1926.404 Amended (OMB num- (a)(3) revised...... 41794 bers) ...... 24334 1926.500—1926.502 (Subpart M) Au- 1992 thority citation revised ...... 45959 29 CFR 57 FR 1926.550 (g)(3)(i)(D) through (G) Page redesignated as (g)(3)(ii)(D) Chapter XVII and (g)(3)(i) (D) through (F) ...... 15406 1926.50—1926.63 (Subpart D) Au- Amended (OMB numbers) ...... 24334 thority citation revised ...... 42452 1926.650—1926.652 (Subpart P) Re- 1926.58 Note revised ...... 7878 vised...... 45959 Heading, (a)(1) through (6), (b), Effective date delayed ...... 53055 (c)(1), (d), (e)(1), (2), (6)(iii), 1926.704 (b) revised ...... 41088 (f)(1)(i), (2)(i), (ii), (iii), (7)(i), 1926.800—1926.804 (Subpart S) (ii), (g)(1)(i)(D), (2)(i), (ii), Heading and authority cita- (h)(2) Table D–4, (i)(1), (2)(i), tion revised; eff. 8–1–89 ...... 23850 (ii), (j)(1)(iii), (2)(i), (iii)(A), 1926.800 Revised; eff. 8–1–89...... 23850 (k)(1)(i), (2)(i), (v), (vi)(A), (B), (3)(i), (iii)(A) through (D), 1990 (l)(1), (m)(1)(i), (2)(i)(B), (4)(i)(A), (C), (4)(ii), (n)(1)(i), 29 CFR 55 FR (ii)(C), (2)(i), (ii)(B), (D) and Page Appendixes A, B, H, I and J Chapter XVII amended; (k)(1)(iii), (2)(iv) and 1926.58 (j)(3), (k)(1)(iv), (3)(iii)(I), Note removed ...... 24331 (J), (4)(iii), (m)(4)(i)(D), (o)(3), (n)(2)(ii)(B) corrected...... 29119 and Appendix J added; (p)(2) re- 1926.60 Added ...... 35681 vised ...... 3732 OMB number ...... 49649 (k)(4)(iii) OMB numbers ap- 1926.63 Added ...... 42452 Appendixes A through F added proved; eff. to 4–30–93 ...... 34710 ...... 42399, 42452 Note revised ...... 50687 OMB number ...... 49272 1926.300—1926.305 (Subpart I) Au- thority citation revised ...... 42328 1926.305 (b) removed ...... 42328 1993 1926.450—1926.452 (Subpart L) 29 CFR 58 FR Heading revised ...... 47687 Page 1926.450 Removed...... 47687 Chapter XVII 1926.452 (a) removed ...... 47687 1926.20 (c), (d) and (e) added...... 35078 1926.500—1926.502 (Subpart M) 1926.32 (g) through (r) redesig- Heading revised ...... 47687 nated as (h) through (s); new (g) added...... 35078 1926.500 (e) and (f)(2) removed ...... 47687 1926.33 Added ...... 35078 1926.501 Removed...... 47687 1926.34 Added ...... 35083 1926.700—1926.706 (Subpart Q) Au- 1926.35 Added ...... 35083 thority citation revised ...... 42328 1926.50—1926.63 (Subpart D) Au- 1926.700 (b)(9) added...... 42328 thority citation amended ...... 26627 1926.705 Revised ...... 42328 1926.50—1926.66 (Subpart D) Au- 1926.1050—1926.1060 (Subpart X) thority citation revised ...... 35310 Revised ...... 47687 1926.50 (g) added ...... 35084

635

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00041 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B 29 CFR (7–1–99 Edition)

29 CFR—Continued 58 FR 29 CFR—Continued 58 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued 1926.51 (a)(6), (d)(2), (f)(2), (3), (4) 1926.306 Added ...... 35176 and (g) through (i) added; (d) 1926.307 Added ...... 35176 and (f) redesignated as (d)(1) 1926.350 (a)(10), (11) and (12) and (f)(1) ...... 35084 added...... 35179 1926.53 (c) through (r) added; OMB 1926.353 (b)(3) added...... 35179 number...... 35084 1926.416 (a)(4), (f) and (g) added...... 35179 (a) and (b) amended ...... 35310 1926.417 (d) added ...... 35181 1926.55 (a) amended; Appendix A 1926.450—1926.453 (Subpart L) Au- added...... 35089 thority citation revised ...... 35310 1926.57 (f) through (i) added ...... 35099 1926.451 (a)(22), (23) and (24) 1926.62 Added; interim ...... 26627 added...... 35182 OMB number ...... 34218 (y)(9) and (11) amended ...... 35310 1926.63 Appendixes A and C cor- 1926.453 Added ...... 35182 rected...... 21781 1926.550 (a)(19) added ...... 35183 Appendixes E and F corrected .....21782 1926.600 (a)(7) added...... 35183 (a)(6) correctly added; (b), 1926.602 (c)(1)(vii) and (viii) (f)(5)(i), (g)(2)(i) Table 1, added...... 35183 (l)(1)(i)(A), (3)(i)(B), (4)(iv), 1926.800—1926.804 (Subpart S) Au- (4)(v)(A) and (B), (6)(iv), (8)(ii) thority citation revised ...... 35310 and (m)(4)(iii)(H) corrected...... 21787 1926.800 (q)(8)(iv) correctly des- 1926.64 Added ...... 35115 ignated...... 35311 1926.65 Added ...... 35129 1926.800—1926.804 (Subpart S) Ap- 1926.66 Added ...... 35149 pendix A amended...... 35311 1926.95 Added ...... 35152 1926.900—1926.914 (Subpart U) Au- 1926.96 Added ...... 35152 thority citation revised ...... 35310 1926.97 Added ...... 35152 1926.900 (s) and (t) added ...... 35183 1926.98 Added; OMB number ...... 35159 1926.902 (a) amended...... 35311 1926.102 (a)(6), (7) and (8) added...... 35160 1926.904 (a) amended...... 35311 1926.103 (d) through (i) added; 1926.905 (u) added ...... 35184 OMB number ...... 35160 1926.914 (aa) added...... 35184 1926.150 (c)(1)(xi) through (xiv) (b) amended ...... 35311 added...... 35162 1926.1050 Amended ...... 35184 1926.152 (b)(5) and (h) through (k) 1926.1071—1926.1092 (Subpart Y) added...... 35162 added; OMB numbers ...... 35184 1926.153 (a)(3), (m), (n) and (o) 1926.1102—1926.1148 (Subpart Z) added...... 35170 added...... 35190 1926.156—1926.157 Undesignated 1926.1147 Appendix D corrected .....40468 center heading and sections 1926 Appendix A added ...... 35305 added...... 35171 1926.158—1926.159 Undesignated center heading and sections 1994 added...... 35172 29 CFR 59 FR 1926.200 (c)(3) Added ...... 35173 Page 1926.250 (c) and (d) added...... 35173 Chapter XVII 1926.251 (a)(5), (6), (b)(6)(i), (ii), 1926.50—1926.66 (Subpart D) Au- (c)(6) through (15), (d)(3) thority citation revised ...36700, 43275 through (6) and (e)(3) through 1926.58 Redesignated as (8) added ...... 35173 1926.1101...... 41131 1926.300 (b)(3) through (7) 1926.59 (b)(6)(ii) revised; (c) and added...... 35175 (g)(7)(iv) amended...... 65948 1926.302 (b)(10) added ...... 35175 Revised ...... 6170 1926.303 (b) existing text des- Effective date stayed 3–11–94 ignated as (b)(1); (b)(2) and (e) through 8–11–94; note added ...... 17479 added...... 35175 1926.61 Added ...... 36700 1926.304 (g) through (i) added ...... 35175 1926.63 Redesignated as 1926.305 (d) added ...... 35176 1926.1127...... 215

636

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00042 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B List of CFR Sections Affected

29 CFR—Continued 59 FR 29 CFR—Continued 60 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued 1926.65 Appendix B amended; un- Regulation at 59 FR 40729 with- designated appendix added...... 43275 drawn ...... 39255 1926.95—1926.107 (Subpart E) Au- 1926.105 Regulation at 59 FR 40729 thority citation revised ...... 40729 eff. date stayed to 8–6–95...... 5131 1926.104 Removed...... 40729 1926.105 (a) redesignated as Regulation at 59 FR 40729 with- 1926.753; removed ...... 40729 drawn ...... 39255 1926.107 (b), (c) and (f) removed ...... 40729 1926.107 Regulation at 59 FR 40729 1926.250—1926.252 (Subpart H) Au- eff. date stayed to 8–6–95...... 5131 thority citation revised ...... 40729 Regulation at 59 FR 40729 with- 1926.250 (b)(2) revised ...... 40729 drawn ...... 39255 1926.500—1926.503 (Subpart M) Re- 1926.500 (a)(2)(iii) and (4) revised; vised...... 40730 (a)(3)(iv) added...... 39255 1926.550 (c)(2) and (g)(4)(i)(C) re- 1926.753 Regulation at 59 FR 40729 vised...... 40730 eff. date stayed to 8–6–95...... 5131 1926.651 Heading and (l) re- Regulation at 59 FR 40729 with- vised...... 40730 drawn ...... 39255 1926.701 (f)(1) designation and (2) removed ...... 40730 1926.1101—1926.1148 (Subpart Z) 1926.750—1926.752 (Subpart R) Au- Authority citation revised ...... 9625, thority citation revised ...... 40730 33345 1926.753 Redesignated from 1926.1101 (q) revised ...... 9625, 33345 1926.105(a); heading added ...... 40729 (b) corrected ...... 33995 1926.950—1926.960 (Subpart V) Au- (b), (c)(1), (2), (d)(3), (e)(2), (4), thority citation revised ...... 40730 (f)(1)(i), (2)(i), (3)(iii), (4) head- 1926.951 (b)(4)(i) revised...... 40730 ing, (i), (g)(1)(ii) and (iii) cor- 1926.1101 Redesignated from rected; (f)(2)(ii), (g)(1)(i) and 1926.58...... 41131 (4)(ii)(A) correctly revised; Heading and (a) through (p) re- (f)(5) correctly redesignated as vised; (q) added; OMB number (f)(6); new (f)(5) correctly ...... 41132 added ...... 33996 Appendix A amended; Appendix B revised...... 41144 (g)(4)(ii)(B), (5)(i) introductory Appendix D amended; Appendix text, (ii)(B)(4), (9), (iii) intro- F revised...... 41150 ductory text, (B)(1), (2), (iv) Appendix G removed; Appendix introductory text, (A)(2), H revised ...... 41152 (vi)(B)(3), (6)(ii), (iii), (7)(i), Appendix I amended; Appendix (ii) introductory text, (B), K added...... 41153 (iv), (8)(i) introductory text 1926.1127 Redesignated from and (F) corrected; (g)(5)(ii) in- 1926.63; (m)(4)(iii)(H), troductory text, (A)(2), (n)(1)(iii), (3)(iii), (5)(i) and (6) (iv)(B)(2), (vi)(B)(1), (8)(ii)(B) amended...... 215 and (D) correctly revised ...... 33997 (g)(8)(ii)(E), (H), (iii) introduc- 1995 tory text and (h)(1)(iii) cor- 29 CFR 60 FR rectly revised; (g)(8)(v)(A), Page (9)(iii), (10) introductory text, Chapter XVII (h)(2)(i), (iii) Table 1, (3)(iv), 1926 Technical correction ...... 11194 (4)(ii), (i)(1) and (j)(1) intro- 1926.104 Regulation at 59 FR 40729 ductory text corrected; (g)(11) eff. date stayed to 8–6–95...... 5131 correctly added...... 33998

637

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00043 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B 29 CFR (7–1–99 Edition)

29 CFR—Continued 60 FR 29 CFR—Continued 61 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued (k) note and (1) through (7) cor- 1926.50 OMB number ...... 5510 rectly redesignated as (k)(1) 1926.53 OMB number ...... 5510 and (2) through (8); (j)(1)(i)(B) (c) through (r) removed; note introductory text, (C), (2)(iii), added ...... 31431 new (k)(1), new (3)(i), new 1926.55 Appendix A amended ...... 9249, (5)(i), new (ii) introductory 9250, 56856 text, new (A), new (B), new (6), 1926.57 (f)(8), (g)(5)(vii), (viii), (x), new (8)(vi) introductory text, illustrations, (i)(2)(i) and new (B) and new (vii) cor- (4)(iii)(A)(2) table amended...... 9250 rected; new (k)(2)(i) and new 1926.59 Revised ...... 31431 (7)(ii) correctly revised; 1926.60 OMB number ...... 5510 (k)(5)(iii) and (7)(iii) correctly Appendixes A, B and C revised .....31431 added ...... 33999 Appendixes D and E revised ...... 31432 (k)(8) and (9) correctly redesignated as (k)(9) and (10); 1926.61 Revised ...... 31432 (l)(3)(ii), (iii) and (iv) cor- 1926.62 OMB number ...... 5510 rectly designated; new (k)(9), 1926.65 OMB number ...... 5510 (l)(4) introductory text and 1926.95—1926.107 (Subpart E) Au- (m)(1)(i) correctly revised; thority citation revised...... 9250 (l)(2), (3)(i), new (3)(iii) and 1926.97 Removed ...... 31432 (4)(ii) corrected...... 34000 1926.98 OMB number ...... 5510 (m)(1)(ii) heading, (3)(i), Removed...... 31432 (n)(1)(i), (4), (5), (o)(3) intro- 1926.103 OMB number ...... 5510 ductory text, (o)(3)(i) intro- (a)(2) amended...... 9250 ductory text, (E), (F), (H), (I), 1926.150 (c)(1)(xi) through (xiv) re- (4)(i), (ii) and Appendix B cor- moved ...... 31432 rected; (m)(2)(i)(B) correctly 1926.156 Undesignated center revised...... 34001 heading and section re- Appendixes B, F, H and K cor- moved ...... 31432 rected ...... 34002 1926.157 Removed...... 31432 (b) corrected; eff. 7–13–95...... 36044 1926.158 Undesignated center (g)(7)(iii) redesignated as heading and section re- (g)(7)(ii)(C); new (g)(7)(iii) and moved ...... 31432 (11)(vi) added; (g)(8)(iv)(B) re- 1926.159 Removed...... 31432 moved; (g)(8)(iv)(C), (11) intro- 1926.250 OMB number ...... 5510 ductory text and (h)(2)(v) re- 1926.300 (b)(7) amended; (b)(8) and vised ...... 50412 (9) added...... 9250 (o)(4)(i) revised ...... 50413 1926.304 (h)(1) amended ...... 9251 1926.400—1926.432 (Subpart K) Au- 1996 thority citation revised...... 9251 1926.403 OMB number ...... 5510 29 CFR 61 FR Page 1926.404 OMB number ...... 5510 Chapter XVII 1926.405 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1—1926.4 (Subpart A) Au- 1926.407 OMB number ...... 5510 thority citation revised...... 5509 1926.408 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.5 Added (OMB number)...... 5509 1926.416 (f)(6), (g)(2)(iii)(B) and (7) 1926.20—1926.35 (Subpart C) Au- amended ...... 9251 thority citation revised ...... 31431 (a)(4), (f) and (g) removed...... 41738 1926.30 (b) revised ...... 9249 1926.417 (d)(1) amended ...... 9251 1926.31 (a)(1) and (2) amended ...... 9249 (d) removed...... 41739 1926.33 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.450—1926.454 (Subpart L) Re- (c)(13)(i) amended...... 9249 vised...... 46104 Revised...... 31431 Appendix E corrected ...... 59832 1926.50—1926.66 (Subpart D) Au- 1926.451 (a)(2) corrected; (c)(2) thority citation amended ...... 31431 correctly revised ...... 59831

638

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00044 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B List of CFR Sections Affected

29 CFR—Continued 61 FR 29 CFR—Continued 61 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued (b)(2)(i) note added; (f)(6) cor- 1926.1108 OMB number ...... 5510 rected; (d)(13) correctly re- Revised ...... 9255, 31433 vised ...... 59832 1926.1109 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.453 OMB number pending ...... 46117 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 (b)(2)(v) note correctly added...... 59832 1926.1110 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.550 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1926.556 Removed...... 46131 1926.1111 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.703 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1926.800 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1112 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.803 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1926.1000—1926.1003 (Subpart W) 1926.1113 OMB number ...... 5510 Authority citation revised ...... 9251 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1926.1002 Heading revised; (c) 1926.1114 OMB number ...... 5510 through (i), (j)(3) and (k) re- Revised ...... 9255, 31433 moved; (a)(1) amended...... 9251 1926.1115 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1003 (c) through (g) removed; Revised ...... 9255, 31433 (a)(1) amended...... 9251 1926.1116 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1071—1926.1091 (Subpart Y) Revised ...... 9255, 31433 Authority citation added ...... 9252 1926.1117 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1071 Revised ...... 31432 Revised...... 31433 1926.1072 Revised ...... 31432 1926.1118 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1076 Revised ...... 31432 Revised...... 31433 1926.1080 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1127 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised...... 31432 Appendixes A through D revised 1926.1081 OMB number ...... 5510 ...... 31433 Revised...... 31432 Appendixes E and F revised ...... 31434 1926.1082 Revised ...... 31432 1926.1128 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1083 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised...... 31434 Revised...... 31432 1926.1129 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1084 Revised ...... 31432 Revised...... 31434 1926.1085 Revised ...... 31432 1926.1144 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1086 Revised ...... 31432 Revised...... 31434 1926.1087 Revised ...... 31432 1926.1145 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1090 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised...... 31434 Revised...... 31432 1926.1147 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1091 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised...... 31434 Revised...... 31432 1926.1148 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1092 Revised ...... 31432 Revised...... 31434 1926.1071—1926.1092 (Subpart Y) 1926 Appendix A amended ...... 9255 Appendix A revised ...... 31432 Appendix B revised ...... 31433 1926.1100—1926.1148 (Subpart Z) 1997 Authority citation revised ...... 9252, 29 CFR 62 FR 31433, 56856 Page 1926.1101 OMB number ...... 5510 Chapter XVII (h)(2)(iii), (k)(6), (8)(vii), (9)(iii), 1926 Meeting and signing cere- (iv) and (m)(1)(i)(A) revised ...... 43458 mony...... 37134 1926.1102 Revised ...... 31433 1926.55 Appendix A amended ...... 1619 1926.1103 OMB number ...... 5510 1926.1152 Added ...... 1619 Revised ...... 9252, 31433 1926.1104 OMB number ...... 5510 Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1998 1926.1106 OMB number ...... 5510 29 CFR 63 FR Revised ...... 9255, 31433 Page 1926.1107 OMB number ...... 5510 Chapter XVII Revised ...... 9255, 31433 1926 Meeting...... 39029

639

VerDate 1899 05:28 Jul 22, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00045 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8060 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX 183110B PsN: 183110B 29 CFR (7–1–99 Edition)

29 CFR—Continued 63 FR 29 CFR—Continued 63 FR Page Page Chapter XVII—Continued Chapter XVII—Continued 1926 Technical correction; CFR 1926.800—1926.804 (Subpart S) Au- correction...... 1919 thority citation revised...... 1297 1926.5 Table amended (OMB num- 1926.800 (g)(2) revised...... 1297 bers) ...... 3814, 13340, 17094 1926.900—1926.914 (Subpart U) Au- 1926.20—1926.35 (Subpart C) Au- thority citation revised ...... 33469 thority citation revised ...... 33468 1926.906 (q) revised; eff. 8–17–98...... 33469 1926.31 (a) revised; eff. 8–17–98 ...... 33468 1926.1100—1926.1152 (Subpart Z) 1926.50—1926.66 (Subpart D) Au- Authority citation revised ...... 1298, thority citation revised.....1295, 33469 35138 1926.50 (d)(1), (2) and (f) revised; 1926.1101 (h) revised; Appendix C Appendix A added; eff. 8–17– removed...... 1298 98...... 33469 (h)(3)(iv) revised ...... 20099 1926.57 (f)(1)(ii), (5)(i), (iii), (6), (a)(8) added; (g)(11) introductory (h)(6)(iii)(A) and (i)(9)(vi) re- text revised ...... 35138 vised ...... 1296 1926.1127 (g) revised; Appendix C 1926.60 (i) revised; Appendix E re- removed...... 1298 moved ...... 1296 1926.62 (f) revised; Appendix B amended; Appendix D re- 1999 moved ...... 1296 Regulations published from January 1, 1926.95—1926.107 (Subpart E) Au- 1999, through July 1, 1999) thority citation revised...... 1297 1926.103 Revised ...... 1297 29 CFR 64 FR 1926.150—1926.155 (Subpart F) Au- Page thority citation revised ...... 33469 Chapter XVII 1926.152 (a)(1) revised; eff. 8–17– 1926 Technical correction ...... 22552 98...... 33469 1926.1—1926.5 (Subpart A) Author- 1926.600—1926.606 (Subpart O) Au- ity citation revised ...... 18810 thority citation revised ...... 66274 1926.5 Table amended (OMB num- 1926.602 (d) added ...... 66274 bers) ...... 18810

640

VerDate 1899 11:56 Aug 01, 1999 Jkt 183110 PO 00000 Frm 00046 Fmt 8060 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\183110B.XXX pfrm08 PsN: 183110B